NCVS Interviewing Manual for Field Representatives

U S C E N S U S B U R E A U

Helping You Make Informed Decisions

NCVS-550

(2/2003)

National Crime Victimization Survey

NCVS

Interviewing Manual

for

Field Representatives

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Table of Contents

Table of Contents

PART A

The National Crime Victimization Survey and You

Chapter

Title Page

1 An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey .....A1-1

Topic

1 Purpose and Sponsor .............................A1-2

2 Historical Overview .............................A1-5

3 Sample Design ..................................A1-9

4 Data Products and Their Uses .......................A1-12

2 Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview . . A2-1

Topic

1 Introducing the Survey and Its Authorization ...........A2-2

2 Confidentiality ..................................A2-6

3 Eligible Respondents ..............................A2-9

4 Maintaining Respondent Rapport ....................A2-20

5 Answering Respondents' Questions ...................A2-25

6 General Interviewing Techniques ....................A2-31

7 Closing the Interview and "Thank You" Letters .........A2-48

3 General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures .......A3-1

Topic

1 Basic Survey Procedures ...........................A3-2

2 Monthly Tasks ..................................A3-9

3 Daily Tasks .....................................A3-12

4 Specific Household Procedures ......................A3-15

4 Your Job Duties and Performance Standards .................A4-1

Topic

1 Basic Field Duties ................................A4-2

2 Additional Duties.................................A4-5

3 Performance Standards ............................A4-7

Table of Contents NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Table of Contents

Chapter Title Page

4 Your Job Duties and Performance Standards (Continued)

Topic

4 Field Evaluations--Observation and Reinterview ........A4-12

5 Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews .....................A5-1

Topic

1 Identifying the Method of Interview ..................A5-2

2 Qualifications for Using the Personal Visit Method ......A5-3

3 Qualifications for Using the Telephone Method .........A5-8

4 Instructions for Conducting Telephone Interviews .......A5-10

5 Telephone Interviewing Skills .......................A5-17

6 Noninterviews ........................................A6-1

Topic

1 Overview of Noninterview Types and Procedures .......A6-2

2 Type A Noninterview Categories.....................A6-8

3 Type B Noninterview Categories.....................A6-17

4 Type C Noninterview Categories.....................A6-22

5 Control Card Entries for Noninterviews ...............A6-26

6 Type Z Noninterview Persons .......................A6-30

7 Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal

Instructions............................................A7-1

Topic

1 Description of Materials ...........................A7-2

2 Materials Kept Month to Month .....................A7-12

3 Materials Supplied Monthly.........................A7-14

4 Checking and Acknowledging Receipt of Materials ......A7-15

5 Mailing Completed Work ..........................A7-16

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Table of Contents

Table of Contents

iii

PART B

How to Complete and Edit National Crime Victimization Forms

Chapter

Title Page

1 Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card ....................B1-1

Topic

1 General Instructions...............................B1-2

2 Completing Items 1 Through 11 (Unit Identification).....B1-6

3 Completing Items 12 Through 15 (Household Roster/

Housing Unit Coverage) ...........................B1-35

4 Completing Items 16 Through 22 (Personal

Characteristics) ..................................B1-54

5 Completing Items 23 Through 25 (Race/Hispanic Origin/

Household Composition Changes) ...................B1-70

6 Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use of Telephone/

Building Characteristics/Household Income) ...........B1-81

7 Completing Items 30 Through Table X (Record of Visits

and Telephone Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/

Bounding Information/Noninterview Contact Person/

Determining EXTRA Units) ........................B1-93

2 Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire ..........B2-1

Topic

1 General Instructions...............................B2-2

2 Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover Page) ..........B2-6

3 Completing Items 17 Through 28 (Personal

Characteristics) ..................................B2-22

4 Completing Items 29 Through Check Item E (Mobility/

Businesses/Theft/Break-ins/Motor Vehicles/Specific

Locations/Use of Weapons/Known Offenders/Unwanted

Sexual Acts/Catch-all Questions/Computer Crime/

Proxy Help) .....................................B2-27

5 Completing Items 46 Through Check Item I (Vandalism/

Crimes During Vandalism/Hate Crimes/Transcribing

Number of Incidents/Employment Questions)...........B2-66

Table of Contents NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Table of Contents

Chapter Title Page

3 Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report ..............B3-1

Topic

1 General Instructions...............................B3-3

2 Completing Items 1 Through 23 (Cover Page/Location of

Incident/Illegal Entry/Use of Weapon) ................B3-9

3 Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/Threats) ......B3-64

4 Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/Medical Care/

Protecting Self or Property/Results of Actions/Presence

of Others/Injuries to Others Present) ..................B3-83

5 Completing Check Item G Through Item 87 (Use of

Physical Force/Characteristics of the Offender(s)) .......B3-102

6 Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/Items Stolen/

Value of Stolen Property/Repair or Replacement of Stolen

Property/Cost of Repair or Replacement) ..............B3-130

7 Completing Items 115 Through 134 (Police

Notification/Reasons for Reporting or Not Reporting

Incident to Police/Police Response to Notification/Contact

With Authorities) ................................B3-167

8 Completing Items 135 Through 153 (Activity During

Incident/Employment Status at Time of Incident/Type of

Job/Lost Work Time Due to Injuries/Lost Pay Due to

Incident) ........................................B3-190

9 Completing Check Item U Through Check Item Z (Series

of Crimes/Hate Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incident) . . B3-217

4 Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record ...............B4-1

Topic

1 General Instructions...............................B4-2

2 Items 1 Through 10 ...............................B4-4

5 Editing Procedures ......................................B5-1

Topic

1 General Editing Instructions ........................B5-2

2 Editing the Control Card ...........................B5-4

3 Editing the Basic Screen Questionnaire ................B5-9

4 Editing the Crime Incident Report ....................B5-12

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter Title Page

5 Editing Procedures (Continued)

Topic

5 Editing the Noninterview Record ....................B5-13

6 Office Edits and Qualified Edit Field Representatives ....B5-15

PART C

Survey Concepts

Note: Coverage concepts are included in Chapter 7, General Coverage Procedures, of the

Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8.

Chapter Title Page

1 Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts ..........C1-1

Topic Title

Overview of Chapter 1...................................C1-2

Reference Period .......................................C1-3

Household Membership..................................C1-8

Reference Person .......................................C1-15

Household and Individual Respondents ......................C1-20

Proxy Interview ........................................C1-26

Bounding Interviews ....................................C1-34

Out-of-Scope Incident ...................................C1-37

2 Screening for Crimes ....................................C2-1

Topic Title

Overview of Chapter 2...................................C2-2

Crime Measured by the NCVS ............................C2-3

Threats ...............................................C2-7

Vandalism ............................................C2-10

Recognizable/Unrecognizable Businesses....................C2-12

Ownership of Motor Vehicles .............................C2-20

Months/Years Living at Address ...........................C2-23

Frequency of Household Moves ...........................C2-27

Computer-Related Incidents ..............................C2-29

Table of Contents NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Table of Contents

Chapter Title Page

3 Reporting Crime Incidents ...............................C3-1

Topic Title

Overview of Chapter 3...................................C3-3

Series of Crimes........................................C3-4

Right to Legally Enter Home/Lodging.......................C3-9

Restricted Areas/Areas Open to the Public ...................C3-12

Illegal Entry (With or Without Force) .......................C3-15

Presence During an Incident ..............................C3-20

Weapons ..............................................C3-26

Rape/Unwanted Sexual Contact ...........................C3-33

Theft/Attempted Theft of Cash/Property.....................C3-41

Value of Stolen Property/Methods Used to Determine ..........C3-49

Property Ownership .....................................C3-52

Recovered Money and/or Property .........................C3-56

Medical Care ..........................................C3-60

Medical Expenses ......................................C3-62

Race of Offenders ......................................C3-64

Other Victimized Household Members ......................C3-66

Damage to Property During an Incident .....................C3-69

Job/Business at Time of the Incident........................C3-74

Major Activity During Week of the Incident..................C3-76

Incident Occurred at Work Site ............................C3-79

Incident Involved a Police Officer ..........................C3-81

Hate Crimes ...........................................C3-84

Writing Summary Reports ................................C3-86

Type of Industry and Occupation ...........................C3-95

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Table of Contents

Table of Contents

vii

APPENDIXES

Note: Procedures for interviewing group quarters units are covered in Chapters 2, 4, and 5 of

the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8.

Appendix Title Page

A Summary of Monthly Field Operations for Field

Representatives ........................................APPA-1

B National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures for

Replacement Households, EXTRA Units, and Merged Units .....APPB-1

INDEXES

Index Title Page

1 Subject Index ..........................................IND1-1

2 Item Number Index .....................................IND2-1

Table of Contents NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Table of Contents

viii

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-1

Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Purpose and Sponsor A1-2

2 Historical Overview A1-5

3 Sample Design A1-9

4 Data Products and Their Uses A1-12

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-2

Topic 1. Purpose and Sponsor

Primary Purpose

The primary purpose of the National Crime Victimization

Survey (NCVS) is to obtain, from respondents who are

12 years of age and older, an accurate and up-to-date

measure of the amount and kinds of crime committed

during a specific six-month reference period. The NCVS

also collects detailed information about specific incidents

of criminal victimization that the respondent reports for the

six-month reference period.

Secondary Purpose

NCVS also serves as a vehicle for obtaining supplemental

data on crime and the criminal justice system, including:

! Attitudes toward crime and police officers,

! Crime incidents in our schools, and

! Nonfatal workplace violence.

This supplemental information is collected periodically,

along with the standard NCVS data.

Survey Sponsor

NCVS is sponsored by the Bureau of Justice Statistics

(BJS), which is part of the U.S. Department of Justice. At

this time, it is the largest ongoing statistical survey

sponsored by BJS.

BJS is responsible for collecting, analyzing, publishing, and

disseminating statistical information on crime, its

perpetrators and victims, and the operation of justice

systems at all levels of government. BJS is also responsible

for providing timely and accurate data about crime and the

administration of justice to the President, Congress, other

government officials, and the general public.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-3

BJS also supports and manages two clearinghouses which

people can call toll-free to obtain information and

publications. They are:

! The Bureau of Justice Statistics Clearinghouse at

1-800-732-3277 and

! The Drugs and Crime Data Center and Clearinghouse at

1-800-666-3332.

BJS also has statistics available on the Internet. Their web

site address is www.ojp.usdoj.gov/bjs/.

To succeed in providing timely and reliable statistics on

crime and its impact on society, BJS contracts with the

Bureau of the Census to conduct the NCVS, which is the

main source of information for measuring crime and

assessing its impact.

NCVS vs. Police Reports

Most estimates on the amount and nature of crime are

derived from police reports. However, evidence has proven

that a significant number of crimes are never reported to the

police. Victims have cited some of the following reasons

for failing to inform the police about crimes:

! Victim felt that nothing could be done.

! Victim thought that the crime incident was not

important enough to report to the police.

! Victim decided that the incident was too private or

personal.

! Victim felt that the police would not want to be

bothered with the incident.

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-4

Police departments often lack the personnel or technical

resources necessary to record and publish the kind of

detailed data from crime victims that are required for

comprehensive criminal justice planning, evaluation, or

analysis. The Bureau of the Census has both the personnel

and the technical resources to conduct and supply reliable

and detailed statistics on victims of crime. Your work as an

NCVS field representative will allow us to succeed in

providing BJS with the type of crime victimization data that

police reports cannot.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-5

Topic 2. Historical Overview

How the NCVS Began

Between January 1971 and July 1972, the Census Bureau

conducted the first nationwide victimization survey as a

supplement to the already established Quarterly Household

Survey (QHS). During that period, only minor changes

were made to the survey questions in an effort to improve

data quality.

In July 1972, the National Crime Survey (NCS) became a

separate national sample survey as a pioneering effort. The

first sponsor of the NCS was the Law Enforcement

Assistance Administration (LEAA). This survey began

when the LEAA received a mandate set forth by

Section 515b of Public Law 93-83 to collect, evaluate,

publish, and disseminate information on the progress of law

enforcement within the United States.

The NCS was intended to complement the crime

information that the FBI reports annually to law

enforcement agencies in the Uniform Crime Reports. The

NCS is designed to provide a detailed picture of crime

incidents, regardless of whether they were reported to the

police. This survey also provides a picture of crime victims

and crime trends as seen from the victim's perspective.

In December 1979, NCS was transferred to the Bureau of

Justice Statistics, U.S. Department of Justice. During that

same year, the first major attempt was made to improve the

quality and utility of the NCS data.

Improving Accuracy and

Usefulness

In the mid-1970s, the National Academy of Sciences

evaluated the accuracy and usefulness of the NCS.

Although the NCS was effective in measuring crime, they

did pinpoint certain aspects of the survey that could be

improved. During 1979 to 1985, a group of experts in

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-6

criminology, survey design, and statistics conducted a

detailed study and testing of the NCS.

Their findings resulted in a survey redesign that would:

! Increase reporting of crime victimization, and

! Provide additional details on individual crime incidents.

The recommended changes were phased in as part of a two-

stage process--near-term and long-term. The "near-term"

changes were not substantial enough to affect the

comparability of the crime rates for previous years, and

these changes were implemented in July 1986. On the

other hand, the long-term changes have had a substantial

impact on the NCS crime rates. These long-term changes

were phased in gradually starting in 1989, and were fully

implemented by July 1993.

To achieve the redesign objectives, the following

improvements were made between 1986 and 1993:

! Better "short cue" screening questions were added to

stimulate respondent recall of incidents.

! More thorough descriptions of crime incidents were

added as an effort to help all respondents interpret NCS

concepts correctly.

! Computer-assisted telephone interviewing was

introduced to improve data collection for selected

sample segments.

! Specific questions about rape and sexual assaults were

added to improve measures of these crimes.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-7

! Screening questions were reworded and added to get a

better measure of domestic violence.

As part of all the redesign changes, BJS decided in late

1991 to rename the NCS to its current name, the National

Crime Victimization Survey.

Overview of Changes

Between 1999 and 2003

In January 1999, a series of hate crime questions were

added to the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, and the

NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report. In the NCVS-1, we are

trying to determine if there is any reason to suspect that an

act of vandalism was a hate crime or a crime of prejudice of

bigotry, while in the NCVS-2, we want to determine if

there is any reason to suspect the reported incident was a

hate crime or a crime of prejudice or bigotry.

In July 1999, a question asking whether the household’s

living quarters is located on an American Indian

Reservation or on American Indian Lands was added to the

household’s Control Card, NCVS-500. A similar question

was added to the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, asking if

the incident took place on an American Indian Reservation

or on American Indian Lands.

In July 2000, the lifestyle and home protection questions in

the NCVS-1 were deleted and the hate crime questions on

the NCVS-1 and NCVS -2 were revised. A new series of

disability questions were asked of persons who reported an

incident in the seventh enumeration period.

In January 2001, the new disability questions were asked in

the NCVS-2 of all persons reporting an incident.

In July 2001, a new series of computer crime questions

were added to the NCVS-1. Another change involved the

expansion of answer categories for the following NCVS-2

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-8

items: 10, 70, 84, and 158, along with the addition of

revised employment questions for the NCVS-2.

In January 2003, changes were made to the Control Card

items which ask about educational attainment, ethnicity,

and race.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-9

Topic 3. Sample Design

NCVS Sample Population

and Size

Any noninstitutionalized person who is 12 years of age or

older and lives in the United States is eligible for the

NCVS. Every 6 months, approximately 54,000 housing

units and other living quarters, such as college dormitories

and religious group dwellings, are designated for sample.

Persons who are not included in the scope of this survey

include:

! Crew members of merchant vessels,

! Armed Forces personnel living in military barracks,

and

! Institutionalized persons, such as correctional facility

inmates.

Primary Sampling Units

The households to be interviewed for the NCVS are

selected by scientific sampling methods from specific

sampling areas across the United States. We refer to these

sampling areas as Primary Sampling Units (PSUs).

All counties, minor civil divisions (MCDs), and

census county divisions (CCDs) are classified and grouped

together based on similar characteristics. These

characteristics include geographic region, population

density, rate of growth, population, principal industry, and

type of agriculture.

There are two main types of Primary Sampling Units

(PSUs)--stratification PSUs and field assignment PSUs.

In most states, stratification PSUs consist of one or more

adjoining counties and independent cities. In New England

and Hawaii, they could consist of one or more MCDs or

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-10

CCDs. MCDs and CCDs are portions of a state similar to a

county, but smaller in size.

In order for each FR to have a more manageable

assignment area, stratification PSUs are divided into

smaller field assignment PSUs. In most states, these field

assignment PSUs consist of one county.

Sample Unit Selection

Each stratification PSU is made up of four different

sampling frames--Unit, Permit, Group Quarters (GQ), and

Area. The NCVS selects sample units from each of these

sampling frames.

For the Unit and GQ frames, sample addresses come from

the 1990 census files. For the Permit frame, sample

addresses come from building permit data supplied to us

from building permit offices. For the Area frame, FRs

canvass sample blocks from the 1990 census files and

create address lists for these blocks. Then, the address lists

are used to select sample households to be interviewed for

the NCVS.

Interviewing Pattern

All sample housing units selected for the NCVS are divided

into six equal rotation groups. Each rotation group is

further divided into six panels. Each month, one panel

from each rotation group or one sixth of each rotation

group is selected for interviewing. As a result, a different

panel gets interviewed each month.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-11

Here's an example: In December 2002, we used Samples J20 and J21 to select cases for

NCVS interviewing. From Sample J20, cases will be assigned for interview from Panel 6 of

rotation groups 4, 5, and 6. From Sample J21, cases will be assigned for interview from

Panel 6 of rotation groups 1 through 4.

Sample!

! J20 J21

December 2002!

! 64 65 66 61 62 63 64

In this example, the "64" stands for "Panel 6, Rotation 4," "65" stands for "Panel 6,

Rotation 5," and so forth.

Over a 3-year period, sample housing units from each

rotation group are interviewed once every 6 months. Over

a 6-month period, a different panel of households gets

interviewed each month. Every 6 months, a new rotation

group enters the NCVS sample to replace an outgoing

rotation group whose 3-year interview cycle is complete.

FRs and CATI interviewers conduct a majority of their

NCVS interviews during the first 2 weeks of each month.

The initial interview with a sample household is always

conducted by personal visit and is used primarily to

establish a timeframe to avoid duplication of crimes during

subsequent interviews. Whenever possible, subsequent

NCVS interviews are conducted by telephone.

CATI Eligible PSUs

NCVS utilizes Computer-Assisted Telephone Interviewing

(CATI) for about 30 percent of the sample households.

Segments of PSUs are identified to determine if they

qualify for CATI interviewing. Our main goal is to have an

optimal workload for our field representatives.

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-12

Topic 4. Data Products and Their Uses

Types of NCVS Data

Products

All data that we collect for NCVS are tabulated in the form

of statistical summaries. No individuals who participate in

this survey can ever be identified from the statistical totals

that are released to the public.

Once we turn over these statistical summaries to the Bureau

of Justice Statistics, they have a special analysis group who

analyze the data and produce several types of publications

on an annual basis.

Some of the publications released from this survey include:

" Criminal Victimization in the United States

" Changes in Criminal Victimization

" Female Victims of Violent Crime

BJS routinely distributes copies of their publications to:

# State and regional planning agencies,

# Colleges and universities,

# Commercial and industrial groups,

# Citizen groups,

# Professional associations,

# Federal, state, city, and local police,

# Courts and correctional agencies, and

# Legislative bodies.

BJS also makes selected crime victimization data available

through the Internet.

In addition to BJS, the Census Bureau makes available full

sets of data tabulations to a variety of data users. These

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-13

tabulations include many tables that never make it into the

printed publications.

After the survey results have been modified to protect the

confidentiality of our respondents, both the Census Bureau

and the University of Michigan disseminate NCVS data

tape files. The University of Michigan uses a grant

awarded by BJS to release NCVS data in a format that

makes them more accessible to the general public, criminal

justice practitioners, and academic researchers.

Who Uses NCVS Data and

Why

Users of NCVS data cover a wide audience of groups and

persons who are all concerned about crime and crime

prevention. These users include:

! Researchers at academic, government, private, and

nonprofit research institutions;

! Community groups and government agencies;

! Law enforcement agencies; and

! Print and broadcast media.

Researchers use NCVS data to prepare reports, policy

recommendations, scholarly publications, testimony before

Congress, and documentation for use in courts.

NCVS data are used by researchers to explore the public

policy implications of victimization data. From a

policymaker's point of view, it is important to know the

effect, if any, police behavior, and the legal and

correctional systems have on crime levels.

Researchers also use the NCVS information to investigate:

! Why certain persons are victimized more than others,

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-14

! The characteristics of attempted versus actual

victimizations,

! The reasons why persons do not report crime

incidents to the police, and

! Victimization among juveniles, domestic violence,

gun-related crimes, multiple victimizations, and so

forth.

Community groups and government agencies use the

data to develop neighborhood watch and victim assistance

and compensation programs.

The NCVS produces several facts that are relevant to

projecting the costs of victim compensation programs.

After reviewing specific NCVS facts, it was revealed that

some of the eligibility restrictions for existing

compensation programs are not entirely relevant to the

types of people most likely to be victimized. This was

determined by examining data on age, employment status,

and family income of victims of personal crimes, together

with findings about victim/offender relationships in these

crimes.

Law enforcement agencies use the NCVS findings for

training purposes, and the findings can be seen in crime

prevention public service announcements and in crime

documentaries.

Law enforcement agencies in various cities also use NCVS

data to increase:

! Citizen cooperation with officials in deterring and

detecting crime,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 1

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-15

! Special police strike forces to combat those crimes

which the survey indicates as being most prevalent,

and

• Street and park lighting programs in those areas with

the highest reported crime rates.

Print and broadcast media regularly cite NCVS findings

when reporting on a host of crime-related topics.

Here are some examples of crime victimization highlights

that could be of interest to the print and broadcast media:

• The violent crime rate fell 10% between 2000 and

2001 due primarily to a significant decrease in the rate

of simple assault.

• The overall property crime rate fell 6% between 2000

and 2001 because of decreases in theft and household

burglary rates.

• Violent crimes were less likely to involve firearms in

2001 than in the period between 1993 and 1996.

Some other reasons why data users want the crime

victimization information produced from the NCVS

include:

• Planning for public education programs, police patrol

strategies, and new communities and housing

projects. This type of planning requires a knowledge

of the characteristics of victimized persons and

households, as well as when and where victimizations

occur.

• Conducting feasibility studies and planning programs

for the restitution and compensation to victims of

Part A, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

A1-16

crime. These studies and programs require

information on the nature and extent of injury and

loss that results from criminal victimization.

• Assessing the need for property identification

programs. These programs require information on the

level of property recovery after burglaries and thefts.

• Understanding more about the nature and extent of

biases in police data on known offenses. These

studies require a knowledge of the levels of

nonreporting to the police, together with information

on the kinds of victimization that are

disproportionately not reported to the police.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-1

Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Introducing the Survey and Its

Authorization A2-2

2 Confidentiality A2-6

3 Eligible Respondents A2-9

4 Maintaining Respondent Rapport A2-20

5 Answering Respondents' Questions A2-25

6 General Interviewing Techniques A2-31

7 Closing the Interview and "Thank

You" Letters A2-48

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-2

Topic 1. Introducing the Survey and Its Authorization

Introducing Yourself and

the Survey

After making contact with a respondent, you must introduce

yourself, verify that you contacted the correct address, and

introduce the survey. Your introduction needs to include the

following information:

! Who you are (your full name),

! Who you represent (the U.S. Census Bureau),

! Proof of your identification for personal visit interviews

(your official ID card), and

! The purpose of your visit/telephone call (conducting a

survey to determine how often people are victims of

crime).

Also, ask whether the household received our introductory

letter for personal visit interviews or provide the information

required by the Privacy Act (shown on page 2 of the

Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554).

Suggested Introductions For a personal visit interview, you can say something

similar to the following introduction:

"I'm (your name) from the United States Census Bureau.

Here is my identification. (Show ID card and verify

address.) The Census Bureau is conducting a survey

here and throughout the Nation to determine how often

people are victims of crimes. Did you receive our

letter?"

When you are not sure if the person who greets you at the

door is at least 18 years of age, ask:

"I need to talk to someone who is at least 18 years of age

and knowledgeable about this household? Would that

be you?"

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-3

Here's an example of an introduction you can use when

conducting a telephone interview:

"I'm (your name) from the United States Census Bureau.

(verify address) The Census Bureau is conducting a

survey here and throughout the Nation to determine how

often people are victims of crimes. We contacted your

household for this survey several months ago. I would

like to talk to someone in the household who is at least

18 years of age and knowledgeable about this

household? Would that be you?"

Keep in mind that the first contact with a sample household

must be a personal visit.

Why We Use Introductory

Letters

The NCVS uses two different introductory letters to comply

with the provisions of the Privacy Act of 1974. This Privacy

Act requires that all Federal agencies provide specific facts

to anyone from whom they plan to collect personal

information. These facts include:

! The legal authority for collecting the information;

! The principal purposes for collecting the information;

! The various uses for the data after it is collected; and

! The mandatory or voluntary nature of the survey and

penalties, if any, for not providing information.

One introductory letter, NCVS-572(L), is usually mailed to a

household just before it comes into sample for the first

enumeration period. The other introductory letter,

NCVS-573(L), is usually mailed before each subsequent

enumeration period.

In addition to complying with the Privacy Act of 1974, both

letters prepare the household for your visit/telephone call

and provide the household with your regional office address

and telephone number.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-4

How To Use Introductory

Letters

Your regional office is responsible for mailing out

introductory letters and indicating on the NCVS Control

Card (NCVS-500) whether or not they mailed a letter. Your

assignment materials will also include copies of both

introductory letters in case you need to hand them out during

personal visit interviews.

For each enumeration period, your regional office will mark

Item 5 on the NCVS Control Card to let you know whether

or not they mailed an introductory letter to the sample

household. Always check Item 5 before starting an

interview. Then, take the following actions:

If "No" is marked in Item 5 or Item 5 is left blank--

Personal Visit - Before you start introducing yourself to the

respondent, hand the respondent a copy of the appropriate

letter for the enumeration period. As you hand the letter to

the respondent, say something similar to: "I would like you

to have this letter which introduces this survey and the

purpose of my visit ." Allow the respondent time to read the

letter before the interview.

Telephone - When conducting an NCVS interview by

telephone, it is not necessary to mention the introductory

letter. However, you may find the following Privacy Act

statement useful, even when the respondent has received our

letter and still has questions about the survey's purpose, any

penalties for not participating in the survey, or the

importance of each sample household's participation:

"The Census Bureau is conducting the National Crime

Victimization Survey for the Bureau of Justice Statistics of

the United States Department of Justice. The survey's

purpose is to provide information on the kinds and amount

of crime committed against households and individuals

throughout the country. All survey information will be

used for statistical purposes only. This survey is

authorized by Title 42, Section 3732 of the United States

Code.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-5

Participation in this survey is voluntary and there are no

penalties for refusing to answer any questions. However,

your cooperation is extremely important to help insure the

completeness and accuracy of this much needed

information."

If "Yes" is marked in Item 5 (for first enumeration

period):

Since all first enumeration households are personal visit

interviews, ask the respondent, at the end of your

introduction, whether or not he/she received the NCVS

introductory letter. If the respondent states that he/she did

not receive it or doesn't recall seeing it, hand the respondent

a copy of the NCVS-572(L) and allow time for reading it.

If "Yes" is marked in Item 5 (second through seventh

enumeration period):

In most cases, you will conduct these interviews over the

telephone and will not need to ask about the introductory

letter for the second through the seventh enumeration period.

There are a few instances when you would need to ask about

the introductory letter or provide the Privacy Act

information for second through seventh enumeration period

households. These exceptions include households that were

Type A noninterviews during the first enumeration period,

and cases where you discover a replacement household.

NCVS Authorization

Currently, BJS is authorized to collect statistics on

victimizations through Title 42, United States Code,

Section 3732 of the Justice Systems Improvement Act of

1979. Although this law authorizes BJS to collect

victimization information, it does not make respondent

participation mandatory.

Title 42 also requires that all information collected from

respondents be kept strictly confidential, so that individual

respondents or households cannot be identified from the

survey results. (See Topic 2 of this chapter for more details

about confidentiality.)

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-6

Topic 2. Confidentiality

How We Define

Confidentiality

By law, Titles 13 and 42 of the United States Code, the

Census Bureau is required to guarantee that we will not

release any information from which respondents can be

identified. Only sworn Census Bureau employees are

allowed to see names, addresses, and other personal

information that we collect.

Confidentiality and Your

Job

While working as an FR, you must avoid mentioning or

providing anyone, other than sworn Census employees, with

any survey materials that would link a specific household or

person with a specific survey. When discussing your job,

always be careful never to reveal any information collected

during an interview to an unauthorized person or allow

unauthorized persons to view completed questionnaires.

Always be careful to store completed questionnaires out of

sight, so that unauthorized persons won't be tempted to look

at them. Never leave completed questionnaires on table or

dresser tops at home, in motel rooms, at restaurants, or any

other public place. When traveling in your vehicle, always

keep completed forms locked out of sight, especially when

you leave your vehicle.

No One Home When you find that no one is home at a sample address, you

need to be very careful how you inquire about the best time

to reach someone at the sample address. If you ask a

neighbor, apartment manager, or someone else living

nearby, do not mention the survey name or attempt to

describe the survey.

Here's an example of what you may want to say:

"Hello, I am (your name) from the United States Census

Bureau. Here is my identification (show ID). I need to

interview the household at (sample address), but no one is

at home now. Do you know when I might find someone

at home?"

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-7

Nonhousehold Member

Proxy Respondent

In the few cases where it is acceptable for you to allow a

nonhousehold member as a proxy respondent, you cannot

provide the proxy respondent with any information that was

provided by household members in earlier interviews/

enumeration periods. This includes information on

household composition, marital status, education, income,

and any other responses provided on the Basic Screen

Questionnaire (NCVS-1) and Crime Incident Reports

(NCVS-2s).

To fully comply with our confidentiality rules, reask Control

Card Items 13a and 14 of the nonhousehold respondent, and

then only ask the NCVS-1 questions for the persons named

by the nonhousehold respondent (those already listed and

newly added).

Using an Interpreter There may be instances when you need the assistance of an

interpreter. Perhaps the respondent speaks a language that

you can't understand or he/she is unable to speak at all.

Only use an interpreter that the respondent is willing to

accept. If the respondent objects to a particular interpreter

or you can't locate an interpreter, call your supervisor for

help in finding an acceptable interpreter.

Telephone Interviews When conducting an interview over the telephone, do not

permit unauthorized persons, such as your family members

or neighbors, to listen to an interview.

Personal Visit

Interviews

If nonhousehold members are present, either in a sample

housing unit or a group quarters, ask the respondent if he/she

wishes to be interviewed in private. If so, make the

necessary arrangements to either interview the person

elsewhere or at a different time. Some respondents may

prefer not to be interviewed while other household members

are present. Always respect the respondent's need for a

private interview.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-8

Here are a few examples:

You visit a sample housing unit and discover that there are

relatives visiting from out of town.

You visit a college dormitory to interview a student and find

students from other dormitory rooms studying in the sample

student's room.

Reassuring Respondents

Even though all NCVS data that we collect are tabulated in

the form of statistical summaries, some respondents may

still feel uneasy about providing the requested information.

Here are some facts that you can relay to respondents who

may be concerned about confidentiality:

" Before any NCVS data are released, all personal

information is removed and only summary information

or totals are released to data users.

" The Census Bureau takes its confidentiality promise to

respondents very seriously. A Census Bureau

employee can be fined up to $250,000 and/or

imprisoned for up to 5 years if the employee is found

guilty of an unauthorized disclosure of individual

information provided to the Census Bureau. Our

agency has an unchallenged record when you examine

how we protect a respondent's confidentiality.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-9

Topic 3. Eligible Respondents

Types of NCVS Respondents

There are three types of respondents for the NCVS:

# Household respondents,

# Individual respondents, and

# Proxy respondents.

Certain NCVS forms and sets of questions require different

respondents. There are specific questions on the Control

Card (NCVS-500) and the Basic Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1) which relate to the household and are asked only

once during each enumeration period. We refer to the

respondent for these questions as the "household

respondent."

All other questions for the NCVS are considered "self-

response" questions. In other words, each household

member who is 12 years of age or older is expected to

answer for himself/herself. We refer to these respondents as

"individual respondents."

As a last resort and only under specific conditions, we will

allow another person to answer questions for a household

member. We refer to this person as a "proxy respondent."

In most cases, a proxy respondent will be another household

member. Strict rules are in place for when to accept a proxy

interview, since a proxy respondent is more likely not to

report a crime incident and less likely to know the full

details concerning reported incidents.

Interpreters and Signers

"Interpreters" are acceptable for respondents who cannot

read or speak English, and "Signers" are acceptable for

respondents who are deaf. However, interpreters and signers

are not considered "proxy respondents," because they are

not responding for the household member.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-10

Interpreters are translating the NCVS questions into the

respondent's language and then translating the respondent's

answers into English for you. Signers are using sign

language to relay the NCVS questions to the respondent, the

respondent uses sign language to answer the questions, and

then the signer tells you the respondent's answers.

Whenever you have the assistance of an interpreter or a

signer, note that fact in any summary reports that you

complete for the respondent.

Rules for Household

Respondents

Your goal for selecting a household respondent is to find the

most knowledgeable household member who is at least

18 years of age. By most knowledgeable, we mean the

household member who is most likely to give accurate

answers to the household questions. Most often the

household respondent will be the reference person (one of

the persons who owns or rents the home). (See Part C,

Chapter 1, for more details about reference persons and

household respondents.)

First Person to Interview

You must select and interview the household respondent

before interviewing any other household members,

regardless of whether you interview by personal visit or

telephone.

For a first enumeration period household, ask to speak

with one of the persons who owns or rents the home, as soon

as you have introduced yourself and verified that you are at

the correct address.

For a second through seventh enumeration period

household, ask to speak with the person who was the

household respondent during the previous enumeration

period, as soon as you have introduced yourself and verified

that you contacted the correct address. If that person is not

available, you can ask to speak to the reference person,

another household member who owns/rents the home, or a

household member who is at least 18 years of age and

knowledgeable about the household.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-11

Exceptions to the Age

Requirement

There are only two instances when a household respondent

can be under 18 years of age.

! When the household's reference person (one of the

person's who owns or rents the home) or the spouse of

the reference person is 17 years of age, you can select

either person as the household respondent. Because

they are MARRIED, either person qualifies as a

household respondent, even though one person is

17 years of age.

! When you have a household in which ALL household

members are 17 years of age, select the most

knowledgeable household member as the household

respondent. However, if the household has at least one

17-year-old household member and the remaining

members are under 17 years of age, select the 17-year-

old household member as the household respondent.

NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL

household members are under 17 years of age,

contact your supervisor who will discuss this

situation with Headquarters staff and then let you

know how to handle the case.

Switching Household

Respondents

If it becomes obvious that you are interviewing a household

member who is unable to answer the household questions,

you must:

! Find a more knowledgeable household respondent, or

! Arrange to return to the household when a more

knowledgeable respondent is available.

However, you must interview the household respondent

BEFORE interviewing any individual respondents. If you

have to change household respondents, start the interview

over again from the beginning.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-12

Rules for Individual

Respondents

After you are done interviewing the household respondent,

then you can interview each of the remaining household

members who are 12 years of age and older. We want self-

responses from each of these household members. This may

require you to make callbacks, so that you can talk directly

to each household member.

Rules for Proxy

Respondents

To be eligible as a proxy respondent, a household member

must be:

# At least 18 years of age,

# Knowledgeable about the household member for

whom he/she is responding, and

# A completed NCVS interview himself/herself before

providing a proxy interview.

The only time a proxy respondent can be under 18 years of

age is when the reference person or the spouse of the

reference person is under 18 or all household members are

under 18 years of age.

Proxy Respondents Who

Are Not Household

Members

Before you can accept a nonhousehold member as a proxy

respondent, all of the following conditions must apply:

! All household members cannot be interviewed due to

health problems or mental incompetence.

! During the entire reference period, all household

members have been unable to leave home unless they

were accompanied by a caretaker who is nonhousehold

member.

! Proxy interviews are provided by the nonhousehold

member caretaker for ALL eligible household

members, including the household respondent's

interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-13

! The nonhousehold member caretaker must be at least

18 years of age.

! During the entire reference period, the nonhousehold

member caretaker had responsibility for the care of

each eligible household member.

The only time you are allowed to take a proxy interview for

a household respondent is when all of the conditions for a

nonhousehold member proxy respondent have been met and

the nonhousehold member is the proxy respondent for the

household respondent and all remaining eligible household

members. Otherwise, one of the eligible household

members must be the household respondent.

When Not to Use a

Nonhousehold Member

If any of the household members, who require proxy

interviews, have not been under the care of the

nonhousehold member for more than a few days during the

reference period, do not accept a proxy interview from the

nonhousehold member.

Here are a few examples of when not to accept a

nonhousehold member caretaker as a proxy respondent:

# A nonhousehold member goes on a 2-week vacation and

is not with the household member during those 2 weeks.

# The household member is in a hospital or a nursing

home or visiting with relatives for one or more months.

During that time, the nonhousehold member caretaker is

not staying with the household member.

If you have a case where you are not sure whether to accept

a nonhousehold member caretaker as a proxy respondent,

always check with your supervisor before conducting the

proxy interview.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-14

Protecting the Rights of

Household Members

Make sure that a nonhousehold member caretaker is an

acceptable proxy respondent before conducting a proxy

interview. If you allow an unacceptable nonhousehold

member to be a proxy respondent, you run the risk of:

! Violating the sample household's right to confidentiality,

! Violating the sample household's right to choose

whether or not to participate in the survey, and

! Interviewing a proxy respondent who is not

knowledgeable enough to provide complete and accurate

information.

When accepting a nonhousehold member caretaker as a

proxy respondent, remember not to provide him/her with

any information that the household member(s) provided

during previous interviews. This includes information on

household composition, marital status, education, income,

and so forth, as well as any other information previously

given by household member(s).

When updating the Control Card (NCVS-500), reask

Items 13a and 14, and then only ask the screen questions for

those household members named by the nonhousehold

member proxy respondent. For other items that require

updating for the enumeration period, reask these items

without mentioning the previously recorded information.

Entries on the Basic

Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1) for

Nonhousehold Member

Proxy Interviews

Item 13 on the front page of the Basic Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1) is intended for entering information about proxy

interviews. When the proxy respondent is a nonhousehold

member, you need to complete Item 13 as follows:

$ In Item 13a, enter the line number from Item 19 on the

Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) for the

household member who required a proxy interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-15

$ In Item 13b, print the name of the nonhousehold

member proxy respondent in the "Name" column and

print "Non HH" in the "Line No." column. NEVER

enter a line number for a nonhousehold member on

either the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) or the

Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2), even if the

nonhousehold member is listed in the household roster

of the Control Card (NCVS-500) as a "usual residence

elsewhere" (URE).

$ In Item 13c, always enter Code 2 (Physically/mentally

unable to answer), since that is the only acceptable

reason for allowing a nonhousehold member to be a

proxy respondent.

Completing an INTER-

COMM for

Nonhousehold Member

Proxy Interviews

Whenever you accept a proxy interview from a

nonhousehold member proxy respondent, you must

complete an INTER-COMM (Form 11-36) explaining the

situation. Your explanation needs to include who the

nonhousehold member is (nurse, daughter, neighbor, etc.)

and how much time the nonhousehold member caretaker

spends with the household member(s).

When to Accept a Proxy

Interview

One of the following circumstances must exist before you

can accept a proxy interview:

% A parent does not want you to interview his/her 12- or

13-year-old child. In this case, any knowledgeable

household member who is at least 18 years of age can

be the proxy respondent for the child.

% A household member who is 12 years of age or older is

temporarily absent and will not be back to the address

until after the interview closeout date. In this case,

make sure that the person is still a household member.

Check page 4 of your Information Card Booklet

(NCVS-554) if you need help determining household

membership. If the absent person is still considered a

household member, then you can accept a proxy

interview.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-16

% If a household member who is at least 12 years of age

is considered physically and/or mentally incapacitated,

then you can accept a proxy interview. To qualify as

physically and/or mentally incapacitated, the

household member must have health and/or mental

illness problems that are continuous throughout the

entire interview period and these problems make it

impossible for the person to be interviewed.

The following problems do not qualify as health or

mental illness problems:

! Colds or the flu,

! Drunkenness or drugs, or

! Emotional problems that might be aggravated

due to some NCVS questions, such as those

dealing with sexual assaults.

When Not to Accept a Proxy

Interview

Under the following circumstances, do NOT accept a proxy

interview:

" You are unable to reach a household member at the

sample address, despite repeated attempts throughout

the interview period. For example, a high school

student who goes to school, works part time, and is

involved in several sports activities.

" In a two-person household, one of the members tells

you that she can’t take the time to answer your

questions. Instead, she wants her husband to answer

all the NCVS questions for both of them.

" A household member refuses to let you interview

someone in the household who is over 13 years of age,

such as a 14-year-old son or daughter or a 90-year-old

parent.

" A respondent does not understand English and you are

unable to find an acceptable interpreter, including

another household member.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-17

If you encounter any of these situations, you must classify

the individual respondent as a Type Z Noninterview.

Remember that you can never classify a household

respondent as a Type Z Noninterview. If none of the

household members qualify as a household respondent, then

you must classify the entire household as a Type A

noninterview. (See Part A, Chapter 6, for more details

about noninterviews.)

Procedures for Conducting

Proxy Interviews

There are specific items on both the Basic Screen

Questionnaire (NCVS-1) and the Crime Incident Report

(NCVS-2) that require special procedures when conducting a

proxy interview.

Whenever you conduct a proxy interview, follow these

procedures:

! On the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1):

Complete Item 13 before leaving the household.

Make sure to mark either box 3 or 4 in Item 18 to

indicate that the household member’s interview was

taken by proxy either in person or by telephone.

! On the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2):

Item 20b - The word "respondent" in the answer

categories refers to the person for whom the proxy

interview is taken, NOT to the proxy respondent.

Items 21 - 115 - Replace the word "you" in each of

these questions with the name of the person for whom

the proxy interview is being taken.

Items 116 - 134 - For these questions, we want the

proxy respondent to answer for himself/herself, not for

the person for whom the proxy interview is being

taken.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-18

Items 135 - 176 - Replace the word "you" in each of

these questions with the name of the person for whom

the proxy interview is being taken.

Justifying a Proxy Interview

When you take a proxy interview because the household

member is physically and/or mentally unable to answer or

the household member is temporarily absent and will not

return before closeout, you must explain the situation in an

INTER-COMM and attach it to the Basic Screen

Questionnaire (NCVS-1).

You do not need to complete an INTER-COMM if you take

a proxy interview for a 12- or 13-year-old child whose

parent refused to let you interview the child.

Remember to only accept a proxy interview as a last resort.

Also, only accept a proxy respondent who is able to answer

questions about the household member accurately and

completely.

Rules for Interpreters and

Signers

Before using an interpreter or a signer, make sure that the

person is acceptable to the respondent. The interpreter or

signer can be a family member, a neighbor of the

respondent, an official interpreter or signer, or even you, if

you speak the person's language or can sign well enough.

If you have difficulty finding a suitable interpreter or signer,

contact your supervisor. NEVER accept a proxy respondent

when you can't locate a suitable interpreter. However, you

can use a proxy respondent for a deaf respondent, when a

suitable signer is not available.

If you complete any NCVS-2s for a respondent who required

the assistance of an interpreter or signer, note in the

summary report that an interpreter or signer was used. Do

not use Item 13 on the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1)

to note the use of an interpreter or signer. Item 13 is

intended ONLY for noting proxy information.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-19

Whenever you use an interpreter who is not a household

member, you must complete a Form 1415, Contract for

Interpreter Services. Details for completing this form are

contained in the Administrative Handbook, Form 11-55.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-20

Topic 4. Maintaining Respondent Rapport

Starting Off on the Right

Foot

You do not always get a second chance to make a first

impression. As soon as the respondent answers the door or

the telephone, you need to start building a harmonious

relationship with him/her. Maintaining this rapport

throughout the interview will ensure that you collect full and

valid information.

As you introduce yourself and the survey, create a

comfortable atmosphere by showing sincere understanding

and interest in the respondent. If the respondent feels

comfortable, he/she will be more willing to provide honest

and full responses.

Keys to a Successful

Introduction

The following key points will help you deliver a successful

introduction:

! For personal visit interviews, always have the NCVS

introductory letter handy to give any respondent who

did not receive it in the mail.

! Be enthusiastic and friendly. Remember that a smile

helps you open a lot of doors.

! Be prepared for any type of responses or questions

from respondents. By knowing the survey, you will be

able to handle any questions.

Creating a Good Impression

Knowing the NCVS well is a major key to creating a good

impression with respondents. Pay attention and play an

active role during your training sessions and make sure that

you complete all self-studies. Also, make sure to read this

manual, NCVS-550, and refer to it whenever you have

questions about the NCVS procedures.

Before you start interviewing for the NCVS, make sure that

you understand:

! The purpose of the survey;

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-21

! How the survey results are used;

! The types of questions asked in the interview; and

! How to answer respondent questions.

Being Professional,

Friendly, and Sincere

One of your greatest assets in creating a good impression is

to conduct interviews in a professional, friendly, and sincere

manner. Always keep in mind that you are a representative

of the United States Government. This role requires you to

take a professional approach towards your work.

Interviewing in a professional manner, does not mean that

you can not smile or be friendly. However, showing too

much friendliness or concern about a respondent's personal

matters can cause a respondent to hold back information or

provide biased information.

Listening carefully and showing a sincere interest in what

each respondent tells you, will make your interviewing

easier and more enjoyable.

Staying Neutral and

Objective

During an interview, it is important to develop an objective,

non-threatening, non-judgmental atmosphere. Don't let the

respondent see any signs of approval or disapproval after

he/she gives you information.

Be careful not to give your personal opinion either by your

words, facial expressions, or the tone of your voice. Since

some of your respondents will be victims of crime and will

be telling you personal or sensitive information about the

crime incident, you must be careful not to show any surprise,

disapproval, or sympathy. Any of these expressions could

cause the respondent to give untrue answers or withhold

information.

Staying neutral and creating an objective atmosphere during

an interview is not easy. It comes with experience. Practice

using neutral expressions and gestures, such as "uh-huh,"

"I've got that," "Yes, I see," or simply a nod of your head.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-22

These signs will tell the respondent that you are listening,

without leading, influencing, or biasing the information that

you receive during an interview.

Here are some reasons for not showing your reactions to

what a respondent says:

& Your actions, as well as your words, can help or hinder

an interview.

& If you frown or shake your head, the respondent will

sense your disapproval just as clearly as if you put it

into words.

& If a respondent thinks that you favor one answer more

than another, this could influence how the person

answers the question.

Believing in Yourself and

the NCVS

Before you make contact with a respondent, believe that:

• You "have what it takes" to get a good NCVS

interview.

• The data you collect for the NCVS is important.

• Each respondent is going to participate in the NCVS.

Guidelines for Gaining

Cooperation From

Respondents

Be Positive - Approach each household expecting to obtain

an interview.

Introduce Yourself Properly - Always include the following

points in your introduction:

! Your full name,

! Point out that you are representing the United States

Census Bureau,

! Show your identification card,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-23

! Explain the nature of the survey, and

! Ask whether the household received our introductory

letter.

How Long Will This Take? - Give the respondent an honest

answer as to the length of the NCVS interview. The NCVS

interview takes about 25 minutes to complete for each

household member, but this can vary depending on the

person's experiences during the reference period. If the

respondent is reluctant, offer to start the interview and, if

he/she does not have time to finish, you can return later to

complete the interview.

Know Your Survey - The better you know the survey on

which you are working, the more successful you will be.

Know the purposes of the survey and be prepared to answer

any questions about its importance. This will be your best

defense against respondent objections.

Appearance - Dress in a professional manner. The initial

impression you make can be the deciding point between

whether or not the respondent participates. Dress for the

neighborhood in which you are working. Do not overdress.

A businesslike appearance is essential.

Use Survey Aids - Be ready to show respondents the

appropriate survey "fact sheet," brochures, or local

newspaper/magazine articles that make use of NCVS facts.

This will help the respondent understand the importance of

his/her participation.

Be Flexible - Be available to complete the interview at the

respondent's convenience. Offer to return at a different time

if the respondent can not do the interview when you contact

him/her. Try to get a telephone number and name, in case

you need to change the appointment time. Also leave your

name and telephone number, when you find that no one is

home. Be persistent, but do not be pushy.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-24

It's Voluntary - A few respondents may choose not to

participate because the survey is voluntary and there are no

penalties for not participating. If this happens, explain that

the overall quality of our data could be affected when

sample persons refuse to participate. Persuade the

respondent into letting you start the interview, and explain

that any objectionable questions can be refused.

Leave the Door Open - Always maintain a pleasant and

businesslike manner. No matter how hostile the respondent

behaves towards you, always leave the respondent with a

positive impression of the Census Bureau. This will

facilitate any future contacts with the household.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-25

Topic 5. Answering Respondents' Questions

Importance of Answering

Respondent Questions

You need to keep a good, positive attitude about the NCVS,

and be prepared to answer almost any type of respondent

question with conviction and accuracy. The Census Bureau

prides itself on having a qualified staff of FRs who

consistently continue to receive high marks for gaining

respondent cooperation. This is pretty impressive

considering that in recent years the general public has

become frustrated with all forms of government. We

attribute this success to the good attitude and preparedness

of our FRs.

Even though we provide sample households with basic

information about the NCVS in the introductory letter, some

respondents may still have questions to ask either before the

start of the interview or at different points during the

interview.

Types of Respondent

Questions

The questions that respondents may ask can be divided into

two main categories:

# Item specific questions and

# General survey questions.

Item Specific Questions

After you ask a question from any of the NCVS interviewing

forms, a respondent may ask you:

! Why a particular question is needed,

! What a particular word or phrase from a question

means, or

! Who needs the information from a specific question.

This manual has the information you need to answer any

item specific questions that respondents may ask.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-26

We do not expect you to memorize all of the information

provided in this manual, but you do need to know where to

look within the manual for specific types of information.

Use Part C, Survey Concepts, when you need to find the

meanings of specific words or phrases as used in the NCVS

questions. Chapters 1 through 5 of Part B, How to

Complete and Edit NCVS Forms, will help you answer

respondents' questions about why we ask certain questions

and who uses the information from specific questions.

General Survey Questions

Most of the time, respondents will ask general survey

questions at the very start of the interview. Although we can

not predict every question that a respondent may ask, we

have compiled a list of commonly asked general survey

questions with some suggested responses to help you.

A condensed list of the four most commonly asked questions

are shown:

! On the back side of both NCVS introductory letters,

and

! On page 2 of your Information Card Booklet,

NCVS-554.

In addition to being listed below, a shorter list of general

survey questions and suggested answers is shown on the

reverse side of your NCVS Job Aid, NCVS-550.1.

General Survey Questions and Answers

What is this survey all

about?

The National Crime Victimization Survey is conducted

monthly to collect information on the kinds and amount of

crime in the United States.

From a sample of households throughout the United States,

we interview all household members who are at least 12

years of age.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-27

What information do you

get from this survey?

This survey collects information on the types and amount of

crimes committed, the characteristics of victims, and the

characteristics of offenders who have committed violent

crimes. The following types of information are also

collected for reported crimes:

! When and where crimes occur,

! Economic loss to the victim,

! Extent of injuries suffered by the victim,

! Whether the victim knew the offender or whether they

were strangers,

! Whether the offender used a weapon, and

! Whether the police were notified.

Why can't you get this

information from police

records?

Based on information received in previous survey years, we

have found that over half of all crimes go unreported to the

police. Since this survey includes crimes that are both

reported and unreported, data users can get a more complete

picture of crime in the United States from this survey.

What kind of results are

released from this survey?

Our sponsor, the Bureau of Justice Statistics, releases results

periodically from the National Crime Victimization Survey,

together with reports on specific topics. They only publish

statistical summaries for the Nation as a whole and never

release any information about you as an individual.

Do you have any statistics

from this survey that I can

see?

For personal visit interviews--

Yes. You can have this Fact Sheet which contains statistical

graphs, charts, and figures from the National Crime

Victimization Survey. (Hand the respondent a copy of

Form NCVS-110.)

For telephone interviews--

Yes. I can mail you a copy of a recent Fact Sheet showing

statistical graphs, charts, and figures from the National

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-28

Crime Victimization Survey. (Mail respondent a copy of

Form NCVS-110.)

Why Was I Selected for This

Survey?

Actually, we selected your address, not you personally.

Using statistical methods, we selected approximately 54,000

addresses across the country to represent the entire

population. If your household should move away while your

address is still in the survey, we would interview the new

family that moves into the home.

I'm pretty busy. How long

will this interview really

take?

We expect the interview to take about 25 minutes. Your

interview may be somewhat shorter or longer depending on

your circumstances. If you have any comments on this

survey or any recommendations for reducing its length, I can

give you an address to use.

(When asked, here is the address:)

Chief, Victimization and Statistics Branch

Bureau of Justice Statistics

Washington, DC 20531

I thought that your agency

just takes a Census every

10 years. What else does

your agency do?

In addition to the decennial census conducted every

10 years, the U.S. Census Bureau collects many different

kinds of statistics. By law, we are required to conduct a

variety of economic censuses on a regular basis, such as the

census of business, manufactures, and state and local

governments. We also collect monthly data on such

activities as labor force participation, retail and wholesale

trade, manufacturing activities, and trade statistics, along

with yearly data on business, manufacturing, governments,

family income, and education.

How many times will I be

interviewed?

Over the 3-year period that your household is in sample for

this survey, we will ask you to participate once every

6 months for a total of seven interviews.

Is this survey authorized by

law?

Yes. We are conducting this survey under the authority of

Title 13 of the United States Code, Section 8. Section 9 of

this law requires us to keep all information about you and

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-29

your household strictly confidential. We may use this

information only for statistical purposes. Also, Title 42,

Section 3732, of the United States Code authorizes the

Bureau of Justice Statistics of the U.S. Department of

Justice to collect information using this survey. Title 42,

Sections 3789g and 3735 of the United States Code also

require us to keep all information about you and your

household strictly confidential.

Do I have to participate?

Participation is voluntary and there are no penalties for not

answering questions. However, it is very important that we

have your cooperation in this survey to ensure the validity

and accuracy of the survey results.

Why can't you just mail me

a questionnaire?

The survey design and the nature of the questions require a

trained person to record the information. This method of

interview is the least expensive way to obtain this

information.

How can I know for sure

that you are who you say

you are?

Besides my identification badge, I can give you a telephone

number to call so you can verify with my supervisor that I

work for the U.S. Census Bureau.

How can this survey help to

fight crime?

The results of this survey show a variety of information

about crime victims, offenders, types of crimes being

committed, and types of places where these crimes occur.

All of this information is put to good use by law

enforcement agencies, community groups, and government

agencies throughout the country to lower the incidence of

crime.

Why do you need to

interview me when I don't

have any crimes to report?

We are interested in getting information from both victims

and nonvictims. By examining the differences between

victims and nonvictims, we can try to determine why certain

individuals become victims, while others do not.

Why waste my tax dollars on

a silly survey?

We are always concerned about survey costs; however, the

National Crime Victimization Survey is the ONLY source of

information on crimes not reported to police. Legislators

and planners use this data to make informed decisions on

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-30

numerous crime-related programs. This data is also used to

estimate the cost of victim compensation programs; to

determine the types of programs needed for elderly crime

victims, and to measure the effects that police behavior and

the criminal justice system have on crime levels.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-31

Topic 6. General Interviewing Techniques

Applying General

Interviewing Techniques

In addition to creating a good impression and answering

respondent questions, we want all FRs to use the same

interviewing techniques. By following uniform techniques,

we can ensure that the final survey results are more complete

and accurate.

Pacing the Interview

Remember the following key point about pacing the NCVS

interview--"do not rush" to complete an interview under any

circumstances. Maintain a calm, unhurried manner and ask

the questions in an objective and deliberate way. This will

not only relax the respondent, but also help to keep the

respondent's attention.

When respondents sense that you are rushing through an

interview, they may withhold information thinking that it

would take too long to explain the crime incident. On the

other hand, do not let respondents waste too much time

talking about unrelated information. Try to tactfully steer

respondents back to the interview without making them feel

as if you are hurrying to finish.

An average NCVS interview will take about 25 minutes to

complete. However, the actual time required to interview all

eligible members of a sample household will vary depending

on the household's composition and crime experiences

during the reference period.

Always assume that each respondent has time to be

interviewed when you contact him/her. If the respondent

tries to rush you through the interview or tries to cut you off,

arrange to continue the interview at a more convenient time

for the respondent. Whenever possible, make every attempt

to complete at least the household respondent's interview

during your first contact for the interview period. This will

make any callbacks for remaining household member’s

easier.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-32

When conducting interviews, always speak as clearly and

distinctly as possible. Avoid talking too fast or too slow.

Talking too fast may give the impression that you think the

questions are either unimportant or sensitive in nature. By

speaking in a confident voice and at a moderate pace,

respondents are more likely to stay relaxed and responsive.

Asking Questions as

Worded

When asking NCVS questions, you must avoid changing the

words or omitting parts of questions. Even if the change

seems insignificant to you, it could change the way the

respondent interprets the question. We want each

respondent to interpret the NCVS questions the same way,

so the answers that we receive will be comparable

throughout the entire sample.

Here is an example:

Item 34 from the NCVS-1--

Does anyone in this household operate a business from

this address?

Item 34 after an FR omits words--

Does anyone in this household operate a business?

By rewording this question, the FR may get a different

response than an FR who reads the question as it is printed

on the questionnaire. By leaving out "from this address,"

respondents could misinterpret the true intent of this

question.

Words in Bold Type When looking at item questions and answers on the NCVS

questionnaires, any words shown in bold type are meant for

you to read to the respondent.

Words in Regular Type Words shown in regular type on the NCVS questionnaires

are intended either as instructions for you to read to yourself

or answer categories that you do not read to the respondent.

Phrases in Parentheses Some of the NCVS-1 questions contain a phrase in

parentheses, such as the questions in Items 44a and 46d.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-33

Item 44a on the NCVS-1--

During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents

already mentioned,) did you call the police to report

something that happened to YOU which you thought

was a crime?

Item 46d on the NCVS-1--

What was the total dollar amount of the damage caused

by this/these act(s) of vandalism during the last

6 months? (Use repair costs if the property was

repaired.)

(Exclude any damage done in incidents already

mentioned.)

When you see a phrase in parentheses, you need to decide

whether the text has to be read to the respondent because

he/she had already reported a crime incident in an earlier

screen question (as shown in Item 44a) or as a reminder (as

shown in Item 46d).

Reading the Entire Question

Part (a) of most screen questions has at least three

subcategories and could have as many as eight

subcategories. This may prompt some respondents to give

you an answer before you finish reading each subcategory.

We would prefer that you finish reading each subcategory

before the respondent gives an answer. Even if you get

interrupted, you must read each and every subcategory in its

entirety.

The following technique may help you get through all the

subcategories of a screen question before getting a

respondent's answer:

1 After reading each subcategory in part (a), only pause

long enough to let the respondent know that you are

about to start reading a new subcategory. If you pause

too long, the respondent may feel that you are waiting

for an answer.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-34

2 After reading all subcategories in part (a), pause long

enough to allow the respondent to reply. If the

respondent doesn't give you an answer, then read the

question in part (b), "Did any incidents of this type

happen to you?"

3 If you get a "Yes" response in part (b), mark the answer

box and ask the respondent "What happened?" Based on

the answer you receive, enter a brief description of the

crime incident in the space provided to the right of

part (a). Then, ask the question in part (c), "How many

times?"

4 If you get a "No" response in part (b), mark the answer

box and continue with the next appropriate item number.

If this technique doesn't work and a respondent either

interrupts you in the middle of reading a subcategory or

before you finish reading all the subcategories for a

question, follow these steps:

Respondent answers in the middle of reading a

subcategory--

1 Stop and thank the respondent, but explain that there is

more to the question which he/she needs to hear before

giving an answer.

2 Reread the unfinished subcategory again from the

beginning.

If the respondent gives you a "No" answer after you

finish reading the entire subcategory, tell the respondent

that you need to finish reading all the subcategories for

the question.

If the respondent gives you a "Yes" answer before you

have read all subcategories, then follow the instructions

below.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-35

Respondent answers "Yes" before you have read all

subcategories--

1 Mark the "Yes" answer box in part (b) and ask "What

happened?"

2 Enter a brief description of the crime incident in the

space to the right of part (a).

3 Then, ask the question in part (c), "How many times?"

and fill the "Number of times" space.

4 Next, start by saying, "Other than any incidents already

reported..." and finish reading the remaining

subcategories in part (a) for the item number.

5 If the respondent mentions any additional crime

incidents, briefly describe them in the space next to

part (a) AND correct the "Number of times" entry in

part (c).

By using these techniques, there is less chance of missing

any crime incidents which occurred during the reference

period.

Marking All Answers That

Apply

There are several questions in the Crime Incident Report

(NCVS-2) that are designed to get multiple answers. Here's

an example:

Item 51 - How did they make the situation worse?

This item has six answer categories:

! Led to injury or greater injury to respondent

! Caused greater loss of property or damage to property

! Other people got hurt (worse)

! Offender got away

! Made offender angrier, more aggressive, etc.

! Other - Specify

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-36

To ensure that we get all answers that apply to this question,

you must continue asking, "Any other way?" until the

respondent answers, "No."

Inserting Names in

Questions

Several questions on the Control Card are designed so that

you get prompted to insert the appropriate household

member's name. These prompts are indicated by a series of

three dots.

Here is an example:

Control Card Item 24:

“Please choose one or more races that ... considers

him/herself to be.”

Wherever you see this prompt (...) in a Control Card

question, substitute the name of the household member

about whom you are asking.

When you conduct a proxy interview, there are several

questions on the crime incident report where you need to

substitute the name of the person for whom the proxy

interview is being taken, instead of reading the word "you."

This substitution applies to Items 21 through 115 and

Items 135 through 176, but only when you are talking to a

proxy respondent.

Asking Questions in the

Right Order

After completing or updating the appropriate Control Card

items, always interview the household respondent first.

Once you have completed the household respondent's

interview, then interview the remaining household members

one at a time. In most households, each individual

respondent will answer the questions for himself/herself.

Do not attempt to interview more than one household

member at the same time.

Once you start to interview a household member, ask the

questions as instructed on each questionnaire. A great deal

of planning and forethought has gone into designing the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-37

NCVS Control Card and questionnaires, so that you can get

the best results from each interview. Because of this, keep

the following points in mind:

! Never ask questions in a different sequence from the

order in which they are shown on the questionnaire.

! Carefully follow all FR and skip instructions on the

questionnaires.

! Ask questions as they are worded without adding or

deleting words or phrases.

! Do not skip a question when a respondent has already

given you the answer. In most cases, you will still ask

the question as worded without adding or deleting words

or phrases.

Verifying a respondent's previously given answer

without reading the question is only permissible for

items that have an "Ask or Verify" instruction. If you do

not see an "Ask or Verify" instruction, always ask the

question as worded on the questionnaire.

Do not assume that you know the answer without asking

or verifying a question.

Here is an example:

In Item 10 of the NCVS-2, you ask the respondent where

the incident happened. The respondent answers: "It

happened on the street in front of my school." After

marking Box (21) in Item 10, you skip to Item 18.

Item18 instructs you to either "Ask or Verify" -- "Did it

happen outdoors, indoors, or both?" In this situation,

you can just verify that the incident happened outdoors

by saying: "So this incident happened outdoors?"

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-38

Listening to the Respondent

As an FR, your listening skills are of utmost importance.

Listen carefully to what each respondent has to say and

continue listening until the respondent is done giving his/her

answer. By improving your listening skills, you can increase

your chances for recording complete and accurate

information.

Here are some listening "Do's and Don'ts":

Do's:

# Repeat the question as worded in a clear and distinct

voice when the respondent appears to have

misunderstood the question.

# Repeat the respondent's answer when it's necessary to

check your understanding of what the respondent said.

Then pause in hopes that the respondent will expand and

clarify his/her answer.

# Whenever a respondent mentions a crime incident,

complete the screen item on the NCVS-1 and complete

an NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, even if the

respondent makes light of the situation or says that it

was not "serious."

Don'ts:

' Do not tune out what a respondent says when you start

recording an answer. You may need the information to

either clarify the answer or change the way you interpret

the answer.

' Do not interrupt respondents before they are finished,

even if they hesitate while giving their answer. Be

patient and allow respondents sufficient time to recall

the facts.

Also, remember that some respondents may say, "I don't

know," when they really mean, "Let me think about it."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-39

When you experience this situation, allow the

respondent time to finish his/her statement before

repeating the question or probing in some other way.

' Stay neutral and avoid showing shock or disapproval

while a respondent is answering questions.

Using Appropriate Gestures

Your gestures, both verbal and non-verbal, need to convey

to respondents that you are conscientious, concerned, and

courteous. Poor use of gestures can portray a lack of

interest, an indifferent attitude, or even disdain.

As you speak, be mindful of the inflection of your voice, its

tone, and its volume. Also, be aware of what your eye

contact, use of hands and arms, and facial expressions might

be saying to a respondent.

Probing When Necessary

Probing is a technique whereby you casually get the

respondent to provide an answer that meets the question's

objective. Probing is a necessary interviewing technique

because some respondents:

( May not hear the question correctly because of poor

hearing or background noise;

( May not understand the meaning of a word or phrase

used in the question;

( May give you an answer that is too general; or

( May say, "I don't know," because they are trying to:

-- Avoid the subject of the question,

-- Buy some time before giving an answer, or

-- Avoid saying that they did not understand the

question.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-40

Understanding the Intent

of NCVS Questions

Before you can decide whether or not to probe, you need to

understand the intent of each question. By understanding a

question's purpose, you can better decide when to probe and

which probing technique to use.

Here is an example of what can happen when you do not

understand a question's objective:

Item 10 on the NCVS-2:

Where did this incident happen?

Respondent Answers:

In the parking garage of a shopping mall.

Bad Probe:

Would that be a commercial or noncommercial parking

garage?

Good Probe:

Were you charged a fee to park in the garage?

If you do not ask the right probing question, you will not get

an accurate answer. By using a bad probe, the FR is either:

! Assuming that the respondent knows what we mean by

the terms "commercial or noncommercial" or

! Failing to understand that we want to differentiate

between parking lots/garages charging a fee and those

allowing free parking.

Probing Techniques Don't assume that a respondent's answer is always correct.

When you get an answer that does not make sense to you,

you need to immediately decide which probing technique

will work best in the situation.

Choosing the best probing technique will help you to

casually persuade the respondent to expand and/or clarify an

answer.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-41

Here are some standard probing techniques:

" Brief Assenting Comments - Use a comment like, "Yes,

I see," when you want to stimulate the respondent to talk

further. This will also show that you are giving attention

to the respondent's answer.

Here's an example:

Item 45a on the NCVS-1:

During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents

already mentioned,) did anything which you thought

was a crime happen to YOU, but you did NOT report

to the police?

Respondent Answers:

Yes, I saw a prowler.

Brief Assenting Comment:

Yes, I see. Can you tell me more?

" An Expectant Pause - During a personal visit interview,

use an expectant pause together with an inquiring look to

convey to the respondent that you expect him/her to give

you more information.

" Repeating the Question - Repeat the question when the

respondent does not understand or misinterprets the

question, seems unable to make up his/her mind, or

strays from the subject.

Here is an example:

Item 87 on the NCVS-2:

Was this the only time any of these offenders

committed a crime against you or your household or

made threats against you or your household?

Respondent Answers:

No, one of the offenders was arrested 2 years ago for

a bank robbery.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-42

Repeating the Question:

Was this the only time any of these offenders

committed a crime against you or your household or

made threats against you or your household?

" Repeating the Respondent's Reply - Repeat the

respondent's reply exactly as the respondent gives it to

you, when you need to clarify the answer and prompt the

respondent to expand his/her answer. Never interject

your own ideas when repeating the respondent's reply.

Here is an example:

Item 82 on the NCVS-2:

How well did you know the offender(s) - by sight

only, casual acquaintance or well known?

Respondent Answers:

She's just one of the girls on the block.

Repeating Respondent's Answer:

She's just one of the girls on the block? So did you

know the offender by sight only, casual acquaintance

or well known?

Respondent Answers:

I don't even know her name. I just see her around,

so I guess sight only.

" Neutral Questions and a Neutral Tone of Voice - Use

neutral questions when you need to get a fuller, clearer

response. Always use a neutral tone of voice so you

don't sound demanding and upset the respondent.

Here is an example:

Item 98 of the NCVS-2

Had permission to use the (car/motor vehicle) ever

been given to the offender(s)?

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-43

Respondent Answers:

Well, I said maybe he could use it when it wasn't so

new.

Neutral Probe:

Did the offender have permission to use the

car/motor vehicle?

Sometimes a respondent may still misunderstand a

question's meaning or give you an unintended response. If

this happens, you can read a question's answer categories to

the respondent as a "last resort."

If you use this technique, do not bias the respondent's

answer by only reading a few of the answer categories. By

reading all answer categories for a question, you will help

the respondent to better understand the type of answers the

particular question is attempting to get.

Staying Neutral Whichever technique you choose, be careful not to ask

leading questions and not to make the respondent feel

insulted. A "leading" question is one that could influence a

respondent's answer or unnecessarily prolong the interview.

Here is an example of probing with a leading question:

Item 46e on the NCVS-1:

Was the damage under $100 or $100 or more?

Respondent answers

I'm not really sure.

Leading Question Probe:

Do you think that it was probably less than $100?

A More Appropriate Probe

If you include the total amount of damage for all

incidents of vandalism during the last 6 months, would

you say the damage was under $100 or $100 or more?

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-44

Do not assume that you know what the answer should be,

and then lead the respondent to that answer. Keep your

probing questions as neutral as possible, so the respondent

can think objectively about the question and give an accurate

answer.

General Screening

Guidelines

The screening portion of the NCVS interview is very

important. The NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, is

designed to give each respondent every opportunity to

remember any crime incidents that occurred during the

6-month reference period. The BJS and the U.S. Census

Bureau have specific reasons for the wording of each

question and the sequencing of each group of questions.

While conducting the screen interview, do not jeopardize

their efforts by eliminating questions or asking questions in

a different sequence. Also, NEVER eliminate the screen

interview by just asking whether any crimes occurred during

the 6-month reference period or since the household's last

interview.

Asking Applicable

Questions

During each enumeration period, ask the household

respondent and all remaining household members ALL

applicable screen questions. Since respondents can easily

forget many crime incidents, it is essential to ask all

applicable questions each time the sample household is

assigned for interview. This is the only way we can ensure

that we collect complete and accurate information.

Handling Difficult

Respondents

Some respondents may not want to go through the interview

on the NCVS-1 for various reasons, and may say:

( Let's save some time. I can tell you up front that I

haven't been a victim of crime since the last time I talked

to you.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-45

( You don't need to read all those examples of stolen

items, because nothing was stolen from me or anyone

else in this household.

When you need to convince a respondent to complete the

entire screen interview, try the following techniques:

• "Some crime incidents are easily forgotten. By asking

these screen questions, you may remember something

that you've put out of your mind. To guarantee that I

don't miss any crime incidents, I'm required to ask each

question and allow you time to make sure that you

haven't forgotten anything."

• "Even if you haven't been a victim of crime during the

last 6 months, we are also interested in any other

changes in your life, such as marital status, household

income, and job changes. These characteristics also

play a part in examining criminal victimizations in the

United States. I'm required to ask these questions each

time your household is assigned for interview.

Otherwise, we can't get a complete and up-to-date

picture of both crime victims and nonvictims for

comparative purposes."

• (Only use this technique when a supplement is

attached to the NCVS interview.)

"For this interview, our sponsor has added a few new

questions for a specific study they are authorized to

undertake. The information we collect from these new

questions, along with the original questions, is

essential to our sponsor and the completion of this

study."

Never tell the respondent that you do not remember what

you were told during the last interview or that all the

information he/she provided during the last interview has

gone to Washington.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-46

General Guidelines for

Recording Answers

After listening carefully to a respondent's answer, take great

care to record the answer accurately and legibly. By

recording answers accurately and legibly, you can help

guarantee that the information you collect is understood

clearly by editors and keyers who need to process your

completed work.

For questions that require you to mark an (X) to record the

answer, make sure that your (X) is easy to read and fills up

the answer box without going outside the box. Making your

(X) either too large, too small, or too light could cause

confusion and/or mistakes during keying.

For questions that require you to write in an answer, make

sure that you print the answer neatly so someone else can

easily read your entry later.

Correcting Answers If you need to change an answer, line through the old entry

and mark (X) the correct answer box or print your new entry

above the old entry. Do not erase an entry unless you are

specifically instructed to do so in this manual.

Here are two examples of correcting answers by lining

through old entries--

Example #1

)

None -

SKIP to 40a

)

4 or more

Example #2

Months (1-11) -

SKIP

to 33b

Years (Round to nearest whole year) -

Fill Check Item A

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-47

Here's an example of when you are allowed to erase an old

entry--

Item 25b on the Control Card is used to enter the date of

interview. After completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen

Questionnaire, and any NCVS-2s, Crime Incident Reports,

for a second through seventh enumeration period household,

you need to erase the interview date from the previous

enumeration period and enter the new interview date for the

current enumeration period.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-48

Topic 7. Closing the Interview and "Thank You" Letters

Leaving on Good Terms

Since you or someone else from the Census Bureau may

need to contact a sample household again, always leave the

household with a good feeling towards you and the Census

Bureau. By ending every interview with a friendly and

polite "Thank You," you will be paving the way for future

contacts.

Let respondents know that we appreciate the time that they

gave for the interview, and tell them that they may be

contacted again for this survey. Always remain sensitive,

concerned, and courteous throughout the entire interview.

By closing the interview properly, you are nurturing a

positive image of our agency, and improving the chances for

successful followup contacts during editing, reinterview, or

other surveys.

Using "Thank You" Letters

We have prepared two different "Thank You" letters for you

to use--the NCVS-593(L) and the NCVS-594(L). Each

letter has a specific purpose, and we do not intend for you to

hand or mail a "Thank You" letter after every NCVS

interview. Both of these "Thank You" letters are printed in

English and Spanish.

These letters not only thank the household for their

cooperation, but also relay to them again how important this

survey really is. Depending on the circumstances, you can

either hand or mail the letter to the household. If you mail

the "Thank You" letter, make sure that you use the "mailing

address" from either Item 6a or 6c on the Control Card.

Regardless of whether or not you give the household a

"Thank You" letter, always remember to thank them

yourself at the end of the interview.

First Through Sixth

Enumeration Period

For first through sixth enumeration period households, use

the NCVS-593(L) "Thank You" letter whenever you feel

that the household shows any signs that they may refuse to

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 2

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-49

be interviewed again. For example, a household member

may become annoyed at the length of the interview or at the

number of times you have contacted the household. In these

situations, a "Thank You" letter does not guarantee

cooperation, but it may help to leave a positive impression,

and make it easier to gain their cooperation for future

interviews.

Seventh Enumeration

Period

At the end of the seventh enumeration period interview,

always make sure to either hand or mail the respondent a

NCVS-594(L), "Thank You" letter.

Noting the Control Card Whenever you hand or mail a "Thank You" letter to a

household, briefly note that fact, along with the date, in the

"Notes" space below Item 30g on the Control Card.

Part A, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

A2-50

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-1

Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Basic Survey Procedures A3-2

2 Monthly Tasks A3-9

3 Daily Tasks A3-12

4 Specific Household Procedures A3-15

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-2

Topic 1. Basic Survey Procedures

Length of Time in Sample

Each address that is selected as a sample unit for the NCVS

is usually interviewed seven times. These interviews are

conducted once every 6 months over a 3-year period. This

allows us to compile a continuous record of the sample

household's experiences at a reasonable cost and with the

least amount of inconvenience to the household.

Enumeration Periods

We refer to each time a sample household's address is

assigned for interview as an "enumeration period." Since we

interview or attempt to interview each sample household

seven times, then there are seven "enumeration periods" for

each sample address.

When a sample address is assigned to you for interview, you

need to check the enumeration period indicated by the

regional office on the case's Control Card. Look at Item 5,

Letter Sent, to see which enumeration period is the last one

marked by the regional office. Some of the procedures you

need to follow will vary depending on the enumeration

period for the current interview.

Here are some examples:

Since the household roster on the Control Card is blank for a

first enumeration period, you would ask the question for

Item 13a on the Control Card.

HOUSEHOLD ROSTER

Last name first

What are the names of all persons living or staying here?

Start with the name of the person or one of the persons who

(owns/rents) this home.

List all persons who usually live here and all persons who are

temporarily absent. Be sure to INCLUDE infants under 1 year of age.

13a

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-3

For the second through seventh enumeration periods, you

would ask the question in Item 14 on the Control Card,

instead of asking the question in Item 13a.

HOUSEHOLD ROSTER COVERAGE

Ask each time household is interviewed.

(If "Yes," enter name in item 13a above.)

I have listed

(Read names in item 13a

and verify 13c as appropriate).

Have I missed anyone else living or

staying here such as any babies, any

lodgers, or anyone who is away at

present traveling or in the hospital?

Control Card Item 14, together with other selected items, are

printed with shading. After the first enumeration period,

each of these shaded Control Card items needs to be

updated:

! During each subsequent enumeration period,

! When indicated, only during the 3rd, 5th, and 7th

enumeration periods.

Identifying the current enumeration period accurately will

enable you to ask the appropriate Control Card questions

and update the appropriate Control Card items during each

enumeration period.

Reference Periods

For the NCVS, the reference period covers the 6-month time

period prior to the interview date. When conducting

interviews, we are interested only in crime incidents that

occurred during a household member's specific 6-month

reference period.

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-4

For the first enumeration period, each household member's

reference period will start on the first day of the month

6 months prior to the interview date, and end on the day

prior to the interview date.

Here is an example:

If a household respondent's first enumeration period

interview is conducted on January 3, 2003, then the current

reference period for the household respondent would be

July 1, 2002 through January 2, 2003.

If the remaining household members were interviewed for

the first enumeration period on January 4, 2003, then the

current reference period for each of these household

members would be July 1, 2002 through January 3, 2003.

For a first enumeration period household, all household

members will have the same start date, but each household

member's end date may vary based on the member's current

interview date.

After the first enumeration period, reference periods for all

remaining enumeration periods will start on the date of

the household member's last interview and end on the day

prior to the member's current interview date. Unlike the first

enumeration period, each household member could have a

different reference period start date for the second through

seventh enumeration period based on the member's last

interview date.

The following two terms are often used to describe this type

of reference period:

! Period-to-period recounting or

! Floating reference period.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-5

By using this type of a reference period, we can compile a

continuous record of the household's experiences for the

3 years that they are in sample.

For second through seventh enumeration periods, you would

normally use the date entered in Item 25b on the Control

Card as the household member's start date for the reference

period. However, if the following exceptions exist, do not

use the date in Control Card Item 25b as the start date for the

household member's reference period:

! When no date is entered in Item 25b (person was a

noninterview last enumeration period) - The start date

for the reference period would be the first day of the

month 6 months prior to the current interview date.

! When date entered in Item 25b is more than

6 months prior to the interview date - The start date

for the reference period would be the first day of the

month 6 months prior to the interview date.

! Household respondent is a different person than

the last household respondent - The reference period

start date for the current household respondent would

be the date entered in Item 25b for the household

respondent from the previous enumeration period.

! Cannot determine which household member was

the last household respondent - The reference period

start date for the current household respondent would

be the first day of the month 6 months prior to the

interview date.

Your NCVS Field Representative's Information Card

Booklet, NCVS-554, has a checklist on page 10 for

determining reference periods for interviewing and examples

of reference periods on page 11. Two-year calendars are

also provided on pages 12 and 13 to help the respondent

remember the reference period for the current interview and

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-6

also enable him/her to determine the exact month that an

incident occurred.

Once you have determined the start date for the household

member's reference period, enter this start date where

indicated in the following questions on the Basic Screen

Questionnaire, NCVS-1: Items 36a, 40a, and 46a for the

household respondent and Items 36a and 40a for the

remaining household members.

While interviewing, it is important to keep reminding the

respondent of the starting and ending dates for the reference

period. If a respondent seems to be having difficulty

keeping track of the reference period dates, try adding the

actual dates after reading "in the last 6 months." This will

help the respondent to stay focused on the correct time frame

for the interview.

Incidents Outside of

Reference Period

Remember to only complete an incident report for incidents

that occurred during the reference period for the current

interview. If at any point during an interview, you discover

that the incident is outside of the reference period, you need

to discontinue taking information for the incident and follow

the proper procedures for marking the incident "out-of-

scope." (See Part C, Chapter 1, for out-of-scope incidents.)

Incidents Occurring on

the Day of the Interview

Also, if a respondent reports an incident that occurred on the

same day that you are interviewing him/her, you would not

complete an NCVS-2 for this incident until the household's

next enumeration period. In this situation, make a note on

the Control Card reminding you to complete an NCVS-2 for

the incident during the next enumeration period.

Interview Scheme

All households in the NCVS sample are divided into six

groups, which are referred to as "rotation" groups. During

the course of a 6-month period, one-sixth of the full sample

or a "panel" from each rotation group is assigned for

interview each month. This interviewing scheme enables us

to spread out the interviewing work fairly evenly throughout

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-7

the year, so we can maintain a regular staff of FRs with

routine monthly NCVS assignments.

Here are some examples:

Sample households in panel 1 of rotation groups 1 through 6

are assigned for interview in the months of January and

July.

Sample households in panel 2 of rotation groups 1 through 6

are assigned for interview in the months of February and

August.

By the time we get to panel 6 of rotation groups 1 through 6,

which are assigned for interview in the months of June and

December, we will have assigned for interview all sample

households from panels 1 through 6 of rotation groups 1

through 6.

Interview Period

An interview period is the time that you are allowed to

complete all of the NCVS interviews assigned to you for an

interview month. Typically, your interview period will

begin on the first day of the month. Ideally, we would like

your assignment to be completed as quickly as possible once

the interview period begins. Your supervisor will give you

the interview closeout date for each interview month. This

will be the "drop dead" date by which all NCVS cases

assigned to you for the month must be completed.

The majority of the NCVS cases in each assignment will

require telephone interviews. Always try to complete all of

your telephone interviews:

! Before conducting your personal visit interviews and

! Within the first few days of the interview period.

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-8

This procedure allows you to detect any replacement

households or other situations from your telephone

interviews that could require personal visit interviews before

you plan your personal visit work schedule.

Some assignment areas (PSUs) have been selected for

Computer-Assisted Telephone Interviewing (CATI). If you

are assigned work in a CATI PSU, you will also receive

Control Cards for the sample addresses scheduled for CATI

interviewing. Do not attempt to interview any "CATI Hold"

sample addresses, unless your supervisor tells you to do so.

You will only need to interview a "CATI Hold" sample

address when the CATI facility is unable to conduct the

interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-9

Topic 2. Monthly Tasks

Monthly Instructions

About one week prior to the start of the interview month,

your regional office will send you a memorandum with

specific instructions for the upcoming interview month.

When you receive your monthly memorandum, read the

entire memorandum very carefully and contact your

supervisor if you have any questions about the information

provided.

Preparing to Interview

When you receive the monthly memorandum for an

interview month, you will also receive:

! Your interviewing assignment for the month,

! Any listing work for the month, and

! Any supplies you may need.

Checking New

Assignments

As soon as you receive your monthly package of interview

materials, check the items listed on the Transmittal

Form 11-35 that accompanies these materials. If anything

listed on the transmittal is missing from your package, call

your supervisor immediately.

Sorting Your Assignment After checking your assignment, the next step is to make

sure that your assigned cases are sorted as described below:

First Sort: Separate your cases into three stacks--

• Telephone interviews

• Personal visit interviews

• CATI hold cases - Only interview CATI hold cases

when instructed to do so by your supervisor. This

will happen when the CATI facility is unable to

complete the interview and the case is recycled to the

field staff for completion.

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-10

Second Sort: Separate your personal visit interviews so

that cases in segments that are geographically close to one

another are stacked together.

Organizing Your Work

Schedule

As you organize your assignment for the interview month,

take into consideration the geographic distribution of your

cases and the number of new segments in your assignment.

Then, follow the steps listed below:

Step

1 Always conduct your telephone interviews FIRST.

2 Try to conduct your personal visit interviews in

segments with first enumeration period households

next. This will allow sufficient time should you

encounter unexpected problems with these cases. For

first enumeration period households, you must

conduct the household respondent's interview IN

PERSON. However, if the remaining household

members are not available at the time of your visit, it

is acceptable to interview these household members

by telephone once you have completed the household

respondent's interview in person.

NOTE: Regardless of the enumeration period, the

household respondent always must be the

FIRST household member interviewed and

he/she must be at least 18 years of age and

knowledgeable about the household. For

example, the reference person

or one of the

other household members who owns or rents

the home. (See page A2-11 for exceptions

to the age requirement.)

3 Conduct any remaining personal visit interviews in a

logical sequence so that you keep to a minimum any

backtracking or return trips to a segment.

Completing Your

Assignment

Always attempt to complete your interviewing assignment

as early in the interview month as possible. Transmit your

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-11

completed work on a flow basis as frequently as possible.

Your supervisor will provide you with a final transmittal

date or closeout date for each interview month. (See

Chapter 7 for more details on receipt and transmittal of

work.)

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-12

Topic 3. Daily Tasks

Planning Your Daily

Schedule

It is important to carefully plan your daily schedule so that

you get the maximum amount of interviewing work

accomplished during your workday. Keep the following

points in mind as you plan your workday:

! Geographic location of assigned addresses,

! Any previously made appointments, and

! Best time to visit or call the household

(noted in

Control Card Item 26e)

Assembling Your Materials

Before you leave home to start your workday, it is very

important to make sure that you have everything you might

need to carry you through your entire interviewing schedule

for the day. Make sure that you take current versions of the

following items with you:

" NCVS-550, Interviewing Manual for Field

Representatives

" NCVS-554, Field Representative's Information Card

Booklet

" A sufficient supply of blank forms, such as the

NCVS-500, NCVS-1 and -1A, NCVS-2, and the

NCVS-7.

" Copies of both introductory letters, NCVS-572(L) and

NCVS-573(L), and the Fact Sheet brochure,

NCVS-110.

" The appropriate segment folders containing the

Control Cards for each assigned case within the

segment.

Conducting Telephone

Interviews and Callbacks

Since the primary purpose of conducting NCVS interviews

by telephone is to reduce travel costs and save money,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-13

avoid traveling to assigned segments that require telephone

interviews until you have attempted to conduct all assigned

telephone interviews.

Typically, interviews for second through seventh

enumeration period households are conducted by telephone.

Always check Control Card Item 26e to see when the

household prefers to be contacted. (See Part A, Chapter 5,

for more details on telephone interviews.)

Conducting Personal Visit

Interviews

In addition to the first enumeration period households,

other sample households may require personal visit

interviews because they:

! Do not have a telephone on which they can be

contacted,

! Refuse to give us their telephone number,

! Tell us that a telephone interview is not acceptable, or

! Are replacement households.

Control Card Items 26a through 26d provide this

information for second through seventh enumeration period

households. (See Part A, Chapter 5, for more details

about personal visit interviews.)

Transcribing Information

Both the Basic Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1)

and the

Noninterview Record

(NCVS-7)

require you to transcribe

information onto specific items from the Control Card

(NCVS-500)

. Since it is very easy to make transcription

errors, take your time and carefully transcribe the required

information. (See Part B, Chapters 2 and 4, for more

details about transcribing information from the Control

Card.)

Whenever you fill a Crime Incident Report

(NCVS-2)

for a

household member, you need to transcribe information

from the NCVS-2 onto Control Card Item 32. This

transcription is done after you have ended your contact with

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-14

the household. The information that you transcribe onto

Control Card Item 32 will help ensure that we do not

duplicate incidents. We use the term "bounding"

information to describe the information transcribed onto

Control Card Item 32 during each enumeration period for

each of the household’s reported incidents. (See Part C,

Chapter 1, for more details about bounding information.)

Before Editing Your Work

After you have completed all the required transcriptions,

check to see if any of your notes need clarification and

complete or clarify any INTER-COMMs that your

interviews may require.

Editing Completed Forms

Once you are done with the transcriptions, notes, and

INTER-COMMS, edit any forms that you have completed.

Make sure that any listing sheets, Control Cards, and

questionnaires that you completed or updated are filled

properly, accurately, and legibly. (See Part B, Chapter 5,

for more details about editing your completed work.)

Sending "Thank You"

Letters

As needed, mail "Thank You" letters to respondents using

the mailing address from Control Card Item 6a or 6c. (See

Part A, Chapter 2, for more details about sending "Thank

You" letters.)

Transmitting Completed

Work

Transmit your completed work on a flow basis, preferably

on a daily basis whenever possible. Frequent transmittals

will enable work to flow easier through the various

processing stages. (See Part A, Chapter 7, for more

details about transmitting completed work.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-15

Topic 4. Specific Household Procedures

Starting With the

Household Respondent

Once you have introduced yourself and verified that you

have contacted the correct address, then you must ask to

speak with:

! One of the persons who owns or rents the home,

! The previous household respondent, or

! A household member who is at least 18 years of age

and knowledgeable about the household.

Remember to show your identification card for each

personal visit interview. When you know that you are

speaking to a household member at the sample address,

then you can introduce the survey.

ALWAYS complete the household respondent's interview

before interviewing any remaining eligible household

members

(household members who are 12 years of age and

older)

. Without a completed interview from an eligible

household respondent, the sample household will classify

as a Type A noninterview. (See Part A, Chapter 6, for

more details about noninterviews.)

After you have identified an eligible household respondent,

follow these steps to interview him/her:

Step

1 Introduce yourself and the survey, showing your

identification card for each personal visit interview.

2 Ask or update Control Card Items 6b through 25a and

Item 25c for the sample household.

3 On the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire,

transcribe the sample, control number, and household

number from the Control Card onto the top of the

cover page. Then, fill Items 1 through 4 on the cover

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-16

page. You will complete most of the remaining items

on the NCVS-1 cover page after the entire household

has been interviewed

(follow the instructions on the

NCVS-1 for the remaining items)

4 On page 2 of the NCVS-1, complete Items 17 through

(transcribe information onto Items 20 through 28

after leaving the household)

. Then, enter the

interview date in Item 29. Next, ask and complete the

mobility questions in Item 33, and the questions about

businesses operated from the sample address in

Items 34 and 35.

5 On pages 3 through 10 of the NCVS-1, ask and

complete the screen questions

(Items 36 through 46)

with the household respondent

6 On page 10 of the NCVS-1, complete Check Item G

7 Complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, for each crime incident reported by the

household respondent in the screen questions. The

only exception to this rule would be a series crime.

(See Part C, Chapter 3, for more details about series

crimes.)

8 After completing all required NCVS-2's for the

household respondent, go back to page 11 on the

NCVS-1 and complete Check Item H through Check

Item I.

9 Enter or update the interview date in Item 25b on the

Control Card. Also, ask or update Items 26 through

28.

10 Review all the forms that you just completed with the

household respondent (NCVS-500, NCVS-1, and, if

required, any NCVS-2s).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-17

Make sure that:

# You asked the household respondent all

appropriate questions on each of these forms.

# You not only asked but also marked each screen

question accurately on the NCVS-1.

# You completed an NCVS-2 for each incident

reported by the household respondent.

11 Close the interview and thank the household

respondent. If there are other household members

present who are at least 12 years of age, ask to

interview one of them next.

Interviewing Individual

Respondents

You must complete the household respondent's interview

before you can interview any other eligible household

members. Once you are done interviewing the household

respondent, then complete any remaining eligible

household member's interviews one at a time.

During your initial contact with a sample household, always

try to complete as many interviews with individual

respondents as possible. Try to keep household callbacks

for individual respondents to a minimum.

Your initial contact with a first enumeration period

household must be in person. However, after interviewing

the household respondent in person, any individual

respondents in the household who are unavailable during

your initial contact can be interviewed later by telephone.

(See Part A, Chapter 5, for more details about telephone

interviews.)

Once you have completed the household respondent's

interview, follow these steps to interview each individual

respondent:

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-18

Step

1 Start by introducing yourself and the survey.

2 Identify the respondent and type of interview by

completing Items 17 through 19 on the NCVS-1

(transcribe information onto Items 20 through 28

after leaving the household)

and enter the interview

date in Item 29. (See pages 11, 16, and 21 on the

NCVS-1.)

3 Ask the mobility questions in Item 33 on the

NCVS-1. (See pages 12, 18, and 24 on the

NCVS-1.)

4 Ask the screen questions for the individual respondent

(Items 36 through 45)

on the NCVS-1.

5 Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident

reported in the individual respondent's screen

questions.

6 After completing all required NCVS-2s for an

individual respondent, enter or update the interview

date in Item 25b on the NCVS-500.

7 Review all the forms that you just completed with the

respondent

(NCVS-1 and, if required, any NCVS-2s)

This review is important because it can lessen the

number of callbacks to the household for missing

information.

As you review completed forms, make sure that you:

# Asked the respondent all appropriate questions

on the NCVS-1 and marked each screen

question accurately.

# Completed a separate NCVS-2 for each incident

reported by the respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 3

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-19

8 Closed the interview and thanked the respondent. If

there are other household members present who are at

least 12 years of age, ask to interview one of them

next. If the remaining eligible household members

are unavailable, ask for the best time to callback and

interview the rest of the household. Use Item 30g on

the NCVS-500 to enter notes about callbacks

(dates,

times, etc.)

Part A, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

A3-20

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-1

Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Basic Field Duties A4-2

2 Additional Duties A4-5

3 Performance Standards A4-7

4 Field Evaluations--Observation and

Reinterview A4-12

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-2

Topic 1. Basic Field Duties

Overview

As a field representative for the National Crime

Victimization Survey, you will be assigned to work in one of

the NCVS sample areas or Primary Sampling Units (PSUs).

Most of your duties will be the same for each interview

month. Your work will pretty much fall into two main

categories--listing and interviewing.

Listing Assignments

During your first month on the job, you will not receive any

listing assignments. You will begin learning the listing and

coverage procedures during your second month on the job.

This training will consist of a series of self-studies together

with on-the-job training.

In very general terms, your listing work will consist of

systematically documenting on listing sheets the existence of

living quarters where people live or could live within an

assigned segment. Detailed procedures for completing your

listing assignments in each segment type are provided in the

Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8. Your listing

assignments could be in all four segment types--Unit,

Permit, Area, and Group Quarters.

Unit Segments For single-unit addresses, no listing is necessary and you

will not receive listing sheets for these addresses.

For multi-unit addresses, you will be verifying and updating

the listing sheets for these assigned addresses when you are

at the address to conduct interviews. There are separate

procedures for small multi-unit addresses (2 - 9 units) and

large multi-unit addresses (10 or more units). (See

Chapter 2 of the Listing and Coverage Manual for more

details on listing unit segment addresses.)

Permit Segments When you make your first visit to an assigned address within

a permit segment, you will list all units found at the address.

There are separate procedures for listing a single-unit

address and a multi-unit address. You could also be

assigned a previously listed address to verify and, if

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-3

necessary, correct before you conduct interviews at the

address. (See Chapter 3 of the Listing and Coverage

Manual for more details on listing permit segment

addresses.)

Area Segments Before any units are selected for interview from an area

segment address, there are a variety of tasks that need to be

completed. These tasks include: precanvassing, canvassing

and map entries, and listing units. You could also be asked

to update and record changes to area segment listings. (See

Chapter 5 of the Listing and Coverage Manual for more

details about listing area segment addresses.)

Group Quarters Segments

A group quarters is a type of living quarters where the

residents share common facilities or receive authorized care

or custody. There are three types of group quarters--

institutional, noninstitutional, and military barracks. Only

noninstitutional group quarters units are eligible for

interview. By definition, a group quarters is not a housing

unit.

A group quarters segment is made up of one or more

group quarters that were identified in 1990 census blocks

originally screened for unit segments. In addition to listing

group quarters in group quarters segments, you could also

find and list group quarters units in area and unit segments.

Your listing assignment tasks in a group quarters segment

could include: identifying eligible units, choosing listing

methods, and listing units in group quarters. You could also

be asked to update a previously listed group quarters listing

sheet. (See Chapter 4 of the Listing and Coverage Manual

for more details about listing group quarters.)

Interviewing Assignments

Each interview month, your interviews will be a

combination of personal visit and telephone interviews and

could include addresses from any of the four segment types.

Regardless of the interview method, always conduct your

interviews with discretion and courtesy. These two traits are

especially important in gaining a respondent's confidence

and continued cooperation.

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-4

Your basic interviewing duties include:

! Filling or updating Control Cards (NCVS-500) for new,

returning, replacement, and noninterview households.

! Filling the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) for the

household respondent and each remaining household

member who is at least 12 years of age. For households

with more than four members, you will also fill an

NCVS-1A for each additional household member.

! Filling a Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2) for each

incident reported in the Basic Screen Questionnaire.

! Completing a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) for each

sample address that you are not able to interview during

the interview period, such as refusals, vacant units,

demolished units, and so forth. (See Part A, Chapter 6,

for more details about noninterviews.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-5

Topic 2. Additional Duties

Be Flexible

Due to the nature of interviewing work, you need to be ready

to work both day and evening hours to reach sample

households. Some of your respondents may be hard to

reach, so you will need to contact sample households at

various times of day and on various days of the week. If you

are not flexible with your work schedule, you will find it

very difficult to complete all of your assigned interviews.

Keep Up to Date

It is important to read carefully and try to absorb all memos,

self-studies, or other instructional materials concerning your

NCVS work. From time-to-time, our sponsor may decide to

add survey questions or reword existing questions. Other

times, you may receive instructions on how to perform a

specific task using new procedures.

In order for you to understand the intent and usage of these

changes, you must read and understand all instructions that

you receive. When you receive any NCVS instructions or

self-studies, keep in mind that they are intended to help you

do your job better and more efficiently.

Do Not Procrastinate

Arrange your work schedule for each interview month so

that you can complete the majority of your cases as soon as

possible after your assignment begins. If you delay most of

your interviewing until later in the interview period, you run

the risk of not completing your assignment by your closeout

date. Remember that most sample households will require

more than one contact to complete interviews for all eligible

household members.

Make Several Transmittals

It is very important that you return your completed NCVS

work on a flow basis to your regional office. Whenever

possible, send your completed work every workday. By

sending frequent shipments of completed work, you will

enable your supervisor to correct problems quickly and

allow all other related processes to run more smoothly.

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-6

Keep Accurate Records

Accurate administrative records are important for both you

and your supervisor. Make sure that each workday you

record:

! The amount of time you spent on NCVS work,

! The current status of your assignment, and

! The number of miles you traveled for NCVS

interviewing.

Meet Expected Standards

Your main goal for your work on the NCVS is to strive for

the highest possible degree of accuracy and efficiency. To

aid you in meeting and maintaining this goal, the Census

Bureau has developed performance standards by which your

supervisor can rate your performance. (See Topic 3 of this

chapter for more details about performance standards.)

Additional Reading

If you are interested in reading additional general

information about your interviewing job, refer to Chapter 1

of the Administrative Handbook for Intermittent and Part-

Time Schedule A Employees, Form 11-55.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-7

Topic 3. Performance Standards

Overview

The success of the NCVS is dependent on accurate and

complete information. We count on you, our field

representatives, to help us succeed in this effort.

This survey operates on a fixed budget and the only way we

can conduct the NCVS on schedule and within budget is

with your cooperation. We depend on you to complete your

work accurately and efficiently.

Performance Ratings

We hope that you will always strive for the highest level of

quality and productivity in your NCVS work. We also

realize that a new field representative cannot be expected to

start out with an "outstanding" performance rating.

However, we do expect you to do your best and to improve

as you gain more interviewing experience.

To help you meet and maintain high performance standards,

we have established measures for various elements of your

job. Your supervisor will evaluate your performance on a

continuing basis and will keep monthly records on your

level of performance.

Twice a year, your supervisor will rate your response and

accuracy rates into one of two categories: Pass or Fail.

Production Standards

The importance of completing your assignment within the

specified interview period is not only important from a cost

standpoint, but is also essential for meeting our processing

deadlines. With the exception of holidays, always begin

your assignment on the first working day of the month. Try

to complete as quickly as possible all interviews assigned for

an interview month. Schedule your work so that your

assignment is completed before the closeout date for the

interview month.

Planning Your Travel

Route

Plan your travel route so you can accomplish your NCVS

work and move from one segment to another using the least

amount of time and mileage.

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-8

Keeping Callbacks to a

Minimum

Try to plan your personal visits during the most productive

hours of the day and days of the week, so you can find

household members at home and reduce the number of

return visits to a sample address. Evening hours and

weekends tend to be most productive in areas where a

majority of the household members work outside the home.

Always remember to make the least number of trips to a

sample area as possible to complete your assignment. If you

need to make personal visit callbacks in a sample area where

you still have some initial visits, try to complete these

interviews in one trip. Also, if no one is at home at the time

of your visit, attempt to find out the best time to contact the

household before you leave the sample area. You can

inquire of neighbors, apartment managers, janitors, and the

like, but you cannot mention the survey name to these

people.

Conducting Efficient

Interviews

Here are some pointers for saving time without sacrificing

accuracy:

! Become thoroughly familiar with the sequence of

items on the Control Card and NCVS questionnaires.

! Make sure you understand how to enter answers on

each NCVS form.

! Familiarize yourself with the possible answer

categories on each NCVS form.

! Be prepared to answer respondents' questions briefly

and clearly, regardless of the type of question. To help

you prepare for respondent questions, you can read the

introductory letters, your job aid, NCVS At a Glance

(NCVS-500.1), the NCVS Fact Sheet (NCVS-110),

and this manual (NCVS-550).

Quality Interviews

Your supervisor considers the quality of your work to be just

as important as your productivity. It will be of no value to

this survey if you transmit your entire assignment early in

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-9

the interview period, but most of the returned forms are

either incomplete or inaccurate.

The instructions provided in this manual provide all the

information you will need to conduct NCVS interviews

efficiently and accurately. If you experience special

situations or problems that are not covered in this manual,

either call your supervisor or document the situation or

problem on an Interviewer Communication (INTER-

COMM), Form 11-36.

Accuracy Rate Your supervisor will periodically provide you with a report

showing interviewing errors that were detected as your

completed work was reviewed. Besides documenting your

errors, this report will also give you advice on how you can

avoid or eliminate similar errors in the future.

Strive to become thoroughly familiar with all NCVS

procedures and to conduct your interviews in a uniform and

consistent manner. If you achieve these goals, you will

eliminate most interviewing errors.

Response Rate For each interview month, your supervisor will calculate the

response rate for your NCVS interviewing assignment.

Your response rate takes into consideration how many

interviews you were able to complete from all eligible

sample addresses assigned to you (excluding Type B and C

noninterviews). By reviewing your response rate, you and

your supervisor can track how effective you are at obtaining

interviews.

Maintaining a high response rate is essential to ensuring that

our NCVS sample data are representative of the entire U.S.

population. Failure to interview all eligible household

members can introduce a serious bias into the survey. For

example, sample persons who are difficult to contact or who

resist being interviewed could have very different

victimization experiences than those sample persons who

are easy to contact and interview.

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-10

You need to keep to a minimum all Type A noninterview

households and Type Z noninterview persons.

When you are assigned a sample household that is eligible

for interview and you are unable to interview ANY

household members (including the household respondent),

the case is classified as a Type A noninterview. Some

Type A noninterview reasons include:

! No one home,

! Temporarily absent through the entire interview period,

and

! Refused.

An eligible household member is classified as a Type Z

noninterview when the household member cannot be

interviewed during the current interview period. Never

classify a household respondent for a sample address as

a Type Z noninterview. When you are not able to

complete an interview with a household respondent, you

must classify the sample address as a Type A noninterview.

Some of the Type Z noninterview reasons include:

! Person is never available,

! Person refused,

! Person is physically and/or mentally unable to answer

and no proxy respondent is available, and

! Person is temporarily absent and no proxy respondent is

available.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-11

The best strategy for minimizing Type A and Type Z

noninterviews is to:

" Work on improving your salesmanship skills so you

are better equipped to gain cooperation from all types

of respondents and

" Contact respondents when you are most likely to reach

them at home.

(See Part A, Chapter 6, for techniques on reducing

noninterviews.)

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-12

Topic 4. Field Evaluations--Observations and Reinterview

Observations

In addition to the review of your work in the regional office,

your supervisor or his/her representative will periodically

observe you actually performing your listing and

interviewing work.

The first two on-the-job or induction observations are for the

purpose of providing post-classroom training during actual

work situations on interviewing techniques and NCVS

concepts. Both of these observations are usually done

within your first 6 months on the job.

All other observations are aimed at evaluating and

improving your on-the-job performance. Normally, you will

be observed at least once a year and you will probably be

with the observer for a minimum of 6 hours. This is the

average length of time required for reviewing your general

performance and rectifying specific performance problems.

Keep in mind that observations are the best opportunities for

you to receive individual assistance with any problems you

are experiencing. Observations are designed to help you

improve all measures of performance.

Prior to your observation, the observer will contact you to

make the final arrangements and give you any pre-

observation instructions. These instructions may vary

depending on the purpose of the observation.

For a Low Response Rate If one of the purposes for the observation is to help you

improve a low response rate, you will probably be instructed

to:

# Delay interviewing households where you suspect that

you might experience problems and

# Keep interviewing materials for problem households

that you have already contacted.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 4

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-13

This will allow the observer to work with you on these cases

and help you improve your techniques for gaining the

cooperation of sample households.

For a Low Accuracy Rate If one of the purposes for the observation is to help you

improve a low accuracy rate, you will probably be instructed

to carefully edit and retain your previous day's work. This

will allow the observer to show you ways to reduce the

number of interviewing errors.

For a High Number of

Minutes per Case

If one of the purposes for the observation is to help you

spend less time on each case, you will probably want to be

prepared to discuss how you:

# Plan your itinerary,

# Use the county and segment maps to locate assigned

addresses,

# Use the telephone, and

# Decide when to contact assigned households.

Reinterview

Reinterview is a method we use to independently evaluate

your on-the-job performance. At least once a year and

possibly up to four times a year, your supervisor or his/her

representative will redo a portion of your assignment for the

interview month. You will not be notified beforehand as to

which month's assignment is targeted for reinterview.

The reinterviewer will recontact some of the same

households that you have already contacted. The

reinterview answers will be compared against the

original answers that you recorded, differences will be

identified, and reasons for the differences will be

determined.

The reinterviewer will verify that:

! The correct sample units were interviewed,

Part A, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

A4-14

! The listing sheets were completed or updated properly,

! The Control Cards were completed or updated

properly,

! All screen questions on the NCVS-1 were asked and

all answers recorded,

! The appropriate number of NCVS-2s were completed

for each reported incident, and

! Any noninterviews were classified accurately.

Once the reinterview is completed, the reinterviewer will

contact you so both of you can review the results together.

During this review, errors will be discussed and the

appropriate concepts and procedures will be reviewed. In

some cases the extent and type of errors will require a

"special needs" observation and/or retraining.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-1

Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Identifying the Method of Interview A5-2

2 Qualifications for Using the Personal

Visit Method A5-3

3 Qualifications for Using the

Telephone Method A5-8

4 Instructions for Conducting

Telephone Interviews A5-10

5 Telephone Interviewing Skills A5-17

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-2

Topic 1. Identifying the Method of Interview

Checking Control Cards

Each interview month, some of your interviews will be

designated as personal visit interviews and some will be

designated as telephone interviews. Your regional office

will separate the Control Cards for your assignment and

place a card on top of each stack to identify which ones

require personal visit interviews and which ones require

telephone interviews. Keep these two stacks separate until

you have completed all cases in the telephone interviews

stack.

Depending on your assignment area (PSU), you could

receive a third stack of Control Cards with a card on top

identifying the stack as "CATI Hold" sample addresses.

You will only interview a sample address from this stack if

your supervisor asks you to do so, because the CATI facility

was unable to get a completed interview.

Your regional office will also indicate on your assignment

control sheet (Form 11-35) which sample addresses in your

assignment are designated for:

! Personal visit interviews,

! Telephone interviews, and

! "CATI Hold" sample addresses.

Notify your supervisor immediately if you have any

questions about whether or not the sample addresses in a

particular segment need to be interviewed by personal visit

or by telephone.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-3

Topic 2. Qualifications for Using the Personal Visit Method

Overview

Since telephone interviews are more cost effective, most of

your NCVS interviews will be by telephone. The following

qualifications must exist before you can conduct an NCVS

interview in person:

! The sample household is assigned for a first

enumeration period interview.

! The sample household has not been interviewed in any

previous enumeration period (sample address was a

Type A or B noninterview previously or a replacement

household now lives at the sample address).

! The sample household does not have a telephone on

which they can be reached.

! The sample household does not want to be interviewed

by telephone.

First Enumeration Period

Households

For the first enumeration period, a sample household will

always be scheduled for a personal visit interview. When

using the personal visit method, try to complete interviews

for the household respondent and all other eligible

household members during your initial visit. If the

household respondent refuses to do the interview in person,

you can take a telephone interview for the initial visit.

However, try to avoid this situation whenever possible.

Only the household respondent's interview must be done in

person for a personal visit interview. Any other eligible

household members who are not available during your initial

visit, can be interviewed by telephone.

Checking the Control

Card

By reviewing the Control Card for a sample address, you can

tell whether a sample address needs to be interviewed by

personal visit. For a first enumeration period household,

most of the Control Card items will be blank. Items 1

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-4

through 6a will always have entries shown and Item 5 (letter

sent) will only have the first enumeration box marked.

Household Not Interviewed

in Previous Enumeration

Periods

Regardless of the enumeration period, your first contact with

a sample household must be in person. After the first

enumeration period for a sample address, a sample

household may not have been interviewed because:

" The sample household was classified as either a

Type A or a Type B noninterview in all previous

enumeration periods.

" The sample household is not the same household as

was interviewed in the previous enumeration period.

The new household at the sample address is referred to

as a "replacement" household.

If you discover that a replacement household is now

living at the sample address, you must:

! Complete a new Control Card (NCVS-500) for the

replacement household,

! Staple the new Control Card for the replacement

household to the original Control Card, and

! Interview the household respondent in person,

along with any remaining household members who

are eligible for interview and available at the time

of your visit. Any callbacks for individual

respondents can be done by telephone.

Checking the Control

Card

If you look at Item 30f on the Control Card, you can see

whether or not the sample household was a noninterview in

the previous enumeration period. You can also discover

why the household was a noninterview by checking the

noninterview reason listed for the code entered in Item 30f.

If a sample household has been a noninterview in all of the

previous enumeration periods, then you will need to use the

personal visit method for the current interview period.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-5

No Telephone Available

If you should find that a sample household in your telephone

interview stack does not have a telephone, you need to

conduct the interview in person. To conduct a telephone

interview, the sample household must have a telephone at

home or elsewhere on which all eligible household members

can be contacted.

Checking the Control

Card

Look at Control Card Items 26a, 26b, and 26c to verify that

the household has a telephone on which all eligible

household members can be interviewed and that at least one

telephone number is listed.

Telephone Interview Not

Acceptable

If you should find that a sample household in your telephone

interview stack does not want to be interviewed by

telephone, then you must conduct personal visit interviews

for the household.

Checking the Control

Card

Look at Control Card Item 26d to verify that the "Yes"

answer box is marked. If the "No" answer box is marked in

Item 26d, then you must conduct interviews for this

household in person.

Special Situations Requiring

Personal Visit Interviews

Some special situations can require cases that would

normally be interviewed by telephone to require personal

visit interviews. These situations include:

Entire Sample Household

Refuses a Telephone

Interview

! In some cases, you could encounter a sample

household in which all household members refuse to

be interviewed by telephone. Instead of classifying the

household as a Type A noninterview, you must attempt

to conduct these interviews in person.

Household Member

Unable to Complete a

Telephone Interview

! In a single-person sample household, the household

member is either too hard-of-hearing or is mentally

and/or physically unable to complete the interview by

telephone. Attempt to conduct the interview in person

and explain the reason for the personal visit on the

questionnaire.

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-6

An EXTRA Unit Is

Found

! When an EXTRA unit is discovered during a

telephone interview, interview the household at the

EXTRA unit in person and explain the reason for the

personal visit on the questionnaire.

(Chapter 7 of the Listing and Coverage Manual,

Form 11-8, provides details about EXTRA units.)

Incorrect Telephone

Number

! If you discover that the telephone number listed on the

Control Card is incorrect, verify whether or not you

have reached the sample address. If you have not

reached the sample address, try to get the correct

telephone number from directory assistance, the

operator, and so forth. If you cannot get a good

telephone number for the sample address, then you

will need to make a personal visit and explain the

reason for the personal visit on the questionnaire.

No One Answers ! If you have tried several times to reach a sample

household by telephone and were unsuccessful, you

must:

" Verify the accuracy of the telephone number either

in a local telephone directory or with directory

assistance.

" Telephone the contact person if one is listed in

Item 33 on the Control Card. If you can reach this

contact person, try to find out why you have been

unable to reach the sample household by telephone.

" As a last resort, you will need to make a personal

visit to the sample address and explain briefly the

reason for the personal visit at the top of page 2 on

the NCVS-1 (above the Household Respondent's

Personal Characteristics banner).

You Get a Recorded

Message

! If you get a recorded message saying that the telephone

number has been changed, you need to call the new

telephone number (if given) and make sure that you

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-7

have reached the sample address before starting the

interview(s). Make sure to enter the new telephone

number in Control Card Item 26c and line through the

incorrect number.

If the recorded message says that the telephone number

is disconnected or has changed and a new number is

not provided, try to find a new number from a local

directory or directory assistance.

As a last resort, you will need to visit the sample

address and explain briefly the reason for the personal

visit at the top of page 2 on the NCVS-1 (above the

Household Respondent's Personal Characteristics

banner).

CATI Recycled Cases ! If you receive any "CATI Hold" Control Cards in your

assignment, your supervisor may instruct you to

interview one or more of these "CATI Hold" cases

during the interview period. We refer to these sample

addresses as "recycled" cases, because the CATI

facility was unable to interview them. When your

supervisor instructs you to interview a recycled case,

interview the sample address by personal visit.

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-8

Topic 3. Qualifications for Using the Telephone Method

Overview

You will be conducting most of your assigned interviews for

second through seventh enumeration period households by

telephone. The following qualifications must exist before

you can conduct an NCVS interview by telephone:

! The sample household was assigned for a personal

visit interview in a previous enumeration period and at

least the household respondent was interviewed in

person in a previous enumeration period. Refer to

Control Card Items 25b and 30 for this information.

! The sample household must have a telephone on which

all eligible household members can be interviewed.

Refer to Control Card Items 26a, 26b, and 26c for this

information.

! The sample household must be willing to be

interviewed by telephone. Refer to Control Card

Item 26d for this information.

Once a sample household is assigned for a telephone

interview and there is no special situation requiring a

personal visit, then you would interview all eligible

household members by telephone for the current and all

future enumeration periods.

Household's First Time in

Sample

As covered in Topic 2 of this chapter, only the household

respondent's interview must be completed in person when a

household first enters the NCVS sample (regardless of the

enumeration period). Once the household respondent's

interview is completed in person, any callbacks for other

household members can be conducted by telephone. This

will help us lower our interviewing costs.

Type Z Noninterviews

If a sample household is designated for a telephone

interview and an eligible respondent, other than the

household respondent, refuses to be interviewed, classify

the respondent as a Type Z noninterview. Do not make a

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-9

personal visit in an attempt to convert a refusal for an

individual respondent. (See Part A, Chapter 6, for

instructions on classifying a respondent as a Type Z

noninterview.)

Type A Noninterviews

Require a Personal Visit

If either the household respondent or the entire household

refuses to be interviewed during a telephone interview, then

you are required to make a personal visit to conduct the

interviews.

Never classify a sample household as a Type A

noninterview following a telephone interview. You must

attempt to convert the refusal in person before

classifying a household as a Type A noninterview.

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-10

Topic 4. Instructions for Conducting Telephone Interviews

Timing of Interviews

Always start your assignment with the cases in your

telephone interview stack, and get started as soon as possible

once the interview month begins. It is possible that you will

discover cases in the telephone interview stack that require

you to make a personal visit to an assigned segment (as

covered in Topic 2 of this chapter). By working through

your telephone interview work first, you can keep to a

minimum the number of trips to a segment area and help us

save money by reducing travel costs.

Because of these possible personal visits, it is extremely

important that you attempt to complete all telephone

interviews in a segment within the first few days of the

interview period.

As you plan your itinerary for your personal visit cases,

make sure to include any telephone interview cases that now

require personal visits. Strive to make the least number of

trips as possible into a segment area to complete your

assignment.

Whenever you discover that a case scheduled for telephone

interviewing needs to be interviewed in person, explain

briefly the reason for the personal visit at the top of page 2

on the NCVS-1 (above the Household Respondent's

Personal Characteristics banner).

Starting the Interview

When you are ready to start a telephone interview, look at

Control Card Items 26a through 26f. By reviewing these

items, you will be prepared for situations where:

" The telephone number provided in Item 26c will ring

somewhere other than the sample household's

residence. Item 26b will give you this information.

" You are unable to contact the household on the first

telephone number listed in Item 26c, but a second

telephone number is also entered in Item 26c.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-11

" The sample household does not want to be interviewed

by telephone. Item 26d will give you this information.

" The sample household indicated the best time to call or

visit them and/or when they do not wish to be

contacted. Item 26e will give you this information.

" The sample household indicated that they do not want

to be contacted on a Sunday. Item 26f will give you

this information.

By reviewing these Control Card items before dialing the

telephone number, you will be more likely to reach the

household and less likely to bother them at an inconvenient

or unwanted time.

Ask for Previous

Household Respondent

After dialing the telephone number listed in Control Card

Item 26c and someone answers, start by identifying yourself

and asking to speak to the household respondent from the

previous enumeration period. If that person is not available,

then make sure that you have reached the correct sample

address.

Once you know that you have reached the correct sample

address and are speaking to a household member, you can

continue with your introduction. You don't want to describe

the NCVS to someone who is not a sample household

member.

Then ask to speak with a household member who is at least

18 years of age and knowledgeable about the household,

preferably one of the owners or renters of the home. This

person will be your household respondent for current

interview.

A Typical Introduction The following introduction will give you an idea of what

you need to say when you introduce yourself and the NCVS:

"Hello, I'm (your name) from the United States Census

Bureau." (After reaching a sample household member,

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-12

continue with...) "The Census Bureau is conducting a

survey here and throughout the Nation to determine how

often people are victims of crimes. We last contacted this

address six months ago."

When conducting a telephone interview, it isn't necessary for

you to ask if the household received our introductory letter.

Explaining the Purpose

of the NCVS

Some respondents may want to ask some questions about the

NCVS before agreeing to answer the survey questions. You

need to be prepared to answer their questions briefly and

accurately.

The following sources provide answers to some of the more

commonly asked questions from respondents:

# Page 2 of the Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554,

# The job aid, NCVS At a Glance, NCVS-550.1, and

# Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 5, of this manual,

NCVS-550.

Mentioning the

Introductory Letter

It is not necessary for you to mention or ask about the

introductory letter during a telephone interview.

However, you should have one with you in case a

respondent has a question about it. If you were conducting

the interview in person, you would ask if the respondent

received a copy of the introductory letter and hand him/her a

copy if it was not received in the mail.

Identifying Yourself Unlike a personal visit interview, you are not able to show

any formal identification to a respondent over the telephone.

If you identify yourself, your agency, the survey, and your

purpose for calling, most respondents will believe you and

agree to be interviewed. For those respondents who

seriously doubt what you tell them, suggest that they call

your regional office's (1-800) number (if available) or call

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-13

collect to confirm who you are and why you are calling

them.

Explaining the Purpose

of a Telephone Interview

Some respondents may want to know why you are calling

them instead of coming to their home for the interview. If

this happens, just explain that telephone interviews help us

to reduce our survey expenses. Therefore, as a cost saving

measure, we attempt to conduct most interviews by

telephone if the household has indicated to us in a prior

interview that a telephone interview is acceptable.

Verifying the Accuracy of

Your Contact

Keep in mind that for the NCVS we are following the

sample address and not a specific household. In other

words, if a household moves out of a sample address

between enumeration periods, you would no longer

interview that household. You would interview the current

residents at the sample address.

If you call the telephone number on the Control Card and

reach the same household from the previous enumeration

period, don't assume that you have reached the sample

address. It is possible that the household could be using the

same telephone number at their new address.

Always verify that the household is still living at the address

listed in Control Card Item 6a. If you are given an address

that doesn't identify an exact unit or is slightly different from

the address listed on the Control Card, ask the respondent if

the household has moved since their last interview.

If the household has moved out of the sample address and

continues to use the same telephone number, thank the

respondent for their cooperation and explain that you do not

need to interview his/her household, since they no longer

live at the sample address for this survey.

Anytime you discover that a new or replacement household

is currently living at the sample address, you are required to

complete a new Control Card and conduct the interviews

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-14

with the replacement household by personal visit for the

current enumeration period.

Selecting a Household

Respondent

Once you are sure that you have reached the sample address

and the same household from the previous enumeration

period, you need to speak to the household member who will

be the "household respondent." Because of the type of

information this person needs to provide both for the

Control Card (NCVS-500) and the Basic Screen

Questionnaire (NCVS-1), you need to select a household

member who is at least 18 years of age and knowledgeable

about the household.

Listed below is the order of preference for selecting a

household respondent:

First Ask for the household respondent from the

previous enumeration period.

Second Ask for one of the persons who owns or rents the

home.

Third Ask for a household member who is at least

18 years of age and knowledgeable about the

household.

Using the Information Card

Booklet

Control Card Items 23, 24, and 28 instruct you to show a

flashcard to the respondent for personal visit interviews.

When several answer categories are listed for an item, it is

much easier for a respondent to read the flashcard and select

the correct answer. Obviously, these items must be handled

differently during a telephone interview.

Spanish Origin, Item 23 Since your telephone interview cases will be sample

addresses that have been interviewed in a previous

enumeration period, you will only ask item 23 for any NEW

household members that you add for the current enumeration

period.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-15

If the respondent hesitates to answer once you have asked

the question in Item 23, then turn to page 6 in your

Information Card Booklet and ask the respondent if the

added person's ethnic origin is one of the following

origins...(then read the origins listed on page 6).

Race, Item 24 For your telephone interviews, only ask the race question for

any NEW household members for the current enumeration

period. If the respondent does not give you the NEW

household member’s race(s) after you ask the question for

Item 24, then read the race categories listed with the race

codes in the top, right corner of the Control Card.

Household Income,

Item 28

If you are conducting a telephone interview for a third, fifth,

or seventh enumeration period household, you will need to

update Item 28 with the household respondent. Follow

these steps:

Step 1 - Rephrase the question in Item 28 so that you ask,

"What was the total combined income of all

members of this household during the past

12 months?"

Step 2 - If necessary, explain to the respondent that you

need to identify the broad income range that best

fits the total combined income during the past

12 months for all household members who are

14 years of age or older.

Exclude the income of any household member

who left the household and is not a household

member at the time of the interview. If the

respondent seems confused about which

household member's income to include, then read

the list of current household members who are

over 14 years of age by looking at Control Card

Items 13a and 17.

Step 3 - If the respondent gives too broad of an income

range, then probe by reading the answer

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-16

categories from the Control Card that are within

the broad range.

Step 4 - If the respondent has trouble giving you an

amount or a income range, then probe by reading

the answer category marked on the Control Card,

along with the answer categories just above and

below it.

Marking the Type of

Interview (Item 18 on the

NCVS-1)

As you complete the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1,

for each eligible household member, mark the correct

answer category for Item 18 to show whether the interview

was conducted in person or by telephone, as well as showing

whether the interview was a self-response interview or a

proxy interview.

If you are unable to interview an eligible household member

(other than the household respondent), you would mark

Box 5, "Noninterview (Type Z)" in Item 18 to show that the

person is a Type Z noninterview. A Type Z noninterview

also requires you to complete Item 14 on the cover page of

the NCVS-1 either during or after the interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-17

Topic 5. Telephone Interviewing Skills

Overview

Every interviewing situation is unique and should be treated

as such. Do not allow a difficult interview or a sharp refusal

to shake your confidence or affect subsequent interviews. It

is important that you begin each interview as if it were your

first interview of the workday. Try to keep a businesslike

attitude and a positive frame of mind at all times.

Successful telephone communication is dependent on how

the respondent perceives you based on your vocal

expression. Your language usage, grammar, voice quality,

rate of speech, and enunciation are all key elements in

creating a favorable impression over the telephone.

General Rules

When you conduct a telephone interview, you want to sound

professional. You can accomplish this if you are easy to

understand and always try to sound confident, polite, and

businesslike. Listed below are some general rules that can

help you to promote a professional image.

Clarity Avoid talking to respondents with anything in your mouth--

no mints, gum, and so forth. Always speak directly into the

mouthpiece and guard against placing the mouthpiece at

chin level. Instead of raising your voice when a respondent

is having difficulty hearing or understanding you, first

ensure that you are holding the mouthpiece between your

nose and your lower lip. This will improve the quality of the

transmission and allow you to speak in your normal tone of

voice.

Enunciation Pronounce your words carefully and never mumble. This is

so important because the English language is full of similar

sounds, such as the letters "T" and "D," and "P," "B," and

"V." Careful enunciation will not only save you from

repeating what you just said, but will also help you avoid

misunderstandings.

Courtesy Courtesy is tremendously important during a telephone

interview. Whenever a respondent tries your patience, try to

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-18

remain calm and do not allow him/her to hear any

impatience or frustration in your voice. The best way to

achieve this goal is to never take anything a respondent says

personally. Avoid letting your emotions push you into

saying anything that may upset or excite a respondent.

Also, as a courtesy to the respondent, explain why you are

pausing between questions. The respondent may be more

patient and willing to wait if he/she knows that you are

pausing to write down pertinent facts about an incident.

Remember that your job is to conduct complete and accurate

interviews in a "professional" manner.

Rate of Speech Find a rate of speech that is comfortable for you and the

majority of your respondents. The average rate of speech is

120 words per minute. Keep in mind that if you speak too

rapidly your words tend to run together, and if you speak too

slowly the respondent may still have difficultly

understanding what you say.

Pitch and Inflection Speak in a moderate pitch and avoid talking in a monotone

voice. When reading questions, it is especially helpful to

use a rising inflection towards the end of a question. If you

put a "smile" in your voice and avoid sounding like a robot,

you are more likely to keep your respondent's interest.

Use a Brief Introduction Avoid using lengthy introductions. Keep them brief and to

the point and begin interviewing as soon as possible.

Start Fresh Do not let your emotions from a "tough" interview or a

refusal carryover into the next interview. Each respondent

deserves a fresh start and the best that you have to give

them. You can not allow "tough" interviews and refusals to

shake your confidence.

No Rushing Do not rush respondents or make them feel that they are

taking too long to answer your questions. We want our

respondents to relax and take their time, so they can

remember all the pertinent facts about an incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-19

If respondents feel as though you are rushing them, they may

purposely leave out information.

Ending the Interview As you finish interviewing each eligible respondent in a

sample household, thank him/her and ask to speak to the

next respondent. When the time comes to end the telephone

call, always let the respondent hang up first. This technique

tends to give the respondent a feeling of control over the

situation.

Listening Skills

It takes much more than just asking questions to be a good

interviewer. Listening attentively to your respondent is just

as important for conducting a successful interview. Listed

below are some listening techniques which all interviewers

need to practice:

$ Limit your own talking so that the respondent has

ample time to explain incidents. Remember that it is

very difficult to talk and listen well at the same time.

$ When you do not understand something said or you

feel that you may have missed a point, always attempt

to get a clear understanding of the situation.

Sometimes repeating what the respondent said in your

own words may help to straighten out the

misunderstanding. Keep in mind that telephone

interviews may require more probing than personal

visit interviews.

$ Make an effort not to interrupt a respondent before

he/she is finished replying. A long pause does not

always indicate that the respondent is done answering

your question. Never rush a respondent when he/she

needs more time to recall specific facts.

$ Life is full of distractions, but you have to learn to shut

them out while conducting interviews. Concentrate on

focusing your mind on what each respondent is telling

you.

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-20

$ The occasional use of interjections like "Yes" or "I

see" will reassure the respondent that you are paying

attention to what he/she is saying. Be especially

careful to use neutral comments that will not bias the

interview in any way. Avoid saying things like "That's

good" or "That's too bad."

$ Listen attentively and objectively. Do not allow a

respondent's words to irritate you or a respondent's

harsh manner to distract you from your professional

manner.

$ Avoid jumping to conclusions or assuming that a

respondent will say something before they actually

finish explaining the incident. Be patient and let the

respondent finish his/her thought. You do not want to

lead the respondent and possibly bias the interview.

Telephone Techniques

Every interviewing situation is unique and should be treated

as such. It is important that you adapt to each new

respondent. You can not let your reactions to one interview

carryover and affect the next interview.

Here are some basic techniques you can follow to aid you in

conducting your telephone interviews:

! Select a good working space

Select a "quiet" place where you can conduct your

telephone interviews without distractions and in

privacy. Also, make sure that you have adequate space

and light for your work.

! Be prepared

Before you begin a telephone interview, make sure that

you have all the materials you may need within your

arms reach. Make sure that you have adequate

supplies of paper, pens, pencils, and forms, together

with this manual and any job aids. If you need to leave

the telephone for some unexpected reason, always

excuse yourself politely and never let the respondent

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 5

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-21

wait more than a minute. If your telephone has a "call

waiting" feature, disconnect the "call waiting" feature

before you start any telephone interviews.

! Learn from your mistakes

Whenever possible, try to evaluate your performance

for each interview. See if you can improve your

technique in any area of the interview process. In

other words, try to improve your technique with each

new interview and do not continue making the same

mistakes over and over.

! Learn from your success

When you feel that an interview went especially well,

try to evaluate why it went so well. Perhaps your

telephone manner made the difference because you

were able to maintain your confidence and project a

pleasant and businesslike attitude. Concentrate on the

positive aspects of the successful interview and

continue to improve your technique.

Part A, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

A5-22

Always represent the Census Bureau with pride!

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-1

Chapter 6

Noninterviews

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Overview of Noninterview Types

and Procedures A6-2

2 Type A Noninterview Categories A6-8

3 Type B Noninterview Categories A6-17

4 Type C Noninterview Categories A6-22

5 Control Card Entries for

Noninterviews A6-26

6 Type Z Noninterview Persons A6-30

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-2

Topic 1. Overview of Noninterview Types and Procedures

Noninterview Cases

When you are assigned an NCVS case and cannot get a

completed interview, you will need to classify the case into

one of three noninterview categories. These categories are

identified as Type A, Type B, and Type C.

A sample address will be classified as a noninterview if:

! The living quarters is occupied but you are not able to

get any completed interviews.

! The living quarters is occupied by persons who are not

eligible respondents for the NCVS.

! The living quarters is vacant.

! The living quarters is not eligible for sample because it

is no longer used as a residence, it no longer exists, or

it does not qualify based on the current listing and

coverage rules.

Noninterview Categories

Each of the three noninterview categories, Type A, B, and C,

has its own set of reasons why assigned cases cannot be

interviewed.

Type A

Some sample households consist of persons who are eligible

for interview, but none of these persons can be interviewed

for a specific reason. These cases will classify as Type A

noninterviews. The Type A noninterview reasons for the

NCVS are:

! No one home

! Temporarily absent

! Refused

! Other occupied (Use this Type A reason for occupied

sample units that you cannot reach due to impassable

roads; for sample households that you cannot

interview due to serious illness or death in the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-3

household; or for sample units that you are unable to

locate.)

Type B

A sample address could be vacant or occupied entirely by

persons who have a usual residence elsewhere. Although

these cases are not eligible for interview during the current

interview period, they could become eligible at a later time.

These cases will classify as a Type B noninterview. The

Type B noninterview reasons for the NCVS are:

! Vacant - regular

! Vacant - storage of household furniture

! Temporarily occupied by persons with usual residence

elsewhere (URE)

! Unfit or to be demolished

! Under construction, not ready

! Converted to temporary business or storage

! Unoccupied site for mobile home, trailer, or tent

! Permit granted, construction not started

! Other (Only use this Type B reason if none of the other

Type B reasons are appropriate for the situation.)

Type C

Some situations can require a sample address to be

permanently removed from the NCVS sample. These cases

will classify as a Type C noninterview. The Type C

noninterview reasons for the NCVS are:

! Unused line of listing sheet

! Demolished

! House or trailer moved

! Outside segment

! Converted to permanent business or storage

! Merged

! Condemned

! Built after April 1, 1990

! Permit abandoned

! Other (Only use this Type C reason when none of the

other reasons are appropriate for the situation.)

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-4

Documenting Noninterviews

Each time that you classify a sample household as a

noninterview you need to document the noninterview on the:

" Control Card (NCVS-500)

" Noninterview Record (NCVS-7)

" INTER-COMM (Form 11-36)

Control Card See Topic 5 of this chapter for detailed instructions on

which entries need to be made on the Control Card for each

sample address that you classify as a noninterview.

Noninterview Record When you classify an NCVS case as a noninterview, you

need to complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, to

provide details about the case and why it cannot be

interviewed. Do not complete a Basic Screen Questionnaire,

NCVS-1, for any sample address that you classify as a

noninterview.

Since the NCVS-7 is a single-page form, make sure to staple

the completed NCVS-7 to the Control Card for the sample

address before mailing it back to the regional office.

Completing the NCVS-7:

# Start by transcribing the case identification information

from the Control Card onto the appropriate blocks at

the top, left corner of the form. This information

includes the sample number, control number (PSU,

segment, check digit, and serial number), and

household number. If the noninterview is for an

EXTRA unit discovered during the current interview

period, you need to enter some type of unit

identification in place of the serial number. You could

enter the reference person's name or some type of

physical description of the EXTRA unit.

# Item 1 Enter your FR code and name.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-5

# Item 2 If the noninterview is classified as a Type A

or B, transcribe the information from Control

Card Item 9 onto Item 2 of the NCVS-7.

# Item 3 If the noninterview is classified as a Type A

or B, transcribe the information from Control

Card Item 10 onto Item 3 of the NCVS-7.

# Item 4 If the noninterview is classified as a Type A

or B, transcribe the information from Control

Card Item 11c or 11d onto Item 4 of the

NCVS-7. Make sure to also transcribe any

descriptions that are shown on the Control

Card for answer Boxes 7 or 12.

# Item 5 Enter in Item 5 the last date on which you

contacted or attempted to contact someone

about the case. Enter the date using 2-digits

for the month and day, and 4-digits for the

year (e.g., 01/02/2003).

# Item 6 Type A Reasons:

Use Boxes 1 through 4 to indicate the reason

for the Type A noninterview. These reasons

are described in detail in Topic 2 of this

chapter.

If you mark Box 2, Temporarily absent, make

sure to enter the date that the household is

expected to return to the sample address. If

you mark Box 4, Other occupied, make sure

to enter an accurate and acceptable reason for

classifying the sample address as a Type A

noninterview on the "Specify" line below

Box 4. Only use Box 4 if you are sure that

the reason does not fit into one of the other

three Type A reasons.

After marking the Type A reason, continue

with Item 7.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-6

Type B Reasons:

Use answer Boxes 10 through 18 of Item 6 to

indicate the reason for the Type B

noninterview. These reasons are described in

detail in Topic 3 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 18, Other, when the reason

does not fit any of the other Type B reasons.

Also make sure that you enter an accurate and

acceptable reason for classifying the sample

address as a Type B noninterview on the

"Specify" line below Box 18.

Type C Reasons:

Use Boxes 20 through 29 of Item 6 to

indicate the reason for the Type C

noninterview. These reasons are described in

detail in Topic 4 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 29, Other, when the reason

does not fit any of the other Type C reasons.

Also make sure that you enter an accurate and

acceptable reason for classifying the sample

address as a Type C noninterview.

# Items 7, ONLY COMPLETE THESE FOUR

8, 9, ITEMS FOR TYPE A

and 10 NONINTERVIEWS.

When filling Item 7 (Race) for a household

that was interviewed in a previous

enumeration period, use the household

respondent's race(s) from Control Card

Item 24. If the household respondent chose

more than one race, mark all that apply.

Mark Box 3, Other, for any races marked

other than White and Black, such as

American Indian, Asian, Native Hawaiian, or

Other.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-7

If Control Card Item 24 is blank, then leave

Item 7 blank, too. While you must always

try to obtain each household member’s

race, you cannot fill race by observation,

probing, or asking a neighbor. NEVER

mark Item 7 for a Type B or C noninterview.

When filling Item 8 (Public Housing), use

the answer marked in Control Card Item 8c.

When filling Item 9 (Manager Verification

of Public Housing), use the answer marked

in Control Card Item 8d.

When filling Item 10 (American Indian

Reservation or American Indian Lands), use

the answer marked in Control Card Item 8e.

INTER-COMMs In addition to completing the NCVS-7 for each noninterview

case, you also need to fill out an INTER-COMM explaining

the situation to your supervisor. Attach the completed

INTER-COMM to the completed NCVS-7 and return these

forms along with the case's Control Card.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-8

Topic 2. Type A Noninterview Categories

Overview

Since Type A noninterviews mean the loss of valuable

information, it is essential to keep Type A noninterviews to

a minimum. If we fail to get NCVS data from sample

households, the data we do collect may not be representative

of the U.S. population.

It is not always possible to avoid Type A noninterviews, but

there are ways to keep them at a minimum. Some of these

ways include:

! Establishing good relations with your respondents,

! Contacting sample households when they are most likely

to be at home, and

! Conducting the interview in a positive and professional

manner.

The following reasons can cause a sample unit to be

classified as a Type A noninterview:

! After making repeated contacts during the interview

period, you are never able to reach anyone at home.

! All members of the sample household are temporarily

away from home during the entire interview period.

! The sample household refuses to allow any interviews.

! An occupied sample unit cannot be interviewed due to

impassable roads.

! The sample household cannot be interviewed during the

interview period because of a serious illness or a death in

the family.

! You are not able to locate the sample unit.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-9

Before you classify a telephone interview case as a Type A

noninterview, you must attempt to make contact and

interview the household in person. Also make sure that you

call your regional office before sending in a Type A

noninterview.

Procedures for "No One

Home"

Before you can classify a sample household as "No One

Home," you must make several attempts to contact the

household and verify that they are only gone for a short

while and plan to return during the interview period. If the

household is away from home and isn't expected to return

before your closeout date, do not use the "No one home"

reason.

For personal visit interviews:

If no one is home at the time of your first visit for the

interview period, check with neighbors or anyone else who

may know when the household is expected to return home.

Remember, do not mention the survey name when making

any inquiries. Listed below is a suggested way of making

inquiries:

"Hello, I am (your name) from the United States Census

Bureau. Here is my identification (show ID). I am trying

to contact someone at (sample address), but no one is at

home. Do you know when it is likely that someone would

be there?"

Listed below are the procedures to follow when you discover

that the household is expected to return home sometime

within the interview period:

$ Fill out a Request for Appointment (Form 11-38 or

11-38A) indicating when you plan to return. For

identification purposes, enter the case's control number

and your name and telephone number on the form.

$ Use Control Card Item 30g to enter the callback date

and time for your return visit.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-10

Note: Another alternative is to leave your business card

at the sample address with a preprinted peel off

sticker attached to it saying:

IMPORTANT

Please call me at the number on the attached card.

I am required to contact an adult household

member and I am obligated to return until contact

has been made.

U.S. Census Bureau Field Representative

$ If it is not practical to use a Request for Appointment

form, try to determine the best time to contact the

household and then make a return visit at that time.

$ If all of these efforts fail, then classify the case as a

Type A noninterview, No one home, as described in

Topic 1 of this chapter.

Procedures for

"Temporarily Absent"

For personal visit interviews:

When you make your first visit to a sample address for an

interview month and find that no one is home, try to

determine from neighbors or anyone else who may know

how long the household may be gone.

Before classifying a case as a Type A noninterview,

Temporarily Absent, all of the following conditions must

exist:

% All household members are temporarily away and not

expected to return home until the current closeout date

has passed. They might be on vacation, a business

trip, caring for sick relatives, or some other similar

reason.

% All of the household's personal belongings are still

in the sample unit. In other words, the sample

household has not moved their personal belongings to

another location. This is especially important if you

see a "For Sale" or "For Rent" sign on the property.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-11

% The sample unit is not a summer cottage or a unit

used only for vacation purposes. In other words, the

sample unit is the primary residence for the sample

household.

Once you determine that the case qualifies as a Type A

Noninterview, Temporarily Absent, take the following

actions:

! Using Control Card Item 30g, enter the date when the

sample household is expected to return to the sample

address.

! Using Control Card Item 33, enter the name, address,

and telephone number of the person who provided the

information about the household.

! If there is any possibility that the household will return

before your closeout date, attempt to interview the

household prior to your closeout date when feasible.

! If there is any possibility that the household will return

before the office closeout date, follow the “Telephone

Hold” procedures covered later in Topic 2 of this

chapter. Do not use the “Telephone Hold” procedures

when the household is expected to return before your

closeout date.

! When you know that the household definitely will not

return before either closeout dates, complete a

Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) according to the

instructions in Topic 1 of this chapter. Make sure that

you enter the "Return date" when filling Item 6 on the

NCVS-7.

Procedures for "Refused"

Although our response rates are high, you may occasionally

experience households who refuse to be interviewed. When

you encounter such households, impress upon them that the

information they can provide is valuable and the survey

results will benefit their household and their community.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-12

Make every reasonable effort to obtain cooperation from

each sample household assigned to you.

Despite all your efforts, a sample household may still refuse

to answer the survey questions or may insist that an

interview is not necessary since their household had no

changes or crimes to report for the past 6 months. You are

still required to complete and/or update the appropriate

Control Card items and to complete the NCVS-1 interviews

with a household respondent and all remaining eligible

household members.

When you are unable to change the way a household feels

about participating in the NCVS and they just refuse to

cooperate, follow these procedures:

For personal visit interviews:

% Your supervisor may instruct you to notify her/him by

telephone and explain the refusal situation. If your

supervisor will be in the sample area on other business,

she/he could visit the refusal household and try to

change their minds.

% When all efforts to convert a refusal are unsuccessful,

complete a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) as

described in Topic 1 of this chapter.

% After completing an NCVS-7, complete an INTER-

COMM (Form 11-36) explaining the situation and

what actions were taken to gain the household's

cooperation.

As soon as your office becomes aware of a refusal

household, they will mail a letter to the household

requesting their cooperation and letting them know that you

will contact them again. The office will also send you a

copy of this letter.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-13

If your office notifies you that a refusal household is

considered a "confirmed" refusal, you will no longer attempt

to interview the refusal household. For future enumeration

periods, you will just verify with neighbors or other

knowledgeable sources whether or not the same household

is still living in the sample unit.

If the confirmed refusal household is still living at the

sample unit, you would:

! Enter the month and year of your visit (e.g., 8/03) in

Item 30b on the Control Card.

! Enter the noninterview type and reason code A-03 in

Control Card Item 30f. The noninterview types, along

with their reason codes, are listed on the Control Card

following Item 33.

! In the "Notes" space on the Control Card, enter

"Confirmed refusal household - Do not attempt to

interview household."

! Complete a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) as

described in Topic 1 of this chapter.

If you discover that a new household has moved into the

sample unit, you would visit and interview the new or

"replacement" household.

Group Quarters Refusals Some of your NCVS assignments could include sample

units within group quarters, such as hotels, boarding houses,

and so forth. If either the manager or owner of a group

quarters refuses to allow you to interview persons residing in

sample units within the group quarters, notify your

supervisor immediately. Based on the situation, your

supervisor will provide you with specific instructions.

Procedures for "Other

Occupied"

Most of your Type A noninterviews will fall under one of

the three reasons already mentioned--No one home,

Temporarily absent, and Refused. However, you could

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-14

encounter other situations that will force you to classify an

eligible and occupied sample unit as a Type A noninterview.

For example, the following situations could justify

classifying a case as a Type A noninterview, Other occupied:

# A family member died very recently.

# The sample household has been quarantined.

# The sample household lives in a gated and/or guarded

community and you cannot gain access to the sample

address. Notify your supervisor immediately and

he/she will provide you with specific instructions.

# A storm or other natural disaster prevents you from

getting to sample addresses in your assignment. In

recent years, weather-related interviewing problems,

such as floods, mud slides, earthquakes, fires, and

heavy snow, have become more prevalent. If you

encounter these problems, try to identify which sample

addresses are occupied and which sample addresses are

vacant.

For previously interviewed households:

Determine occupancy based on the unit's status during

the last enumeration period, unless a knowledgeable

person tells you otherwise.

For first time households:

If a sample unit is assigned to you for the first

enumeration period, try to discover the occupancy

status from neighbors, local merchants, postal workers,

county recorder of deeds, or other local government

officials. Never mention the survey name when

talking to persons who are not household members at

the sample address.

# More than two of the household respondent’s screen

questions are left unanswered because the household

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-15

respondent refused to answer them and you are unable

to interview another eligible household member as the

household respondent.

Telephone Hold Procedures

Each regional office may use slightly different procedures

for telephone hold cases. In this manual, we will provide

you with the general procedures. Your program supervisor

will provide you with specific instructions.

Telephone hold procedures were initiated to allow you to

meet your closeout date for each month, and still give you

some additional time to complete "hard-to-interview" cases

that could result in Type A noninterviews.

Listed below are the general steps to follow for a telephone

hold case:

Step

1 Prepare a duplicate or "dummy" Control Card for the

telephone hold case including all the information that

you will need to transcribe onto the NCVS-1 for the

case. Write the word "HOLD" in the "Notes" space on

the "dummy" Control Card. Keep the "dummy"

Control Card in the event you are able to interview the

sample household before the "telephone hold" closeout

date.

2 Prepare the cover page of an NCVS-1 questionnaire

with the following information:

! Enter the sample, control number, and household

number.

! Fill Items 1 and 2.

! Write the word "HOLD" at the top of the page.

! Keep this NCVS-1 in case you are able to conduct

the interview before the "telephone hold" closeout

date.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-16

Step

3 Prepare an NCVS-7 as described in Topic 1 of this

chapter and attach a note to it identifying the case as a

"telephone hold." Make sure that you return these

forms no later than the last shipment before your

"original" closeout date. Make sure to place the

NCVS-7 and the current Control Card for the case on

top of the shipment.

4 Continue your attempts to get interviews for your

telephone hold cases. If you can complete a telephone

hold case, call in the information to your office for the

NCVS-1, the Control Card, and any NCVS-2s. If your

office doesn't hear from you, they will assume that the

case needs to be classified as a Type A noninterview.

Do not attempt to get interviews for telephone hold

cases after this closeout date.

5 By the 25th day of the interview month, destroy any

"dummy" Control Cards or questionnaires you are

holding for telephone hold cases. Make sure to tear

these "dummy" forms before disposing of them so that

you do not violate a respondent's confidentiality.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-17

Topic 3. Type B Noninterview Categories

Overview

Type B noninterviews include cases which you cannot

interview during a specific interview period because they

are either:

! Unoccupied or

! Temporarily occupied by persons who are ineligible

for interview because they have a usual residence

elsewhere (URE).

Any case that you classify as a Type B noninterview could

become eligible for interview in a later enumeration period.

The following reasons can cause a sample unit to be

classified as a Type B noninterview:

! Vacant, regular

! Vacant, storage of household furniture

! Temporarily occupied by persons with a usual

residence elsewhere (URE)

! Unfit or to be demolished

! Under construction, not ready

! Converted to temporary business or storage

! Unoccupied site for a mobile home, trailer, or tent

! Permit granted, construction not started

! Other Type B

Procedures for "Vacant,

Regular"

The majority of the unoccupied units that you discover will

probably classify as "Vacant, regular." If you discover that a

sample address is unoccupied and the following conditions

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-18

exist, you can classify the unit as a Type B noninterview,

Vacant, regular:

& The unit is vacant and the occupants have

permanently left the unit.

& The unit is for sale or rent.

& The unit is being held off the sales market.

& The unit is seasonally closed (e.g., a vacation home).

& A dilapidated unit that is still considered a living

quarters, such as a housing unit that is very run down,

in need of many repairs, and still occupied as a living

quarters. Do not include unoccupied units that are

condemned, unfit for human habitation, awaiting

demolition or being demolished.

& A vacant living quarters such as a mobile home, tent,

or a similar structure.

& A group quarters unit that may be vacant in transient

quarters, boarding houses, or rooming houses.

Special Situations You may discover a vacant sample unit that is in the

process of being converted to make more units or merged to

make fewer units. Classify the unoccupied units created by

the conversion or merger as Type B noninterviews, Vacant,

regular, if:

! The conversion or merger has progressed to the stage

where you can identify the converted or merged units

as they will be when completed, or

! A responsible person can tell you how the units will

be when completed.

Otherwise, classify the original sample unit as a Type B

noninterview, Vacant, regular.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-19

The same procedures used for conversions and mergers also

apply to sample units that are undergoing repairs or

alterations.

Procedures for "Vacant,

Storage of Household

Furniture"

Only use this Type B noninterview reason when an

unoccupied sample unit is used solely for the storage of

excess furniture. This is not the same as a vacant unit that

is fully furnished and awaiting a potential renter or owner.

For a vacant, furnished unit that is waiting to be rented or

sold, you would use the "Vacant, regular" Type B

noninterview reason.

Procedures for

"Temporarily Occupied by

Persons With a URE"

If an entire household is staying at a sample unit

temporarily (e.g., on vacation) and the household has a

usual residence elsewhere, they are not eligible household

members and you must not interview them. If you discover

this situation, classify the unit as a Type B noninterview,

Temporarily occupied by persons with a URE.

Procedures for "Unfit or to

be Demolished"

Consider an unoccupied sample unit as unfit for human

habitation if the unit is no longer protected from the

elements because the roof, walls, windows, or doors are

either damaged or missing. This may have been caused by

vandalism, fire, or deterioration from neglect and age.

If you see the following conditions, the unit will probably

need to be classified as "Unfit or to be demolished":

# Windows are broken

# Doors are either missing or swinging open

# Parts of the roof or walls are missing or destroyed

leaving holes in the unit's structure

# Part of the structure has been blown or washed away

# Part of the structure has collapsed or is missing.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-20

Do not use this Type B noninterview reason for the

following two situations:

' When doors and windows are boarded up to keep

them from becoming destroyed by vandalism or bad

weather.

' When doors and windows are not intended to be used

in a structure, such as in some rural sections of the

country.

Also use the "Unfit or to be demolished" reason for vacant

sample units that you can verify as being scheduled for

demolition. You must see positive evidence such as a

demolition sign, notice, or mark on the sample unit or the

building that houses the sample unit.

Procedures for "Under

Construction, Not Ready"

This Type B noninterview reason is intended for sample

units that are in the process of being newly constructed and

are not yet ready for occupancy because the following items

have not been installed:

! Exterior windows and doors and

! Usable floors.

Once the newly constructed sample unit is ready for

occupancy, but is still vacant, classify it as a Type B

noninterview, Vacant, regular.

Procedures for "Converted

to Temporary Business or

Storage"

Use this Type B noninterview reason when a sample unit

that is intended as a living quarters is used instead for the

temporary storage of commercial or business supplies,

machinery or other products related to a business. If you

can determine that the storage of these business supplies is

permanent, then the sample unit needs to be classified as a

Type C noninterview, not a Type B noninterview.

Do not use "Converted to temporary business or storage," if

you discover that the vacant unit is intended for the storage

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-21

of business supplies in the future, but not at the time of

your visit.

Remember that there is a separate Type B noninterview

reason for a sample unit that is vacant and used solely to

store household furniture. Do not use "Converted to

temporary business or storage" when it is household

furniture that is being stored in the vacant unit.

Procedures for

"Unoccupied Site for

Mobile Home, Trailer, or

Tent

Although mobile homes, trailers, tents, boats, cars, buses,

caves, and so forth are not located within a typical building

structure, they can still be considered housing units if they

meet our housing unit definition. (See page 7-4 in the

Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.) If the sample

unit is listed by its site identification rather than an address,

and you find that the site is vacant, classify the sample unit

as a Type B noninterview, Unoccupied site for a mobile

home, trailer, or tent.

Procedures for "Permit

Granted, Construction Not

Started"

There may be instances when you are assigned a sample

unit in a permit segment and discover that the construction

permit has been issued, but construction has not yet started.

When this occurs, classify the sample unit as a Type B

noninterview, Permit granted, construction not started.

Procedures for "Type B,

Other"

Most of your Type B noninterviews will fall under one of

the reasons already mentioned. If you discover a rare

situation that is not covered in any of the Type B

noninterview reasons, use the Type B, Other, reason.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-22

Topic 4. Type C Noninterview Categories

Overview

Type C noninterviews are sample units that are ineligible

for the NCVS sample and need to be removed permanently

from the sample. Many Type C noninterviews occur

because of changes that happen between the time a unit is

listed and the time the unit is assigned for interview.

Type C noninterview reasons include:

! Unused line of listing sheet

! Demolished

! House or trailer moved

! Outside segment

! Converted to permanent business or storage

! Merged

! Condemned

! Built after April 1, 1990

! Permit abandoned

! Type C, Other

Procedures for "Unused

Line of Listing Sheet"

When working with listing sheets in Unit, Permit, and

Group Quarters Segments, you may discover as you list

units or verify listings that a multi-unit structure has fewer

units than expected. If you are assigned a sample unit for

interview and find out that the assigned case is actually an

unused line on the listing sheet, classify the case as a

Type C noninterview, Unused line of listing sheet. (See the

appropriate chapters in your Listing and Coverage

manual, Form 11-8, for more details about the use of

listing sheets.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-23

Procedures for

"Demolished"

You could be assigned a sample unit and then discover that

it no longer exists because it was demolished or is in the

process of being demolished. If this happens, classify the

case as a Type C noninterview, Demolished.

Do not classify an unoccupied unit as a Type C

noninterview, Demolished, when the unit is scheduled to be

demolished, but demolition work has not yet begun.

Classify the unit as a Type B noninterview, Unfit or to be

demolished, when demolition work has not yet begun.

Procedures for "House or

Trailer Moved"

It is possible that a sample unit could have been moved

from its site after it was listed. This is more likely to

happen when the unit is a mobile home or trailer, but it

could also be a house. If this happens and the unit is listed

by its street address, not its site identification, then classify

the unit as a Type C noninterview, House or trailer moved.

Procedures for "Outside

Segment"

Use this Type C noninterview reason when the original

listing for an area segment is incorrect and, at the time of

interview, you discover that the unit is physically located

outside of the area segment boundaries.

Procedures for "Converted

to Permanent Business or

Storage"

Use this Type C noninterview reason when a sample unit

has been converted permanently from living quarters to

storage space for a business. The unit may be used to store

such items as farm products, machinery, lumber, business

supplies, and so forth.

Procedures for "Merged"

Merged units occur when two or more apartment units or

two single family homes combine to form one new unit.

Instructions for when to classify a sample unit as a Type C

noninterview, Merged, can vary depending on the situation

and segment type. Detailed instructions for merged units

are provided starting on page 7-23 of the Listing and

Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.

Procedures for

"Condemned"

Before you can use this Type C noninterview reason, the

sample unit must be unoccupied and there must be positive

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-24

evidence that the unit is condemned, such as a sign, notice,

or mark on the unit or on the building that houses the unit.

Do not use the Condemned reason for a Type C

noninterview if:

! You see a "condemned" sign, but the unit is occupied.

If the occupants qualify as eligible household

members, try to conduct interviews at the sample unit

and ignore the "condemned" sign.

! The sample unit is vacant, but you can't find any

positive evidence that the unit is "condemned." If the

unit is vacant and unfit for human habitation, classify

it as a Type B noninterview, Unfit or to be

demolished.

Be careful not to classify a sample unit as a Type C

noninterview when it should be a Type B noninterview.

This type of mistake can remove a unit permanently

from the survey's sample.

Procedures for "Built After

April 1, 1990"

When you are working in an Area Segment, your office will

mark Item 7a on the Control Card so that you know

whether or not to ask about the year the sample unit was

built. If the "Ask first month" box is marked in Item 7a,

you will ask the household respondent during the first

enumeration period interview whether the original structure

was built before or after April 1, 1990.

If the household respondent tells you that the sample unit

was built "After 4-1-90," you will:

! Mark the "After 4-1-90" answer box in Item 7a,

! If the Box (3) is marked for Item 7b, ask the question

for Box (3) to determine whether or not there is any

other building (occupied or vacant) on the property

that is or could be used as a living quarters. A "Yes"

answer will also require you to complete Table X on

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-25

the reverse side of the Control Card. After following

the instructions in Table X, end the interview and

classify the sample unit as a Type C noninterview,

Built after April 1, 1990.

! If you are not required to complete Item 7b, end the

interview and classify the sample unit as a Type C

noninterview, Built after April 1, 1990.

Procedures for "Permit

Abandoned"

At times, you may find from the builder or the permit office

that the builder abandoned the building permit and never

built the structure for a sample unit. If this happens and the

permit will never be used, classify the case as a Type C

noninterview, Permit abandoned.

Procedures for "Type C,

Other"

Most of your Type C noninterviews will fall under one of

the reasons already mentioned. If you discover a rare

situation that is not covered in any of the Type C

noninterview reasons already mentioned, use the Type C,

Other, reason.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-26

Topic 5. Control Card Entries for Noninterviews

Entries for All

Noninterview Cases

Any time you classify an assigned case as a noninterview,

regardless of whether it's a Type A, B, or C, you need to

make the following Control Card entries:

Item

6a Make sure that the address for the sample unit is

entered correctly.

30b Enter the interview month and year (e.g., 10/03).

30d &

30e Enter tally marks in Item 30d to indicate the

number of personal visits you made before

classifying the case as a noninterview. If your

visits were before 5 p.m., enter your tally marks in

Column (B). If your visits were after 5 p.m., enter

your tally marks in Column (A). Since you cannot

classify a case as a noninterview without making

at least one personal visit, you should have at least

one tally mark in Item 30d.

Enter tally marks in the appropriate column (B

and/or A) of Item 30e to indicate the number of

telephone calls that you made before and/or after

5 p.m.

30f Enter the appropriate noninterview type and

reason code (e.g., B-17). All noninterview types,

reason codes, and descriptions are shown on the

Control Card following Item 33.

30h If the case is a CATI recycle, mark the "Yes" box

and enter the CATI code provided by your

regional office next to the "Yes" box.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-27

33 When appropriate, enter the name, address, and

telephone number for the contact person with

whom you spoke to verify information about the

noninterview case.

Entries for Type A

Noninterviews

In addition to the Control Card entries required for all

noninterview types, you also need to make the following

entries for a Type A noninterview:

Item

7a If the case is in an Area Segment and the "Ask 1st

mo." box is marked in Item 7a, check to see if an

answer box is marked. If not, ask the question in

Item 7a and mark the appropriate answer box. If

necessary, ask a neighbor, apartment manager,

janitor, etc.

7b Normally, this item would be asked during the first

enumeration period for specific types of units. If a

Type A noninterview happens during the first

enumeration period in an Area Segment and

Box (1), (2), and/or (3) is marked, then you need to

ask the marked questions the next time you are able

to interview the household. If you find that the unit

is vacant in a subsequent enumeration period, ask

the marked questions of a knowledgeable person at

that time.

8e Normally, this item would be asked during the first

enumeration period. If a Type A noninterview

happens during the first enumeration period, mark

Item 8e by observation or ask a knowledgeable

person when unsure.

9 If your office has not already filled Item 9, mark the

appropriate answer box and follow the instructions

printed after each answer.

10 Normally, Item 10 is asked during the first

enumeration period for specific types of units. If a

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-28

Type A noninterview happens during the first

enumeration period in a rural area and the Control

Card instructions tell you to ask Item 10 (farm

sales), ask this question the first time you are able to

get an interview. If you find that the unit is vacant

in a subsequent enumeration period, ask the

question in Item 10 of a knowledgeable person at

that time.

11 Fill if not already marked.

24 Fill only if provided by the household respondent.

Otherwise, leave the race information blank until

you are able to interview the household. Do not fill

race by observation, probing, or by asking a

neighbor.

Entries for Type B

Noninterviews

In addition to the entries required for all noninterview

types, you need to complete Item 7a and Items 9 through 11

following the same instructions provided above for Type A

noninterviews.

Vacant Units If you discover a vacant sample unit in an area segment

during the first enumeration period and one or more of the

questions are marked in Item 7b, ask the marked questions

of a knowledgeable person in the area.

Temporarily Occupied by

Persons With a URE

Some sample areas, such as beach resorts, will have units

that are occupied by URE households and turnover in these

areas will be unusually high. We do not want you to

prepare a new Control Card in these areas each time an

entire URE household is replaced by another URE

household in the sample unit.

To save time in these situations, report new occupants at

these sample units on the Control Card as instructed below:

Item

3 Do not change the household number.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-29

Item

13 For all persons in the previous URE household,

cross out each person's entries in Items 13a, 13b,

and 13c.

Using the first available line in Item 13a, only enter

the reference person's name for the new URE

household. Also, enter the new reference person's

relationship code (11) in Item 13b and mark the

"No" answer box in Item 13c. It is not necessary to

list any other URE household members on the

Control Card.

25a For the previous URE household members, enter

the reason code (25) and the month and year (e.g.,

6/03) that you discovered the household

composition change.

For the new URE household, enter the total number

of household members and the month and year (e.g.,

6/03) that you discovered the new URE household

in the sample unit. Make sure that the line number

used in Item 25a for the new URE household

matches the line number used in Item 13a for the

new URE reference person.

Entries for Type C

Noninterviews

In addition to the Control Card entries required for all

noninterview types, you also need to make the following

entry for Type C noninterviews:

Item

7b If the sample unit is in an Area Segment and you

classify the unit as a Type C noninterview in the

first enumeration period, check to see if Box (3) is

marked. If it is, ask this question of a neighbor or

other knowledgeable person and then circle the

appropriate answer.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-30

Topic 6. Type Z Noninterview Persons

What Is a Type Z

Noninterview?

You will classify an eligible household member as a Type Z

noninterview when you are unable to interview an eligible

household member and the household member is not the

household respondent.

Unlike Type A, B, and C noninterviews, a Type Z

noninterview relates to an eligible household member

(other than the household respondent) and does not relate

to the entire sample household. Another difference is that a

personal visit is not required prior to classifying a person as

a Type Z noninterview.

However, if you are unable interview the household

respondent, the entire sample household will classify as a

Type A noninterview because:

( You must interview the household respondent before

interviewing anyone else in the household

AND

( You cannot classify a household respondent as a

Type Z noninterview person.

Minimizing Type Z

Noninterviews

It is important to keep both Type A and Type Z

noninterviews to a minimum, so that:

! Your response rate does not suffer and

! The sample data you collect is truly representative of

the entire U.S. population.

Individuals who are difficult to find at home or who resist

being interviewed may have different victimization

experiences than persons who are readily available for

interviews. Therefore, failure to get interviews from all

eligible household members could introduce a serious bias

into the survey results.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-31

Situations Causing Type Z

Noninterviews

There are several reasons why you might be unable to

interview one or more eligible household members in a

sample unit. Some situations will be beyond your control,

while other situations can be overcome by improving your

salesmanship and contacting households when you are most

likely to reach household members.

Never Available (Code 1) You may find that an individual respondent within a sample

household is never available when you contact the

household. If all of the following conditions are true, then

you can classify an individual respondent as a Type Z

noninterview:

! You made repeated attempts to reach the individual

respondent.

! You are sure that the individual respondent is not

temporarily absent. If the respondent is temporarily

absent, you would try to get a proxy interview

following the proxy interview procedures provided in

Part C, Chapter 1, of this manual.

! You have a completed interview with the household

respondent.

Refused (Code 2) Even after you try to persuade a respondent to comply with

our survey, some individual respondents will still refuse to

be interviewed. You cannot take a proxy interview for

an eligible respondent who refuses to be interviewed.

When an individual respondent refuses to be interviewed,

classify the person as a Type Z noninterview.

Also use Code 2, Refused:

! Any time another person refuses to allow an interview

with an eligible household member, such as a

household member refusing to let you interview

his/her elderly parent or 14-year-old child.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-32

! An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give an

interview for an eligible respondent who is unable to

respond for himself/herself due to a physical and/or

mental problem or due to being temporarily absent

from the sample address.

Physically/Mentally

Unable to Answer and

No Proxy Available

(Code 3)

You are allowed to take proxy interviews for individual

respondents who are physically and/or mentally unable to

be interviewed during the entire interview period.

"Physically/mentally unable to answer" means that the

household member must have health and/or mental illness

problems that are continuous throughout the entire

interview period. If you are unable to find an eligible proxy

respondent for this person, classify the household member

as a Type Z noninterview and enter Code 3.

Temporarily Absent and

No Proxy Available

(Code 4)

If an individual respondent is temporarily away from home

and not expected to return before your closeout date, you

can take a proxy interview. If you cannot find an eligible

proxy respondent for this person, classify the household

member as a Type Z noninterview and enter Code 4.

Other Type Z Situations

(Code 5)

Use Code 5 when you are unable to interview an eligible

respondent (other than the household respondent) and the

situation does not fit Codes 1 through 4. Here are some

examples:

Household member cannot speak English/no acceptable

interpreter--

Another situation you may encounter is a household

member who cannot speak English and an acceptable

interpreter is not available. If this occurs, classify the

person as a Type Z noninterview. Do not take a proxy

interview.

No acceptable proxy respondent available for a 12- or

13-year-old child--

If a 12- or 13-year-old household member is not allowed to

answer for himself/herself and no acceptable proxy

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 6

Noninterviews

A6-33

respondent is available, classify the child as a Type Z

noninterview and use Code 5.

Blank screen questions for a household member (other

than the household respondent)--

Be careful not to leave Screen Questions 36c, 40c, 41c, 42c,

43c, 44b, and 45b unanswered on the NCVS-1

questionnaire. This situation could cause an individual

respondent to be classified as a Type Z noninterview.

Insufficient number of NCVS-2s completed--

Make sure that you complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, for each incident reported by a respondent. Be sure

to complete the correct number of NCVS-2s for an

individual respondent. If any NCVS-2s are missing and we

are unable to obtain the missing Crime Incident Reports,

NCVS-2s, the individual respondent will be classified as a

Type Z noninterview.

Entries on the Control

Card

Item 25b on the Control Card is intended to show the most

current interview date for each eligible household member.

However, if the person is a Type Z noninterview, leave the

"date of interview" space blank. If a previous interview

date is shown in Item 25b, erase it.

Item 25c on the Control Card is intended to show how long

each eligible household member has lived at the sample

address. This question needs to be updated each

enumeration period, even if the person is a Type Z

noninterview. You will ask the household respondent this

question for each eligible household member.

Entries on the NCVS-1,

Basic Screen Questionnaire

When it becomes necessary to classify an individual

respondent as a Type Z noninterview, there are certain

items on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, to

which you need to pay particular attention. These items

include 14a, 14b, and 17 through 28.

Part A, Chapter 6 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Noninterviews

A6-34

Items 14a and 14b Use Items 14a and 14b on the cover page of the NCVS-1

to:

! Identify by line number the household member who

you are unable to interview (Item 14a).

! Enter the appropriate reason code to explain why the

person is a Type Z noninterview. The codes and

descriptions are listed to the right of Item 14b.

Items 17 Through 28 Even though you are unable to complete an interview with

a Type Z person, you are still required to complete:

Item

17 With the individual respondent's first and last

name.

18 By marking Box (5) to indicate that the person is a

Type Z noninterview.

19 With the person's line number from Control Card

Item 13a.

20 - 28 With the person's personal characteristics from the

Control Card.

Completing an INTER-

COMM (Form 11-36)

Each time you classify an individual respondent as a

Type Z noninterview, you must complete an INTER-

COMM explaining the circumstances so that your

supervisor has a clear picture of the situation. Attach

the completed INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1 before

returning the case to the office.

Do Not Complete an

NCVS-7

When you classify a person as a Type Z noninterview, do

not complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7. The

Noninterview Record is only required for Type A, B, and C

noninterview cases.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-1

Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials

Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Description of Materials A7-2

2 Materials Kept Month to Month A7-12

3 Materials Supplied Monthly A7-14

4 Checking and Acknowledging

Receipt of Materials A7-15

5 Mailing Completed Work A7-16

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-2

Topic 1. Description of Materials

Titles and Form Numbers

Listed below are the titles and form numbers of the forms

and questionnaires that you will use specifically for your

NCVS work:

Control Card,

NCVS-500

Basic Screen Questionnaire,

NCVS-1

Personal Characteristics,

NCVS-1A

Crime Incident Report,

NCVS-2

Noninterview Record,

NCVS-7

Field Representative's Information Card Booklet,

NCVS-554

NCVS At a Glance,

NCVS

550.1

NCVS Fact Sheet,

NCVS

110

NCVS Introductory Letters,

NCVS-572(L)

and

NCVS-573(L)

NCVS Thank You Letters,

NCVS-593(L)

and

NCVS-594(L)

There will be other materials that you will use in the course

of your work, but those materials are generic to most

surveys, such as appointment slips, INTER-COMMs, and

transmittal forms.

Control Card, NCVS-500

The Control Card is used as the basic record of each sample

unit. It contains the sample unit's control number and

address, as well as basic information about each household

member

(e.g., names of each person living in the household,

age, race(s), sex, marital status, education, and so forth)

Also shown is information about the entire household, such

as total household income, a record of crime incidents,

contacts with the household, and noninterviews.

Each interview month, your regional office will send you

Control Cards for all of your assigned cases. The items that

you will fill or update on each Control Card will vary

depending on the enumeration period for the sample unit.

Detailed instructions for completing the Control Card are

covered in Part B, Chapter 1, of this manual.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-3

Basic Screen Questionnaire,

NCVS-1

The information that is collected for all sample households

on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, and the Crime

Incident Report, NCVS-2, is tabulated and later used as the

basis for the annual criminal victimization reports.

You will complete an NCVS-1 for each sample unit that you

interview. This questionnaire consists of four parts which

you will either fill with the respondent during the interview

or transcribe information onto after the interview.

NCVS-1 Cover Page

(Items 1 Through 16)

You will complete most of the information on the NCVS-1

cover page after completing the interview. Most of the cover

page items require you to transcribe information from

Control Card items. Instruction banners on the cover page

will tell you when to fill each group of items.

The NCVS-1 cover page consists of identification

information for the sample unit, together with information

on type of living quarters, use of telephone, household

income, whether the sample unit is located on an American

Indian Reservation or American Indian Lands, possible

proxy interviews, Type Z noninterviews, number of eligible

and ineligible household members, number of crime incident

reports filled, and changes in household composition.

NCVS-1 Personal

Characteristics (Items 17

Through 28)

Items 17 through 28 make up what we refer to as the

NCVS-1 personal characteristics. For the household

respondent, these items appear on page 2. Since the

NCVS-1 can be used for the household respondent and three

additional respondents, Items 17 through 28 are also

repeated on pages 12, 18, and 24. If a sample household has

more than four eligible household members, you will use an

NCVS-1A as the screen questionnaire for each additional

household member who does not fit on the household's

NCVS-1.

Items 17 through 28 are mostly information that you will

transcribe from the Control Card. You need to complete

these items for each household member who is at least

12 years of age, even if the person is a Type Z noninterview.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-4

NCVS-1 Interview Date

and Questions on

Mobility and Business

Operated from Sample

Address (Items 29

Through 35)

Use Item 29 to enter the month, day, and year of the

household member's interview. Use Item 33 to collect

information about the length of time the household member

has lived at the current address and the number of moves

made in the 5 years prior to the interview

(if resided less

than 5 years at current address)

. Items 34 and 35 are asked

only of the household respondent to determine whether a

household member operates a recognizable or

unrecognizable business from the sample address.

NCVS-1 Screen

Questions (Items 36

Through 46 for the

Household Respondent

and Items 36 and 40

Through 45 for

Individual Respondents)

Pages 3 through 10 of the NCVS-1 contain the screen

questions for the household respondent. In addition to the

screen questions asked of all eligible household members,

you will ask the household respondent a few additional

screen questions dealing with household crimes. The

household respondent's screen questions start with Item 36

and end with Item 46. The additional screen items for

household crimes are Items 37 through 39 and 46.

All other eligible household members will be asked the

screen questions in Items 36 and 40 through 45. These

screen questions are repeated in the NCVS-1, so that you

can interview three individual respondents after completing

the household respondent's interview. Use NCVS-1A

questionnaires for households that have more than four

eligible household members.

Detailed instructions for completing the NCVS-1

questionnaire are provided in Part B, Chapter 2, of this

manual.

Personal Characteristics,

NCVS-1A

Any sample household that has more than four eligible

household members will require you to complete an

NCVS-1A questionnaire for each additional household

member. The NCVS-1A contains the same personal

characteristics and screen questions as shown for individual

respondents in the NCVS-1 questionnaire.

Since the NCVS-1A has only five pages and can become

separated very easily from the household's NCVS-1, always

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-5

remember to carefully transcribe the sample, control

number, and household number onto the top of the

NCVS-1A cover page

before

you begin filling out the rest

of the NCVS-1A. This identification information is vital to

showing the relationship between the questionnaire and the

sample unit.

Before you transmit completed forms for an assigned case to

your regional office, make sure to insert any NCVS-1As that

you completed inside the NCVS-1 questionnaire. If the

sample household requires only one NCVS-1A, staple the

completed NCVS-1A to the last page of the household's

NCVS-1.

Crime Incident Report,

NCVS-2

For each crime incident reported by an eligible household

member, you need to complete a separate Crime Incident

Report, NCVS-2. Use this questionnaire to gather detailed

information about each reported incidence of crime.

Always transcribe the identification information for the

sample case onto the top of the NCVS-2 cover page

before

completing the Crime Incident Report. By entering the

case's sample, control number, and household number on the

NCVS-2, you are ensuring that any NCVS-2s completed for

a sample address can be linked together with the other

completed forms for the sample address.

Detailed instructions for completing the Crime Incident

Report, NCVS-2, are covered in Part B, Chapter 3, of this

manual.

Noninterview Record,

NCVS-7

Any time you need to classify a sample unit as a Type A, B,

or C noninterview, you also need to complete an NCVS-7,

Noninterview Record. Complete the necessary items on the

Noninterview Record

after

you complete the required items

on the Control Card.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-6

NOT

complete:

An NCVS-7, Noninterview Record, when you classify

a household member as a Type Z noninterview.

An NCVS-1 or any NCVS-2s when you complete an

NCVS-7, Noninterview Record.

Be sure to transcribe the sample, control number, and

household number onto the top of the NCVS-7 and attach

the completed NCVS-7 to the case's Control Card

before

mailing the case back to your office.

Detailed instructions for completing the Noninterview

Record, NCVS-7, are provided in Part B, Chapter 4, of this

manual.

Field Representative's

Information Card Booklet,

NCVS-554

Your Information Card Booklet contains two types of cards.

Some of the cards in this booklet are designed for you to

show respondents as you conduct certain parts of the NCVS

interview in person. By using these cards during a personal

visit interview, you can:

Avoid reading long lists of answer categories and

Allow respondents to read all the categories before

selecting the appropriate answer.

The remaining cards in this booklet are designed to aid you

with specific parts of your NCVS job.

Here is how your Information Card Booklet is arranged:

Page

2 Shows an explanation of the NCVS which satisfies the

Privacy Act requirements, together with commonly

asked questions and suggested answers.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-7

3 Displays the suggested introductions for both personal

visit and telephone interviews, along with listing

reminders.

4 Provides a summary table to help you determine who

to include as a household member. This table is

designed to help you with Control Card Item 13c.

5 Once you have a household member's date of birth in

Control Card Item 16, then the age verification chart

on page 5 will help you to determine the household

member's age as of the last day of the month preceding

the interview month. After determining the household

member's age, verify it with the household member

before entering it in Control Card Item 17.

6 Provides the Spanish Origin flashcard that you will

show to a household respondent when asking Control

Card Item 23 in person.

7 Provides the Race flashcard that you will show to a

household respondent when asking Control Card

Item 24 in person.

8 Provides the Education Codes flashcard that you will

show to a household respondent when asking Control

Card Item 21 in person during the first, third, fifth, and

seventh enumeration periods.

9 Provides the Employment flashcard to show a

household member who is at least 16 years of age

when asking Item 48a on the NCVS-1.

10 Provides a checklist to help you determine the correct

reference period starting date for each eligible

household member. For a first enumeration period

household, the reference period for all household

members will be the first day of the month 6 months

prior to the interview month. For subsequent

enumeration periods, the reference period starting date

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-8

can vary based on the interview date from the previous

interview, but the ending date for each reference period

always

the day prior to the current interview date.

11 Gives examples of correct reference period starting and

ending dates for a variety of household situations.

12 & Provide a 2-year calendar, along with a list of

13 holidays for each year. When necessary, allow the

respondent to view these calendars during a personal

visit interview to help him/her remember the months

covered by the reference period and the exact month

in which an incident occurred.

14 Provides a table showing which Control Card items

need to be filled for each enumeration period

through 7)

. Also identified are the Control Card

items that you must either verify or fill for every

enumeration period.

15 Provides the Household Income flashcard that you

will show to the household respondent when asking

Control Card Item 28 in person.

16 Provides a quick reference to help you decide which

items to either include or exclude when recording

answers to Items 88 and 89 on the NCVS-2. These

items relate to incidents of theft and attempted theft.

When the offender is a police officer, page 16 also

provides guidance on preparing the summary report

for Check Item W on the NCVS-2.

17 Explains the various interviewing or listing situations

that require you to prepare an INTER-COMM,

Form 11-36.

18 Provides a table listing which items to complete on

each NCVS form by type of noninterview

(Type A, B,

C, and Z)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-9

19 Gives you the NCVS definition for the term "rape."

20 Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the

NCVS-500 for interviewed households.

21 Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the

NCVS-1 and NCVS-1A for interviewed households.

22 Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the

NCVS-2 for interviewed households.

23 Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the

NCVS-500 and the NCVS-7 for noninterviewed

households.

NCVS At a Glance,

NCVS-550.1

This job aid consists of four legal-size pages. The first two

pages provide information about the survey's purpose, its

sponsor, data users and uses, length of interview, and

participation requirements, along with answers to seven

frequently asked questions. The last two pages contain

reference information to help you with NCVS key concepts

and definitions. Information on the first two pages are

worded so that you can read the information directly to a

respondent as needed. The last two pages are written for

you to read to yourself as needed.

NCVS Fact Sheet,

NCVS-110

This brochure provides summarized results from the most

recent NCVS findings. The results are presented in text,

graphs, and charts. Prior to interviewing a sample

household for the first enumeration period, your office will

mail the household an NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110, and an

introductory letter, NCVS-572(L). For subsequent

enumeration periods, you can hand the respondent an NCVS

Fact Sheet when:

The respondent requests the type of information

provided in this brochure.

You discover a replacement household at a sample

unit.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-10

You feel that the brochure may encourage a respondent

to cooperate.

NCVS Introductory Letters,

NCVS-572(L) and

NCVS-573(L)

Before you visit a sample household, the regional office will

mail the household an introductory letter which briefly

describes the NCVS and lets them know to expect your visit

or telephone call. The NCVS-572(L) letter is sent to each

first enumeration period household and the NCVS-573(L)

letter is sent to each second through seventh enumeration

period household.

Always look at Item 5 on the Control Card to see if your

regional office sent an introductory letter to the sample

household. If the "No" box is marked for the current

enumeration period, make sure to hand the respondent a

copy of the appropriate letter and a copy of the NCVS Fact

Sheet

(NCVS-110)

when conducting the interview in person.

Both of these introductory letters are also available in

Spanish, Chinese, Korean, and Vietnamese.

NCVS Thank You Letters,

NCVS-593(L) and

NCVS-594(L)

There are two different preprinted "Thank You" letters for

you to use as appropriate. The NCVS-593(L) letter is

written to help leave a positive impression with a reluctant

respondent and possibly help you to gain his/her cooperation

during the next enumeration period. After interviewing a

household, mail the NCVS-593(L) "Thank You" letter to the

household if they showed any signs of refusing in the future.

The NCVS-594(L) letter is written as a "Thank You"

letter for you to mail to sample households who have

completed their interviews for the seventh enumeration

period.

Both of these "Thank You" letters are also available in

Spanish, Chinese, Korean, and Vietnamese.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-11

Questionnaires, Forms, and

Instructions in Spanish,

Chinese, Korean, and

Vietnamese

You are supplied automatically with "Introductory" and

"Thank You" letters, questionnaires, forms, and instructions

printed in English. If you know that your assignment area

includes households that may speak Spanish, Chinese,

Korean, or Vietnamese, make sure that you request letters,

questionnaires, forms, and instructions in the required

languages

(Spanish, Chinese, Korean, or Vietnamese)

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-12

Topic 2. Materials Kept Month to Month

Materials Needed Each

Interview Month

Your regional office will provide you with the following

supplies that you need to keep on hand to use every

interview month:

A black portfolio to hold your identification card and

all of your assignment materials

Copies of both "Introductory" letters, NCVS-572(L)

and NCVS-573(L)

Copies of both "Thank You" letters, NCVS-593(L) and

NCVS-594(L)

Copies of "Request for Appointment" slips,

Forms 11-38 and 11-38A

Copies of blank Control Cards, NCVS-500

Copies of blank Basic Screen Questionnaires, NCVS-1

Copies of blank Personal Characteristics, NCVS-1A

Copies of blank Crime Incident Reports, NCVS-2

Copies of blank Noninterview Records, NCVS-7

Copies of blank Interviewer Communications (INTER-

COMMs), Form 11-36

A Field Representative's Information Card Booklet,

NCVS-554

Copies of the NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110

Payroll forms

Pre-addressed envelopes for you to mail completed

work back to the office

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-13

Mechanical pencils

Notify your regional office whenever you start to run low on

any of these supplies or need a particular item replaced.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-14

Topic 3. Materials Supplied Monthly

Assignment Materials for an

Interview Month

Before the start of each interview month, your regional

office will send you:

A detailed memorandum which provides any special

topics of which you need to be aware, as well as

reminders and regular monthly topics,

Control cards for each of the current sample cases

assigned to you,

CATI Hold Control Cards

(in some assignment areas)

for your use if the sample case recylces from the CATI

facility to you for completion, and

Segment folders containing the listing sheets, maps,

and any other related materials and instructions you

may need for your listing and interviewing work. Call

your supervisor immediately if any of the instructions

are unclear to you.

Importance of the Monthly

FR Memorandum

Read all NCVS monthly memorandums very carefully so

that you can conduct your NCVS work accurately for each

interview month. Every month your memorandum will

cover current monthly topics, as well as any special

reminders. Ongoing regular monthly topics are covered as

attachments to the memorandum. Contact your regional

office if any part of the memorandum is unclear to you.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-15

Topic 4. Checking and Acknowledging Receipt of Materials

Checking New Assignments

As soon as you receive your monthly package of interview

materials, check the items listed on the Transmittal

Form 11-35 that accompanies these materials. When you

review your transmittal form, you will see a list of segment

numbers for your assigned cases, along with a list of serial

numbers for each assigned case within the segment.

Check to make sure that you received a segment folder for

each segment number listed on the transmittal form. Also

check to ensure that you received a Control Card for each

case/serial number listed on the transmittal form. If you find

that anything listed on the transmittal is missing from your

package,

call your supervisor immediately.

Requesting Materials Kept

Month to Month

If you know that you are running low on your regular

supplies or need to replace an item used each month for the

NCVS interviewing, place your order by either:

Calling your regional office or

Using the supply request form provided by your

regional office.

Topic 2 of this chapter provides a list of the materials that

your regional office sends and expects you to keep on hand

for use during each interview month.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-16

Topic 5. Mailing Completed Work

When to Return Completed

Work and Related Materials

Whenever possible, try to send your completed work back to

the regional office on a daily basis. If you can't return

completed work daily, make sure to send it back on a flow

basis as frequently as possible.

Once you have completed all assigned cases within a

segment, you can return the segment folder to your regional

office. Return completed segment folders on a flow basis

and do

not

hold them until the final shipment.

Return the following divider cards with your final shipment:

NCVS-601, Use Personal Procedure Cover Card,

NCVS-602, Use Telephone Procedure Cover Card, and

NCVS-604, CATI Hold Cover Card.

Make sure that your final shipment for an interview month is

mailed back to the regional office no later than the closeout

date provided by your supervisor.

Preparing Your Completed

Work and Materials for

Mailing

Before placing your completed work in the preaddressed

envelope for mailing, you need to stack these materials in a

specific order.

Noninterview Cases

(Type A, B, or C)

You should have a completed Noninterview Record,

NCVS-7, for each of your noninterview cases

(Type A, B, or

. Staple each completed NCVS-7 to the appropriate

Control Card for the sample household. When organizing

your shipment to the regional office, place at the

top

of the

stack of completed work any NCVS-7s that have been

stapled to their Control Cards. Any segment folders that you

are returning to the regional office need to be at the

bottom

of the stack.

Completed Cases

For each completed case, insert the Control Card and any

completed NCVS-2s and NCVS-1As inside the completed

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part A, Chapter 7

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-17

NCVS-1 for the case. Do

not

insert these completed

questionnaires into the segment folder.

Stack all completed NCVS-1s with the cover page facing up

and the appropriate forms inside each NCVS-1. Place the

stack of completed NCVS-1s directly under the NCVS-7s in

the stake of completed work.

Segment Folders

Once you are done interviewing all assigned cases in a

segment, including any recycled CATI cases that your

supervisor asks you to complete, place the segment folder

below the completed NCVS-1s in the stack of completed

work.

Mailing Your Completed

Work

Your regional office will provide you with pre-addressed

envelopes to use for mailing back your completed work and

materials and your supervisor will tell you whether to mail

your work back by first class, priority, and so forth.

Once you have all the completed NCVS work and materials

stacked in the proper order, place them in the pre-addressed

envelope and seal the envelope securely. Mail the envelope

using the method recommended by your supervisor.

Part A, Chapter 7 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions

A7-18

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-1

Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 General Instructions B1-2

2 Completing Items 1 Through 11 (Unit

Identification) B1-6

3 Completing Items 12 Through 15

(Household Roster/Housing Unit

Coverage) B1-35

4 Completing Items 16 Through 22

(Personal Characteristics) B1-54

5 Completing Items 23 Through 25

(Spanish Origin/Race/Household

Composition Changes) B1-70

6 Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use

of Telephone/Building Characteristics/

Household Income) B1-81

7 Completing Items 30 Through Table X

(Record of Visits and Telephone

Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/

Bounding Information/Noninterview

Contact Person/Determining EXTRA

Units B1-93

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-2

Topic 1. General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-500, Control Card, is the "basic record" for each

sample unit throughout each enumeration period (first

through seventh). Your NCVS assignment materials will

always include a Control Card for each case assigned to you,

and it is your responsibility to collect and/or update most of

the information stored on this form.

When completed, an NCVS Control Card contains the

sample unit's control number and address, as well as basic

information about the sample household (for example,

names of each person living in the household and each

person's age, ethnicity, race, sex, marital status, education,

and so forth). The Control Card also provides information

about the housing unit, the household's total income, crime

incidents reported by the household, contacts with the

household, and noninterviews.

The items that you will fill and/or update on each Control

Card will vary depending on the enumeration period for the

sample unit. Since Control Cards are used to document a

wide variety of information about the sample address and its

household members throughout each enumeration period,

you need to be extremely careful to complete and/or update

each item accurately, completely, and legibly.

First Enumeration Period

Before you receive your NCVS assignment materials and

visit a sample address for the first enumeration period, your

regional office is responsible for pre-filling the following

Control Card items:

Item 1

Sample number (for example, J20, J21, J22)

Item 2

Control number (PSU (5 digits), Segment (4 digits),

Check digit (1 digit), and Serial number (2 digits)). Here

is an example, J20-19183-1355-2-03).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-3

Item 3

Household number

Item 4a

Segment type

Item 4b

CATI segment eligibility

Item 5

Mailing of an introductory letter to the sample address

Item 6a

Sample address

Item 6d

Group quarters name, code, and sample number (when

applicable)

Items 7a and 7b

Year built and coverage questions (when sample unit is

located in an area segment)

Item 9

Land use

During the first enumeration period, you are responsible for

completing the remaining Control Card items following the

instructions in this chapter and on the Control Card.

Updating Control Card

Items

Several Control Card items are shaded. After your first

interview with a sample household, you are responsible for

updating the information for

each

shaded item

during each

remaining enumeration period. However, you only need to

update

unshaded items

on the Control Card if you happen

to discover a change.

Control Cards for "CATI

Hold" Cases

Depending on your assignment area (PSU), your assignment

materials could include a stack of Control Cards that are

marked as "CATI Hold" cases. Since all first enumeration

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-4

period interviews must be done in person and are not

eligible for CATI, any "CATI Hold" Control Cards that you

receive will always be for a second through seventh

enumeration period case.

Only interview a "CATI Hold" case when your

supervisor instructs you to do so.

If a "CATI Hold" case

is successfully interviewed at the CATI facility to which it

was assigned initially, then you will not interview the

sample household or make any entries on the "CATI Hold"

Control Card.

However, when the CATI facility is not successful in

completing the interview, the NCVS case will "recycle" to

you for interview. If this happens, your supervisor will

notify you to pull the "CATI Hold" Control Card and to

interview the sample household by telephone or, if

necessary, by personal visit. At that point, you will make

the appropriate updates to the case's Control Card, based on

the enumeration period for the sample household.

Identifying a Case's Panel

and Rotation Group

The NCVS sample is divided into panels and rotation

groups. Occasionally, you may need to identify from your

assignment a case's panel and rotation group before

conducting interviews for a supplement or special study

related to the NCVS. To identify a case's panel and rotation

group, look at Item 2 on the Control Card. The case's

control number in Item 2 starts with a 5-digit PSU number

and is followed by a 4-digit segment number. You can

determine a case's panel and rotation group by looking at the

first two digits of the segment number.

The first digit of the segment number tells you the case's

panel number (1 through 6) and the second digit of the

segment number identifies the case's rotation group (1

through 6). Since an NCVS case is assigned for interview

once every 6 months while in sample, here is a list of panel

numbers and interview months:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-5

PANEL ROTATION

Assigned for interview in

January and July.

Assigned for interview in

February and August.

Assigned for interview in

March and September.

Assigned for interview in

April and October.

Assigned for interview in

May and November.

Assigned for interview in

June and December.

Within each sample (J20, J21, J22), cases are grouped into

six rotation groups and each rotation group consists of six

panels.

(See Part A, Chapter 1, Topic 3, for more information

about the NCVS sample design.)

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-6

Topic 2. Completing Items 1 Through 11 (Unit Identification)

Control Card Label

In most cases, your regional office will affix a computer-

generated label in the top, left corner of the original

Control Card for a sample address. In addition to a

barcode, the Control Card label shows the information for

Items 1 (Sample), 2 (Control Number), and 6a (Address).

1 SAMPLE 2 PSU SEGMENT CK SERIAL

Item 1 (Sample)

If the Control Card is completed in the field for a

replacement household or an EXTRA unit, the sample

designation will be handwritten in Control Card Item 1.

For the 1990 sample design, the available sample

designations for NCVS are

J18 through J24

Item 2 (Control Number)

The sample designation in Control Card Item 1, together

with the control number in Item 2, uniquely identify the

sample address. For each case assigned to you for

interview, the control number will either appear on the

computer-generated label or will be handwriten in Item 2.

Each NCVS case has a unique control number that

consists of:

! A 5-digit Primary Sampling Unit (PSU) number of

which the first two-digits identify the Federal

Information Processing Standards (FIPS) state code

and the next three digits identify the FIPS county

code (for example, PSU 19183 identifies Iowa State

and Washington County).

! A 4-digit segment number of which the first digit

identifies the panel number, the second digit

identifies the rotation group, and the last 2 digits

identify the type of segment (area, unit, permit, or

group quarters).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-7

! A 1-digit check-digit number follows the segment

number.

! The last 2 digits of the control number are the case's

serial number, which is unique within segment

number and sample designation. Serial numbers can

range between 01 and 15.

Item 3 (Household

Number)

3 HOUSEHOLD

NUMBER

Prior to the first enumeration period interview, your

regional office should pre-fill Item 3 with the number one

(1). If it is blank for a first enumeration period interview,

enter the number one (1). Each time a household moves

out of a sample address and a new household replaces the

previous household, Control Card Item 3 needs to increase

by "1." If the household/family that you interviewed for

the first enumeration period continues to occupy the

sample address throughout all seven enumeration periods,

then you will never change the household number in

Item 3.

As BJS compares data from one enumeration period to the

next, they need to be aware of any household changes, so

they can account for these household changes in their data

analysis.

Completing a New

Control Card and

Changing the

Household Number

Under the following conditions, you will complete a "new"

Control Card for a sample address and enter a "new"

household number in Item 3:

! During a second through seventh enumeration

period, the household who occupied the sample

address during the previous enumeration period has

moved out

and

a different household has moved into

the sample address. This new household is referred

to as a "replacement" household, even if the original

houshold was a Type A noninterview in the previous

enumeration period and the new household is a

Type A noninterview in the current enumeration

period.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-8

Complete a new Control Card for the replacement

household and increase the household number in

Item 3 by "1." For example, if the Control Card for

the previous enumeration period showed the

household number as "1," then the Control Card for

the replacement household needs to show the

household number as "2."

not

change the household number on the Control

Card if the household was a Type A noninterview in

the previous enumeration period and the same

household resides at the address for the current

enumeration period.

! In previous enumeration periods, the sample address

was occupied, interviewed, and then the address was

classified as a Type B noninterview (for example,

vacant or under construction, not ready). In the

current enumeration period, another household is

residing at the sample address. In this situation, the

current household is considered a replacement

household and you would increase the household

number in Item 3 by "1." While the sample address

is unoccupied and classified as a Type B

noninterview, do not change the household number.

Wait until another household occupies the unit.

Do not change the household number if the sample

address was classified as a Type B noninterview

starting with the first enumeration period and, at a

later enumeration period, a household occupies the

sample address. In this case, this household is

considered the first sample household.

Filling Item 3 for Extra

Units

If you discover an EXTRA unit while interviewing, you

need to complete a separate Control Card for this "new"

housing unit. As you complete a new Control Card for an

EXTRA unit, always enter household number "1" in

Item 3.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-9

4A SEGMENT

Area 3

Unit 4

Permit

4B CATI

SEGMENT

ELIGIBLE

Yes 2

Items 4a and 4b (Segment

and CATI Eligibility)

Your regional office should pre-fill both of these items

before the first enumeration period. If either one of these

items is left blank, call your regional office. In Item 4a,

your regional office should mark one of four answer boxes

to indicate the type of segment in which the sample

address is located. The four segment types for the 1990

sample design are Area, Group Quarters, Unit, and Permit.

(Detailed instructions for each segment type can be

found in the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8.)

Your regional office should also pre-fill Item 4b to

indicate whether or not the sample address is eligible for

interview at a CATI facility after the first personal visit

interview with the sample household.

5 LETTER

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th

Yes

Item 5 (Letter Sent)

If your regional office instructs you to mail introductory

letters for your assigned cases (NCVS-572(L) for initial

interviews and NCVS-573(L) for subsequent interviews),

then it is your responsibility to complete Item 5 indicating

whether or not you mailed a letter to the sample address.

Otherwise, your regional office will complete Item 5 to let

you know whether the office mailed a letter to the sample

household prior to your visit or call.

Before conducting a personal visit interview, always check

Item 5 to see whether an introductory letter has been sent

to the household.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-10

First Interviews

The Privacy Act requires that we provide the information

contained in these letters to our respondents. As you

deliver your introduction for the initial personal visit

interview to a first enumeration period household or to a

replacement household, you will either:

! Verify that the household received the NCVS-572(L)

letter (when "Yes" marked in Item 5). If you discover

that the household did not receive the letter, hand a

copy of the NCVS-572(L) letter to the respondent

and allow time for the respondent to read it.

! Hand the respondent a copy of the NCVS-572(L)

letter (when "No" is marked in Item 5) and allow the

respondent time to read it.

Subsequent Interviews

After your initial interview, most remaining interviews for

a returning household will be conducted by telephone. Do

not ask about receipt of the NCVS-573(L) letter when you

are conducting an NCVS interview by telephone,

regardless of whether "Yes" or "No" is marked in Item 5.

When "No" is marked in Item 5 for a returning household,

do not interview the household in person just so you can

give them a letter. However, if there is another reason for

interviewing the returning household in person and "No" is

marked in Item 5, then you can hand the NCVS-573(L)

letter to the respondent.

If there is a reason to interview a returning household in

person and the "Yes" answer is marked in Item 5, there is

no need to ask about receipt of the introductory letter. In

this situation, keep the NCVS-573(L) letter handy in case

the respondent asks for a copy or asks for information

covered in this letter.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-11

6a ADDRESS (Sheet , line )

PLACE STATE ZIP

CODE

6b What is your exact address?

(Make corrections to address above.)

Same

6c Is this your mailing address?

Yes

No - Specify below

include ZIP Code

6d GQ name Type

code

Sample

No.

Item 6a (Address)

If a Control Card Label is used, the sample address for

Item 6a will be shown below the barcode on the label.

Otherwise, the sample address will be handwritten in

Item 6a, along with the segment listing sheet number and

line number. Use this address to find the location of the

sample address when you need to make a personal visit

interview. Materials in the segment folder, such as listing

sheets and census maps, are also provided to help you

locate a sample address. Use the sheet and line numbers

entered in Item 6a to help you locate the sample address on

the segment listing sheet.

(Detailed instructions for using listing sheets and census

maps and locating sample addresses are covered in the

Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives,

Form 11-8.)

When to Make Address

Corrections

You are responsible for making corrections to the address

entered in Item 6a when:

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-12

! Errors are found between the address shown on the

listing sheet and the address printed on the Control

Card label or handwritten in Control Card Item 6a.

! The respondent gives you an address correction after

you ask the question in Item 6b,

"What is your

exact address?"

However, if you are working in an

area segment and the respondent gives you a mailing

address and Item 6a shows a location description (for

example, white house with black shutters on Rt. 40

about 1/4 mile east of Rt. 40/209 intersection), do

not

line through and change the location description

in Item 6a. In most cases, the respondent is

providing the mailing address (see Item 6c below).

How to Make Address

Corrections

Line through any incorrect parts of the address shown in

Item 6a;

do not erase incorrect parts of the address.

Add any corrections or additions as legibly as possible,

and make sure to include any unit designations and ZIP

Codes.

Any corrections or additions that you make to the address

shown in Item 6a, also need to be made to the address

shown on the segment listing sheet.

Instructions for correcting segment listing sheets are

included in the

Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8.

Also prepare an INTER-COMM, Form 11-36, explaining

why you needed to correct or add information to the

sample address in Item 6a.

Item 6b (Address

Verification)

Once you have delivered your introduction, begin

completing or updating the Control Card by either asking

the question in Item 6b for incoming households or

verifying the address in Item 6a for returning households.

First Interview

(Incoming Households)

Always ask the question in Item 6b exactly as worded on

the Control Card the

first time

you conduct an interview

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-13

at a sample address. Never verify the address shown in

Item 6a for an incoming household (first enumeration

period, noninterview in previous enumeration periods, and

newly discovered units) instead of asking the question in

Item 6b. You must ask the question in Item 6b to avoid

"leading" the respondent and thus biasing his/her response.

If the respondent gives you an address that is identical to

the address shown in Item 6a, mark the "Same" box in

Item 6b.

not

mark the "Same" box in Item 6b if:

# You make any changes to the address in Item 6a or

# Item 6a shows a location description and the

respondent gives you a mailing address.

Subsequent Interviews

(Returning Households)

After the first interview at a sample address, you can

verify the address in Item 6a, instead of asking the

question in Item 6b. In other words, you can verify

the address in Item 6a, without asking the question in

Item 6b, if:

! The household is a returning household in the second

through seventh enumeration period or

! A replacement household moves into the sample

address in the second through seventh enumeration

period.

Identifying EXTRA

Units

During your interview, you may discover an EXTRA unit.

Once you have verified that the unit is truly a separate

housing unit from the original sample unit, you will need

to complete a separate Control Card for the EXTRA unit.

As you enter the address for the EXTRA unit in Item 6a,

make sure to enter an accurate unit description so the unit

can be distinguished easily from the original (or parent)

unit.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-14

Item 6c (Mailing Address)

Whenever you are required to ask the question in Item 6a,

you are also required to ask the question in Item 6c,

"Is

this your mailing address?"

. If the guidelines outlined on

page B1-13 allow you to verify the sample address in

Item 6a, then it is also acceptable to verify the mailing

address in Item 6c.

If the mailing address for the case is exactly the same as

the address shown in Item 6a, then mark the "Yes" box in

Item 6c. When the household uses a different address for

mailing purposes, mark the "No" box and enter the mailing

address in Item 6c.

Since the mailing address is used to send "Introductory"

and "Thank you" letters to sample households, make sure

to enter a complete and accurate address in Item 6c. For

example, a complete mailing address in an

urban area

normally includes a house number, street name, unit

designation (if any), city providing postal service, state,

and ZIP Code. Some addresses may also include a house

number suffix (for example, 1358A), a street name

direction (for example, South Jaggard St.), or a 4-digit ZIP

Code extension (for example, 20603-4102). For

rural

areas

, a complete mailing address normally includes a

route number, a box number (if any), city providing postal

service, state, and ZIP Code.

Item 6d (GQ)

Whenever a sample address is part of a group quarters

(GQ), your regional office will pre-fill Item 6d with the

GQ name, GQ type code (for example, 75-N, the GQ code

for non-institutional group homes for abused women), and

the sample number (for example, J20, J21, or J22).

Detailed procedures for working with GQs are covered in

the

Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8

If you discover at the time of interview that a sample

housing unit is actually a GQ unit, it is your responsibility

to enter the GQ name, type code, and sample number in

Item 6d. A complete list of GQ type codes is included in

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-15

Chapter 4 of the

Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8

ASK FOR AREA SEGMENTS ONLY

7a YEAR BUILT

Ask 1st mo.

Do NOT ask

When was this structure originally built?

Before 4-1-90 -- Continue interview

After 4-1-90 -- Complete 7b(3), when

required; END INTERVIEW

Item 7a (Year Built)

Whenever an assigned case is in an area segment (Box 1 is

marked in Item 4a), your regional office will pre-fill either

the "Ask 1st mo." or "Do NOT ask" box in Item 7a. If the

"Ask 1st mo." box is marked, ask, "When was this

structure originally built?". Only ask this question during

the first enumeration period and ask it regardless of

whether the sample address is occupied or vacant.

If you are unable to ask the question in Item 7a because the

case is a potential Type A or Type B noninterview, ask this

question of a knowledgeable person such as a long-term

neighbor or an apartment manager. Whenever you ask this

question of a nonhousehold member, never mention the

survey by name.

Understanding "Year

Built"

When you ask the question in Item 7a,

"When was this

structure originally built?"

, our intent is to get the date

that the original structure was completed. We are not

interested in the completion date for later remodeling,

additions, or conversions. Consider the structure to be

completed when all exterior windows and doors have been

installed and the final usable floors are finished. At this

point, the unit is considered ready for occupancy. In the

case of a multi-unit structure, all units in the structure

would use the same "year built" date.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-16

If the structure containing the sample unit was built

before

April 1, 1990:

! Mark the "Before 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

! Continue completing the Control Card.

If the structure containing the sample unit was built

after

April 1, 1990

and

Box 3 in Item 7b was marked by your

regional office:

! Mark the "After 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

! Ask Question 3 in Item 7b to determine if there are

any EXTRA units in another structure on the

property that were built

before

April 1, 1990

(See

Item 7b later in this chapter.)

If the structure containing the sample unit was built

after

April 1, 1990 and Box 3 is

not

marked in Item 7b:

! Mark the "After 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

! End the interview with the sample address.

Uncertainty About Year

Built

If there is uncertainty about whether the structure was built

either before or after April 1, 1990:

! Mark the "Before 4-1-90" box,

! Note in Item 7a that you estimated the year built, and

! Continue the interview.

(See the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8, for detailed instructions on

determining year built.)

No Entries on the Area

Segment Listing Sheet

When you are instructed in Item 7a to determine "year

built" at the time of interview, do

not

make any entries on

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-17

the Area Segment Listing Sheet in column 7g, Year built,

and do

not

line through any units that you determine are

built after April 1, 1990.

EXTRA Units

You must complete a new Control Card for each EXTRA

unit that you discover during an interview. When your

regional office marked the "Ask 1st mo." box in Item 7a

for the

original unit

, you need to take the following

actions for the new Control Card:

! Mark the "Ask 1st mo." box in Item 7a

and

! Ask the question in Item 7a for the EXTRA unit.

Attempt to interview an EXTRA unit during the same visit

at which you discover the unit. If you ask the "year built"

question in Item 7a and the EXTRA unit was built before

April 1, 1990, continue the interview. However, if the

EXTRA unit was built after April 1, 1990, end the

interview and report the EXTRA unit as a Type C

noninterview, Built After 4/1/90 (Code 27).

Replacement

Households

When you discover a replacement household at a sample

address, you need to complete a new Control Card. For a

replacement household in an area segment, do

not

ask the

question in Item 7a when the "Ask 1st mo." box is marked

on the

original

Control Card. Since this question was

already asked of the original household, just transcribe the

entries from the original Control Card to Item 7a on the

new Control Card for the replacement household.

Sample Address Built

After April 1, 1990

If a sample address is in an area segment and you

determine in Item 7a that the structure was originally

built after April 1, 1990, you will end the interview

because the unit does not qualify to be in the 1990

sample.

Take the following actions to remove the sample

address from sample:

! Complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, for the

sample address. When you get to Item 6 on the

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-18

NCVS-7, mark Box 27 to identify the case as a Type C

noninterview, Built after April 1, 1990.

! In Control Card Item 30b, enter the month and year of

your visit to the sample address (for example, 8/2003).

! In Control Card Item 30f, enter the noninterview type

and reason code "C27." The block to the right of

Control Card Item 33 lists all noninterview types and

reason codes.

COVERAGE QUESTIONS

ASK during the 1st enumeration period and ask the

MARKED questions only.

Are there any occupied or vacant living

quarters besides your own in this building?

Fill Table X

Are there any occupied or vacant living

quarters besides your own on this floor?

Fill Table X

Is there any other building on this property for

people to live in - either occupied or vacant?

Fill Table X

None

Item 7b (Coverage

Questions)

The coverage questions shown in Control Card Item 7b are

intended to discover any EXTRA housing units that have

not been listed prior to your interview. For each assigned

case from an Area Segment, your regional office will

mark:

! The appropriate coverage questions that you need to

ask the household respondent or

! The "None" box to indicate when it is not necessary

for you to ask any coverage questions in Item 7b and

can continue with Item 8a.

If the case is in an area segment and no boxes are marked

in Item 7b, explain the situation on an INTER-COMM,

Form 11-36. Before the next enumeration period, your

office will indicate in Item 7b which question(s) you need

to ask.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-19

When Questions Are

Marked

Only ask the marked questions in Item 7b during the first

enumeration period. If you get a "No" answer, circle the

"N" and continue with Item 8a. If you get a "Yes" answer,

circle the "Y" and complete Table X on the reverse side of

the Control Card. Table X is designed to determine if

additional living quarters qualify as EXTRA housing units.

Once you are done filling Table X, finish interviewing the

original sample unit

before

interviewing any EXTRA

units that you may find.

Type B and C

Noninterviews

When you need to ask a coverage question in Item 7b and

the sample unit is a Type B noninterview:

! Ask the marked coverage question of a neighbor or

other knowledgeable person and

! Modify the question's wording so that it refers to the

noninterview unit (for example, "Are there any

occupied or vacant living quarters besides the

vacant unit next door to you on this floor?").

Never mention the survey's name when asking this

question of a nonhousehold member, just identify

yourself and let the person know that you are doing

survey work for the United States Census Bureau.

If you have a unit that classifies as a Type C noninterview

and you need to ask coverage question 3 in Item 7b, make

sure to ask question 3 of someone who is pretty

knowledgeable about the area.

EXTRA Units

When interviewing an EXTRA unit, do not ask any

questions or circle any answers in Item 7b.

Replacement

Households

When preparing a "new" Control Card for a replacement

household, do not ask the coverage question(s) in Item 7b

for the replacement household. You do need to transcribe

the marked box from Item 7b on the original Control Card

to Item 7b on the new Control Card for the replacement

household.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-20

8a TENURE -

Ask during 1st, 3rd, 5th,

and 7th Enumeration Period

Are your living

quarters -

1st 3rd 5th 7th

Owned or being bought

by you or someone in

your household? . . . . . .

Rented for cash? . . . . .

Occupied without pay-

ment of cash rent? . . . .

Item 8a (Tenure)

Ask the tenure question in Item 8a for each sample

household you are able to interview during the first, third,

fifth, and seventh enumeration periods. However, there

may be situations when you are not able to interview a

sample household during the first, third, fifth, and seventh

enumeration periods, because the sample household:

! Was a noninterview,

! Was a newly discovered EXTRA unit, or

! Was a replacement household.

If you experience this situation and are able to interview a

sample household during the second, fourth, or sixth

enumeration period, ask the question in Item 8a and mark

the respondent's answer in the column for the preceding

enumeration period (for example, if you are interviewing

for the sixth enumeration period, mark the fifth

enumeration period).

How To Ask Item 8a

Start Item 8a by reading the lead-in statement,

"Are your

living quarters--."

Then ask each part of the question,

wait for an answer, and continue this process until you get

a "Yes" answer from the respondent. Be careful to mark

the appropriate box in the correct row (for the question)

and in the correct column (for the enumeration period).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-21

Owned or Being Bought

by You or Someone in

Your Household

Before you mark

Box 1 in Item 8a

to indicate that the

living quarters is owned or being bought someone in

sample household, make sure that:

! The owner or co-owner of the sample unit is a

household member.

! The owner or co-owner actually lives in the sample

unit when it is a cooperative apartment or a

condominium unit.

! The owner or co-owner has paid completely for the

housing unit or is paying on a mortgage for the

housing unit.

Rented for Cash Before you mark

Box 2 in Item 8a

to indicate that the

living quarters is rented for cash, make sure that money is

paid for rent or a contract exists for payment of rent for the

housing unit. The person paying the rent does not have to

live in the housing unit (for example, the rent payer could

be a welfare agency or a college student's parents).

Occupied Without

Payment of Cash Rent

Before you mark

Box 3 in Item 8a

to indicate that the

living quarters is occupied without payment of cash rent,

make sure that:

! The sample household does not own or have to pay a

mortgage payment.

! The sample household is not required to pay rent to

reside in the housing unit and no one else pays the

rent for the household.

Examples of this situation could include:

! A household living in a unit without paying rent in

exchange for services the household provides to the

owner.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-22

! A household living in a unit without paying rent as a

gift from a relative or friend who does not live in the

housing unit.

It is also acceptable to mark Box 3 if the sample household

is only required to pay for the utilities they use and no rent

is required.

Special Situations

Situation Action

Sample address is a Type

A, B, or C noninterview.

Leave Item 8a blank.

Sample address is in a

multi-unit structure.

Mark Item 8a based

only on the status of

the unit in sample.

Sample address is in a

rooming house or dormitory

and requires the payment of

rent.

Mark Item 8a to show

that the room is

"Rented for cash."

Sample address is a mobile

home or trailer.

Mark Item 8a only for

the status of the

mobile home or trailer

and not for the site or

land on which it is

located.

Sample address is located

on a military base and rent

is paid directly by the

household or deducted from

their pay.

Mark Item 8a to show

that the housing unit

is "Rented for cash."

A sample household owns a

piece of property and rents

an adjacent property and

both are used as a single

place.

Mark Item 8a to show

the tenure status for

the property on which

the sample address is

located.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-23

COLLEGE OR

UNIVERSITY

If apparent, mark without

asking. Otherwise, ask.

Verify each

enumeration.

Are your living

quarters presently used

as student housing by a

college or university?

Yes

Item 8b (College or

University)

If it is obvious whether or not the household's living

quarters are used as student housing by a college or

university, you can mark the appropriate answer box

without asking the question. Make sure to verify the

answer to this question during each enumeration period.

PUBLIC HOUSING -

If box 1 is marked in item 8a,

SKIP to item 8e.

If box 2 or box 3 is marked in item

8a, ask:

Is this building owned by a

public housing authority?

Yes, public housing -

Ask 8d

No, not public

housing - SKIP to item 8e

Item 8c (Public Housing)

During the first enumeration period, you will ask the

question in Item 8c after you discover in Item 8a that the

sample unit is occupied by a household who:

! Pays cash rent (Box 2 is marked in Item 8a) or

! Occupies the unit without payment of cash rent

(Box 3 is marked in Item 8a).

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-24

Do not ask the question in Item 8c if the household

respondent tells you in Item 8a that they own or are buying

the sample unit. When Box 1 is marked in Item 8a, skip to

Item 8e.

If you ask,

"Is this building owned by a public housing

authority?"

, and you get a "Yes" answer, make sure that

the unit is in a

federally funded

project. If the building is

funded by a state or local government, mark Box 2 "No."

Also mark Box 2 "No" if the building is part of a federal

assisted housing program, such as VA (veteran), FHA,

voucher, or certificate assisted housing. After marking

Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to verify this fact with the

building manager in Item 8d. If you mark Box 2 "No" in

Item 8c, you are instructed to skip to Item 8e.

MANAGER VERIFICATION OF PUBLIC

HOUSING -

Verify 8c with manager of building, if possible.

Update 5th enumeration if box 3 or 4 is marked.

Able to verify Unable to verify

Public housing 3

CATI/Telephone

Not public housing 4

Other - Specify

Item 8d (Manager

Verification)

If you determine in Item 8c that the sample unit is in a

building that is owned by a public housing authority, you

are instructed in Item 8d to:

! Locate the building manager and

! Verify that this fact is true.

This verification should be done during the first

enumeration period and, if possible, again during the fifth

enumeration period.

If you are unable to verify the respondent's "Yes" answer

in Item 8c, mark the appropriate box in Item 8d to indicate

why verification was not possible. There are two reason

boxes available under the heading "Unable to verify"--

CATI/Telephone and Other-Specify. If you mark the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-25

"Other-Specify" box, make sure to enter the reason on the

"Specify" line.

AMERICAN INDIAN RESERVATION OR

AMERICAN INDIAN LANDS

Mark without asking--if unsure, ask.

Are your living quarters located on an American

Indian Reservation or on American Indian Lands?

Yes 2

Item 8e (American Indian

Reservation or American

Indian Lands)

Complete Item 8e during the first interview with a sample

household. It is acceptable to mark the answer for Item 8e

without asking the question if you are familiar with the

area in which a sample address is located and know for

sure whether or not the living quarters is located on an

American Indian Reservation or on American Indian

Lands. Whenever there is any doubt about which answer

to mark in Item 8e, ask the household respondent the

question in Item 8e before marking an answer box. If you

notice that Item 8e is unanswered during a subsequent

enumeration period, either mark the answer without asking

when it is obvious or ask the household respondent and

mark his/her answer.

What Is an American

Indian Reservation?

American Indian Reservations are territories reserved as

permanent tribal homelands with boundaries established

by treaty, statute, or executive or court order. The Federal

Government and some state governments have established

reservations as territory over which American Indians have

governmental jurisdiction. These entities are designated as

colonies, communities, pueblos, rancherias, reservations,

and reserves.

What Are American

Indian Lands?

American Indian Lands are comprised of tribal

subdivisions and trust lands.

tribal subdivision

is an administrative subdivision of a

reservation. Tribal subdivisions may extend beyond the

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-26

boundary of their reservations and are internal units of self

government or administration that serve social, cultural, or

economic purposes for the American Indians living on and

adjacent to the reservation.

Trust Lands

are held in trust by the Federal Government

for either a tribe (tribal trust land) or an individual

member of a tribe (individual trust land). Such land is

always associated with a specific federally recognized

reservation or tribe, but may be located on or off the

reservation.

LAND USE

URBAN - SKIP to item 11a

RURAL - Look at 6d

Blank (regular units) in item 6d - Ask item 10.

GQ units coded 92-N or 93-N in item 6d - Ask item 10.

GQ units not coded 92-N or 93-N in item 6d - Mark

"No" in item 10 without asking, then go to item 11a.

FARM SALES

Ask during first enumeration period.

During the past 12 months did sales of crops,

livestock, and other farm products from this

place amount to $1,000 or more?

Yes 2

Item 9 (Land Use)

Your regional office will pre-fill Item 9 to indicate

whether the sample unit is located in an urban or rural

area. If the "Urban" box is marked, you are instructed to

skip to Item 11a. However, when the "Rural" box is

marked, your instructions will vary depending on the

information pre-filled by your regional office in Item 6d.

When the following conditions exist, you will ask the

question in Item 10 only during the first enumeration

period:

! The "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d is

blank (because the unit is a housing unit, not a GQ

unit).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-27

! The "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d

shows a GQ type code of 92-N or 93-N (GQ

facilities for housing workers).

If the "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d shows

a GQ type code other than 92-N or 93-N, mark the "No"

box in Item 10 without asking the question and continue

with Item 11a.

EXTRA Units and

Replacement

Households

When you discover an EXTRA unit or a replacement

household, you will need to complete a new Control Card.

As you complete the new Control Card, make sure to mark

the same box in Item 9 as the box pre-filled by your

regional office for the parent unit or the original sample

household.

Item 10 (Farm Sales)

Based on the instruction in Item 9, you may need to ask

the household respondent the following question in

Item 10:

"During the past 12 months did sales of crops, livestock,

and other farm products from this place amount to

$1,000 or more?"

What We Mean by

"Place"

For this question, the term "place" encompasses one or

more tracts of land which the respondent considers to be

on the same property, farm, ranch, or estate. These tracts

may be adjoining or separated by a road, creek, or other

pieces of land. In most cases, a "place" can be clearly

defined. For example, in a built-up area, a "place" is likely

to consist of a house and a lot. However, in a more rural

setting, a "place" could consist of a whole tract of land or a

combination of two or three pieces of land (for example, a

sample address on one piece of land and another piece of

land used to grow crops for sale).

What We Mean by

"Sales of Crops,

Livestock, and other

Farm Products"

The household respondent should report the gross amount

of money received for the sale of crops, vegetables, fruits,

nuts, livestock and livestock products (milk, wool, and so

forth), poultry and eggs, and nursery and forest products

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-28

that are produced at this place and sold at any time during

the past 12 months.

Exclude the value of any products consumed at the place.

The household respondent does not need to provide an

exact amount. He/she only needs to identify whether or

not these sales totaled $1,000 or more during the past

12 months.

Sample household owns or is buying the property:

In this case, farm sales should include sales from the

entire

acreage or property that the sample household owns

or is buying, even if a portion of the property is rented to

someone else.

Sample household is paying cash rent for the property:

In this case, farm sales should include only the amount of

sales generated from the property they are renting.

Sample household lives on property without paying

cash rent:

In this case, if the sample address for both the owner and

the non-cash renter are in the sample, include the amount

of farm sales from the entire acreage of the owner. Do

not

limit the amount of sales to only the property occupied

without payment of cash rent.

Sample household lives on property subsidized by the

Federal Government not to grow certain crops:

Only include the amount of the subsidy if the respondent

would have normally grown and sold the crops that he/she

is paid not to grow.

Sample household moved to the property during the

past 6 months:

Explain to the current household that this question refers

to farm sales from the property during the past 12 months,

regardless of who resided on the property during those

12 months. If the current respondent is unable to answer

this question, print "NA" in the answer space.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-29

Sample household is a Type A or B noninterview:

Attempt to complete Item 10 by asking a neighbor. If you

cannot get an answer for Item 10, print "NA" in the answer

space.

Sample household is Unable or Unwilling to Answer:

If a respondent is unable or unwilling to answer Item 10,

print "NA" in the answer space and use the "Notes" space

on the Control Card to explain why you entered "NA" in

Item 10.

11a

(Refer to item 6d)

Unit is in a GQ - Refer to

the GQ Table in Topic 3 of

Chapter 4 of the Listing and

Coverage Manual for field

representatives (Form 11-8)

Unit is not in a GQ

11b

ACCESS

Direct

Through another unit-Not a

separate HU; combine with

unit through which access

is gained. Apply "merged

unit" procedures if

appropriate.

11c

HOUSING UNIT

House, apartment, flat

HU in nontransient hotel, motel, etc.

HU permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

HU in rooming house

Mobile home or trailer with no permanent

room added

Mobile home or trailer with one or more

permanent rooms added

HU not specified above - Describe

11d

OTHER UNIT

Quarters not HU in rooming or boarding house

Unit not permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

Unoccupied site for mobile home, trailer, or tent

Student quarters in college dormitory

OTHER unit not specified above - Describe

Item 11a (Unit in GQ/Not

in GQ)

Mark Item 11a during the first enumeration period,

regardless of whether or not the sample household is

interviewed. Also mark Item 11a each time you complete

a new Control Card for a replacement household or an

EXTRA unit.

Item 11a is a check item designed to help you determine

whether or not the sample address is part of a group

quarters.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-30

Entry in Item 6d

Refer to Item 6d to see if a GQ name and type code are

entered. If a GQ name and type code are listed in Item 6d,

then verify the accuracy of the GQ type code against the

GQ Table provided in the Listing and Coverage Manual

for Field Representatives (Form 11-8), Chapter 4, Topic 3.

GQ Code Found in GQ Table:

Mark Box 1 in Item 11a and then mark the appropriate box

in Item 11d based on the description found in the GQ

Table of the Listing and Coverage Manual (Form 11-8).

Leave Items 11b and 11c blank when you mark Box 1 in

Item 11a.

GQ Code Not Found in GQ Table:

Mark Box 1 in Item 11a and make your best determination

for marking Item 11d based on the descriptions shown in

the GQ Table. If you encounter problems classifying a GQ

unit, contact your regional office and note the problem on

an INTER-COMM.

No Entry in Item 6d

When no entry is shown in Item 6d, you will:

! Mark Box 2 in Item 11a,

! Mark the correct box in Item 11b (direct access), and

! Mark the correct box in Item 11c (type of housing

unit).

Item 11b (Access)

Item 11b is designed to indicate whether or not a sample

household has direct access to their living quarters.

A living quarters has direct access when an occupant can

either:

! Enter his/her living quarters directly from the outside

of the structure or

! Enter his/her living quarters from a common hall or

lobby that is used by occupants of more than one unit

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-31

(as found in apartment buildings). The hall or lobby

must not be part of any unit and must be clearly

separate from all units in the structure.

If the only entrance to an occupant's living quarters is

through a room or hall of another household's living

quarters, then the living quarters does not have direct

access.

Only mark Item 11b by your observations when you are

sure that the sample unit has direct access. If you are not

sure, ask the household respondent before marking

Item 11b.

If you mark Box 2 because the unit does

not

have direct

access, then the sample address is not a separate housing

unit and should be considered part of the housing unit

through which access to it is gained. It is also possible

that the unit may have been merged with another unit. A

merger is the result of combining two or more unit

addresses to form one unit address. A merger could

involve two single family homes or two or more

apartments in a multi-unit structure. (See Appendix B of

this manual for more information on mergers.)

Item 11c (Housing Unit)

A housing unit is a group of rooms or a single room

occupied as

separate living quarters

or intended for

occupancy as separate living quarters. A housing unit may

be occupied by a family or one person, as well as by two

or more unrelated persons who share the living quarters.

To be considered a separate living quarters, the occupants

must:

! Live and eat separately from all other persons on the

property and

! Have direct access to their living quarters from the

outside or through a common hall or lobby (as found

in apartment buildings).

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-32

Once you have determined that the sample address

qualifies as a housing unit, then mark the appropriate box

in Item 11c to indicate the type (not condition) of housing

unit. For example, you should mark Box 1, House,

apartment, flat, for a vacant or occupied housing unit that

appears to be dilapidated, but still meets the housing unit

definition.

Box 1, House,

Apartment, Flat

Mark Box 1 for Item 11c when the housing unit is:

! An ordinary house or apartment,

! An apartment located over a garage or behind a store,

! A janitor's quarters in an office building, and

! Housing units in structures like converted barns or

sheds.

Box 2, HU in

Nontransient Hotel,

Motel, etc.

Mark Box 2 in Item 11c when the housing unit is in a

nontransient

hotel, motel, motor court, or YMCA. A

hotel or motel is classified as nontransient if

75 percent or

of the rooms or suites are occupied or intended for

occupancy by permanent guests. Permanent guests usually

stay a month or more at reduced monthly or weekly rates.

Box 3, HU Permanent

in Transient Hotel,

Motel, etc.

Mark Box 3 in Item 11c when the housing unit is occupied

or intended for occupancy by

permanent

guests or

resident

employees. A hotel or motel is classified as

transient

more than 25 percent

of the rooms or suites

are occupied or intended for occupancy by transient guests.

Transient guests usually stay less than a month and pay

daily rates.

Box 4, HU in Rooming

House

Mark Box 4 in Item 11c when the housing unit is located

in a rooming house or a combination rooming and

boarding house. Both rooming houses and boarding

houses are group quarters that have

five or more

units for

rent. However, the weekly or monthly rent paid by

roomers at a rooming house does not cover meals, but it

could cover linens and maid service. At a boarding house,

the weekly or monthly rent paid by its boarders entitles

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-33

them to their room and regular meals. The proprietor may

or may not eat with the boarders at a boarding house.

Box 5, Mobile Home or

Trailer With No

Permanent Room

Added

Mark Box 5 in Item 11c when the housing unit is a mobile

home or trailer (regardless of the type of foundation) and

no permanent rooms have been added to the mobile home

or trailer. Open or unheated porches or sheds built onto

trailers are

not

considered rooms.

Box 6, Mobile Home or

Trailer With One or

More Permanent

Rooms Added

Mark Box 6 in Item 11c when the housing unit is a mobile

home or trailer (regardless of the type of foundation) and

one or more permanent rooms have been added. Sheds

and open or unheated porches built onto trailers are

not

considered rooms.

Box 7, HU Not

Specified Above

Mark Box 7 in Item 11c when a housing unit cannot be

described by the specific categories already listed. Tents,

houseboats, and railroad cars can fall into this category if

they meet the housing unit definition. Whenever you mark

Box 7, make sure to describe the type of structure

accurately on the line provided.

Item 11d (Other Unit)

Once you have marked Box 1 in Item 11a and checked the

GQ Table in the Listing and Coverage Manual

(Form 11-8), mark the box in Item 11d which best

describes the GQ unit.

Box 8, Quarters Not HU

in Rooming or

Boarding House

Mark Box 8 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is located in a

rooming or boarding house or a combination rooming and

boarding house. The sample unit must not meet the

housing unit definition.

(Also see page 4-36 in the Listing

and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.)

Box 9, Unit Not

Permanent in Transient

Hotel, Motel, etc.

Mark Box 9 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is located in a

transient hotel, motel, motor court, etc. and is occupied or

intended for occupancy by transient guests. The sample

unit must not meet the housing unit definition.

(Also see

page 4-38 in the Listing and Coverage Manual,

Form 11-8.)

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-34

Box 10, Unoccupied

Site for Mobile Home,

Trailer, or Tent

Mark Box 10 in Item 11d if the sample address identifies

unoccupied site

for a mobile home, trailer, or tent

within a group quarters. The site must not be intended for

a mobile home, trailer, or tent that meets the housing unit

definition.

Box 11, Student

Quarters in College

Dormitory

Mark Box 11 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is occupied by a

college student in a dormitory. The sample unit must not

meet the housing unit definition.

Box 12, OTHER Unit

Not Specified Above

Mark Box 12 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is not described in

the categories already mentioned. For example, mark

Box 12 for dormitories used by nurses and interns in

general and military hospitals (GQ Code 86-N). Make

sure to enter the description of the GQ type as shown in

the GQ Table in the Listing and Coverage Manual,

Form 11-8, starting on page 4-9.

Identifying Changes in

Type of Living Quarters

If you should discover a change in the type of living

quarters or an error in classification, correct the entries on

the Control Card and note the circumstances and the date

you discovered the change or error in the “Notes” space.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-35

Topic 3. Completing Items 12 Through 15 (Household Roster/

Housing Unit Coverage)

HOUSEHOLD ROSTER

Last name first

What are the names of all persons living or

staying here? Start with the name of the person

or one of the persons who (owns/rents) this home.

List all persons who usually live here and all

persons who are temporarily absent. Be sure to

INCLUDE infants under 1 year of age.

RELATIONSHIP

TO REFERENCE

PERSON

What is ...'s

relationship

(Reference

person)

Enter code.

13b

HOUSE-

HOLD

MEMBER

Does ...

usually

live here?

If "No,"

probe for

URE.

13c

12 13a

Relation-

ship Code Yes No

1 1

2 1

3 1

4 1

5 1

6 1

7 1

Item 12 (Line Number)

As you list each person in the household roster (Item 13a),

the person is assigned a unique line number that is

preprinted in Item 12. This preprinted line number

distinguishes the various individuals from each other on

the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) and the Crime

Incident Report (NCVS-2). The Control Card also asks

you to identify by line number in Item 30c the household

respondent for each enumeration period, and to identify by

line number in Item 32e the household member who

reported the incident described in Item 32e.

In addition to identifying the household respondent in

Item 30c, you also must identify the household respondent

by circling the household respondent's line number in

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-36

Item 12. If another household member is the household

respondent in a subsequent enumeration period, circle that

person's line number in Item 12, too. You will only line

through a circled line number in Item 12 when the person

has died (using a wavy line across Items 12 - 24) or

permanently left the household (using a diagonal line

across Item 12).

More Than Seven

Persons in a Household

You will need to renumber the line numbers printed in

Item 12 when you complete more than one Control Card

for a sample household because:

! The household has more than seven persons or

! Enough people have moved in and out of the

household so that you run out of lines in Item 13a

(household roster).

On the second Control Card for a household, change the

line numbers to 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14, so that each

person listed in Item 13a for a household has a unique line

number. Follow this same procedure for a third or fourth

Control Card for a household, if necessary, making sure

that each person has a unique line number.

Person Dies or

Permanently Leaves a

Household

When you discover that a person has died, draw a wavy

line across the person's line starting with Item 12 and

continuing through Item 24. When a person has

permanently left the household for other reasons, just draw

a diagonal line through the person's line number in

Item 12.

Item 13a (Household

Roster)

Complete the household roster in Item 13a during the first

interview with a sample household. Once you ask the

question in bold type,

"What are the names of all persons

living or staying here?"

, the next statement you read will

vary depending on the answer recorded in Item 8a.

If the living quarters is either

owned or being bought by

someone in the household

, then read the statement as

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-37

follows:

"Start with the name of the person or one of the

persons who owns this home."

If the living quarters is

rented for cash

, then read the

statement as follows:

"Start with the name of the person

or one of the persons who rents this home."

If the living quarters is

occupied without payment of

cash rent

, then read the statement as follows:

"Start with

any adult household member."

Completing the

Household Roster

Normally, you list the reference person on line number 1

of the household roster. Starting with line number 1 and

printing one letter in each space:

! Enter the person's last name,

! Leave a blank space between the person's last name

and first name, and

! Enter the person's first name.

Try to complete Items 13b (relationship to reference

person) and 13c (household member) for one line number

before entering the next person in Item 13a. However, if

the household respondent gives you a list of names all at

once, enter each name in Item 13a and then complete

Items 13b and 13c for each line number.

not

skip any lines when entering names in Item 13a

and do

not

use a comma to separate the last and first

names (just leave a blank space).

For each person with the same last name as the preceding

person in Item 13a:

! Enter a long dash across the spaces for the last name,

instead of repeating the same last name,

! Leave a blank space, and

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-38

! Enter the person's first name.

As you complete the household roster in Item 13a, you

may need to probe for the household respondent to give

you the names of all remaining persons staying at the

sample address. If so, you can ask,

"What are the names

of all other persons who are living or staying here?"

Repeat this question as necessary until you are sure that

the household roster is complete.

Who to List in Item 13a

List the names (last names first) of the following persons:

! All persons living or staying at the sample address at

the time of your contact.

! All persons who usually live at the sample address,

but who are temporarily away for reasons such as

visiting friends or relatives, traveling for their jobs,

in "general" hospitals, and so forth.

! All children who usually live at the sample address,

including infants under 1 year of age.

! Any lodgers, servants, hired hands, and other persons

who usually live at the sample address.

! Visitors and other persons who are not household

members (do not usually live at the sample address),

but are in the sample household at the time of your

interview and have stayed at the sample address at

least one night before your interview, such as a

visitor or student with a usual residence elsewhere.

! Households consisting entirely of persons who are

not household members and have a usual residence

elsewhere. However, once you complete Items 13a

through 13c for the entire household and determine

that the entire household has a usual residence

elsewhere, you will classify the household as a

Type B noninterview, Temporarily occupied by

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-39

persons with URE.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6,

Topic 3, Type B Noninterview Categories.)

Preferred Order for

Listing Names

Listed below is the "preferred" order for listing names in

Item 13a by relationship to the reference person:

! Reference person (See page B1-41 for a definition.)

! Husband or wife of the reference person

! Unmarried children of the reference person or his/her

spouse, starting with the oldest and ending with the

youngest

! Married sons and/or daughters of the reference

person or his/her spouse followed by the married

child's spouse, and each of their children (oldest to

youngest)

! Other persons related to the reference person or

his/her spouse

(if these other relatives are related to

each other list them together)

! Lodgers and other nonrelatives staying at the sample

address

(if these other nonrelatives are related to

each other list them together)

Although this is the "preferred" order, it is not necessary to

change entries in Item 13a so that they match the

"preferred" order.

Verifying Living

Arrangements (EXTRA

Units)

As you complete Item 13a, you may discover that a family

group, nonrelatives, and so forth actually have separate

living quarters that qualify as an EXTRA housing unit.

Each EXTRA unit that meets the housing unit definition

requires a separate Control Card. However, if the living

quarters does not qualify as an EXTRA housing unit, list

these persons with the original household in Item 13a.

(Also see Item 15b in Topic 3 and Table X in Topic 7 of

this chapter.)

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-40

Household Requires

More Than One Control

Card

Since each Control Card has space to list seven persons,

some households may require more than one Control Card

because:

! The household has more than seven persons or

! Several persons have left or entered the household

between enumeration periods.

When it is necessary to start a second or third Control

Card for a household, make sure to:

! Renumber the line numbers in Item 12 on the second

or third Control Card, so that each person listed in

Item 13a has a unique line number.

! As you complete Item 13a on a second or third

Control Card for a household, always enter the last

name for the first person listed, even if it is the same

last name entered on the first or second Control Card

for the household.

! Just above Item 1 on each Control Card for a

household, note how many Control Cards there are

for the household (for example, 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)

! Staple together all Control Cards for a household.

Item 13b (Relationship to

Reference Person)

Use Item 13b to identify the reference person and the

relationship of each remaining person listed in Item 13a to

the reference person.

Item 13b is designed with two columns, so you can:

! Designate one person as the reference person

(normally line number 1) and enter the relationship

of all remaining persons to the reference person

under the "Relationship" column (reference person,

husband, wife, son, daughter, and so forth) and

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-41

! Enter the appropriate two-digit relationship code in the

"Code" column. A list of relationship descriptions and

codes is printed in a box at the top, right corner of the

Control Card.

Reference Person The reference person is usually the

first person

mentioned

when you ask the question in Item 13a for the

household roster. Since we want a responsible adult

household member who is less likely to permanently leave

the household, we prefer designating one of the persons

who owns or rents the home as the reference person.

Each

household must have a reference person and the

reference person must be a household member.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 4, for more

information about reference persons.)

Relationship of Other

Persons to the

Reference Person

Once you have identified which person will be the

reference person, you must determine the precise

relationship of all other persons listed in Item 13a to the

reference person.

Relatives of the reference person:

Enter the word(s) describing the family connection

between the reference person and each person listed in

Item 13a who is related to the reference person by blood,

marriage, or adoption. If there is any kinship between the

reference person and another person in the household

roster, use the word(s) that show the actual family

relationship between the two persons, rather than general

descriptions. For example, if the reference person's

cousin or nephew is visiting for the summer, enter

"cousin" or "nephew," rather than "visitor" or "other

relative."

Here are some examples of acceptable relationship

descriptions in Item 13b for relatives of the reference

person: husband, wife, son, daughter, stepson,

stepdaughter, father, mother, stepfather, stepmother, niece,

nephew, cousin, grandmother, grandfather, grandson,

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-42

granddaughter, father-in-law, mother-in-law, sister-in-law,

brother-in-law, son-in-law, and daughter-in-law. If

necessary, abbreviate the relationship in Item 13b.

After entering the relationship in the left column of

Item 13b, enter the appropriate two-digit relationship code

in the right column of Item 13b. A list of relationship

codes in printed in a box at the top, right corner of the

Control Card. If you don't see a relationship code for a

specific type of relative, such as nephew or cousin, use

relationship code 09 for "Other relative."

Note:

A "foster" son or daughter who has not been

legally adopted (unless the child is related to the

reference person in some other way), is considered

a "nonrelative," code 10.

Nonrelatives of the reference person:

Any person who is living or staying at the sample address

and is not related in any way to the reference person is

considered a "nonrelative." For example, a live-in maid, a

friend visiting from out-of-town, or a foster child who has

not been legally adopted are considered "nonrelatives."

Enter the specific relationship to the reference person in

the "relationship" column and enter code 10 for

"nonrelative" in the "code" column of Item 13b.

Changing the Reference

Person (Person Left

Household

Permanently)

After the first enumeration period, it is possible that the

person designated as the reference person has left the

sample household permanently, because he/she relocated

permanently, died, and so forth. If this happens,

! Delete the person who has permanently left the

household by:

-- Drawing a diagonal line through the deleted

person's line number in Item 12.

-- In Item 25a, entering the reason code and the

interview month and year in which you

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-43

discovered that the person left the household

permanently. A list of reasons and codes for

changes to household composition appears in a

box at the top, right corner of the Control Card.

Do not erase any information for a person

who has permanently left the household.

! Delete the person who has died by:

-- Drawing a wavy line through the deceased

person's entire line from Item 12 through

Item 24.

-- In Item 25a, enter reason code 21 and the

interview month and year in which you

discovered that the person died.

Do not erase any information for a deceased

household member.

! Determine who should be the new reference person

by asking,

"What is the name of the person or one

of the persons who (owns/rents) this home?".

! Correct the relationship description and code in

Item 13b to identify the new reference person.

! If necessary, correct the relationship descriptions and

codes in Item 13b for the remaining persons in the

household roster to show their relationship to the

new reference person.

Item 13c (Household

Member)

Item 13c is designed to help you determine whether or not

each person listed in the household roster is considered a

household member. Once you have identified a person's

relationship to the reference person in Item 13b, ask the

following question in Item 13c,

"Does...usually live

here?"

. If the answer is "No," try to determine whether

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-44

the person has a usual place of residence held elsewhere

for him/her. Ordinarily, a person's usual place of residence

is the place where the person eats and sleeps the majority

of the time.

As a general rule, a person is considered a household

member if:

! The sample address is the person's usual place of

residence or

! The person is staying at the sample address at the

time of interview and does not have a usual place of

residence elsewhere.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and

page 4 of your Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554)

for help in determining household membership.)

Person Is a Household

Member

If you determine that the person meets the household

member criteria:

! Mark Box 1 (Yes) in Item 13c and

! Continue with the next person listed in the household

roster.

Person Is Not a

Household Member

If you determine that the person does not meet the

household member criteria:

! Mark Box 2 (No) in Item 13c and

! Enter the reason the person is not a household

member across Items 16 through 22 for the

person. Here are some examples of acceptable

entries across Items 16 through 22:

-- Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Patient - Mental institution

-- Student - Usual residence elsewhere

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-45

-- Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere

If the entire household has a usual residence elsewhere,

follow the procedures for classifying the case as a Type B

Noninterview. Also, erase any entries that may have been

made in Items 8a through 8e if the entire household has a

usual residence elsewhere.

(See Part A, Chapter 6, Topic 3, for procedures to

classify a case as a Type B noninterview.)

When Unsure About

Household Membership

First, reread the information:

! In Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and

! On page 4 of your Information Card Booklet

(NCVS-554).

If you are still unsure whether to include a person on the

household roster as a household member, mark Box 1,

"Yes," in Item 13c, continue to interview the person, and

explain the situation in the "Notes" space on the Control

Card and on an INTER-COMM.

Changing the Reference

Person (Person Is Not a

Household Member)

If you determine that the person identified in Item 13b as

the reference person is not a household member, you must

identify another household member as the reference

person. If you encounter this situation, you must:

! Determine who should be the new reference person

by asking,

"What is the name of the person or one

of the persons who (owns/rents) this home?".

! Correct the relationship description and code in

Item 13b to identify the new reference person.

! If necessary, correct the relationship descriptions and

codes in Item 13b for the remaining persons in the

household roster, including the original reference

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-46

person, to show their relationship to the new

reference person.

HOUSEHOLD ROSTER COVERAGE

Ask each time household is

interviewed. (If "Yes," enter

name in item 13a above.)

I have listed

(Read names in item 13a

and verify 13c as appropriate).

Have I missed anyone else living or

staying here such as any babies, any

lodgers, or anyone who is away at

present traveling or in the hospital?

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

5th 6th 7th

Item 14 (Household Roster

Coverage)

After completing Item 13c for each person listed in the

household roster, ask the question in Item 14 next.

Item 14 is designed to remind the household respondent to

mention anyone he/she may have forgotten to mention

initially and to ensure that the household roster in Item 13a

is complete. Many household respondents forget to

mention babies, lodgers, and visitors when you ask about

persons staying at their home.

Asking Item 14 for the

First Enumeration

Period

When interviewing a sample household for the first time,

start Item 14 by reading,

"I have listed...,"

and then read

each name entered in Item 13a (household roster).

Continue Item 14 by asking,

"Have I missed anyone else

living or staying here such as any babies, any lodgers, or

anyone who is away at present traveling or in the

hospital?"

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-47

If the household respondent answers "Yes" to the question

in Item 14:

! Mark Box 1 "Yes" under the "1st" enumeration

period,

! Add the person's name to the household roster in

Item 13a, and

! Complete Items 13b and 13c for the added person.

! Continue asking if you missed anyone else living or

staying at the address until the household respondent

answers, "No."

Asking Item 14 for the

Second Through

Seventh Enumeration

Period

After completing the first interview with a sample

household, it is not necessary to ask the question in

Item 13a for subsequent interviews. Instead of asking the

question in Item 13a:

! Read the statement in Item 14,

"I have listed...,"

and

read each name already listed in Item 13a.

! Ask the question in Item 14,

"Have I missed anyone

else living or staying here such as any babies, any

lodgers, or anyone who is away at present traveling

or in the hospital?"

! Using the appropriate enumeration period in

Item 14, mark Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No."

! If you mark Box 1 in Item 14 and need to add one or

more persons to the household roster, add each

person's name in Item 13a and complete Items 13b,

13c, and 25a to identify each person's relationship to

the reference person, whether the person is a

household member, and, if the person is a household

member, the reason the person entered the

household.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-48

! If you mark Box 2 in Item 14, verify that each

household member listed in a previous enumeration

period is still a household member by asking the

household respondent the question in Item 13c again.

If you still get a "Yes" answer in Item 13c, then ask

the question in Item 13c for each nonhousehold

member listed in a previous enumeration period to

see if the person's status has changed. If you still get

a "No" answer, then proceed with Item 15a to collect

information for housing unit coverage.

Documenting

Household Composition

Changes on the Control

Card

If you discover any changes in household composition

between enumeration periods, make the appropriate entries

and/or changes to the Control Card based on the examples

described below. Also enter in Item 25a the appropriate

two-digit code to indicate why the person either entered or

left the household, along with the date (month and year) in

which you discovered the household change. A list of

codes for Item 25a is printed in the top, right corner of the

Control Card.

Person Leaves Permanently:

If a person leaves the household permanently (for a reason

other than death), draw a diagonal line through the

person's line number in Item 12. In Item 25a, enter the

appropriate code to indicate why the person left the

household permanently and the month and year that you

discovered the change. Codes 22 through 25 are reasons

(other than death) for a person leaving a household

permanently.

Person Died:

If a person listed in Item 13a has died, draw a wavy line

through his/her entire line from Item 12 through Item 24.

In Item 25a, enter code 21 and the month and year that you

discovered this household change.

Adding a New Household Member

After adding the person's name in Item 13a, filling

Item 13b, and marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 13c, complete

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-49

Items 16 through 22 for the added household member, as

appropriate. If you add a new household member after the

initial interview with a household, enter the code that best

describes the reason for this person becoming a household

member and the month and year that you discover the

change in Item 25a. Codes 11 through 15 are reasons for a

person entering a household.

Adding a New Nonhousehold Member:

After adding the person's name in Item 13a, filling

Item 13b, and marking Box 2 "No" in Item 13c, write the

reason that the person is not a household member across

Items 16 through 22 for the person. Here are some

examples of acceptable reasons to enter across Items 16

through 22:

-- Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Patient - Mental institution

-- Student - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere

A Nonhousehold Member Becomes a Household

Member:

When you determine in Item 13c that a nonhousehold

member in a previous enumeration period is now a

household member:

-- Draw a diagonal line through Box 2 "No" in

Item 13c.

-- Mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 13c.

-- Erase as completely as possible the reason entered

across Items 16 through 22.

-- Complete Items 16 through 22, as appropriate, for

the newly added household member.

-- In Item 25a, enter the code that best describes the

reason for this person becoming a household member

and the month and year that you discovered the

change.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-50

A Household Member Becomes a Nonhousehold

Member:

When you determine in Item 13c that a household member

in a previous enumeration period is now a nonhousehold

member:

-- Draw a diagonal line through Box 1 "Yes" in

Item 13c.

-- Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 13c.

-- Enter the reason for the person no longer being a

household member across Items 16 through 22. Here

are some examples of acceptable reasons to enter

across Items 16 through 22:

-- Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Patient - mental institution

-- Student - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere

HOUSING UNIT COVERAGE

15a

Unit is--

In a GQ - SKIP to 16 above 2

Not in a GQ - Go to 15b

15b

ASK IF NOT APPARENT

Do all persons in this household live or eat together?

Yes - Go to 15c

No, neither live or eat together - Fill Table X for the person or

group of persons not living or eating with the Reference

Person.

15c

ASK IF NOT APPARENT

Does any other household on the property live or eat with this

household?

Yes - Redefine the unit to include space occupied by

all persons who live or eat together. Apply merged unit

procedures if appropriate. - Ask 16 above.

No - Ask 16 above.

Item 15a (GQ vs. Housing

Unit )

Item 15a is a check item designed to help you in

determining whether or not to complete Items 15b and

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-51

15c. You will only complete Items 15b and 15c when the

sample address identifies a housing unit.

GQ Unit

Mark Box 1 "In a GQ" when GQ information is entered in

Item 6d. After marking Box 1 in Item 15a, skip to

Item 16.

Housing Unit

Mark Box 2 "Not in a GQ" when Item 6d is left blank and

the sample address identifies a housing unit. After

marking Box 2 in Item 15a, complete Item 15b.

Item 15b (All Persons Live

or Eat Together)

Item 15b is designed to ensure that all household members

listed in Item 13a actually live or eat together as one

household. You can mark the appropriate box in Item 15b

without asking the question when you are sure of the

answer. However, if the answer is not apparent, ask the

question in Item 15b.

Here are some examples of households in which you

would not need to ask the question in Item 15b before

marking the answer:

! A one-person household.

! A two-person household consisting of a reference

person and spouse.

! A household consisting of a reference person, spouse,

and their unmarried children under 18 years of age.

For most other household situations, it is safer to ask the

question in Item 15b before marking the answer.

Only Include

Household Members

When you ask,

"Do all persons in this household live or

eat together?"

, "all persons" really means all household

members listed in Item 13a. If Box 1 "Yes" is marked in

Item 13c, then the person is a household member.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-52

Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 15b if:

! All household members live together OR

! All household members eat together OR

! All household members live AND eat together.

After marking Box 1 "Yes," continue with Item 15c.

Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 15b if there is one household

member or a group of household members who neither

live NOR eat with the reference person.

After marking Box 2 "No," go to Table X on the reverse

side of the Control Card and complete Table X for each

household member or group of household members who

do not live or eat with the reference person. Table X is

used to identify EXTRA housing units during an

interview.

(Also see Topic 7 of this chapter for more information

about Table X.)

Item 15c (Other

Households Who Live or

Eat With the Sample

Household)

Item 15c is designed to ensure that we do not miss any

merged housing units or other changes to the structure of

the sample housing unit, as well as garages, mobile homes,

and so forth, on the property that are used as overflow

sleeping quarters. The question in Item 15c asks,

"Does

any other household on the property live or eat with this

household?"

The term "on the property" in Item 15c includes:

! The entire structure (or other type of living quarters

such as a mobile home or trailer) which contains the

sample unit,

! The land on which the structure stands,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-53

! Any additional structures (or other types of living

quarters) on the same plot of land

owned

by the

same person(s) who own the structure containing the

sample unit, and

! Any adjacent land and structures (or other type of

living quarters) which are owned by the same

person(s) who own the structure containing the

sample unit.

For cooperative and condominium units:

"Property" includes only the structure (or other type of

living quarters) in which the sample unit is located and

the ground on which it stands.

Box 1 "Yes"

Always ask the question in Item 15c before marking Box 1

"Yes." If one or more other households on the property

live AND/OR eat with the sample household, mark Box 1

"Yes" and redefine the sample address to include the space

occupied by all persons on the property who live and/or eat

together. Once you are done redefining the sample

address, continue with Item 16. Procedures for handling

merged units are included in Appendix B of this manual.

(Also see Topic 4, Chapter 7, of the Listing and Coverage

Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8, for more

information about merged units.)

Box 2 "No"

If it is apparent that no other household on the property

lives or eats with the sample household, mark Box 2 "No"

without asking the question in Item 15c. If you are not

sure, ask the question before marking the answer. After

marking Box 2, continue with Item 16.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-54

Topic 4. Completing Items 16 Through 22 (Personal Characteristics)

General Information for

Items 16 Through 22

Items 16 through 22 are used to obtain personal

characteristics (date of birth, age, marital status, and so

forth) for each household member listed in Item 13a.

Complete Items 16 through 22, as applicable, for one

household member before completing these items for the

next household member listed in Item 13a.

Do not complete Items 16 through 22 for any

nonhousehold members listed in Item 13a. For each

nonhousehold person listed in Item 13a, write the reason

that the person is not a household member across Items 16

through 22. Here are some examples of acceptable

reasons to enter across Items 16 through 22:

-- Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Patient - Mental institution

-- Student - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere

-- Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere

What is ...'s date of

birth?

Enter in numerals.

Month Day Year

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-55

Item 16 (Date of Birth)

Item 16 is used to record each household member's exact

date of birth. Once you have entered a household

member's date of birth in Item 16 during the first

interview, you do not need to verify the person's date of

birth in subsequent enumeration periods, unless the

respondent tells you that the date is incorrect or you see

that the date is incomplete. If you are unable to get an

exact date of birth for a household member, enter an

approximate date (for example, if the respondent only

knows the month and year (October 1964), enter

10/NA/1964). Use "NA" for the part of the date that is not

known.

Entering the Date of

Birth

Use numerals for the entire date of birth, entering 2 digits

in the month column, 2 digits in the day column, and

4 digits in the year column (for example, 04/02/2000 for

April 2, 2000).

When a household respondent is unsure of the exact date

of birth, you can:

! Ask the individual respondent for his/her date of

birth when you conduct the person's NCVS interview

and then complete Item 16.

! Ask the household respondent to find out the

person's date of birth so you can enter it in Item 16

during the next enumeration period.

Date of Birth is Refused

If the household respondent refuses to give you another

household member's date of birth, try to get the date of

birth directly from the household member when you

interview him/her. If the household member refuses to

give you his/her date of birth, write "REF" across Item 16

and enter an estimate of the person's age in Item 17.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-56

AGE LAST BIRTHDAY

If under 1 year of age, enter "00".

If over 96, enter "96".

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th

Item 17 (Age Last

Birthday)

Each enumeration period, enter in Item 17 the age for

every household member

as of the last day of the month

that precedes the interview month.

Determining Household

Member's Age

Starting with the person's date of birth in Item 16,

determine the person's age by following the instructions on

the "Age Verification Chart" located on page 5 of the

NCVS-554, Field Representative's Information Card

Booklet. Make sure to verify the age with the household

respondent before entering it in Item 17.

Birthday in the Interview Month

If you are conducting an interview on April 3 and the

person's birthday was on April 1, do not enter the person's

current age in Item 17. Enter the person's age as of

March 31 (the last day of the month preceding the

interview month).

Birthday is Incomplete or Refused

If you cannot get a person's complete date of birth (month,

day, and year) or the person's date of birth is refused, enter

your best estimate of the person's age in Item 17 and

footnote the situation (for example, Item 17 - L2's est.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-57

age). When estimating a person's age, do not enter an age

range, instead enter a specific 2-digit number from "00"

through "96."

Entering a Household

Member's Age

Fill one digit in each space under the appropriate

enumeration period column, even if the age has not

changed from the last enumeration period.

For Babies Under 1 Year:

Enter "00" in Item 17 for household members who are

under 1 year of age.

For Children 1 to 9 Years:

Enter a zero "0" for the first digit and the child's age as the

second digit.

For Adults Over Age 96:

Enter "96" in Item 17 for an adult whose age is 97 or older.

MARITAL

STATUS

Is ... now -

1-Married

2-Widowed

3-Divorced

4-Separated

5-Never

married

Code

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-58

Item 18 (Marital Status)

After looking at the name in Item 13a, the relationship

entries in Item 13b, and the age entered in Item 17, you

can often determine a household member's marital status

without asking the question in Item 18. However, if there

is any doubt, ask the question in Item 18 as worded for all

household members who are 14 years of age and older.

For household members who are under 14 years of age,

enter Code 5, Never married, without asking the question.

If an unrelated man and woman are living together and it is

not evident whether or not they consider themselves as

married to each other (either legally or by common law),

ask the question in Item 18 as worded or determine the

marital status without asking, if possible.

After the first interview, you do not need to update

Item 18, unless you happen to discover a change in marital

status. When you do discover a change in marital status:

! Line through the original code,

! Enter the current code above it, and

! Footnote the situation in Item 30g (Notes) giving the

date when you discovered the change (for example,

Item 18 - L1 now Code 4 (9/2003).

Code 1 (Married)

Enter Code 1 (Married) in Item 18 when:

! The person is currently married and living with

his/her spouse.

! The person is currently married, but is parted

temporarily from his/her spouse for reasons other

than marital discord (for example, employment,

military service, spouse in nursing home, and so

forth).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-59

! The person is not officially married, but is living

with someone as husband and wife, such as a

common-law marriage.

If the person is separated from his/her spouse due to

marital discord, enter Code 4 (Separated).

Code 2 (Widowed)

Enter Code 2 (Widowed) in Item 18 when the household

member's spouse has died and the person has not

remarried. If not sure, ask the question in Item 18 as

worded and accept the household respondent's answer.

Code 3 (Divorced)

Enter Code 3 (Divorced) when the person's divorce is

final. If you suspect that the person's divorce is not final,

ask the question in Item 18 as worded and accept the

household respondent's answer.

Code 4 (Separated)

Enter Code 4 (Separated) when:

! The person is married, but has a legal separation.

! The person is married, but parted from his/her spouse

because of marital discord.

! The person expects to obtain a divorce in the future.

! The person intends to remain separated from his/her

spouse permanently and never get a divorce.

If the person is separated from his/her spouse for reasons

other than marital discord, enter Code 1 (Married).

Code 5 (Never Married)

Enter Code 5 (Never married) when the person has never

been married or the person's only marriage was annulled.

Also enter Code 5, without asking, for children in the

household who are under 14 years of age.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-60

SEX

Ask if not

apparent.

Is ...

Enter

1-Male or

2-Female

Item 19 (Sex)

For each household member, mark Box 1 "Male" or Box 2

"Female," as appropriate. You can usually determine the

household member's sex from the name in Item 13a or the

relationship entries in Item 13b. However, if there is any

doubt, ask the question in Item 19 and record the

appropriate code for the household respondent's answer.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-61

Ask all HHLD

members 18-65.

Is ... now in the

Armed Forces?

Yes No

Item 20 (Armed Forces)

For each household member (male or female) ages 18

through 65, ask the question in Item 20. Leave Item 20

blank when the household member is under 18 years of

age or over 65 years of age.

A household member is considered as "in the Armed

Forces" when the person is at least 18 years of age and not

over 65 years of age and is serving on active duty at the

time of interview in the:

! U.S. Army

! U.S. Navy

! U.S. Air Force

! U.S. Marine Corps

! Reserve branch of any of the above Armed Services

and is currently on active duty status for several

months

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-62

! U.S. Public Health Service as commissioned officers

who are attached to any branch of the above Armed

Services

! National Guard in Federal Service (if his/her unit has

become part of regular forces by Presidential Order)

United States military academies as Cadets (for

example, West Point, Naval Academy, Air Force

Academy, and the Coast Guard Academy).

Each of the military services has a regular component and

a reserve component.

Members of the

regular component

of any branch of the

Armed Forces are always considered to be on active duty,

unless they are retired. Members of the

reserve

component

of any branch of the Armed Forces are only

considered to be on active duty when they have been

called to active duty by military order and are currently on

active duty for several months.

First Enumeration

Period

Mark Box 1 (Yes) if the household member is currently in

the Armed Forces on active duty.

Mark Box 2 (No) if the household member is not currently

on active duty in the Armed Forces. Also mark Box 2 if

the household member:

! Only serves in the Coast Guard Temporary Reserve

! Is an employee of the Merchant Marines, Maritime

Commission, or the American Field Service

Department

! Is a civilian employee of the Department of Defense

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-63

! Serves in a National Guard unit not blanketed into the

regular forces by Presidential order and is not serving

the 4-6 months of active duty in connection with

provisions of the Reserve Forces Act of 1955

! Is in short periods of active reserve training or is

attending weekly reserve meetings.

If you are still unsure which box to mark in Item 20, mark

Box 1 (Yes) and explain the situation using an INTER-

COMM form.

Subsequent

Enumeration Periods

When you see Box 1 marked in Item 20 for a household

member, verify each enumeration period that the person is

still an active duty member of the Armed Forces. If you

discover that the person is no longer an active duty

member of the Armed Forces, line through Box 1 and

mark Box 2. Using the "Notes" space on the Control

Card, note the change and the date that you discovered the

change (for example, Item 20 - L2 separated from AF

(6/2003).

If a household member has turned 18 years of age since

the last interview, ask the question in Item 20 during the

current interview.

If you happen to discover that any household member ages

18 to 65 years has entered the Armed Forces on active

duty since the last interview, line through Box 2 and mark

Box 1 in Item 20. Using the "Notes" space on the Control

Card, note the change and the date that you discovered the

change (for example, Item 20 - L3 joined the AF (2/2003).

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-64

Ask for all HH 12+ 1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th enumeration.

What is the highest level of school ... completed or the highest

degree ... received?

00- Never attended, 42 - Bachelor’s degree

preschool, kindergarten (ex: BA, AB, BS)

01-08 - Elementary 43 - Master’s degree

09-11 - High school (ex: MA, MS,

27 - 12th grade (NO DIPLOMA) Meng, MSW, MBA)

28 - High school graduate 44 - Professional School

(DIPLOMA or equivalent) degree (ex: MD, DDS,

40 - Some college (NO DEGREE) DVM, LLB, JD)

41 - Associate’s degree 45 - Doctorate degree

(ex: PhD, EdD)

1st 3rd 5th 7th

Item 21 (Educational

Attainment)

Item 21 is designed to provide up-to-date information on

the educational attainment of each household member who

is 12 years of age or older. Using the appropriate

enumeration period column, enter the two-digit code to

indicate the highest level of school completed or the

highest degree received by the household member.

When to Ask Item 21

During the first, third, fifth, and seventh enumeration

periods, ask Item 21 for one eligible household member

before asking Item 21 for the next eligible household

member. Leave Item 21 blank for any household members

who are under 12 years of age during the reference period.

Under the following situations, also ask Item 21during an

enumeration period other than the first, third, fifth, and

seventh enumeration period:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-65

! The household was not interviewed in the previous

enumeration period (first, third, or fifth).

! The person became a household member since the

previous enumeration period.

! The person celebrated his/her 12th birthday since the

previous enumeration period.

If you suspect that a household member's educational

attainment level may have changed between the

first/second, third/fourth, or fifth/sixth enumeration

periods, verify this information with the household

respondent. Whenever you verify that a change has

occurred, line through the entry in Item 21 for the previous

enumeration period and enter the appropriate 2-digit code

at the time of your interview above the lined-through

entry.

For example, Pat Clark has Code 09 entered in Item 21 for

the first enumeration period in May 2003. During the

second enumeration period in November 2003, you verify

that she is now attending tenth grade. If this is true, then

line through Code 09 in the first enumeration period

column and enter Code 10 above it in the same column.

Education Codes for

Item 21

A "Table of Education Codes" appears on page 8 of your

Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554). Shown below are

the available codes for Item 21, along with descriptions for

these educational attainment codes.

CODE DESCRIPTION OF GRADE/YEAR/DEGREE

00 Use this code for children who have never attended

school and for children attending kindergarten,

preschool, or only day care.

01 - 08 Use one of these 2-digit codes, as appropriate, for

elementary school grades 1 through 8.

09 - 11 Use one of these 2-digit codes, as appropriate, for

high school grades 9 through 11.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-66

27 Enter code (27) if the respondent completed 12th

grade, but did not receive a high school diploma.

28 Enter code (28) if the respondent completed 12th

grade and received a high school diploma or the

equivalent of a high school diploma.

40 Enter code (40) if the respondent completed some

college without receiving a college degree.

41 Enter code (41) if the respondent has an Associate’s

degree, which is normally awarded after completing

two years of college.

42 Enter code (42) if the respondent has a Bachelor’s

degree (BA, AB, or BS), which is normally awarded

after completing four years of college.

43 Enter code (43) if the respondent has a Master’s

degree (MA, MS, Meng, MSW, or MBA), which is

normally awarded after completing six years of

college.

44 Enter code (44) if the respondent has a Professional

School degree (MD, DDS, DVM, LLB, or JD) earned

in fields such as medicine, dentistry, chiropractic

medicine, optometry, osteopathic medicine,

pharmacy, podiatry, veterinary medicine, law, or

theology.

45 Enter code (45) if the respondent has a Doctorate

degree (PhD or EdD).

If interviewing during a household member's summer

vacation from school, enter the appropriate code for the

grade just completed, not the grade that he/she will attend

in the fall. For persons who have skipped or repeated

grades, enter the code for the highest grade completed,

regardless of the number of years it took.

Special Situations for

Item 21

Here are some examples for handling a response other

than the highest grade or year completed:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-67

Junior high/middle school:

Since junior high or middle school can cover different

grades in different localities, probe to determine the

highest grade or year completed and enter the appropriate

code in Item 21.

High school equivalency tests:

Enter code 28 in Item 21 for persons who pass a high

school equivalency test, such as the GED, or who receive a

high school diploma while in the Armed Forces.

Post-graduate high school:

Enter code 28 in Item 21 for persons who have received a

high school diploma and are attending post-graduate high

school courses in preparation for attending college.

Miscellaneous school system:

Determine the equivalent grade in the American regular

school system for household members who have obtained

their formal education in foreign schools, ungraded

schools, night schools or by the instruction of tutors (if

counted toward promotion in the American regular school

system), "readers" (roughly equivalent to regular grades),

or "normal" schools.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-68

ATTENDING SCHOOL

Ask for all HH members 12+ all enumerations.

Is ... currently attending or enrolled in a

regular school such as elementary or high

school or enrolled either full-time or part-

time in a college or university, trade, or

vocational school?

0 -

Regular school

1 -

College/University

2 -

Trade school

3 -

Vocational school OR

4 -

None of the above schools

Code

Item 22 (Attending School)

Item 22 is designed to determine whether or not each

household member who is 12 years of age or older is

currently attending or enrolled in regular school

(elementary or high school) or enrolled full-time or part-

time in a college or university, trade, or vocational school.

Ask the question in Item 22 in ALL enumeration periods.

When asking Item 22 for a high school graduate, omit the

phrase,

“such as elementary or high school.”

In other

words, omit this phrase when you enter code 28 or a

higher educational attainment code in Item 21 for the

person.

Code 0, Regular school

The term "regular school" includes both public and private

schools starting with kindergarten and continuing through

elementary, junior or middle, and high school, regardless

of whether the classes are graded or ungraded. If a

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-69

household member is enrolled or attends special education

classes, but the school consists of mostly regular classes,

use Code 0 for the person. However, if the person's

school is entirely for special education classes, use Code 4,

None of the above schools.

Code 1, College/

University

Use Code 1, College/University, for each household

member who:

• Has graduated from high school, and

• Is currently enrolled in or attending a 2- or 4-year

college or university or post-graduate school.

Code 2, Trade School

Use Code 2, Trade School, when a household member is

enrolled in or attending a secondary school teaching a

skilled trade that does not earn college credit. A trade

school prepares a person for a skilled trade, such as

plumber or electrician. Most trade schools have

apprentice/journeyman programs.

Code 3, Vocational

School

Use Code 3, Vocational School, when a household

member is enrolled in or attending a secondary school

teaching a skill to help the person pursue a career, such as

barber or cosmetology schools. These courses do not earn

college credit.

Code 4, None of the

Above Schools

Use Code 4, None of the Above Schools, when the

household member is:

! Not enrolled in or attending any type of school,

! Attending a home school,

! Attending a school devoted entirely to special

education, such as an alternative school, or

! Working on completing a GED.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-70

Topic 5. Completing Items 23 Through 25 (Hispanic Origin/Race/

Household Composition Changes)

ASK ONCE FOR

ENTIRE HHLD

Is anyone

living here

Spanish,

Hispanic,

or Latino?

If “Yes” ask

who. Show

flashcard.

Please choose

one or more

races that ...

considers

him/herself to

be.

Show

flashcard.

DO NOT

PROBE.

Yes No Code(s)

Item 23 (Hispanic or

Spanish Origin)

Always complete Items 16 through 22 for all household

members, as applicable, before asking Item 23. Only ask

Item 23 once to record whether or not each household

member is Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino by his/her

national, cultural, or language group. Always ask Item 23

during the first interview or when adding a household

member during a subsequent enumeration period,

regardless of the household member's race.

For a personal visit interview, open the Information Card

Booklet (NCVS-554) to page 6 and show the Spanish

Origin flashcard to the household respondent before

asking Item 23. For a telephone interview, ask the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-71

Spanish origin question from page 6 of the Information

Card Book including the Spanish Origin examples.

Purpose of Item 23

If a respondent wants to know why we ask whether anyone

is Spanish, Hispanic or Latino, explain that this

information will enable us to tabulate crime victimization

data for this group of people, since they comprise the

second largest minority group in this country.

Completing Item 23

After getting a "Yes" answer to Item 23,

"Is anyone living

here Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino?"

, ask which

household members and mark Box 1 for each person

identified by the household respondent. Then, mark Box 2

for any remaining household members.

If a person has multiple origins and one origin is Spanish,

Hispanic, or Latino, mark Box 1 "Yes."

If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 for each household

member.

If you get a "Don't know" answer, probe by asking if any

of the household members have a parent or grandparent

who is Spanish, Hispanic or Latino. The following list

may also help to determine whether or not a person is

Spanish, Hispanic or Latino.

A Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino person identifies his/her ancestry with one of the following

groups:

Argentina

Balaoric Islands

Basque

Bolivia

Boricua

Californie

Californio (Californi)

Canary Islands

Catalonian

Central American

(Spanish speaking)

Chicano

Chile

Colombia

Costa Rica

Cuban

Dominican Republic

Ecuador

El Salvador

Guatemala

Hispanic

Honduras

Iberian (i.e., Spain)

La Raza

Majorcan

Mexican

Mexican American

Nicaragua

Panama

Paraguay

Peru

Puerto Rican

South American

(Spanish speaking)

Spanish

Spaniard

Spanish American

Spanish speaking

Uruguay

Venezuela

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-72

When a household respondent is still unable to answer

Item 23 for a person, leave Item 23 blank for the person

and enter a footnote in the "Notes" space of the Control

Card (for example, Item 23-DK for LN ...). If a household

respondent refuses to answer Item 23, leave it blank and

enter a footnote in the "Notes" space of the Control Card

(for example, Item 24-REF.).

Race (Item 24)

Ask Item 24 once for each household member to record up

to four races that each household member considers

him/herself to be. Enter the appropriate race code(s) for

each household member's race(s) based on the household

respondent's answer. If you add any household members

in subsequent enumeration periods, make sure to complete

Item 24 for these added persons at that time.

Before asking Item 24 for a personal visit interview, open

the Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554) to page 7 and

show the Race flashcard to the household respondent.

If you add a household member during a telephone

interview, ask Item 24 and, if necessary, read the race

categories from the list in the top, right corner of the

Control Card.

Do NOT mark race either by observation, probing, or

asking a neighbor. Since the Census Bureau bases race on

self-identification, you must ask this race question for each

household member even when it may seem obvious.

Race Codes for Item 24

A list of 1-digit race codes is printed in the top, right

corner of the Control Card.

RACE CODES FOR ITEM 24

White

Asian

Black or African

Native Hawaiian

American or Other Pacific

American Indian, Islander

or Alaska Native

Other

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-73

Once the household respondent has identified the

household member's race, enter the appropriate 1-digit

race code on that person's line in Item 24. Only enter

Code 6, “Other,” as a last resort. If you enter Code 6, then

you also must enter the race description in the “Notes”

space below Control Card Item 30g as follows,

“Item 24 -

Code 6 (race description).”

Response is an ethnic origin:

If the answer is an ethnic origin (Italian, Irish, French,

Hispanic, German, and so forth), ask the household

respondent to identify the racial group(s) each household

member belongs based on the categories shown on the race

flashcard. A person's ethnic origin or ancestry does not

automatically identify his/her race.

Refusal:

If the household respondent refuses to give you any race

information for the household, leave Item 24 blank until

you interview each household member. Then ask

Item 24 of each household member. If race is still refused,

enter “REF” in the answer space for Item 24.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-74

CHANGES IN HHLD

COMPOSITION

DATE ENTERED OR LEFT

See codes above.

Enter code and date discovered

change for each line number.

Line

No.

25a

Code Date discovered

Item 25a (Changes in

Household Composition)

Item 25a does not have a question for you to ask the

household respondent. Use Item 25a to document

household composition changes as you discover that a

household member has entered or left the household since

the first interview. Try to determine the reason for the

change without antagonizing the household respondent

with questions that may be too personal or specific.

Once you determine the reason for a household member

entering or leaving a household, find the appropriate

2-digit reason code in the list printed in the top, right

corner of the Control Card. Enter the appropriate code, the

reason given, and the month and year that you discover the

change in Item 25a. If the reason will not fit in Item 25a,

use the "Notes" space on the Control Card.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-75

HH COMPOSITION CODES FOR ITEM 25a

Entered this period Left this period

Person

Person died

turned 12

Left for

Returned from school

school or or college

college

Entered

Returned from institution

institution

Left because

Entered of marriage/

because separation/

of marriage/ divorce

separation/

Person left

divorce HH for

Person entered reasons

HH for reasons other than

other than above

above

Adding a Household

Member

When a new person enters a household, you need to:

! Add the person's name to the household roster using

the next unused line in Item 13a.

! Complete Item 13b to determine the new person's

relationship to the reference person.

! Complete Item 13c to determine if the new person

qualifies as a household member.

! If you get a "Yes" answer in Item 13c, complete

Items 16 through 22 for the new household member,

as applicable. In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code

(11 - 15), the reason given, and the month and year

you discover the household change. For example,

"Code 14/Married L1/7-2003" or "Code 13/Released

from prison/9-2003."

! If you get a "No" answer in Item 13c, enter the

reason the person is not a household member across

Items 16 through 22.

! If a household member has been deleted from a

household roster and then returns while the

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-76

household is still in sample, erase the diagonal line in

Item 12 and use the same line number to complete

the other applicable items that may need to be

updated. In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code, the

reason that the person entered the household, and the

month and year that you discovered this change.

Deleting a Household

Member

Person dies:

If a person in a household dies, draw a wavy line through

the person's entire line from Item 12 through Item 24. In

Item 25a, enter Code (21), "Person died," and the month

and year you discovered this change.

Person leaves household:

If a person leaves a household and is not just temporarily

absent, draw a diagonal line through the person's line

number in Item 12. In Item 25a, enter the appropriate

code, the reason that the person left, and the month and

year you discover this change. For example,

"Code 22/Attending College/10-2003" or "Code 25/Active

military duty overseas/7-2003."

NOTE:

Once a person has left a household, make sure

that you do not read the person's name at

subsequent interviews when checking the

household roster at Control Card Item 14.

Person's Household

Membership Changes

If you discover that a person, who was listed as a URE

(usual residence elsewhere) in a previous enumeration

period, is now a household member, line through Box 2 in

Item 13c and mark Box 1. Also complete Items 16

through 24, as applicable. In Item 25a, enter the

appropriate code, the reason for the person entering the

household, and the month and year you discovered the

change. For example, "Code 15/Returned from active

military duty overseas/8-2003."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-77

Update for all enumerations

for each interviewed

household member.

Date of interview

25b

How long

have you lived

at this

address?

25c

Month Day Year Yrs. Mos.

Item 25b (Date of

Interview)

First enumeration period:

Once you complete a household member's entire NCVS

interview (the NCVS-1 and NCVS-2s for all reported

incidents), transcribe the month, day, and year from the

person's Item 29 on the NCVS-1 to Control Card Item 25b.

Subsequent enumeration periods 2 - 7:

Once you complete a household member's entire NCVS

interview (the NCVS-1 and NCVS-2s for all reported

incidents), erase the date entered for the previous

interview, and transcribe the month, day, and year from the

person's Item 29 on the NCVS-1 to Control Card Item 25b.

Type Z Noninterview

Persons

When you classify a household member (other than the

household respondent) as a Type Z noninterview because

you cannot complete the person's interview, erase the

interview date from the previous enumeration period and

leave Item 25b blank for the Type Z noninterview person.

Remember that a household respondent can never be a

Type Z noninterview.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-78

Type A Noninterview

Case

Whenever you are unable to complete at least the

household respondent's NCVS interview, you will classify

the case as a Type A noninterview. Leave all lines in

Item 25b blank when the household is a Type A

noninterview for the current enumeration period.

Importance of Item 25b

The date that you enter in Item 25b is used as the starting

date for the household member's next reference period, so

it is very important that this date be accurate.

Item 25c (Length of Time

Living at the Address)

Item 25c is used to determine the length of

continuous

time

in years and months that each household member has

lived at a sample address. Unlike Item 25b, complete/

update Item 25c for each household member even if the

person is a Type Z noninterview for the current

enumeration period.

First enumeration period:

Before starting the NCVS-1 interview with a household

respondent, ask the question in Item 25c of the household

respondent and for each household member at the sample

address. Accept the answer given by the household

respondent without probing.

However, if the household respondent hesitates or is not

sure how to answer this question, explain that we are

interested in the

continuous length of time

a person has

been a household member at the sample address. For

example, John leaves his parents' home to live and work as

a chef in Seattle a month after the second interview.

Unfortunately, the restaurant closes and John moves back

with his parents 5 months before the household's sixth

interview. For the sixth enumeration period, John's length

of time living at the sample address is 5 months (the last

continuous length of time since he returned to the sample

address).

Subsequent enumeration periods

After the first interview with a sample household, you can

update each household member's entry in Item 25c without

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-79

asking the question. Just add 6 months to the entry from

the previous interview, erase the old entry, and enter the

updated length of time for the current enumeration period.

However, if you add a new household member, ask the

question in Item 25c for each new person added to the

household roster. Also, if the household was a Type A

noninterview in the previous enumeration period, ask the

question in Item 25c for all household members, including

any Type Z noninterview persons.

Recording Answers in

Item 25c

Record separately for each household member the length

of time he/she has lived continuously at the sample

address in "years" and "months." Do NOT round up or

down for the number of years. For example, do not round

up to 7 years an answer of 6 years and 10 months. Enter

both the years and months in the appropriate columns of

Item 25c.

Answer is less than 1 year:

Leave the "years" column blank in Item 25c and enter the

number of months the person has lived continuously at the

sample address in the "months" column.

Answer is less than one month:

If the answer is less than one month, always enter

"1" month in the "months" column. This is the only time

that rounding up is acceptable for Item 25c.

Answer is given in weeks:

If the household respondent answers in weeks, convert the

weeks to months. For example, if you are given an answer

of 10 weeks, convert the "10 weeks" to 3 months and enter

"3" in the "months" column of Item 25c.

Answer is "all of his/her life":

When a household respondent tells you that the household

member has lived at the sample address all of his/her life,

in the "years" column of Item 25c, enter the person's age

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-80

from Control Card Item 17. In this case, it is not necessary

to enter anything in the "months" column.

Answer is vague or in ranges:

When a household respondent's answer is vague or in

ranges, probe to get a more precise response. Here are

some examples:

Respondent answers: Suggested probe:

"Years and years" "Would you say it is more than 5 years

or less than 5 years?"

"I'd say more like 5 to 10 years,

I guess."

"Do you think that it is more than

7 years or less than 7 years?"

"He has probably lived here

6 and a half years."

Enter "6" years and "6" months in Item 25c.

If the household respondent can only give you an

estimated length of time, enter the estimated length of time

in the appropriate columns and print "EST" beside the

entry in Item 25c.

If the household respondent really doesn't know how long

a household member has lived at a sample address and

cannot give you a good estimate, enter "DK" in Item 25c.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-81

Topic 6. Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use of Telephone/

Building Characteristics/Household Income

USE OF TELEPHONE - Ask first enumeration - Verify each subsequent enumeration

26a Is there a telephone in this house/ apartment?

Yes -- SKIP to 26c 2

26d Is a telephone interview acceptable?

Mark "No" if

phone number is refused in 26c.

Yes 2

26b Is there a telephone elsewhere on which

people in this household can be contacted?

Yes --

Where?

Phone in common area

Phone in another unit

Work/office phone

No phone --SKIP to 26e

26e When is the best time to call or visit?

Mark (X)

ONLY one box.

6-9 p.m./evenings

7-9 a.m./early morning 6

9 a.m.-9 p.m./any time

9-11 a.m./late morning 7

7-9 p.m./night

11 a.m.-1 p.m./lunch 8

9 a.m.-4 p.m./daytime

Noon-4 p.m./afternoon 9

5-9 p.m./after 5 p.m.

4-7 p.m./dinner time

9-11 p.m./late evening

Notes -- When to call/when not to call

26c What is the telephone number?

( )

2nd telephone number, if given

( )

Refused number - SKIP to 26e

26f Is a Sunday interview acceptable?

Yes 2

Use of Telephone

(Items 26a - 26f)

At the end of your first interview with a sample household,

ask the questions in Items 26a through 26f of the

household respondent. As a lead-in to these questions,

explain that the household will be interviewed a total of

seven times at 6-month intervals. Also, explain that we try

to:

! Limit survey costs by conducting future interviews

by telephone and

! Ensure that we contact each household at an

acceptable time of day.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-82

You can also tell a household respondent that we may

need a household's telephone number to:

! Make appointments to visit other household

members, when a personal visit is necessary.

! Obtain any missing information that a respondent

may be unable to supply during an interview.

! Clarify facts or answers provided during an

interview.

Verifying Use of

Telephone

During the second through seventh enumeration periods,

verify any telephone numbers entered in Item 26c and

correct Items 26a through 26f, as needed. For example,

you might discover that a household now has a telephone

in their home and no longer uses their mother's telephone.

In this case, you would correct Items 26a through 26c.

Also, ask the question in Item 26d again.

Item 26a (Telephone in

House/Apartment)

Before asking for a telephone number, you need to

determine whether there is a telephone in the

house/apartment by asking the question in Item 26a.

Box 1 (Yes)

If there is a telephone in the sample house/apartment, mark

Box 1 and skip to Item 26c to record the telephone

number.

Box 2 (No)

If the household does not have a telephone in their

house/apartment, mark Box 2 and then ask the question in

Item 26b to determine if there might be a telephone

elsewhere on which some or all of the household members

can be reached. Since we prefer that you conduct all

interviews by telephone following the initial interview, it

is important to obtain a telephone number to reach most, if

not all, household members.

Item 26b (Telephone

Elsewhere)

Households that do not have their own telephone

sometimes have access to a neighbor's telephone or a hall

telephone where they can receive calls. Ask the initial

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-83

question in Item 26b,

"Is there a telephone elsewhere on

which people in this household can be contacted?"

For a "Yes" Answer

If the answer is "Yes," ask where the telephone is located

and mark:

Box 2

if there is a telephone available in a common

area, such as a hall or lobby.

Box 3

if there is a telephone available in another

housing unit, such as a neighbor's or relative's home.

Box 4

when an office or work telephone is the only

telephone on which you can reach most of the

household members.

For a "No" Answer

If you get a "No" answer to the initial question in

Item 26b, mark Box 5 "No phone" and skip to Item 26e to

determine the best time to conduct personal visit

interviews in the future.

Item 26c (Telephone

Number)

Ask the question in Item 26c to record up to two telephone

numbers when:

! Box 1 is marked in Item 26a or

! Box 2, 3, or 4 is marked in Item 26b.

Telephone Number(s)

Provided

Use a separate line in Item 26c for each phone number

given and make sure to enter the area code in the

parentheses. If a second phone number is an office or

work number, note that fact after the number.

Respondent Is Hesitant

or Refuses

If the household respondent is hesitant or uneasy about

providing you with a phone number, assure him/her that

we will keep the number strictly confidential. Sometimes

the respondent will allow telephone calls to set

appointments or to collect missing information, but not to

be interviewed. If this happens, enter the telephone

number, mark Box 2 "No" in Item 26d, and note in

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-84

Item 26d that the telephone number is to be used

only

for

setting appointments or adding missing information.

When you cannot persuade a household respondent to give

you the phone number, mark the "Refused number" box in

Item 26c and skip to Item 26e where you will record the

best time of day to visit the household in the future.

Item 26d (Telephone

Interview Acceptable)

Whenever you record a telephone number in Item 26c, ask

the question in Item 26d to make sure that a telephone

interview is acceptable.

Box 1 (Yes)

If the household respondent answers "Yes," mark Box 1

"Yes" and remind the respondent that conversations could

be overheard if the household has a "party" line.

Box 2 (No)

Mark Box 2 "No" when:

! The household respondent refuses to provide a

telephone number. In this case, mark the answer

without asking the question in Item 26d.

! The household respondent does not want to be

interviewed by telephone. If a reason is given, note

the reason in Item 26d, but do not probe for a reason.

! A telephone number is provided in Item 26c, but

only for setting appointments or collecting missing

information. Make sure to note this fact in Item 26d.

Item 26e (Best Time)

Mark only one box to indicate the time of day that is best

to reach an adult household member, since you must

interview the household respondent first during each

enumeration period. Word the question in Item 26e based

on whether or not a telephone interview is acceptable.

Make sure to verify the information in Items 26a and 26e

each enumeration period and make corrections, as needed.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-85

In addition to marking the appropriate box for the best

time of day to contact the household, you can use the

"Notes" space in Item 26e to:

! Enter a specific day of the week that the household

respondent prefers, in addition to marking a box for

the time of day.

! Enter days or times of day that the household

respondent does not want to be bothered. However,

if the person tells you not to contact them on a

Sunday, just mark Box 2 "No" in Item 26f.

Item 26f (Sunday

Interview)

Always ask the question in Item 26f to find out whether or

not a Sunday interview is acceptable. Mark Box 1 if a

Sunday interview is acceptable and Box 2 if a Sunday

interview is not acceptable.

Using the Information

From Items 26a Through

26f

Always review these items before starting an assignment,

so that you are:

! More likely to reach respondents at home,

! Less likely to upset respondents by contacting them

when they have asked not to be contacted, and

! More likely to plan your work days more efficiently.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-86

BUILDING CHARACTERISTICS - Observe or ask

27a How many housing units are in this structure?

1 - SKIP to 28

5-9

10+

Mobile home/trailer - SKIP to 28

Only OTHER units

27b Does the unit have an outside entrance, patio doors,

or windows, etc., on the ground level - or outside

stairs leading directly to this unit?

Yes

Don't know

Item 27a (Units in

Structure)

Complete Item 27a once you have completed Item 26f. If

you are sure how to mark Item 27a by your observations,

mark the appropriate box without asking the question.

However, if there is any doubt in your mind, ask the

question of the household respondent and mark the

appropriate box to indicate the number of housing units in

the structure.

What Is a Structure?

A structure is a separate building that either:

! Has open space on all sides (no other building

attached to it) or

! Is separated from other structures by dividing walls

that extend from ground to roof.

Consider the following residential buildings to be separate

structures if the common wall between them goes from

ground to roof:

! Double houses

! Duplex houses

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-87

! Row houses

! Houses attached to nonresidential structures.

Sheds and private garages attached to houses are not

considered separate structures because they are not

intended for occupancy as separate living quarters.

What Is a Housing

Unit?

A housing unit is a group of rooms or a single room

occupied as separate living quarters or intended for

occupancy as separate living quarters. A housing unit may

be occupied by a family or one person, as well as by two

or more unrelated persons who share the living quarters.

(See page 7-4 of the Listing and Coverage Manual for

Field Representatives (Form 11-8) for more information

about separate living quarters and direct access.)

Single-Unit Structures

If you mark Box 1 or Box 7 because there is only one

housing unit in the structure, do not complete Item 27b

and skip to Item 28.

Multi-Unit Structures

If you mark Box 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 because there are two or

more housing units in the structure, complete Item 27b to

inquire about direct access from outside the structure.

Group Quarters Units

If the sample address identifies a group quarters (GQ) unit,

mark Box 8 "Only OTHER units."

Item 27b (Direct Access

From Outside)

When you are sure how to mark Item 27b by your

observations, mark the appropriate box without asking the

question. However, if there is any doubt in your mind, ask

the question of the household respondent and mark the

appropriate box.

Box 1 (Yes)

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if there is some means of entering the

sample unit

directly from the outside

, such as a door,

patio doors, or windows at ground level (even if there are

locks and/or bars to prevent entrance) and outside stairs

(such as porch, deck, or fire escape stairs) that lead

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-88

directly to an outside entrance for the sample unit.

Box 2 (No)

Mark Box 2 "No" when there is no direct access into the

sample unit from outside of the structure and the only

entrance to the sample unit is through a common hall from

within the structure, such as a common hall into a second

floor apartment.

TOTAL HOUSEHOLD INCOME IN PAST 12 MONTHS - Ask during 1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th

enumeration periods. (Show Flashcard)

Which category on this card represents the TOTAL combined income of all members of this

HOUSEHOLD during the past 12 months? This includes money from jobs, net income from business,

farm or rent, pensions, dividends, interest, Social Security payments, and any other money income

received by members of this HOUSEHOLD who are 14 years of age or older?

Less than $5,000

5,000 to 7,499

7,500 to 9,999

10,000 to12,499

12,500 to 14,999

15,000 to 17,499

17,500 to 19,999

1st

3rd

5th

7th

20,000 to 24,999

25,000 to 29,999

30,000 to 34,999

35,000 to 39,999

40,000 to 49,999

50,000 to 74,999

$75,000 +

1st

3rd

5th

7th

Item 28 (Household

Income)

During the first interview with a household, show the

household respondent the flashcard on page 15 in your

Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554) and then ask the

question in Item 28 to determine the household's total

combined income. You also need to update Item 28

during the third, fifth, and seventh enumeration periods.

Ask or verify Item 28 with the household respondent once

you have completed Items 27a and 27b, as required.

For Personal Visit

Interviews

Just before reading the question in Item 28, show the

household respondent the Household Income Flashcard on

page 15 in your Information Card Booklet. After reading

the question, allow the respondent time to read the

categories, make an estimate, and respond. When

necessary, help the respondent by adding each household

members income and/or the income from all sources to get

the total combined income.

For Telephone

After the first personal visit interview, in most cases, your

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-89

Interviews

remaining interviews at the sample address will be

conducted by telephone. During the third, fifth, and

seventh enumeration periods, read the question slightly

different since you are unable to show a flashcard to the

respondent. Instead of reading,

"Which category on this

card..."

, say,

"Which category represents..."

and

continue reading the rest of the question and each income

category from Control Card Item 28 until the respondent

identifies the appropriate income category.

If necessary, explain that we do not need the respondent to

identify the actual amount of the total household income,

just the income range that it falls within. If the respondent

is unable to give you an income range or an amount, read

the answer category that was marked previously, along

with the category just below it and just above it.

What to Include

A respondent may ask you what type of income to include

in his/her total. Here are the types of income that a

respondent should include in the combined household

income:

! Income received from jobs

! Net income from business, farm, or rent

! Pensions

! Dividends and interest

! Social security payments

! Alimony and child support

! Public assistance

! Any other money received by household members who

are 14 years of age or older.

We are interested in the household's combined income

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-90

during the 12 months immediately preceding the date of

interview

--not the last calendar year--

unless they happen

to coincide. Do not specifically ask a respondent to look

for tax records; however, a respondent can use income tax

records to help him/her to compare the last calendar year's

income with the income in the 12-month period preceding

the interview.

Make sure that the respondent's answer includes the

money income received during the 12 months immediately

preceding the interview and covers the reference person

and each household member who is 14 years of age and

older. Do not include income from persons who are listed

in the household roster, but are not household members. If

necessary, name each household member who is 14 years

of age and older so that the household respondent

understands whose money income we want to include.

What to Exclude

We do not want the respondent to include:

% "In kind" income, such as room and board, free

meals in a restaurant, value of crops produced by a

farmer and consumed by his family, and so forth.

% Insurance payments or lump-sum inheritances.

% Occasional gifts of money from persons not living in

the household or any exchanges of money between

relatives living in the same household.

% Money received from selling one's own home, car, or

other personal property.

% Savings withdrawals from banks.

% Tax refunds.

Special Situations for

Item 28

If a household respondent reports no income, a loss, or that

they "broke even," mark Box 1 "Less than $5,000." Make

sure that the respondent understands what type of income

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-91

we want included and from which persons in the

household, before accepting an answer of "No income."

In difficult cases, try to assist the respondent by probing to

find out:

! Which household members worked during the last

12 months.

! How much money each working household member

(14 years of age and older) earned each week or pay

period.

! Whether or not any household members operated a

business or a farm during the last 12 months.

! Whether or not any household members received a

pension, dividends, interest, and so forth.

Avoid "Don't know" or "Refused" answers if at all

possible.

Reassuring

Respondents

You may encounter a respondent who knows the

household income, but is reluctant to tell you because

he/she does not think we need to know or does not see

why it would be necessary for the survey.

If so, explain

that information such as income, race, and sex are

essential for providing statistics which reflect the crime

experiences for various segments of the United States

population.

29a

CONTROL NUMBER OF

ORIGINAL SAMPLE UNIT

29b

In area segment, enter for FIRST unit listed

on property.

Listing Sheet: Sheet

, Line

Item 29a (Control Number)

You only need to complete Item 29a if you are completing

a Control Card for an EXTRA unit discovered during an

interview. An EXTRA unit is any unlisted separate living

quarters that is:

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-92

! Discovered by chance during an interview or when

asking the household coverage questions,

! Associated with the sample unit, and

! Not likely to have had a chance of being selected for

a sample.

(See Appendix B of this manual for more information

about EXTRA units.)

If you discover an EXTRA unit during an interview, enter

the original or parent unit's control number in Item 29a.

This would be the PSU, segment, check digit, and serial

number from Item 2 on the original Control Card.

Item 29b (Listing Sheet

Identification)

You only need to complete Item 29b if you discover an

EXTRA unit during an area segment interview. If you

should discover an EXTRA unit during an area segment

interview, locate the line number for the first unit listed at

the basic address on the area segment listing sheet. Then

enter the listing sheet number and the line number for the

first unit on the appropriate lines for Item 29b. Keep in

mind that the first unit at the address may or may not be

the original or parent unit for the EXTRA unit.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-93

Topic 7. Completing Items 30 Through Table X (Record of Visits and

Telephone Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/Bounding

Information/

Noninterview Contact Person/Determining EXTRA Units

RECORD OF VISITS AND TELEPHONE CALLS

(a)

Month

and

year

(e.g.,

1/2000)

(b)

Line

No. of

Resp.

(c)

(B)

Before

(A)

After 5 p.m.

Noninter-

view

reason

Enter code

from box

beside 33

(f)

Tally of

personal

visits

(d)

Tally of

phone

calls

(e)

BAB A

Item 30a (Enumeration

Period)

Each enumeration period, you will record information

about any visits and/or telephone calls that you make to

the sample address in Item 30. To help you record this

information, Item 30a assigns an enumeration period to

each row for Item 30.

Items 30b and 30c

(Interview Month/Year and

Line Number of Household

Respondent)

Complete Items 30b and 30c once you have completed the

household respondent's interview. In Item 30b, use the

appropriate line for the current enumeration period and

enter the month and year of interview (for example,

1/2003). In Item 30c, use the appropriate line for the

current enumeration period and enter the circled line

number from Item 12 to identify the household respondent

for the current interview.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-94

Items 30d and 30e (Tally of

Personal Visits and

Telephone Calls)

Item 30d is divided into two columns--B and A--for

recording

personal visits

to the sample address. Using the

appropriate line for the enumeration period, enter a tally

mark ( / ) in

column B

for each

personal visit

that you

make to the sample address

before 5 p.m.

Enter a tally

mark ( / ) in

column A

for each

personal visit

that you

make to the sample address

after 5 p.m.

Do not make a tally mark in Item 30d when you travel by

the sample address, but you do not stop at the address or

attempt to speak to someone at the address.

Item 30e is divided into two columns--B and A--for

recording

telephone calls

to the sample address. Using

the appropriate line for the enumeration period, enter a

tally mark ( / ) in

column B

for each

telephone call

that

you make to the sample address

before 5 p.m.

Enter a

tally mark ( / ) in

column A

for each

telephone call

that

you make to the sample address

after 5 p.m.

Make a tally mark in the appropriate column of Item 30e

for every phone call that you make to the sample address,

regardless of the reason (for example, setting

appointments, getting missing information, and so forth).

Also count phone calls when you are not successful in

reaching someone.

Item 30f (Noninterview

Reason)

Whenever you are unable to interview a sample household,

use the appropriate line for the enumeration period and

enter in Item 30f the correct letter (A, B, or C) to identify

the type of noninterview for the sample address and the

correct two-digit reason code (for example, A03 for

Type A, Refused). A list of noninterview reason codes

grouped together by noninterview type is printed next to

Control Card Item 33 and is also provided on the next

page.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-95

REASON FOR NONINTERVIEW FOR

ITEM 30f

TYPE A

No one home

Temporarily absent

Refused

Other occupied

TYPE B

Vacant - regular

Vacant - storage of HH furniture

Temporarily occupied by persons with

URE

Unfit or to be demolished

Under construction, not ready

Converted to temporary business

or storage

Unoccupied site for mobile home,

trailer, or tent

Permit granted, construction not

started

Other

TYPE C

Unused line of listing sheet

Demolished

House or trailer moved

Outside segment

Converted to permanent business

or storage

Merged

Condemned

Built after April 1, 1990

Permit abandoned

Other

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, for more details about

noninterviews.)

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-96

30g

Notes (Callbacks, CATI, Field Representative's ID)

30h

CATI

Recycle

SUPERVISOR'S

USE

- Reinterview

- Observed

Yes

Items 30g and 30h (Notes

and CATI Recycle)

In Item 30g, use the appropriate line for the enumeration

period and enter the date and time for any callback

appointments that you set up. Also, enter your Field

Representative Code, along with any notes that you enter

in Item 30g.

In Item 30h, for enumeration periods two through seven,

use the appropriate line and mark the "Yes" box if your

regional office has instructed you to interview a “CATI

Hold” case, because it was not completed during the CATI

interviewing period. A "Yes" box does not appear for the

first enumeration period, because all first enumeration

period interviews must be conducted in person.

Item 31 (Supervisor's Use)

Leave Item 31 blank, because this item is for the sole use

of your supervisor. Ignore any entries that you may see in

Item 31.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-97

32 BOUNDING INFORMATION - RECORD OF INCIDENTS

(a)

(b)

Month and year

of incident

(quarter and year

of series)

(c)

Description of incident

(d)

Line

number

incident

report

(e)

Month Year

Item 32 (Bounding

Information)

Since the information that you enter in Item 32 is used as

an important tool for ensuring NCVS quality, it is

imperative for you to complete each part of this item

accurately. Once you end your visit or telephone call to a

sample address, you must complete a separate line of

Item 32 for each NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, that you

complete for the sample household. When a sample

household does not report any incidents, just leave Item 32

blank.

We refer to the information that you enter in Item 32 as

"bounding information." After completing your summary

report in Check Item W of the NCVS-2, you are instructed

to check the bounding information for previous

enumeration periods. This procedure is required to avoid

collecting duplicate information about incidents. If a

respondent reports an incident that is similar to one

described in Item 32, you need to ask probing questions of

the respondent to determine whether or not the incidents

are identical or separate incidents.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 7, for more

information about Bounding Interviews.)

Filling Item 32a

In Item 32a, enter the number to identify the enumeration

period (1 through 7).

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-98

Filling Item 32b

In Item 32b, enter either a "Y" or an "N" to indicate

whether or not the incident is a "series incident." When

Box 2 is marked in Check Item D on the NCVS-2 for the

incident, then the reported incident is a "series incident"

and you would enter a "Y" in Item 32b.

Enter an "N" in Control Card Item 32b when the NCVS-2

shows that:

! Box 1 is marked in Check Item B,

! Box 2 is marked in Check Item C, or

! Box 1 is marked in Check Item D.

(See Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more information

about series incidents.)

Filling Item 32c

Use Item 32c to indicate when the incident happened.

Incident is not a series incident:

When the incident is

not

a series incident, transcribe the

month and year from Item 3 of the NCVS-2 onto Control

Card Item 32c (for example, 11/2003).

Incident is a series incident:

When the incident is a series incident, transcribe the most

recent quarter and year entered in Item 155 of the NCVS-2

onto Control Card Item 32c (for example, Qtr. 2/2002).

Filling Item 32d

In Item 32d, enter an incident description that will enable

anyone to identify it easily at a later date. Make sure that

your incident description is complete and clear enough so

you or anyone else can determine what took place during

the incident without difficulty.

Try to confine your incident description to one line and

print one letter in each space. Here are a few examples of

incident descriptions for Item 32d:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-99

Home broken into/family away/radio, TV, jewelry

taken

L2 raped in car/off. had weapon/L2 injured/off.

arrested

Filling Item 32e

In Item 32e, transcribe the respondent's line number from

Item 1a of the NCVS-2 onto Control Card Item 32e.

33 PERSON TO CONTACT FOR

NONINTERVIEW HOUSEHOLD

INFORMATION

--Fill when

appropriate

Name and description (neighbor, apt.

manager, etc.)

Address

City

State ZIP Code

Telephone number

( )

Item 33 (Noninterview

Contact Person)

When you are unable to conduct an NCVS interview for

anyone in a sample household, you still need to obtain

some information about the sample household that you

will enter on the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record.

Normally, you will contact a neighbor, apartment manager,

or some knowledgeable person in the area to get this

information. In Control Card Item 33, you will enter the

following information about the contact person:

! His/her name

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-100

! A description of the person you contacted (neighbor,

mail carrier, apartment manager, and so forth)

! His/her address

! His/her telephone number.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, Topic 1, for an overview of

noninterviews and noninterview procedures.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-101

1990 TABLE X - Determining if an Additional Living Quarters Qualifies as an EXTRA Unit

START HERE AREA SEGMENTS PERMIT

SEGMENTS

UNIT SEGMENTS

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Single Unit Multi-Unit

Check the listing

sheet.

Is the address of

the additional

living quarter

already listed?

Yes - Stop

Table X

No - Go to

column (2),

(4), (5) or (6)

depending on

segment type

Are the

additional

living

quarters

within the

area segment

boundaries?

Yes - Go to

column (3)

No - Stop

Table X; do

not

interview

Are the

additional

living

quarters in a

group

quarters?

Yes - Stop

Table X; do

not

interview

No - Go to

column (7)

Are the

additional living

quarters within

the same

structure and

within the same

space

(see

footnote

)

occupied by the

original sample

unit?

Yes - Go to

column (7)

No - Stop

Table X; do

not interview

(5)

Are the

additional

living quarters

within the

basic address

(house number

and street

name) of the

original sample

unit?

Yes - Go to

column (7)

No - Stop

Table X; do

not interview

(6)

Are the

additional living

quarters within

the same space

(see

footnote

)

occupied by the

original sample

unit?

and

Are the

additional living

quarters

the result of a

split apartment?

Yes to both

questions - Go

to column (7)

No to either

question - Stop

Table X; do not

interview

Occupation of the "same space" occurs if a housing unit has been split into two or more separate housing units.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-102

1990 TABLE X - Determining if an Additional Living Quarters Qualifies as an EXTRA Unit

SEPARATENESS NUMBER OF EXTRA UNITS

(7)

Do the occupants

or intended

occupants of the

additional living

quarters live and

eat separately

from all other

persons on the

property?

Yes - Go to

column (8)

No, not a

separate unit -

Stop Table X.

Include additional

living quarters

with the original

unit and continue

interview.

(8)

Do the occupants

or intended

occupants of the

additional living

quarters have

direct access

from the outside

or through a

common hall?

Yes, an EXTRA

unit - Go to

column (9)

No, not a

separate unit -

Stop Table X.

Include

additional

living quarters

with the original

unit and continue

interview.

(9)

Have you found more than 3 EXTRA

units?

Yes - Call your RO for instructions on

which units to interview. Then, enter

the basic address and unit designation

(if any) of the EXTRA units onto the

listing sheet and fill out new Control

Cards and questionnaires for these

units. (See footnote

)

No - Enter the basic address and unit

designation (if any) of the EXTRA

units onto the listing sheet and fill out

new Control Cards and

questionnaires for these units. (See

footnote

)

If you determine that you have found an EXTRA unit at a single unit address in a UNIT segment

(yes in column 5), you must prepare an INTER-COMM and fill out a BLANK listing sheet listing

each unit at the address.

1990 Table X

As you complete the coverage questions in Control Card

Items 7 and 15, you could be instructed to fill Table X to

determine whether the sample address has more than one

separate living quarters. Run through the appropriate steps

in Table X based on the segment type and skip instructions

for each living quarters suspected of qualifying as an

EXTRA unit.

Definition of Separate

Living Quarters

A separate living quarters is one in which the occupants

live and eat separately from all other persons on the

property, and have direct access to their living quarters

from the outside or through a common hall or lobby (as

found in apartment buildings).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-103

Filling Column (1)

When filling Table X, you must start with column (1),

regardless of the segment type. Before you can mark the

correct box in column (1):

! Check the listing sheet to see if the address of the

additional living quarters is already listed. If the

original sample unit is a single-unit address in a unit

segment, you will not have a listing sheet.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (1):

When the additional living quarters is already listed

on the listing sheet for the assigned segment and

could have a chance of selection for a sample, mark

the "Yes" box in Column (1). Stop filling Table X

because this additional living quarters is not an

EXTRA unit just discovered during your interview.

After marking the "Yes" box, continue the interview

with the original sample unit and do not include

household members from the additional living

quarters with the household members from the

original sample unit.

Mark the "No" box in Column (1):

When the additional living quarters is not listed on

the listing sheet for the assigned segment or there is

no listing sheet, because the original sample unit is a

single-unit address in a unit segment, mark the "No"

box in Column (1).

After marking the "No" box, continue with:

-- Column (2)

for area segments,

Column (4)

for permit segments,

Column (5)

for unit segments when the original

sample address is a single-unit, or

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-104

Column (6)

for unit segments when the original

sample address is in a multi-unit structure (such

as an apartment building).

Filling Column (2) for

Area Segments

You will only fill column (2) if:

! The original sample address is located in an area

segment, and

! You mark the "No" box in column (1) because the

additional living quarters is not already listed on the

Area Segment Listing Sheet, Form 11-5.

Refer to the assigned area segment map and determine

whether or not the additional living quarters is located

within the same area segment boundaries as the original

sample unit.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (2):

If the additional living quarters is within the same

area segment boundaries as the original sample unit,

mark the "Yes" box and continue filling Table X by

going to column (3).

Mark the "No" box in Column (2):

If the additional living quarters is not located within

the same area segment as the original sample

address, mark the "No" box and stop filling Table X.

Do not interview anyone residing at the additional

living quarters and continue the interview with the

original sample address.

Filling Column (3) for

Area Segments

You will only fill column (3) if:

! The additional living quarters is located in the same

area segment as the original sample unit and

! You marked the "Yes" box in column (2).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-105

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (3):

If the additional living quarters is located in a group

quarters, mark the "Yes" box, stop filling Table X,

and do not interview anyone residing at the

additional living quarters.

Mark the "No" box in Column (3):

If the additional living quarters is not located in a

group quarters, mark the "No" box in column (3) and

continue filling Table X by skipping to column (7).

Filling Column (4) for

Permit Segments

You will only fill column (4) if:

! The original sample address is located in a permit

segment, and

! You marked the "No" box in column (1) because the

additional living quarters is not already listed on the

Unit/Permit Listing Sheet, Form 11-3.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (4):

Before marking the "Yes" box in column (4), make

sure that the additional living quarters is within the

same structure AND within the same space occupied

by the original sample unit (for example, a structure

that was used as a single-family house and now

contains two rental units). After marking the "Yes"

box in column (4), continue filling Table X by

skipping to column (7).

Mark the "No" box in Column (4):

If the additional living quarters is outside of the

structure AND space occupied by the original sample

unit, mark the "No" box in column (4), stop filling

Table X, and do not interview anyone residing at the

additional living quarters.

Filling Column (5) for

Single-Units in Unit

Segments

Since you will not receive a listing sheet when the original

sample unit is a single unit in a unit segment, you will

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-106

mark the "No" box in column (1) automatically and

continue Table X by skipping to column (5).

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (5):

If the additional living quarters uses the same basic

address (house number and street name) as the

original sample unit, mark the "Yes" box in

column (5) and continue filling Table X by skipping

to column (7).

Mark the "No" box in Column (5):

If the additional living quarters uses a different basic

address from the original sample unit, mark the "No"

box in column (5), stop filling Table X, and do not

interview anyone residing in the additional living

quarters.

Filling Column (6) for

Multi-Units in Unit

Segments

You will only fill column (6) if:

! The original sample unit is located in a multi-unit

structure in a unit segment., and

! You marked the "No" box in column (1) because the

additional living quarters is not already listed on the

Unit/Permit Listing Sheet, Form 11-3.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (6):

Before marking the "Yes" box in column (6), both of

the following conditions must be met:

-- The additional living quarters must be within the

same space as the original sample unit,

AND

-- The additional living quarters must be the result

of a split apartment.

If both conditions are met, mark the "Yes" box in

column (6) and continue completing Table X by

going to column (7).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-107

Mark the "No" box in Column (6):

If the additional living quarters does not meet

both

of the conditions listed above, mark the "No" box in

column (6), stop filling Table X, and do not

interview anyone residing at the additional listing

quarters.

Filling Column (7)

Before an additional living quarters can be considered an

EXTRA housing unit, it must meet the criteria for

"separateness." The question in column (7) is designed to

determine whether the occupants or intended occupants of

the additional living quarters

live and eat separately

from

all other persons on the property.

Mark the "Yes" box in column (7):

If you determine that the occupants or intended

occupants of the additional living quarters live and

eat separately from all other persons on the property,

mark the "Yes" box in column (7) and continue

filling Table X by going to column (8).

Mark the "No" box in column (7):

If you find that the occupants or intended occupants

of the additional living quarters do

not

live and eat

separately from all other persons on the property,

mark the "No" box in column (7) because the

additional living quarters does not qualify as a

separate housing unit. Stop filling Table X, include

the occupants as part of the original unit, and

continue the interview for the original sample unit.

Filling Column (8)

Another component of "separateness" involves "direct

access." Once you determine in column (7) that the

occupants of the additional living quarters live and eat

separately from all other persons on the property, then you

need to determine whether the occupants or the intended

occupants have direct access from the outside of the

additional living quarters or through a common hall.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-108

Mark the "Yes" box in column (8):

Once you determine that the occupants or the

intended occupants of the additional living quarters

have direct access, mark the "Yes" box in

column (8). At this point, you have completed the

process of determining that the additional living

quarters does qualify as an EXTRA housing unit.

After marking the "Yes" box in column (8), go to

column (9).

Mark the "No" box in column (8):

If the additional living quarters does not have direct

access from the outside or through a common hall,

mark the "No" box in column (8). Since the

additional living quarters does not qualify as an

EXTRA housing unit, stop filling Table X, include

the occupants of the additional living quarters with

the original sample unit, and continue the interview

for the original sample unit.

Filling Column (9)

It is possible that you could discover more than one

EXTRA unit while interviewing at a sample address.

Column (9) is designed to provide you with instructions on

how to proceed when you discover more than 3 EXTRA

units at a sample address or less than 3 EXTRA units at a

sample address.

Mark the "Yes" box in column (9):

If you discover

more than 3 EXTRA units

at the

sample address:

-- Mark the "Yes" box in column (9).

-- Call your regional office for instructions on

which EXTRA units to interview.

-- Using the appropriate listing sheet, enter the

basic address and unit designations (if any) for

the EXTRA units discovered. Make sure that

each unit is uniquely described so that another

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 1

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-109

field representative will be able to distinguish

them from one another.

-- Complete a Control Card and the appropriate

questionnaires for each EXTRA unit that your

regional office instructs you to interview.

Mark the "No" box in column (9):

If you discovered between 1 and 3 EXTRA units at

the sample address:

-- Mark the "No" box in column (9).

-- Enter the basic address and unit designation (if

any) of each EXTRA unit on the appropriate

listing sheet. Make sure that each unit is

uniquely described so that another field

representative will be able to distinguish them

from one another.

-- Complete a Control Card and the appropriate

questionnaires for each EXTRA unit that you

discovered.

Part B, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

B1-110

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-1

Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 General Instructions B2-2

2 Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover

Page) B2-6

3 Completing Items 17 Through 28

(Personal Characteristics) B2-22

4 Completing Items 29 Through Check

Item E (Mobility/Businesses/Theft/

Break-ins/Motor Vehicles/Specific

Locations/Use of Weapons/Known

Offenders/ Unwanted Sexual

Acts/Catch-all Questions/Computer

Crime/Proxy Help) B2-27

5 Completing Items 46 Through Check

Item I (Vandalism/Crimes During

Vandalism/Hate Crimes/Transcribing

Number of Incidents/Employment

Questions) B2-66

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-2

Topic 1. General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, is used to

determine whether each eligible household member

(12 years of age or older) at the sample address was

victimized by crime during the member's 6-month reference

period. The NCVS-1 consists of four parts and you will

complete an NCVS-1 for each sample household that you

interview. For some of the NCVS-1 items, you will

transcribe information from the household's Control Card.

You will complete the remaining NCVS-1 items with a

respondent as you conduct the interview.

The NCVS-1 is designed so that you can collect

information for up to four eligible household members,

including the household respondent. When a sample

household has more than four eligible household members,

you will complete a separate NCVS-1A, Personal

Characteristics form, for each eligible household member

who will not fit in the NCVS-1 questionnaire.

Since the content of the NCVS-1 and NCVS-1A forms

changes periodically, it is important that you use the current

form by checking the print date shown below the form

number on the front cover of each form. Your monthly

memorandums will tell you when to start interviewing with

a modified form and will identify the new print date and

ink/paper color.

Overview of the NCVS-1

Once you are done entering the length of time each eligible

household member has lived at the sample address in

Control Card Item 25c, stop completing the Control Card

and start completing the NCVS-1 for the household. The

only time you do not need to complete an NCVS-1 for a

household is when the entire household is a noninterview

(Type A, B, or C). For noninterview households, you must

complete an NCVS-7, Noninterview Record, instead of an

NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-3

(Also see Part B, Chapter 4, for instructions on

completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record.)

If you are unable to complete an NCVS-1 interview for an

eligible household member (other than the household

respondent), you still need to complete the following items

on the NCVS-1:

! Items 14a and 14b on the cover page and

! Items 17 through 28 on the appropriate page for the

Type Z noninterview person (page 12, 18, or 24).

This also applies to Items 17 through 28 on any

NCVS-1A forms that you complete for a Type Z

noninterview person.

The first entries that you make on an NCVS-1 must be the

sample, control number, and household number in the top,

left corner of the front cover. Transcribe each of these

identification items from the household's Control Card.

! See Control Card Item 1 for the Sample.

! See Control Card Item 2 for the Control number

(PSU, segment, check digit (CK), and serial

number).

! See Control Card Item 3 for the Household number

(HH No.).

The sample, control number, and household number on the

NCVS-1 is used to link the Basic Screen Questionnaire to

the appropriate Control Card for a household, and is the

main source for identifying the sample address. Make sure

that you transcribe these items ACCURATELY and

LEGIBLY.

Serial Number Entries

for EXTRA Units

Since EXTRA units are discovered as you conduct

interviews, any EXTRA units that you find will not have

assigned serial numbers. For each NCVS form that you

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-4

complete for an EXTRA unit, print the reference person's

last name in place of the serial number.

Sequence for Completing

the NCVS-1

Here is the sequence for completing the remainder of the

NCVS-1:

! Complete Items 1 through 4 on the front cover.

! On page 2, complete Items 17 through 19 for the

household respondent.

! Starting with Item 29, enter the interview date and

complete the mobility, business operated from sample

address, and the screen questions with the household

respondent. After completing Check Item G for the

household respondent, either complete an NCVS-2,

Crime Incident Report, for each reported crime

incident or continue with Check Item H.

! Complete or update Control Card Items 26a through

28 and Items 30b and 30c with the household

respondent BEFORE ending the household

respondent's interview.

! Starting on page 12, complete Items 17 through 19 for

the next eligible household member.

! Starting with Item 29, enter the interview date and

complete mobility and screen questions with the next

household member. After completing Check Item G

for the household member, either complete an

NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each reported

crime incident or continue with Check Item H.

! Repeat this process for each eligible household

member on the NCVS-1. If the household has more

than four members, complete a separate NCVS-1A

for each household member who does not fit on the

household's NCVS-1.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-5

! After leaving the household or ending the phone

interview, transcribe the appropriate information from

the household's Control Card to Items 5 through 12e

on the front cover, and complete Items 13 through 16,

as needed. Also transcribe the correct information

from the Control Card onto Items 20 through 28 for

each eligible household member.

Wording Questions for

Proxy Interviews

When you take a proxy interview for an eligible

respondent, remember that the screen questions refer to the

person for whom the proxy interview is being taken (proxy

person), NOT to the person answering the questions (proxy

respondent). Starting with Item 33a on the NCVS-1,

substitute the name of the person for whom the proxy

interview is being taken in place of the word "you" when

asking questions.

Here is an example:

Item 33a - "How long has Joan Tyler lived at this

address?"

In this example, Joan Tyler is the "proxy person"; in other

words, she is the person for whom the proxy interview is

being taken.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-6

Topic 2. Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover Page)

Filling Items 1 Through 4 on

the NCVS-1

ITEMS FILLED AT START OF INTERVIEW

1. Field representative identification

Code Name

2. Unit status

Unit in sample the previous enumeration period - Fill 3

Unit in sample first time this period -

SKIP

to 4

3. Household status

- Mark first box that applies.

Same household interviewed

the previous enumeration

Replacement household since the previous enumeration

Noninterview the previous enumeration

Other - Specify

4. Line number of household respondent

Go to page 2

Once you have entered the sample, control number, and

household number on the front cover of the NCVS-1, the

next step is to complete Items 1 through 4 on the cover

page.

Item 1 (Field

representative

identification)

In Item 1, enter your field representative code (for example,

B23) and your full name (for example, David Waterman).

Item 2 (Unit status) In Item 2, you will indicate whether this is the first

enumeration period for the sample address or whether the

assigned address was in sample in a previous enumeration

period.

Box 1:

Mark Box 1 if you are scheduled to interview the sample

household for the second through seventh enumeration

period, even if the household was a noninterview in the first

enumeration period. After marking Box 1, fill Item 3.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-7

Box 2:

Mark Box 2 if you are:

! Attempting to interview a sample household for the

first enumeration period,

! Interviewing EXTRA units discovered during an

interview, or

! Interviewing additional units discovered during

listing/listing verification in unit and permit segments.

(See Chapter 7, Topic 6, of the Listing and Coverage

Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8, for

more instructions concerning additional units.)

! After marking Box 2, skip to Item 4.

Item 3 (Household status) Use Item 3 to indicate the interview status of the household

from the previous enumeration period. Mark the first box in

Item 3 that applies for the sample household.

Box 1:

Mark Box 1 if one or more household members from the

current interview were also household members during the

previous enumeration period AND the sample household

was interviewed during the previous enumeration period.

Box 2

Mark Box 2 when all household members at the sample

address are new for the current interview and the former

household no longer lives at the sample address. In this

case, you would have increased the household number in

Control Card Item 3 to the next higher number. For

example, if the original household number is "1," then the

replacement household becomes household "2." Mark

Box 2 for a replacement household, even if the former

household was a noninterview in the previous enumeration

period.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-8

Box 3:

Mark Box 3 if the sample address was a Type A or B

noninterview in the previous enumeration period AND the

same household still resides at the sample address.

Box 4

Only mark Box 4 if you are interviewing at the sample

address for the second through seventh enumeration period

AND Boxes 1 through 3 do not describe the household

status for the previous enumeration period. After marking

Box 4, write a brief description of the household status for

the previous enumeration period on the "Specify" line.

Here is an example of when you would mark Box 4:

"You are interviewing at the correct sample address for

the current enumeration period, but the wrong unit was

interviewed for the previous enumeration period. In this

case, you would mark Box 4 and write "Wrong unit

interviewed previous enumeration period" on the

"Specify" line.

Item 4 (Line number of

household respondent)

In Item 4, enter the line number to identify the household

respondent for the current enumeration period. You can

find this line number circled in Control Card Item 12 or

entered in Control Card Item 30c. After entering the

household respondent's line number in Item 4, turn to

page 2 of the NCVS-1 and continue with Item 17 for the

household respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-9

Filling Items 5 Through 12e

on the NCVS-1

After you are finished interviewing a sample household, fill

Items 5 through 12e on the NCVS-1 by transcribing the

appropriate information from the household's Control Card.

AFTER INTERVIEW - TRANSCRIBE FROM CONTROL CARD

5. Special place/GQ type code

(cc item 6d)

6. Tenure

(cc item 8a)

Owned or 2

Rented 3

No cash

being bought for cash rent

7. Land use

(cc item 9)

Urban 2

Rural

8. Farm sales

(cc item 10)

Item blank 1

$1,000 2

Less than

or more $1,000

Item 5 (Special place/GQ

code)

Check Control Card Item 6d. If Item 6d is blank, leave

Item 5 on the NCVS-1 blank. If the sample address is a

group quarters (GQ) unit, then transcribe the GQ type code

(for example, 87-N) from Control Card Item 6d onto Item 5

on the NCVS-1.

Item 6 (Tenure) Transcribe the answer from Control Card Item 8a for the

most current enumeration period onto Item 6 on the

NCVS-1. If the tenure status is unknown, print "NA" in

Item 6. If the tenure status is refused, print "Ref." in

Item 6.

Item 7 (Land use) Transcribe the answer marked in Control Card Item 9 onto

Item 7 on the NCVS-1. Your regional office fills Control

Card Item 9 before you receive the Control Card.

Item 8 (Farm sales) Check Control Card Item 10. If Item 10 is blank, mark the

"Item blank" box in Item 8 on the NCVS-1. Otherwise,

transcribe the answer from Control Card Item 10 to Item 8

on the NCVS-1. For example, if Box 1 (Yes) is marked in

Control Card Item 10, then mark Box 1 ($1,000 or more) in

Item 8 on the NCVS-1.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-10

9. Type of living quarters

(cc items 11c and 11d)

Housing unit

House, apartment, flat

HU in nontransient hotel, motel, etc.

HU permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

HU in rooming house

Mobile home or trailer with no permanent room

added

Mobile home or trailer with one or more permanent

rooms added

HU not specified above - Describe

OTHER unit

Quarters not HU in rooming or boarding house

Unit not permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

Unoccupied site for mobile home, trailer, or tent

Student quarters in college dormitory

OTHER unit not specified above - Describe

Item 9 (Type of living

quarters)

If the sample address identifies a housing unit, transcribe

the entry in Control Card Item 11c onto the appropriate

housing unit box (1 - 7) in Item 9 on the NCVS-1. If the

sample address identifies a group quarters unit, transcribe

the entry in Control Card Item 11d onto the appropriate

"OTHER unit" box (8 - 12) in Item 9 on the NCVS-1.

When you mark Box 7 or 12 in Item 9, make sure to

transcribe the handwritten description to the appropriate

line.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-11

Use of telephone

(cc item 26a and b)

10a. Location of phone

- Mark first box that applies.

Phone in unit.....................................................

Phone in common area (hallway, etc.).............

Phone in another unit (neighbor, friend, etc.).. Fill 10b

Work/office phone............................................

No phone -- SKIP

to 11a

10b. Is phone interview acceptable?

(cc item 26d)

Yes 2

No 3

Refused to give number

11a. Number of housing units in structure

(cc item 27a)

1 --

SKIP

to 12 a 4

4 7

Mobile home or

2 5

5 - 9 trailer --

SKIP

to 12a

3 6

10+ 8

Only OTHER units

11b. Direct outside access

(cc item 27b)

Yes 2

No 3

DK x

Item blank

Item 10a (Location of

phone)

Mark the appropriate box in Item 10a based on the box

marked in Control Card Item 26a or 26b.

Box Marked on

Control Card

Mark This Box in

Item 10a on NCVS-1

Box 1 in Item 26a

Box 1

Box 2 in Item 26b

Box 2

Box 3 in Item 26b

Box 3

Box 4 in Item 26b

Box 4

Box 5 in Item 26b

Box 5 and SKIP to

Item 11a

Examples of common areas where a phone could be

located and accessible to the household are:

! Apartment halls,

! Rooming house lobbies,

! Pay phones inside of buildings in which households

reside, and so forth.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-12

Examples of other units where a phone could be located

and accessible to the household are:

! Houses,

! Private rooms,

! Apartment units, or

! Dwelling units belonging to someone other than the

sample household, such as a neighbor, friend, and so

forth.

Item 10b (Phone

interview acceptable)

Mark the appropriate box in Item 10b based on the box(es)

marked in Control Card Items 26c and/or 26d.

Box Marked on

Control Card

Mark This Box in

Item 10b on NCVS-1

Box 1 in Item 26d

Box 1

Box 2 in Item 26d

AND a phone

number is entered

in Item 26c

Box 2

Box 2 in Item 26d

AND the Refused

number box is

marked in Item 26c

Box 3

Item 11a (Number of

housing units in

structure)

Refer to Control Card Item 27a and transcribe the marked

answer to the appropriate box in Item 11a. If you mark

Box 1 or 7 in Item 11a, skip to Item 12a.

Item 11b (Direct outside

access)

Refer to Control Card Item 27b and transcribe the marked

answer to the appropriate box in Item 11b. If Control Card

Item 27b is unanswered, mark Box x (Item blank) in

Item 11b.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-13

12a. Household Income

(cc item 28)

Less than $5,000 6

15,000 - 17,499 11

35,000 - 39,999

$5,000 - 7,499 7

17,500 - 19,999 12

40,000 - 49,999

7,500 - 9,999 8

20,000 - 24,999 13

50,000 - 74,999

10,000 - 12,499 9

25,000 - 29,999 14

75,000 and over

12,500 - 14,999 10

30,000 - 34,999

12b. College/University

(cc item 8b)

Yes 2

12c. Public Housing

(cc item 8c)

Item blank 1

Yes (public housing) 2

No (not public

housing)

12d. Manager Verification of Public Housing

(cc item 8d)

Item blank

Able to verify Unable to verify

Public housing 3

CATI/Telephone

Not public housing 4

Other - Specify

12e. American Indian Reservation or American Indian Lands

(cc item 8e)

Yes 2

Item 12a (Household

Income)

Refer to Control Card Item 28 and transcribe the marked

answer for the most recent enumeration period to Item 12a.

If you do not see a marked answer in Control Card Item 28

because this question is not applicable or the respondent

refused to give an answer, then enter "NA" for "Not

applicable" or "REF" for "Refused" in Item 12a.

Item 12b

(College/University)

Refer to Control Card Item 8b and transcribe the marked

answer to Item 12b to indicate whether the living quarters is

presently used as student housing by a college or university.

Item 12c (Public

Housing)

Refer to Control Card Item 8c and transcribe the answer

marked to Item 12c. If Control Card Item 8c is left blank,

then mark Box x "Item blank" in Item 12c.

Item 12d (Manager

Verification of Public

Housing)

Refer to Control Card Item 8d and transcribe the answer

marked to Item 12d. If Control Card Item 8d is left blank,

then mark Box x "Item blank" in Item 12d. If you mark

Box 4 under "Unable to verify" in Item 12d, make sure to

transcribe the "Other" reason from Control Card Item 8d.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-14

Item 12e (American

Indian Reservation or

Anerican Indian Lands)

Refer to Control Card Item 8e and transcribe the answer

marked to Item 12e on the NCVS-1. Control Card Item 8e

should never be left blank.

ITEMS FILLED DURING AND/OR AFTER INTERVIEW

13. Proxy information

-- Fill for all proxy interviews

Proxy inter-

view obtained

for Line No.

Proxy respondent

Name Line No.

Reason

(Enter

code)

Codes for item 13c

- 12-13 years old and parent refused permission for self interview

- Physically/mentally unable to answer FILL INTER-COMM

- TA and won't return before closeout

Items 13a Through 13c

(Proxy Information)

Items 13a through 13c are used to identify:

! The proxy person,

! The proxy respondent, and

! The reason you were unable to interview the

household member by self-response.

Whenever you take a proxy interview, complete these items

either before you leave the household or before you end the

phone call with the household.

Item 13a (Line Number

for Proxy Person)

Make sure to enter the correct line number for the

household member who is unable to answer for

himself/herself (the proxy person).

Item 13b (Proxy

Respondent)

In Item 13b, print the full name and line number for the

household member who is answering the questions for the

proxy person identified in Item 13a. We refer to this person

as the proxy respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-15

In a small number of special situations, the proxy

respondent can be a caregiver who is not a household

member. If you are unsure whether it is acceptable to take

a proxy interview from a nonhousehold member, check

with your regional office before taking the proxy interview.

When the proxy respondent is NOT a household member,

print the proxy respondent's full name in the "name"

column and "non HH" in the "Line No." column of

Item 13b. Also explain in the "Notes" space of the Control

Card why the proxy respondent is a nonhousehold member.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 3, for detailed

requirements for accepting a nonhousehold member as a

proxy respondent.)

Item 13c (Reason Code) Listed below are the acceptable reason codes to indicate

why a proxy interview was taken. These codes are also

printed below Items 13a - 13c on the NCVS-1. If none of

the reasons apply to the situation, you should NOT take a

proxy interview.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 6, for detailed

information on proxy interviews and acceptable reasons.)

Code 1:

Enter Code 1 when the household member is 12 or 13 years

of age and the child's parent(s) refuses to allow you to

interview the 12 or 13 year old child by self-response.

Code 2

Enter Code 2 when the household member has a physical

and/or mental illness that prevents the person from

responding directly to you. After entering Code 2 in

Item 13c, ALWAYS complete an INTER-COMM

explaining the situation in detail and attach the completed

INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1.

Code 3

Enter Code 3 when the household member is away from the

sample address temporarily AND is not expected to return

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-16

during the interview period. Before taking a proxy

interview, make sure that the person is still a household

member and will not return during the entire interview

period.

After entering Code 3 in Item 13c, ALWAYS complete an

INTER-COMM explaining the situation in detail and attach

the completed INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and

page 4 of your Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554) for

help in determining household membership.)

14. Type Z noninterview

Interview not

obtained for

Line No.

Reason

(Enter

code)

Codes for item 14b

- Never available

- Refused..........

- Physically/ FILL

mentally INTER-

unable to COMM

answer--no

proxy available

- TA and no proxy

available..........

- Other...............

- Office use only

> Complete 17 - 28 for each Line No. in 14a

Items 14a and 14b (Type Z

Noninterview)

Complete Items 14a and 14b to identify each eligible

household member, other than the household respondent,

who cannot be interviewed during the interview period

AND for whom a proxy interview is either not allowed or

not possible. You can complete Items 14a and 14b either

during or after interviewing the household. You must

complete the household respondent's interview before any

remaining eligible household members can be classified as

Type Z noninterviews. Try to keep Type Z noninterviews

to a minimum.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-17

You must complete an INTER-COMM explaining the

circumstances for each eligible household member that you

classify as a Type Z noninterview person and attach the

completed INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1.

Occasionally, you may interview a large household with

more than four Type Z noninterviews. If this happens,

make sure to complete the Personal Characteristic Items 17

through 28 on each person's NCVS-1A and use the "Notes"

space on the cover page of the NCVS-1A to explain why

the household member was a Type Z noninterview.

Item 14a (Line Number) For each Type Z noninterview person, use Item 14a to

identify the household member's line number.

Item 14b (Reason Code) A list of reason codes for Type Z noninterviews is shown to

the right of Item 14b. Starting at the top of the list, enter

the FIRST reason code that applies in Item 14b for the

situation.

Code 1:

Enter Code 1 if the eligible household member is never

available when you contact the household to get his/her

interview. Do not use Code 1 if the person is "temporarily

absent" and not expected to return during the interview

period.

Code 2:

Enter Code 2 any time you cannot interview an eligible

respondent (other than the household respondent), because

the eligible respondent, a proxy respondent, or someone

else refuses to allow the interview. Here are some

examples:

! An eligible respondent refuses to cooperate with the

interview AND is not the household respondent.

! A household member refuses to allow you to

interview another eligible respondent in the

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-18

household, such as an elderly parent or a 14-year-old

child.

! An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give you a

proxy interview.

Code 3:

Enter Code 3 if:

! It is acceptable to take a proxy interview for an

eligible respondent who is unable to respond for

himself/herself due to a physical and/or mental

illness, BUT

! No acceptable proxy respondent is available.

Code 4:

Enter Code 4 if:

! It is acceptable to take a proxy interview because the

household member is temporarily absent from the

household and will not return during the interview

period, BUT

! No acceptable proxy respondent is available.

Code 5:

Enter Code 5 when Codes 1 through 4 do not apply to the

situation that is preventing you from interviewing an

eligible household member. Here are a few examples:

! An eligible household member cannot speak English

and no acceptable translator is available.

! A 12- or 13-year-old household member is not

allowed to answer for himself/herself and no

acceptable proxy respondent is available.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-19

Do not use Code 6 in Item 14b. Code 6 is only used by

your regional office staff.

Once you leave the household or end the phone call with

the household, make sure to transcribe the appropriate

information from the Control Card to the NCVS-1 Items 17

through 28 for each Type Z noninterview person. When

you classify a person as a Type Z noninterview, do not fill

Items 29 through Check Item I on the NCVS-1 and do not

complete any NCVS-2, Crime Incident Reports, for the

Type Z noninterview person.

If you have already completed an NCVS-2 for a household

member (other than the household respondent) and the

person refuses to complete any remaining NCVS-2s for

reported incidents, you must classify the household member

as a Type Z noninterview and out-of-scope the completed

NCVS-2.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed

instructions on out-of-scope incidents.)

15a. Household members 12 years of age and OVER

Total number

15b. Household members UNDER 12 years of age

Total number

None

15c. Crime Incident Reports filled

Total number of NCVS-2s filled

None

Items 15a Through 15c

(Total Counts)

Items 15a, 15b, and 15c are used to identify total counts of:

! Household members 12 years of age and over

(Item 15a)

! Household members under 12 years of age (Item 15b)

! Crime Incident Reports filled (Item 15c).

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-20

Complete these three items once you have left the

household or ended the phone call.

Item 15a (Household

Members 12 Years of

Age and Over)

Refer to Control Card Items 12, 13c, and 17 to determine

the number to enter in Item 15a.

First, in Item 12, count only the household members who

do NOT have a diagonal line drawn through their line

numbers, since a diagonal line indicates that a person has

left the household.

Of the persons counted in Item 12 as instructed above, next

count those household members who have Box 1 "Yes"

marked in Item 13c. A "No" answer indicates that the

person has a usual residence elsewhere, is not a household

member, and would not be included in the count that you

enter in Item 15a on the NCVS-1.

The last step is to check Item 17 for those household

members and only count the members whose age for the

current enumeration period is 12 years of age or older.

Once you have determined the total number of household

members who are 12 years of age and over, enter that

number in Item 15a on the NCVS-1.

Item 15b (Household

Members Under 12

Years of Age)

Refer to Control Card Items 12, 13c, and 17 to determine

the number to enter in Item 15b.

First, in Item 12, count only the household members who

do NOT have a diagonal line drawn through their line

numbers, since a diagonal line indicates that a person has

left the household.

Of the persons counted in Item 12 as instructed above, next

count those household members who have Box 1 "Yes"

marked in Item 13c. A "No" answer indicates that the

person has a usual residence elsewhere, is not a household

member, and would not be included in the count that you

enter in Item 15b on the NCVS-1.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-21

The last step is to check Item 17 for those household

members and only count the members whose age for the

current enumeration period is under 12 years.

Once you have determined the total number of household

members who are under 12 years of age, enter that number

in Item 15b on the NCVS-1. If none of the household

members are under 12 years of age, mark Box 0 "None" in

Item 15b.

Item 15c (Crime Incident

Reports Filled)

In Item 15c, enter the total number of NCVS-2, Crime

Incident Reports, filled for all eligible household members

in the sample household. If you marked any NCVS-2s as

"out-of-scope," do not include those Crime Incident

Reports in your tally. If you did not complete any

NCVS-2s for a household, mark Box 0 "None" in Item 15c.

16. Changes in Household Composition

(cc item 25a)

Line No.

Reason (Enter

code)

Only transcribe

changes discovered

during the current

enumeration

Item 16 (Changes in

Household Composition)

Refer to Control Card Item 25a and see if any household

composition changes are noted for the current enumeration

period. If so, transcribe the household member's line

number and the reason code for the change from Control

Card Item 25a to Item 16 on the NCVS-1.

After completing Item 16, return to the Control Card and

complete Control Card Items 32a through 32e for each

NCVS-2 that you completed for the household. The

information that you enter in Items 32a through 32e is

referred to as "bounding" information and is used to avoid

collecting duplicate incidents in subsequent interviews with

the household.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-22

Topic 3. Completing Items 17 Through 28 (Personal Characteristics)

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S PERSONAL CHARACTERISTICS

17. NAME (of household respondent) 18. Type of interview 19.

Line

No.

Last

Per. - Self-respondent

Tel. - Self-respondent

Per. - Proxy Fill 13 on cover page

Tel. - Proxy

Line No.

First

AFTER INTERVIEW - TRANSCRIBE FROM CONTROL CARD

20.

(cc 13b)

Relationship to

reference person

21.

(cc 17)

Age last

birthday

22a.

(cc18)

Marital status

THIS survey

period

22b.

(From

enumeration)

Marital status

LAST survey

period

23.

(cc 19)

Sex

24.

(cc 20)

Armed

Forces

member

25.

(cc21)

Educational

attainment

26.

(cc 22)

Attending

school

27.

(cc 23)

His-

panic

origin

28.

(cc 24)

Race

Mark (X) all that

apply.

Husband

Wife

Son

Daughter

Father

Mother

Brother

Sister

Other

relative

Nonrelative

Ref. person

Age

Married

Widowed

Divorced

Separated

Never

married

Married

Widowed

Divorced

Separated

Never

married

Not inter-

viewed

last

survey

period

Yes

Highest level

completed

Regular

school

College/

Univer-

sity

Trade

school

Voca-

tional

school

None of

the above

schools

Yes

White

Black/African

American

American Indian/

Alaskan Native

Asian

Native Hawaiian/

Other Pacific

Islander

Other - Specify

Items 17 Through 28

(Personal Characteristics)

After completing Item 4 on the cover page of the NCVS-1,

turn to page 2 and complete Items 17 through 19 for the

household respondent. Complete the remaining Personal

Characteristics, Items 20 through 28, after you leave the

household or end the phone call with the household.

You need to complete the Personal Characteristics,

Items 17 through 28, for every eligible household member

(12 years of age or older), including Type Z noninterview

persons.

Always complete Items 17 through 19 before you continue

with the NCVS-1 screen interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-23

Item 17 (Respondent's

Name)

Start the screen interview for each eligible household

member by entering his/her full name in Item 17. Control

Card Item 13a shows the name of each household member.

Always enter the household respondent's name in Item 17

on page 2 of the NCVS-1. For the remaining eligible

respondents, use Item 17 on pages 12, 18, and 24. If the

household has more than four eligible respondents, use a

separate NCVS-1A to record information for respondent

five, six, and so forth.

Item 18 (Type of

Interview)

After entering the household member's name in Item 17,

mark the type of interview in Item 18. Since the household

respondent cannot be a Type Z noninterview person, only

four answer boxes appear in Item 18 for the household

respondent. All remaining household members have a fifth

answer box for Type Z noninterviews.

Box 1:

Mark Box 1 when you are interviewing a household

member in person by self-response. The first contact with a

sample household must be a personal visit interview for at

least the household respondent. It is acceptable to

interview the remaining household members by telephone

during the first contact.

Box 2:

Mark Box 2 if the household member is interviewed by

telephone and the household member answers the questions

for himself/herself.

Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the household member cannot answer for

himself/herself, meets the requirements for a proxy

interview, and the proxy interview is conducted in person

with the proxy respondent. After marking Box 3, turn back

to the cover page and complete the proxy information in

Item 13 before conducting the proxy interview.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-24

Box 4:

Mark Box 4 if the household member cannot answer for

himself/herself, meets the requirements for a proxy

interview, and the proxy interview is conducted by

telephone with the proxy respondent. After marking Box 4,

turn back to the cover page and complete the proxy

information in Item 13 before conducting the proxy

interview.

Box 5:

Mark Box 5 when an eligible household member, other

than the household respondent, is a Type Z noninterview

person. Item 18 on page 2 does not have a Box 5 for the

household respondent. After marking Box 5, you are

reminded to complete Items 19 through 28 for the Type Z

noninterview person and to complete the Type Z

noninterview information in Item 14 on the cover page.

Item 19 (Line Number) Refer to Control Card Item 12 to find the household

member's line number at the same time that you check

Control Card Item 13a for the person's name. Enter the

household member's line number in Item 19 before you

start the person's screen interview. Make sure to enter the

correct line number for the respondent, since the line

number is the link between the household member's

personal characteristics and any Crime Incident Reports

(NCVS-2s) you may complete for the household member.

Items 20 Through 28

(Personal

Characteristics)

After you leave the household or end the phone call with

the household, complete Items 20 through 28 by

transcribing the appropriate information from the Control

Card to these items for each eligible household member.

You need to complete Items 20 through 28 for interviewed

persons AND Type Z noninterview persons.

Item 20 (Relationship to

Reference Person)

For Item 20, mark the household member's relationship to

the reference person based on the relationship entered in

Control Card Item 13b.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-25

(Also see Part B, Chapter 1, Topic 3, for more

information about Relationship to Reference Person.)

Item 21 (Age Last

Birthday)

For Item 21, using the current enumeration period, enter the

household member's age from Control Card Item 17.

Item 22a (Marital Status

This Survey Period)

For Item 22a, enter the household member's current marital

status based on the marital status code entered in Control

Card Item 18. If you changed the person's marital status

code for the current interview, make sure to use the current

code and not the lined through code.

Item 22b (Marital Status

Last Survey Period)

For Item 22b, enter the household member's marital status

from the previous enumeration period based upon the

marital status code entered in Control Card Item 18. If a

marital status code was entered in Control Card Item 18

when you received the Control Card and you did not change

the person's marital status, use that code to mark the marital

status in Item 22b. However, if you lined through the

previous marital status code and entered a new code, use

the lined through code to mark the marital status in

Item 22b. If Control Card Item 18 was blank when you

received the Control Card, mark Box 6 in Item 22b.

Item 23 (Sex) Mark Box 23 based upon the sex marked for the household

member in Control Card Item 19.

Item 24 (Armed Forces

Member)

If the household member is male or female and 18 through

65 years of age, use the answer marked in Control Card

Item 20 to mark Item 24 on the NCVS-1. If the household

member is under 18 years of age or over 65 years of age,

leave Item 24 blank.

Item 25 (Educational

Attainment)

Mark Item 25 based upon the most current 2-digit

education code entered in Control Card Item 21. Since

Control Card Item 21 only gets updated during selected

enumeration periods (1st, 3rd, 5th, and 7th), the most

current code for the highest level completed will sometimes

be the one entered for the previous enumeration period.

For example, if you are interviewing for the fourth

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-26

enumeration period, use the code entered for the third

enumeration period in Control Card Item 21.

Item 26 (Attending

School)

Mark Item 26 based upon the code entered in Control Card

Item 22.

Item 27 (Hispanic

Origin)

Mark Item 27 based upon the answer marked in Control

Card Item 23.

Item 28 (Race) Mark Item 28 based upon the race code(s) entered in

Control Card Item 24. Since each person can identify up to

four races, make sure to mark all appropriate boxes. If

Code 6, “Other,” is entered in Control Card Item 24, you

also must transcribe the “Other” race description entered in

the “Notes” space below Control Card Item 30g to the

“Specify” lines for Box 6 of Item 28 on the NCVS-1.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-27

Topic 4. Completing Items 29 Through Check Item E (Mobility/

Businesses/Theft/Break-ins/Motor Vehicles/Specific Locations/ Use of

Weapons/Known Offenders/Unwanted Sexual Acts/Catch-all

Questions/Computer Crime/Proxy Help)

29. Date of interview -----------------------------------------!

"" "" """"

Month Day Year

Item 29 (Date of Interview)

In Item 29, enter the date on which you start the household

member's interview using 2 digits for the month, 2 digits

for the day, and 4 digits for the year (for example, 02-03-

2003).

MOBILITY QUESTIONS

Before we get to the crime questions, I have some

questions that are helpful in studying where and why

crimes occur.

If unsure, ASK OR VERIFY--

33a. How long have you lived at this address?

(Enter number of months OR years.)

Months (1-11) -

SKIP

to 33b

Years (Round to nearest whole-year)

Fill Check Item A

CHECK

ITEM A

How many years are entered in 33a?

5 years or more -

SKIP

to 34

Less than 5 years - Ask 33b

33b. Altogether, how many times have you moved in the

last 5 years, that is, since

, 19 ?

Number of times

Items 33a Through 33b

(Mobility Questions)

You will complete the mobility questions for each eligible

household member. Item 33a is used to determine the

length of continuous time the respondent has lived at the

sample address and, if the respondent has lived at the

sample address less than 5 years, Item 33b is used to

determine how many times the respondent has moved in the

last 5 years.

Item 33a (Length of

Time at Address)

After reading the lead-in statement for Item 33a, you have

the option of:

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-28

! Asking the question in Item 33a if you are unsure of

the answer or

! Verifying the entry in Control Card Item 25c with the

respondent before marking the answer.

NOTE: The lead-in statement shown on the previous

page is from the household respondent's section

of the NCVS-1. For the remaining eligible

household members, the lead-in statement will

read "Before we get to the crime questions, I

have one or two questions...", since the crime

questions for the remaining household members

follow Item 33b.

Accept the answer given by the respondent without

probing. However, if a respondent seems unsure about how

to answer this question, you can tell him/her that we are

interested in the most recent continuous length of time the

respondent has been a household member at the sample

address.

Here is an example:

During the past 5 years, a household member:

! Resided at the sample address,

! Then left the sample address for 6 months to live on a

college campus, and

! Then returned to reside at the sample address just

3 months prior to your interview and has stayed there

continuously during the past 3 months.

For this example, you would enter 3 months in Item 33a.

Answer is less than 1 year:

If the answer is less than 1 year, enter the number of

months the respondent has lived continuously at the sample

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-29

address on the "Months" line and skip to Item 33b. Here

are some examples of what to enter in Item 33a based upon

the respondent's answer:

RESPONDENT SAYS: YOU SHOULD ENTER:

4 1/2 months 5 months

6 months and 1 week 6 months

2 weeks 1 month

11 months and 3 weeks 1 year

11 months and 1 week 11 months

8 weeks 2 months

Half a year 6 months

11 1/2 months 1 year

All my life Age entered in CC Item 17

Answer is vague or respondent is unsure:

Probe to get a more precise answer. Here are some

examples:

Respondent's answer: Probe:

Years and years Would you say more than

5 years or less than 5 years?

Respondent's answer: Probe:

5 to 10 years Would you say more than

7 years or less than 7 years?

Less than a year Would you say more than

6 months or less than 6

months?

It's been so long, I can't Can you give me your

really say. best estimate? (If you

enter an estimate in

Item 33a, print "EST"

beside it.)

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-30

I really can't say, but it If probing does not

is well over 20 years. work, print "DK - more

than 5 years." (Always

try to determine whether it has

been "5 years or more" or

"less than 5 years.")

Check Item A Read the question in Check Item A to yourself. Based upon

the answer that you marked in Item 33a, you will either:

! Mark the "5 years or more" box in Check Item A and

skip to Item 34 (for a household respondent) or

Item 36a (for an individual respondent), or

! Mark the "Less than 5 years" box in Check Item A

and ask the question in Item 33b.

Item 33b (Number of

Times Moved)

In Item 33b, you are inquiring about how many times the

respondent has moved in the last 5 years.

Follow these steps for completing Item 33b:

! Before reading the question to the respondent, enter

the month of interview and the year 5 years ago on

the lines following the word "since." The respondent

will use this date to determine his/her answer. Here is

an example: If you are interviewing on March 2,

2003, then you would enter "March 1998" for the

question in Item 33b.

! Read the question in Item 33b and enter the number

provided by the respondent. Count all moves whether

inside or outside of the United States, including the

move into the sample unit. Each time a respondent

changes his/her usual place of residence is considered

one move. It is acceptable to enter an estimate and

print "EST" next to it. However, only enter "DK" as a

last resort, and do not enter a range of numbers, such

as "2 - 4."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-31

! For respondents who are students, you may need to

explain what we consider to be a move. Although

some students may consider their usual place of

residence to be their parent's home, we consider their

usual place of residence to be the place where they

usually live and sleep. During the school year that

could be a college dormitory or apartment. Each time

a student changes the place where he/she usually lives

and sleeps is considered a move, even if it is just

moving from one dormitory room to another one.

BUSINESS OPERATED FROM SAMPLE ADDRESS

34. Does anyone in this household operate a business

from this address?

Yes - Go to 35

No -

Skip

to 36a

PERSONAL - Fill by observation.

TELEPHONE - Ask.

35. Is there a sign on the premises or some other

indication to the general public that a

business is operated from this address?

Yes (Recognizable business)

No (Unrecognizable business)

Items 34 and 35

(Recognizable and

Unrecognizable Businesses)

Items 34 and 35 are asked only of the household respondent

to determine if:

! A sample household member operates a business

from the sample address (Item 34).

! The business operated from the sample address is

considered recognizable or unrecognizable (Item 35).

Item 34 (Operating a

Business)

Read the question in Item 34 to the household respondent

and mark the appropriate answer box. If you get a "Yes"

answer, mark Box 1 and ask the question in Item 35 next.

If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 and skip to Item 36a.

Item 35 (Sign on the

Premises)

For a personal visit interview, you can complete Item 35

by using your observations of the housing unit's exterior to

determine whether the business is recognizable or

unrecognizable.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-32

Before marking Box 1 to indicate that the business is

recognizable, make sure that:

! A sign announcing the business is visible to the public

from OUTSIDE the housing unit and

! The sign announcing the business must be located on

the sample household's property, such as a sign on a

front door, window, garage door, mail box, or a free

standing sign in the front yard.

Do NOT use the following indicators as evidence that a

business is recognizable:

$ The business is advertised in a newspaper, magazine,

telephone book, or on the Internet.

$ A motor vehicle, such as a van, car, truck, or bus, is

parked in the driveway or in front of the housing unit

and the vehicle carries the business logo on it.

Before marking Box 2 to indicate that the business is

unrecognizable, make sure that NO sign is visible on the

outside of the housing unit indicating that the business

exists. Any reported incidents of theft from an

unrecognizable business operated by a household member

from the sample unit must be included in the NCVS.

For a telephone interview, ask the question in Item 35 of

the household respondent and mark the appropriate answer

box. If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 indicating that

the business is recognizable from outside the housing unit.

If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 indicating that the

business is unrecognizable from outside the housing unit.

Here is the reason why we need to differentiate between a

recognizable or unrecognizable business operated from the

sample address by a household member:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-33

! We keep crime incidents that involve property stolen

from an unrecognizable business, but

$ We do NOT keep crime incidents that ONLY involve

property stolen from a recognizable business.

However, if the following types of incidents are reported,

we want to keep them regardless of whether a household

member operates a recognizable business from the sample

address:

! Personal property was stolen from the household

respondent or another household member.

! The household respondent or another household

member received a face-to-face threat of physical

harm, was attacked, or an attempt was made to

attack a household member.

! Someone illegally entered, broke into or attempted

to break into the sample unit.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, of this manual for

detailed definitions and examples of special situations for

recognizable and unrecognizable businesses.)

Items 36 Through 46

(Screen Questions)

The screen questions cover a wide variety of situations and

are designed to provide the respondent with concrete

examples of the kinds of crimes that are typically reported

for the NCVS and could be overlooked by respondents.

These screen questions ensure that we collect ALL

incidents of crime in a sample household that occurred

during each respondent's 6-month reference period.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 2, for a detailed

definition and examples for the NCVS reference period.)

The household respondent's interview has a few additional

screen questions to elicit crime incidents involving the

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-34

entire household, in addition to crime incidents involving

just the household respondent. These additional screen

questions are asked in Items 36 through 39 and 46 to

determine whether any crime incidents involving the entire

household happened, such as:

! In Item 36 - Things stolen from outside the home (for

example, lawn furniture or a garden hose), and things

stolen from a household member under 12 years of

age (for example, a 10-year-old's bicycle stolen from

the home's driveway),

! In Item 37 - Break-ins, attempted break-ins, or illegal

entries at the sample address (for example, the house,

garage, shed, or a storage room), or at a hotel, motel,

or vacation home where the respondent was staying,

! In Item 38 - The total number of motor vehicles

owned by the entire household during the 6 months

prior to the interview,

! In Item 39 - Thefts or attempted thefts of motor

vehicles owned by the household during the 6 months

prior to the interview, including gasoline and parts

(for example, tires, wheels, battery, cassette player,

CD player, and so forth).

• In Item 46 - Attacks, threats of physical harm, thefts,

and attempted thefts related to reported acts of

vandalism.

Do Not Leave Screen

Questions Unanswered

It is important to ask each screen question for an eligible

respondent. Unanswered screen questions for a household

respondent can cause the case to be classified as a Type A

noninterview and unanswered screen questions for an

individual respondent can cause the respondent to be

classified as a Type Z noninterview person.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-35

"Don't Know" or "DK"

Entries Are Not

Acceptable

If a respondent answers with "Don't know," probe carefully

to get a definite "Yes" or "No" answer. If the respondent is

still unable to answer the screen question, mark the "No"

answer box.

Respondent Refuses to

Answer a Screen

Question

If a respondent refuses to answer a particular screen

question, print "REF" in the question's answer space

and explain in the "Notes" space why you feel the

respondent refused to answer the question.

Recording Incidents on

the NCVS-1

In most cases, record incidents as a respondent reports

them, regardless of whether the screen item relates to the

type of incident reported. Reports of vandalism are an

exception to this rule. If a household respondent reports an

act of vandalism (for example, spray painting graffiti on a

garage door) AND no NCVS crime is reported, record the

vandalism in Items 46a through 46f. These vandalism

items are asked only of the household respondent.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 2, for detailed

information about crimes measured by the NCVS.)

How to Ask Screen

Questions

Part (a) of most screen items has at least three subcategories

and could have as many as eight subcategories (for

example, Item 36a). This may prompt some respondents to

give you an answer before you finish reading each

subcategory. We would prefer that you finish reading each

subcategory before the respondent gives an answer. Even if

you get interrupted, you must read each and every

subcategory in its entirety, so that we do not miss any crime

incidents.

The following technique may help you get through all the

subcategories of a screen question before getting a

respondent's answer:

1 After reading each subcategory in part (a), only pause

long enough to let the respondent know that you are

about to start reading a new subcategory. If you pause

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-36

too long, the respondent may feel that you are waiting

for an answer.

2 After reading all subcategories in part (a), pause long

enough to allow the respondent to reply. If the

respondent doesn't give you an answer, then read the

question in part (b), "Did any incidents of this type

happen to you?"

3 If you get a "Yes" response in part (b), mark Box 1

and ask the respondent "What happened?" Based

upon the answer you receive, enter a brief description

of the crime incident in the space provided to the right

of part (a). Then, ask the question in part (c), "How

many times?" and fill the "Number of times" space.

4 If you get a "No" response in part (b), mark Box 2 and

follow the skip instruction to the next screen item.

If this technique doesn't work and a respondent either

interrupts you in the middle of reading a subcategory or

before you finish reading all the subcategories for a

question, follow these steps:

Respondent answers in the middle of reading a

subcategory--

1 Stop and thank the respondent, but explain that there

is more to the question which he/she needs to hear

before giving an answer.

2 Reread the unfinished subcategory again from the

beginning.

If the respondent gives you a "No" answer after you

finish reading the entire subcategory, tell the

respondent that you need to finish reading all the

subcategories for the question.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-37

If the respondent gives you a "Yes" answer before you

have read all subcategories, then follow the

instructions below.

Respondent answers "Yes" before you have read ALL

subcategories--

1 Mark the "Yes" answer box in part (b) and ask "What

happened?"

2 Enter a brief description of the crime incident in the

space to the right of part (a).

3 Then, ask the question in part (c), "How many times?"

and fill the "Number of times" space.

4 Next, start by saying, "Other than any incidents

already reported..." and finish reading the remaining

subcategories in part (a) of the same screen question.

5 If the respondent mentions any additional crime

incidents, briefly describe them in the space next to

part (a) AND correct the "Number of times" entry in

part (c), as necessary. If the respondent reports more

than one incident in one screen item, enter a brief

description for each incident in part (a) and number

each one separately (for example, #1 - L1 threatened

with a knife by coworker, #2 - L1's purse snatched

while boarding a bus).

By using these techniques, there is less chance of missing

any crime incidents which occurred during a respondent's

reference period.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 6, for general

interviewing techniques to use for the NCVS.)

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-38

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S SCREEN QUESTIONS

36a. I'm going to read some examples that will give you

an idea of the kinds of crimes this study covers.

As I go through them, tell me if any of these

happened to you in the last 6 months, that is since

, 20 .

Was something belonging to YOU stolen, such as -

(a) Things that you carry, like luggage, a wallet,

purse, briefcase, book-

(b) Clothing, jewelry, or calculator-

(d) Things in your home - like a TV, stereo, or tools

(e) Things outside your home such as a garden hose

or lawn furniture-

(f) Things belonging to children in the household-

(g) Things from a vehicle, such as a package,

groceries, camera, or cassette tapes-

(h) Did anyone ATTEMPT to steal anything

belonging to you?

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK-

36b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 37a

36c. How many times?

Number of times (36c)

Items 36a Through 36c

(Theft or Attempted

Theft)

Items 36a through 36c are asked of all eligible household

members and are designed to remind each respondent of

incidents in which thefts were attempted or completed

during the 6 months prior to the interview.

Subcategories (e) and (f) of Item 36a are asked only of the

household respondent and do not appear in Item 36a for

individual respondents.

Before asking the question in Item 36a, make sure to enter

the date for the first day of the respondent's reference

period in the lead-in statement. In most cases, this will be

the month, day, and year entered in Control Card Item 25b.

If Item 25b is blank or the date entered is more than

6 months before the current interview, refer to pages 10 and

11 in your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554, for help

in determining the date to enter in Item 36a.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-39

Once you have entered the date to indicate the start of the

respondent's reference period, always read the two lead-in

statements in Item 36a before reading the question. Then

follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen

Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

37a. (Other than any incidents already mentioned,) has

anyone -

(a) Broken in or ATTEMPTED to break into your

home by forcing a door or window, pushing past

someone, jimmying a lock, cutting a screen, or

entering through an open door or window?

(b) Has anyone illegally gotten in or tried to get into

a garage, shed or storage room?

motel room or vacation home where you were

staying?

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

37b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 38

37c. How many times?

Number of times (37c)

Items 37a Through 37c

(Break-in or Attempted

Break-in)

Items 37a through 37c are asked only of the household

respondent to find out if:

! The household respondent's home or lodging was

broken into or illegally entered, or

! An attempt was made to break into or illegally enter

the household respondent's home or lodging.

Items 37a through 37c are not included in the screen

interview for individual respondents. If the household

respondent reported an incident in Item 36, make sure to

read the parenthetical phrase (Other than any incidents

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-40

already mentioned,) as you read the question in Item 37a.

This will help avoid duplicate incidents.

Moved Into Sample

Address During

Reference Period

A household respondent may have lived in more than one

housing unit during his/her 6-month reference period. If

you encounter this situation, include all reported incidents

that happened during the household respondent's reference

period AND involved property owned or rented by the

current household respondent.

Incident Happened at

Sample Address

Before Owned/

Rented by Household

Respondent

When the following conditions exist, do not accept the

reported incident:

! The household respondent reports an incident that

happened at the sample address during the household

respondent's 6-month reference period, BUT

! The current household respondent was not the owner

or renter at the sample address at the time of the

incident. For example, the sample unit may still have

been owned or rented by the previous owner/renter or

may have been vacant while it was available for sale

or rent.

However, you should accept the incident if the current

household respondent was the owner/renter, but had not yet

moved into the sample unit when the incident occurred.

Only accept incidents involving property owned or

rented by the current household during the 6 months

prior to the interview.

Household

Respondent Owns/

Rents a Recreation

Vehicle or Vacation

Home

Accept the incident if the recreation vehicle or vacation

home was owned or rented by the household respondent

AND was being occupied as a housing unit at the time of

the incident.

Do not accept incidents involving break-ins or attempted

break-ins of vacation or second homes when:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-41

$ The vacation or second home is part of a recognizable

business,

$ The vacation or second home was rented to a

nonhousehold member at the time of the incident, OR

$ The vacation or second home was not occupied by the

sample household as a housing unit at the time of the

incident.

Instructions for "How to Ask Screen Questions" are

covered on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

38. What was the TOTAL number of cars, vans, trucks,

motorcycles, or other motor vehicles owned by you or

any other member of this household during the last

6 months? Include those you no longer own.

None -

SKIP

TO 40a

4 or more

Items 38 Through 39c

(Motor Vehicles)

Items 38 through 39c are asked only of the household

respondent to find out:

! The total number of motor vehicles currently or

previously owned by the sample household during

the last 6 months, AND

! Whether any of these motor vehicles were stolen or

used without permission, including parts and

gasoline, AND

! Whether any attempts were made to steal or use them

without permission, including parts and gasoline.

Items 38 through 39c are not included in the screen

interview for individual respondents.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-42

39. During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents

already mentioned,) (was the vehicle/were any of the

vehicles) -

(a) Stolen or used without permission?

(b) Did anyone steal any parts such as a tire, tape

deck, hubcap or battery?

(d) Did anyone ATTEMPT to steal any vehicles or

parts attached to (it/them)?

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

39b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 40a

39c. How many times?

Number of times (39c)

Completing Item 38 Ask the question in Item 38 of the household respondent

as worded and make sure to include the statement,

"Include those you no longer own" at the end of the

question. If the sample household has not owned any

motor vehicles during the 6 months prior to the interview,

mark Box 0 "None" and skip to Item 40a. Otherwise,

mark the appropriate answer box in Item 38 and ask the

question in Item 39a next. If the respondent refuses to

answer Item 38, you still need to ask the question in

Item 39a.

(Also see "Respondent Refuses to Answer Item 38" on

page B2-44.)

What to Include in

Item 38

If a household respondent questions what to include in the

total number of motor vehicles for Item 38, here are some

guidelines for what to include:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-43

! Include cars, vans, trucks, sport utility vehicles,

motorcycles, or any other motorized vehicle that can

be legally used as a means of transportation on most

roads or highways (for example, motorized

recreation vehicles that do not require towing).

! Include a motorized vehicle owned by a sample

household member during the 6 months prior to the

interview, even if it has been sold, given away,

junked, stolen, or abandoned.

! Include all vehicles owned by an unrecognizable

business that a household member operates, as well

as all vehicles owned for the household's personal

use.

! Include vehicles owned by a recognizable business

that a household member operates IF the vehicles are

used at least partially for the household's personal

use.

! Include vehicles leased by a household member for

at least one month AND the leased vehicles are the

responsibility of the household member if stolen.

What to Exclude in

Item 38

If a household respondent questions what to exclude from

the total number of motor vehicles for Item 38, here are

some guidelines for what to exclude:

$ Exclude motorized vehicles that cannot be driven

legally as a means of transportation on most roads or

highways (for example, minibikes, go-carts, or

snowmobiles).

$ Exclude vehicles owned by a recognizable business

that is operated by a household member AND the

vehicles are ONLY used for business purposes.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-44

$ Exclude vehicles that are loaned to a household

member for private use by a business AND the

business is not owned by a household member.

$ Exclude vehicles that a household member rented for

less than one month.

$ Exclude vehicles owned by parents in a sample

household when their children are using the vehicles

away from the sample address while attending

school.

Respondent Refuses to

Answer Item 38

If a household respondent refuses to answer or feels

uneasy about answering the question in Item 38, explain

the reasons for asking about motor vehicles owned by the

household which are:

! To determine whether or not we need to ask about

any thefts of motor vehicles owned by the sample

household, AND

! To help respondents recall all motor vehicles owned

during the 6 months prior to the interview, before

asking about any thefts involving the vehicles.

When you are unable to convince a household respondent

to provide an answer for Item 38, write "REF" in the

question's answer space and explain in the "Notes" space

why you feel the respondent refused to answer this

question.

You still need to ask the question in Item 39a when a

household respondent refuses to answer Item 38. Just

reword the question slightly as follows:

"During the last 6 months, were any of the vehicles that

MAY HAVE BEEN owned by you or any other member

of this household..."

Completing Items 39a

Through 39c

The question in Item 39a refers to the motor vehicles

mentioned in Item 38. If the household respondent has

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-45

already reported an incident during this interview, make

sure to read the parenthetical phrase, "other than any

incidents already mentioned."

As you read the question in Item 39a, use the phrase:

! "Was the vehicle" when the household respondent

reports only one motor vehicle in Item 38.

! "Were any of the vehicles" when the household

respondent reports two or more motor vehicles in

Item 38.

! "Were any of the vehicles that may have been

owned by you or any other member of this

household" when the household respondent refuses

to answer Item 38.

Additional instructions for "How to Ask Screen

Questions" are covered on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Distinguishing Between

Vandalism and

Attempted Thefts

Accept reported attempts to steal motor vehicles or motor

vehicle parts owned by the household, because attempted

thefts are just as important as actual thefts. However, it

may not always be clear to a respondent that an attempt

was made to steal his/her vehicle or parts (for example, a

broken window on a car). If it is not clear whether the

incident was an attempted theft or an act of vandalism:

! Probe by asking, "Do you think the offender was

trying to break into or steal your vehicle or do you

think it was an act of vandalism?"

! Rely on the respondent's perception. If the

respondent feels the incident was an attempted theft

or is still unsure, enter the incident in Item 39.

However, if the respondent feels the incident was an

act of vandalism AND no NCVS crime was

committed (for example, a broken antenna, mirror

or slashed tires), enter the incident in Item 46. If you

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-46

stop to enter the incident in Item 46, make sure to

return to Item 39 and complete the items between

Items 39 and 46.

Examples of Motor

Vehicle Parts

The following items are examples of parts attached to

motor vehicles: tires, wheels, hubcaps, CD players, tape

decks, cellular phones, batteries, steering wheels, door

handles, and so forth. However, if a respondent reports a

theft or attempted theft of other types of items from a

vehicle (for example, Christmas presents or grocery items)

at Item 39a, accept the reported incident in Item 39.

40a. (Other than any incidents already mentioned,)

since

, 20 , were you attacked

or threatened OR did you have something stolen

from you -

(a) At home including the porch or yard-

(b) At or near a friend's, relative's, or neighbor's

home-

(d) In places such as a storage shed or laundry

room, a shopping mall, restaurant, bank, or

airport-

(e) While riding in any vehicle-

(f) On the street or in a parking lot-

(g) At such places as a party, theater, gym,

picnic area, bowling lanes, or while fishing

or hunting-

(h) Did anyone ATTEMPT to attack or ATTEMPT

to steal anything belonging to you from any of

these places?

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

40b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 41a

40c. How many times?

Number of times (40c)

Items 40a Through 40c

(Attacks, Threats, and

Thefts by Location)

Items 40a through 40c are asked of all eligible household

members and are designed to remind each respondent of

incidents in which he/she may have been attacked or

threatened with physical harm in a variety of locations or

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-47

situations. The question in Item 40a also asks about things

stolen from the respondent or attempts to steal anything

from the respondent.

Before asking the question in Item 40a, make sure to enter

the date for the first day of the respondent's reference

period in the question. In most cases, this will be the

month, day, and year entered in Control Card Item 25b. If

Item 25b is blank or the date entered is more than

6 months before the current interview, refer to pages 10

and 11 in your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554, for

help in determining the date to enter in Item 40a.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase (Other than any incidents

already mentioned,), as you read the question in

Item 40a. Then follow the instructions under "How to Ask

Screen Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Acceptable and

Unacceptable Threats

The following conditions must exist for a threat to be

acceptable for the NCVS:

! The threat must be delivered directly by the offender

to the respondent verbally and in person AND

! The threat must involve the potential for physical

harm to the respondent.

Do not accept threats that an offender makes over the

telephone, in a letter, FAX, or electronic message. Also

unacceptable are threats or warnings delivered by another

person for the offender, as well as a respondent saying that

he/she felt threatened.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-48

41a. (Other than any incidents already mentioned,)

has anyone attacked or threatened you in any of

these ways

(Exclude telephone threats)

(a) With any weapon, for instance, a gun or

knife -

(b) With anything like a baseball bat, frying

pan, scissors, or stick -

bottle -

(d) Include any grabbing, punching, or choking,

(e) Any rape, attempted rape or other type of

sexual attack -

(f) Any face to face threats -

(g) Any attack or threat or use of force by

anyone at all? Please mention it even if you

are not certain it was a crime.

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

41b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 42a

41c. How many times?

Number of times (41c)

Items 41a Through 41c

(Attacks and Threats by

Weapon or Use of

Force)

Items 41a through 41c are asked of all eligible household

members and are designed to remind each respondent of

incidents in which he/she may have been attacked or

threatened with physical harm involving various weapons

or the use of force.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents

already mentioned,), as you read the question in

Item 41a. However, the phrase (Exclude telephone

threats) is included only as a reminder to you and should

not be read to the respondent. Remember that threats

made over the telephone are never acceptable for the

NCVS. Then follow the instructions under "How to Ask

Screen Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-49

Only accept verbal threats delivered by the offender in

person to physically harm the respondent. Also read

"Acceptable and Unacceptable Threats" on page B2-47.

With the exception of cases involving police officers,

accept any incidents in which the offender had a weapon

present during the incident, even if the offender did not

use it. Also, accept incidents in which the offender threw

something or shot at the respondent, even though the

object thrown may not qualify as a weapon for the NCVS.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 7, for more

information about weapons, and Topic 21, for more

details about incidents involving police officers.)

42a. People often don't think of incidents

committed by someone they know. (Other

than any incidents already mentioned,) did

you have something stolen from you OR were

you attacked or threatened by

(Exclude

telephone threats) -

(a) Someone at work or school-

(b) A neighbor or friend-

(d) Any other person you've met or known?

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

42b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 43a

42c. How many times?

Number of times (42c)

Items 42a Through 42c

(Offender is Known by

the Respondent)

Items 42a through 42c are asked of all eligible household

members and are designed to remind each respondent of

incidents in which the offender was someone he/she

knows (for example, co-worker, friend, neighbor, relative,

or family member) and the incident involved an attack,

threat, or theft.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-50

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents

already mentioned,), as you ask the question in Item 42a.

However, the phrase (Exclude telephone threats) is

included only as a reminder to you and should not be read

to the respondent. Remember that threats made over the

telephone are never acceptable for the NCVS. Then

follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen

Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Only accept verbal threats delivered by the offender in

person to physically harm the respondent. Also read

"Acceptable and Unacceptable Threats" on page B2-47.

43a. Incidents involving forced or unwanted sexual

acts are often difficult to talk about. (Other

than any incidents already mentioned,) have

you been forced or coerced to engage in

unwanted sexual activity by -

(a) Someone you didn't know before-

(b) A casual acquaintance-

Briefly describe incident(s)

MARK OR ASK -

43b. Did any incidents of this type happen to you?

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 44a

43c. How many times?

Number of times (43c)

Items 43a Through 43c

(Forced or Unwanted

Sexual Acts)

Items 43a through 43c are asked of all eligible household

members and are designed to remind each respondent of

incidents in which he/she was forced or coerced to engage

in unwanted sexual activity, regardless of whether the

respondent did or did not know the offender. Make sure to

read the lead-in statement before asking the question in

Item 43a.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-51

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents

already mentioned,), as you ask the question in Item 43a.

Then follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen

Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

44a. During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents

already mentioned) did you call the police to report

something that happened to YOU which you thought

was a crime?

Briefly describe incident(s)

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 45a

OFFICE USE ONLY

CHECK

Look at 44a. If unsure, ASK, otherwise, mark

ITEM B

without asking.

Were you

(was the respondent)

attacked or threatened, or was something

stolen or an attempt made to steal something

that belonged to you

(the respondent)

another household member?

Yes - ASK 44b

No -

SKIP

to 45a

44b. How many times?

Number of times (44b)

Item 44a, Check Item B,

and Item 44b (Reported

Incident to Police)

Item 44a, Check Item B, and Item 44b are asked of all

eligible household members and are designed to remind

each respondent of incidents that the respondent reported

to the police because something happened to the

respondent that he/she thought was a crime. Item 44a has

a general question designed to bring out crimes that the

respondent may have overlooked earlier or perhaps we did

not ask about specifically in earlier items (For example,

incidents in which the offender was a child, or no loss or

injury resulted.).

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-52

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents

already mentioned,), as you read the question in Item 44a.

"Yes" Answer in

Item 44a

Mark Box 1 and ask "What happened?" when you get a

"Yes" answer in Item 44a. Then enter a brief description

of each reported incident in the space above Box 1 and

continue with Check Item B. If the respondent reports

more than one incident in Item 44a, enter a brief

description for each incident and number each one

separately (For example, #1 - L2 threatened with physical

harm by coworker, #2 - L2's purse snatched while

boarding a bus.).

If the respondent relates an incident that might not be a

crime, such as a traffic accident, or that involved a

nonhousehold member, stress that we are only interested

in an incident when:

! It was reported to the police,

! It directly affected the respondent or another

household member, AND

! The respondent believes it to be a crime.

After stressing these points, accept the respondent's answer

and mark the appropriate box in Item 44a.

"No" Answer in

Item 44a

When you get a "No" answer in Item 44a, mark Box 2 in

Item 44a and skip to Item 45a.

Check Item B If you can determine the answer for Check Item B from the

incident description provided by the respondent in

Item 44a, you can mark the "Yes" or "No" box in Check

Item B without asking the question. However, if you are

unsure whether the respondent was attacked or threatened,

or something was stolen or an attempt was made to steal

something that belonged to the respondent or another

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-53

household member, ask the question in Check Item B

before marking the answer.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 44a AND at

least one of the incidents involves the respondent being

attacked or threatened, or something was stolen or an

attempt was made to steal something that belonged to the

respondent or another household member, then mark

Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B.

Box 1 "Yes":

After marking Box 1 to indicate that the incident is an

NCVS crime, ask Item 44b next to find out how many

incidents happened. Although Check Item B does not

mention break-ins or illegal entries, mark Box 1 if the

respondent reports a break-in or illegal entry. Also mark

Box 1 in Check Item B for household crimes not reported

in an earlier item (For example, a 10-year-old household

member's bicycle was stolen from the home's backyard.).

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B, you are

instructed to ask Item 44b next.

Box 2 "No":

After marking Box 2 to indicate that the incident is not an

NCVS crime, skip to Item 45a. If the incident involves

ONLY acts of vandalism (for example, graffiti painted on

a shed or tires slashed on a motor vehicle), mark Box 2

and remind the household respondent of the vandalism

when asking the vandalism questions in Items 46a through

46f. If the respondent mentions ONLY threatening letters

or telephone threats and no personal confrontation

occurred, mark Box 2 because we only accept threats of

physical harm delivered in person and verbally directly by

the offender to the respondent. When an eligible

household member, other than the respondent, was

attacked or threatened with physical harm, mark Box 2 in

Check Item B. Remind the victimized household

member to report this incident if he/she does not report

it when interviewed. If that person has already been

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-54

interviewed, re-contact him/her and try to obtain the

incident.

After marking Box 2 "No" in Check Item B, you are

instructed to skip to Item 45a.

Item 44b After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B, ask the

question in Item 44b to determine how many times each

reported incident happened during the last 6 months.

Enter the TOTAL number on the "Number of times" line

in Item 44b.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 44a AND

Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Check Item B, ask the question

"How many times?" for each incident in which the

respondent was attacked or threatened, or something was

stolen or an attempt was made to steal something that

belonged to the respondent or another household member.

Then enter the TOTAL number in Item 44b.

Once you have completed the respondent's NCVS-1

interview, make sure to complete a separate NCVS-2,

Crime Incident Report, for each "Number of times"

entered in Item 44b.

45a. During the last 6 months, (other than any

incidents already mentioned) did anything which

you thought was a crime happen to YOU, but you

did NOT report to the police?

Briefly describe incident(s)

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to INTRO at top of

page 7

OFFICE USE ONLY

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-55

CHECK

Look at 45a. If unsure, ASK, otherwise, mark

ITEM C

without asking.

Were you

(was the respondent)

attacked or threatened, or was something

stolen or an attempt made to steal something

that belonged to you

(the respondent)

another household member?

Yes - ASK 45b

No -

SKIP

to INTRO at top of

page 7

45b. How many times?

Number of times (45b)

Item 45a, Check Item C,

and Item 45b (Incident

Not Reported to Police)

Item 45a, Check Item C, and Item 45b are asked of all

eligible household members and are designed to remind

each respondent of incidents that the respondent did NOT

report to the police, even though he/she thought they were

crimes. Item 45a has a general question designed to elicit

crimes that the respondent may have overlooked earlier or

perhaps we did not ask about specifically in earlier items

(for example, incidents in which the offender was a child,

or no loss or injury resulted).

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,

make sure to read the phrase, "(Other than any incidents

already mentioned,)", as you read the question in

Item 45a.

"Yes" Answer in

Item 45a

Mark Box 1 and ask "What happened?" when you get a

"Yes" answer in Item 45a. Then enter a brief description

of each reported incident in the space above Box 1 and

continue with Check Item C. If the respondent reports

more than one incident in Item 45a, enter a brief

description for each incident and number each one

separately (for example, #1 - L1 threatened with a knife by

coworker, #2 - L1's purse snatched while boarding a bus).

If the respondent relates an incident that might not be a

crime, such as a traffic accident, or that involved a

nonhousehold member, stress that we are only interested

in an incident when:

! It directly affected the respondent or another

household member AND

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-56

! The respondent believes it to be a crime.

After emphasizing these points, accept the respondent's

answer and mark the appropriate box in Item 45a.

"No" Answer in

Item 45a

When you get a "No" answer in Item 45a, mark Box 2 in

Item 45a and skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7.

Check Item C If you can determine the answer for Check Item C from the

incident description provided by the respondent in

Item 45a, you can mark the "Yes" or "No" box in Check

Item C without asking the question. However, if you are

not sure whether the respondent was attacked or

threatened, or something was stolen or an attempt was

made to steal something that belonged to the respondent or

another household member, ask the question in Check

Item C before marking the answer.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 45a AND at

least one of the incidents involves the respondent being

attacked or threatened, or something was stolen or an

attempt was made to steal something that belonged to the

respondent or another household member, then mark

Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C.

Box 1 "Yes":

After marking Box 1 to indicate that the incident is an

NCVS crime, ask Item 45b next to find out how many

incidents happened. Although Check Item C does not

mention break-ins or illegal entries, mark Box 1 if the

respondent reports a break-in or illegal entry. Also mark

Box 1 in Check Item C for household crimes not reported

in an earlier item (For example, a 10-year-old household

member's bicycle was stolen from the home's backyard.).

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C, you are

instructed to ask Item 45b next.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-57

Box 2 "No":

After marking Box 2 to indicate that the incident is not an

NCVS crime, skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7. If

the incident involves ONLY acts of vandalism (For

example, graffiti painted on a shed or tires slashed on a

motor vehicle.), mark Box 2 and remind the household

respondent of the vandalism when asking the vandalism

questions in Items 46a through 46f. If the respondent

mentions ONLY threatening letters or telephone threats

and no personal confrontation occurred, mark Box 2

because we only accept threats of physical harm delivered

in person and verbally directly by the offender to the

respondent. When an eligible household member, other

than the respondent, was attacked or threatened with

physical harm, mark Box 2 in Check Item C. Remind the

victimized household member to report this incident if

he/she does not report it when interviewed. If that

person has already been interviewed, re-contact

him/her and try to obtain the incident.

After marking Box 2 "No" in Check Item C, you are

instructed to skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7.

Item 45b After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C, ask the

question in Item 45b to determine how many times each

reported incident happened during the last 6 months.

Enter the TOTAL number on the "Number of times" line

in Item 45b.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 45a AND

Box 1 "Yes" in marked in Check Item C, ask the question

"How many times?" for each incident in which the

respondent was attacked or threatened, something was

stolen, or an attempt was made to steal something that

belonged to the respondent or another household member.

Then enter the TOTAL number in Item 45b.

Once you have completed the respondent's NCVS-1

interview, make sure to complete a separate NCVS-2,

Crime Incident Report, for each time entered in Item 45b.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-58

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT’S COMPUTER CRIME SCREEN QUESTIONS

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Read introduction.

INTRO:

The next series of questions are about YOUR use of a computer. Please include ALL computers,

laptops, or access to WebTV used at home, work, or school for PERSONAL USE

for operating a

home business.

INTRO

By reading this introductory statement, you are preparing

the respondent for the type of information covered in the

next series of screen questions. The respondent needs to

understand that we are interested in ALL types of

computers that he or she operates for PERSONAL USE

either at home, work, school, or any other location, as well

as any type of computer the respondent operates for a

home business.

These computer crime screen questions are asked of the

household respondent and each eligible household member

during his/her screen interview.

If you are conducting a proxy interview, remember to

substitute the proxy person’s name in place of the words

“Your” or “You,” as you ask questions of the proxy

respondent. Follow this procedure where necessary for

each of the new computer crime screen questions.

45c. During the last 6 months, have YOU used a

computer, laptop, or WebTV for the following

purposes

(Read answer categories 1-4) -

Mark (X) all that apply.

For personal use at home?

For personal use at work?

For personal use at school, libraries, etc.?

To operate a home business?

None of the above -

SKIP

to Check Item D

Item 45c

Notice that the reference period for the computer crime

screen questions covers the 6 months prior to the

interview, just like the reference period for the rest of

screen interview. As you read the question in Item 45c,

make sure to emphasize the word “YOU” and to read each

answer category from Boxes 1 through 4 as a separate

question.

For example, start by asking, “During the last 6 months,

have YOU used a computer, laptop, or WebTV for the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-59

following purposes–For personal use at home?” Wait for

the respondent’s answer. If you get a “Yes” answer, mark

Box 1 and then ask, “For personal use at work?”. If you

get a “No” answer for the first question, leave Box 1

unmarked and continue by asking, “For personal use at

work?”. Follow this method for each of the four questions

for Boxes 1 through 4 and mark ALL boxes that apply.

Notice that Box 5 is not printed in bold type. Do NOT

read this statement to the respondent. If the respondent

answers “No” to all four questions in Item 45c, mark

Box 5, “None of the above,” and skip to Check Item D.

Also mark Box 5 if the respondent says that he/she only

uses a computer for work and does not have a home

business. In other words, the respondent has not used a

computer for personal use or for a home business.

Take your time asking and completing this item and avoid

rushing through it. If you mark Box 5 incorrectly, you will

skip over the remaining computer crime screen questions

and could miss information about a computer crime.

If you mark any box in Item 45c, other than Box 5, you

will continue with Item 45d.

45d. How many computers do you have access to

for personal use or for operating a home

business?

None

4 or more

Item 45d

Once you have determined in Item 45c that a respondent

has used any type of computer in the past 6 months for

personal use or for operating a home business, then you

will determine in Item 45d how many computers the

respondent accessed during the reference period for

personal use or for operating a home business.

Notice that one of the answer categories is Box 0, “None.”

If a respondent should answer “None,” you need to probe

to make sure that the respondent understood the question

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-60

and to verify whether the answer you were given in

Item 45c is correct.

After completing Item 45d, continue with Item 45e.

45e. Do YOU use the Internet for personal use or

for operating a home business?

Personal use

Operating a home business

Both

None of the above

Item 45e

Notice that the word “YOU” is printed in capital letters in

the question for Item 45e. As you ask this question,

emphasize the word “YOU” so that the respondent

concentrates only on his/her use of the Internet for

personal reasons or for operating a home business. For a

proxy interview, emphasize the proxy person’s name so

that the proxy respondent concentrates on the proxy

person’s Internet usage.

Boxes 1, 2, and 3 are self-explanatory. Only mark Box 4,

“None of the above,” when the respondent has not used

the Internet at all during the 6 months before the interview

for personal use or for operating a home business.

45f. Have you experienced any of the following

COMPUTER-RELATED incidents in the last

6 months

(Read answer categories 1-6) -

Mark (X) all that apply.

Fraud in purchasing something over the Internet?

Computer virus attack?

Threats of harm or physical attack made while online

or through E-mail?

Unrequested lewd or obscene messages,

communications, or images while online or through

E-mail?

(Only ask if box 4 is marked in Item 45c)

Software

business?

Something else that you consider a computer-related

crime?

- Specify

No computer-related incidents -

SKIP

to Check Item D

Item 45f

Item 45f is used to identify any computer-related crime

incidents that the respondent may have experienced in the

6 months before the interview. Make sure to emphasize

“COMPUTER-RELATED” and ask each answer category

from Boxes 1 through 6 as a separate question.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-61

For example, start by asking, “Have you experienced any

of the following COMPUTER-RELATED incidents in the

last 6 months-Fraud in purchasing something over the

Internet? Wait for the respondent to answer and, if you get

a “Yes” answer, mark Box 1. If you get a “No” answer,

leave Box 1 unmarked and continue by asking, “Computer

virus attack?”

When you get to Box 5, only ask about this type of

incident if the respondent told you in Item 45c that he/she

uses a computer for the operation of a home business. If

Box 4 is NOT marked in Item 45c, skip the question for

Box 5 and continue by asking the question for Box 6.

If you get all “No” answers in Item 45f, mark Box 7, “No

computer-related incidents,” and skip to Check Item D.

Notice that Box 7 is not printed in bold type. Do NOT

read this statement to the respondent. If you mark at least

one of the boxes for answer categories 1 through 6,

continue with Item 45g.

At this time, computer-related incidents are not considered

NCVS crimes, just as acts of vandalism are not considered

NCVS crimes, unless the incident also involves an attack

or a threat of attack, or a theft or attempted theft.

Therefore, do not complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, if a respondent ONLY reports a computer-related

incident and no NCVS crime occurred, such as an attack, a

threat, a theft or an attempted theft.

45g. Did you suffer any monetary loss as a result

of the incident(s) you just mentioned?

Yes

No -

SKIP

to 45i

Item 45g

You will ask the question in Item 45g to find out if the

respondent lost any money as a result of the computer-

related incident(s) identified in Item 45f. If the respondent

reported more than one incident in Item 45f, then ask the

question in Item 45g using the word “incidents.” If you

get a “Yes” answer, you will continue with Item 45h. If

you get a “No” answer, you will skip to Item 45i.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-62

45h. How much money did you lose as a result of

the incident(s)? $

Amount of loss

Don’t know

Item 45h

When a respondent indicates in Item 45g that he/she lost

money due to a computer-related incident reported in

Item 45f, you will identify how much money the

respondent lost in Item 45h. Once the respondent gives

you an amount, use the “Amount of loss” line and enter

the respondent’s answer in whole dollars rounding up or

down to the nearest dollar figure.

If the respondent hesitates or has trouble arriving at a

dollar figure, ask the respondent to give you his/her best

estimate. Enter the estimated dollar amount on the

“Amount of loss” line. Only mark Box x, “Don’t know,”

when you are unable to get an exact amount or at least an

estimate from the respondent.

After completing Item 45h, continue with the last

computer crime screen question, Item 45i.

45i. Did you report the incident(s) you just

mentioned to

(Read answer categories 1-5) -

Mark (X) all that apply.

A law enforcement agency?

An Internet Service provider?

A Website administrator?

A Systems Administrator?

Someone else?

- Specify

None of the above

Item 45i

Item 45i is used to find out to whom the respondent may

have reported the computer-related incident(s). Ask each

answer category in Boxes 1 through 5 as a separate

question, as you were instructed for Items 45c and 45f,

marking all answers that apply.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent reported the computer-

related incident to any city, county, state, or Federal police

agency, a housing or transit police agency, or any other

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-63

type of law enforcement agency, with the exception of

private security agencies.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent reported the computer-

related incident to a company that provides access to the

Internet for a fee and provides the user with a software

package, username, password, and access phone number.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent reported the computer-

related incident to an individual who manages a Website.

Depending on the size of the site, the Website

Administrator might be responsible for any or all of the

following tasks:

• Making sure that the Web server hardware and

software are running properly;

• Designing the Website;

• Creating and updating Web pages;

• Replying to user feedback; or

• Monitoring traffic through the site.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent reported the computer-

related incident to an individual who is responsible for

maintaining a multi-user computer system, including a

local-area network (LAN).

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the respondent answers “Yes” to Box 5,

“Someone else?”, and then make sure to find out to whom

the respondent reported the incident. Always enter the

agency’s name or the person’s title on the “Specify” lines.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 when you have not marked any boxes that

correspond to answer categories 1 through 5, because the

respondent did not notify anyone.

After completing the last computer crime screen question,

continue with Check Item D.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-64

CHECK

Who besides the respondent was present when

ITEM D

the screen questions were asked? (If telephone

interview, mark box 1 only.)

Telephone interview -

SKIP

to 46a

Personal interview -

Mark all that apply.

No one besides respondent present

Respondent's spouse

HHLD member(s) 12+, not spouse

HHLD member(s) under 12

Nonhousehold member(s)

Someone was present - Can't say who

Don't know if someone else present

CHECK

If self-response interview,

SKIP

to 46a.

ITEM E

Did the person for whom this interview was

taken help the proxy respondent answer any

screen questions?

Yes

Person for whom interview taken not present

Check Item D

Mark Check Item D based upon your observations to show

whether anyone besides you and the respondent was

present or could overhear all or part of the respondent's

NCVS-1 interview. Mark all boxes that apply to the

respondent's screen interview.

Do not count the following persons:

$ Yourself

$ The respondent (self or proxy)

$ For a proxy interview - the proxy person who is

unable to answer for himself/herself

$ A Census Bureau observer

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 in Check Item D for all telephone interviews,

even if you know someone could have overheard the

respondent's answers.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 in Check Item D when no one else was

present during a personal visit interview.

Mark Boxes 3

Through 7

Mark Boxes 3 through 7 to identify the type of person

when one or more persons were present during a personal

visit interview and there was a possibility that they

overheard the respondent's answers.

Proxy Interviews If someone is present during a personal visit proxy

interview, mark the box in Check Item D which identifies

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-65

the person's relationship to the person for whom the proxy

interview was conducted.

Relationship

Unknown

If someone is present during a personal visit interview and

you do not know the person's relationship to the

respondent, either mark the box for the most likely

relationship or mark Box 7 if you cannot decide.

Mark Box 8 Mark Box 8 when you really do not know whether anyone

was present or could overhear the respondent's answers to

the screen questions.

Check Item E

Check Item E only applies to proxy interviews. If you are

conducting a self-response interview with a respondent,

skip Check Item E and continue with Item 46a (for the

household respondent) or Check Item G (for an individual

respondent).

When taking a proxy interview, mark the appropriate box

(1, 2, or 3) to indicate whether the proxy person for whom

the interview is being taken provided any information,

answered a screen question, or confirmed anything that the

proxy respondent told you. Mark Box 1 for "Yes," Box 2

for "No," and Box 3 for "Person for whom interview taken

not present."

It is acceptable to mark Box 1 "Yes" even if the proxy

person provided inaccurate information. For example, if a

mentally disabled proxy person claims that neighbors

shoot at him/her each time he/she goes outside the house,

you would mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item E.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-66

Topic 5. Completing Items 46 Through Check Item I

(Vandalism/Crimes During Vandalism/Hate Crimes/

Transcribing Number of Incidents/Employment Questions)

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S VANDALISM SCREEN QUESTIONS

46a. Now I’d like to ask about ALL acts of vandalism that may have been committed during the last 6 months

against YOUR household. Vandalism is the deliberate, intentional damage to or destruction of household

property. Examples are breaking windows, slashing tires, and painting graffiti on walls.

Since

, 20 , has anyone intentionally

damaged or destroyed property owned by you or

someone else in your household?

(EXCLUDE any damage done in conjunction with

incidents already mentioned.)

Yes

No -

SKIP

to Check Item G

on page 10

46b. What kind of property was damaged or destroyed in this/these

act(s) of vandalism? Anything else?

Continue asking "Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

Mark (X) all property that was damaged or destroyed by

vandalism during reference period.

Motor vehicle (including parts)

Bicycle (including parts)

Mailbox

House window/screen/door

Yard or garden (trees, shrubs, fence,

etc.)

Furniture, other household goods

Clothing

Animal (pet, livestock, etc.)

Other - Specify

46c. What kind of damage was done in this/these act(s)

of vandalism? Anything else?

Continue asking "Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

Mark (X) all kinds of damage by vandals that occurred

during reference period.

Broken glass: window, windshield,

glass in door, mirror

Defaced: marred, graffiti, dirtied

Burned: use of fire, heat or explosives

Drove into or ran over with vehicle

Other breaking or tearing

Injured or killed animals

Other - Specify

46d. What was the total dollar amount of the damage caused by

this/these act(s) of vandalism during the last 6 months?

(Use repair costs if the property was repaired.)

(EXCLUDE any damage done in incidents already

mentioned.)

. 00 -

SKIP

to Check

Item F1

Don't know

No cost -

SKIP

to Check Item F1

46e. Was the damage under $100 or $100 or more?

(INCLUDE total amount for all incidents of

vandalism during the last 6 months.)

Under $100

$100 or more

Don't know

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-67

CHECK

ITEM F1

Look at 46a. If unsure, ASK, otherwise, mark without

asking.

In the vandalism just mentioned, were you

(was the respondent)

attacked or threatened, or was

something stolen or an attempt made to steal

something that belonged to you

(the respondent)

another household member? (other than any

incident(s) already mentioned)

Briefly describe incident(s)

Yes -

What happened?

Describe above

No -

SKIP

to 46g

46f. How many times?

Number of times (46f)

Items 46a Through 46f

(Vandalism Screen

Questions)

Items 46a through 46f are asked only of the household

respondent and are designed to:

! Measure the kinds and amount of vandalism that

may have occurred during the 6 months prior to the

interview, AND

! Determine whether the household respondent was

attacked or threatened during the act of vandalism,

! Something was stolen or an attempt was made to

steal something that belonged to the household

respondent or another household member during the

act of vandalism.

Acts of vandalism alone are not considered NCVS crimes.

Item 46a Always read the introductory statement before asking the

question in Item 46a. This statement lets the household

respondent know that we will be asking about acts of

vandalism committed against his/her household during the

6 months prior to the interview and tells the household

respondent what to consider as an act of vandalism.

Exclude any damage done in conjunction with incidents

already mentioned in an earlier screen question. For

example, if a household respondent reported in Item 39

that her van was broken into, the side mirror was broken

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-68

during the break in, and the CD player was stolen, you

would not include the broken side mirror for the vandalism

screen questions because it was already reported with an

incident in Item 39.

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 46a, ask Item 46b next.

After marking Box 2 "No," skip to Check Item G on

page 10.

Item 46b Ask Item 46b to identify the types of property damaged or

destroyed in the vandalism reported in Item 46a. After

asking the question in Item 46b and marking the

appropriate answer boxes (1 - 9), continue asking

"Anything else?" until the household respondent says

"No." Mark all answer boxes that apply to the act(s) of

vandalism reported in Item 46a.

There may be rare instances when the respondent's answer

is not identified in Boxes 1 through 8. If you are sure the

answer does not relate to any of the property identified in

Boxes 1 through 8, mark Box 9 "Other" and enter the

property description on the "Specify" line.

Item 46c Ask Item 46c to identify what type of damage was done to

the vandalized property reported in Items 46a and 46b.

After asking the question in Item 46c and marking the

appropriate answer boxes (1 -7), continue asking

"Anything else?" until the household respondent says

"No." Mark all answer boxes that apply to the act(s) of

vandalism reported in Items 46a and 46b.

There may be rare instances when the respondent's answer

is not identified in Boxes 1 through 6. If you are sure the

answer does not relate to any of the kinds of damage

identified in Boxes 1 through 6, mark Box 7 "Other" and

describe the type of damage on the "Specify" line.

Item 46d Ask Item 46d to get an estimate of the total dollar value

for the vandalism damage reported in Items 46a through

46c. Exclude the dollar value for any damage done during

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-69

incidents reported in earlier screen items. If the damaged

property was repaired, you can use the repair cost.

Enter the estimated value of the damaged property in

whole dollars on the answer line in Item 46d, rounding up

or down as necessary and then skip to Check Item F1.

Here are a few examples for rounding up or down:

! Enter $1, if the estimate is less than $1.

! Enter $80, if the estimate is $80.49.

! Enter $81, if the estimate is $80.50.

Mark Box x "Don't know" when a respondent is unable to

give an estimate and really does not know. After marking

Box x, ask the question in Item 46e next. Mark Box 0 "No

cost" when applicable and then skip to Check Item F1.

Item 46e Whenever you mark Box x "Don't know" in Item 46d, you

will ask the question in Item 46e to determine whether the

damage was valued "under $100" or "$100 or more."

Include the total dollar amount for all acts of vandalism

during the 6 months prior to the interview. If the

respondent still gives you a "Don't know" reply, mark

Box 3 "Don't know." After completing Item 46e, complete

Check Item F1 next.

Check Item F1 Check Item F1 is asked to determine whether any NCVS

crimes were committed during the act(s) of vandalism

reported in Items 46a through 46e. If you are sure of the

answer for Check Item F1, mark Box 1 "Yes" or 2 "No"

without asking the question. If unsure of the answer, make

sure to ask the question in Check Item F1 before marking

Box 1 or 2.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if:

! The household respondent was attacked or

threatened during the act(s) of vandalism, OR

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-70

! Something was stolen or an attempt was made to

steal something that belonged to the household

respondent or another household member during the

act(s) of vandalism.

After marking Box 1, ask the household respondent

"What happened?" and enter a brief description of the

NCVS crime on the lines above Box 1. Exclude NCVS

crimes reported in an earlier screen item. After marking

Box 1 "Yes," ask the question in Item 46f next.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the household respondent was not

attacked or threatened during the act(s) of vandalism and

nothing was stolen and no attempt was made to steal

something from the household respondent or any other

household member during the act(s) of vandalism. After

marking Box 2 "No," skip to Item 46g next.

Item 46f After determining in Check Item F1 that an NCVS crime

was committed during the act(s) of vandalism, ask the

question in Item 46f to determine the number of times the

NCVS crime occurred. Enter the household respondent's

answer on the "Number of times" line in Item 46f.

Once you complete Check Item G, you must fill a separate

NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each incident marked

in Item 46f. However, do not complete any NCVS-2s for

act(s) of vandalism with no associated NCVS crimes.

After completing Item 46f, continue with Item 46g, which

is the first household respondent's hate crime screen

question.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-71

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S HATE CRIME SCREEN QUESTIONS

46g. Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry occur

when (an offender/offenders) target(s) people because

of one or more of their characteristics or religious

beliefs.

Do you have any reason to suspect the vandalism just

discussed was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or

bigotry?

Yes - Ask 46h

No.................

SKIP

to Check Item G

Don't know....

46h. An offender/Offenders can target people for a variety

of reasons, but we are only going to ask you about a few

today. Do you suspect the offender(s) targeted you

because of...

(a) Your race?....................................................................

(b) Your religion? .............................................................

example, people of Hispanic origin)? ........................

(d) Any disability (by this I mean physical, mental,

or developmental disabilities) you may have?...........

(e) Your gender? ..............................................................

(f) Your sexual orientation? ............................................

If "Yes," SAY -

(by this we mean homosexual,

bisexual, or heterosexual)

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

46i. Some offenders target people because they associate

with certain people or the (offender perceives/offenders

perceive) them as having certain characteristics or

religious beliefs.

Do you suspect you were targeted because of...

(a) Your association with people who have certain

characteristics or religious beliefs (for example, a

multiracial couple)? ....................................................

(b) The offender(s)'s perception of your characteristics

or religious beliefs (for example, the offender(s)

thought you were Jewish because you went into a

synagogue)? .................................................................

Yes-Specify

No 3

Don't know

Yes-Specify

No 3

Don't know

CHECK

ITEM F2

Are one or more boxes marked "Yes" in 46h

OR 46i?

Yes - Ask 46j

No -

SKIP

to Check Item G

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-72

46j. Do you have any evidence that this vandalism

was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or bigotry?

If "No" or "Don't know," ASK -

Did the offender(s) say something, write anything, or

leave anything behind at the crime scene that would

suggest you were targeted because of your

characteristics or religious beliefs?

Yes - ASK 46k

No.................

SKIP

to Check Item G

Don't know...

46k. The next questions ask about the evidence you have

that makes you suspect this vandalism was a hate

crime or a crime of prejudice or bigotry. As I read the

following questions, please tell me if any of the following

happened:

(a) Did the offender(s) make fun of you, make negative

comments, use slang, hurtful words, or abusive

language?.....................................................................

(b) Were any hate symbols present at the crime scene

to indicate the offender(s) targeted you for a

particular reason (for example, a swastika, graffiti

on the walls of a temple, a burning cross, or written

words)? ........................................................................

targeted you (for example, did the offender(s)

confess a motive, did the police find books,

journals, or pictures that indicated the offender(s)

(was/were) prejudiced against people with certain

characteristics or religious beliefs)? .........................

(d) Do you know the offender(s) (has/have) committed

similar hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or

bigotry in the past? ....................................................

(e) Did the vandalism occur on or near a holiday,

event, location, gathering place, or building

commonly associated with a specific group (for

example, at the Gay Pride March or at a

synagogue, Korean church, or gay bar)? .................

(f) Have other hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or

bigotry happened to you or in your area/

neighborhood where people have been targeted?....

(g) Do your feelings, instincts, or perception lead you

to suspect this vandalism was a hate crime or crime

of prejudice or bigotry, but you do not have enough

evidence to know for sure? .......................................

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-73

Items 46g Through 46k

(Household Respondent's

Hate Crime Screen

Questions)

Items 46g through 46k are asked only of the household

respondent when an act of vandalism is reported in

Item 46a. These items are designed to determine if the

reported vandalism was motivated by prejudice or bigotry

towards a specific group. Similar questions are included

in the NCVS-2 for each reported NCVS crime incident,

but Items 46g through 46k refer only to reported act(s) of

vandalism. These questions are commonly known as the

"Hate Crime" questions.

For the NCVS, we consider an act of vandalism to be hate-

related when the offender targets a sample household

member or the sample address because of the offender's

prejudice or bigotry against the household member's

characteristics or religious beliefs. The offender's

motivation must be at least partially related to his/her

dislike of or prejudice against a specific group of people

because of their:

! Race,

! Religion,

! Ethnicity/national origin,

! Disability,

! Gender, or

! Sexual orientation.

This type of offense is still considered a hate crime

regardless of whether the offender has an incorrect

perception of the victim's membership in or association

with a specific group.

Item 46g Ask Item 46g of the household respondent to find out if

any of the vandalism reported in Item 46a was motivated

at least partially by the offenders prejudice or bigotry

towards a specific group (for example, Jews, Catholics,

Hispanics, persons in wheelchairs, homosexuals, and so

forth).

Always read the lead-in statement before asking the

question in Item 46g. If the incident involved only one

offender, read the lead-in statement this way:

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-74

"Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry occur

when an offender targets people because of one or more

of their characteristics or religious beliefs."

If there were two or more offenders, read the lead-in

statement this way:

"Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry occur

when offenders target people because of one or more of

their characteristics or religious beliefs."

After reading the lead-in statement, ask the question in

Item 46g and mark the appropriate box based on the

household respondent's answer.

Marking Box 1

"Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the household respondent

suspects that the vandalism reported in Item 46a was

motivated by the offender's prejudice or hatred of specific

groups of people because of their characteristics or

religious beliefs. After marking Box 1 "Yes," you are

instructed to ask Item 46h next.

Marking Box 2

"No"

Mark Box 2 "No" when the household respondent does

NOT suspect that the vandalism reported in Item 46a was

motivated by the offender's prejudice or hatred of specific

groups of people because of their characteristics or

religious beliefs. After marking Box 2 "No," you are

instructed to skip to Check Item G.

Marking Box 3

"Don't know"

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" when the household respondent

is not really sure whether the vandalism reported in

Item 46a was motivated by the offender's prejudice or

hatred of specific groups of people because of their

characteristics or religious beliefs. After marking Box 3

"Don't know," you are instructed to skip to Check Item G.

Item 46h If the household respondent has one or more reasons to

suspect that the vandalism reported in Item 46a was a hate

crime or a crime of prejudice or bigotry, you will read the

lead-in statement and ask the series of questions in

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-75

Item 46h to identify the reasons for suspecting a hate

crime.

After reading the lead-in statement:

! Ask the first question, "Do you suspect the

offender(s) targeted you because of your race?",

! Wait for the respondent's answer,

! Record the answer by marking the appropriate box

(1 for "Yes," 2 for "No," or 3 for "Don't know").

Repeat this procedure for each question in Item 46h.

Unless you are interrupted as you ask questions (b)

through (f) in Item 46h, it is not necessary to repeat "Do

you suspect the offender(s) targeted you because of..." as

you ask questions (b) through (f).

Keep the following points in mind as you ask each

question in Item 46h:

! In question (a), "race" refers to White, Black or

African American, American Indian or Alaska

Native, Asian, or Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific

Islander. Keep in mind that "Spanish, Hispanic, or

Latino" relates to ethnic background or national

origin, not race.

! Questions (c) and (d) both contain parenthetical

phrases to further explain "ethnic background or

national origin" in (c) and "disabilities" in (d). Make

sure that you always read these parenthetical phrases

as part of the question.

! In question (e), if the household respondent doesn't

seem to understand what the term "gender" means,

you can add "by this I mean male or female."

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-76

! Unlike questions (c) and (d), only read the additional

phrase, "by this we mean gay, lesbian, bisexual or

heterosexual" AFTER the household respondent

answers "Yes" to question (f), "Do you suspect the

offender(s) targeted you because of your sexual

orientation?"

After reading the additional phrase, the household

respondent may tell you that he/she meant something

different. In that case, line through the "Yes" answer

in Box 1 and mark the "No" answer in Box 2 for

question (f). Do not read this additional phrase if the

household respondent answers "No" to question (f).

! If the household respondent says that the vandalism

was motivated by the offender's dislike for

homosexuals or transvestites, mark Box 1 "Yes" in

question (f).

Item 46i Once you complete Item 46h, you will ask the two

questions in Item 46i to determine whether the household

respondent suspects that he/she was targeted because of:

! His/her association with people who have certain

characteristics or religious beliefs about which the

offender is prejudiced (for example, the household

respondent's friends are gay or a multiracial

couple), AND/OR

! The offender's perception of the household

respondent's characteristics or religious beliefs (for

example, an offender thinks the household

respondent is Jewish because he/she visited a

synagogue or an offender thinks the household

respondent is gay because his/her friend is gay).

Ask the first question in Item 46i, wait for the household

respondent's answer, and mark the appropriate box. If you

mark Box 1 "Yes," explain briefly why the household

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-77

respondent suspects that he/she was targeted because of

his/her association with certain people.

Repeat this procedure for the second question in Item 46i.

Again, if you mark Box 1 "Yes," explain briefly why the

household respondent suspects that he/she was targeted

because of the offender's perception of the household

respondent's characteristics or religious beliefs.

Once you have finished Item 46i, complete Check Item F2.

Check Item F2 Use Check Item F2 to decide whether you should:

! Continue with Item 46j or

! Skip to Check Item G.

If you marked Box 1 "Yes" for one or more questions in

Items 46h or 46i, mark the "Yes" box in Check Item F2

and ask the question in Item 46j next. However, if Box 2

"No" or Box 3 "Don't know" is marked for ALL the

questions in Items 46h and 46i, skip to Check Item G on

page 10.

Item 46j Ask the question in Item 46j to determine if the household

respondent has any evidence that the vandalism reported in

Item 46a was motivated by prejudice or bigotry.

If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and ask the

questions in Item 46k next.

If you get a "No" or "Don't know" answer, ask the probing

question in Item 46j to ensure that there was no evidence

causing the household respondent to suspect a hate crime.

After asking the probe question, accept the household

respondent's answer and mark the appropriate box. If the

answer is still "No" or "Don't know," skip to Check

Item G.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-78

Item 46k After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 46j, you will continue

with the lead-in statement and the seven questions in

Item 46k to identify the type of evidence causing the

household respondent to suspect a hate crime or a crime of

prejudice or bigotry.

After reading the lead-in statement:

! Ask the first question, "As I read the following

questions, please tell me if any of the following

happened: Did the offender(s) make fun of you,

make negative comments, use slang, hurtful words,

or abusive language?",

! Wait for the respondent's answer,

! Record the answer by marking the appropriate box

(1 for "Yes," 2 for "No," or 3 for "Don't know").

Repeat this procedure for each question in Item 46k.

Unless you are interrupted as you ask questions (b)

through (g) in Item 46k, it is not necessary to repeat "As I

read the following questions, please tell me if any of the

following happened: " as you ask questions (b) through

(g). Once you complete Item 46k, complete Check

Item G.

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S CHECK ITEM G

CHECK

Transcribe "number of times" entry for each

ITEM G

of the following:

(a)

Screen Question, Item 36c, page 3

(b)

Screen Question, Item 37c, page 3

(c)

Screen Question, Item 39c, page 4

(d)

Screen Question, Item 40c, page 4

(e)

Screen Question, Item 41c, page 5

(f)

Screen Question, Item 42c, page 5

(g)

Screen Question, Item 43c, page 5

(h)

Screen Question, Item 44b, page 6

(i)

Screen Question, Item 45b, page 6

(j)

Vandalism Screen Question, Item 46f, page 8

No entries transcribed below - Go to

Check Item H

Number of times (36c)

Number of times (37c)

Number of times (39c)

Number of times (40c)

Number of times (41c)

Number of times (42c)

Number of times (43c)

Number of times (44b)

Number of times (45b)

Number of times (46f)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-79

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - After completing Check Item G fill a separate crime incident report for each screen

question that has an entry of 1 or more. Do this

before

marking Check Item H.

Check Item G

Use Check Item G to summarize by item number the

"Number of times" entries from the respondent's screen

interview. Page back through the respondent's screen

interview and transcribe each "Number of times" entry

made for a screen item to the appropriate line in Check

Item G. To help you locate entries quickly, scan each page

of the respondent's screen interview looking for the "tick

marks" printed to the right of each "Number of times"

entry.

No Reported Incidents If the respondent did not report any crime incidents during

the screen interview (all "Number of times" entries are

blank), mark the box at the top of Check Item G, "No

entries transcribed below," and go to Check Item H next.

One or More Reported

Incidents

After transcribing each "Number of times" entry to Check

Item G, stop completing the NCVS-1 screen interview and

complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for

each screen question that has an entry of "1" or more in

Check Item G.

Field Representative

Note

This note is a reminder for you to:

! Stop completing the NCVS-1 at this point if the

respondent reported one or more crime incidents,

AND

! Complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, for each time an incident was reported for a

screen question, as noted in Check Item G.

! Always complete any required Crime Incident

Reports BEFORE completing Check Item H.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-80

HOUSEHOLD RESPONDENT'S EMPLOYMENT QUESTIONS

CHECK

ITEM H

Is the respondent 16 years or older?

Yes - Ask 47a

No -

SKIP

to Check Item I

47a. Did you have a job or work at a business LAST WEEK?

(Do not include volunteer work or work around the

house.)

(If farm or business operator in household, ask about

unpaid work.)

Yes -

SKIP

to 48a

No - Ask 47b

ASK OR VERIFY -

47b. Did you have a job or work at a business DURING THE

LAST 6 MONTHS?

Yes - Ask 47c

No -

SKIP

to Check Item I

47c. Did that (job/work) last 2 consecutive weeks

or more?

Yes - Ask 48a

No -

SKIP

to Check Item I

Check Item H You will complete Check Item H AFTER you:

! Mark the "No entries transcribed below" box in

Check Item G, OR

! Complete the last NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report,

for the respondent.

Check Item H is used to determine whether the respondent

is old enough to qualify for the employment questions. If

the respondent is 16 years of age or older, you will mark

Box 1 "Yes" and start the employment questions with

Item 47a. If the respondent is under 16 years of age, mark

Box 2 "No" and skip to Check Item I.

Item 47a

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item H, you will ask

the question in Item 47a to determine if the respondent had

a job AT ALL during the week before the interview. This

could be a full-time or part-time job for salary or wages

working for a business, government agency, or self-

employed. Do NOT include volunteer work for which the

respondent was not paid.

For the NCVS, a job is defined as any activity that is done

for pay, wages, salary, commission, tips, or payment "in

kind," or that is done without pay on a family farm or for a

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-81

family business. If someone in the household has a farm

or a business, make sure to probe by asking the respondent

about any unpaid work last week for the family farm or

business.

Marking Box 1 "Yes" Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent had a job or worked at

a business at any time during the week prior to the

interview, even if the respondent was on vacation or

temporarily absent due to sickness or some other reason.

After marking Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to skip to

Item 48a.

Marking Box 2 "No" Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or

work at a business during the week prior to the interview.

Also, mark Box 2 "No" if a respondent receives

scholarship money while attending school (even if it is in

excess of the cost of tuition, textbooks, lab fees, and so

forth) AND does not have a job. After marking Box 2

"No," you are instructed to ask or verify the answer for

Item 47b.

Item 47b

Item 47b is asked to determine whether the respondent had

a job or worked at a business at any time during the

6 months prior to the interview. You will only ask or

verify Item 47b when the respondent did not have a job or

work at a business during the week before the interview.

Marking Box 1 "Yes" Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent had a job or worked at

a business at any time during the 6 months prior to the

interview, even if the respondent was away from work

during some of that time for a vacation or illness. After

marking Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to ask the

question in Item 47c next. A large arrow points from the

"Yes" answer in Item 47b to Item 47c. This arrow is used

as an added reminder for you to ask the question in

Item 47c when you mark the "Yes" answer in Item 47b.

Marking Box 2 "No" Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or

work at a business at any time during the 6 months prior

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-82

to the interview. After marking Box 2 "No," you are

instructed to skip to Check Item I next.

Item 47c

Once the respondent tells you in Item 47b that he/she had a

job or worked at a business during the 6 months before the

interview, then you will ask the question in Item 47c to

determine whether that job or work lasted for 2 or more

consecutive weeks.

Marking Box 1 "Yes" Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent has worked at

least 2 consecutive weeks at the job or business

mentioned in Item 47b. After marking Box 1 "Yes," you

are instructed to ask the question in Item 48a next.

Marking Box 2 "No" Mark Box 2 "No" when the job or work mentioned in

Item 47b did NOT last for at least 2 consecutive weeks.

After marking Box 2 "No," you are instructed to skip to

Check Item I.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-83

ASK OR VERIFY -

48a. Which of the following best describes your job?

PERSONAL INTERVIEW (Show flashcard)

TELEPHONE INTERVIEW -

Were you employed in

the

(Read main headings until you get a yes.

Then read answer categories) -

Mark (X) only one category.

Medical Profession - As a -

Physician

Nurse

Technician

Other - Specify

Mental Health Services Field - Are your duties -

Professional (Social worker/psychiatrist)

Custodial care

Other - Specify

Teaching Profession - Were you employed in a -

Preschool

Elementary

Junior high or middle school

High school

College or university

Technical or industrial school

Special education facility

Other - Specify

Law Enforcement or Security Field - Were you

employed as a -

Law enforcement officer

Prison or jail guard

Security guard

Other - Specify

Retail Sales - Were you employed as a -

Convenience or liquor store clerk

Gas station attendant

Bartender

Other - Specify

Transportation Field - Were you employed as a -

Bus driver

Taxi cab driver

Other - Specify

Something else -

Specify

ASK OR VERIFY -

48b. Is your job with

(Read answer categories) -

A private company, business, or individual for wages?

The Federal government?

A State, county, or local government?

Yourself (Self-employed) in your own business,

professional practice, or farm?

If box 12 is marked in 48a, mark without asking.

48c. Are you employed by a college or university?

Yes

48d. While working at your job, do you work mostly in

(Read answer categories) -

A city?

Suburban area?

Rural area?

Combination of any of these?

Item 48a

Item 48a is used to identify whether the respondent's job is

in one of the job classifications which may increase or

decrease his/her likelihood of becoming a victim of crime.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-84

Item 48a allows you to verify a known answer without

asking the question first.

Make sure to only mark ONE answer box. If the

respondent worked at more than one type of job during the

past 6 months, mark the box for the category at which the

respondent worked the MOST hours. If the respondent

worked at more than one type of job during the past

6 months AND spent the same amount of time at each job,

mark the box for the first category mentioned.

Personal Visit

Interviews

If you are conducting a personal visit interview:

! Open your Information Card Booklet to page 9 and

show the "Employment" flashcard to the respondent.

! Ask the question in Item 48a and then ask the

respondent to identify on the flashcard the job

category that best describes his/her job. Not all job

categories will be identified on the flashcard or in

Item 48a. If the respondent cannot find a job

category that describes his/her job, mark Box 27

"Something else" and enter the respondent's job title

on the "Specify" line.

Telephone Interviews If you are conducting a telephone interview:

! Ask the question in Item 48a followed by, "Were

you employed in the..."

! Then read each of the main headings until the

respondent answers "Yes." By main headings, we

mean the bolded text above each group of job

categories; for example, "Medical Profession,"

"Mental Health Services Field," and so forth.

! Once you get a "Yes" answer, then read the

appropriate lead-in statement and each job category

until you get another "Yes" answer. For example, if

you get a "Yes" answer after reading "Mental Health

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-85

Services Field," then read: "Are your duties

professional (social worker/psychiatrist), custodial

care, or other?" Any time you mark an "Other" job

category or Box 27 "Something else," make sure to

enter an accurate job title on the "Specify" line.

Item 48b

Item 48b is used to determine whether the respondent's job

or work is with:

! A private company, business, or individual for wages

! The Federal government

! A State, county, or local government

! The respondent's own business, professional

practice, or farm (self-employed).

Item 48b allows you to verify a known answer with the

respondent without asking the question.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when a respondent worked for a PRIVATE

employer for wages, salary, commission, tips, piece-rates,

or pay in kind. Also mark Box 1 for respondents who

worked for pay for churches, unions, and other private

nonprofit organizations.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when a respondent:

! Worked for any branch of the Federal government.

! Was elected to a paid Federal office.

! Was a member of the Armed Forces.

! Was employed by an international organization (for

example, the United Nations) or a foreign

government.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-86

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when a respondent worked in any branch of a

state, county, or local government. This also includes

respondents who were elected to paid state, county, or

local offices.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when a respondent was self-employed for

profit or fees in his/her OWN business, farm, shop, office,

practice, and so forth.

Item 48c

Item 48c is used to determine whether a respondent is

employed by a college or university.

Mark Without Asking If you marked Box 12 "College or university" in Item 48a

indicating that the respondent was a teacher at a college or

university, mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 48c without asking

the question.

Ask the Question If you marked a box in Item 48a other than Box 12, always

ask the question in Item 48c BEFORE marking the

answer.

Item 48d

Item 48d is asked to find out if a respondent works in a

city, suburban area, rural area, or a combination of any of

these areas. If the respondent has been a victim of crime

while on the job, we can use these data to determine if

specific areas are more prone to crime.

Read the lead-in statement and each answer category as

part of the question. Most respondents will know the

correct response, so let the respondent decide which type

of area. When a respondent worked for more than one

employer, mark the box for the area in which he/she

worked the greater number of hours. If a respondent

works off shore such as on an aircraft carrier, the answer

to Item 48d should be based on the ship's home harbor.

Avoid marking Box 4 "Combination of any of these?"

unless a respondent insists that the area he/she worked

MOST of the time was a combination of city, suburban,

and rural.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 2

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-87

CHECK

Is this the last household member to be

ITEM I

interviewed?

Yes - Ask or verify Control Card items.

Then END interview.

No - Ask or verify Control Card items. See note

below before interviewing next household

member.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If the next household member to be interviewed is under 18, tell the household respondent

that you will be asking the

same

questions you just asked him/her.

Check Item I

Check Item I is designed to help you decide what actions

need to be taken if:

! You are interviewing the last household member OR

! You have more eligible household members left to

interview.

Marking the "Yes" Box Mark the "Yes" box if you are interviewing the LAST

eligible household member to be interviewed. If you mark

the "Yes" box and the interview is for the household

respondent, you will see an additional instruction to ask or

verify Control Card items. You will not see this

instruction when you mark the "Yes" box in Check Item I

for an individual respondent (any eligible respondent who

is not the household respondent). Make sure that you have

completed or updated Control Card Items 25b through 28

and Items 30b and 30c for the current enumeration period.

After you have updated the Control Card items, end the

interview.

Marking the "No" Box Mark the "No" box if one or more eligible household

members still need to be interviewed and ask to speak to

the next available household member who is 12 years of

age or older. Make sure to follow the instruction in the

Field Representative note below Check Item I which reads,

"If the next household member to be interviewed is

under 18, tell the household respondent/current

respondent that you will be asking the same questions

you just asked him/her." If necessary, arrange callback

appointments for any respondents who are not available at

that time.

Part B, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

B2-88

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-1

Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 General Instructions B3-3

2 Completing Items 1 Through 23 (Cover

Page/Location of Incident/Illegal Entry/

Presence During Incident/Use of Weapon) B3-9

3 Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/

Threats) B3-64

4 Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/

Medical Care/Protecting Self or Property/

Results of Actions/Presence of Others/

Injuries to Others Present) B3-83

5 Completing Check Item G Through

Item 87 (Use of Physical Force/

Characteristics of the Offender(s)) B3-102

6 Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/

Items Stolen/Value of Stolen Property/

Repair or Replacement of Stolen Property/

Cost of Repair or Replacement)

B3-130

7 Completing Items 115 Through 134 (Police

Notification/Reasons for Reporting or Not

Reporting Incident to Police/Police

Response to Notification/Contact With

Authorities) B3-167

8 Completing Items 135 Through 153

(Activity During Incident/Employment

Status at Time of Incident/Type of Industry

and Occupation/Lost Work Time and Pay

Due to Injury/Means of Transportation) B3-190

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-2

9 Completing Check Item U Through Check

Item Z (Series of Crimes/Hate

Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incident) B3-217

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-3

Topic 1. General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, is a detailed

questionnaire used to gather a variety of information about

each reported incidence of crime that occurred during the

respondent's 6-month reference period. It is important to

record accurate and complete information on each Crime

Incident Report so that we have a clear picture of what

happened during the incident. Always make sure that you

are using the latest version of the NCVS-2 by checking the

paper color and the print date shown below the form

number on the cover page.

When to Complete

(NCVS-2)

You will complete one or more NCVS-2's for a respondent

based on the "Number of times" entries that you make for

each screen question in Check Item G on the NCVS-1.

Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each "time" an incident

was reported during the screen interview. Also complete a

separate NCVS-2 for any incidents that might be

discovered while completing a Crime Incident Report, even

if they were not reported in the screen questions.

Always complete all required NCVS-2s for a respondent as

soon as you finish completing Check Item G on the

NCVS-1 for a respondent and BEFORE you:

! Continue with Check Item H on the NCVS-1 or

! Conduct screen interviews for any remaining eligible

household members.

Once you start to complete a Crime Incident Report, you

must finish it, with the exception of incidents that happened

outside of the respondent's reference period. For all other

situations, it is important to finish the NCVS-2 once you

begin. This is important because you may discover that an

additional NCVS crime has occurred in conjunction with

the original crime.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-4

How Many to Complete

(NCVS-2)

Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each time a crime

incident is reported in a screen question on the NCVS-1.

Also complete an NCVS-2 for any additional incidents that

the respondent mentions as you complete the NCVS-2 with

him/her.

Example:

During the screen interview, a respondent reports

that her home was broken into on two separate

occasions, and on another occasion a co-worker

threatened to beat her up if she did not stop seeing

the co-worker's former boyfriend. While completing

the first NCVS-2 for the break in, the respondent

mentions that on another occasion within the last

6 months she had money and jewelry stolen during a

house party. Because these incidents happened

during the respondent's reference period, you would

complete four separate Crime Incident Reports

(NCVS-2s) for this respondent.

If a respondent remembers an incident that occurred during

his/her reference period AFTER completing the

respondent's screen interview, you must correct the

NCVS-1 by:

! Adding the incident to the appropriate screen question

for the respondent (describing the incident and

correcting the number of times entry).

! Correcting the appropriate entries in Check Item G for

the respondent.

When more than one household member was "personally

victimized" during the same incident, complete a separate

NCVS-2 with each eligible household member who was

personally victimized during his/her reference period. By

personally victimized, we mean there was some type of

physical contact between the offender and the household

member, a threat of physical harm made in person between

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-5

the offender and the respondent, or an attempt to physically

harm a household member.

Example:

During a screen interview, a respondent reported

that he and his wife were robbed at gun point while

walking in a shopping center parking lot. During the

robbery, the offender forced both household

members to walk to a wooded area where he robbed

them and tied them to a tree. Even though this is

one incident, you will complete two NCVS-2s since

both eligible household members were personally

victimized during the incident. Fill one NCVS-2

with the husband and another NCVS-2 with his wife.

If his wife does not mention that she was personally

victimized during her interview, you need to remind

her about the incident.

When you are done interviewing an NCVS household, the

number of completed NCVS-2s should match the total of

all "Number of times" entries in Check Item G for all

interviewed household members on the NCVS-1.

Special Situations Under certain circumstances, the number of completed

NCVS-2s will not match the number of times entries

originally reported in Check Item G. This can happen

when the procedures allow you to:

! Stop completing an NCVS-2 OR

! Complete an NCVS-2 and then out-of-scope the

incident.

Here are some examples:

! Series of crimes - A respondent reports a series of

crimes requiring you to complete only one NCVS-2

for the most recent incident in the series. To be

considered a series of crimes, there must be at least

SIX occurrences or incidents that are very similar in

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-6

detail AND the respondent must NOT be able to

recall individual details about each occurrence or

incident. Items on the NCVS-2 cover page will help

you verify the existence of a series of crimes. Do not

record details for all incidents in the series on the

NCVS-2. Instead, record only the details for the most

recent incident.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more

details about a series of crimes.)

! Incident happened outside of reference period - A

respondent reports an incident that happened outside

of his/her 6-month reference period. Item 3 on the

NCVS-2 cover page will help you verify this fact.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more details about

the NCVS reference period.)

! Household crime reported by more than one

household member - A respondent reported an

incident involving a household crime (for example,

burglary or motor vehicle theft) or a personal theft

without contact that another household member has

already reported. Incidents that do NOT involve any

physical contact, face-to-face threat of physical harm,

or an attempt to physically harm a household member

only need to be reported once during the interview

period. If you discover this situation after starting the

NCVS-2, finish completing it and then out-of-scope

the incident, AFTER verifying that the two incidents

are identical.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more information

about out-of-scope incidents.)

! Identical crime incidents reported in more than

one screen question - A respondent reports the same

crime incident in more than one screen question. If

you discover this situation after starting the NCVS-2,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-7

finish completing it and then out-of-scope the

incident.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more information

about out-of-scope incidents.)

If you discover any of these situations AFTER completing

a respondent's screen interview, make sure to correct the

"Number of times" entries in the screen question and in

Check Item G on the NCVS-1, so that the total number of

times matches the number of NCVS-2s completed and does

NOT include out-of-scope incidents for the respondent. If

necessary, also correct the "Yes/No" entries for the screen

question. Make sure that you correct these NCVS-1 entries

for each incident that you out of scope. Do not erase

incorrect entries you may make, instead line through them

and then make the correct entries.

General Instructions for

Completing an NCVS-2

Always transcribe accurately and legibly the case's

identification information onto the top of the NCVS-2

cover page BEFORE completing the Crime Incident

Report. By entering correctly and legibly the case's sample,

control number, and household number on the NCVS-2,

you are ensuring that any NCVS-2s completed for a sample

address can be linked together with the other completed

forms for the sample address.

Sample

Control number

No.

PSU Segment CK Serial

To ensure that you fill ALL required NCVS-2s for a

respondent:

! Start with incidents reported in the lowest item

number screen question and work your way to the

highest item number screen question.

! If more than one incident is reported for a screen

question, start with the earliest or first incident that

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-8

occurred during the person's reference period and

work your way to the most recent incident in order of

occurrence within the reference period.

Make sure to follow all skip patterns and Field

Representative instructions accurately to ensure a smooth

flowing and complete interview.

When assembling completed questionnaires for a

household, follow these steps:

Step

1 The first questionnaire at the top of the stack should

be the completed NCVS-1. If you complete any

NCVS-1As, staple them to the NCVS-1. If you

completed any questionnaires for NCVS supplements,

such as School Crime and Police Public Contact,

insert them into the NCVS-1.

2 Below the NCVS-1, place any NCVS-2s completed

for the household.

3 Rubber band all completed questionnaires for the

household together in one bundle.

By organizing your work this way, you can help prevent

forms from getting lost.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-9

Topic 2. Completing Items 1 Through 23 (Cover Page/Location of

Incident/Illegal Entry/Use of Weapon)

1a.

LINE NUMBER OF RESPONDENT

Line number (ex., 01)

1b.

SCREEN QUESTION NUMBER

Screen question number (ex., 39)

1c.

INCIDENT NUMBER

Incident number (ex., 01)

Filling Items 1a Through 1c

Once you have transcribed the case's sample, control

number, and household number in the appropriate space at

the top right of the NCVS-2 cover page, you are ready to

complete Items 1a, 1b, and 1c.

Item 1a (Line Number of

Respondent)

Fill Item 1a with the 2-digit line number to identify the

household member who reported the incident in his/her

screen interview. Item 19 of the household member's

screen interview (NCVS-1) shows the person's line number

as assigned on the household's Control Card.

For a proxy interview, make sure to enter the 2-digit line

number for the household member who is unable to answer

for himself/herself (proxy person), NOT the line number

for the proxy respondent who is answering for the proxy

person.

Item 1b (Screen

Question Number)

Fill Item 1b with the 2-digit item number to identify the

screen question where the household member reported the

incident. Refer to the household member's screen interview

to locate the item number for the incident. It is not

necessary to enter a letter suffix (a, b, or c) when

identifying the screen question item number in Item 1b.

Example:

Line number 1 reports in Items 41a through 41c

that someone grabbed and punched him during an

argument. When you complete Item 1b on the

NCVS-2 for this incident, you will enter only the

2-digit item number, "41."

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-10

Item 1c (Incident

Number)

When you complete an NCVS-2 for an incident and it is the

only incident reported for the screen question identified in

Item 1b, enter "01" in Item 1c. However, if the household

member reported two or more incidents in one screen

question, then you need to assign a unique number to each

incident starting with "01" for the earliest or the first

incident that happened during the respondent's reference

period, "02" for the second earliest incident that happened

during the reference period, and so forth.

Example:

During the screen interview, line number 1 reported

two incidents in Item 42. On one occasion in June,

a neighbor threatened to slap her if she did not stop

yelling at his child. On another occasion in August,

the same neighbor threatened to hit her with a

baseball bat if she did not stop yelling at his child.

When completing Item 1c on the NCVS-2, the

incident in June would be incident number "01"

and the incident in August would be incident

number "02."

However, if you recorded two incidents in one screen

question and one incident in another screen question, the

one incident in the other screen question would be entered

in Item 1c as "01," NOT "03."

CHECK

ITEM A

Has the respondent lived at this

address for more than 6 months?

(If not sure, refer to 33a on the

NCVS-1 or ASK.)

Yes (more than 6 months) -

SKIP

to 3

No (6 months or less) - ASK 2

Check Item A (More Than

6 Months at Current

Address)

Check Item A will help you determine whether or not to ask

the question in Item 2. If you are unsure about which box

to mark in Check Item A:

! Look at the answer marked in Item 33a on the

NCVS-1 or

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-11

• Ask the respondent whether he/she has lived at the

sample address more than 6 months.

If you mark the "Yes" box because the household member

has lived at the sample address more than 6 months, you

will skip to Item 3.

If you mark the "No" box because the household member

has lived at the sample address 6 months or less, then you

will continue with Item 2.

Also mark the "No" box in Check Item A when you are

unable to determine whether the household member has

lived at the sample address more than 6 months or less than

6 months.

If you are conducting a proxy interview, the word

"respondent" in Check Item A refers to the person who is

unable to answer for himself/herself, not the proxy

respondent who is answering the questions.

2. You said that during the last 6 months -

(Refer to appropriate screen question for

description of crime.)

Did (this/the first)

incident happen while you were living here

or before you moved to this address?

While living at this address

Before moving to this address

Item 2 (While Living at

Current Address)

If the household member has lived at the sample address for

6 months or less, then you will ask the question in Item 2 to

determine if the reported incident occurred while the

household member:

! Lived at the sample address or

! Lived at a previous address.

Follow these steps when asking the question in Item 2:

! Use the incident description that you entered in the

NCVS-1 screen question to decide how to word the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-12

lead-in statement and how many times the incident

happened during the reference period.

Example 1:

During the screen interview, the respondent

reported in Item 39 that someone stole the battery

from her car one time. Read the lead-in statement

this way: "You said that during the last 6 months

someone stole the battery from your car." For a

proxy interview, read: "You said that during the

last 6 months someone stole the battery from

Jennifer Bailey's (proxy person's) car."

Example 2:

During the screen interview, the respondent

reported in Item 41 that a neighbor threatened to hit

her with a frying pan if she walked her dog in the

neighbor's yard. The neighbor made this threat two

times during the reference period. Read the lead-in

statement this way: "You said that during the last

6 months your neighbor threatened to hit you

with a frying pan twice." For a proxy interview,

read: "You said that during the last 6 months

your neighbor threatened to hit Jennifer Bailey

(proxy person) with a frying pan twice."

! When the incident reported in a screen question

happened ONLY ONE TIME during the reference

period, ask the question in Item 2 this way:

"Did this incident happen while you were living

here or before you moved to this address?"

For a proxy interview, ask Item 2 this way:

"Did this incident happen while Jennifer Bailey

(proxy person) was living here or before she moved

to this address?"

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-13

! When the incident reported in a screen question

happened MORE THAN ONE TIME, you must

complete a separate NCVS-2 for each time it

happened during the reference period. Start with the

earliest incident in the reference period and work

towards the most recent. Read the question in Item 2

based on the incident number entered in Item 1c.

Example:

The first threat to hit the respondent with a frying

pan was made in March and the second threat was

made in April. The March incident will be incident

"01" when you complete Item 1c and the April

incident will be incident "02." For incident "01,"

read the question in Item 2 this way: "Did the first

incident happen while you were living here or

before you moved to this address?" When you

complete the NCVS-2 for incident "02," read the

question in Item 2 this way: "Did the second

incident happen while you were living here or

before you moved to this address?"

Mark Box 1 "While living at this address" or Box 2 "Before

moving to this address" based on the respondent's answer.

3. (You said that during the last 6 months -

(Refer to appropriate screen question for

description of crime.)

) In what month did

(this/the first) incident happen?

(Show

calendar if necessary. Encourage respondent to

give exact month.)

## ####

Month Year

Item 3 (Month Incident

Happened)

Item 3 is used to determine the month and year in which the

incident occurred. Encourage respondents to give an exact

month and, when necessary during a personal visit

interview, show them the calendars on pages 12 and 13 in

the Field Representative's Flashcard Booklet, NCVS-554.

As you show a respondent the calendars, point out the

months covering the respondent's reference period. For

telephone interviews, probe with holidays or other special

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-14

events to help the respondent identify an exact month of

occurrence.

Follow these steps when asking Item 3:

! Use the incident description that you entered in the

NCVS-1 screen question to decide how to word the

lead-in statement and how many times the incident

happened during the reference period.

Example 1:

During the screen interview, the respondent reported

in Item 39 that someone stole gasoline from his car

one time. Read the lead-in statement this way:

"You said that during the last 6 months someone

stole gasoline from your car." For a proxy

interview, read: "You said that during the last

6 months someone stole gasoline from Jennifer

Bailey's (proxy person's) car."

Example 2:

During the screen interview, the respondent reported

in Item 41 that she was raped two times during the

reference period. Read the lead-in statement this

way: "You said that during the last 6 months you

were raped twice." For a proxy interview, read:

"You said that during the last 6 months Jennifer

Bailey (proxy person) was raped twice."

! When the incident reported in a screen question

happened ONLY ONE TIME during the reference

period, ask the question in Item 3 this way:

"In what month did this incident happen?"

! When the incident reported in a screen question

happened MORE THAN ONE TIME, you must

complete a separate NCVS-2 for each time it

happened during the reference period. Ask the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-15

question in Item 3 based on the incident number

entered in Item 1c.

If you are completing the NCVS-2 for the first

incident reported for a screen question, enter "01" in

Item 1c and read the question in Item 3 this way:

"In what month did the first incident happen?"

If you are completing the NCVS-2 for the second or

third incident reported for a screen question, enter

"02" or "03" in Item 1c and read the question in

Item 3 this way when completing each NCVS-2:

" In what month did the second incident happen?"

"In what month did the third incident happen?"

Enter the respondent's answer for Item 3 using 2-digits for

the month and 4-digits for the year (For example, enter

March 2003 as "03" and "2003.").

Date Is Outside of

Reference Period

If the respondent's answer to Item 3 is a date outside of

his/her reference period, remind the respondent of the

starting and ending dates for his/her reference period.

When the respondent still gives you a date outside of

his/her reference period and the incident happened only one

time, stop completing the NCVS-2 and out-of-scope the

incident. Instructions for how to out-of-scope an incident

are shown in Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, Out-of-Scope

Incidents.

If the incident happened more than once, only complete

NCVS-2s for those incidents that happened within the

respondent's reference period.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-16

Example:

A respondent reported that she had been raped twice

during the last 6 months. When you get to Item 3,

you discover that the first rape occurred before the

start of her reference period, but the second rape did

happen during her reference period. Leave the "01"

in Item 1c, but enter the date for the second rape in

Item 3, since it is the first incident that happened

within the reference period. Out-of-scope the first

rape by making the appropriate entries on the

NCVS-1.

(See Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed

instructions on how to mark forms for out-of-

scope incidents.)

If known, mark without asking. If not sure, ASK --

Altogether, how many times did this type of

incident happen during the last 6 months?

Number of incidents

Item 4 (Number of

Incidents)

Item 4 is used to record, for the screen question entered in

Item 1b, the total number of times that the same type of

incident happened during the reference period. If you are

already sure what the total number is, enter the number of

incidents without asking the question in Item 4.

Always record the exact number of incidents and only

include incidents in the total that happened during the

respondent's reference period. Do not enter a range of

numbers (for example, 1-4). Whenever a respondent seems

unsure, probe to arrive at an exact number or at least his/her

best estimate. Do not rush the respondent and allow

sufficient time for the respondent to recall information

about the incidents.

Use neutral probes to help arrive at an exact number or the

respondent's best estimate, such as "Thinking back, can you

recall what you were doing or what was happening in your

life at the time of the incidents?" If probing does not help

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-17

and the respondent still cannot provide even an estimate,

print "DK" to the right of the answer space.

If you enter a number of incidents in Item 4 between "1 and

5," you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for each

incident. Failure to do so will result in either the

respondent classifying as a Type Z noninterview person or

the household classifying as a Type A noninterview.

CHECK

ITEM B

How many incidents?

(Refer to 4.)

1 - 5 incidents (not a "series") -

SKIP

TO 6

6 or more incidents - Fill Check Item C

Check Item B (How Many

Incidents)

Check Item B is the first check item on the NCVS-2 to

determine whether the reported incidents qualify as a series

of crimes.

Mark Box 1 if the number of incidents entered in Item 4 is

1 through 5. This automatically disqualifies the incidents

as a series of crimes and you will skip to Item 6 after

marking Box 1.

Mark Box 2 if the number of incidents entered in Item 4 is

6 or more. This indicates that the incidents may qualify as

a series of crimes. Continue with Check Item C for the

next criteria.

CHECK

ITEM C

Are these incidents similar to each other

in detail, or are they for different types of

crimes? (If not sure, ASK.)

Similar - Fill Check Item D

Different (not a "series") -

SKIP

to 6

Check Item C (Similar or

Different Incidents)

Check Item C is used to determine if the incidents are very

similar to each other or the incidents involve different types

of crimes. The incidents entered in Item 4 must be very

similar to each other to qualify as a series of crimes. If you

are not sure which box to mark, ask the respondent the

question in Check Item C.

Mark Box 1 if ALL the incidents entered in Item 4 are very

similar to each other in detail and then fill Check Item D for

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-18

the next criteria. For example, a respondent reported seven

separate incidents that occurred during the reference period

in which money was stolen from her desk at work. In each

of these incidents, money was stolen from her desk at work

and she was not victimized in any other way that might

classify as a different type of NCVS crime. Therefore, you

would mark Box 1 in Check Item C.

Mark Box 2 when there are facts for some of the incidents

entered in Item 4 that differentiate them from one another.

After marking Box 2, you will skip to Item 6 because these

incidents do not qualify as a series of crimes. For example,

a respondent reported seven separate incidents all of which

took place in the same parking garage during the reference

period. For two of the incidents, the offender threatened to

sexually assault her. For the remaining five incidents,

someone broke into her car and stole unattached items,

such as a coat, music CDs, and so forth. In this example,

we do NOT have at least 6 very similar incidents, so you

would mark Box 2 in Check Item C.

CHECK

ITEM D

Can you (respondent) recall enough

details of each incident to distinguish

them from each other? (If not sure, ASK.)

Yes (not a "series") -

SKIP

to 6

No (is a "series") - Reduce entry in

screen question if necessary - Read 5

Check Item D (Series of

Incidents)

Check Item D is used to determine whether the incidents

meet the final criteria for a series of crimes. If you are not

sure whether the respondent can recall enough facts about

each incident to distinguish them from each other, ask the

question of the respondent before marking an answer box.

Mark Box 1 if the respondent can remember enough facts

to distinguish the incidents from one another, so that you

can complete most of the required questions on the

NCVS-2 for each incident. By marking Box 1, you are

confirming that the incidents are NOT a series of

crimes and you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for each

incident entered in Item 4.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-19

Mark Box 2 if the respondent cannot remember enough

facts to distinguish the incidents from one another, so that it

would not be possible to complete a separate NCVS-2 for

each incident. By marking Box 2, you are confirming that

the incidents entered in Item 4 qualify as a "series of

crimes."

After marking Box 2 in Check Item D, make sure to:

! Correct the number of times entries on the NCVS-1

so that the series of crimes is shown as ONE time in

the reported screen question and in Check Item G.

! Leave the number of incidents in Item 4 of the

NCVS-2 as originally entered. Do NOT reduce the

number in Item 4 after marking Box 2 in Check

Item D.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more

information about a series of crimes.)

5. The following questions refer only to the

most recent incident.

(ASK item 6.)

6. About what time did (this/the most recent)

incident happen?

During day

After 6 a.m. - 12 noon

After 12 noon - 3 p.m.

After 3 p.m. - 6 p.m.

Don't know what time of day

At night

After 6 p.m. - 9 p.m.

After 9 p.m. - 12 midnight

After 12 midnight - 6 a.m.

Don't know what time of night

Don't know whether day or night

Item 5 (Most Recent

Incident)

When you identify a series of crimes by marking Box 2 in

Check Item D, you must read the statement in Item 5 next.

By reading this statement, you are letting the respondent

know that the questions you will ask next relate ONLY to

the most recent incident that happened in the series of

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-20

crimes. Once you read the statement in Item 5, ask Item 6

next.

Item 6 (Time of Day/Night)

Item 6 is used to determine what time of day or night the

incident happened. If a "1" is entered in Item 4, read the

question in Item 6 this way: "About what time did this

incident happen?" If a "2" is entered in Item 4, read the

question in Item 6 this way: "About what time did the

second incident happen?" However, if you are completing

an NCVS-2 for a series of crimes (Box 2 marked in Check

Item D), read the question in Item 6 this way: "About what

time did the most recent incident happen?"

Specific Time Given If the respondent answers with a specific time, such as

10 p.m., then mark the appropriate answer box for the time

given (For example, when the answer is 10 p.m., mark

Box 6 "After 9 p.m. - 12 midnight.") . Make sure to verify

whether the specific time given is "a.m." or "p.m."

Range of Hours Given When a respondent answers with a range of hours, take

these steps:

Step

1 See if the hours given fit into one answer category.

For example, when a respondent answers with

"between 4 and 6 p.m.," mark Box 3 "After 3 p.m. -

6 p.m.".

2 If the range of hours does not fit into one answer

category, see if the hours given are all "during the

day" or all "during the night." For example, when a

respondent answers with "sometime between 12 noon

and 4 p.m.," mark Box 4 "Don't know what time of

day." If a respondent answers with "between 10 p.m.

and midnight," mark Box 8 "Don't know what time of

night."

3 If the range of hours overlaps day and night answer

categories, mark Box 9 "Don't know whether day or

night." For example, when a respondent answers with

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-21

"Sometime between 5 p.m. and 10 p.m.," mark Box 9

"Don't know whether day or night."

Respondent Does Not

Know What Time

When a respondent really does not know an exact hour or

range of hours when the incident happened and he/she tells

you that:

! It happened sometime during the day, mark Box 4

"Don't know what time of day."

! It happened sometime during the night, mark Box 8

"Don't know what time of night."

! He/she really does not know whether it happened

during the day or during the night, mark Box 9 "Don't

know whether day or night."

7. In what city, town, or village did

this incident occur?

Outside U.S. -

SKIP

to 10

Not inside a city/town/village - Ask 8a

SAME city/town/village as present residence -

SKIP

to 9

DIFFERENT city/town/village from

present residence - Specify

Ask 8a

Don't know - Ask 8a

8a. In what county and state did it occur?

County

State

8b. Is this the same county and state

as your present residence?

Yes

Items 7 Through 8b

(City/County/ State of

Occurrence)

Since these items are designed to help establish where the

crime occurred, encourage the respondent to be as precise

as possible. In some cases, you may be able to help the

respondent to provide a more precise answer by using your

knowledge of the area.

Item 7 (City/Town/

Village of Occurrence)

After asking the question in Item 7, "In what city, town, or

village did this incident occur?", you will mark:

! Box 1 "Outside U.S." when the incident happened

outside of the 50 states and the District of Columbia.

For the purposes of the NCVS, consider Puerto Rico,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-22

the Virgin Islands, and the other U.S. territories as

being outside of the United States. After marking

Box 1, skip to Item 10.

! Box 2 "Not inside a city/town/village" when the

incident did not happen inside the limits of a city,

town, or village. After marking Box 2, ask the

question in Item 8a next.

! Box 3 "SAME city/town/village as present

residence" when the incident happened in the same

city, town, or village as the sample address. After

marking Box 3, skip to Item 9.

! Box 4 "DIFFERENT city/town/village from

present residence" when the incident happened in a

different city, town, or village from the sample

address. Make sure to enter the name of the city,

town, or village where the incident occurred on the

"Specify" line and then ask the question in Item 8a.

! Box 5 "Don't know" when the respondent does not

know where the incident happened. After marking

Box 5, ask the question in Item 8a.

Item 8a (County And

State of Occurrence)

Item 8a is used to identify the county and state in which the

incident occurred. After asking the question in Item 8a,

print the county and state names provided by the respondent

legibly on the lines provided. It is acceptable to use the

standard 2-letter abbreviation for the state name. Leave the

boxes above the county and state lines blank.

Item 8b (Same County

And State)

Item 8b is used to find out whether or not the incident

happened in the same county and state as the county and

state where the sample address is located. Even if you

know the answer, ask the question of the respondent before

marking Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-23

9. Did this incident occur on an American

Indian Reservation or on American Indian

Lands?

Yes

Item 9 (Occurred on an

American Indian

Reservation or on

American Indian Lands)

Item 9 is used to determine whether the incident happened

on an American Indian Reservation or on American Indian

Lands. In most cases, a respondent will probably answer

Item 9 without hesitation. However, if a respondent is

unsure of how to answer, you need to understand what we

mean by American Indian Reservation and American

Indian Lands so you can help the respondent.

What is an American

Indian Reservation?

American Indian Reservations are territories reserved as

permanent tribal homelands with boundaries established by

treaty, statute, or executive or court order. The Federal

Government and some state governments have established

reservations as territory over which American Indians have

governmental jurisdiction. These entities are designated as

colonies, communities, pueblos, rancherias, reservations,

and reserves.

What are American

Indian Lands?

American Indian Lands are comprised of tribal subdivisions

and trust lands.

A tribal subdivision is an administrative subdivision of a

reservation. Tribal subdivisions may extend beyond the

boundary of their reservations, and are internal units of self

government or administration that serve social, cultural, or

economic purposes for the American Indians living on and

adjacent to the reservation.

Trust Lands are held in trust by the Federal Government

for either a tribe (tribal trust land) or an individual member

of a tribe (individual trust land). Such land is always

associated with a specific federally recognized reservation

or tribe, but may be located on or off the reservation.

If you feel that probing is necessary after asking the

question in Item 9, the following probe may help the

respondent to give you an accurate answer:

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-24

"Did the incident happen in an Indian colony,

community, pueblo, rancheria, reservation, or reserve?"

Item 10 (Where Incident

Took Place)

Item 10 is used to identify the type of place at which the

incident took place. It is very important that you mark the

most appropriate box so that you follow the correct skip

pattern for the incident. If you mark the wrong box in

Item 10, the appropriate questions will not get asked to

show what really happened during the incident.

When a respondent's answer in Item 10 is not clear and you

are unsure which box to mark, probe for more details to

identify the correct box to mark. Only mark ONE box to

answer Item 10 and always mark the most appropriate box

for the incident.

Example:

A respondent's answer for Item 10 is, "At work."

That response is too general for you to know which

answer box to mark, so you need to find out where

the respondent works. Also, if the respondent is a

school teacher, the incident may have happened

inside the school building (Box 18) or on the

school property (Box 19). Probe for the exact

location.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-25

10. Where did this incident

happen?

Mark (X) only one box.

IN RESPONDENT'S HOME OR LODGING

In own dwelling, own attached garage, or

enclosed porch (Include illegal entry or attempted

illegal entry of same).............................................................

In detached building on own property, such as

detached garage, storage shed, etc. (Include illegal

entry or attempted illegal entry of same)............................. Ask

In vacation home/second home (Include illegal 11

entry or attempted illegal entry of same).............................

In hotel or motel room respondent was staying

in (Include illegal entry or attempted illegal entry

of same).................................................................................

NEAR OWN HOME

Own yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport, unenclosed

porch (does not include apartment yards)............................

Apartment hall, storage area, laundry room (does

SKIP

not include apartment parking lot/garage).......................... to 18

On street immediately adjacent to own home........................

AT, IN, OR NEAR A FRIEND'S/RELATIVE'S/

NEIGHBOR'S HOME

At or in home or other building on their property..................

Yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport (does not

include apartment yards).......................................................

SKIP

Apartment hall, storage area, laundry room (does to 18

not include apartment parking lot/garage)...........................

On street immediately adjacent to their home.........................

COMMERCIAL PLACES

Inside restaurant, bar, nightclub..............................................

Inside bank..............................................................................

SKIP

Inside gas station..................................................................... to 17c

Inside other commercial building, such as a store...................

Inside office.............................................................................

Inside factory or warehouse.....................................................

PARKING LOTS/GARAGES

Commercial parking lot/garage...............................................

Noncommercial parking lot/garage.........................................

SKIP

Apartment/townhouse parking lot/garage............................... to 17c

SCHOOL

Inside school building..............................................................

SKIP

to 17a

On school property (school parking area,

play area, school bus, etc.).......................................................

SKIP

to 17c

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-26

10. Where did this incident happen?

Mark (X) only one box.

OPEN AREAS, ON STREET OR PUBLIC

TRANSPORTATION

In apartment yard, park, field, playground (other

than school).............................................................................

On the street (other than immediately adjacent to

own/friend's/relative's/neighbor's home)...............................

SKIP

On public transportation or in station (bus, train, to 18

plane, airport, depot, etc.)........................................................

OTHER

Other - Specify

....................................................................

SKIP

to 17c

Notice that the 23 answer categories in Item 10 are grouped

together under eight major headings shown in uppercase

and bold type. These major headings should help you

locate more quickly the correct box to mark after getting

the respondent's answer.

In Respondent's Home

or Lodging

This is the first major heading and covers Boxes 1 through

4 for enclosed structures owned or rented by the

respondent in which an incident may have occurred. An

enclosed structure is one which has a door or window to

gain entry through, such as a respondent's house, apartment,

room, garage, shed, enclosed porch, or a vacation home,

second home, or hotel/motel room in which the respondent

was staying at the time of the incident. This also includes

enclosed structures that are on the respondent's property,

but are detached from the main structure, such as a

detached garage or storage shed.

When marking Box 1 through 4, it does not matter how the

offender gained entrance to the enclosed structure (For

example, the offender may have used force, was let in by a

household member, or gained entrance through an

unlocked or open door or window). However, if the

offender did not enter or try to enter the types of places

identified in Boxes 1 through 4, mark the most appropriate

box from Boxes 5 through 23.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1, In own dwelling, own attached garage, or

enclosed porch (Include illegal entry or attempted illegal

entry of same), when the offender either tried to enter or

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-27

was inside the following types of places during the

incident:

! The respondent's own dwelling, attached garage, or

enclosed porch.

! The respondent's room in a boarding house, school

dormitory, or a similar type of place. As you ask the

questions in Items 11 through 16, keep in mind that

we are only interested in the respondent's room and

not the rest of the building. If the incident took place

somewhere else in the building outside of the

respondent's room, do NOT mark Box 1, instead mark

Box 6.

! The respondent's apartment. As you ask the questions

in Items 11 through 16, keep in mind that we are only

interested in the respondent's apartment and not the

rest of the apartment building. If the incident took

place somewhere else in the building outside of the

respondent's apartment, do NOT mark Box 1, instead

mark Box 6.

! The respondent's former living quarters, as long as the

respondent was living there at the time of the incident

AND the incident occurred during the respondent's

6-month reference period.

! The respondent's enclosed porch. If the incident

occurred on the respondent's unenclosed porch, do

NOT mark Box 1, instead mark Box 5.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2, In detached building on own property,

such as detached garage, storage shed, etc. (Include

illegal entry or attempted illegal entry of same), when the

offender either tried to enter or was inside the following

types of places during the incident:

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-28

! A detached building on the respondent's property

other than the respondent's dwelling or attached

garage, such as a detached garage, tool shed, guest

house, barn, greenhouse, and so forth. Do NOT

mark Box 2 if the incident took place in an open

carport on the respondent's property, instead mark

Box 5.

! A mobile home or trailer that is NOT used as a

recreation vehicle and is situated on the respondent's

property. If the mobile home or trailer is used as a

recreation vehicle and is situated on the respondent’s

property during the incident, do NOT mark Box 2,

instead mark Box 5.

After marking Box 2, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3, In vacation home/second home (Include

illegal entry or attempted illegal entry of same) when the

offender either tried to enter or was inside the following

types of places during the incident:

! A second home either owned or in the possession of

the respondent. Second homes include former

dwellings still owned or rented by the respondent, but

not used as the respondent's primary residence, as

well as new dwellings that are in the possession of the

respondent, but not yet used as the primary residence.

If the incident happened at a second home owned by a

nonhousehold member or rented to a nonhousehold

member, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 8.

! A vacation home owned by the respondent, regardless

of whether or not the respondent was residing at the

vacation home when the incident took place. If the

incident happened at a vacation home owned by a

nonhousehold member or rented to a nonhousehold

member, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 8.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-29

! A detached building on the property of a second home

or vacation home owned by the respondent, such as a

detached garage, storage shed, and so forth. If the

incident happened in the yard of a vacation or second

home, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 23 and

describe the location on the "Specify" line.

After marking Box 3, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4, In hotel or motel room respondent was

staying in (Include illegal entry or attempted illegal entry

of same), when the offender either tried to enter or was

inside a hotel or motel room where the respondent was

staying temporarily during any part of the incident.

However, if the incident happened in the hotel or motel

building (for example, in a conference room, lobby, or

hallway) and the offender never entered or tried to enter the

respondent's room, do NOT mark Box 4, instead mark

Box 26.

After marking Box 4, continue with Item 11.

Near Own Home This is the second major heading and covers Boxes 5

through 7 for places near a respondent's primary residence

where an incident may have occurred.

Mark Box 5

Mark Box 5, Own yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport,

unenclosed porch (does not include apartment yards),

when the incident happened in the following places near the

respondent's home:

! The respondent's yard, regardless of size, when it

belongs solely to the respondent's house, townhouse,

mobile home, apartment, condominium, and so forth.

If the yard is for the use of all occupants in the

apartment building, do not mark Box 5, instead mark

Box 20.

! The respondent's driveway, mailbox, sidewalk,

unenclosed porch or carport used solely by the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-30

respondent's unit. If the incident happened in a

parking lot used by more than just the sample unit, do

NOT mark Box 5, instead mark Box 17.

! The respondent's motor vehicle or recreation vehicle

parked on the respondent's property and intended for

the sole use of the respondent.

! The respondent's balcony or patio when it is used

solely by the respondent's unit and there was no

illegal entry or attempted illegal entry to the sample

unit itself.

After marking Box 5, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 6

Mark Box 6, Apartment hall, storage area, laundry

room (does not include apartment parking lot/garage),

when the incident happened inside a respondent's

residential building, but not in the respondent's apartment,

condominium, room in a boarding house, a dormitory

room, and so forth.

Box 6 is NOT intended for incidents that:

! Happen in another apartment or room in the

respondent's building, other than the respondent's

apartment or room, instead mark Box 8.

! Happen in an apartment parking garage, even if the

parking garage is in the basement of the respondent's

building, instead mark Box 17.

After marking Box 6, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 7

Mark Box 7, On street immediately adjacent to own

home, when the incident occurred on the street

IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT to the respondent's property.

"Immediately adjacent" includes directly in front or to the

side of the sample unit and does NOT include next door or

across the street from the sample unit.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-31

After marking Box 7, skip to Item 18.

At, In, or Near a

Friend's/ Relative's/

Neighbor's Home

This is the third major heading and covers Boxes 8 through

11 for places where an incident may have happened that are

at, in, or near the home of a respondent's friend, relative, or

neighbor.

Mark Box 8

Mark Box 8, At or in home or other building on their

property, when the incident happened at or in a dwelling

or other building on the property owned by a friend,

relative, or neighbor. Other buildings on a friend's, a

relative's, or a neighbor's property could include a garage,

porch, tool shed, guest house, barn, greenhouse, mobile

home or trailer that is not used as a recreation vehicle, and

so forth.

Also mark Box 8 if the incident happened at or in:

! A second home or vacation home owned by a friend,

relative, or neighbor of a respondent.

! A friend's, a relative's, or neighbor's room in a

boarding house, school dormitory, or similar type of

place.

! A friend's, a relative's, or a neighbor's apartment.

After marking Box 8, skip to Item 18.

If the incident happened at or in a dwelling or other

building on the property of someone the respondent does

not know, mark Box 23 and enter a description of exactly

where the incident took place.

Mark Box 9

Mark Box 9, Yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport (does not

include apartment yards), when the incident happened in a

friend's, a relative's, or neighbor's yard, sidewalk, driveway,

carport, balcony, open porch, or patio. The yard, sidewalk,

driveway, carport, balcony, open porch, or patio must be

intended for the sole use of the respondent's friend, relative,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-32

or neighbor and not for the use of other housing units. Do

not mark Box 9 if the incident took place in an apartment

yard, instead mark Box 20.

After marking Box 9, skip to Item 18.

If the incident happened in the yard, sidewalk, driveway or

carport of someone the respondent does not know, mark

Box 23 and enter a description of exactly where the

incident took place.

Mark Box 10

Mark Box 10, Apartment hall, storage area, laundry

room (does not include apartment parking lot/garage),

when the incident happened in the building where a

respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor lives, but not in

the friend, relative, or neighbor's unit. The building could

include apartments, condominiums, dormitory rooms,

boarding house rooms, and so forth. If the incident

happened in the building's parking garage, do not mark

Box 10, instead mark Box 17.

After marking Box 10, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 11

Mark Box 11, On street immediately adjacent to their

home, when the incident occurred on the street

IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT to the property of the

respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor. "Immediately

adjacent" includes directly in front or to the side of the

friend's, the relative's, or neighbor's unit and does NOT

include next door or across the street from the friend's,

relative's, or neighbor's unit.

After marking Box 11, skip to Item 18.

Commercial Places This is the fourth major heading and covers Boxes 12, 24 -

26, 14, and 27 for different types of commercial places in

which the incident could have occurred.

Mark Box 12

Mark Box 12, Inside restaurant, bar, nightclub, when the

incident happened INSIDE any type of eating and/or

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-33

drinking establishment, such as a restaurant, bar and grill,

cafe, tavern, cafeteria, bar, and so forth.

After marking Box 12, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 24, 25, or

Mark Box 24, Inside bank, when the incident happened in

a bank, credit union, or some other type of financial

institution. Mark Box 25, Inside gas station, when the

incident happened anywhere on the property of a gas

station. Mark Box 26, Inside other commercial building,

such as a store, when the incident happened INSIDE a

business establishment where cash/credit is exchanged for

purchased products by the general public, OTHER THAN

AT A BANK OR GAS STATION. For example, in a

department store, factory outlet store, hotel gift shop, and

so forth.

Box 26 is NOT intended for incidents that happened in a:

• Restaurant, bar, or nightclub, instead mark Box 12.

• Commercial parking lot or garage, instead mark

Box 15.

• Airport, bus or train station, or on a bus, train, plane,

or some other type of public transportation, instead

mark Box 22.

After marking Box 24, 25, or 26, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 14 or 27

Mark Box 14, Inside office, when the incident happened

INSIDE a building used for office work, including incidents

that occur in post office buildings. Mark Box 27, Inside

factory or warehouse, when the incident happened

INSIDE a commercial building used for factory work or

warehouse storage purposes.

After marking Box 14 or 27, skip to Item 17c.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-34

Parking Lots/Garages This is the fifth major heading and covers Boxes 15

through 17 for all types of parking lots and parking garages

at which the incident could have happened.

Mark Box 15

Mark Box 15, Commercial parking lot/garage, when the

incident took place at an attended or unattended parking lot

or garage which is privately operated for profit AND

requires a parking fee.

Do NOT mark Box 15 when the incident occurred:

% In a parking lot or garage that has parking meters or is

operated by a local, state, or Federal government,

regardless of whether or not a fee is required, instead

mark Box 16.

% In a commercial parking lot or garage during hours

when the general public can park free, instead mark

Box 16.

After marking Box 15, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 16

Mark Box 16, Noncommercial parking lot/garage, when

the incident happened at a public parking lot or garage

where the general public can park free of charge, such as at

a shopping mall or shopping center, bus station, office

building, and so forth.

Also mark Box 16 when the incident happened at:

! A parking lot or garage that has parking meters.

! A parking lot or garage that is operated by a local,

state, or Federal government, regardless of whether or

not a fee is required.

! A commercial parking lot or garage during hours

when parking is free to the general public.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-35

Do NOT mark Box 16 when the incident took place:

% At parking meters on the side of a street, instead mark

Box 21.

% At apartment parking lots, instead mark Box 17.

% At school parking lots or areas, instead mark Box 19.

After marking Box 16, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 17

Mark Box 17, Apartment/townhouse parking lot/garage,

when the incident happened in the parking area provided

for residents and their guests. This includes residents of

apartments, townhouses, rooming houses, dormitories,

condominiums, and so forth. It does not matter if the

parking garage is inside or attached to the resident's

building.

After marking Box 17, skip to Item 17c.

School This is the sixth major heading and covers Boxes 18 and 19

for school buildings and school property at which the

incident could have taken place.

Mark Box 18

Mark Box 18, Inside school building, when the incident

happened inside a school building (for example, in a

classroom, gym, hallway, or principal's office). If the

incident happened on the grounds of a school and not inside

a school building, mark Box 19. If the incident happened

in a school dormitory building, mark Box 1 or 6, as

appropriate.

After marking Box 18, skip to Item 17a.

Mark Box 19

Mark Box 19, On school property (school parking area,

play area, school bus, etc.), when the incident happened

outside of a school building in areas such as the school

steps, parking lot, athletic field, playground, or a school bus

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-36

that is transporting students to or from school each school

day or on a school bus to and from a school sponsored

activity. If the incident happened when a school bus was

transporting students to or from an activity NOT sponsored

by the school (such as to an amusement park or summer

camp), mark Box 22.

After marking Box 19, skip to Item 17c.

Open Areas, on Street or

Public Transportation

This is the seventh major heading and covers Boxes 20

through 22 for a variety of places open to the general public

where an incident could take place.

Mark Box 20

Mark Box 20, In apartment yard, park, field,

playground (other than school), when the incident

occurred in a public, unenclosed area AND the area is NOT

on school property. Also mark Box 20 when the incident

happened in a yard shared by more than one family.

Mark Box 21

Mark Box 21, On the street (other than immediately

adjacent to own/friend's/relative's/neighbor's home),

when the incident happened on a public street or highway

AND the street or highway is not adjacent to the

respondent's own home or the home of a respondent's

friend, relative, or neighbor.

Also mark Box 21 when the incident involved:

! A parked motor vehicle, such as an incident involving

auto theft,

! The respondent driving or riding in a motor vehicle,

! The respondent walking or riding a bicycle on a street,

! The respondent while on the shoulder of a street or on

a public sidewalk that is not covered in another

category of Item 10.

After marking Box 21, skip to Item 18.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-37

Mark Box 22

Mark Box 22, On public transportation or in station

(bus, train, plane, airport, depot, etc.), when the incident

happened on some type of public transportation (bus, taxi,

train, plane, subway, and so forth) or in a bus depot, train

station, airport, or subway station. Also mark Box 22 when

the incident happened on a school bus while transporting

persons to or from an activity that is NOT sponsored by the

school, such as to or from a summer camp.

If the incident happened on a school bus going to or from

school each school day or on a school bus to and from a

school sponsored activity, mark Box 19.

After marking Box 22, skip to Item 18.

Other (Box 23)

Mark Box 23, Other, when the incident happened at or in a

place that does not fit any of the places shown for Boxes 1

through 27 (Box numbers are not shown in sequence in

Item 10.) OR when the respondent does not know where the

incident took place. After marking Box 23, always

describe the place or situation on the "Specify" line.

Here are some examples for marking Box 23 in Item 10:

! Fenced in storage yard of a factory

! Jail or prison

! Hospital

! Library

! Church

! On a beach

After marking Box 23, skip to Item 17c.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-38

11. Did the offender live (here/there) or have

a right to be (here/there), for instance, as

a guest or a repairperson?

Yes --

SKIP

to 19

No.................. Ask 12

Don't know....

Item 11 (Right to be

Here/There)

If you mark Box 1, 2, 3, or 4 in Item 10, you will ask the

question in Item 11 next to determine whether the offender

had a legal right to be in the respondent's home or other

structure on the respondent's property.

Mark Box 1, Yes Mark Box 1 "Yes," when the offender:

! Was living or staying with the respondent when the

incident happened.

! Had a legal right to be in the respondent's dwelling or

a building on the respondent's property when the

incident happened, such as a plumber, cleaning

service, hotel/motel maid, and so forth.

! Had permission to enter the respondent's dwelling or a

building on the respondent's property prior to the time

the incident took place, such as a friend, relative,

salesperson, or meter reader. However, if the

offender entered fraudulently, do not mark Box 1.

For example, mark Box 2 "No," if the offender

misrepresented his or her purpose for needing to enter

the building/unit/dwelling by impersonating a repair

person, police officer, maid, and so forth.

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 19.

Mark Box 2, No Mark Box 2 "No," when the offender:

! Was not living or staying with the respondent and did

not have a legal right or permission to be in the

dwelling or building on the respondent's property at

the time of the incident.

! Was let into the dwelling by a child and did not have

a legal right to enter the dwelling because the child’s

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-39

parents would not have allowed access to the

offender.

! Pushed his/her way into the dwelling when the

respondent answered the door.

! Entered the dwelling by fraudulently misrepresenting

himself/herself as a repair person, police officer,

maid, and so forth.

After marking Box 2, continue with Item 12.

Mark Box 3, Don't Know Mark Box 3, "Don't know," when the respondent does not

know who the offender was or whether the offender had a

legal right to be in the dwelling or other building on the

respondent's property. If you think that the respondent

answered "Don't know," because he/she is uncertain who

the offender is, you may want to probe by asking the

respondent if the person suspected of being the offender

had a legal right to be in the respondent's dwelling.

After marking Box 3, continue with Item 12.

12. Did the offender actually get INSIDE

your (house/apartment/room/garage/

shed/enclosed porch)?

Yes --

SKIP

to 14

No................... Ask 13

Don't know.....

Item 12 (Actually Got

Inside)

After marking Box 2 or 3 in Item 11, you will ask the

question in Item 12 next to determine if the offender

actually entered the building or dwelling. As you ask

Item 12, make sure to read the appropriate type of structure.

For example, if the incident occurred in the respondent's

garage, ask, "Did the offender actually get INSIDE your

garage?"

For a Multi-Unit

Structure

If the incident happened in a multi-unit structure, such as an

apartment building or a hotel, we are only interested in the

respondent's apartment unit or hotel room for Item 12.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the offender got inside the building,

but did not actually get inside the respondent's apartment

unit or hotel room.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-40

Before Marking Box 3,

Don't Know

If you feel that a respondent may know how the offender

entered the dwelling or other building on the respondent's

property even though he/she answered "Don't know," probe

by repeating the respondent's answer or pausing a moment.

However, some respondents really will not know if the

offender actually got inside. For instance, you would mark

Box 3 “Don’t know” if a respondent:

! Did not find anything disturbed or stolen even though

the back door window was broken and the door was

unlocked.

! Was told by a neighbor that an offender was seen

leaving the respondent's house, but there was no

evidence that the offender got inside.

13. Did the offender TRY to get in your

(house/apartment/room/garage/shed/

enclosed porch)?

Yes -- Ask 14

No --

SKIP

to 19

Don't know -- Ask 14

Item 13 (Tried to Get

Inside)

After marking Box 2 or 3 in Item 12, you will ask the

question in Item 13 to determine if the offender tried to get

into the respondent's dwelling or other building on the

respondent's property. As you read the question, make sure

to read the appropriate type of structure. For example, if

the incident occurred in the respondent's enclosed porch,

ask, "Did the offender TRY to get in your enclosed

porch?"

For a Multi-Unit

Structure

If the incident happened in a multi-unit structure, such as an

apartment building or a hotel, we are only interested in the

respondent's apartment unit or hotel room for Item 13.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the offender tried to get inside the

building, but did not actually try to get inside the

respondent's apartment unit or hotel room.

Before Marking Box 2,

Before marking Box 2 "No" in Item 13, make sure that the

respondent did NOT answer "No" because the offender was

let in or entered through an unlocked or open door or

window. In other words, there was no evidence of forcible

entry. If this is the case, change the answer in Item 12 by

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-41

lining through the mark in Box 2 or 3 and marking Box 1

"Yes" to show that the offender actually got inside the

respondent's home or lodging.

Reviewing Answer in

Item 10

If you mark Box 2 "No" in Items 12 and 13, you are

indicating that the offender did NOT get inside or try to get

inside the respondent's home or lodging. Therefore, no

illegal entry or attempted illegal entry happened. In this

situation, you must go back to Item 10 and review the entry

with the respondent so you can verify that the correct box is

marked to indicate where the incident took place.

If you need to correct the entry in Item 10:

! Line through the incorrect box,

! Mark the correct box from Boxes 5 through 27 (Box

numbers are not shown in sequence in Item 10.),

! Follow the skip instruction for the correct box, and

! Line through the answers marked in Items 11 through

13 due to the new skip instruction.

14. Was there any evidence, such as a

broken lock or broken window, that the

offender(s) (got in by force/TRIED to get

in by force)?

Yes -- Ask 15

No --

SKIP

to 16

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-42

15. What was the evidence? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Window

Damage to window (include frame, glass

broken/removed/cracked).................................

Screen damaged/removed.................................

Lock on window damaged/tampered with

in some way......................................................

Other -- Specify

Door

Damage to door (include frame, glass

SKIP

panes or door removed)..................................... to 19

Screen damaged/removed..................................

Lock or door handle damaged/tampered

with in some way...............................................

Other -- Specify

Other

Other than window or door -- Specify

Items 14 and 15 (Evidence

of Force)

Items 14 and 15 are used to determine whether there was

any physical, visible evidence of forcible entry found after

the incident took place.

You will ask Item 14 when:

! Box 1 is marked in Item 12 indicating that the

offender actually got inside the respondent's dwelling

or lodging OR

! Box 1 or 3 is marked in Item 13 indicating that the

offender tried to get in the respondent's dwelling or

lodging or the respondent does not know whether the

offender tried to get in the respondent's dwelling or

lodging.

As you ask Item 14, make sure to read the correct phrase

based on whether:

! Box 1 is marked in Item 12. If so, read "got in by

force." OR

! Box 1 or 3 is marked in Item 13. If so, read "TRIED

to get in by force."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-43

Marking Item 14 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when there was physical, visible

evidence following the incident that the offender entered or

tried to enter the respondent's dwelling or lodging by force.

Examples of visible evidence are shown in the answer

categories for Item 15. After marking Box 1 for Item 14,

you will continue with Item 15 to identify the types of

physical, visible evidence from the incident.

Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 14, when the evidence is:

! A skeleton key or entry through an open window,

door, and so forth.

! A ladder or trash placed next to a window, but there

was no evidence that the window was tampered with

in some way.

! An injury to the respondent as he/she opened the door

and the offender pushed the respondent out of the

way. Although this is evidence of an attack, it is not

evidence of a break-in.

! An offender forces a respondent to let him/her enter

the dwelling or lodging and there is no visible

evidence of a break-in or attempted break-in to the

dwelling or lodging after the incident.

In the examples shown above, you would mark Box 2 "No"

if no other evidence of a forcible entry or attempted forcible

entry was mentioned. After marking Box 2 in Item 14, you

will skip to Item 16.

Marking Item 15 After marking Box 1 in Item 14, you will continue with

Item 15 to identify the types of evidence found after the

incident indicating that there was a forcible entry or an

attempted forcible entry of the respondent's dwelling or

lodging. Mark all boxes that apply to the respondent's

answer and continue to ask, "Anything else?", until you get

a "No" response.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-44

The answer categories for Item 15 are separated into three

groups--Window, Door, and Other. Boxes 1 through 4

relate to the types of damage to a window. Boxes 5 through

8 relate to the types of damage to a door. Box 9 relates to

all other means of force used to gain entry or to try to gain

entry into the respondent's dwelling or lodging.

Since physical, visible evidence of force is evidence that

can be seen, keep in mind that the following types of

evidence are not considered signs of forcible entry or

attempted forcible entry:

% An open or unlocked window

% An open or unlocked door.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the glass in the window was broken,

cracked, or removed, or if there was evidence on the

window frame that force was used to gain access or to try to

gain access into the building, such as pry marks on the

window frame.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the window screen was cut, ripped, or

removed by the offender to gain access or to try to gain

access.

Mark Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the window lock was damaged, removed, or

showed visible signs that the offender tampered with it to

gain access or to try to gain access.

Mark Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent mentions some type of

window damage not covered in Boxes 1 through 3 and then

note how the offender gained access or attempted to gain

access through a window. Avoid using Box 4 if the

respondent's answer really fits Box 1, 2, and/or 3.

Mark Box 5 Mark Box 5 if there were marks on the door or door frame,

such as scratches, holes, or damaged glass in the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-45

door, or if the offender removed or knocked down the door

to gain access or to try to gain access.

Mark Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender damaged or removed a screen

door.

Mark Box 7 Mark Box 7 if a door lock or handle was damaged,

tampered with, or removed.

Mark Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the respondent mentions some type of door

damage not covered in Boxes 5 through 7 and then note

how the offender gained access or attempted to gain access

through a door. Avoid using Box 8 if the respondent's

answer really fits Box 5, 6, and/or 7.

Mark Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the offender forcibly gained access or tried

to gain access other than through a door or window, such as

by cutting a hole in a wall. After marking Box 9, always

note what type of evidence there was of forcible entry or

attempted forcible entry.

After marking all applicable boxes in Item 15, skip to

Item 19.

16. How did the offender (get in/TRY to

get in)?

Mark (X) only one box.

Let in.................................................................

Offender pushed his/her way in after door

opened...............................................................

Through OPEN DOOR or other opening........

Through UNLOCKED door or window..........

Through LOCKED door or window - Had

key.....................................................................

Through LOCKED door or window - Picked

SKIP

lock, used credit card, etc., other than key to 19

Through LOCKED door or window - Don't

know how.........................................................

Don't know.......................................................

Other - Specify.................................................

Item 16 (How Got In or

Tried to Get In)

After marking Box 2 in Item 14, you will skip to Item 16 to

determine how the offender got inside or tried to get inside

the respondent's dwelling or lodging when there was no

evidence of a forcible entry or attempted forcible entry.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-46

After asking the question in Item 16, mark the first box that

applies and probe when the respondent's answer is unclear

or too general. For example, if a respondent says that the

offender got in through the front door, you need to probe to

determine whether the offender was let in, came through an

unlocked door, and so forth.

Only mark ONE box for Item 16 and skip to Item 19 after

marking the appropriate box.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender was let into the dwelling or

lodging by someone who was not authorized to permit

entry. For example, a child lets in an offender even though

the child's parents had told the offender never to come to

their home.

Also mark Box 1 if the offender entered the dwelling or

lodging without permission or entered fraudulently when

someone answered the door. For example, an offender

falsely claims to be a police officer or a maid to gain

access.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender pushed his/her way in after

someone opened the door.

Mark Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender got in or tried to get in through

a door or other opening that was already open at the time of

the incident. Do not mark Box 3 if the offender had to

open an unlocked door, window, and so forth to enter the

respondent's dwelling or lodging.

The phrase "Other openings" includes open windows, open

garage doors, the open side of a three-sided shed, an

opening left by a missing door or window, a hole in the

wall, and so forth.

Mark Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender opened or tried to open an

unlocked door or window to gain access.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-47

Mark Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender used a key to enter through a

locked door or window of the respondent's dwelling or

lodging. A key includes one cut to fit the lock, a skeleton

key, or any other key.

Mark Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender used "another means," other

than a key, to gain access through a locked door or window

AND the respondent knows or has a pretty good idea how

the offender entered or attempted to enter the dwelling or

lodging. The phrase "another means" includes picking the

lock, using a credit card, and so forth.

It is possible that you could discover that the method used

to gain access or to try to gain access left physical, visible

evidence of force. If this happens, correct the answer in

Item 14 by lining through the original "No" entry and mark

Box 1 "Yes." Based on the new answer in Item 14, you

need to ask Item 15 next. Also, if you marked a box in

Item 16, line through the marked box.

Mark Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the respondent thinks or knows that the

offender entered or tried to enter his/her dwelling or

lodging through a locked door or window, but does not

know how.

Mark Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the respondent does not know how the

offender gained access or tried to gain access to his/her

dwelling or lodging. For example, a respondent returns

home and discovers that the television and stereo system

are gone, but there is no indication at all of how the

offender got into the home.

Mark Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the offender entered or tried to enter the

respondent's dwelling or lodging by some means not

described in Boxes 1 through 8. After marking Box 9,

always describe the method used on the "Specify" line.

Here is an example for marking Box 9: The offender held a

gun to the respondent's head and forced the respondent to

open the door.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-48

17a. Was it your school?

Yes

No - Skip to 17c

Item 17a (Respondent's

School)

After marking Box 18, "Inside school building," in Item 10,

you are instructed to skip to Item 17a. Item 17a is used to

determine whether or not the incident happened at the

respondent's school. If you are taking a proxy interview, ask

the question this way:

"Was it Jennifer Bailey's (proxy person's) school?"

Mark Box 1 If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and continue with

Item 17b to determine in what part of the school building the

incident happened.

Mark Box 2 If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 and skip to Item 17c to

determine whether or not the incident happened in an area

that is restricted to certain people.

17b. In what part of the school building did it

happen?

Classroom

Hallway/Stairwell

Bathroom/Locker room

Other (library, gym, auditorium, cafeteria)

Item 17b (Part of School

Building)

After marking Box 1, "Yes," in Item 17a, continue with

Item 17b to determine in what part of the school building

the incident happened. Only mark ONE of the four boxes

to identify the most accurate description of where the

incident took place within the respondent's school

building.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent tells you that the incident

occurred in a classroom.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent tells you that the incident

occurred in a school hallway or stairway/stairwell.

Mark Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent tells you that the incident

occurred in a school bathroom, shower room, or locker

room.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-49

Mark Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent tells you that the incident

occurred in another location within the school building

other than the locations mentioned in Boxes 1, 2, or 3,

such as in the school library, gym, auditorium, cafeteria,

and so forth.

17c.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did the incident happen in an area

restricted to certain people or was it

open to the public at the time?

Open to the public

Restricted to certain people (or nobody

had a right to be there)

Don't know

Other - Specify

Item 17c (Restricted Area

or Open to the Public)

After marking a box in Item 10 that identifies a

commercial place, parking lots/garages, on school

property, or other, you will skip to Item 17c to determine

whether at the time of the incident the location was

restricted to certain people or was open to the public. If

you mark Box 18 in Item 10, you will ask Item 17c

AFTER completing Item 17a and 17b.

Notice that Item 17c has the instruction "ASK OR

VERIFY." When you see this instruction, you can verify a

known answer with the respondent without asking the

question. Only verify a known answer when you see this

instruction and do not mark the answer without at least

verifying it first with the respondent.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the incident happened in an area that

was open to the general public at the time of the incident.

Places that are usually open to the public include stores,

public sidewalks, public buildings, restaurants, parking

lots, apartment yards, parks, and so forth.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the incident happened in an area that

was restricted to certain people at the time of the incident,

such as an employee's lounge in a store, a school

classroom, or a private country club. Restricted places

normally consider persons who do not belong on the

premises as trespassers. Also mark Box 2 if the incident

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-50

happened at a business during non-business hours when

the place is restricted and not open to the general public.

Mark Box 3 Mark Box 3 when the respondent does not know if the

place where the incident happened was open to the general

public at the time of the incident. For example, a

respondent left his rain coat at a restaurant and, when he

returned the next day, the rain coat was not found. In this

situation, you would mark Box 2 since the respondent does

not know whether the incident happened during business

or non-business hours AND the restaurant is NOT open to

the general public during non-business hours.

Mark Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent's answer does not fit

Boxes 1 through 3. After marking Box 4, make sure to

explain the situation on the "Specify" line. Avoid using

Box 4 if the respondent's answer really fits Box 1, 2, or 3.

18.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did it happen outdoors, indoors, or

both?

Indoors (inside a building or enclosed space)

Outdoors

Both

Item 18 (Outdoors or

Indoors)

After marking box 5 through 11 or 20 through 22 in

Item 10, you are instructed to skip to Item 18 so you can

determine if the incident happened indoors, outdoors, or

both indoors and outdoors. You will also complete

Item 18 after completing Item 17c.

Item 18 includes the "ASK OR VERIFY" instruction,

which allows you to verify a known answer with the

respondent without asking the question. Only verify a

known answer when you see this instruction and do not

mark the answer without at least verifying it first with the

respondent.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the incident happened inside a building or

enclosed space that has a roof, such as a three-sided shed,

screened porch, screened gazebo, patio room, and so forth.

Mark Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the incident happened outdoors in an open

space, such as in a backyard (fenced or unfenced), baseball

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-51

field, carport, parking lot, open porch or patio, and so

forth. For the NCVS, all modes of transportation are

considered outdoors. This includes cars, trucks, vans,

sport utility vehicles, buses, taxicabs, airplanes, trains, and

so forth.

Mark Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the incident happened both indoors and

outdoors. For example, a respondent was attacked inside a

bar. As the respondent fled the bar, the offender followed

him and continued to attack him in the parking lot.

Another example would be an incident in which a

respondent's property was stolen from inside the home and

from the unenclosed patio.

19.

ASK OR VERIFY -

How far away from home did this

happen?

PROBE -

Was it within a mile, 5 miles, 50 miles or

more?

Mark (X) first box that respondent is sure of.

At, in, or near the building containing

the respondent's home/next door

A mile or less

Five miles or less

Fifty miles or less

More than 50 miles

Don't know how far

Item 19 (Distance From

Home)

After completing Items 15, 16, or 18, you will complete

Item 19 to determine the distance between where the

incident happened and where the respondent was residing

at the time of the incident.

Notice that Item 19 has the instruction "ASK OR

VERIFY." When you see this instruction, you can verify a

known answer with the respondent without asking the

question. Only verify a known answer when you see this

instruction and do not mark the answer without at least

verifying it first with the respondent. Mark the first box

about which the respondent feels sure.

Item 19 also includes a probe question that you only need

to use if the respondent seems uncertain about how to

answer the question.

Mark Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the incident took place in the

respondent's home or on the respondent's property. If the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-52

respondent was living in a single family home or a mobile

home at the time of the incident, Box 1 refers to the home,

yard, driveway, carport, sidewalk, or street adjacent to the

home. Also mark Box 1 if the incident happened at the

respondent's next door neighbor's home.

If the respondent was living in an apartment, dormitory

room, and so forth, at the time of the incident, Box 1 refers

to:

! Inside the respondent's unit,

! Inside the building where the unit is located (for

example, an apartment hallway or laundry room),

! Inside another resident's unit in the same building,

! The yard, sidewalk, or street adjacent to the

respondent's building.

Mark Boxes 2 Through 6 Mark the first box from Boxes 2 through 6 that best

describes the distance between where the incident

happened and where the respondent was residing at the

time of the incident. For example, mark Box 3 when the

respondent is unsure if the distance is less than 5 miles,

but is positive that the distance is at least two miles.

20a.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Were you or any other member of this

household present when this incident

occurred?

Yes - Ask 20b

No -

SKIP

to 56, page 8

Item 20a (Household

Member Present)

Following Item 19, ask or verify Item 20a to determine

whether any persons who are considered household

members at the time of the interview were present when

the incident occurred. It is extremely important that you

mark this item correctly, because an incorrect answer will

either:

! Cause you to skip over items needed to fully describe

the incident and could cause the incident to classify

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-53

incorrectly when you mark Box 2 "No" by mistake,

! Cause you to ask questions that do not relate to what

happened during the incident when you mark Box 1

"Yes" by mistake.

It is very important that you understand the NCVS

concept of "presence" during an incident. If you suspect

that a respondent's answer to Item 20a is not correct based

on the information provided earlier in the interview,

probe to get an accurate answer. If you probe and it is

still unclear how to mark Item 20a, it is better to mark

Box 1 "Yes," than to mark Box 2 "No."

Here are three examples when the respondent answered

"No," but, by NCVS standards, each respondent is

considered present during the incident:

! A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because she

was sleeping in her bedroom on the second floor

while the offender forcibly entered through her

kitchen door on the first floor and stole electronic

equipment.

! A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because he is

watching television in his family room while the

offender stole three bicycles from his open attached

garage.

! A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because she

is in the kitchen cooking dinner while the offender

who is a guest was stealing jewelry and money from

her bedroom dresser.

In all of these examples, Box 1 "Yes" should be marked

because the respondent in each case is considered present

during the incident. This may not always be clear to a

respondent.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-54

For the NCVS, a household member is considered

present when he/she is at the immediate scene of the

crime incident and there is an opportunity for the

offender to attack or threaten to physically harm a

household member or to take something directly from

a household member.

If a current household member was not at the immediate

scene of the incident, but was personally attacked or

threatened with physical harm or an attempt was made to

harm the household member, consider the person present

during the incident and complete a separate NCVS-2 for

each eligible household member who was personally

victimized. This includes:

! Being shot at through a window by someone outside

of the house,

! Being threatened with physical harm by a neighbor

in the adjoining yard or by an ex-boyfriend standing

outside the respondent's closed door while the

respondent is inside the house and on the other side

of the closed door. This does NOT include threats

that are NOT made in person directly from the

offender to the respondent, such as a threat by

telephone, Internet, FAX, mail, or through another

person.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 6, for more detailed

information about presence during an incident.)

Notice that Item 20a has the instruction "ASK OR

VERIFY." When you see this instruction, you can verify

a known answer with the respondent without asking the

question. Only verify a known answer when you see this

instruction and do not mark the answer without at least

verifying it first with the respondent.

If you are taking a proxy interview, the word "you" in the

question refers to the person for whom the interview is

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-55

being taken (the proxy person), not to the proxy

respondent. As you verify the answer or ask the question

in Item 20a, replace the word "you" with the proxy

person's name. For example, "Was John Blake (proxy

person) or any other member of this household present

when this incident occurred?"

Marking Box 1 "Yes" Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent or any other person

who is a household member at the time of the interview

was present during the incident according to the NCVS

definition of presence.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 20b.

Here are some examples for when Box 1 should be

marked in Item 20a:

! A woman looked out her kitchen window and saw a

strange boy entering her garage. When she entered

the garage, she saw that the boy was attempting to

steal her bicycle. The boy got scared and ran away.

In this situation, the woman was present because she

reached the immediate crime scene while the

attempted crime was still in progress and she could

have been harmed by the offender.

! A man falls asleep on the beach and when he wakes

up his CD player and keys are gone. In this situation,

the man was present even though he was sleeping

while the incident took place. He was at the

immediate scene of the crime and could have been

harmed by the offender.

! A woman was resting in her family room when a

stranger tried to break in through the locked door.

When she turned on the porch light, he ran away. In

this situation, the woman was present because she was

at the immediate scene of the attempted break in and,

if the break in had been successful, she could have

been harmed by the offender.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-56

Marking Box 2 "No" Mark Box 2 "No" if none of the household members at

the time of the interview were present during the incident

according to the NCVS definition of presence.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 56 on page 8 of the

NCVS-2.

Here are some examples for when Box 2 should be

marked in Item 20a:

! A woman's leather coat was stolen from the coat

room in the restaurant lobby while she was eating

dinner at the restaurant. After finishing her meal, she

returned to the coat room to get her leather coat and

it was gone. In this situation, the woman was not

present, because she was not at the immediate scene

of the crime during the incident and the offender did

not have an opportunity to harm the woman during

the theft.

! A man was sleeping inside his house while someone

stole his new Mercedes from his driveway. In this

situation, the man was not present, because he was

not at the immediate scene of the crime during the

incident and the offender did not have an opportunity

to harm him during the theft.

! A woman looked out her living room window and

saw someone loading her riding lawn mower from

her front yard onto a truck. By the time she got

outside, they had driven away with her lawn mower.

In this situation, the woman was not present because

she was not at the immediate scene of the crime and

there was no chance that she could have been harmed

during the incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-57

20b.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Which household members were

present?

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If proxy

interview, "Respondent" refers to the person

for whom the proxy interview is taken, not

the proxy respondent.

Respondent only............................. Ask 21

Respondent and other household member(s)

Only other household member(s), not

respondent -

SKIP

to 59, page 8

Item 20b (Which

Household Member

Present)

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 20a, you are

instructed to complete Item 20b next to determine which

household members were present during the incident.

Notice that Item 20b has the instruction "ASK OR

VERIFY." When you see this instruction, you can verify

a known answer with the respondent without asking the

question. Only verify a known answer when you see this

instruction and do not mark the answer without at least

verifying it first with the respondent.

Item 20b is another critical item and you need to ensure

that you mark the correct answer box. Otherwise,

important information may be missed (for example,

information about weapons, attack or threat methods,

injuries, medical expenses, and so forth) or inappropriate

questions may be asked (for example, questions about

weapons, attacks, and threats).

For a Proxy Interview If you are taking a proxy interview, the word

"Respondent" in the answer categories refers to the

person for whom the proxy interview is taken (proxy

person), not to the proxy respondent.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the respondent for a self-response

interview (or the proxy person for a proxy interview) is

the ONLY household member who was present during

the incident. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 21.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when both the respondent for a self-response

interview (or the proxy person for a proxy interview)

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-58

AND other household members were present during the

incident. After marking Box 2, continue with Item 21.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when the respondent for a self-response

interview (or the proxy person for a proxy interview) was

NOT present during the incident, but other household

members were present. Before marking Box 3, make sure

that the respondent was NOT present during the incident.

After marking Box 3, skip to Item 59 on page 8 of the

NCVS-2.

Remember to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each

eligible household member who was personally

victimized during the incident.

21.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did you personally see an offender?

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If proxy

interview, replace "you" with the name of person

for whom the proxy interview is being taken in

21-115.

Yes

Item 21 (See the

Offender)

After marking Box 1 or 2 in Item 20b, you are instructed

to complete Item 21 next to determine if the respondent

personally saw an offender.

Proxy Interviews If you are conducting a proxy interview, use the proxy

person's first name or an appropriate pronoun instead of

the word "you" in each question from Item 21 through

Item 115. For example, Robert Barnes is the name of the

eligible household member who is unable to answer for

himself. As you ask Item 21 of the proxy respondent,

Pamela Barnes, you would say, "Did Robert Barnes

personally see an offender?".

Proxy respondents may not know for sure whether the

proxy person saw the offender during the incident. Probe

by asking if the proxy respondent thinks the proxy person

saw the offender and mark the appropriate answer box

based on the proxy respondent's answer.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-59

22. Did the offender have a weapon such

as a gun or knife, or something to use

as a weapon, such as a bottle or

wrench?

Yes - Ask 23

No ...................

SKIP

to 24

Don't know......

Item 22 (Weapon Present)

Whenever a respondent was present during the incident,

you will ask the question in Item 22 to determine whether

the offender had a weapon or used an object as a weapon.

Guns and Knives With the exception of BB and tear gas guns, all guns,

rifles, and knives are considered weapons. BB and tear

gas guns are only considered weapons when they are used

as clubs.

Objects Used as

Weapons

Objects other than guns, rifles, and knives must have

been used as weapons to be considered weapons. For

example, if the offender used a screwdriver only to break

into the respondent's home, the screwdriver is NOT a

weapon for the incident. However, if the offender

attacked or threatened to attack the respondent with the

screwdriver, then the screwdriver is a weapon for the

incident.

When a respondent mentions an object that may or may

not be a weapon depending on how the offender used it,

probe to verify that the object was used to either attack

the respondent or threaten to attack the respondent. Make

sure to explain in the summary report (Check Item W)

exactly how the object was used as a weapon during the

incident.

Motor Vehicles In the following situations, a motor vehicle (for example,

a car, truck, van, SUV, motorcycle, and so forth) can be

considered a weapon:

! The respondent knows the offender and the offender

deliberately used a motor vehicle to try to run into

the respondent's vehicle or a vehicle in which the

respondent was riding.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-60

However, the offender's vehicle is NOT a weapon if

the respondent does not know the offender and there

was NO verbal threat of physical harm to the

respondent when:

-- The offender cut in front of a vehicle driven by

the respondent.

-- The offender cut in front of a vehicle in which

the respondent was a passenger.

-- The offender and the respondent were involved

in some type of traffic accident or incidence of

road rage.

! The respondent believes that the offender

deliberately struck or tried to hit him/her with a

motor vehicle while the respondent was on foot, a

bicycle, in a motor vehicle, and so forth. The

respondent's belief could be based on words spoken

by the offender or facts known about the offender.

Thrown Objects Objects that are thrown at the respondent are ONLY

considered weapons if they hit the respondent. If the

object did NOT hit the respondent, consider the incident

as a threat (marking Box 1 in Item 26) and identify the

type of threat by marking Box 11 in Item 28b. Do not

mark Box 1 in Item 22 if the respondent mentions only

the thrown object that did not hit him/her as a weapon.

Objects That Are

Never Weapons

The following objects are NEVER considered weapons

for the NCVS:

% Animals

% Parts of the body (for example, hands, feet, and so

forth)

% Food

% Small empty cans

% Mace or pepper spray

% Tear gas

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-61

% Chloroform

% Rings

% Casts

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes," if the offender had a weapon, such as

a gun or knife, or used an object, such as a bottle or

baseball bat, as a weapon. After marking Box 1 "Yes,"

continue with Item 23.

Whenever you mark Box 1 "Yes" indicating that the

offender had a weapon during the incident, you must

mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 24, 25, or 26 to indicate that

the offender attacked, tried to attack, or threatened the

respondent during the incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No," if the respondent says that the offender

did not have a weapon. After marking Box 2, skip to

Item 24.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know," if the respondent says that

he/she does not know whether the offender had a weapon.

After marking Box 3, skip to Item 24.

23. What was the weapon? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Hand gun (pistol, revolver, etc.)

Other gun (rifle, shotgun, etc.)

Knife

Other sharp object (scissors, ice pick, axe, etc.)

Blunt object (rock, club, blackjack, etc.)

Other - Specify

Item 23 (Type of

Weapon(s))

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 22, you are instructed

to ask the question in Item 23 to identify the type of

weapon(s) the offender had during the incident. Ask the

question as worded in Item 23 and continue asking,

"Anything else?" until the respondent says, "No."

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the respondent mentions any type of

hand gun, other than a BB gun, tear gas gun, or stun gun.

If a respondent mentions a stun gun, mark Box 6, Other,

and enter "stun gun" on the "Specify" line.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-62

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the respondent mentions a rifle,

shotgun, or any gun that is NOT a hand gun, other than a

BB or tear gas gun.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when the respondent mentions any type of

knife.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when the respondent mentions an object with

a thin sharp edge or a fine point (other than a knife) that

is intended for cutting or piercing (for example, scissors,

ice pick, axe, and so forth). When you mark Box 4 in

Item 23, make sure to explain in the summary report

(Check Item W) if the sharp object was used as a weapon.

Also explain how it was used as a weapon, such as

whether the object was thrown at and hit the respondent,

used to stab the respondent, or used to threaten the

respondent.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 when the respondent mentions a blunt-edged

object without sharp edges or points, such as a club, rock,

blackjack, and so forth. Also mark Box 5 when the

offender used a BB gun or tear gas gun as a club. When

you mark Box 5 in Item 23, make sure to explain in the

summary report (Check Item W) if the blunt object was

used as a weapon. Also explain how it was used as a

weapon, such as whether the object was thrown at and hit

the respondent, used to beat the respondent, or used to

threaten the respondent.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 and enter a complete description of the

weapon on the "Specify" line, such as "stun gun." Box 6

is intended for weapons that you are unsure how to

classify or for weapons or objects that the respondent

believes the offender had and could use as a weapon,

even if the respondent does not know what the weapon or

object was. If possible, try to obtain a description and

enter it on the "Specify" line. Avoid marking Box 6 if the

weapon fits one of the other answer categories.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-63

When you mark Box 6 in Item 23, make sure to explain in

the summary report (Check Item W) if the object was used

as a weapon. Also explain how it was used as a weapon

and whether the object was thrown at the respondent,

used to beat the respondent, or used to threaten the

respondent.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-64

Topic 3. Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/Threats)

24. Did the offender hit you, knock you

down or actually attack you in any

way?

Yes -

SKIP

to 29, page 5

No - Ask 25

Item 24 (Attacks)

Ask Item 24 to determine if the respondent was actually

attacked during the incident. In other words, there was

some type of physical contact between the offender and

the respondent.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when there was some type of physical

contact between the offender and the respondent (for

example, the offender hit, knocked down, or assaulted the

respondent in some way).

Do NOT mark Box 1 if the offender:

% Threw something at the respondent and the object

did not hit the respondent OR

% Shot at the respondent and the bullet missed the

respondent.

After marking Box 1 "Yes," skip to Item 29 on page 5.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" when the offender did NOT touch or

make physical contact with the respondent during the

incident. Also mark Box 2 if the offender:

! Threw something at the respondent and the object

did NOT hit the respondent OR

! Shot at the respondent and the bullet MISSED the

respondent.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 25.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-65

25. Did the offender TRY to attack you?

Yes -

SKIP

to 28a

No - Ask 26

Item 25 (Tried to Attack)

Ask the question in Item 25 to determine if the offender

tried to attack the respondent during the incident, but did

NOT make any physical contact with the respondent. If

there is any question in your mind as to whether or not the

offender tried to attack the respondent, go with the

respondent's perception.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when both the offender and the

respondent were present during the incident and the

offender:

! Made an attempt to attack the respondent (for

example, the offender tried to punch, hit, shoot, or

stab the respondent and missed) OR

! The respondent perceives that the offender could

have caused physical injury to him/her (for example,

the offender was chasing the respondent with a gun

in his/her hand, but was stopped before reaching the

respondent).

After marking Box 1 "Yes," skip to Item 28a.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" when the offender did not attempt to

attack the respondent during the incident. Also mark

Box 2 if the respondent was threatened with physical

harm, but the offender did not attempt to attack him/her.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 26.

26. Did the offender THREATEN you with

harm in any way?

Yes -

SKIP

to 28b

No - Ask 27

Item 26 (Threatened)

Ask the question in Item 26 to determine whether the

offender made a verbal threat in person to physically

harm the respondent during the incident. Both the

respondent and the offender must be present and the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-66

threat must be voiced by the offender directly to the

respondent.

Do NOT include threats made by:

% Telephone,

% Letter,

% Electronic mail,

% FAX machine, or

% Threats delivered by someone other than the offender.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the offender verbally threatened

to physically harm the respondent. After marking Box 1

"Yes," skip to Item 28b.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" when:

! Someone other than the offender delivered the threat

to the respondent.

! The respondent felt threatened and the offender did

not verbally threaten to physically harm the

respondent.

! The threat was made by telephone, letter, electronic

mail, or FAX machine.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 27.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-67

27. What actually happened? Anything

else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If box 4, ASK-

Do you mean forced or coerced sexual

intercourse including attempts?

If "Yes," change entry in Item 24 to

"Yes." Delete entries in 25-27.

Something taken without permission............

Attempted or threatened to take something...

Harassed, argument, abusive language..........

Unwanted sexual contact with force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)................................

Unwanted sexual contact without force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)................................

SKIP

Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of to 40,

house/apartment............................................. page 6

Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of

car...................................................................

Damaged or destroyed property.....................

Attempted or threatened to damage or

destroy property..............................................

Other - Specify

Item 27 (What Actually

Happened)

Ask the question in Item 27 to identify what happened

during the incident when the respondent answers "No" to

each of the questions in Items 24, 25, and 26 indicating

that the offender did NOT attack, try to attack, or threaten

him/her with physical harm. This item allows you to

mark multiple boxes, so continue asking, "Anything

else?" until you get a "No" response. Once you are done

completing Item 27, skip to Item 40 on page 6.

After asking the question in Item 27, you may discover

that the offender did attack, tried to attack, or verbally

threatened to physically harm the respondent. If so, do

not mark any boxes in Item 27 and correct the answers

marked in Items 24, 25, and 26, as necessary. Make sure

to follow the correct skip instructions after correcting the

answers in Items 24, 25, and 26.

Unwanted Sexual

Contact

Boxes 4 and 5 include a broad range of unwanted sexual

acts and are included in Item 27 for respondents who do

not consider the unwanted sexual contact as an assault.

We want to ensure that all sexual assaults committed

during an incident are reported. Categories for unwanted

sexual contact are also included in Items 28a and 28b to

ensure that we do not miss any sexual assaults when a

respondent says that the offender tried to attack or

threatened to physically harm him/her.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-68

It may not always be clear whether you should mark

Box 4 (with force) or Box 5 (without force) based on what

the respondent tells you. Generally, if the sexual contact

involved grabbing, pushing, restraining, or other acts of

force, mark Box 4 and then ask the structured probe

below the question in Item 27. If the respondent tells you

that he/she was forced or coerced into having sexual

intercourse or a forced attempt was made to have sexual

intercourse, change the answer in Item 24 to "Yes" and

line through the entries in Items 25 through 27. If the

sexual contact did not involve any force (for example,

only unwanted touching and/or fondling), mark Box 5 in

Item 27. If unsure, go with the respondent's perception of

whether or not force was used.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Something taken without permission" if the

offender stole something belonging to the respondent or

another household member.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Attempted or threatened to take something"

if the offender:

! Tried to take something that belonged to the

respondent or another household member or

! Threatened to take something belonging to the

respondent or another household member. A

threatened theft can be verbal (For example, "I'm

taking your motorcycle.") or nonverbal (For example,

the offender reaches for the respondent's purse, but

doesn't get it.)

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Harassed, argument, abusive language" if

the offender verbally bothered the respondent without

threatening him/her (for example, yelling, teasing,

insulting, arguing, using obscenities, and so forth).

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Unwanted sexual contact with force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)" if the offender used any type of

force during the unwanted sexual contact (for example,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-69

grabbing, pushing, or restraining). Before marking

Box 4, ask the structured probe.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 "Unwanted sexual contact without force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)" if the offender did not use any

force during the unwanted sexual contact (for example,

sexually touching, embracing, and/or fondling the

respondent without grabbing, pushing, or restraining).

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 "Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of

house/apartment" if the offender used force to either break

into or attempt to break into the respondent's house or

apartment during the incident. When NO FORCE was

used to enter or attempt to enter, mark Box 10 "Other" and

explain the break in or attempted break in on the "Specify"

line.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of

car" if the offender used force during the incident to break

into or attempt to break into a car or any other type of

motor vehicle owned by the respondent or another

household member. If force was NOT used, mark Box 10

"Other." Then explain on the "Specify" line how the

offender entered or attempted enter the household

member's motor vehicle WITHOUT FORCE (For

example, the offender entered the motor vehicle through

an unlocked door).

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 "Damaged or destroyed property" if the

offender damaged or destroyed property during the

incident that belongs to the respondent or another

household member.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 "Attempted or threatened to damage or

destroy property" if the offender tried or threatened to

damage or destroy property during the incident that

belongs to the respondent or another household member.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 "Other" and enter a brief and concise

explanation of what happened during the incident on the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-70

"Specify" line when the incident does not fit one of the

preceding categories. Some examples of acceptable

entries for Box 10 are:

! Illegal entry of the respondent's house or car without

the use of force

! Obscene gestures

! Trespassing on the respondent's property

! A "Peeping Tom."

28a. How did the offender TRY to attack you?

Any other way?

28b. How were you threatened? Any

other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If box 5, ASK-

Do you mean forced or coerced sexual

intercourse including attempts?

If "Yes," change entry in Item 24 to

"Yes." Delete entries in 25-28.

Verbal threat of rape..........................................

Verbal threat to kill............................................

Verbal threat of attack other than to kill or rape

Verbal threat of sexual assault other than rape

Unwanted sexual contact with force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)...................................

Unwanted sexual contact without force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)....................................

Weapon present or threatened with weapon......

SKIP

Shot at (but missed)............................................ to 40,

Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon........ page 6

Attempted attack with weapon other than

gun/knife/sharp weapon.....................................

Object thrown at person.....................................

Followed or surrounded......................................

Tried to hit, slap, knock down, grab, hold,

trip, jump, push, etc. ..........................................

Other - Specify

................................................

Items 28a and 28b (How

Offender Tried to

Attack/Threaten)

Ask the question in Item 28a to identify how the offender

tried to attack the respondent when Box 1 "Yes" is marked

in Item 25. Ask the question in Item 28b to identify how

the offender threatened to harm the respondent when

Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 26. Do not ask both

questions.

The answer categories for Items 28a and 28b are the same.

Both items allow for multiple entries, so continue asking

"Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-71

After completing Item 28a or Item 28b, skip to Item 40 on

page 6.

If you determine that none of the respondent's answers for

Item 28a or 28b indicate that there was an attempted attack

or a threat of physical harm, do NOT mark any boxes in

Items 28a and 28b and correct the answers for Items 25

through 27, as necessary. Make sure to follow the correct

skip instructions after correcting answers in any of these

items.

Unwanted Sexual

Contact

Boxes 5 and 6 include a broad range of unwanted sexual

acts included in Items 28a and 28b for respondents who do

not consider an unwanted sexual contact as an attack or

assault. We want to ensure that all sexual assaults

committed during an incident are reported. Box 5

"Unwanted sexual contact with force (grabbing, fondling,

etc.)" and Box 6 "Unwanted sexual contact without force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)" can be marked as an answer for

Items 28a OR 28b.

It may not always be clear whether you should mark Box 5

(with force) or Box 6 (without force) based on what the

respondent tells you. Generally, if the sexual contact

involved grabbing, pushing, restraining, or other acts of

force, mark Box 5 and then ask the structured probe below

the question in Item 28b. If the respondent tells you that

he/she was forced or coerced into having sexual

intercourse or a forced attempt was made to have sexual

intercourse, change the answer in Item 24 (for attacks) to

"Yes" and line through the entries in Items 25 through 28.

If the sexual contact did not involve any force (for

example, only unwanted touching, embracing, and/or

fondling), mark Box 6. If unsure, go with the respondent's

perception of whether or not force was used.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Verbal threat of rape" if the offender was

face-to-face with the respondent and verbally threatened

to rape him/her. For the NCVS, rape means forced sexual

intercourse including both psychological coercion, as well

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-72

as physical force. Forced sexual intercourse means

vaginal, anal, or oral penetration by the offender(s). The

penetration also can be from a foreign object, such as a

bottle.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Verbal threat to kill" if the offender was

face-to-face with the respondent and verbally threatened

to kill the respondent.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Verbal threat of attack other than to kill or

rape" if the offender was face-to-face with the

respondent and verbally threatened to attack the

respondent in some way other than by raping or killing

him/her.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Verbal threat of sexual assault other than

rape" if the offender was face-to-face with the respondent

and verbally threatened to sexually assault the respondent,

but did not threaten to rape him/her.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 "Unwanted sexual contact with force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)" if the offender used some type

of force such as grabbing, restraining, or pushing during

the unwanted sexual contact. Before you mark Box 5,

always ask the structured probe printed below the question

in Item 28b. If the answer to the probe question is "No,"

then mark Box 5. If the answer to the probe question is

"Yes," change the answer in Item 24 to "Yes" and delete

any answers marked in Items 25 through 28b. After

correcting the answer in Item 24, skip to Item 29.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 "Unwanted sexual contact without force

(grabbing, fondling, etc.)" if the offender made some type

of unwanted sexual contact without the use of force. For

example, during the incident, the offender may have

embraced, fondled, or touched the respondent against

his/her will, but did not grab, push, or restrain the

respondent in any way.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-73

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Weapon present or threatened with weapon"

if the offender had a weapon or an object that he/she

intended to use as a weapon and the respondent believed

the offender would use the weapon to harm him/her. Do

NOT mark Box 7 if the offender attempted to use the

weapon or actually shot at the respondent.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 "Shot at (but missed)" if the offender

discharged a gun or rifle in the direction of the respondent

intending to hit the respondent, but the bullet did NOT hit

the respondent.

Do NOT mark Box 8 if:

% The offender was not aiming to hit the respondent or

% The bullet actually hit the respondent. If the

respondent was hit by a bullet, change the answer in

Item 24 to "Yes," delete the answers in Items 25

through 28b, and skip to Item 29.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 "Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon"

if the offender tried unsuccessfully to strike or stab the

respondent with a knife or other sharp weapon, such as an

ice pick or scissors.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 "Attempted attack with weapon other than

gun/knife/sharp weapon" if the offender tried

unsuccessfully to attack the respondent with a weapon

other than a gun, knife, or other sharp weapon. This

could include weapons such as clubs, blackjacks, rocks,

and so forth.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 "Object thrown at person" if the offender

threw an object at the respondent, but did not hit him/her.

Marking Box 12 Mark Box 12 "Followed or surrounded" if the offender

was following the respondent or blocking his/her way, and

the offender's close proximity to the respondent caused the

respondent to fear for his/her safety.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-74

Marking Box 13 Mark Box 13 "Tried to hit, slap, knock down, grab, hold,

trip, jump, push, etc." if the offender tried unsuccessfully

to hit, slap, knock down, grab, hold, trip, jump, or push the

respondent.

Marking Box 14 Mark Box 14 "Other" if the offender tried to attack or

threatened to physically harm the respondent in a way that

does not fit one of the preceding categories. Avoid using

this category if at all possible since most threats or

attempted attacks can be identified in Boxes 1 through 13.

If you do need to mark Box 14, make sure to enter how the

offender tried to attack or threatened to physically harm

the respondent on the "Specify" line.

29. How were you attacked? Any other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If raped, ASK -

Do you mean forced or coerced sexual

intercourse?

If No, ASK -

What do you mean?

If tried to rape, ASK -

Do you mean attempted forced or coerced

sexual intercourse?

If No, ASK -

What do you mean?

Raped

Tried to rape

Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape

Shot

Shot at (but missed)

Hit with gun held in hand

Stabbed/cut with knife/sharp weapon

Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon

Hit by object (other than gun) held in hand

Hit by thrown object

Attempted attack with weapon other than

gun/knife/sharp weapon

Hit, slapped, knocked down

Grabbed, held, tripped, jumped, pushed, etc.

Other - Specify

Item 29 (How Attacked)

After a respondent tells you in Item 24 that he/she was

attacked during the incident, you will mark Box 1 in

Item 24 and skip to Item 29 to determine how the

respondent was attacked during the incident. Item 29

allows you to mark multiple boxes, so continue asking

"Anything else" until you get a "No" response.

If you discover that the respondent was NOT physically

attacked during the incident, leave Item 29 blank, change

the answer in Item 24 to "No," and ask the question in

Item 25 next.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-75

Marking Box 1 (Raped) If the respondent says that he/she was raped during the

incident, always ask the structured probe, "Do you mean

forced or coerced sexual intercourse?", before marking

Box 1 "Raped." This question is included to ensure that

the respondent's definition of rape matches the NCVS

definition. The complete NCVS definition of rape is

printed on page 19 of your Field Representative's

Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554).

If the respondent's answer to the probe question is:

! "Yes" - Mark Box 1 "Raped"

! "No" - Ask the second probe question, "What do

you mean?" The purpose of this question is to

distinguish between rape and other forms of sexual

assault. Do not probe beyond this question. If the

respondent insists that he/she was raped, mark

Box 1. Include as much detail as possible about the

incident as you write your summary report in Check

Item W. If the attack involved another type of sexual

assault, other than rape, do not mark Box 1, instead

mark Box 3.

Marking Box 2 (Tried to

Rape)

If the respondent says that the offender tried to rape

him/her during the incident, always ask the structured

probe, "Do you mean attempted forced or coerced sexual

intercourse?", before marking Box 2 "Tried to rape."

This question is included to ensure that the respondent's

definition of attempted rape matches the NCVS definition.

If the respondent's answer to the probe question is:

! "Yes" - Mark Box 2 "Tried to rape"

! "No" - Ask the next probe question, "What do you

mean?" The purpose of this question is to

distinguish between attempted rape and other forms

of sexual assault. Do not probe beyond this

question. If the respondent insists that the offender

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-76

tried to rape him/her, mark Box 2. Include as much

detail as possible about the incident as you write

your summary report in Check Item W. If the attack

involved another type of sexual assault, other than

tried to rape, do not mark Box 2, instead mark Box 3.

Marking Box 3 (Sexual

Assault Other Than

Rape or Attempted

Rape)

Mark Box 3 when the respondent was sexually assaulted

in some way other than rape or attempted rape; that is, the

sexual assault did not involve forced or coerced sexual

intercourse or attempted sexual intercourse (for example,

fondling the respondent's breasts against her will).

Marking Box 4 (Shot) Mark Box 4 when the offender shot a gun or rifle at the

respondent and the respondent was actually hit by the

bullet.

Marking Box 5 (Shot at

(but missed))

Mark Box 5 when the offender shot a gun or rifle

intending to hit the respondent, but the respondent did not

get hit by the bullet. During an incident, it is possible to

have both an attempted attack and an actual attack.

However, if you mark Box 5 AND do not mark another

box in Item 29 to indicate that some physical attack or

contact happened during the incident, then you should:

! Leave Item 29 blank,

! Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

! Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25

next.

Marking Box 6 (Hit

With Gun Held in

Hand)

Mark Box 6 when the offender used a gun or rifle to strike

the respondent (for example, using it to inflict blunt force

injury rather than shooting at the respondent).

Marking Box 7

(Stabbed/Cut With

Knife/Sharp Weapon)

Mark Box 7 when the offender used a knife or other sharp

object to cut the respondent causing a puncture wound.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-77

Marking Box 8

(Attempted Attack With

Knife/Sharp Weapon)

Mark Box 8 when the offender tried to cut or stab the

respondent with a knife or other sharp object but was not

successful in causing a puncture wound. During an

incident, it is possible to have both an attempted attack and

an actual attack. However, if you mark Box 8 AND do not

mark another box in Item 29 to indicate that some physical

attack or contact happened during the incident, then you

should:

! Leave Item 29 blank,

! Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

! Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25

next.

Marking Box 9 (Hit by

Object (Other Than

Gun) Held in Hand)

Mark Box 9 when the offender was holding an object,

other than a gun, in his/her hand and hit the respondent

with the object.

Marking Box 10 (Hit by

Thrown Object)

Mark Box 10 when the offender threw something at the

respondent AND the thrown object hit the respondent.

Marking Box 11

(Attempted Attack With

Weapon Other Than

Gun/Knife/Sharp

Weapon)

Mark Box 11 when the offender tried to attack the

respondent with a weapon, other than a gun, knife, or

sharp weapon, but the weapon did not make contact

with the respondent. During an incident, it is possible to

have both an attempted attack and an actual attack.

However, if you mark Box 11 AND do not mark another

box in Item 29 to indicate that some physical attack or

contact happened during the incident, then you should:

! Leave Item 29 blank,

! Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

! Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25

next.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-78

Marking Box 12 (Hit,

Slapped, Knocked

Down)

Mark Box 12 when the offender used his/her hands or fists

to hit, slap, or knock down the respondent.

Marking Box 13

(Grabbed, Held,

Tripped, Jumped,

Pushed, Etc.)

Mark Box 13 when the offender physically interfered with

the respondent's movement by grabbing, holding, tripping,

jumping, or pushing him/her.

Marking Box 14 (Other) Mark Box 14 when the offender physically attacked the

respondent in a way not covered in Boxes 1 through 13.

After marking Box 14, make sure to explain how the

respondent was attacked on the "Specify" line. Before

marking Box 14, make sure that the method of attack does

not fit Boxes 1 through 13.

30. Did the offender THREATEN to hurt you

before you were actually attacked?

Yes

Other - Specify

Item 30 (Threatened

Before Attacked)

After identifying in Item 29 how the respondent was

physically attacked, you will ask the question in Item 30 to

determine if the offender verbally threatened to hurt the

respondent prior to the actual attack. The verbal threat

could be to take any of the actions specified in Item 29,

such as threatening to rape the respondent.

The offender could have voiced the threat anytime from

the start of the incident until the moment of the physical

attack.

In most cases, you will mark Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No"

based on the respondent's answer. Mark Box 3 "Other"

only if you need to describe the situation with more than a

"Yes" or "No" answer. Make sure to explain the

respondent's answer on the "Specify" line if you mark

Box 3 "Other."

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-79

31. What were the injuries you suffered, if any?

Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If raped and box 1

in Item 29 is NOT marked, ASK -

Do you mean forced or coerced sexual

intercourse?

If No, ASK -

What do you mean?

If attempted rape and box 2 in item 29 is NOT

marked, ASK-

Do you mean attempted forced or coerced

sexual intercourse?

If No, ASK-

What do you mean?

None -

SKIP

to 40

Raped

Attempted rape

Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape

Knife or stab wounds

Gun shot, bullet wounds

Broken bones or teeth knocked out

Internal injuries

Knocked unconscious

Bruises, black eye, cuts, scratches,

swelling, chipped teeth

Other - Specify

Item 31 (Injuries)

After completing Item 30, you will ask Item 31 to

determine if the respondent experienced any personal

injuries during the attack and, if so, to identify what type

of bodily injuries were suffered from the incident. Do not

include mental or emotional suffering as an injury.

Since the respondent may have suffered various types of

injuries during the incident, continue asking, "Anything

else?", until you get a "No" response.

Marking Box 1 (None) Mark Box 1 "None" when the respondent tells you that

he/she did not experience any physical injuries from the

attack. However, do not mark Box 1 if:

% You mark another box in Item 31 or

% You marked Box 1 "Raped" or Box 2 "Tried to rape"

in Item 29.

Marking Box 2 (Raped) Mark Box 2 "Raped" when you have marked Box 1

"Raped" in Item 29, regardless of whether the respondent

mentions "Raped" as an injury. Do not ask the probe

question a second time, when you have already asked, "Do

you mean forced or coerced sexual intercourse?", in

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-80

Item 29. However, when the respondent does not mention

"Raped" in Item 29 and then reports "Raped" as an injury

in Item 31, make sure to ask the probe question in Item 31.

If you determine in Item 31 that the respondent was raped

during the incident, mark Box 2 in Item 31 and then go

back to Item 29 and mark Box 1. However, if the

respondent answers, "No," also ask, "What do you

mean?". This probe question is needed to distinguish

between rape, attempted rape, and other types of sexual

assaults. Mark the appropriate box based on the

respondent's answer.

Do not ask any additional probe questions after asking,

"What do you mean?". Make sure to include any

additional details about the incident in your summary

report.

Marking Box 3

(Attempted rape)

Only mark Box 3 "Attempted rape" when the respondent

specifically says that his/her injury was an attempted rape.

Do not automatically mark Box 3 "Attempted Rape" when

Box 2 "Tried to rape" is marked in Item 29. If an offender

tried to rape the respondent and the respondent does not

report any physical injuries in Item 31, mark Box 1 "None"

in Item 31.

If the respondent reports an "Attempted rape" injury in

Item 31, but did not report "Tried to rape" in Item 29, ask

the probe question, "Do you mean attempted forced or

coerced sexual intercourse?" If you get a "Yes" answer,

mark Box 3 in Item 31 and go back to Item 29 and mark

Box 2. Then ask if any other injuries were incurred during

the attempted rape and mark the appropriate boxes in

Item 31. If the respondent says that he/she did not mean

attempted forced or coerced sexual intercourse or is unsure

of the answer, ask the additional probe question, "What do

you mean?". It is not necessary to ask these probe

questions again if you already asked them in Item 29.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-81

The second probe question is needed to distinguish

between rape, attempted rape, and other types of sexual

assaults. Mark the appropriate box based on the

respondent's answer.

Do not ask any additional probe questions after asking,

"What do you mean?". Make sure to include any

additional details about the incident in your summary

report.

Marking Box 4 (Sexual

assault other than rape

or attempted rape)

Only mark Box 4 "Sexual assault other than rape or

attempted rape" when the respondent specifically says that

this was one of his/her injuries. Make sure to also ask if

the respondent suffered any other injuries and, if so, mark

the appropriate boxes in Item 31. Do not automatically

mark Box 4 when Box 3 "Sexual assault other than rape or

attempted rape" is marked in Item 29. If the respondent

reports a sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape

in Item 29 and does not report any physical injuries in

Item 31, mark Box 1 "None" in Item 31.

Marking Box 5 (Knife

or stab wounds)

Mark Box 5 "Knife or stab wounds" when the respondent

reports an injury caused by a knife or any other sharp or

pointed object.

Marking Box 6 (Gun

shot, bullet wounds)

Mark Box 6 "Gun shot, bullet wounds" when the

respondent reports an injury caused by the bullet or shot

from a hand gun, rifle, shotgun, and so forth. Do not mark

Box 6 if the injury was caused by being shot with a BB

gun, tear gas gun, or a stun gun.

Marking Box 7 (Broken

bones or teeth knocked

out)

Mark Box 7 "Broken bones or teeth knocked out" when

the respondent reports that he/she suffered broken,

chipped, or cracked bones from the attack. When a

respondent says that one or more of his/her teeth were

knocked out, also mark Box 7.

However, do not mark Box 7 for injuries involving

broken, chipped, or cracked teeth. Mark Box 10 for this

type of injury.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-82

Marking Box 8

(Internal injuries)

Mark Box 8 "Internal injuries" when the respondent

reports that he/she suffered any type of internal injuries

during the attack.

Marking Box 9

(Knocked unconscious)

Mark Box 9 "Knocked unconscious" when the respondent

reports that he/she was knocked unconscious, blacked out,

passed out, went into a coma, and so forth, resulting

directly from the attack.

Do not mark Box 9 if the respondent became unconscious

or fainted due to fear or medical treatment, which cannot

be attributed directly to the attack.

Marking Box 10

(Bruises, black eye,

cuts, scratches,

swelling, chipped teeth)

Mark Box 10 "Bruises, black eye, cuts, scratches, swelling,

chipped teeth" when the respondent reports any minor

injuries that are not covered specifically in Boxes 2

through 9. Examples of injuries to include for Box 10 are

minor burns, bruises, black eyes, cuts, scratches, swellings,

and chipped teeth suffered during the attack.

Marking Box 11 (Other) Mark Box 11 "Other" when the respondent mentions an

injury that does not seem to fit into any of the injuries for

Boxes 2 through 10. Always enter a description of the

injury on the "Specify" line after marking Box 11 (for

example, eye damage from gasoline thrown in eyes or

severe burns from acid dropped on arms). Avoid marking

Box 11 if the injury fits into one of the injury descriptions

for Boxes 2 through 10.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-83

Topic 4. Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/Medical Care/

Protecting Self or Property/Results of Actions/Presence of Others/

Injuries to Others Present)

32.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Were any of the injuries caused by a

weapon other than a gun or knife?

Yes - Ask 33

No -

SKIP

to 34

Item 32 (Were Injuries

Caused by Weapon)

Item 32 is used to determine if any injuries reported in

Item 31 were caused by a weapon OTHER THAN a gun or

a knife. If you feel sure of the answer, you can verify the

answer with the respondent, instead of asking the question.

Otherwise, ask the question in Item 32. If you get a "Yes"

answer, mark Box 1 and continue with Item 33. If you get

a "No" answer, mark Box 2 and skip to Item 34.

33. Which injuries were caused by a weapon

OTHER than a gun or knife?

Enter code(s) from 31.

## ## ##

Code Code Code

Item 33 (Which Injuries)

Item 33 is used to identify up to three injuries reported in

Item 31 that were caused by a weapon OTHER THAN a

gun or a knife. If the respondent answers "Yes" in

Item 32, enter the box number(s) in Item 33 to identify the

injuries. For example, if you marked Boxes 5, 7, and 9 in

Item 31 and the respondent answers the question in

Item 33 with "broken nose and knocked unconscious,"

enter "07" in the first two boxes, "09" in the next two

boxes, and leave the last two boxes blank.

Enter injury codes starting from the left and working

towards the right of the answer space. If a respondent

mentions more than three different injuries from Item 31,

only enter codes for the first three injuries mentioned.

Since we are not interested in identifying injuries caused

by a gun or a knife, do NOT enter the following codes in

Item 33: "01" (None), "05" (Knife or stab wounds), and

"06" (Gun shot, bullet wounds).

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-84

34. Were you injured to the extent that you

received any medical care, including self

treatment?

Yes - Ask 35

No -

SKIP

to 40

Item 34 (Medical Care)

Item 34 is used to find out if the respondent received any

medical care for the injuries reported in Item 31. Only

mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent actually received

medical care which includes any care or treatment

provided for the respondent's physical injuries, including

self treatment. Treatment can range from bandages and

ice packs to setting broken bones and major surgery.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent received any type

of medical treatment for the reported injuries, regardless of

where the medical care was provided or who provided the

treatment. After marking Box 1, continue with Item 35.

Mark Box 2 "No" when the respondent did not receive any

medical treatment for his/her injuries and then skip to

Item 40 on page 6 of the NCVS-2.

35. Where did you receive this care? Anywhere

else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

At the scene

At home/neighbor's/friend's

Health unit at work/school, first aid station

at a stadium/park, etc.

Doctor's office/health clinic

Emergency room at hospital/emergency clinic

Hospital (other than emergency room)

Other - Specify

Item 35 (Medical Care

Received)

Item 35 is used to determine where the respondent

received medical treatment for his/her injuries. Continue

asking, "Anything else?", until you get a "No" response,

since the respondent may have been cared for at more than

one location (for example, at the crime scene, then at an

emergency room, and later at a doctor's office).

Marking Box 1 (At the

scene)

Mark Box 1 "At the scene" if the respondent received any

type of medical treatment at the scene of the attack (for

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-85

example, in the alley where he was mugged or in the

shopping mall where she was stabbed).

Marking Box 2 (At

home/ neighbor's/

friends)

Mark Box 2 "At home/neighbor's/friends" if the

respondent received any type of medical treatment at

his/her home or at the home of the respondent's neighbor,

friend, or relative.

Marking Box 3 (Health

unit at work/school,

first aid station at a

stadium/park, etc.)

Mark Box 3 "Health unit at work/school, first aid station at

a stadium/park, etc." if the respondent received any type of

medical treatment at a health unit or first aid station at

work or school, at a sports arena or stadium, airport, at a

train or subway station, a museum or some other type of

emergency facility other than those covered in Boxes 4, 5,

and/or 6.

Marking Box 4

(Doctor's office/health

clinic)

Mark Box 4 "Doctor's office/ health clinic" if the

respondent received any type of medical treatment at any

type of doctor's or dentist's office, or in some kind of

medical or health clinic that serves patients on either a

routine or an emergency basis.

Marking Box 5

(Emergency room at

hospital/emergency

clinic)

Mark Box 5 "Emergency room at hospital/emergency

clinic" if the respondent received any type of medical

treatment at a hospital emergency room or at an emergency

clinic. Emergency clinics differ from other medical clinics

in that they only deal with emergency cases and do not

provide services on a routine basis.

Marking Box 6

(Hospital (other than

emergency room))

Mark Box 6 "Hospital (other than emergency room)" if the

respondent received any type of medical treatment after

being admitted to a hospital or being referred to an

outpatient treatment center or therapy area. If the

respondent was treated first at a hospital emergency

room and was later admitted to the hospital, mark BOTH

Boxes 5 and 6.

Marking Box 7 (Other) Mark Box 7 "Other" if the respondent received any type of

medical treatment at a location other than the places

identified in Boxes 1 through 6. Avoid marking Box 7 if

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-86

the location fits into one of the other boxes in Item 35. If

you do mark Box 7, always enter a description of the place

on the "Specify" line (for example, in ambulance on way

to hospital or on a street, shoulder of a highway, parking

lot, and so forth, NOT at the crime scene).

CHECK

ITEM E

Is (box 6) "Hospital" marked in 35?

Yes - Ask 36

No -

SKIP

to 38

Check Item E (Medical

Care in Hospital)

Check Item E is used to help you determine whether:

! To ask about overnight stays in a hospital for the

injuries suffered by the respondent during the attack

! To skip over Items 36 and 37 and ask Item 38 next.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item E if Box 6 is marked in

Item 35 and ask Item 36 next.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item E if Box 6 is not

marked in Item 35 because the respondent did not receive

any medical care in a hospital and then skip to Item 38.

36. Did you stay overnight in the hospital?

Yes - Ask 37

No -

SKIP

to 38

Item 36 (Overnight Stay in

Hospital)

Item 36 is used to find out if the respondent stayed in a

hospital overnight to receive medical care for his/her

injuries suffered during the attack.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with

Item 37. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip to

Item 38.

37. How many days did you stay (in the hospital)?

Number of days

Item 37 (Number of Days

in Hospital)

Item 37 is used to identify how many days the respondent

spent in the hospital to receive medical treatment for

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-87

his/her injuries. When determining the number of days

spent in the hospital:

! Count each night spent in the hospital as one day and

only enter whole days (for example, enter 3 days, not

3 1/2 days).

! Count all days spent in the hospital up to the night

prior to the interview.

! If a respondent cannot recall the exact number of

days, enter the respondent's best estimate.

38. At the time of the incident, were you covered

by any medical insurance, or were you

eligible for benefits from any other type of

health benefits program, such as medicaid,

Veterans Administration, or Public Welfare?

Yes

Don't know

Item 38 (Medical

Insurance Coverage)

Item 38 is used to determine if the respondent is eligible to

receive health benefits from a medical insurance plan or

policy. Normally, the benefits will cover all or part of the

hospital expenses and the charges for a doctor or surgeon's

services, medication, and so forth. The respondent needs

to understand that you are asking about health benefits

from a formal plan or policy with defined membership and

benefits which he/she was eligible to receive at the time

of the incident.

In addition to health insurance coverage from a private

company, we are also interested in knowing whether the

respondent was eligible for benefits from any publicly

organized system that provides health benefits, such as

medicaid, Veterans Administration, or Public Welfare.

If a respondent tells you that a friend or family member

offered to pay for his/her medical expenses, probe to find

out whether the respondent was covered by some type of

health insurance plan, even if the respondent did not

submit a claim or the plan did not pay any benefits.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-88

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer,

and Box 3 for "Don't know." After completing Item 38,

continue with Item 39.

39. What was the total amount of your

medical expenses resulting from this

incident (INCLUDING anything paid by

insurance)? Include hospital and doctor

bills, medicine, therapy, braces, and any

other injury related expenses.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Obtain an

estimate, if necessary.

. 00 Total amount

No cost

Don't know

Item 39 (Total Amount of

Medical Expenses)

Item 39 is used to identify the TOTAL dollar amount of

the respondent's medical expenses resulting directly from

injuries suffered during the incident. Include in this figure

any doctor and hospital bills, surgeon's fees, emergency

room expenses, ambulance services, services provided by

a physical therapist, dentist, and so forth. Also include

expenses for medicine and any kind of special devices or

aids required as a result of the respondent's injuries, such

as braces, crutches, dentures, eyeglasses, a wheelchair, or

artificial limbs.

As you ask the question in Item 39, include the

parenthetical phrase, "(INCLUDING anything paid by

insurance)", if the respondent told you in Item 38 that

he/she was covered by some type of medical insurance or

health benefits program.

Enter the respondent's answer in whole dollars on the line

provided for the total dollar amount. If the respondent is

not sure of the exact amount, enter his/her best estimate of

the cost.

If the respondent is still undergoing medical treatment for

injuries related to the incident, ask for the respondent's

best estimate of the projected total cost for his/her medical

expenses and enter the projected estimate on the "Total

amount" line.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-89

Mark Box 0 (zero) “No cost” if the respondent did not

incur any medical expenses for his/her injuries as a result

of the incident.

Mark Box x "Don't know" if the respondent is unable to

give you a dollar amount or even a good estimate.

Items 40, 41, and 42

(Actions to Protect Self

And Property)

Items 40, 41, and 42 are used to determine if the

respondent took any actions during the incident to protect

himself/herself or his/her property and, if so, what kind of

actions were taken.

40. Did you do anything with the idea of

protecting YOURSELF or your PROPERTY

while the incident was going on?

Yes -

SKIP

to 42

No/took no action/kept still - Ask 41

Item 40 (Actions to

Protect Self or Property)

Item 40 is used to determine if the respondent did anything

in an attempt to protect himself/herself or his/her property

during the incident.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and skip to Item 42. Mark

Box 2 if the respondent answers "No" or says that he/she

took no action or just kept still during the incident. After

marking Box 2, continue with Item 41.

41. Was there anything you did or tried to do

about the incident while it was going on?

Yes - Ask 42

No/took no action/kept still -

SKIP

to 47

Item 41 (Actions

Against Offender)

Item 41 is used to find out if the respondent did

ANYTHING while the incident was taking place, even

if the respondent's actions were not intended to protect

himself/herself or his/her property.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 42.

Mark Box 2 if the respondent answers "No" or says that

he/she took no action or just kept still during the incident.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 47.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-90

42. What did you do? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply. Then fill Check Item F.

USED PHYSICAL FORCE TOWARD

OFFENDER

Attacked offender with gun; fired gun

Attacked with other weapon

Attacked without weapon (hit, kicked, etc.)

Threatened offender with gun

Threatened offender with other weapon

Threatened to injure, no weapon

RESISTED OR CAPTURED OFFENDER

Defended self or property (struggled, ducked,

blocked blows, held onto property)

Chased, tried to catch or hold offender

SCARED OR WARNED OFF OFFENDER

Yelled at offender, turned on lights,

threatened to call police, etc.

PERSUADED OR APPEASED OFFENDER

Cooperated, or pretended to (stalled, did

what they asked)

Argued, reasoned, pleaded, bargained, etc.

ESCAPED OR GOT AWAY

Ran or drove away, or tried; hid, locked door

GOT HELP OR GAVE ALARM

Called police or guard

Tried to attract attention or help, warn others

(cried out for help, called children inside)

REACTED TO PAIN OR EMOTION

Screamed from pain or fear

OTHER

Other - Specify

Item 42 (What Actions

Taken)

Item 42 is used to identify the types of actions taken by the

respondent during the incident. Since the respondent may

have taken more than one action, continue asking,

"Anything else?", until you get a "No" response. Based on

the respondent's answer, mark ALL categories that apply.

The types of actions listed in Item 42 are divided into eight

groups and each group has a heading which is in bold and

uppercase letters. Scan these titles to speed up your search

for the correct box(es) to mark for a respondent's answer.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-91

Boxes 1 through 6

Boxes 1 through 6 fall under the heading, USED

PHYSICAL FORCE TOWARD OFFENDER, and

cover any aggressive actions taken by the respondent

against the offender, such as attacking the offender either

with or without a weapon or threatening to physically

harm the offender with or without a weapon.

Boxes 7 and 8

Boxes 7 and 8 fall under the heading, RESISTED OR

CAPTURED OFFENDER, and cover a respondent's

actions taken in an attempt to catch the offender or resist

the offender (for example, the respondent struggled,

ducked, blocked blows, held onto property) without

actually attacking or threatening to physically harm the

offender.

Box 9

Box 9 falls under the heading, SCARED OR WARNED

OFF OFFENDER, and covers a respondent's actions

taken in an attempt to scare or warn off the offender by

yelling, turning lights on, threatening to call the police,

and so forth.

Boxes 10 and 11

Boxes 10 and 11 fall under the heading, PERSUADED

OR APPEASED OFFENDER, and cover a respondent's

actions taken in an attempt to coax the offender not to take

specific actions or to calm the offender down to avoid

injury. This could include pretending to cooperate with

the offender, stalling for time to escape, pleading with the

offender, and so forth.

Box 12

Box 12 falls under the heading, ESCAPED OR GOT

AWAY, and covers a respondent's attempts to get away

from the offender and leave the crime scene.

Boxes 13 and 14

Boxes 13 and 14 fall under the heading, GOT HELP OR

GAVE ALARM, and cover the respondent calling the

police or a guard or trying to attract attention (for example,

crying out for help or sounding a car horn).

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-92

Box 15

Box 15 falls under the heading, REACTED TO PAIN

OR EMOTION, and covers the respondent screaming or

making noise in reaction to pain or fear.

Box 16

Box 16 falls under the heading, OTHER, and covers any

action(s) taken by the respondent that do not fit into one of

the previous categories for Item 42. Before marking

Box 16, make sure that the answer does not fit Boxes 1

through 15. However, if you do mark Box 16, always

enter a description of the respondent's action(s) on the

"Specify" line.

Once you are done completing Item 42, continue with

Check Item F.

CHECK

ITEM F

Was the respondent injured in this

incident? (Is box 2-11 marked in

31 on page 5?)

Yes - Ask 43a

No -

SKIP

to 43b

Check Item F (Was

Respondent Injured in

Incident?)

Check Item F is used to help you decide whether to ask

Item 43a to determine when the respondent took actions in

relation to any injuries incurred during the incident or

whether to skip to Item 43b and ask the respondent

whether his/her actions helped the situation.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item F if one or more boxes

from Boxes 2 through 11 are marked in Item 31. After

marking the "Yes" box, continue with Item 43a.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item F when NONE of the

boxes from Boxes 2 through 11 are marked in Item 31 and

then skip to Item 43b.

43a. Did you take these actions before, after, or

at the same time that you were injured?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Actions taken before injury

Actions taken after injury

Actions taken at same time as injury

Item 43a (When Actions

Taken/Injury)

Item 43a is used to determine whether the respondent took

the actions identified in Item 42 before, after, or at the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-93

same time that the offender injured the respondent.

Based on the respondent's answer, mark all boxes that

apply in Item 43a.

After completing Item 43a, continue with Item 43b.

43b. Did (any of) your action(s) help the

situation in any way?

Probe -

Did your actions help you avoid

injury, protect your property, escape from

the offender - or were they helpful in some

other way?

Yes - Ask 44

No.................

SKIP

to 45

Don't know...

Item 43b (Did Actions

Help)

Item 43b is used to find out whether the respondent feels

that any of his/her actions identified in Item 42 improved

the situation or helped minimize the damage done during

the incident. If the respondent seems unsure of how to

answer this question, also ask the additional probe

question for Item 43b.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 44.

Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't

know" answer and then skip to Item 45.

44. How were they helpful? Any other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Helped avoid injury or greater injury to respondent

Scared or chased offender off

Helped respondent get away from offender

Protected property

Protected other people

Other - Specify

Item 44 (How Actions

Helped)

Item 44 is used to identify how the respondent's actions

improved the situation or minimized the damage done

during the incident. You will only ask this question if the

respondent answers "Yes" to the question in Item 43b.

Based on the respondents answer, mark all boxes that

apply and continue asking, "Any other way?", until you get

a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that his/her actions

helped improve the situation and the answer does not fit

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-94

the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other"

and enter the description on the "Specify" line. Avoid

marking Box 6, if the answer matches one of the other

descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 44, continue with Item 45.

45. Did (any of) your action(s) make the

situation worse in any way?

PROBE -

Did your actions lead to injury,

greater injury, loss of property, make the

offender angrier, or make the situation

worse in some other way?

Yes - Ask 46

No..................

SKIP

to 47

Don't know....

Item 45 (Did Actions Make

Situation Worse?)

Item 45 is used to find out whether the respondent feels

that any of his/her actions identified in Item 42 caused the

situation to deteriorate or the damage done to escalate

during the incident. If the respondent seems unsure of

how to answer this question, also ask the additional probe

question for Item 45.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 46.

Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't

know" answer and then skip to Item 47.

46. How did they make the situation worse?

Any other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Led to injury or greater injury to respondent

Caused greater loss of property or damage to property

Other people got hurt (worse)

Offender got away

Made offender angrier, more aggressive, etc.

Other - Specify

Item 46 (How Actions

Worsened Situation)

Item 46 is used to identify how the respondent's actions

made the situation worse or caused the damage done to

escalate during the incident. You will only ask this

question if the respondent answers "Yes" to the question in

Item 45. Based on the respondent's answer, mark all the

boxes that apply and continue asking, "Any other way?",

until you get a "No" response.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-95

If the respondent mentions a way that his/her actions made

the situation worse and the answer does not fit the

descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other"

and enter the description on the "Specify" line. Avoid

marking Box 6, if the answer does match one of the other

descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 46, continue with Item 47.

47. Was anyone present during the incident

besides you and the offender? (Other

than children under age 12.)

Yes - Ask 48

No.................

SKIP

to Check Item G

Don't know...

Item 47 (Other Persons

Present)

Item 47 is used to find out if anyone besides the offender

and the respondent were present during the incident,

EXCLUDING children under 12 years of age. Other

persons present could include other crime victims,

bystanders, or other household members.

When deciding whether a person is "present" during an

incident, follow the instructions in this chapter for

completing Item 20a, as well as the detailed information

about presence during an incident in Part C, Chapter 3,

Topic 6.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 48.

Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't

know" answer and then skip to Check Item G on page 8 of

the NCVS-2.

48. Did the actions of (this person/any of

these people) help the situation in any

way?

Yes - Ask 49

No.................

SKIP

to 50

Don't know...

Item 48 (Did Actions of

Other Persons Help)

When persons, other than the respondent and the offender,

were present during the incident ("Yes" marked in

Item 47), Item 48 is used to determine whether the actions

taken by any of these persons may have helped the

situation in any way.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-96

As you ask Item 48, only use the phrase "this person" if

the respondent happens to mention that there was only one

other person present. Otherwise, ask the question using

the phrase "any of these people."

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with

Item 49. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or for instances

when the other persons present did nothing or took no

actions during the incident. Mark Box 3 for a "Don't

know" answer. After marking either Box 2 or Box 3, skip

to Item 50.

49. How did they help the situation? Any

other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Helped avoid injury or greater injury to respondent

Scared or chased offender off

Helped respondent get away from offender

Protected property

Protected other people

Other - Specify

Item 49 (How Actions

Helped)

Item 49 is used to identify how the actions of other persons

present during the incident helped the situation. Based on

the respondent's answer, mark all the boxes that apply and

continue asking, "Any other way?", until you get a "No"

response.

If the respondent mentions a way that the other person's

actions helped the situation and the answer does not fit the

descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other"

and enter the description on the "Specify" line. Avoid

marking Box 6, if the answer matches one of the other

descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 49, continue with Item 50.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-97

50. Did the actions of (this person/any of

these people) make the situation worse

in any way?

Yes - Ask 51

No.................

SKIP

to 52

Don't know

Item 50 (Did Actions of

Other Persons Make

Situation Worse)

Item 50 is used to find out whether the respondent feels

that any actions taken by other persons present during the

incident caused the situation to deteriorate or the damage

done to escalate.

As you ask Item 50, only use the phrase "this person" if

the respondent happens to mention that there was only one

other person present. Otherwise, ask the question using

the phrase "any of these people."

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 51.

Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't

know" answer and then skip to Item 52.

51. How did they make the situation worse?

Any other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Led to injury or greater injury to respondent

Caused greater loss of property or damage to property

Other people got hurt (worse)

Offender got away

Made offender angrier, more aggressive, etc.

Other - Specify

Item 51 (How Other

Person's Actions

Worsened the Situation)

Item 51 is used to identify how the actions of other persons

made the situation worse or caused the damage done to

escalate during the incident. Based on the respondent's

answer, mark all the boxes that apply and continue asking,

"Any other way?", until you get a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that the actions of other

persons made the situation worse and the answer does not

fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6

"Other" and enter the description on the "Specify" line.

Avoid marking Box 6, if the answer matches one of the

other descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 51, continue with Item 52.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-98

Items 52 through 54

(Other Persons Victimized

During the Incident)

Items 52 through 54 are used to determine whether other

persons who were present during the incident experienced

any physical harm, the threat of physical harm, or were

robbed by force or the threat of harm. If you identify that

one or more household members over the age of 12 were

also victimized in any of these ways during the incident,

each of these household members should report the

incident during his/her interview.

52. Not counting yourself, were any of the

persons present during the incident harmed

(Pause)

, threatened with harm

(Pause)

, or

robbed by force or threat of harm? (Do not

include yourself, the offender, or children

under 12 years of age.)

Yes - Ask 53

No.................

SKIP

to Check Item G

Don't know

Item 52 (Other Persons

Victimized)

Item 52 is used to determine whether or not other persons

who were present during the incident were physically

harmed, threatened with physical harm, or robbed by force

or threat of harm. As you ask Item 52, make sure to pause

where indicated and make sure that the respondent

understands NOT to include:

! Himself/herself,

! The offender(s), and

! Any children who were younger than 12 years of age

at the time of the incident.

Mark Box 1 if you get a "Yes" answer and then continue

with Item 53.

Mark Box 2 if you get a "No" answer or the respondent

indicates that:

! The only other person who was harmed or threatened

with harm was someone under 12 years of age, or

! The other person(s) did NOT experience any

physical harm or threat of physical harm (for

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-99

example, they had their pockets picked or property

was stolen from their cars while they were in a

bank).

Mark Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.

After marking Box 2 or Box 3, skip to Check Item G on

page 8 of the NCVS-2.

53. How many? (Do not include yourself, the

offender or children under 12 years of

age.)

Number of persons

Item 53 (How Many

Harmed?)

Item 53 is used to identify the total number of persons over

the age of 12 who were harmed, threatened with harm, or

robbed by force or threat of harm during the incident,

EXCLUDING the respondent and the offender(s). Enter

the number of persons provided by the respondent on the

"Number of persons" line.

If the respondent's answer is not a total number (for

example, the respondent says "several," "just a few,"

"many," and so forth), probe to get at least an estimate of

the number of other persons who were present and

personally victimized during the incident.

You must enter a numeric answer in Item 53 when you

mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 52.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-100

54. How many of these persons are

members of your household now? (Do

not include yourself, the offender or

children under 12 years of age.)

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Enter name(s) or

line number(s) of other household

member(s). If not sure, ask.

None

Number of persons

Name(s)

Line

number(s)

Item 54 (Identifying

Household Members

Harmed)

Item 54 is used to:

! Determine whether any of the persons included in the

count in Item 53 are sample household members at

the time of the interview.

! Identify the number of persons included in the count

in Item 53 who are sample household members at the

time of the interview.

! Identify by name or line number each of the

household members, other than the respondent or the

offender(s), who were harmed, threatened with harm,

or robbed by force or the threat of harm during the

incident.

Mark Box 0 (zero) when none of the other persons present

during the incident are current household members.

Using the "Number of persons" line, enter the number of

current household members who were personally

victimized during the incident, excluding the respondent,

the offender(s), and any children under 12 years of age.

Below the "Number of persons" line, enter the names or

line numbers to uniquely identify each of these current

household members who were personally victimized

during the incident. As you interview each of these

household members, complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime

Incident Report, for each household member to report how

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-101

he/she was personally victimized during this incident.

However, if you discover that the person was NOT

personally victimized during the incident, note this fact in

Item 54 of the NCVS-2 for the original respondent and

correct Items 52, 53, and 54, as necessary.

If you have already interviewed one of these household

members and the person did not report this incident, you

need to speak to that person again to verify whether or not

the household member was personally victimized. If the

person was personally victimized during the incident,

complete an NCVS-2 and correct the appropriate

information on the NCVS-1 (for example, number of

incidents in Item 15c and the appropriate screen question

entries and Check Item G for the household member). If

the person was NOT personally victimized during the

incident, note this fact in Item 54 on the NCVS-2 for the

original respondent and correct Items 52, 53, and 54, as

necessary.

For proxy interviews, if the proxy respondent was one of

the household members who was personally victimized

during the incident reported for the proxy person, make

sure that you enter the proxy respondent's name or line

number in Item 54, NOT the name or line number for the

person for whom the interview is being taken (proxy

person).

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-102

Topic 5. Completing Check Item G Through Item 87

(Use of Physical Force/Characteristics of the Offender(s))

CHECK

ITEM G

Did respondent use or threaten to use

physical force against the offender?

(Is box 1-6 marked in 42 on page 6?)

Yes - Ask 55

No -

SKIP

to 60

Check Item G (Use or

Threaten to Use Force)

Check Item G is designed to help you decide whether or

not to ask about who used or threatened to use physical

force first in Item 55. If you are not sure how to mark

Check Item G, refer back to your entries in Item 42 on

page 6.

If you marked one or more of Boxes 1 through 6 in

Item 42, mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item G and continue

with Item 55.

If Boxes 1 through 6 in Item 42 are ALL blank, mark

Box 2 "No" in Check Item G and skip to Item 60.

55. Who was the first to use or threaten to use

physical force - you, the offender, or

someone else?

Mark (X) only one box.

Respondent

Offender(s)

Someone else

SKIP

to 60

Don't know

Item 55 (First to Use or

Threaten to Use Force)

Item 55 is used to identify who was the first person to use

or threaten to use physical force during the incident.

Mark only one box in Item 55.

If the first person to use or threaten to use force during the

incident was:

! The respondent - Mark Box 1

! One or more of the offenders - Mark Box 2

! Someone other than the respondent or an offender -

Mark Box 3

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-103

! Respondent does not know who used or threatened to

use force first - Mark Box 4.

After marking the appropriate box in Item 55, skip to

Item 60.

56.

If household member was present,

SKIP

to 59.

Do you know or have you learned anything

about the offender(s) - for instance,

whether there was one or more than one

offender involved, whether it was

someone young or old, or male or female?

Yes - Ask 57

No -

SKIP

to 88, page 11

Item 56 (Know the

Offender)

The question in Item 56 is ONLY asked when NO

household members were present during the incident

(Box 2 "No" marked in Item 20a). If any household

members WERE present during the incident, do not ask

the question in Item 56 and skip to Item 59. However, if

the respondent was present during the incident, go back

and re-ask the questions in Items 20a and 20b and correct

the entries, as necessary.

Item 56 is used to find out if the respondent knows

anything or has learned anything about the offender(s),

such as whether there were one or more offenders, whether

the offender was young or old, or male or female. It does

not matter from which source the respondent received this

information; for instance, it may have come from the

police, neighbors, or other circumstances of the incident.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," then continue with Item 57. If

you mark Box 2 "No," skip to Item 88 on page 11 of the

NCVS-2.

57. How sure are you of this information? Do

you have a suspicion, are you fairly sure or

are you certain?

Suspicion

Fairly sure

Certain

Item 57 (Certainty About

Offender Information)

Item 57 is used to discover how sure the respondent is

about the accuracy of what he/she knows or has learned

about the offender(s).

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-104

Mark Box 1 if the respondent only suspects what he/she

knows about the offender(s) is true. Mark Box 2 if the

respondent is fairly sure what he/she knows about the

offender(s) is true. Mark Box 3 if the respondent is certain

what he/she knows about the offender(s) is true.

58. How did you learn about the offender(s)?

Any other way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Respondent saw or heard offender..

From other member of household

who was eyewitness.........................

From eyewitness(es) other than

household member(s)......................

From police.....................................

Other person (not eyewitness).........

.SKIP

Offender(s) admitted it....................

to 88,

Offender(s) had threatened to do it.. page 11

Stolen property found on offender's

property or in offender's possession..

Figured it out by who had motive,

opportunity, or had done it before....

Other - Specify..................................

Item 58 (How Respondent

Learned About Offender)

Item 58 is used to determine how the respondent found out

any information about the offender(s). Since there may

have been more than one source, continue asking, "Any

other way?", until you get a "No" answer and mark all

boxes that apply. Once you complete Item 58, skip to

Item 88 on page 11 of the NCVS-2.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent saw or heard the offender,

but was not present during the incident. For more

information about presence during an incident, refer to

Item 20a in Topic 2 of this chapter and Part C, Chapter 3,

Topic 6.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent found out about the offender

from another household member who saw the offender,

but was not present during the incident.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent found out about the offender

from someone who is not a household member, such as a

neighbor who actually saw the offender commit the crime.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-105

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent found out about the offender

from the police department.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the respondent found out about the offender

from someone who is not a household member, but this

person did not see the offender commit the crime.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender(s) admitted his/her offense to

the respondent, another household member, or to someone

who is not a household member AFTER the incident

happened.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the offender(s) threatened to commit this

type of crime against the respondent or someone else

PRIOR to the incident.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the respondent or someone else found

property that was stolen during the incident on the

offender's property or in the offender's possession.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the respondent suspects a particular person

to be the offender because that person had a motive or

opportunity to commit the crime or because the person had

committed similar crimes in the past.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the respondent's answer really does not fit

the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 9 and explain how the

respondent found out information about the offender(s) on

the "Specify" line.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-106

59. What actually happened? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Something taken without permission

Attempted or threatened to take something

Harassed, argument, abusive language

Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry

of house/apartment

Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of car

Damaged or destroyed property

Attempted or threatened to damage or

destroy property

Other - Specify

Item 59 (What Actually

Happened)

Item 59 is used to determine what actually happened

during the incident when only other household members

were present, but NOT the respondent (Box 3 marked in

Item 20b). Since the offender(s) may have taken more

than one action during the incident, continue asking,

"Anything else?", until you get a "No" response and mark

all boxes that apply.

If you discover that a household member other than the

respondent was personally victimized during the incident,

complete an NCVS-2 for the incident when you interview

the other victimized household member. You may need to

remind this household member about the incident, if

he/she does not report it. If you already interviewed the

other household member and he/she did not report the

incident, check back with that person to see if maybe

he/she forgot to mention it.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender stole something that belongs to

the respondent or another household member.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender:

! Tried to steal something that belongs to the respondent

or another household member or

! Threatened either verbally or nonverbally to take

something that belongs to the respondent or another

household member. An example of a verbal threat to

take something is the offender saying: "Give me your

jacket or I'll rip it off your back." An example of a

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-107

nonverbal threat to take something is an

offender lunging towards the household member

reaching for her necklace.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender bothered a household member

verbally without threatening the household member. This

could include yelling, teasing, insulting, arguing, using

obscenities, and so forth.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender forced his/her way into or

attempted to force his/her way into the respondent's home

and physical evidence of force is visible on the

house/apartment after the incident happened. Do not mark

Box 4 if there was no force involved or if the only force

involved was used against a household member and not

against the house/apartment. In this case, you would mark

Box 8 "Other" and explain the situation on the "Specify"

line.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender forcibly entered or tried to

enter a car or other motor vehicle owned by the respondent

or another household member. However, if no physical

force was used to enter or to try to enter the vehicle (for

example, offender opened an unlocked door to enter the

vehicle), mark Box 8 "Other" and explain the situation on

the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender damaged or destroyed property

during the incident that belongs to the respondent or

another household member.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the offender tried or threatened to damage

or destroy property belonging to the respondent or another

household member while the crime was being committed.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of

the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 7 and then explain

what actually happened during the incident on the

"Specify" line.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-108

Here are some examples of acceptable entries after

marking Box 8 "Other":

! Illegal entry into house/apartment, no force used

! Peeping tom

! Offender opened hood of car

! Obscene gestures.

60.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was the crime committed by only one or

by more than one offender?

Only one -

SKIP

to 62

More than one -

SKIP

to 73

Don't know - Ask 61

Item 60 (One or More

Than One Offender)

Item 60 is used to find out if the crime was committed by

one offender or by multiple offenders. If you have been

told already how many offenders were involved in the

incident, you can verify this information with the

respondent, instead of asking the question in Item 60.

Mark Box 1 when only one offender was involved in the

incident and then skip to Item 62 so you can gather

information about the offender's personal characteristics.

Mark Box 2 when there were two or more offenders

involved in the incident and then skip to Item 73 so you

can gather information about the personal characteristics

of all the offenders.

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether there

was just one offender or more than one offender involved

in the incident and then continue with Item 61.

61. Do you know anything about one of the

offenders?

Yes - Ask 62

No -

SKIP

to 88, page 11

Item 61 (Know Anything

About One of the

Offenders)

Item 61 is used to determine whether the respondent knows

anything about the offender(s). You will only

ask this question when the respondent does not know

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-109

whether there was one or more than one offender (Box 3

marked in Item 60).

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," you will continue with Item 62 so

you can collect whatever information the respondent is able

to provide about the offender(s).

If you mark Box 2 "No," you will skip to Item 88 on

page 11 of the NCVS-2.

Items 62 through 72

(Personal Characteristics of

One Offender)

Items 62 through 72 are used to collect an offender's

personal characteristics when only ONE offender is

involved in an incident. There is a separate set of questions

in Items 73 through 87 to collect personal characteristics

for multiple offenders involved in an incident.

62. Was the offender male or female?

Male

Female

Don't know

Item 62 (Offender's Sex)

Item 62 is used to identify whether the offender is male or

female. Based on the respondent's perception, mark Box 1

for "Male," Box 2 for "Female," and Box 3 if the

respondent does not know the offender's sex.

63. How old would you say the offender

was?

Under 12 5

21-29

12-14 6

30+

15-17 7

Don't know

18-20

Item 63 (Offender's Age)

Item 63 is used to identify the approximate age of the

offender based on the respondent's perception. If the

respondent seems unsure, ask the respondent to give you

his/her best estimate.

Each box identifies a range of years, such as "Under 12" for

Box 1, "12-14" for Box 2, and so forth. Mark the

appropriate box based on the respondent's answer. If the

respondent is unable to give you even an estimated age for

the offender, mark Box 7 "Don't know."

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-110

64a. Was the offender a member of a street

gang, or don't you know?

Yes (a member of a street gang)

No (not a member of a street gang)

Don't know (if a member of a street gang)

Item 64a (Offender

Member of a Street Gang)

Item 64a is used to determine whether or not the offender is

a member of a street gang based on the respondent's

perception. Consider a street gang as a group of people

who associate regularly with one another, generally have a

leader or group of leaders who issue orders and reap the

fruits of the gang's activities, and often engage in anti-social

or deviant behavior.

There are currently four major street gangs identified in the

United States: Crips, Bloods, Folk Nation, and People

Nation. Some ways to identify gang members are their

"colors," clothing, tattoos, brands, or imprints of the gang's

name, logo, or other identifying marks on their bodies.

Mark the appropriate box based on the respondent's

answer--Box 1 for "Yes," Box 2 for "No," or Box 3 for

"Don't know."

64b. Was the offender drinking or on drugs,

or don't you know?

Yes (drinking or on drugs) - Ask 65

No (not drinking/not on drugs)..............

SKIP

to 66

Don't know (if drinking or on drugs).....

Item 64b (Offender Drinking or on

Drugs)

Item 64b is used to find out if the offender was drinking

alcoholic beverages or under the influence of drugs

during the incident. Mark this item based on what the

respondent believes or knows.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the offender was actively drinking

or under the influence of drugs or alcohol at the time of

the incident. After marking Box 1, ask the question in

Item 65 next.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if the offender was not drinking or

under the influence of drugs or alcohol and then skip to

Item 66.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-111

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent could not

tell if the offender was under the influence of drugs or

alcohol and then skip to Item 66.

65. Which was it? (Drinking or on drugs?)

Drinking

On drugs

Both (drinking and on drugs)

Drinking or on drugs - could not tell which

Item 65 (Identifying

Drinking or Drugs)

Item 65 is used to distinguish between whether the offender

was just drinking, just on drugs, under the influence of

BOTH alcohol and drugs, or perhaps the respondent cannot

distinguish between the two. After completing Item 65,

continue with Item 66.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Drinking" if the respondent thinks or knows

that the offender was under the influence of only alcohol

during the incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "On drugs" if the respondent thinks or knows

that the offender was under the influence of only drugs

during the incident.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Both" if the respondent thinks or knows that

the offender was under the influence of BOTH drugs and

alcohol during the incident.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Drinking or on drugs" if the respondent thinks

or knows that the offender is under the influence of drugs

or alcohol, but cannot tell which one.

66. Was the offender someone you knew or

a stranger you had never seen before?

Knew or had seen before -

SKIP

to 68

Stranger

Don't know

Item 66 (Offender Known or

Stranger)

Item 66 is used to determine whether the respondent either

knew the offender or had seen the offender in the past.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender knew or had seen the offender

at some time prior to the incident. After marking Box 1,

skip to Item 68.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-112

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender is a stranger to the respondent.

After marking Box 2, continue with Item 67.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know for sure

whether or not the offender is someone he/she knows or a

stranger. After marking Box 3, continue with Item 67.

67. Would you be able to recognize the

offender if you saw him/her?

Yes...............................................

SKIP

to 69

Not sure (possibly or probably)

No -

SKIP

to 71

Item 67 (Could Respondent

Recognize Offender)

Item 67 is used to find out how certain the respondent is

that he/she could identify the offender if the respondent saw

the person again.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the respondent is fairly sure that he/she

would recognize the offender if the respondent saw the

person again. After marking Box 1, skip to Item 69.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the respondent thinks he/she might

recognize the offender if the respondent saw the person

again, but is not really certain. After marking Box 2, skip

to Item 69.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when the respondent knows that he/she could

not recognize the offender if the respondent saw the person

again. After marking Box 3, skip to Item 71.

68. How well did you know the offender -

by sight only, casual acquaintance, or

well known?

Sight only - Ask 69

Casual acquaintance...

SKIP

to 70

Well known................

Item 68 (How Well Known)

After a respondent has indicated in Item 66 that he/she

knew or had seen the offender before the incident, then ask

the question in Item 68 to find out just how well the

respondent knew the offender. If the respondent does

not answer with one of the suggested choices, probe by

repeating the options again.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-113

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent only remembers seeing the

offender previously. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 69.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent knew the offender somewhat

and felt comfortable saying "Hello," but did not necessarily

know his/her name. After marking Box 2, skip to Item 70.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent feels that he/she knew the

offender very well. Let the respondent make this decision.

After marking Box 3, skip to Item 70.

69. Would you have been able to tell the

police how they might find the

offender, for instance, where he/she

lived, worked, went to school, or spent

time?

Yes...............................

No.................................

Other - Specify

............

SKIP

to 71

Item 69 (How to Find

Offender)

Item 69 is used to determine whether the respondent has

any information which may help the police find the

offender. The respondent's answer should be based on

what he/she knows about the offender, and NOT

necessarily on what the respondent actually told the police.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer,

and Box 3 for "Other" when you need to record more than

just a "Yes" or "No" answer. After marking Box 3, make

sure to enter a description of the respondent's answer on

the "Specify" line. Once you have completed Item 69,

skip to Item 71.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-114

70. How well did you know the offender? For

example, was the offender a friend,

cousin, etc.?

Mark (X) first box that applies.

RELATIVE

Spouse at time of incident

Ex-spouse at time of incident

Parent or step-parent

Own child or step-child

Brother/sister

Other relative - Specify

NONRELATIVE

Boyfriend or girlfriend, ex-boyfriend or ex-girlfriend

Friend or ex-friend

Roommate, boarder

Schoolmate

Neighbor

Customer/client

Patient

Supervisor (current or former)

Employee (current or former)

Co-worker (current or former)

Other nonrelative - Specify

Item 70 (How Victim

Knew Offender)

Item 70 is used to identify the relationship between the

respondent and the offender, when the respondent

indicates in Item 68 that he/she was a casual acquaintance

of the offender or knew the offender very well (Box 2 or 3

marked in Item 68). Always read BOTH questions to

ensure that the respondent knows we want to identify all

types of relationships, not just relatives.

Mark only the first box that applies to the respondent’s

answer. Notice that the answer categories are divided into

two groups. Boxes 1 through 6 cover relatives of the

respondent and Boxes 7 through 17 cover nonrelatives of

the respondent, including Box 13 which is out of

sequence.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender was the spouse of the

respondent (husband/wife) at the time of the incident,

regardless of whether they are currently married to each

other.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender was a former spouse

(husband/wife) of the respondent at the time of the

incident. Accept the respondent's answer and do not

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-115

probe when the respondent says "Ex-spouse" or "Former

wife/husband."

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender is the mother, father, step-

mother, or step-father of the respondent. Box 3 is not

intended for parents through marriage, which should be

included in Box 6 "Other relative." After marking Box 6,

indicate the type of other relative on the "Specify" line,

such as "father-in-law" or "mother-in-law."

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child of the respondent by

birth, adoption, or marriage, such as a son, daughter, step-

son, or step-daughter. Box 4 is not intended for foster

children, instead mark Box 13 "Other nonrelative" and

write in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender is a brother or sister of the

respondent or the child of a respondent's step-parent.

Box 5 is not intended for "brother-in-laws" or "sister-in-

laws," instead mark Box 6 and write in the relationship on

the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender was the respondent's aunt,

uncle, cousin, grandparent, father-in-law, mother-in-law,

sister-in-law, brother-in-law, or any offender who is

related to the respondent by blood or marriage and is not

described in Boxes 1 through 5. After marking Box 6,

always enter the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the offender is a nonrelative who has or had

romantic connections to the respondent. For example, the

offender and the respondent were dating at the time of the

incident or used to date prior to the incident.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the offender is a male or female friend or

past friend of the respondent AND there is no romantic

connection between the two persons.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the offender is a person who is NOT related

to the respondent, but was living with the respondent at the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-116

time of the incident, such as a boarder or roommate.

Box 9 is not intended for "live-in" boyfriends/girlfriends;

instead, mark Box 7 for these situations.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the offender attended the same school as

the respondent at the time of the incident AND is not

related to the respondent.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 if the offender lives close enough to the

respondent to be considered a neighbor AND is not related

to the respondent.

Marking Box 12, 14, 15,

16, or 17

Mark the most appropriate box from Boxes 12, 14, 15, 16,

or 17 if the offender is a nonrelative, but is known by the

respondent as a business client, patient, or a supervisor,

employee, or co-worker, including former supervisors,

employees, and co-workers.

Marking Box 13 Mark Box 13 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of

the other nonrelative relationships, but the offender is

either well known or a casual acquaintance. After marking

Box 13, enter the offender's relationship to the respondent

on the "Specify" line, such as the respondent's barber,

Avon lady, and so forth.

Once you have completed Item 70, continue with Item 71.

71. Was the offender White, Black, or some

other race?

White

Black

Other - Specify

Item 71 (Offender's Race)

Item 71 is used to record the race of the offender as

perceived by the respondent. Only three racial

designations are used for Item 71--White, Black, and

Other.

Mark Box 1 for "White" and Box 2 for "Black or African

American." If the respondent mentions a race other than

White or Black/African American, mark Box 3 "Other"

and identify the offender's race on the "Specify" line, such

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-117

as American Indian, Alaska Native, Asian, Native

Hawaiian, and so forth.

If the respondent's answer is "Spanish, Hispanic or Latino"

or any other ethnic origin, such as French or German, mark

Box 1 “White” and do NOT mark Box 3 “Other” and do

NOT enter the ethnic origin on the “Specify” line. The

terms “Spanish, Hispanic or Latino” refer to a person's

ethnic origin or ancestry, and not to his/her race.

After completing Item 71, continue with Item 72.

72. Was this the only time this offender

committed a crime against you or your

household or made threats against you

or your household?

Yes (only time).........................

No (there were other times)......

SKIP

to 88, page 11

Don't know...............................

Item 72 (Other Crimes by

Offender)

Item 72 is used to determine whether the offender has ever

committed any type of crime or threatened to physically

harm the respondent or another household member, other

than the current incident. For this question, do not limit

the respondent to crimes committed only during his/her

6-month reference period.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes (only time)" if the respondent tells you

that the current incident is the only crime this offender has

committed against his/her household. Make sure that the

respondent understands we are interested in crimes

committed by this offender at ANY time prior to this

incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No (there were other times)" if the

respondent says that this offender did commit other crimes

against the respondent or other household members at

ANY time prior to this incident.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not really know

whether or not the offender has committed other crimes

against the household in the past.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-118

Once you have completed Item 72, skip to Item 88 on

page 11.

73. How many offenders?

Number of offenders

Don't know (number of offenders)

Item 73 (Number of

Offenders)

Item 73 is used to identify the total number of offenders

involved in the current incident, when the respondent has

indicated in Item 60 that there was more than one offender.

If the respondent is uncertain about the number, ask for an

estimate of the number of offenders.

Enter the total number of offenders on the "Number of

offenders" line. Only mark Box x "Don't know" if the

respondent is unable to provide even an estimate of the

number of offenders. After completing Item 73, continue

with Item 74.

74. Were they male or female?

All male.........................................

All female......................................

SKIP

to 76

Don't know sex of any offenders...

Both male and female - Ask 75

Item 74 (Sex of Offenders)

Item 74 is used to determine the sex of the offenders. If

the respondent only knows the sex of some of the

offenders, but not all of them, the answer should be based

on the offenders for which he/she can identify the sex.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the respondent says that all of the

offenders were male and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the respondent says that all of the

offenders were female and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when the respondent does not know the sex of

any of the offenders and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when the respondent says that some of the

offenders were male and some were female, and then ask

the question in Item 75.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-119

75.

If there were only 2 offenders (item 73),

SKIP

to 76.

Were they mostly male or mostly female?

Mostly male

Mostly female

Evenly divided

Don't know

Item 75 (Sex of Offenders)

When there were three or more offenders involved in the

incident (as indicated in Item 73) and they were both male

and female (as indicated in Item 74), ask the question in

Item 75 to determine the sex of MOST of the offenders. If

the respondent only knows the sex of some of the

offenders, but not all of them, the answer should be based

on the offenders for which he/she can identify the sex.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when most of the offenders were male.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when most of the offenders were female.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the total number of offenders were equally

male and female.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent does not know how many

offenders were male and how many were female.

After completing Item 75, continue with Item 76.

76. How old would you say the youngest

was?

Under 12 4

18-20 7

Don't know

12-14 5

21-29

15-17 6

30+

Item 76 (Age of Offenders)

Item 76 is used to identify the age range into which the

youngest offender's age fits. Mark the appropriate box

based on the respondent's answer. Mark Box 7 if the

respondent does not know or cannot estimate the age of

the youngest offender. After completing Item 76, continue

with Item 77.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-120

77. How old would you say the oldest was?

Under 12 4

18-20 7

Don't know

12-14 5

21-29

15-17 6

30+

Item 77 (Age of Offenders)

Item 77 is used to identify the age range into which the

oldest offender's age fits. Mark the appropriate box based

on the respondent's answer. When the respondent is not

sure of the age, ask for an estimate. Mark Box 7 if the

respondent does not know or cannot estimate the age of

the oldest offender. After completing Item 77, continue

with Item 78a.

78a. Were any of the offenders a member of a

street gang, or don't you know?

Yes (a member of a street gang)

No (not a member of a street gang)

Don't know (if a member of a street gang)

Item 78a (Members of a

Street Gang)

Item 78a is used to determine whether any of the offenders

were members of a street gang based on the respondent's

perception. Consider a street gang as a group of people

who associate regularly with one another, generally have a

leader or group of leaders who issue orders and reap the

fruits of the gang's activities, and often engage in anti-

social or deviant behavior.

There are currently four major street gangs identified in

the United States: Crips, Bloods, Folk Nation, and People

Nation. Some ways to identify gang members are their

"colors," clothing, tattoos, brands, or imprints of the gang's

name, logo, or other identifying marks on their bodies.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that some or all of

the offenders were members of a street gang.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that none of the

offenders were members of a street gang.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know if any of the

offenders were members of a street gang.

After completing Item 78a, continue with Item 78b.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-121

78b. Were any of the offenders drinking or on

drugs, or don't you know?

Yes (drinking or on drugs) - Ask 79

No (not drinking/not on drugs)...........

SKIP

to 80

Don't know (if drinking or on drugs)..

Item 78b (Offenders

Drinking or on Drugs)

Item 78b is used to determine whether the respondent

believes that one or more of the offenders was drinking or

on drugs during the incident.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that at least one of

the offenders was under the influence of alcohol or

drugs during the incident. After marking Box 1, continue

with Item 79.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that none of the

offenders were under the influence of alcohol or drugs

during the incident. After marking Box 2, skip to Item 80.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether any

of the offenders were under the influence of alcohol or

drugs during the incident. After marking Box 3, skip to

Item 80.

79. Which was it? (Drinking or on drugs?)

Drinking

On drugs

Both (drinking and on drugs)

Drinking or on drugs - could not tell which

Item 79 (Identifying

Drinking or on Drugs)

After a respondent indicates that at least one of the

offenders was under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs,

ask the question in Item 79 to find out whether it was

alcohol, drugs, or both.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that at least one of

the offenders was under the influence of only alcohol

during the incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that at least one of

the offenders was under the influence of only drugs during

the incident.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-122

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent believes that at least one of

the offenders was under the influence of BOTH alcohol

and drugs.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent believes that at least one of

the offenders was under the influence of alcohol or drugs,

but the respondent cannot tell whether it was alcohol,

drugs or both.

80. Were any of the offenders known to

you, or were they strangers you had

never seen before?

All known

SKIP

to 82 3

All strangers Ask 81

Some known 4

Don't know

Item 80 (Offenders Known

or Strangers)

Item 80 is used to determine whether the respondent has

known or ever seen ANY of the offenders prior to this

incident.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent either knows or has seen

ALL of the offenders prior to this incident. After marking

Box 1, skip to Item 82.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent knows or has seen AT

LEAST ONE, but not all, of the offenders prior to this

incident. After marking Box 2, skip to Item 82.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent has never seen any of the

offenders prior to this incident. After marking Box 3,

continue with Item 81.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent does not know whether

he/she has ever seen any of the offenders prior to this

incident. After marking Box 4, continue with Item 81.

81. Would you be able to recognize any of

them if you saw them?

Yes..............................................

SKIP

to 83

Not sure (possibly or probably)...

No -

SKIP

to 85

Item 81 (Could

Respondent Recognize

Offenders)

Item 81 is used to find out if the respondent would

recognize any of the offenders if he/she saw them again.

You will only ask this question after marking Box 3 "All

strangers" or Box 4 "Don't know" in Item 80.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-123

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent is fairly sure that

he/she could identify AT LEAST ONE of the offenders in

the future. After marking Box 1, skip to Item 83.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Not sure (possibly or probably)" when the

respondent may be able to identify AT LEAST ONE of the

offenders, but is not completely sure. After marking

Box 2, skip to Item 83.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "No" when the respondent feels that he/she

probably could not recognize any of the offenders again.

After marking Box 3, skip to Item 85.

82. How well did you know the offender(s) - by

sight only, casual acquaintance or well

known?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Sight only

Casual acquaintance

Well known

Item 82 (How Well

Known)

When Box 1 "All known" or Box 2 "Some known" is

marked in Item 80, you will ask the question in Item 82 to

determine how well the respondent knew the offender(s)

prior to the incident. If you mark Box 1 in Item 80, then

Item 82 refers to all of the offenders. If you mark Box 2 in

Item 80, then Item 82 refers only to the offenders the

respondent knew prior to the incident.

Mark all boxes that apply, since the respondent could be

answering for one or more offenders. For example, the

respondent may consider one offender as a casual

acquaintance (Box 2) and another offender as someone

he/she knows well (Box 3). Notice that the answer

categories are the same as those for Item 68, which asks

about one offender.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent only remembers seeing the

offender previously.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent knew the offender somewhat

and felt comfortable saying "Hello," but did not

necessarily know his/her name.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-124

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent feels that he/she knew the

offender very well. Let the respondent make this decision.

CHECK

ITEM H

Is "casual acquaintance" or "well

known" marked in 82?

Yes -

SKIP

to 84

No - Ask 83

Check Item H (Casual

Acquaintance or Well

Known)

Use Check Item H to help you decide whether to:

! Ask the question in Item 83 or

! Skip to Item 84.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item H if you marked Box 2

"Casual acquaintance" or Box 3 "Well known" in Item 82.

After marking the "Yes" box, skip to Item 84.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item H if you only marked

Box 1 "Sight only" in Item 82. After marking the "No"

box, continue with Item 83.

83. Would you have been able to tell the

police how they might find any of them,

for instance, where they lived, worked,

went to school, or spent time?

Mark (X) only one box.

Yes..........................................

No...........................................

SKIP

to 85

Other - Specify

Item 83 (How to Find

Offender)

Item 83 is used to find out if the respondent had any

information at the time of the incident that could have

helped the police locate any of the offenders. The

respondent's answer should be based on what he/she

knows about the offender, and NOT necessarily on what

the respondent actually told the police.

Mark only ONE box to record the respondent's answer.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No"

answer. If the respondent's answer requires more than a

"Yes" or "No" answer, mark Box 3 for "Other" and enter

the respondent's answer on the "Specify" line. Once you

are done completing Item 83, skip to Item 85.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-125

84. How did you know them? For example,

were they friends, cousins, etc.?

Mark (X) all that apply.

RELATIVE

Spouse at time of incident

Ex-spouse at time of incident

Parent or step-parent

Own child or step-child

Brother/sister

Other relative - Specify

NONRELATIVE

Boyfriend or girlfriend, ex-boyfriend or ex-girlfriend

Friend or ex-friend

Roommate, boarder

Schoolmate

Neighbor

Someone at work, customer

Patient

Supervisor (current or former)

Employee (current or former)

Co-worker (current or former)

Other nonrelative - Specify

Item 84 (How Victim

Knew Offender)

Item 84 is used to identify the relationship between the

respondent and the offender(s). Make sure to ask BOTH

questions in Item 84 so that the respondent understands we

want to identify all types of relationships, not just

relatives. Since a respondent could answer for more than

one offender, mark all boxes that apply.

Notice that the answer categories are divided into two

groups: Boxes 1 through 6 cover relatives of the

respondent and Boxes 7 through 17 cover nonrelatives of

the respondent, including Box 13 which is out of

sequence.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender was the spouse of the

respondent (husband/wife) at the time of the incident,

regardless of whether they are currently married to each

other.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender was a former spouse

(husband/wife) of the respondent at the time of the

incident. Accept the respondent's answer and do not probe

when the respondent says "Ex-spouse" or "Former

wife/husband."

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-126

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender is the mother, father, step-

mother, or step-father of the respondent. Box 3 is not

intended for parents through marriage, which should be

included in Box 6 "Other relative." After marking Box 6,

indicate the type of other relative on the "Specify" line,

such as "father-in-law" or "mother-in-law."

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child of the respondent by

birth, adoption, or marriage, such as a son, daughter, step-

son, or step-daughter. Box 4 is not intended for foster

children, instead mark Box 13 "Other nonrelative" and

write in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender is a brother or sister of the

respondent or the child of a respondent's step-parent.

Box 5 is not intended for "brother-in-laws" or "sister-in-

laws," instead mark Box 6 and write in the relationship on

the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender was the respondent's aunt,

uncle, cousin, grandparent, father-in-law, mother-in-law,

sister-in-law, brother-in-law, or any offender who

is related to the respondent by blood or marriage and is not

described in Boxes 1 through 5. After marking Box 6,

always enter the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the offender is a nonrelative who has or had

romantic connections to the respondent. For example, the

offender and the respondent were dating at the time of the

incident or used to date prior to the incident.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the offender is a current or past friend of the

respondent (male or female) AND the offender has never

had a romantic connection to the respondent.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the offender is a person who is NOT related

to the respondent, but was living with the respondent at the

time of the incident, such as a boarder or roommate.

Box 9 is not intended for "live-in" boyfriends/girlfriends;

instead, mark Box 7 for these situations.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-127

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the offender attended the same school as

the respondent at the time of the incident AND is not

related to the respondent.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 if the offender lives close enough to the

respondent to be considered a neighbor AND is not related

to the respondent.

Marking Box 12, 14, 15,

16, or 17

Mark the most appropriate box(es) from Boxes 12, 14, 15,

16, or 17 if the offenders are nonrelatives, but are known

by the respondent as business clients, patients, or

supervisors, employees, or co-workers, including former

supervisors, employees, or co-workers.

Marking Box 13 Mark Box 13 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of

the other nonrelative relationships, but the offenders are

either known or casual acquaintances. After marking

Box 13, enter the offenders’ relationships to the

respondent on the "Specify" line, such as the respondent's

barber, Avon lady, and so forth.

Once you have completed Item 84, continue with Item 85.

85. Were the offenders White, Black, or some

other race?

(Mark (X) all that apply.)

White

Black

Other - Specify

Don't know race of any/some

Item 85 (Race of

Offenders)

Item 85 is used to identify the racial makeup of a group of

offenders. Since you are asking about more than one

offender, continue asking, "Any other race?" until you get

a "No" response and mark all applicable boxes. Only three

racial designations are used for Item 85--White, Black, and

Other.

Mark Box 1 for "White" and Box 2 for "Black or African

American." If the respondent mentions a race other than

White or Black/African American, mark Box 3 "Other"

and identify the offender(s)'s race on the "Specify" line,

such as American Indian, Alaska Native, Asian, Native

Hawaiian, and so forth

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-128

If the respondent's answer is "Spanish, Hispanic or Latino,

or any other ethnic origin, such as French or German, mark

Box 1 “White” and do NOT mark Box 3 “Other” and do

NOT enter the ethnic origin on the “Specify” line. The

terms “Spanish, Hispanic or Latino” refer to a person’s

ethnic origin or ancestry, and not to his/her race.

Mark Box 4 when the respondent does not know the race

of one or more of the offenders.

It is possible that you could mark all four boxes for an

incident. For example, perhaps there were five offenders

and one was White (Box 1), another was Black or African

American (Box 2), a third was Asian (Box 3), and, for the

last two offenders, the respondent is unable to identify

their race (Box 4).

After completing Item 85, continue with Item 86.

86.

If only one box marked in 85,

SKIP

to 87.

What race were most of the offenders?

Mostly White

Mostly Black

Mostly some other race

Equal number of each race

Don't know

Item 86 (Race of

Offenders)

Item 86 is used to identify the predominant race for most

of the offenders. If you marked only ONE box in Item 85,

leave Item 86 blank and skip to Item 87. However, if the

offenders consist of two or more different races, mark the

appropriate box for Item 86.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when the majority of the offenders were

White. For example, if there were six offenders and four

of the offenders were White, you would mark Box 1.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the majority of the offenders were

Black or African American.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when most of the offenders were a race other

than White or Black/African American, such as Asian,

American Indian, Native Hawaiian, and so forth.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-129

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when the offenders are equally split among

two or more races. For example, if there were a total of

three offenders and one was Black/African American, one

was American Indian, and one was White.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the respondent really cannot identify the

race for most of the offenders.

After completing Item 86, continue with Item 87.

87. Was this the only time any of these

offenders committed a crime against you

or your household or made threats

against you or your household?

Yes (only time)

No (there were other times)

Don't know

Item 87 (Other Crimes by

Any of the Offenders)

Item 87 is used to determine whether at any time prior to

this incident ANY of the offenders committed a crime

against or made a threat to physically harm the respondent

or another household member. With the exception of the

current incident, include any type of crime or threat which

occurred either before or during the reference period.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-130

Topic 6. Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/Items Stolen/

Value of Stolen Property/Repair or Replacement of Stolen

Property/Cost of Repair or Replacement)

88.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was something stolen or taken without

permission that belonged to you or

others in the household?

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Include anything

stolen from an

unrecognizable

business.

Do not include any items stolen from a

recognizable

business operated in the

respondent's home or in a commercial

establishment.

Yes -

SKIP

to 96

Don't know

Item 88 (Theft)

Item 88 is used to determine whether the offender(s) stole

or took anything without permission, regardless of its

value, that was owned by the respondent or another

household member. This could include the personal

property of one household member or property that

belongs to the entire household. It could also include

property stolen during the 6-month reference period from a

former residence, IF the property was stolen from someone

who is a household member at the time of the interview.

If the respondent or other household members own an

unrecognizable business and items were stolen from that

business, those items need to be included when answering

this question. However, do NOT include items stolen or

taken without permission from a recognizable business,

unless they are personal items belonging to the respondent

or other household members.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more

information about recognizable and unrecognizable

businesses.)

You can verify the answer to this question without asking

the question if the respondent has indicated the answer

earlier in the interview. Otherwise, ask the question in

Item 88 exactly as it is worded.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-131

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when:

! Items were taken that belonged to any household

member, regardless of age, during a burglary or

household theft.

! During any other crime of theft, items were taken

that belonged to a household member who is

12 years of age or older.

! Items were taken that belong to an unrecognizable

business owned by the respondent or another

household member.

! Items that belong to a household member were stolen

while in the possession of a friend, neighbor, co-

worker, and so forth, who had borrowed them from

the household member. However, if the borrowed

items were just never returned to the household

member, mark Box 2 "No."

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 96.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" when:

! The items taken belong to a recognizable business

owned by the respondent or another household

member, regardless of whether or not the business is

located at the sample address. However, mark Box 1

"Yes" when the items stolen from a recognizable

business are personal ones belonging to the

respondent or other household members, such as a

purse, watch, and so forth.

! The items taken belong to the owner of the sample

address, who is renting the home to the respondent.

Even though the items were stolen from the sample

address, these items do not belong to the sample

household.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-132

! The items taken belong to a nonhousehold member,

regardless of whether or not the person was at the

sample address.

! The items taken really belong to a nonhousehold

member because he/she lent the stolen items to a

household member. This is true even if the

household member compensated the nonhousehold

member for the borrowed item(s).

! Items loaned to a friend, neighbor, co-worker, and so

forth, and never returned. Do not consider these

items as stolen.

! Items taken belong to a household member who is

younger than 12 years of age for any crime that did

NOT happen in the sample unit or on the property

belonging to the sample unit.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 89.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether any

items were stolen or taken without permission that belong

to him/her or another household member. After marking

Box 3 "Don't know," continue with Item 89.

89.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did the offender(s) ATTEMPT to take

something that belonged to you or others

in the household?

Yes - ASK 90

No..................

Don't know....

SKIP

to 110, page 14

Item 89 (Attempted Theft)

Item 89 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried

to take something that belonged to the respondent or

another household member. You will only ask this

question when Box 2 or 3 is marked in Item 88.

Read the instructions for Item 88 if you need assistance in

determining whether or not to include stolen item(s) for

this question. You can verify the answer to this question

without asking the question if the respondent has indicated

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-133

the answer earlier in the interview. Otherwise, ask the

question in Item 89 exactly as it is worded.

After marking Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, continue with

Item 90. However, if you mark Box 2 for "No" or Box 3

for "Don't know," then you will skip to Item 110 on

page 14.

90. What did the offender try to take?

Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Cash

Purse

Wallet

Credit cards, checks, bank cards

Car

Other motor vehicle

Part of motor vehicle (tire, hubcap, attached

tape deck, attached CB radio, etc.)

Gasoline or oil

Bicycle or parts

TV, stereo, other household appliances

Silver, china, art objects

Other household furnishings (furniture, rugs, etc.)

Personal effects (clothing, jewelry, toys, etc.)

Handgun (pistol, revolver)

Other firearm (rifle, shotgun)

Other - Specify

Don't know

Item 90 (What Offender(s)

Tried to Take)

Item 90 is used to identify the type of item(s) that the

respondent thinks the offender(s) attempted to steal or take

without permission. After asking the initial question in

Item 90, continue asking, "Anything else?", until you get a

"No" response and then mark all appropriate boxes. Some

of the answer categories are self-explanatory, but the

following categories require additional clarification.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Cash" if the respondent thinks that the

offender(s) tried to take paper money and/or coins, such as

$10, $20, or $50 dollar bills and/or nickels, dimes, or

quarters. Do not mark Box 1 for checks or credit cards,

instead mark Box 4. Also, do not mark Box 1 for coin

collections, instead mark Box 13.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Credit cards, checks, bank cards" if the

respondent thinks that the offender(s) tried to take items

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-134

that are of little or no value unless someone tries to use

them fraudulently. For example, someone tried to steal the

respondent's gasoline credit card to fraudulently purchase

gasoline for his/her vehicle. Also mark Box 4 if the

offender(s) tried to take Savings Bonds, bank books,

money orders, debit cards, traveler's checks, and phone

cards.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 "Other motor vehicle" if the offender(s) tried

to take without permission any type of truck, van, sport

utility vehicle (SUV), motorcycle, or moped that belonged

to the respondent, another household member, or an

unrecognizable business owned or operated by a

household member. If the "Other motor vehicle" was

owned or operated by a recognizable business, only mark

Box 6 IF the "Other motor vehicle" was also intended for

personal use by a household member.

Do NOT mark Box 6 for the attempted theft of boats, jet

skis, airplanes, minibikes, or snowmobiles, instead mark

Box 16 and identify the item(s) on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Part of motor vehicle" if the offender(s) tried

to take without permission anything that is ATTACHED

to a car, truck, or other motor vehicle owned by the

respondent or another household member. For example,

include tires, hubcaps or wheels, CD players, scanners, CB

radios, car telephones, antenna, license plates, motor parts,

mirrors, steering wheel, door handles, and so forth.

Do NOT mark Box 7 if the items were stored in the glove

compartment, left on a seat, or kept in the trunk of a car or

the bed of a truck, since we do not consider these items as

attached to the motor vehicle.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 "Bicycle or parts" if the offender(s) tried to

take without permission NONMOTORIZED bicycles or

bicycle parts owned by the respondent or another

household member.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-135

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 "TV, stereo, or other household appliances"

if the offender(s) tried to take without permission items

intended for the use of all or most of the household

members, such as a gas grill, kitchen stove, freezer, VCR,

CD player, personal computer, and so forth.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 "Silver, china, art objects" if the offender(s)

tried to take without permission any type of silver, china,

or art object, regardless of its value.

Marking Box 12 Mark Box 12 "Other household furnishings" if the

offender(s) tried to take without permission household

furnishings, such as furniture, rugs, lamps, mirrors, and so

forth, that are intended for use by all or most of the

household members. Consider items such as a daughter's

bedroom furniture to be household furnishings, even

though the furniture is used primarily by one household

member.

Marking Box 13 Mark Box 13 "Personal effects" if the offender(s) tried to

take without permission items that are intended for the

sole use of one household member, rather than by all or

most household members and are considered easily

movable or portable. For example, a household member's

watch, jewelry, cellular telephone, clothing, camera,

luggage, briefcase, sports or recreation equipment, toys,

makeup, hair dryers, keys, personal collections (Hummels,

coins, bears, dolls, stamps, and so forth). Since the value

of "Personal effects" is not needed, do not probe to

determine their dollar value.

Marking Box 14 Mark Box 14 "Handgun" if the offender(s) tried to take

without permission any type of hand-held gun that is

intended to shoot bullets, regardless of its condition or

usage. For example, the handgun could be a mint

condition collector's item from World War II that is never

shot by its owner or a new handgun kept by the respondent

for protection.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-136

Do NOT mark Box 14 for guns that shoot pellets, BB's,

air, flares, or tear gas. Instead, mark Box 16 "Other" and

identify the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 15 Mark Box 15 "Other firearm" if the offender(s) tried to

take without permission any type of rifles or shotguns that

shoot bullets or shot, regardless of whether the rifle or

shotgun works or is used by the respondent. Do not mark

Box 15 for handguns, instead mark Box 14.

Also, do NOT mark Box 15 for guns that shoot pellets,

BB's, air, flares, or tear gas. Instead, mark Box 16 "Other"

and identify the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 16 Mark Box 16 "Other" AND describe the item(s) on the

"Specify" line if the offender(s) tried to take any of the

following types of items without permission: food, drugs,

food stamps, animals, plants, guns that fire BB's or pellets,

flares, tear gas, and other items that do not fit the

descriptions for Boxes 1 through 15. Also mark Box 16

for boats, airplanes, minibikes, snowmobiles, and so forth.

Marking Box 17 Mark Box 17 "Don't know" if the respondent does not

know or is unsure about what the offender(s) tried to take

without permission.

91. Did the (property/money) the offender

tried to take belong to you personally,

to someone else in the household, or to

both you and other household

members?

Mark (X) only one box.

Respondent only -

SKIP

to 92

Respondent and other household

member(s) - Fill Check Item J

Other household member(s)

only - Fill Check Item J

Nonhousehold member(s) only.....

Other - Specify

..........................

SKIP

to 92

Item 91 (Who Owned the

Property)

Item 91 is used to identify the owner(s) of the property/

money that the offender(s) attempted to steal during the

incident. Mark only ONE box for Item 91. Also, when we

refer to "household member(s)" in Box 2 and 3, we mean

household members at the time of the interview, NOT just

at the time of the incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-137

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender(s) attempted to steal

property/money that belongs SOLELY to the respondent.

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 92.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender(s) attempted to steal

property/money that belongs to the respondent and other

household member(s) either jointly (For example, a car

that is jointly owned by the reference person and his/her

spouse.) or partially (For example, a collection of music

CDs of which 20 belong to the respondent and the

remaining 30 belong to the respondent's son.)

After marking Box 2, fill Check Item J to identify by line

number each household member who owned some of the

property/money that the offender tried to steal.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender(s) attempted to steal

property/money that belongs ONLY to other household

member(s) and NONE of the property/money belongs to

the respondent. After marking Box 3, fill Check Item J to

identify by line number each household member who

owns any portion of the property/money that the offender

tried to steal.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/

money that belongs ONLY to person(s) who are NOT

household members at the time of the interview. After

marking Box 4, you will skip to Item 92.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/

money that belongs to two or more persons NOT described

in Boxes 1 through 4. For example, the property/money

belongs jointly to another household member and a

nonhousehold member. Using the "Specify" line, make

sure to indicate who owns the property/money (for

example, LN 3 and a nonhousehold member). Continue to

complete the entire incident report, regardless of what you

enter on the "Specify" line for Box 5. After marking

Box 5 and identifying the owners on the "Specify" line,

skip to Item 92.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-138

CHECK

ITEM J

Besides the respondent, which

household member(s) owned the

(property/money) the offender tried to

take?

If not sure, ask. Do not enter the

respondent's line number.

Line number

Household property

Check Item J (Identifying

Property Owners for

Attempted Theft)

Check Item J is for your use to identify by line number (for

example, 01, 02, and so forth) each household member

who owns any portion of the property/money that the

offender(s) attempted to steal. Do NOT enter the

respondent's line number.

Always ask the respondent to identify the household

members if you are not sure which line numbers to enter in

Check Item J.

Mark Box 40 "Household property" if the property/money

belongs to the entire household jointly or if more than

three household members own the property/money jointly

with the respondent. It is acceptable to mark Box 40 and

also have one or more line numbers entered in Check

Item J, since the offender(s) may have tried to take both

personal and household property.

92.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was/Were the article(s) IN or ATTACHED

to a motor vehicle when the attempt was

made to take (it/them)?

Yes

Item 92 (Articles In or

Attached to a Motor

Vehicle)

Item 92 is used to identify whether the offender(s) tried to

steal property/money that was either:

! Inside a motor vehicle or

! Attached to a motor vehicle.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-139

For Item 92, you can verify the answer without asking the

question if:

! You marked Box 5 and/or 6 in Item 90 or

! The respondent previously indicated where the

articles were when the offender(s) tried to steal them.

Otherwise, ask the question correctly based on whether

there was only one item or two or more items that the

offender(s) tried to steal. Mark Box 1 "Yes" if ANY of the

articles were in or attached to a motor vehicle. Only mark

Box 2 "No" if NONE of the articles were in or attached to

a motor vehicle. After completing Item 92, fill Check

Item K.

CHECK

ITEM K

Did the offender try to take cash, a

purse, or a wallet? (Is box 1, 2, or 3

marked in 90?)

Yes - Ask 93

No -

SKIP

to 94

Check Item K (Cash,

Purse, or Wallet)

Check Item K is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 93 or skip to Item 94. Refer to your

entries in Item 90. If Box 1, 2, or 3 is marked in Item 90,

mark the "Yes" box in Check Item K and ask the question

in Item 93 to determine whether the offender(s) attempted

to take the cash, purse, or wallet directly from the

respondent. If Boxes 1, 2, and 3 in Item 90 are all blank,

skip to Item 94.

93.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was the (cash/purse/wallet) on your

person, for instance, in a pocket or being

held?

Yes

Item 93 (Cash, Purse, or

Wallet on Person)

Item 93 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried

to steal cash, a purse, or a wallet directly from the

respondent's hands, shoulder, pocket, backpack, and so

forth. For the NCVS, it makes a difference whether the

offender(s) attempted to steal cash, a purse, or wallet

directly from the respondent, rather than from a counter,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-140

car seat, floor of a subway car, or other places where the

respondent may have left cash, a purse, or a wallet.

If the answer is obvious from the information already

provided by the respondent, verify the answer without

asking the question. Otherwise, ask the question using the

appropriate words to identify just the items that the

offender attempted to steal. For example, replace

"cash/purse/wallet" with "wallet" when the offender only

tried to steal the respondent's wallet.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No"

answer and then continue with Item 94.

94.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was there anything (else) the offender(s)

tried to take directly from you, for

instance, from your pocket or hands, or

something that you were wearing?

Exclude property not belonging to

respondent or other household member.

Yes - Ask 95

No -

SKIP

to 110, page 14

Item 94 (Other Property

on Person)

Item 94 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried

to take anything OTHER THAN cash, a purse, or a wallet

directly from the respondent or another current household

member. Exclude attempted thefts of items belonging to

nonhousehold members.

It is acceptable to verify the answer for Item 94 without

asking the question. However, if you ask the question,

omit the word "else" when you have marked Box 2 "No"

in Item 93 or left Item 93 blank.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then ask the question

in Item 95. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip

to Item 110 on page 14.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-141

95. Which items did the offender(s) try to

take directly from you?

Enter code(s) from 90.

Do not include cash/purse/wallet. Exclude

property not belonging to respondent or

other household member.

## ## ##

SKIP

to 110, page 14

Code Code Code

Tried to take everything marked in 90 directly

from respondent -

SKIP

to 110, page 14

Item 95 (Items Tried to

Take From Person)

Item 95 is used to identify the property marked in Item 90,

other than cash/purse/wallet, that the offender(s) tried to

take directly from the respondent or another household

member. Enter the appropriate box numbers from Item 90

to identify the items using 2 digits (for example, 07, 13,

and so forth).

Enter the 2-digit box numbers starting on the left and

working to the right, entering the lowest number to the

highest number. Make sure that you do not enter box

numbers 01, 02, or 03. If you need to enter more than

three box numbers in Item 95, just enter the first three

lowest box numbers. However, if everything that the

offender(s) tried to take was on the respondent or another

household member, mark Box 40 "Tried to take everything

marked in 90 directly from respondent" and leave the code

boxes blank.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-142

96. What was taken that belonged to you or

others in the household? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If purse or

wallet stolen, ASK -

Did it contain any money?

Enter amount of stolen cash where indicated.

Mark the appropriate box(es) for stolen

property or the box for only cash taken.

Cash

. 00 Amount of cash taken

Only cash taken - Enter amount above

Property

PURSE/WALLET/CREDIT CARDS

Purse Ask:

Did it contain money?

Wallet Ask:

Did it contain money?

Credit cards, check, bank cards

VEHICLE OR PARTS

Car

Other motor vehicle

Part of motor vehicle (tire, hubcap, attached tape

deck, attached CD radio, etc.)

Unattached motor vehicle accessories or

equipment (unattached radio, etc.)

Gasoline or oil

Bicycle or parts

HOUSEHOLD FURNISHINGS

TV, VCR, stereo, other household appliances

Silver, china, art objects

Other household furnishings (furniture, rugs, etc.)

PERSONAL EFFECTS

Portable electronic and photographic gear

(Personal stereo, TV, calculator, camera, etc.)

Clothing, furs, luggage, briefcase

Jewelry, watch, keys

Collection of stamps, coins, etc.

Toys, sports and recreation equipment

(not listed above)

Other personal and portable objects

FIREARMS

Handgun (pistol, revolver)

Other firearm (rifle, shotgun)

MISCELLANEOUS

Tools, machines, office equipment

Farm or garden produce, plants, fruit, logs

Animals - pet or livestock

Food or liquor

Other - Specify

Don't know

Item 96 (What Was

Taken)

Item 96 is used to identify the types of property/money that

the offender(s) took without permission. Continue asking,

"Anything else?", until you get a "No" response and mark

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-143

all appropriate boxes. If the respondent mentions what

items were stolen as he/she answers the question for

Item 88, verify those items before marking the boxes in

Item 96 and then continue asking, "Anything else?", until

you get a "No" response. Then mark all appropriate boxes.

Item 96 has several more answer categories than Item 90.

These categories are grouped together under seven

separate headings:

! Cash

! Property

! Vehicle or Parts

! Household Furnishings

! Personal Effects

! Firearms

! Miscellaneous

Those categories which are NOT self-explanatory are

covered below.

Long-Term Rentals If the respondent mentions that the stolen property was

leased or rented by the respondent or another household

member for one month or longer, consider the household

member(s) as the owner(s) of the stolen property for this

item. If necessary, ask the respondent how long the stolen

property has been leased or rented.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Only cash taken" when the offender(s)

ONLY stole money (bills or coins). After marking Box 1,

ask the respondent for the total amount of money stolen

and enter the whole dollar amount on the line above

Box 1. Round up or down as necessary. For example, if

the amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-144

amount given is $150.49, round down to $150. If the

respondent gives an amount that is less than $1, round up

to $1. When the respondent is unable to give an exact

dollar amount, ask for his/her best estimate.

If the respondent mentions that a credit card, bank card,

checks, or a coin collection were stolen, do NOT mark

Box 1. Instead, mark Box 4 for credit cards, bank cards,

and checks and mark Box 17 for coin collections.

Marking Box 2 and

Box 3

Mark Box 2 when the offender(s) stole a purse from the

respondent or another household member and mark Box 3

when the offender(s) stole a wallet from the respondent or

another household member. After marking Box 2 and/or

Box 3, ALWAYS ask if the purse and/or wallet contained

any money when it was stolen. If you get a "Yes" answer,

find out how much money and enter the whole dollar

amount on the line above Box 1. Round up or down as

necessary (as instructed in "Marking Box 1").

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when the offender(s) stole a credit card, bank

card, checks, and so forth, which are of little value unless

used fraudulently to obtain money and/or property. Also

mark Box 4 for stolen Savings Bonds, bank books, money

orders, travelers checks, and phone cards.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 when the offender(s) stole a truck, van, sports

utility vehicle (SUV), motorcycle, moped, motorized

bicycle, or any motor vehicle OTHER THAN a car. Do

not mark Box 6 for boats, airplanes, minibikes, jet skis, or

snowmobiles, instead mark Box 26 "Other" and identify

the property on the "Specify" line.

Do not mark Box 6 if the motor vehicle is owned by a

recognizable business and is never used for a household

member's personal use.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 when the offender(s) stole anything that is

ATTACHED to a car, truck, van, SUV, and so forth. For

example, tires, hubcaps or wheels, CD players, scanners,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-145

CB radios, car telephones, antenna, license plates, motor

parts, mirrors, steering wheel, door handles, and so forth.

Do NOT mark Box 7 if the items were stored in the glove

compartment, left on a seat, or kept in the trunk of a car or

the bed of a truck, since we do not consider these items as

attached to the motor vehicle.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 when the offender(s) stole motor vehicle

accessories or equipment that was NOT ATTACHED to

the motor vehicle, such as a spare tire, a detachable

antenna on the back seat, a removable CD player or

changer in the trunk, and so forth.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 when the offender(s) stole any type of

bicycle or bicycle parts that do not have a motor. Include

motorized bicycles in Box 6.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 when the offender(s) stole any type of

electrical or gas appliances, such as kitchen stoves,

freezers, dishwashers, CD players, VCRs, computers, FAX

machines, and so forth.

Marking Box 12 Mark Box 12 when the offender(s) stole any type of silver,

china, or art object, regardless of its value.

Marking Box 13 Mark Box 13 when the offender(s) stole any type of

household furnishings that are intended for the use of all or

most of the household members, even if the furnishings

belong to one or more household members. For example,

bedroom furniture, rugs, patio furniture, and so forth.

If you are unsure whether the stolen items are household

furnishings or personal effects, decide based on whether

the stolen items are considered portable or movable. If

the stolen item is not easily movable or portable, consider

it a household furnishing. Otherwise, mark the appropriate

"Personal Effects" box (Boxes 14 through 19) to identify a

stolen item that is intended for the use of a specific

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-146

household member, rather than all or most household

members.

Marking Box 14 Mark Box 14 when the offender(s) stole any type of

portable electronic or photographic gear intended for the

use of a specific household member, such as Walkman

radios, handheld computer games, video or audio

cassettes, calculators, cameras, and so forth.

Marking Box 15 Mark Box 15 when the offender(s) stole the following

types of personal items that belong to a specific household

member: hats, gloves, coats, shoes, jackets, briefcases,

luggage, and so forth.

Marking Box 16 Mark Box 16 when the offender(s) stole any of the

following types of personal items, regardless of their

value: rings, necklaces, bracelets, money clips, cuff links,

tie tacks, watches, and so forth.

Marking Box 17 Mark Box 17 when the offender(s) stole any type of

personal collection, regardless of its value, such as coins,

ceramic bears, dolls, stamps, books, baseball cards, and so

forth.

Marking Box 18 Mark Box 18 when the offender(s) stole any type of toy,

sports or recreation equipment that belongs to a specific

household member and is not covered in Boxes 14 through

17. Examples of such items are bowling balls, tennis

rackets, BB guns, baby dolls, and so forth.

Marking Box 19 Mark Box 19 when the offender(s) stole any personal

objects that are easily movable, but do not fit the

descriptions in Boxes 14 through 18. For example,

these objects could include house or car keys, makeup,

hair dryer, curling iron, flare guns, books, and so forth.

Marking Box 20 Mark Box 20 when the offender(s) stole any type of hand-

held guns (for example, pistols, revolvers, and so forth),

regardless of their condition or intended use (for example,

hunting, display, target practice, and so forth). Box 20 is

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-147

not intended for pellet guns, BB guns, air pistols, flare

guns, or tear gas guns. Instead, mark Box 18 for pellet

guns, BB guns, and air pistols and mark Box 19 for flare

and tear gas guns.

Marking Box 21 Mark Box 21 when the offender(s) stole any type of

firearm OTHER THAN a handgun, regardless of its

condition or intended use. For example, you should mark

Box 21 for stolen machine guns, rifles, shotguns, and so

forth.

Box 21 is NOT intended for pellet guns, BB guns, air

pistols, flare guns, or tear gas guns. Instead, mark Box 18

for pellet guns, BB guns, and air pistols and mark Box 19

for flare guns and tear gas guns.

Marking Box 22 Mark Box 22 when the offender(s) stole power or hand

tools, yard equipment (for example, lawn mowers, leaf

blowers, and so forth) and any type of office equipment

stolen from an unrecognizable business (for example, file

cabinets, personal computers, printers, FAX machines,

scanners, and so forth). However, if the stolen office

equipment is electronic (for example, computers, printers,

FAX machines, scanners, and so forth) AND is used

primarily for the personal use of a household member,

mark Box 14.

Marking Box 23 Mark Box 23 when the offender(s) stole any produce,

fruit, firewood, straw, hay, or plants (flower or vegetable)

intended for sale and NOT for the personal use or

consumption of the household members. Mark Box 25 for

any farm or garden produce intended for the household's

personal consumption.

Marking Box 24 Mark Box 24 when the offender(s) stole any type of

animals owned by the respondent or another household

member, regardless of whether or not the animal was a pet.

This category includes cats, dogs, parakeets, hamsters,

pigs, cows, horses, and so forth.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-148

Marking Box 25 Mark Box 25 when the offender(s) stole any type of edible

food, nonalcoholic beverage, or liquor, unless the stolen

food is produce or fruit intended for sale. If stolen

produce or fruit was intended for sale by the household,

mark Box 23.

Marking Box 26 Mark Box 26 when the offender(s) stole any items that do

not fit the descriptions for any of the previous categories.

After marking Box 26, make sure to identify the item on

the "Specify" line. Examples of entries could include:

cases of soda belonging to an unrecognizable business or

an airplane owned by the respondent and intended for

personal use only.

Marking Box 27 Mark Box 27 when the respondent does not know or is

unsure what the offender(s) took without permission. It is

acceptable to mark this box for some stolen items and still

mark other boxes in Item 96 for items the respondent

knows or feels sure were stolen during the incident.

After completing Item 96, continue with Item 97 on

page 13.

97. Did the stolen (property/money) belong

to you personally, to someone else in

the household, or to both you and other

household members?

Mark (X) only one box.

Respondent only -

SKIP

to Check Item M

Respondent and other household

member(s) - Fill Check Item L

Other household member(s) only - Fill Check Item L

Nonhousehold member(s) only -

Other - Specify

SKIP

to Check Item M

Item 97 (Who Owned

Property)

Item 97 is used to identify the owner(s) of the property/

money that the offender(s) stole during the incident. Mark

only ONE box. Also, when we refer to "household

member(s)" in Box 2 and 3, we mean household members

at the time of the interview, NOT just at the time of the

incident. Keep in mind that the property owner could be a

current household member whose property was stolen

from a former residence during the 6-month reference

period.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-149

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender(s) stole property/money that

belongs SOLELY to the respondent. After marking Box 1,

skip to Check Item M.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender(s) stole property/money that

belongs to the respondent and other household member(s)

either jointly (For example, a video camera that is jointly

owned by the reference person and his/her spouse.) or

partially (For example, a collection of music CDs of which

20 belong to the respondent and the remaining 30 belong

to the respondent's son.)

After marking Box 2, fill Check Item L to identify by line

number each household member who owned any part of

the property/money that the offender took without

permission.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender(s) stole property/money that

belongs ONLY to other household member(s) and NONE

of the property/money belongs to the respondent. After

marking Box 3, fill Check Item L to identify by line

number each household member who owns any portion of

the property/money that the offender stole.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender(s) stole property/money that

belongs ONLY to person(s) who are NOT household

members at the time of the interview. After marking

Box 4, skip to Check Item M.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender(s) stole property/money that

belongs to two or more persons NOT described in Boxes 1

through 4. For example, the property/money belongs

jointly to another household member and a nonhousehold

member. Using the "Specify" line, make sure to indicate

who owns the property/money (for example, LN 3 and a

nonhousehold member). Continue to complete the entire

incident report, regardless of what you enter on the

"Specify" line for Box 5. After marking Box 5 and

identifying the owners on the "Specify" line, skip to Check

Item M.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-150

CHECK

ITEM L

Besides the respondent, which

household member(s) owned the

stolen (property/money)?

If not sure, ask. Do not enter the

respondent's line number.

Line number

Household property

Check Item L (Identifying

Stolen Property Owners)

Check Item L is for your use to identify by line number

(for example, 01, 02, and so forth) each household

member who owns any portion of the property/money that

the offender(s) stole during the incident. Do NOT enter

the respondent's line number.

Always ask the respondent to identify the household

members if you are not sure which line numbers to enter in

Check Item L.

Mark Box 40 "Household property" if the property/money

belongs to the entire household jointly or if more than

three household members own the property/money jointly

with the respondent. It is acceptable to mark Box 40 and

also have one or more line numbers entered in Check

Item L, since the offender(s) may have tried to take both

personal and household property.

CHECK

ITEM M

Was a car or other motor vehicle taken?

(Is box 5 or 6 marked in 96?)

Yes - Ask 98

No -

SKIP

to 100

Check Item M (Theft of

Car or Other Motor

Vehicle)

Check Item M is used to help you decide whether to ask

the question in Item 98 next when the stolen property

was a car or other motor vehicle or to skip to Item 100

when no car or other motor vehicle was stolen during the

incident.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item M if you marked

Box 5 or 6 in Item 96 and then continue with Item 98.

Otherwise, mark the "No" box and skip to Item 100.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-151

98. Had permission to use the (car/motor

vehicle) ever been given to the

offender(s)?

Yes - Ask 99

No..................

SKIP

to Check Item N

Don't know....

Item 98 (Permission to Use

Car/Motor Vehicle)

Item 98 is used to determine whether the owner of the

stolen car or other motor vehicle EVER gave the offender

permission to use the vehicle.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent has EVER given the

offender permission to use the vehicle. Also mark Box 1

if permission can be assumed, such as in a family

situation. After marking Box 1, continue with Item 99.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent NEVER gave the

offender prior permission to use the car or other motor

vehicle. After marking Box 2, skip to Check Item N.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent has no idea

whether the offender had permission to use the stolen

vehicle. This could occur when the offender has not been

identified. After marking Box 3, skip to Check Item N.

99. Did the offender return the (car/motor

vehicle) this time?

Yes

SKIP

to Check Item N

Item 99 (Did Offender

Return Car/Motor

Vehicle)

Item 99 is used to find out if the offender personally

returned the motor vehicle that was taken during the

incident of his/her own free will.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the offender did return the motor

vehicle in person of his/her own free will.

Mark Box 2 "No" if:

! The police returned the motor vehicle.

! The motor vehicle was recovered in a way OTHER

THAN by the offender or the police.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-152

! The motor vehicle was never returned or recovered.

After marking the appropriate box for Item 99, fill Check

Item N.

100.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was/Were the article(s) IN or

ATTACHED to a motor vehicle when

(they were/it was) taken?

Yes

Item 100 (Articles In or

Attached to Motor

Vehicle)

Item 100 is used to find out if any articles that the offender

stole were either in or attached to a motor vehicle during

the incident. You can verify the answer to this question

without asking it if the respondent mentioned earlier in the

interview where the articles were when stolen. Otherwise,

ask the question using the appropriate wording based on

whether there was one or more items stolen. For example,

if only one item was stolen, ask, "Was the article IN or

ATTACHED to the motor vehicle when it was taken?"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if ANY articles stolen during the

incident were in or attached to a motor vehicle. Mark

Box 2 "No" if NONE of the articles stolen during the

incident were in or attached to a motor vehicle. Also mark

Box 2 "No" without asking the question in Item 100 when

the ONLY boxes marked in Item 96 are Boxes 5 and/or 6.

After completing Item 100, continue with Check Item N.

CHECK

ITEM N

Was cash, purse, or a wallet taken? (Is a

cash amount entered or box 1, 2, or 3

marked in 96?)

Yes - Ask 101

No -

SKIP

to 102

Check Item N (Cash,

Purse, or Wallet Taken)

Check Item N is used to help you decide whether or not to

ask the question in Item 101. Before marking the

appropriate box, look back at the boxes you marked in

Item 96. If you marked Box 1, 2, or 3 or entered a cash

amount above Box 1, mark the "Yes" box in Check Item N

and ask the question in Item 101. Otherwise, mark the

"No" box and skip to Item 102.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-153

101.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was the (cash/purse/wallet) on your

person, for instance, in a pocket or

being held?

Yes

Item 101 (Cash, Purse, or

Wallet on Person)

Item 101 is used to determine whether the cash, purse, or

wallet was taken directly from the respondent, such as

from his/her hands or pockets. The answer to this question

is important in classifying the crime accurately.

If the respondent has already indicated the answer to this

question, you can verify the answer without asking the

question. Otherwise, ask the question and only read the

items that were stolen. For example, replace "cash/purse/

wallet" with "wallet" when only the respondent's wallet

was stolen.

After completing Item 101, continue with Item 102.

102.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Was there anything (else) the

offender(s) took directly from you, for

instance, from your pocket or hands, or

something that you were wearing?

Exclude property not belonging to

respondent or other household member.

Yes - Ask 103

No -

SKIP

to 104

Item 102 (Other Items

Taken Directly From

Person)

Item 102 is used to determine whether anything OTHER

THAN cash, a purse, or a wallet were taken directly from

the respondent, such as a bracelet from the respondent's

wrist, a hat from the respondent's head, or a computer

game from the respondent's pocket. Only include property

stolen directly from the respondent or another household

member.

If the answer is obvious from the information already

provided, just verify the answer without asking the

question. Otherwise, ask the question using the

appropriate wording. For instance, if you marked Box 1 in

Item 101 and there was only one offender, ask the question

in Item 102 this way:

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-154

"Was there anything else the offender took directly from

you, for instance, from your pocket or hands, or

something that you were wearing?"

If you marked Box 2 in Item 101 or Item 101 is blank,

omit the word "else" as you read the question in Item 102.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with

Item 103. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and skip to

Item 104.

103. Which items did the offender(s) take

directly from you?

Enter code(s) from 96.

Do not include cash/purse/wallet. Exclude

property not belonging to respondent or

other household member.

## ## ##

Code Code Code

Everything marked in 96 was taken

directly from respondent

Item 103 (Identifying

Items Taken Directly

From Person)

Item 103 is used to identify the property marked in

Item 96, OTHER THAN cash/purse/wallet, that the

offender(s) took directly from the respondent or another

current household member. Enter the appropriate box

numbers from Item 96 to identify the items using 2 digits

(for example, 07, 13, and so forth).

Enter the 2-digit box numbers starting on the left and

working to the right, entering the lowest number to the

highest number. Make sure that you do not enter box

numbers 01, 02, or 03. If you need to enter more than

three box numbers in Item 103, just enter the first three

lowest box numbers. However, if the offender stole

everything directly from the respondent or another

household member, mark Box 40 "Everything marked in

96 was taken directly from respondent" and leave the

code boxes blank. This is true even when cash, a purse,

or a wallet were also taken directly from the respondent

or another current household member.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-155

104.

If only cash/checks/credit cards is marked in

item 96,

SKIP

to 106.

What was the value of the PROPERTY

that was taken? Include recovered

property. (Exclude any stolen cash/

checks/credit cards. If jointly owned with

a nonhousehold member(s), include only

share owned by household members.)

. 00 Value of property taken

Item 104 (Value of Stolen

Property)

Item 104 is used to identify the dollar amount for the

value of property stolen during the incident, regardless of

whether or not it was recovered. If only cash, checks, or

credit cards were stolen, leave Item 104 blank and skip to

Item 106.

Let the respondent decide how he/she will arrive at this

figure and enter the respondent's best estimate of the

value of stolen property, when necessary. Only include

the dollar amount for stolen property owned by the

respondent or another current household member.

To assist the respondent in deciding the value of the

stolen property, you may remind the respondent of the

articles stolen. If the respondent gives you separate

amounts for each item, just total the amounts and enter

the sum on the answer line.

105. How did you decide the value of the

property that was taken? Any other

way?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Original cost

Replacement cost

Personal estimate of current value

Insurance report estimate

Police estimate

Don't know

Other - Specify

Item 105 (Method for

Determining Value)

Item 105 is used to identify how the respondent arrived at

the dollar amount reported in Item 104. Ask the question

as worded and continue asking, "Any other way?", until

you get a "No" answer. Mark all methods that the

respondent mentions.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-156

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when one of the methods used to arrive at the

amount entered in Item 104 was the price originally paid

for the item when it was purchased.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when one of the methods used to arrive at the

amount entered in Item 104 was the price to replace the

item, regardless of the original purchase price.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when one of the methods used to arrive at the

amount entered in Item 104 was the respondent's personal

estimate of the stolen item's worth or current value, which

is not necessarily the same as the item's replacement cost.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when one of the methods used to arrive at the

amount entered in Item 104 was the insurance company

statement of the stolen property's worth.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 when one of the methods used to arrive at the

amount entered in Item 104 was the police department's

statement of the stolen property's worth.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 "Don't know" only after your probing

questions to identify the method used are unsuccessful.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Other" if the respondent mentions a method

that does not fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After marking Box 7, enter the method used on the

"Specify" line, such as a friend's estimate. Also mark

Box 7 for stolen food stamps and enter "face value" of the

food stamps on the "Specify" line.

106. Was all or part of the stolen (money/

property) recovered, not counting

anything received from insurance?

All -

SKIP

to Check Item O

Part - Ask 107

None -

SKIP

to 109

Item 106 (Recovery of

Stolen Property)

Item 106 is used to find out whether any or all of the

stolen money and/or property was recovered. As you read

the question, choose the correct words based on what you

marked as stolen in Item 96. For example, if only money

was stolen, just read the word "money" or, if both money

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-157

and property were stolen, read the words "money and

property."

For stolen money, only include money returned by the

offender. Also include the actual stolen money that

someone other than the offender found or discovered and

returned to the owner. Do NOT include the

reimbursement of money from an insurance company, a

relative, friend, or anyone OTHER THAN the offender.

For stolen property, only include the return of the

original property that was stolen, NOT any replacement

property from any source (for example, an insurance

company or the offender). Also include recovered stolen

property that is being held as evidence in a court case,

even though the property has not yet been returned to the

owner.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when ALL the money and ALL the property

stolen during the incident was recovered. In other words,

everything that was stolen during the incident was or will

be returned to the owner. After marking Box 1, skip to

Check Item O.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when only a portion of the stolen money

and/or property was recovered and was or will be

returned to the owner. After marking Box 2, continue

with Item 107.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when NONE of the stolen money and/or

property was recovered. After marking Box 3, skip to

Item 109.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-158

107. What was recovered? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If purse or wallet

recovered, ASK -

Did it contain any money?

Enter amount of recovered cash where

indicated. Mark the appropriate box(es) for

recovered property or the box for only cash

recovered.

Cash

. 00 Amount of cash recovered

Only cash recovered

Property

Purse Ask:

Did it contain any money?

Wallet

Credit cards, checks, bank cards

Car or other motor vehicle

Property other than the above

Item 107 (Identifying

Recovered Stolen

Property)

Item 107 is used to identify what part of the stolen money

and/or property was recovered after the incident. After

asking the initial question, continue asking, "Anything

else?" until you get a "No" response and mark all

appropriate boxes. If the owner's stolen purse or wallet

was recovered, ask the additional question, "Did it

contain any money?".

For stolen money, only include money returned by the

offender or the actual stolen money that someone other

than the offender found and returned to the owner. Do

NOT include the reimbursement of money from an

insurance company, a relative, friend, or anyone OTHER

THAN the offender.

For stolen property, only include the return of the

original property that was stolen, NOT any replacement

property from any source (for example, an insurance

company or the offender). Also include recovered

property that is being held as evidence in a court case,

even though the property has not yet been returned to the

owner.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if ONLY the stolen cash was recovered and

there were other stolen items NOT recovered. After

marking Box 1, enter the whole dollar amount recovered

on the line above Box 1. Round up or down as

necessary. For example, if the amount given is $150.50,

round up to $151 and, if the amount given is $150.49,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-159

round down to $150. If the respondent gives an amount

that is less than $1, round up to $1. When the

respondent is unable to give an exact dollar amount, ask

for his/her best estimate.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the owner's stolen purse was recovered.

After marking Box 2, always ask, "Did it contain any

money?". If the recovered purse did contain money,

enter the whole dollar amount on the line above Box 1.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the owner's stolen wallet was recovered.

After marking Box 3, always ask, "Did it contain any

money?". If the recovered wallet did contain money,

enter the whole dollar amount on the line above Box 1.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the owner's stolen credit cards, checks,

bank cards, Savings Bonds, bank books, money orders,

or travelers checks were recovered.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the owner's stolen car or other motor

vehicle was recovered.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if some part of the owner's stolen property

was recovered and it does not fit any of the descriptions

in Boxes 2 through 5. This could include items marked

in Boxes 7 through 26 in Item 96. Also mark Box 6 if

the respondent does not know or is unsure about what

part of the stolen property was recovered.

CHECK

ITEM O

Was PROPERTY other than cash,

checks or credit cards recovered? (If

not sure, ask.)

Yes - Ask 108

No -

SKIP

to 109

Check Item O (Recovered

Property Other Than

Cash, Checks, or Credit

Cards)

Check Item O is used to help you decide whether or not to

ask the question in Item 108. If you marked Boxes 2, 3,

5, or 6 in Item 107, mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item O

and continue with Item 108. If Box 1 and/or 4 is marked

in Item 107, mark Box 2 "No" in Check Item O and skip

to Item 109. If you are unsure about which box to mark,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-160

ask the respondent before marking the answer in Check

Item O.

108. Considering any damage, what was the

value of the property after it was

recovered? (Do not include recovered

cash, checks, or credit cards.)

. 00 Value of property recovered

Item 108 (Value of

Recovered Stolen

Property)

Item 108 is used to identify the dollar value of stolen

property that was recovered after allowing for any

damage done to the property since it was stolen. This

includes the value of all stolen property that was

recovered, regardless of whether or not it was damaged

since it was stolen.

Remind the respondent to exclude the following

recovered stolen property when determining the dollar

value: cash, credit cards, bank cards, Savings Bonds,

bank books, money orders, or travelers checks.

Also let the respondent use any means to arrive at this

value. To assist the respondent in deciding the value of

the recovered property, you may remind the respondent of

the articles individually. If the respondent gives you

separate amounts for each item, just total the amounts and

enter the sum on the answer line.

Enter the amount in whole dollars. Round up or down as

necessary. For example, if the amount given is $150.50,

round up to $151 and, if the amount given is $150.49,

round down to $150. If the respondent gives an amount

that is less than $1, round up to $1. When the respondent

is unable to give an exact dollar amount, ask for his/her

best estimate.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-161

109. Was the theft reported to an insurance

company?

Yes

No or don't have insurance

Don't know

Item 109 (Theft Reported

to Insurance)

Item 109 is used to find out if anyone reported the theft to

an insurance company, regardless of whether the

insurance company made any payment for the claim.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent, another household

member, or someone outside of the household reported

the theft to an insurance company.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if:

! The theft was not reported by anyone to an insurance

company

! The household was not covered by insurance at the

time of the incident.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent either does not know or

cannot remember whether anyone reported the theft to an

insurance company. Before marking Box 3, ask a few

probing questions to help the respondent remember, such

as "Do you remember speaking to a claims adjuster or

reading any correspondence from your insurance

company about the theft?"

110. (Other than any stolen property) was anything

that belonged to you or other members of the

household damaged in this incident?

PROBE -

For example, was (a lock or window

broken/clothing damaged/damage done to a

car), or something else?

Yes - Ask 111

No -

SKIP

to 115

Item 110 (Other Property

Damaged)

Item 110 is used to find out if any other item was

damaged during the incident, excluding any stolen

property. This could be property owned by the

respondent or any other household member. If only cash

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-162

was stolen during the incident, do NOT read the lead-in

phrase in parenthesis. If any of the Boxes 2 through 27

are marked in Item 96, make sure to read the lead-in

statement as you ask the question in Item 110.

If the respondent seems unsure of how to answer this

question, also ask the probe question printed in Item 110.

As you ask the probe question, make sure to select the

appropriate examples shown in parenthesis based on the

circumstances of the theft.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if:

! Items were damaged during the incident, but they

were not stolen.

! These damaged items belonged to a household

member at the time of the incident or to an

unrecognizable business operated from the sample

address.

! Any items damaged, but not stolen, during an act of

vandalism which occurred during the same incident as

the theft.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 111.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if:

! The only items damaged during the incident were the

stolen items.

! The damaged items belonged to someone who was

not a household member at the time of the incident.

! The damaged items belonged to a recognizable

business operated from the sample address.

! The damaged items are commercial property, such as

a damaged apartment door to an apartment rented by

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-163

the respondent, even if the respondent paid for the

repair or replacement cost. In this example, the

apartment door does not belong to the respondent.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 115.

111. Was/Were the damaged item(s) repaired

or replaced?

Yes, all

SKIP

to 113

Yes, part

No, none - Ask 112

Item 111 (Repair or

Replacement of Damaged

Items)

Item 111 is used to determine whether any or all of the

items damaged during the incident were repaired or

replaced, even if there was no cost involved. Also, the

person who repaired or replaced the damaged items could

be anyone, such as a household member, a friend, the

landlord, or anyone else. Only include damaged items

that were NOT stolen.

Mark the appropriate box based on the respondent's

answer. If you mark Box 1 "Yes, all" or Box 2 "Yes,

part," skip to Item 113. If you mark Box 3 "No, none,"

continue with Item 112.

112. How much would it cost to repair or

replace the damaged item(s)?

. 00 Cost to repair/replace -

SKIP

to 114

No cost -

SKIP

to 115

Don't know -

SKIP

114

Item 112 (Cost to Repair

or Replace Damaged

Items)

Item 112 is used to identify what the cost would be to

repair and/or replace any items damaged, but not stolen,

during the incident, if the respondent decided to get the

item(s) repaired or replaced. If the respondent has

difficulty giving you an exact amount, ask for his/her best

estimate.

Enter the amount in whole dollars on the dollar line in

Item 112. Round up or down as necessary. For example,

if the amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if

the amount given is $150.49, round down to $150. If the

respondent gives an amount that is less than $1, round up

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-164

to $1. After entering the amount on the dollar line, skip

to Item 114.

Mark Box 0 (zero) if there would be no cost to repair

and/or replace the damaged items. After marking Box 0,

skip to Item 115. Mark Box x if the respondent cannot

provide an amount. Avoid marking Box x if at all

possible. If you do mark Box x, then skip to Item 114.

113. How much was the repair or replacement

cost?

. 00 Cost to repair/replace - Ask 114

No cost -

SKIP

to 115

Don't know - Ask 114

Item 113 (Cost of Repair

or Replacement of

Damaged Items)

Item 113 is used to identify what the cost was to repair

and/or replace any items damaged, but not stolen, during

the incident. If the respondent has difficulty giving you

an exact amount, ask for his/her best estimate.

Enter the amount in whole dollars on the dollar line in

Item 113. Round up or down as necessary. For example,

if the amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if

the amount given is $150.49, round down to $150. If the

respondent gives an amount that is less than $1, round up

to $1. After entering the amount on the dollar line, ask

the question in Item 114 next.

Mark Box 0 (zero) if there was no cost to repair and/or

replace the damaged items. After marking Box 0, skip to

Item 115. Mark Box x if the respondent cannot provide

an amount. Avoid marking Box x if at all possible. If

you do mark Box x, then continue with Item 114.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-165

114. Who (paid/will pay) for the repairs or

replacement? Anyone else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Items will not be repaired or replaced

Household member

Landlord or landlord's insurance

Victim's (or household's) insurance

Offender

Other - Specify

Item 114 (Who Paid/Will

Pay For Repairs or

Replacement)

Item 114 is used to identify who paid or will pay to repair

and/or replace items that were damaged, but not stolen,

during the incident. If you marked Box 1 or 2 in

Item 111, then ask the question in Item 114 using the

word "paid." Ask the question in Item 114 using the

words "will pay" if you marked Box 3 in Item 111 or the

respondent has told you that the items have been repaired

and/or replaced, but the repair and/or replacement bill has

not yet been paid.

Since more than one person or company may have paid

for the repairs and/or replacements, continue asking,

"Anyone else?", until you get a "No" response and then

mark all the appropriate boxes.

Only mark Box 1 if the respondent tells you that NONE

of the damaged items will be repaired or replaced.

However, do not mark Box 1 if a person or company

provided or will provide money to repair and/or replace

damaged item(s), but the respondent does not intend to

use the money for this purpose. Instead, mark the

appropriate box to indicate who provided or will provide

the money.

Also, if a household member or someone else originally

paid for the repair and/or replacement costs and the total

amount has been or will be reimbursed by insurance,

only mark Box 3 or 4 to indicate whose insurance is

reimbursing the cost and do not mark who originally paid

the bill. However, if the insurance only paid a portion of

the costs and someone else paid the remainder of the

costs, then mark both boxes. For example, Box 2 for a

household member and Box 4 for the household

member's insurance.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-166

If the respondent identifies a person, company, or

government agency that is not described in Boxes 2

through 5, mark Box 6 "Other" and enter the

respondent's answer on the "Specify" line (for example,

relatives or friends of the household, a government

agency, a church, or a community organization).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-167

Topic 7. Completing Items 115 Through 134 (Police Notification/

Reasons for Reporting or Not Reporting Incident to Police/Police

Response to Notification/Contact With Authorities)

115. Were the police informed or did they find

out about this incident in any way?

Yes - Ask 116

No -

SKIP

to 117

Don't know -

SKIP

to 130, page 17

Item 115 (Reported to

Police)

Item 115 is used to determine whether the police are

aware that this incident took place, regardless of how they

found out about it.

Who Are Considered

the Police?

For the NCVS, consider the police to be all regular police

officers at the city, county, State, or Federal government

level, as well as officers who work for sheriff's

departments. Also include officers working for

specialized police forces and authorized to make arrests

in a special area or jurisdiction (for example, campus

police, park police, transit police, harbor police, and

airport police).

Exclude as Police

Officers

For the NCVS, exclude as police officers any security

forces, building guards, prison guards, fish and game

wardens, fire marshals, and all others who do not have

the authority to make police arrests.

Victim Is a Police

Officer

When the victim/respondent is a police officer and

answers "Yes" to the question in Item 115, probe to find

out if the respondent or another person filed an official

report or officially notified a police department about

the incident. Do not assume that an incident was reported

to the police just because the victim/ respondent is a

police officer. For example, if the respondent who is a

police officer was threatened with physical harm by a

crime suspect and he/she only mentioned it to his/her

partner at the station, but never filed a report or officially

notified the department, you would mark Box 2 "No."

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-168

Offender Is a Police Officer When the victim/respondent answers "Yes" to the

question in Item 115 and the offender is a police officer,

probe to find out if anyone filed an official report or

officially notified a police department about the

incident. Again, do not assume because a police officer

was involved in the incident that the police were

officially notified. Mark Box 2 "No" if no one actually

notified the police.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the incident was reported to the

police and then continue with Item 116.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the incident was NOT reported to

the police and then skip to Item 117.

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent does not

know or cannot say for sure whether anyone reported the

incident to the police and then skip to Item 130 on

page 17.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 21, for more

information about incidents involving police officers.)

Special Instructions for Proxy

Interviews - Items 116 - 134

The questions in Items 116 through 134 are the

exception to the general rule for asking questions during

a proxy interview. Normally, you are asking the NCVS

question of the proxy respondent (who is usually another

household member) for the proxy person (the household

member who is unable to answer for himself/herself).

For example, when asking the question for Item 110

during a proxy interview, you would replace the word

"you" with the proxy person's name so that it reads:

"(Other than any stolen property) was anything that

belonged to Mr. Baylor (the proxy person) or other

members of the household damaged in this incident?"

Since the questions for Items 116 through 134 can apply

to anyone in the sample household who may have had

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-169

contact with the police, ask each of these questions of

the proxy respondent, rather than the proxy person. For

example, when you ask the proxy respondent in

Item 116, "How did the police find out about it?", the

proxy respondent says, "I told them." In this case, you

would mark Box 1 "Respondent." However, if the proxy

respondent says that, "Mr. Baylor (the proxy person)

called the police," then you would mark Box 2 "Other

household member."

116. How did the police find out about it?

Mark (X) first box that applies.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If proxy

interview, we want the proxy respondent to

answer questions 116-134 for herself/

himself, not for the person for whom the

proxy interview is being taken.

Respondent -

SKIP

to 119

Other household member.............

Someone official called police (guard, apt.

manager, school official, etc.)......

SKIP

Someone else............................... 121

Police were at scene -

SKIP

to 123

Offender was a police officer......

Some other way - Specify

SKIP

124

Item 116 (How Police

Found Out)

Item 116 is used to identify how the police found out

about the incident. Mark only the first box that applies.

For example, if the respondent tells you that he/she called

the police and a security guard also called the police, just

mark Box 1 "Respondent."

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the police found out about the incident

from the respondent. If you are taking a proxy interview,

mark Box 1 if the proxy respondent informed the police.

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 119.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the police found out about the incident

from a household member OTHER THAN the

respondent. If you are taking a proxy interview, mark

Box 2 if the proxy person informed the police. After

marking Box 2, skip to Item 121.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the police found out about the incident

from some type of official, such as a security guard, an

apartment manager, a school principal, a store manager,

and so forth. After marking Box 3, skip to Item 121.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-170

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the police found out about the incident

from a person OTHER THAN a household member or

someone acting in an official capacity. For example, you

would mark Box 4 if a neighbor called the police or a

relative who is not a household member called the police

(such as an uncle, aunt, brother-in-law, and so forth) .

After marking Box 4, skip to Item 121.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the police found out about the incident

because they happened to be on the scene at the time of

the incident or came by while the incident was taking

place. After marking Box 5, skip to Item 123.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the police found out about the incident

because the offender was a police officer and he/she

notified the police. After marking Box 6, skip to

Item 124.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the police found out about the incident in a

way other than those described in Boxes 1 through 6.

After marking Box 7, identify how the police were

informed on the "Specify" line and then skip to Item 124.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-171

117. What was the reason it was not reported

to the police? (Can you tell me a little

more?) Any other reason?

Mark (X) all that apply.

STRUCTURED PROBE -

Was the reason because you dealt with

it another way, it wasn't important

enough to you, insurance wouldn't

cover it, police couldn't do anything,

police wouln't help, or was there some

other reason?

DEALT WITH ANOTHER WAY

Reported to another official (guard, apt. manager,

school official, etc.)

Private or personal matter or took care of it myself

or informally; told offender's parent

NOT IMPORTANT ENOUGH TO RESPONDENT

Minor or unsuccessful crime, small or no loss,

recovered property

Child offender(s), "kid stuff"

Not clear it was a crime or that harm was intended

INSURANCE WOULDN'T COVER

No insurance, loss less than deductible, etc.

POLICE COULDN'T DO ANYTHING

Didn't find out until too late

Could not recover or identify property

Could not find or identify offender, lack of proof

POLICE WOULDN'T HELP

Police wouldn't think it was important enough,

wouldn't want to be bothered or get involved

Police would be inefficient, ineffective (they'd arrive

late or not at all, wouldn't do a good job, etc.)

Police would be biased, would harass/insult

Offender was police officer

OTHER REASON

Did not want to get offender in trouble with the law

Was advised not to report to police

Afraid of reprisal by offender or others

Did not want to or could not take time - too

inconvenient

Other - Specify

Respondent not present or doesn't know why it

wasn't reported

Item 117 (Reasons For

Not Reporting to Police)

Item 117 is used to find out why no one reported the

incident to the police. This item consists of 19 separate

categories which are grouped together under six major

headings to help you locate the correct box to mark for

the respondent's answer. Since you need to mark all

appropriate boxes for a respondent's answer, continue

asking, "Any other reason?", until you get a "No"

response.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-172

Probing for Item 117 In some cases, a respondent's answer may seem to fit

under one of the major headings, but you are not sure

which box(es) to mark. In this situation, you need to ask

a general probe question. For example, a respondent

answers that she did not think the police would help her.

You see the major heading, "POLICE WOULDN'T

HELP," but do not know which box to mark. You could

ask, "Can you be more specific?". If that probe question

does not work, then you could ask, "Why do you think

that the police would not help you?".

Since this item involves a respondent's feelings and

motivations, you must be extremely careful when asking

probe questions so you do not bias the respondent's

answer. Keep your initial probe questions general and

neutral. Then if the initial probe question does not work,

ask a more specific probe question.

Only ask the structured probe question for Item 117

when:

! You have asked general probe questions and the

respondent's answer still does not fit under one of the

major headings.

! The respondent's answer is so vague and obscure that

it would not be appropriate to ask a general probe

question.

Verifying Answers To ensure that all appropriate boxes are marked in

Item 117, verify the boxes that you marked with the

respondent BEFORE continuing with Check Item P.

Here is an example of how to verify the answers you

marked with the respondent: "I have marked (read

descriptions for the marked boxes). Do these reasons

cover why no one reported the incident to the police?"

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-173

Answer Categories for

Item 117

Since most of the answer categories in Item 117 are self-

explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the

categories that require special attention.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Private or personal matter or took care of it

myself or informally; told offender's parent" when the

respondent tells you that: "It was a family matter,"

"He/she wanted to catch the thief," "He/she called the

person who did it," "He/she thought it was his/her

wife/husband," "The person was a friend," and so forth.

Marking Box 18 Mark Box 18 "Other" if you have tried asking both

general probe questions and the structured probe question

AND the respondent's reason still does not fit into one of

the reasons in Boxes 1 through 17. After marking

Box 18, make sure to enter the reason on the "Specify"

line.

Marking Box 19 Mark Box 19 "Respondent not present or doesn't know

why it wasn't reported" if the respondent really does not

know why the incident was not reported to the police.

For example, the respondent was not present during a

burglary incident.

Noting Distinctions Pay close attention when a respondent tells you that the

incident is not important enough to report to the police.

Boxes 3 through 5 cover reasons why the respondent

feels that the incident was not important enough to report

to the police, while Box 10 covers when the respondent

thinks that the police would not consider the incident

important.

Box 17 also implies that the respondent did not feel that

the incident was important enough to report to the police,

but the primary motivation for not reporting

the incident was the respondent's lack of time and the

level of inconvenience to him/her.

After completing Item 117, continue with Check Item P.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-174

CHECK

ITEM P

Is more than one reason marked

in 117?

Yes - Ask 118

No -

SKIP

to 130, page 17

Check Item P (Multiple

Reasons For Not

Reporting)

Check Item P is used to help you decide whether or not to

ask the question in Item 118. Mark Box 1 "Yes" in

Check Item P if you marked more than one box in

Item 117 and then continue with Item 118. Mark Box 2

"No" in Check Item P if you marked only one box in

Item 117 and then skip to Item 130 on page 17.

118. Which of these would you say was the

most important reason why the incident

was not reported to the police?

Enter code from 117.

Code -

SKIP

to 130, page 17

No one reason more important -

SKIP

to 130,

page 17

Item 118 (Most Important

Reason For Not

Reporting)

Item 118 is used to pinpoint which of the reasons marked

in Item 117 the respondent feels is the most important one

for not reporting the incident to the police. If necessary,

read the reasons marked in Item 117 to the respondent

after asking the question in Item 118.

Based on the respondent's answer, enter the appropriate

box number in the code box using 2 digits (For example,

if the respondent says that the most important reason is

the one in Box 2, enter "02.")

If the respondent seems to have difficulty making up

his/her mind, you could ask the following probe question:

"If you could only give one reason, which one would it

be?". The respondent may still tell you that each reason

is equally important. If so, mark Box 30 "No one reason

more important."

After completing Item 118, skip to Item 130 on page 17.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-175

119. Besides the fact that it was a crime, did

YOU have any other reason for

reporting this incident to the police?

Any other reason?

Mark (X) all that apply.

STRUCTURED PROBE -

Did you report it to get help with this

incident, to recover your loss, to stop or

punish the offender, to let police know

about it, or was there some other

reason?

TO GET HELP WITH THIS INCIDENT

Stop or prevent THIS incident from happening

Needed help after incident due to injury, etc.

TO RECOVER LOSS

To recover property

To collect insurance

TO GET OFFENDER

To prevent further crimes against respondent/

respondent's household by this offender

To stop this offender from committing other

crimes against anyone

To punish offender

Catch or find offender - other reason or no

reason given

TO LET POLICE KNOW

To improve police surveillance of respondent's

home, area, etc.

Duty to let police know about crime

OTHER

Other reason - Specify

No other reason -

SKIP

to 121

Item 119 (Reasons For

Reporting to Police)

Item 119 is used to identify why the respondent reported

the incident to the police. You should only ask this

question if you marked Box 1 in Item 116.

There are 12 categories for Item 119 and they are grouped

together under five major headings to help you locate the

correct box to mark for the respondent's answer. Since

you need to mark all appropriate boxes for a respondent's

answer, continue asking, "Any other reason?", until you

get a "No" response.

Since we are interested in the respondent's feelings at the

time of the incident (or the proxy respondent's feelings),

be sure to pause after reading the question to allow the

respondent time to recall his/her feelings. Do NOT read

the answer categories to the respondent BEFORE

receiving the respondent's answer.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-176

Probing for Item 119 In some cases, a respondent's answer may seem to fit

under one of the major headings, but you are unsure

which box(es) to mark. In this situation, you need to ask

a general probe question. For example, a respondent

answers that he thought the police should be aware of the

incident. You see the major heading, "TO LET

POLICE KNOW," but do not know which box to mark.

You could ask, "Can you be more specific?". If that

probe question does not work, then you could ask, "Why

did you feel that the police should be notified?".

Since this item involves a respondent's feelings and

motivations, you must be extremely careful when asking

probe questions so you do not bias the respondent's

answer. Keep your initial probe question general and

neutral. Then if the initial probe question does not work,

ask a more specific probe question.

Only ask the structured probe question for Item 119

when:

! You have asked general probe questions and the

respondent's answer still does not fit under one of the

major headings.

! The respondent's answer is so vague and obscure that

it would not be appropriate to ask a general probe

question.

Verifying Answers To ensure that all appropriate boxes are marked in

Item 119, verify the boxes that you marked with the

respondent BEFORE continuing with Check Item Q.

Here is an example of how to verify the answers you

marked with the respondent: "I have marked (read

descriptions for the marked boxes). Do these reasons

cover why you reported this incident to the police?"

Answer Categories in

Item 119

Since most of the answer categories in Item 119 are self-

explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the

categories that require special attention.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-177

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 ONLY when the respondent tells you that

he/she reported the incident to the police either at the time

of the incident or just prior to the incident in an effort to

keep it from happening.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when the respondent tells you that he/she

reported the incident to the police in an effort to get help

AFTER the incident, such as medical attention.

Do NOT mark Box 2 if the incident was reported to:

& Recover property (Mark Box 3).

& Collect insurance money (Mark Box 4).

& Prevent the incident from happening again (Mark

Box 5).

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the respondent feels that he/she had a

legal or moral obligation to report the incident to the

police.

Marking Box 12 Mark Box 12 if the respondent's only reason for reporting

the incident to the police was because it was a crime.

After marking Box 12, skip to Item 121.

CHECK

ITEM Q

Is more than one reason marked

in 119?

Yes - Ask 120

No -

SKIP

to 121

Check Item Q (Multiple

Reasons For Reporting)

Check Item Q is used to help you decide whether or not to

ask the question in Item 120. Mark the "Yes" box in

Check Item Q if you marked more than one box/reason in

Item 119 and continue with Item 120. Mark the "No" box

in Check Item Q if you only marked one box/reason in

Item 119 and then skip to Item 121.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-178

120. Which of these would you say was the

most important reason why the incident

was reported to the police?

Enter code from 119.

Code

No one reason more important

Because it was a crime was most important

Item 120 (Most Important

Reason For Reporting)

Item 120 is used to identify which reason from those

marked in Item 119 the respondent feels is the most

important reason for reporting the incident to the police.

If necessary, read the reasons marked in Item 119 to

remind the respondent.

Based on the respondent's answer, enter the appropriate

box number in the code box using 2 digits (For example,

if the respondent says that the most important reason is

the one in Box 8, enter "08.")

If the respondent seems to have difficulty making up

his/her mind, you could ask the following probe question:

"If you could only give one reason, which one would it

be?". The respondent may tell you that:

! Each reason is equally important. If so, mark Box 21

"No one reason more important."

! His/her main reason for reporting the incident to the

police was that it was a crime. If so, mark Box 22

"Because it was a crime was most important."

After completing Item 120, continue with Item 121.

121. Did the police come when they found out

about the incident?

Yes - Ask 122

No....................

SKIP

to 124

Don't know......

Respondent went to police -

SKIP

to 123

Item 121 (Police

Response)

Item 121 is the first of three questions intended to find

out what the police did after they were notified about the

incident. Item 121 is used to determine whether the

police actually came to talk in person with the victimized

person.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-179

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the police came to see and speak to

the victimized person either at the scene of the incident or

somewhere else. If the police only spoke to the

victimized person on the phone, mark Box 2 "No." After

marking Box 1, continue with the question in Item 122.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if the police were contacted and never

came to speak in person with the victimized person and

only communicated by phone, mail, and so forth. After

marking Box 2, skip to Item 124.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does

not know whether or not the police came in person once

they were notified. After marking Box 3, skip to

Item 124.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Respondent went to police" if the

respondent went to notify the police in person about the

incident. After marking Box 4, skip to Item 123.

122. How soon after the police found out did

they respond? Was it within 5 minutes,

within 10 minutes, an hour, a day, or

longer?

Mark (X) first category respondent is sure of.

Within 5 minutes

Within 10 minutes

Within an hour

Within a day

Longer than a day

Don't know how soon

Item 122 (Time Before

Police Responded)

Item 122 is used to identify how much time elapsed

between the police being notified and their arrival at the

crime scene. Mark the first category (1 - 5) about which

the respondent feels sure.

Mark Box 6 if the respondent really does not know how

soon after being contacted the police arrived. This is

possible if someone else called the police or the police

went to the crime scene before coming to speak to the

victimized person.

After completing Item 122, continue with Item 123.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-180

123. What did they do while they were

(there/here)? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Took report

Searched/looked around

Took evidence (fingerprints, inventory, etc.)

Questioned witnesses or suspects

Promised surveillance

Promised to investigate

Made arrest

Other - Specify

Don't know

Item 123 (Police Actions)

Item 123 is used to determine what actions the police

took while they were with the victimized person during

their initial visit. Exclude any police actions taken after

the police left or during any subsequent visits with the

victimized person. As you ask the question in Item 123,

use the appropriate word, either "there" or "here," based

on where the police visit took place and whether you are

conducting the interview in person or by telephone.

Since you need to mark all boxes that apply to the

respondent's answer, continue asking, "Anything else?",

until you get a "No" answer.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Took report" if the police spoke to the

victimized person to find out what happened during the

incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Searched/looked around" if the police

searched the area of the incident for the offender(s) or for

any of the stolen property.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Took evidence" if the police took any type

of evidence that the offender(s) may have left at the scene

of the crime, such as fingerprints, a weapon, scraps of

clothing, a hair or blood sample, and so forth.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Questioned witnesses or suspects" if the

police questioned any witnesses and suspects, as well as

potential witnesses and suspects (for example, neighbors,

co-workers, friends, and so forth).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-181

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 "Promised surveillance" if the police told the

victimized person that they will:

! Patrol the crime scene

! Keep a lookout in the area where the victimized

person lives or works.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 "Promised to investigate" if the police told

the victimized person that they would do any of the

following things: question suspects, witnesses, or others,

pursue the offender(s), try to recover stolen property, and

so forth.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Made arrest" if the respondent learned that

the police arrested a suspect(s) during the initial visit

from the police.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 "Other" if the police took any actions during

their initial visit with the victimized person which are not

described in Boxes 1 through 7 and then fully describe

the action(s) taken on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 "Don't know" if the respondent really does

not know what the police did during their initial visit with

the victimized person. For example, the respondent may

not have been present when the police made their visit.

After completing Item 123, continue with Item 124.

124. Did you (or anyone in your household)

have any later contact with the police

about the incident?

Yes - Ask 125

No.................

SKIP

to 128

Don't know....

Item 124 (Later Contact

With Police)

Item 124 is the first of four questions asking about any

subsequent contacts with the police about the incident.

Item 124 is used to determine whether the respondent or

any other household member had any later official

contacts with the police about the incident. For example,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-182

the police may have called the victimized person or made

another personal visit, or perhaps a household member

mailed a letter to the police inquiring about the case.

Exclude any unofficial contacts with the police, such as a

casual conversation with a police officer who is a friend

or acquaintance.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" when:

! There was any contact between the household and

the police following the initial visit by the police,

regardless of who initiated the contact.

! The police did NOT make a personal visit when they

were originally contacted about the incident, but the

police did call or send a letter to the household after

they were contacted.

! The police did NOT make a personal visit when they

were originally contacted about the incident, but

someone in the household called or sent a letter to

the police after they initially notified the police.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 125.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" when:

! There was no later contact between the household

and the police AFTER the initial visit by the police.

! There was no contact at all between the household

and the police after the police found out about the

incident.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 128.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-183

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" when the respondent does not

know whether there was any later contact with the police

about the incident. After marking Box 3, skip to

Item 128.

125. Did the police get in touch with you or

did you get in touch with them?

Police contacted respondent or other HHLD member

Respondent (or other HHLD member) contacted police

Both

Don't know

Other - Specify

Item 125 (Who Initiated

the Contact)

Item 125 is used to determine who initiated the later

contact between the household and the police about the

incident. Mark the appropriate box based on the

respondent's answer.

Only mark Box 3 "Both" if there was more than one later

contact and some were initiated by the police and others

were initiated by someone in the household.

If you mark Box 5 "Other," make sure to identify who

initiated the later contact(s) on the "Specify" line. Avoid

marking Box 5 if the respondent's answer fits Box 1, 2,

or 3.

After completing Item 125, continue with Item 126.

126. Was that in person, by phone, or some

other way?

In person

Not in person (by phone, mail, etc.)

Both in person and not in person

Don't know

Item 126 (Method of

Contact)

Item 126 is used to find out whether or not the later

contacts were made in person. Only mark one box.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if ALL later contacts were made in person,

regardless of who initiated the contacts.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if ALL later contacts were made by some

means OTHER THAN IN PERSON, such as by phone,

FAX, mail, electronic mail, and so forth.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-184

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if there were two or more later contacts AND

at least one later contact was made in person AND at least

one later contact was made by some other means, such as

by phone.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if, after probing, the respondent does not

know whether the later contacts were in person or by

some other means.

After completing Item 126, continue with Item 127.

127. What did the police do in following up

this incident? Anything else?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Took report

Questioned witnesses or suspects

Did or promised surveillance/investigation

Recovered property

Made arrest

Stayed in touch with respondent/household

Other - Specify

Nothing (to respondent's knowledge)

Don't know

Item 127 (Later Police

Actions)

Item 127 is used to determine what actions the police

took to follow up on the incident, EXCLUDING actions

that were already marked in Item 123 and were only taken

during the initial contact.

Since you need to mark all boxes that apply to the

respondent's answer, continue asking, "Anything else?",

until you get a "No" response.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Took report" if the police filled out a second

report or spoke to the victimized person again since their

first contact after the incident.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "Questioned witnesses or suspects" if, after

the initial contact, the police questioned any witnesses

and suspects, as well as potential witnesses and suspects

(for example, neighbors, co-workers, friends, and so

forth).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-185

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Did or promised surveillance/investigation"

if, after the initial contact, the police investigated the

incident or told the respondent that they would

investigate, such as questioning suspects, witnesses, or

others, pursuing the offender(s), or trying to recover

stolen property.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 "Recovered property" if the police were able

to recover stolen property.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 "Made arrest" if the respondent learned that

the police arrested a suspect(s) after their initial visit to

the household.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Stayed in touch with respondent/

household" if the police stayed in contact with someone

in the household by any means, such as by phone, mail,

and so forth.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 "Other" if the police took a later action that

does not fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 6. After

marking Box 7, make sure to identify the action taken on

the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 "Nothing" if the respondent thinks that no

actions were taken by the police following the initial visit

by the police.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 "Don't know" if the respondent does not

know what actions were taken since the incident

happened.

After completing Item 127, continue with Item 128.

128. Did you (or someone in your household)

sign a complaint against the offender(s) to

the police department or the authorities?

Yes

Item 128 (Official

Complaint)

Item 128 is used to determine whether anyone in the

household signed a complaint against the offender(s) to

the police department or another authority. The

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-186

complaint could be any type of official report signed by a

household member in which one or more persons are

NAMED as the offenders in the incident. The official

report could be filed with a police department or some

other legal authority, such as the FBI, immigration

officials, and so forth.

After completing Item 128, continue with Item 129.

129.

ASK OR VERIFY -

As far as you know, was anyone arrested or

were charges brought against anyone in

connection with this incident?

Yes

Don't know

Item 129 (Offender

Arrested or Charged)

Item 129 is used to find out if anyone:

! Was arrested in the incident or

! Had charges brought against him/her.

You may already know the answer to this question. If so,

verify the answer without asking the question.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent knows or has heard

that someone was arrested or had charges brought against

him/her in connection with the incident. If the person

was only questioned about the incident or held in custody

and then released without being charged, mark Box 2

"No."

130. Did you (or someone in your household)

receive any help or advice from any office or

agency -- other than the police -- that deals

with victims of crime?

Yes - Ask 131

No...................

SKIP

to Check Item R

Don't know

Item 130 (Victim

Assistance)

Item 130 is the first of two items asking about any help

the household may have received from an office or

agency that deals with crime victims, excluding the police

department. Item 130 is used to determine whether or not

the household did receive any help or advice from an

office or agency which provides assistance to crime

victims.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-187

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if anyone in the household received

help or advice as a direct result of the incident and this

help or advice was in the form of financial or legal

advice, counseling, preventing similar crimes in the

future, and so forth. The help or advice could have come

from any office or agency that deals specifically with

crime victims, with the exception of the police

department. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 131.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if no one in the household received any

help or advice from an office or agency set up to assist

crime victims. Also mark Box 2 if the only help received

by the household came from:

! The police department

! Private individuals or a group that is not trained

specifically to handle crime victims, such as

neighbors, relatives, psychologists, a family doctor, a

priest or minister, and so forth.

After marking Box 2, skip to Check Item R.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does

not know whether anyone in the household received help

or advice from an office or agency set up to assist crime

victims. After marking Box 3, skip to Check Item R.

131. Was that a government or private

agency?

Government

Private

Don't know

Item 131 (Government or

Private Agency)

Item 131 is used to identify whether the office or agency

who assisted the household was a government or private

agency.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the office or agency is supported by

Federal, State, or local government taxes.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-188

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the office or agency is supported by private

funds or charitable contributions.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if, after probing, the respondent really does

not know who supports the office or agency that provided

assistance to the household.

CHECK

ITEM R

Were the police informed? (Is "Yes"

marked in 115 on page 15?)

Yes - Ask 132

No -

SKIP

to 135

Check Item R (Were

Police Informed)

Check Item R is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 132 or skip to Item 135. Refer back to

Item 115 to verify whether or not the police were notified

about the incident. If Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 115,

mark the "Yes" box in Check Item R and continue with

Item 132. Otherwise, mark the "No" box in Check

Item R and skip to Item 135.

132. Have you (or someone in your household)

had contact with any other authorities

about this incident (such as a prosecutor,

court, or juvenile officer)?

Yes - Ask 133

No..................

SKIP

to 134

Don't know

Item 132 (Contact With

Other Authorities)

Item 132 is the first of two items used to determine if

anyone in the household has had contact with an authority

about the incident, OTHER THAN the police or an

agency marked in Item 130. By authority, we mean a

prosecutor, a court or juvenile officer, and so forth.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," then continue with Item 133. If

you mark either Box 2 "No" or Box 3 "Don't know," then

skip to Item 134.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-189

133. Which authorities? Any others?

Mark (X) all that apply.

Prosecutor, district attorney

Magistrate

Court

Juvenile, probation or parole officer

Other - Specify

Item 133 (Identifying

Other Authorities)

Item 133 is used to identify which authorities a household

member has contacted about the incident. Since more

than one authority may have been contacted, continue

asking, "Any others?", until you get a "No" reply. If you

mark Box 5 "Other" because the authority mentioned by

the respondent is not described in Boxes 1 through 4,

make sure to identify the authority on the "Specify" line.

134. Do you expect the police, courts, or

other authorities will be doing anything

further in connection with this incident?

Yes - Specify

Don't know

Item 134 (Further Official

Action)

Item 134 is used to find out if the respondent knows or

feels that any authority (police, courts, and so forth) will

do anything further about the incident. This could

include bringing suspects to trial, questioning suspects,

offering a reward, investigating, or surveillance. Exclude

any counseling that could be provided because of this

incident.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," make sure to describe the

actions that the respondent knows or feels will be taken.

After completing Item 134, continue with Item 135.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-190

Topic 8. Completing Items 135 Through 153 (Activity During

Incident/Employment Status at Time of Incident/Type of

Industry and Occupation/Lost Work Time and Pay Due to

Injuries/Means of Transportation)

135.

ASK OR VERIFY -

What were you doing when this incident

(happened/started)?

Mark (X) only one box.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - If proxy interview,

replace "you" with the name of the person for

whom the proxy interview is being taken in

135-176.

Working or on duty -

SKIP

to 138a

On the way to or from work -

SKIP

to Check Item S

On the way to or from school

On the way to or from other place

Shopping, errands

Attending school

Leisure activity away from home

Sleeping

Other activities at home

Other - Specify

Don't know

Item 135 (Activity When

Incident Happened)

Item 135 is used to identify what the respondent or

proxy person was doing when the incident happened or

started. It is not necessary for the respondent or proxy

person to have been at the crime scene to answer this

question. If the respondent or proxy person was not

present during the incident, use the word “happened”

when asking this question. Only mark ONE box to

answer this question.

Proxy Interviews

Starting with Item 135, you will again ask each

question about the proxy person and not of the proxy

respondent. Only Items 116 through 134 are asked

directly of the proxy respondent. Therefore, if you were

taking a proxy interview, you would read the question in

Item 135 this way: "What was Mr. Baylor (proxy

person) doing when this incident started?"

Answer Categories in

Item 135

Since most of the answer categories in Item 135 are self-

explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the

categories that require special attention.

Marking Boxes 1 and 2 Mark Box 1 if the respondent or proxy person was

working or on duty for his/her job when the incident

began or happened. Mark Box 2 if the respondent or

proxy person was commuting to or from work when the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-191

incident began or happened. After marking Box 1, skip

to Item 138a. After marking Box 2, skip to Check Item S.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent or proxy person was

traveling to or from school when the incident started.

However, if the incident started while the respondent or

proxy person was in class during the school day, mark

Box 6.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the respondent or proxy person was in

class during the school day when the incident started.

However, if the incident started while commuting to or

from school, mark Box 3.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 when the respondent or proxy person was

involved in an activity at his/her home when the incident

started and the activity is not described in a previous box

for Item 135.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the respondent or proxy person was doing

something when the incident started that does not fit any

of the previous boxes in Item 135. After marking

Box 10, make sure to describe the activity on the

"Specify" line.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 if the respondent or proxy person really

does not know what he/she was doing when the incident

started. For instance, the respondent or proxy person

could have been away from home on vacation when

his/her house was broken into and burglarized.

136.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did you have a job at the time of the

incident?

Yes -

SKIP

to 138

Item 136 (Employment at

Time of Incident)

Item 136 is used to determine whether or not the

respondent had a job or business at the time of the

incident. If you know the answer by this point in the

interview, just verify the answer without asking the

question.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-192

For the NCVS, consider the respondent as having a job or

business if:

! There is a definite arrangement to work for pay or

profit either full time or part time.

! The respondent was self-employed in his/her own

business/farm or partnership.

! The respondent was working without pay on a family

farm or in a family business.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if any of the conditions mentioned

above existed at the time of the incident, even if the

respondent was temporarily absent from the job due to a

vacation, illness, bad weather, strike, or temporary layoff.

After marking Box 1, skip to Check Item S.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or

business at the time of the incident. After marking Box 2,

continue with Item 137.

137. What was your major activity the week

of the incident--were you looking for

work, keeping house, going to school, or

doing something else?

Mark (X) only one box.

Looking for work.......

Keeping house...........

Going to school.........

SKIP

to 151, page 19

Unable to work.........

Retired......................

Other - Specify

Item 137 (Major Activity)

Item 137 is used to find out what the respondent's major

activity was during the week of the incident, since he/she

did not have a job or business. As you ask this question,

make sure to read each of the examples in the question

and mark only ONE box to answer this question.

Answer Categories in

Item 137

Since most of the answer categories in Item 137 are self-

explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the

categories that require special attention.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-193

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent was attempting to find a job

or trying to start a business or profession during the week

of the incident. Examples of "looking for work" include:

! Registration at an employment office.

! FAXing your resume to potential employers.

! Meeting and interviewing with prospective

employers.

! Placing or answering advertisements in newspapers

or on the Internet.

! Gathering information about starting his/her own

business.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent spent most of his/her time

during the week of the incident doing work around his/her

own home. Examples of "keeping house" include:

! Cooking, washing clothes, cleaning house, and so

forth.

! Caring for his/her own children, step-children, or

foster children, as well as children who are brothers,

sisters, or other relatives of the respondent.

! Overseeing the care of the home, even if the actual

work is done by a paid maid or housekeeper.

! Cutting the lawn, painting the house, working in the

garden (other than on a family farm), and so forth.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent spent the majority of the

week of the incident attending any kind of public or

private school, including trade or vocational schools. If

the respondent would normally be attending school that

week, but was out sick or on a short vacation, you should

still mark Box 3.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-194

Do NOT mark Box 3 if the incident happened during the

respondent's summer vacation, unless the respondent was

attending summer school during the week of the incident.

Otherwise, mark the student's major activity during the

week of the incident, such as "Leisure activity away from

home" or "Other activities at home."

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent was unable to do ANY kind

of work during the week of the incident because he/she

has a LONG-TERM physical or mental illness or

disability. However, if the respondent is only

TEMPORARILY ILL or disabled and is expected to be

well enough to work at some kind of gainful employment

within 6 months after the incident, mark Box 6 "Other"

and explain the situation on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the respondent says that he/she was retired

during the week of the incident. However, if the

respondent has only cut back on the number of hours

worked or was semi-retired during the week of the

incident, you should mark Box 1 in Item 136 to indicate

that the respondent did have a job at the time of the

incident.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the respondent mentions a major activity

during the week of the incident that is not covered in

Boxes 1 through 5. After marking Box 6, make sure to

explain the activity on the "Specify" line, such as caring

for a terminally ill spouse, child, or parent.

After completing Item 137, skip to Item 151 on page 19.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-195

138a. Now I have a few questions about the job

at which you worked during the time of

the incident

Were you employed by

(Read answer

categories)--

A private company, business, or

individual for wages?

– Ask 138b

The Federal government?

A State, county, or local

SKIP

to 138c

government?

Yourself (Self-employed) in your own

business, professional practice, or

farm?

– Ask 138b

A private, not-for-profit, tax-exempt, or

charitable organization?

– Ask 138b

Item 138a (Type of

Employer)

Notice that there is an introductory statement printed

above the question in Item 138a. Make sure that you read

this sentence to the respondent BEFORE asking the

question in Item 138a. This statement lets the respondent

know that the following questions relate to the job at

which he/she was working during the time of the

incident.

Each of the answer categories in Item 138a signifies a

different “Class of Worker” type. Ask the respondent

about each category as a separate question. For example:

“Were you employed by a private company, business, or

individual for wages?” After asking this question, wait

for the respondent’s answer. If you get a “Yes” answer,

mark Box 1 and then continue with Item 138b. If you get

a “No” answer, leave Box 1 blank and ask the second

question, “Were you employed by the Federal

government?” Follow this procedure until you get a

“Yes” answer. Only mark ONE box in Item 138a.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when a respondent worked for a PRIVATE

employer for wages, salary, commission, tips, piece-rates,

or pay in kind. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 138b.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when a respondent:

! Worked for any branch of the Federal government.

! Was elected to a paid Federal office.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-196

! Was a member of the Armed Forces.

! Was employed by an international organization (for

example, the United Nations) or a foreign

government.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 138c.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when a respondent worked in any branch of a

state, county, or local government. This also includes

respondents who were elected to paid state, county, or

local offices. After marking Box 3, skip to Item 138c.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when a respondent was self-employed for

profit or fees in his/her OWN business, farm, shop,

office, practice, and so forth. After marking Box 4,

continue with Item 138b.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 when a respondent was employed for PAY

at the time of the incident by a church, union, or some

other type of private nonprofit organization. After

marking Box 5, continue with Item 138b.

138b. Is this business incorporated?

Yes

Don’t know

Item 138b (Corporation)

If the respondent was working at the time of the incident

for a private company, his/her own private business, or for

a private, not-for-profit organization, then you will

continue with Item 138b. Item 138b is used to determine

whether the business or organization is incorporated.

The respondent should know whether or not his/her

employer is a legal corporation and then you would mark

Box 1 for “Yes” or Box 2 for “No.” However, if the

respondent really does not know, mark Box 3, “Don’t

know.”

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-197

138c. What is the name of the (company/

government agency/business/non-profit

organization) for which you worked at the

time of the incident?

Item 138c (Name of

Employer)

Item 138c is used to identify the name of the respondent’s

employer at the time of the incident. Census Bureau

coders working in the National Processing Center need

this key piece of information to assign the correct industry

code to the respondent’s employer. For this reason, we

need you to pay particular attention to recording this

information accurately and legibly.

Even though a respondent may be reluctant to provide the

name of his/her employer, make every effort to collect this

information without badgering the respondent. In some

cases, you may succeed by just reassuring a respondent

that the information he/she provides is held strictly

confidential.

138d. What kind of business or industry is this?

Read if necessary: What do they make or do

where you worked at the time of the incident?

Item 138d (Kind of

Business or Industry)

Item 138d is used to determine the kind of business or

industry that is transacted by the respondent’s employer at

the time of the incident. This is another key piece of

information needed to assign the correct industry code for

a respondent’s employer.

To ensure that our coders can assign an accurate industry

code, you need to enter a clear and specific description of

the kind of business or industry. In other words:

• What is the purpose of the business?

• What type of products are produced by the industry?

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-198

Structured Probe If the respondent hesitates in giving you an answer to your

initial question in Item 138d, also ask the structured probe

question printed in italics below the initial question. This

question may help the respondent to understand what type

of description we want for this item.

Be Specific Make sure that you avoid entering descriptions that are too

general, such as:

' “It’s a mining company.”

' “The business provides a repair service.”

' “It’s a computer-related business.”

' “It’s a retail store.”

Here are some examples of better descriptions:

! “Mines & transports coal & coal byproducts.”

! “Repairs small home appliances.”

! “Designs & sells computer software.”

! “Operates two large hardware stores.”

Enter descriptions that are specific, but avoid using

unnecessary words that make the descriptions too long.

Keep your descriptions under 50 characters, since this is

the maximum number of characters allotted for keying this

information. Fifty characters is the maximum for each of

the new employment questions requiring a write-in entry.

138e. Is this mainly ...

(Read answer

categories) –

Mark (X) only one box.

Manufacturing?

Retail trade?

Wholesale trade?

Something else?

Item 138e (Type of

Industry)

Item 138e is used to identify the major type of industry in

which the respondent was working at the time of the

incident. The four options to choose from are:

• Manufacturing

• Retail trade

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-199

• Wholesale trade

• Something else

Distinguishing between these types of industries is very

important, because type of industry also plays an essential

role in assigning the correct industry code. If this item is

left unanswered or is marked incorrectly, the coders will

not be able to assign an accurate industry code for the

respondent’s employer.

Start by asking, “Is this mainly manufacturing?”. Wait for

the respondent’s answer. If you get a “Yes” answer, mark

Box 1 and then continue with Item 138f. If you get a “No”

answer, leave Box 1 blank and continue by asking, “Is this

mainly retail trade?”. Follow this procedure until you get

a “Yes” answer. Make sure that you mark only ONE box

in Item 138e.

Marking Box 1,

Manufacturing

Mark Box 1, “Manufacturing,” if a respondent’s employer

makes and sells its products in large quantities or lots to

other manufacturers, wholesalers, or retailers.

Marking Box 2, Retail

Trade

Mark Box 2, “Retail Trade, if a respondent’s employer

sells primarily to individual consumers or users, but

seldom makes products.

Marking Box 3,

Wholesale Trade

Mark Box 3, “Wholesale Trade,” if a respondent’s

employer buys, rather than makes, products in large

quantities or lots for resale to retailers, industrial users, or

to other wholesalers.

Marking Box 4,

Something Else

Mark Box 4, “Something Else,” if a respondent’s

employer does not manufacture or sell products as a

wholesaler or a retailer. Examples of some employers that

fit into the “Something Else” category are:

• Car repair shops,

• Accounting firms,

• Medical centers,

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-200

• Trucking companies, or

• Banks.

When To Probe Some firms are engaged in more than one type of business

or activity. When you encounter this situation, you need to

do some additional probing to determine the most

appropriate category to mark in Item 138e.

If you discover that the respondent’s employer conducts

business at more than one location (for example, making

copy machines at one location and making chemicals used

by the copy machines at another location), collect data for

the location at which the respondent works.

If you discover that the respondent’s employer conducts a

variety of activities at the same location (for example, a

gasoline station that also sells groceries), probe to

determine which activity or product the respondent is most

directly involved with in his/her job. For example, if the

respondent primarily sells groceries at the gasoline station,

mark Box 2, “Retail Trade.” However, if the respondent

primarily works as a mechanic servicing motor vehicles at

the gasoline station, mark Box 4, “Something Else.”

138f. What kind of work did you do, that is,

what was your occupation at the time of

the incident?

(For example: plumber, typist, farmer)

Item 138f (Kind of Work)

Item 138f is the first of the new employment questions that

asks about the kind of work or occupation the respondent

had at the time of the incident. In addition to assigning an

industry code for the respondent’s employer, the coders

also assign an occupation code for the respondent’s job

based on:

• The kind of work described in Item 138f and

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-201

• The respondent’s most important activities or duties

described in Item 139.

Make sure that you enter complete and accurate

descriptions for both of these items, so that the coders can

assign the correct occupation code.

Job Title vs. Kind of

Work

The “kind of work” descriptions that our coders need must

clearly specify the type of work the respondent does on

his/her job, and this is not necessarily the respondent’s job

title. For some occupations, the common descriptions or

general job titles that a respondent provides will not be

sufficient for the coders to assign the correct occupation

code.

Self-Employed Persons When a respondent is self-employed, only enter

“Manager” as his/her occupation if the person actually

spends most of the workday managing his/her business.

Otherwise, enter the kind of work the respondent spends

the majority of his/her time doing, such as plumber, hair

stylist, dentist, house painter, and so forth. In other words,

describe the respondent’s actual trade or craft, when that is

the kind of work that the respondent spends most of

his/her time doing for the business.

Avoid Entering

Department or Work

Place Titles

Avoid entering kind of work entries such as “Works in

shipping department” or “Works in the warehouse.”

These entries do not adequately describe the kind of work

done by the respondent. If the respondent inspects

outgoing products for the shipping department, enter

“Inspects outgoing products for shipping dept.” If the

respondent is a clerk who monitors inventory in a

warehouse, enter “Clerk monitoring warehouse inventory.”

Apprentice vs. Trainee There is a difference between someone who is an

apprentice and someone who is a trainee. An apprentice is

under contract during his/her training period, but a trainee

is not. If a respondent tells you that he/she is in an

apprenticeship or trainee program, make sure to enter both

the person’s occupation or kind of work, along with the

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-202

term “apprentice” or “trainee.” For example, you may

need to enter “Apprentice plumber” or “Buyer trainee.”

Machinist vs. Machine

Operator vs. Mechanic

Although all three titles sound similar, there are major

differences in the kind of work done by a machinist, a

machine operator, and a mechanic.

A machinist is a skilled craftsman who constructs metal

parts, tools, and machines through the use of blueprints,

machine and hand tools, and precise measuring

instruments.

A machine operator runs a factory machine, such as a

drill press operator.

A mechanic inspects, services, repairs, or overhauls

machinery.

Secretary vs. “Official

Secretary”

The title secretary applies to someone who does

secretarial work in an office. The title official secretary

applies to someone who is an elected or appointed officer

of a business, union, or other organization.

Probing for Difficult to

Code Occupations

Here is a basic rule for Item 138f: Avoid entering a one

word response, because it will usually be too general for

our coders to assign the correct occupation code. For these

situations, we are providing the following table which has

some difficult to code, one word occupations, along with a

suggested probe for each occupation. These probes are

written to encourage the respondent to provide a more

specific description of the kind of work he/she does on the

job. This table is also available as a separate job aid,

Difficult to Code Occupations.

Occupation Suggested Probe

Assembler

What do you assemble? For example, do you assemble

automobiles, electric motors, farm equipment, sheet metal, or

something else?

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-203

Occupation Suggested Probe

Clerk

What type of clerk are you? For example, do you handle

accounting, billing, filing, shipping, statistical data, sales, or

something else?

Engineer

What kind of engineer are you? For example, are you a civil,

electrical, mechanical, nuclear, chemical, train, stationary,

building, or some other type of engineer?

Inspector

What type of things do you inspect? For example, do you

inspect automobiles, restaurants, houses, buildings, meats, or

something else?

Manager

What type of manager are you? For example, do you manage a

bakery, garage, hotel, office, property, store, or something else?

Machinist

Do you set up AND operate machines?

Machine operator

How many machines do you operate? Also, what type of

machine do you operate primarily?

Mechanic

What type of mechanic are you? For example, do you service

and repair automobile bodies, engines, appliances, trucks,

valves, or something else?

Nurse

What type of nurse are you? For example, are you registered,

licensed, practical, vocational, a nursing aide, or some other

type of nurse?

Researcher

What is your field of research?

Sales Worker

What do you sell? For example, do you sell advertising, cars,

houses, insurance, shoes, tickets, or something else?

Supervisor

Who or what do you supervise? For example, do you supervise

clerical workers, counselors, laborers, field representatives, or

someone else?

Teacher

Do you teach at the preschool, elementary, high school, or

college level? Also, which subjects do you teach?

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-204

139. What were your usual activities or duties

at this job?

Item 139 (Usual Activities)

Item 139 is used to describe the usual activities or duties a

respondent performs at his/her job. This is the second key

piece of information that our coders use to assign an

occupation code. What you enter in Item 139 is especially

useful when a simple job title does not provide enough

information to code the occupation.

Here are some examples of entries you may need to enter

in Item 139:

• Keeping account books

• Selling new and used motor vehicles

• Laying bricks and stone

• Typing and filing letters, reports, memos, etc.

If a respondent tells you that his/her job duties are

classified, do NOT probe. If this happens, enter

“Information is classified.”

140. While working at this job, did you work

mostly in

(Read answer categories) -

A city?

Suburban area?

Rural area?

Combination of any of these?

Item 140 (Type of

Employment Area)

Item 140 is asked to find out if the respondent was

working in a city, suburban area, rural area, or a

combination of any of these areas at the time of the

incident. This type of information will help BJS in

determining if specific areas are more prone to crime.

For Item 140, you will read each answer category as part

of the question until you get a "Yes" response. Since most

respondents will know how to answer this question, let the

respondent select the type of area. When a respondent

worked for more than one employer, mark the box for the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-205

area in which he/she worked the greater number of hours.

Avoid marking Box 4 "Combination of any of these?",

unless a respondent insists that the area he/she worked

MOST of the time was a combination of city, suburban,

and rural.

After completing Item 140, continue with Item 141a.

141a.

ASK OR VERIFY -

Did this incident happen at your work

site?

Yes

Don't know

Other - Specify

Item 141a (Incident

Happened at Work Site)

Item 141a is used to determine whether the incident

happened at the respondent's work site for any job held by

the respondent at the time of the incident. If you already

know the answer to this question, you can verify the

answer without asking the question.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1, "Yes," if the incident happened while the

respondent was at his/her work site, which is considered

the place where his/her USUAL day-to-day activities take

place. Some examples of work sites include in an office,

hospital, taxi cab, convenience store, beauty parlor, and so

forth.

If the respondent happens to work from an office or

workshop in his/her home and the incident occurred in the

office or workshop, also mark Box 1, "Yes." However, do

NOT mark Box 1 if the incident happened somewhere else

in the house, garage, or property OTHER THAN in the

office or workshop.

If the respondent has no usual work site, such as a

traveling salesperson, his/her work site is the place where

he/she was working when the incident occurred.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2, "No," if the incident happened at a location

OTHER THAN the respondent's work site, such as at a

meeting in another office building during working hours,

out of town on a business trip, and so forth.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-206

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does not

know if the incident occurred at his/her work site. Only

mark Box 3 as a last resort.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent's answer requires more than

just a "Yes" or "No" reply and then use the "Specify" line

to answer this question. After completing Item 141a,

continue with Item 141b.

141b. Did you usually work days or nights?

Days

Nights

Both days and nights/rotating shifts

Item 141b (Day or Night

Work)

Item 141b is used to find out if the respondent worked

primarily days, nights, or rotating shifts at the time of the

incident. Mark Box 1 for "Days," Box 2 for "Nights," and

Box 3 for "Both days and nights/rotating shifts." After

completing Item 141b, continue with Item 142.

142. Is this your current job?

Yes

Item 142 (Current Job)

Item 142 is used to determine whether the respondent’s

job at the time of the incident is also his/her current job at

the time of the interview.

CHECK

Was the respondent injured in this

ITEM S

incident? (Is box 2-11 marked in 31

on page 5?)

Yes (injury marked in 31) - Ask 143

No (blank or None marked in 31) -

SKIP

to 147

Check Item S (Was Person

Injured)

Check Item S is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 143 or to skip to Item 147. Items 143

through 146 ask about lost time and pay due to any injuries

suffered by the respondent during the incident. If you are

not sure which box to mark, look back at Item 31 on

page 5 to see whether you marked any boxes from Boxes 2

through 11.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item S if the respondent was

injured during the incident and then ask the question in

Item 143. Mark the "No" box in Check Item S if Item 31

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-207

is blank or Box 1 "None" is marked and then skip to

Item 147.

143. Did YOU lose time from work because

of the injuries you suffered in this

incident?

Yes - Ask 144

No -

SKIP

to 147

Item 143 (Lost Work Time

Due to Injuries)

Item 143 is used to find out if the respondent/victim of the

incident lost time from work because of his/her own

injuries that were suffered during the incident. Later in the

interview, Items 151 and 152 are used to identify any other

household members who lost time from work because of

the respondent's injuries.

Defining Terms

Work - For this item, work is considered a job or business

rather than housework, school, or other activities.

Time lost from work - For this item, time lost from work

could be time away from his/her job or business due to:

! Injuries suffered in the incident or

! Visits to a doctor or hospital to receive medical care

for injuries suffered during the incident.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with

Item 144. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip to

Item 147.

144. How much time did you lose

because of injuries?

Number of days - Ask 145

Less than one day -

SKIP

to 147

Don't know - Ask 145

Item 144 (Time Lost From

Work Due to Injuries)

Item 144 is used to identify how much time the respondent

lost from work due to the injuries he/she suffered from the

incident. Include time lost from work up to the day of the

interview.

If the respondent lost one or more days from work, enter

the number of whole days on the line provided in

Item 144. If the respondent answers in hours, always

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-208

determine whether the hours were missed all in one day

or more than one day. For example, if the respondent lost

a few hours on one day for physical therapy and a few

hours on another day to visit the doctor, enter "2" for the

number of days, even though the respondent was at work a

portion of each day. After entering the number of days

missed from work, continue with Item 145.

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent lost less than one

workday due to his/her injuries from the incident. After

marking Box 0, skip to Item 147.

Marking Box x If the respondent is unable to give you an answer, always

ask for his/her best estimate before marking Box x "Don't

know." Only mark Box x as a last resort. After marking

Box x, continue with Item 145.

145. During these days, did you lose any pay that was

not covered by unemployment insurance, sick

leave, or some other source?

Yes - Ask 146

No -

SKIP

to 147

Item 145 (Lost Pay Due to

Injuries)

Item 145 is used to discover whether the respondent lost

any pay because the time lost from work was not covered

by unemployment insurance, sick leave, or some other

source.

Defining Terms

Unemployment insurance - Includes any money received

from State unemployment insurance funds or railroad

unemployment benefits.

Sick leave

- Includes continued payment of wages by the

respondent's employer while the respondent is unable to

work due to illness or injury.

Some other source

- Includes any money received from

private insurance plans, worker's compensation, and so

forth. Worker's compensation is periodic money payments

made to workers who are injured on the job and in some

States to workers with nonoccupational temporary

disability or illness. Compensation checks could come

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-209

from the State, private insurance companies, or from

private businesses that insure their own workers.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent lost pay and was NOT

compensated monetarily for the time away from his/her

job due to injuries from the incident. Also mark Box 1 if a

self-employed respondent was paid for the time lost from

work, but he/she was obligated to hire someone to take

his/her place. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 146.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent was compensated

monetarily for the time lost from work due to his/her

injuries from the incident. After marking Box 2, skip to

Item 147.

146. About how much pay did you lose?

$ . 00 Amount of pay lost

Don't know

Item 146 (Amount of Lost

Pay Due to Injuries)

Item 146 is used to determine how much pay the

respondent lost because he/she was unable to work due to

injuries from the incident. Also, if a self-employed

respondent was compensated monetarily for his/her pay,

but was required to hire someone to take his/her place,

record the amount paid to the replacement as lost pay.

Enter the amount of lost pay in whole dollars on the line

provided in Item 146. Round the amount up or down as

necessary. For example, if the amount given was $670.50,

enter "671," and, if the amount given was $670.49, enter

"670." If the amount was less than a $1, enter "1."

If the respondent has difficulty giving you a dollar amount,

ask for his/her best estimate. Only mark Box x "Don't

know" as a last resort.

After completing Item 146, continue with Item 147.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-210

147. Did YOU lose any (other) time from

work because of this incident for such

things as cooperating with a police

investigation, testifying in court, or

repairing or replacing damaged or

stolen property?

Mark (X) all that apply. If no time was lost for

any of these reasons, mark None (box 6).

Police related activities.....................

Court related activities......................

Repairing damaged property.............

Replacing stolen items...................... Ask 148

Other - Specify

None (did not lose time from work for any

of these reasons) -

SKIP

to 151

Item 147 (Time Lost for

Other Reasons)

Item 147 is used to find out if the respondent lost time

from work for purposes OTHER THAN those related to

his/her injuries suffered during the incident. Since you

will be asking this question regardless of whether or not

the respondent was injured during the incident, only read

the word "other" when the respondent was injured.

As you ask the question, pause after each example

included in the question to allow the respondent time to

answer. Since the respondent may have reasons not

specifically mentioned in Boxes 1 through 4, continue

asking, "Any other reason?", until you get a "No" reply.

Item 147 relates specifically to time lost from work by the

respondent only; that is, the person who was victimized

during the incident. Items 151 and 152 collect similar

information for other household members.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the respondent lost time from work due to

police-related activities, such as cooperating with an

investigation by identifying suspects in a lineup, helping to

construct a composite drawing of the offender, identifying

stolen items, and so forth.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the respondent lost time from work due to

court-related activities, such as testifying in court,

attending a trial or hearing, talking to an attorney (either

the prosecutor, the defense attorney, or the respondent's

own lawyer), and so forth.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the respondent lost time from work to repair

property damaged during the incident, drop off and pick

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-211

up a damaged motor vehicle at a repair shop, visit an

optician to repair damaged eyeglasses, wait for a

locksmith, and so forth.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the respondent lost time from work to

replace stolen items, such as waiting for delivery persons,

getting a replacement driver's license, Social Security card,

credit card, checkbook, and so forth.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the respondent lost time from work for a

reason that is not covered in the descriptions for Boxes 1

through 4. After marking Box 5, make sure to explain the

reason on the "Specify" line.

If you mark any of the Boxes 1 through 5, continue with

Item 148.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the respondent did not lose any time from

work due to this incident and Boxes 1 through 5 in

Item 147 are blank. After marking Box 6, skip to

Item 151.

148. How much time did you lose altogether

because of

(name all reasons marked in

147)

Number of days - Ask 149

Less than one day -

SKIP

to 151

Don't know - Ask 149

Item 148 (Amount of Time

Lost)

Item 148 is used to identify how much time the respondent

lost from work to take care of ALL of the tasks marked in

Item 147. As you ask the question in Item 148, read the

reasons marked in Item 147.

Include time lost up to the day of the interview. If the

respondent lost one or more days from work, enter the

number of whole days on the line provided in Item 148. If

the respondent answers in hours, always determine

whether the hours were missed all in one day or more than

one day.

When calculating the number of days missed from work, it

is not necessary for the respondent to have missed an

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-212

entire workday. For example, the respondent may have

lost 4 hours one workday to identify stolen property at the

police station and on another workday the respondent may

have lost 3 hours to wait for a replacement television to be

delivered. In this example, you would enter "2" for the

number of days missed from work due to the incident.

After entering the number of days missed from work in

Item 148, continue with Item 149.

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent missed a total of less

than one full workday due to the reasons marked in

Item 147. After marking Box 0, skip to Item 151.

Marking Box x Before marking Box x, ask the respondent to give you

his/her best estimate. Only mark Box x as a last resort.

After marking Box x, continue with Item 149.

149. During these days, did you lose any pay

that was not covered by unemployment

insurance, paid leave, or some other

source?

Yes - Ask 150

No -

SKIP

to 151

Item 149 (Loss of Pay for

Any Other Reason)

Item 149 is used to determine whether the respondent lost

any pay because the time lost from work was not covered

by unemployment insurance, paid leave, or some other

source.

Defining Terms

Unemployment insurance - Includes any money received

from State unemployment insurance funds or railroad

unemployment benefits.

Paid leave

- Includes continued payment of wages by the

respondent's employer while the respondent is not at work,

such as "personal" or "annual" leave.

Some other source

- Includes any money received from

private insurance plans, worker's compensation, and so

forth. Compensation checks could come from the State,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-213

private insurance companies, or from private businesses

that insure their own workers.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent lost pay and was NOT

compensated monetarily for the time away from his/her

job due to the incident. Also mark Box 1 if a self-

employed respondent was paid for the time lost from

work, but he/she was obligated to hire someone to take

his/her place. After marking Box 1, continue with

Item 150.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent was compensated

monetarily for the time lost from work due to the incident.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 151.

150. About how much pay did you lose?

. 00 Amount of pay lost

Don't know

Item 150 (Amount of Lost

Pay for Other Reasons)

Item 150 is used to determine how much pay the

respondent lost because he/she lost time from work due to

the reasons marked in Item 147. Also, if a self-employed

respondent was compensated monetarily for his/her pay,

but was required to hire someone to take his/her place,

record the amount paid to the replacement as lost pay.

Enter the amount of lost pay in whole dollars on the line

provided in Item 150. Round the amount up or down as

necessary. For example, if the amount given was $670.50,

enter "671," and, if the amount given was $670.49, enter

"670." If the amount was less than a $1, enter "1."

If the respondent has difficulty giving you a dollar amount,

ask for his/her best estimate. Only mark Box x "Don't

know" as a last resort.

After completing Item 150, continue with Item 151.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-214

151. Were there any (other) household

members 16 years or older who lost time

from work because of this incident?

Yes - Ask 152

No -

SKIP

to Check Item T

Item 151 (Lost Time From

Work by Other Household

Members)

Item 151 is used to find out whether there were other

household members who were at least 16 years of age and

lost time from work due to the incident. If the respondent

lost time from work due to the incident, read the word

"other" as you ask the question in Item 151. Otherwise,

ask the question in Item 151 without the word "other."

Let the respondent decide how to answer this question.

The time lost from work could be due to injuries suffered

by these household members or for any of the reasons

described in Item 147.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," continue with Item 152. If you

mark Box 2 "No," skip to Check Item T.

152. How much time did they lose

altogether?

Number of days

Less than one day

Don't know

Item 152 (Time Lost From

Work)

Item 152 is used to identify how much time household

members OTHER THAN the respondent lost from work

because of the incident.

Include time lost up to the day of the interview. If the

household member(s) lost one or more days from work,

enter the number of whole days on the line provided in

Item 152. If the time lost is in hours, always determine

whether the hours were missed all in one day or more than

one day.

When calculating the number of days missed from work, it

is not necessary for the household member(s) to have

missed an entire workday. For example, one household

member may have lost 4 hours one workday to visit a

doctor and on another workday another household member

may have lost 3 hours to wait for a replacement television

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-215

to be delivered. In this example, you would enter "2" for

the number of days missed from work due to the incident.

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if the household member(s) missed less

than one full workday due to the incident.

Marking Box x Before marking Box x, ask the respondent to give you

his/her best estimate. Only mark Box x as a last resort.

After completing Item 152, continue with Check Item T.

CHECK

ITEM T

Was the respondent on the way to or

from work, school, or some other place

when the incident (happened/started)?

(Is box 2, 3, or 4 marked in 135 on

page 17?)

Yes - Ask 153

No -

SKIP

to Check Item U

Check Item T (Respondent

In Transit at Time of

Incident)

Check Item T is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 153 or skip to Check Item U. Refer

back to the boxes marked in Item 135 on page 17. If you

marked Boxes 2, 3, or 4 in Item 135, mark the "Yes" box

in Check Item T and continue with Item 153. Otherwise,

mark the "No" box in Check Item T and skip to Check

Item U.

153.

ASK OR VERIFY -

You told me earlier you were on the

way(to/from) (work/school/some place)

when the incident happened.

Which means of transportation were you

using?

Mark (X) only one box.

Car, truck or van

Motorcycle

Bicycle

On foot

School bus (private or public)

Bus or trolley

Subway or rapid transit

Train

Taxi

Other - Specify

Item 153 (Method of

Transportation)

Item 153 is used to determine which means of

transportation the respondent was using when the incident

started or took place.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-216

If you know the answer to this question, you can verify the

answer with the respondent without asking the question.

However, if you need to ask this question, make sure that

you word it properly based on the box marked in Item 135.

Only mark one box to answer the question in Item 153.

If the respondent should mention a mode of transportation

not listed in Boxes 1 through 9, mark Box 10 "Other" and

enter the type of transportation on the "Specify" line.

After completing Item 153, continue with Check Item U.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-217

Topic 9. Completing Check Item U Through Check Item Z

(Series of Crimes/Hate Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incidents)

CHECK

ITEM U

Is this incident part of a series

of crimes? (Is box 2 (is a "series")

marked in Check Item D on page 1?)

Yes - Ask 154

No -

SKIP

to 161, page 21

Check Item U (Incident

Part of a Series)

Check Item U is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 154 to collect more information if the

incident is part of a series or to skip to Item 161 on

page 21 to start the hate crime questions. If you are not

sure how to mark Check Item U, refer back to Check

Item D on page 1.

If Box 2 "No" (is a "series") is marked in Check Item D,

then mark the "Yes" box in Check Item U and continue

with Item 154. If Box 1 "Yes" (not a "series") is marked

in Check Item D, then mark the "No" box in Check Item U

and skip to Item 161 on page 21.

154. You have told me about the most recent

incident. How many times did this kind

of thing happen to you during the last 6

months?

Number of incidents - Ask 155

Don't know -

Is that because there is no way of

knowing, or because it happened too

many times, or is there some other

reason?

No way of knowing

Happened too many times

Some other reason - Specify

Item 154 (Number of

Incidents in a Series)

Item 154 is used to verify how many incidents are included

in the series for the 6-month reference period. Do NOT

include an incident in the series that happened before the

first day of the reference period or on the day of the

interview. It is possible that a respondent may give you a

different number of incidents now that he/she has provided

details for the most recent incident.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-218

Different Number of

Incidents Than Entered

in Item 4

If the respondent gives you a number that is different than

the number of incidents provided in Item 4 on page 1,

enter the new number in Item 154. If the number of

incidents is less than six, the incidents do not qualify as a

series. If the number of incidents is six or more, the

incidents still qualify as a series. If the number given in

Item 154 is six or more incidents, do NOT change the

number of incidents entered in Item 4, even if they do not

match.

Less Than Six Incidents In most cases, this will not happen. However, if you

determine that there are less than six incidents, then this

incident is NOT part of a series and you need to:

! Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident that

happened during the reference period.

! Correct the "Number of incidents" in Item 4 on the

cover page of the NCVS-2.

! Change the "Number of times" entries in Check

Item G on the NCVS-1 and in the screen question

where these incidents were reported by the

respondent.

! Correct the number of Crime Incident Reports filled in

Item 15c on the NCVS-1 cover page.

Don't Know If the respondent cannot give you the number of incidents

in the series, ask the followup question in Item 154. This

question is used to find out why the respondent is unable

to give you the number of incidents. Mark the appropriate

box based on the respondent's answer to the followup

question:

! Mark Box 1 when the respondent has no way of

knowing the number of incidents.

! Mark Box 2 when the crime happened too many

times for the respondent to give you a number.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-219

! Mark Box 3 when the respondent gives you a reason

OTHER THAN Box 1 or Box 2 and then explain the

reason on the "Specify" line.

After completing Item 154, continue with Item 155.

155. In what month or months did these

incidents take place?

If more than one quarter involved, ASK

How many in

(name months)

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Enter number

for each quarter as appropriate.

Number of incidents per quarter

Jan., Feb.,

or March

(Qtr. 1)

April, May,

or June

(Qtr. 2)

July, Aug.,

or Sept.

(Qtr. 3)

Oct., Nov.,

or Dec.

(Qtr. 4)

Item 155 (Quarters of

Occurrence)

Item 155 is used to identify in which quarter(s) of the

calendar year the incidents in the series happened. Ask the

initial question to identify the month(s) in which these

incidents occurred. If all the incidents in the series

happened in one quarter (For example, all incidents

happened in January and February.), just enter the

number from Item 154 in the appropriate column for

Item 155 without asking the followup question.

If the incidents in the series occurred over more than one

quarter, ask the followup question to determine how many

incidents in the series happened in each three-month

period and then enter the appropriate number of incidents

on the line for the quarter in which they happened. For

example, if the respondent tells you that the incidents

happened in June, July, and August, then you would ask,

"How many in June?" and "How many in July and

August?" Make sure to only ask about months that fall

within the respondent's reference period.

Respondent Has

Difficulty Answering

If the respondent has difficulty remembering how many

incidents took place by month or quarter:

! Do not rush the respondent and allow sufficient time

for him/her to recall these incidents.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-220

! Use neutral probe questions to help the respondent

remember, such as "Did this type of incident happen

about an equal number of times in June as it did in

July and August or did it happen more in July and

August than it did in June?"

! If your probing questions fail, ask the respondent to

give you his/her best estimate. For example, "You

told me this type of incident happened (number

entered in Item 154). Please give me your best

estimate of how many times the incident happened in

June and how many times in July and August."

Recording Numbers in

Item 155

Once you determine how many incidents from the series

happened in each quarter within the reference period, enter

the exact number in the appropriate column for the quarter.

You may need to add together incidents by month to arrive

at the total to enter for a quarter. Leave a column blank if

no incidents in the series happened during the 3-month

period for that quarter.

Only include incidents that happened after the first day of

the reference period and up to, but not including, the day

of interview. Probe as necessary to get a precise number

and do not enter a range of numbers. Only enter "DK" if

you have asked probing questions and the respondent still

cannot provide an answer.

The number of incidents in Items 4, 154, and 155 should

be independent and you should not attempt to reconcile

any differences for a series of incidents, as long as the total

number in each of these items is at least six incidents.

Also, do not change the date entered in Item 3 or the boxes

marked in Check Items B, C, or D.

After completing Item 155, continue with Item 156.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-221

156. Did all, some, or none of these incidents

occur in the same place?

Mark (X) only one box.

All in the same place

Some in the same place

None in the same place

Item 156 (Did Incidents

Occur in Same Place)

Item 156 is used to find out if the incidents in the series all

happened in the same place, or just some in the same

place, or none of them in the same place or location. Mark

Box 1 for "All in the same place," Box 2 for "Some in the

same place," and Box 3 for "None in the same place."

Only mark one answer for this question and then continue

with Item 157.

157. Were all, some, or none of these

incidents done by the same person(s)?

Mark (X) only one box.

All by the same person

Some by the same person

None by the same person

Don't know -

SKIP

to 159

Item 157 (Same Offenders

for All Incidents)

Item 157 is used to find out if the offender(s) in all, some,

or none of the incidents in the series were the same

person(s). Mark Box 1 if the offender(s) in all of the

incidents were the same person(s). Mark Box 2 if the

offender(s) in some of the incidents were the same

person(s). Mark Box 3 if the offender in each of the

incidents was a different person. Only mark one answer

for this question. After marking Box 1, 2, or 3, continue

with Item 158.

If the respondent is unable to answer to this question, mark

Box 4 and skip to Item 159.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-222

158. What (was/were) the relationship(s) of the

offender(s) to you? For example,

friend, spouse, schoolmate, etc.

Mark (X) all that apply.

Relative

Spouse at time of incident

Ex-spouse at time of incident

Parent or step-parent

Other relative - Specify

Nonrelative

Friend or ex-friend

Neighbor

Schoolmate

Roommate, boarder

Customer/client

Patient

Supervisor (current or former)

Employee (current or former)

Co-worker (current or former)

Stranger

Other nonrelative - Specify

Item 158 (Offender’s

Relationship to

Respondent)

Item 158 is used to identify the relationship of each

offender involved in the series of incidents to the

respondent at the time of the incident. If there was more

than one offender, mark all appropriate boxes. Make sure

that the respondent understands that we are only interested

in the relationship of each offender to the respondent, and

NOT any relationships between one offender and another

offender.

The relationships are separated into two groups-- Boxes 1

through 4 are grouped under the heading "Relative" and

Boxes 5 through 15 are grouped under the heading

"Nonrelative." Notice that Boxes 9 and 10 are out of

sequence.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 if the offender was either the husband or wife

of the respondent at the time of the incident, regardless of

whether or not they are still married at the time of the

interview.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 if the offender was an ex-spouse (ex-husband

or ex-wife) of the respondent at the time of the incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-223

Accept the respondent's answer without probing to

determine whether they are divorced or separated.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 if the offender was a father, mother,

stepfather, or stepmother to the respondent. Do not mark

Box 3 if the offender was a mother-in-law or father-in-law,

instead mark Box 4 and write in the relationship to the

respondent at the time of the incident.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 if the offender is a relative of the respondent

OTHER THAN the relationships described in Boxes 1

through 3. Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child, brother,

sister, aunt, uncle, cousin, grandparent, in-law, or other

relative of the respondent by blood or marriage that is not

covered in Boxes 1 through 3. After marking Box 4,

always write in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the offender was any type of friend or ex-

friend to the respondent at the time of the incident,

regardless of the offender's sex. Include responses such as

"good friend," "best friend," "boyfriend," "girlfriend," "just

a friend," and so forth.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the offender was not related to the

respondent by blood or marriage and was living close

enough to the respondent at the time of the incident to be

considered a neighbor.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the offender was not related to the

respondent by blood or marriage and attended the same

school as the respondent at the time of the incident.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the offender was not related to the

respondent by blood or marriage and lived with the

respondent as a roommate or boarder at the time of the

incident.

Marking Box 11, 12, 13,

14, or 15

Mark the most appropriate box(es) from Boxes 11, 12, 13,

14, and 15 if the offenders are nonrelatives, but are known

by the respondent as business clients, patients, or

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-224

supervisors, employees, or co-workers, including former

supervisors, employees, or co-workers.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the offender is someone who was unknown

or known only by sight to the respondent at the time of the

incident.

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the offender was not related to the

respondent by blood or marriage and the nonrelative

offender does not fit any of the descriptions in Boxes 5

through 9. After marking Box 10, always write in the

relationship of the offender to the respondent on the

"Specify" line, such as the respondent's barber, electrician,

and so forth.

After completing Item 158, continue with Item 159.

159. Did the same thing happen each time?

Yes

No -

How did the incidents differ?

Item 159 (Were All

Incidents the Same)

Item 159 is used to identify how the incidents in the series

may be different from one another. If the respondent

answers "Yes" to this question, mark Box 1. However, if

the respondent answers "No," mark Box 2 and ask the

followup question to determine how they were different.

For example, the offender may have vandalized the shed in

one of the incidents or perhaps the offender used a weapon

in two of the incidents. Make sure to explain clearly what

made the incidents different on the line below the

followup question.

After completing Item 159, continue with Item 160.

160. Is the trouble still going on?

Yes

No -

What ended it?

Item 160 (Is the Problem

Ongoing)

Item 160 is used to find out whether the type of problem

that was recurring in the series of incidents is still

continuing or has ended. Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-225

incidents are still happening. If the respondent answers

"No," ask the followup question to determine what

terminated these incidents. For example, the offender may

have been arrested, the respondent moved to another

house, the respondent changed schools, and so forth.

Make sure to explain clearly what brought these incidents

to an end.

After completing Item 160, continue with Check Item V1.

CHECK

ITEM V1

Mark the ONE category that best

describes this series of crimes.

If more than one category describes

this series, mark the box with the

lowest number.

Contact crimes

Completed or threatened violence in the course of

the victim's job (police officer, security guard,

psychiatric social worker, etc.)

Completed or threatened violence between spouses,

other relatives, friends, neighbors, etc.

Completed or threatened violence at school or on

school property

Other contact crimes (other violence, pocket picking,

purse snatching, etc.) - Specify

Noncontact crimes

Theft or attempted theft of motor vehicles

Theft or attempted theft of motor vehicle parts (tire,

hubcap, battery, attached tape deck, etc.)

Theft or attempted theft of contents of motor

vehicle, including unattached parts

Theft or attempted theft at school or on school

property

Illegal entry of, or attempt to enter, victim's home,

other building on property, second home, hotel,

motel

Theft or attempted theft from victim's home or

vicinity by person(s) known to victim (roommate,

babysitter, etc.)

Theft or attempted theft from victim's home or

vicinity by person(s) unknown to victim

Other theft or attempted theft (at work, while

shopping, etc.) - Specify

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-226

Check Item V1 (Crime

Categories for Series)

Check Item V1 is used by you to help classify the type of

series crime and it is very important that you mark this

check item accurately. Based on the facts gathered to this

point, select and mark the first or lowest numbered box

that best describes what happened during this series of

incidents. Only mark ONE box for this Check Item. If

more than on box/category describes this series of

incidents, always mark the lowest numbered box, because

a "contact crime" is considered more serious than a

"noncontact crime."

Boxes 1 through 4 are grouped together under the heading

"Contact crimes." Contact crimes involve an actual or

threatened face-to-face physical confrontation between the

offender and the respondent. Boxes 5 through 12 are

grouped together under the heading "Noncontact crimes."

Noncontact crimes do NOT involve an actual or threatened

physical confrontation between the offender and the

respondent.

Marking Box 1 Mark Box 1 when all incidents in the series involve the

offender physically attacking or threatening to physically

attack the respondent in the course of the respondent's

job. Only mark Box 1 if the incidents relate somehow to

the respondent's job. For example, a prison guard reports

eight incidents in which prisoners threatened to physically

harm her or an attendant at a parking garage reports seven

incidents in which he was physically attacked and robbed

while on the job.

Marking Box 2 Mark Box 2 when all incidents in the series involve

completed or attempted violence between spouses, other

relatives, friends, neighbors, and so forth. For example, a

respondent's nephew has threatened to kill her on several

occasions if she does not give him money or a respondent's

ex-spouse physically attacked her on several occasions

because she would not take him back.

Marking Box 3 Mark Box 3 when all incidents in the series involve

completed or threatened violence at school or on school

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-227

property. For example, a student threatened to attack the

respondent on several occasions in the school parking lot.

Marking Box 4 Mark Box 4 when all incidents in the series involve some

type of physical violence or threat of physical violence

between the offender and the respondent OTHER THAN

those types described in Boxes 1 through 3. After marking

Box 4, make sure to explain clearly the type of violent

contact or threat of violent contact on the "Specify" line.

For example, someone grabbed respondent's purse from

her shoulder, knocked her down on the ground, and ran

with the purse on multiple occasions.

Marking Box 5 Mark Box 5 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft of motor vehicles AND there was no

contact between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 6 Mark Box 6 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft of parts ATTACHED to a motor vehicle,

such as hubcaps, wheels, CD players, batteries, gasoline,

and so forth AND there was no contact between the

offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 7 Mark Box 7 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft of items left inside a motor vehicle that are

NOT ATTACHED to the motor vehicle, such as a bowling

ball, cellular phone, golf clubs, wallet, tools, clothes, and

so forth AND there was no contact between the offender

and the respondent.

Marking Box 8 Mark Box 8 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft of items belonging to the respondent at

school or on school property AND there was no contact

between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 9 Mark Box 9 if the series of incidents involves the illegal

entry or attempted illegal entry into the respondent's home,

other building on his/her property, a second home, or a

motel or hotel room where he/she is staying AND there

was no contact between the offender and the respondent.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-228

Marking Box 10 Mark Box 10 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft from the respondent's home or the property

surrounding the home by someone the respondent knows,

such as a roommate, babysitter, or some other person

known to the respondent and this person did NOT illegally

enter the home or property. Do not mark Box 10 if there

was any contact between the offender and the respondent,

instead mark the appropriate box under Contact crimes.

Marking Box 11 Mark Box 11 if the series of incidents involves the theft or

attempted theft from the respondent's home or the property

surrounding the home by someone the respondent does

NOT know, such as an appliance repair person or traveling

sales person and this person did NOT illegally enter the

home or property. Do not mark Box 11 if there was any

contact between the offender and the respondent, instead

mark the appropriate box under Contact crimes.

Marking Box 12 Mark Box 12 if the series of incidents involves a theft or

attempted theft and the circumstances do not fit the

descriptions in Boxes 5 through 11. After marking

Box 12, make sure to clearly explain the type of theft or

attempted theft on the "Specify" line. Do not mark Box 12

if there was any contact between the offender and the

respondent, instead mark the appropriate box under

Contact crimes.

After completing Check Item V1, continue with Item 161.

161. Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry

occur when (an offender/offenders) target(s)

people because of one or more of their

characteristics or religious beliefs.

Do you have any reason to suspect the

incident just discussed was a hate crime or

crime of prejudice or bigotry?

Yes - Ask 162

No....................

SKIP

to Item 167

Don't know......

Item 161 (Suspect Incident

Was a Hate Crime)

Item 161 is used to determine whether the respondent has

any reason to suspect that the incident was a hate crime or

crime of prejudice or bigotry. Since Item 161 is the first in

a series of "hate crime" questions that continue through

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-229

Item 166, make sure to read the lead-in statement and then

continue with the question in Item 161. As you read the

lead-in statement, choose the correct wording based on

whether there was one offender or multiple offenders.

It is very important to read the lead-in statement and the

question exactly as it is worded on the questionnaire. This

wording has been tested and analyzed thoroughly and

changing the wording during an interview could jeopardize

the results.

Explaining "Hate

Crimes or Crimes of

Prejudice or Bigotry"

If a respondent should ask you what you mean by the

phrase "hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry," you

can tell the respondent that it is a crime in which an

offender targets one or more persons out of hatred towards

certain characteristics associated with a group. For

example, because an offender hates all persons of the

Jewish faith, he spray painted a swastika on the garage

door of each household on Tucker Street whose name on

the mailbox sounded Jewish to the offender.

However, if a respondent claims that a classmate keeps

picking fights with her because she is jealous of the

respondent, this type of incident is NOT considered a "hate

crime" or a "crime of prejudice or bigotry."

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with

Item 162. Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and Box 3 for a

"Don't know" answer. After marking Box 2 or Box 3, skip

to Item 167 on page 23.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-230

162. An offender/Offenders can target people for

a variety of reasons, but we are only going

to ask you about a few today. Do you

suspect the offender(s) targeted you because

of...

(a) Your race?.................................................

(b) Your religion?...........................................

origin (for example, people of Hispanic

origin)? ......................................................

(d) Any disability (by this I mean physical,

mental, or developmental disabilities) you

may have?..................................................

(e) Your gender?............................................

(f) Your sexual orientation?..........................

If "Yes," SAY -

(by this we mean

homosexual, bisexual, or heterosexual)

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Item 162 (Why Offender

Targeted Respondent)

Item 162 is used to identify the type of prejudice that the

respondent suspects motivated the offender to commit the

crime. Notice that Item 162 starts with a lead-in statement

and then continues with six separate questions.

Always read the lead-in statement and then read the first

question:

"Do you suspect the offender(s) targeted you because of

your race?"

After asking this question, pause to let the respondent

answer. Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No"

answer, and Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer. Unless you

get interrupted, you do not need to read the entire question

for the remaining questions. For example, just ask "Your

religion?".

Understanding "Race" When we use the term "race," we mean whether the person

is White, Black/African American, American Indian or

Alaska Native, Asian, Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific

Islander. Keep in mind that "Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino"

relates to a person's ethnic background or national origin,

NOT to his/her race.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-231

Reading Examples Questions (c) and (d) have examples in parentheses as part

of the question. These examples are included to help

avoid any misinterpretation of what we mean by "ethnic

background or national origin" and "disabilities." Make

sure to always read these examples as part of the question.

However, when you get to question (f), ONLY read the

examples in parentheses and bold type when you get a

"Yes" answer to question (f). After reading the examples,

a respondent may tell you that he/she meant something

different. If this happens, line through the "Yes" answer

for question (f) and mark Box 2 "No."

Understanding

"Gender"

Most respondents will probably understand what we mean

by "gender," but, if someone seems unsure, you can add

"by this we mean male or female."

After completing Item 162, continue with Item 163.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-232

163. Some offenders target people because

they associate with certain people or the

(offender perceives/offenders perceive)

them as having certain characteristics or

religious beliefs.

Do you suspect you were targeted because

of...

(a) Your association with people who

have certain characteristics or

religious beliefs (for example, a

multiracial couple)? .............................

(b) The offender(s)'s perception of your

characteristics or religious beliefs (for

example, the offender(s) thought you

were Jewish because you went into a

synagogue)?...........................................

Yes - Specify 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes - Specify 2

No 3

Don't know

Item 163 (Association With

Certain People or

Offender's Perception)

After completing all parts of Item 162, read the lead-in

statement first and then ask both questions in Item 163.

These questions are used to determine if the respondent

feels that the offender targeted him/her due to:

! The respondent's association with persons who

have specific characteristics, such as being Asian,

Catholic, Hispanic, physically disabled, male or

female, homosexual, and so forth. Here is an

example: An offender is prejudiced against

homosexuals and believes that the respondent is

homosexual because she lives with a woman who is

known to be homosexual.

! The offender's perception of the respondent's

characteristics or religious beliefs. Here is an

example: An offender is prejudiced against persons

of Italian ancestry. This offender believes that Tina

Martino is Italian because of her personal

characteristics and her name.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-233

Make sure to read the lead-in statement correctly based on

whether there was one offender or multiple offenders.

After reading the lead-in statement:

! Ask question (a) first,

! Wait for the respondent's answer,

! If the answer is "Yes," mark Box 1 and make sure to

enter a brief description of WHY the respondent

suspects that he/she was targeted due to his/her

association with people who have certain

characteristics or religious beliefs.

! If the answer is "No," mark Box 2. If the answer is

"Don't know," mark Box 3.

! Once you have recorded an answer for question (a),

ask question (b) and follow the same procedure as

instructed for question (a).

CHECK

ITEM V2

Are one or more boxes marked

"Yes" in 162 OR 163?

Yes - Ask 164

No -

SKIP

to Item 167

Check Item V2 ("Yes"

Answer in Previous

Questions)

Check Item V2 is designed to determine whether you need

to continue with Item 164 or skip to Item 167. If you

marked one or more "Yes" answers (Box 1) in either

Item 162 or 163, you need to mark the "Yes" box in Check

Item V2 and continue with Item 164. However, if you

marked ALL "No" or "Don't know" answers (Box 2 or 3)

in Items 162 and 163, mark the "No" box in Check

Item V2, stop asking the hate crime questions, and skip to

Item 167 on page 23.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-234

164. Do you have any evidence that this

incident was a hate crime or crime of

prejudice or bigotry?

If "No" or "Don't know," ASK--

Did the offender(s) say something, write

anything, or leave anything behind at the

crime scene that would suggest you

were targeted because of your

characteristics or religious beliefs?

Yes - Ask 165

No ....................

SKIP

to Item 167

Don't know.......

Item 164 (Evidence of a

Hate Crime)

Item 164 is designed to find out if the respondent has any

evidence that the reported incident was a hate crime or a

crime of prejudice or bigotry.

If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and then ask the

question in Item 165 to determine what type of evidence

the respondent has that makes him/her suspect the incident

was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or bigotry.

If you get a "No" or "Don't know" answer, mark Box 2 for

"No" and mark Box 3 for "Don't know." If you mark

either Box 2 or 3, make sure that you ask the structured

probe question for Item 164. This probe question is

designed to help ensure that we get an accurate answer

concerning evidence of a hate crime.

If the probe question results in a "Yes" answer, line

through the "No" or "Don't know" answer and mark Box 1

"Yes." However, if you still get a "No" or "Don't know"

answer after asking the probe question, leave Box 2 or 3

marked and skip to Item 167 on page 23.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-235

165. The next questions ask about the evidence

you have that makes you suspect this

incident was a hate crime or a crime of

prejudice or bigotry. As I read the following

questions, please tell me if any of the

following happened:

(a) Did the offender(s) make fun of you,

make negative comments, use slang,

hurtful words, or abusive language? ...........

(b) Were any hate symbols present at the

crime scene to indicate the offender(s)

targeted you for a particular reason (for

example, a swastika, graffiti on the walls

of a temple, a burning cross, or written

words)? .........................................................

offender(s) targeted you (for example,

did the offender(s) confess a motive, or

did the police find books, journals, or

pictures that indicated the offender(s)

(was/were) prejudiced against people

with certain characteristics or religious

beliefs)? .........................................................

(d) Do you know the offender(s) (has/have)

committed similar hate crimes or crimes

of prejudice or bigotry in the past? ............

(e) Did the incident occur on or near a holiday,

event, location, gathering place,

or building commonly associated with a

specific group (for example, at the Gay

Pride March or at a synagogue, Korean

church, or gay bar)? .....................................

(f) Have other hate crimes or crimes of

prejudice or bigotry happened to you or

in your area/neighborhood where people

have been targeted? .....................................

(g) Do your feelings, instincts, or perception

lead you to suspect this incident was a

hate crime or crime of prejudice or

bigotry, but you do not have enough

evidence to know for sure? .........................

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Item 165 (Types of

Evidence)

Item 165 is designed to pinpoint the type of evidence that

leads the respondent to suspect that the reported incident

was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or bigotry.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-236

Item 165 starts with a lead-in statement and continues with

seven separate questions, (a) through (g).

Follow these steps to complete Item 165:

Step

1 Start by reading the lead-in statement exactly as it

is worded on the questionnaire. It is not necessary

to repeat this statement for each of the seven

questions.

2 Next, ask the respondent question (a).

3 After asking question (a), wait for the respondent

to answer.

4 Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No"

answer, or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.

5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each of the remaining

questions in Item 165.

Because of the wording and examples provided for these

questions, most respondents will probably answer each

question without requiring any added explanations. After

completing Item 165, continue with Item 166.

166. At any time, did you tell the police that you

believed the incident was a hate crime or

crime of prejudice or bigotry?

Yes

Item 166 (Told Police

Suspected Incident Was a

Hate Crime)

Item 166 is the last "hate crime" question in the Crime

Incident Report (NCVS-2) and is used to determine if the

respondent told the police that he/she believed the incident

was motivated by the offender's hatred, prejudice, or

bigotry. Mark Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No," as appropriate.

Once you complete Item 166, continue with Item 167.

Disability Questions

Items 167 through 176 cover the "disability" questions in

the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2). In October 1998,

President Clinton signed into law the Crime Victims With

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-237

Disabilities Awareness Act. This Act requires the U.S.

Department of Justice to collect information about the

victimization of persons with disabilities, especially those

persons with developmental disabilities.

Keep in mind that the "developmental disability"

definition which we are using for the NCVS was

determined by Federal law and may differ from what you

commonly think of as a developmental disability (for

example, mental retardation).

There are two main purposes for collecting this

information:

1 To increase our knowledge and awareness about

crimes in which persons with developmental

disabilities have been victimized, and

2 To help the Federal government in developing new

strategies for reducing crimes against

developmentally disabled persons.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-238

167. The next questions ask about any health

conditions, impairments, or disabilities you

may have.

Due to a health condition, impairment, or

disability, are you limited in any of the

following major life activities?

(Read

categories a-g below.)

(a) Self-care, such as bathing, dressing, or

feeding yourself? ....................................

(b) Communicating, such as talking with or

listening to other people? .......................

(d) Mobility, such as bending, walking,

climbing stairs, or carrying something

weighing approximately 10 pounds? ....

(e) Self-direction, such as making important

decisions concerning your health care,

education, or career? ...............................

(f) Living independently, such as preparing

meals, shopping for groceries and

personal items, and doing housework? ...

(g) Managing finances, such as keeping

track of your money and paying bills? ...

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Yes 2

No 3

Don't know

Item 167 (Limitations Due

to Health Conditions)

Since Item 167 is the first in a series of disability

questions, always introduce this series of questions by

reading the lead-in statement. Then ask each of the seven

questions in Item 167 to discover whether the respondent

is limited in performing any of the seven major life

activities.

Follow these steps to complete Item 167:

Step

1 First read the lead-in statement and ask the lead-in

question exactly as it is worded on the questionnaire.

2 Next, ask question (a) of the respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-239

3 After asking question (a), wait for the respondent to

answer.

4 Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No"

answer, or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.

5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each of the remaining

six questions in Item 167.

CHECK

ITEM V4

Look at 167. Is box 1 (Yes) marked

in any of the categories a-g?

Yes - Ask 168

No -

SKIP

to Check Item W

Check Item V4 ("Yes"

Answer in Previous Item)

Check Item V4 is used to help you decide:

! Whether to continue asking the disability questions

with Item 168

! Whether to skip out of the disability questions and

go to Check Item W to complete your summary

report for the incident.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V4 if you marked AT

LEAST one "Yes" answer (Box 1) in Item 167. Then

continue with Item 168.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item V4 if you marked ALL

"No" or "Don't know" answers (Box 2 or 3) in Item 167.

Then skip to Check Item W and complete the summary

report for the incident.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-240

168. What specific health conditions,

impairments, or disabilities do you have

which limit your ability to

(fill with "Yes"

responses from 167)

FIELD REPRESENTATIVES - List up to 3

different conditions reported by the respondent.

Do not repeat conditions.

None -

SKIP

to Check Item W

(First health condition)

(Second health condition)

(Third health condition)

Item 168 (Identifying

Health Conditions)

After determining in Item 167 that the respondent is

limited in one or more major life activities, Item 168 is

used to identify up to three different health conditions,

impairments, or disabilities which cause these limitations.

As you ask the question for Item 168, finish the question

by reading the activity from Item 167 that the respondent

has problems performing.

Notice that there is a Field Representative's instruction

reminding you to:

! List up to three DIFFERENT conditions reported by

the respondent and

! Make sure not to repeat the same condition (for

example, do not list Arthritis twice).

Here is an example for asking the question in

Item 168:

The respondent answers "Yes" to the following question in

Item 167, "Mobility, such as bending, walking, climbing

stairs, or carrying something weighing approximately

10 pounds?" In this case, ask the question in Item 168 as

follows: "What specific health conditions, impairments,

or disabilities do you have which limit your ability to

bend, walk, climb stairs, or carry something weighing

approximately 10 pounds?"

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) “None” if the respondent tells you that

he/she does not have any health conditions, impairments,

or disabilities or that it is just "old age" or "laziness" that

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-241

keeps him/her from doing certain things, such as climbing

stairs or doing housework. After marking Box 0, skip to

Check Item W and complete the summary report for the

incident.

First Health Condition

If the respondent mentions only one health condition,

enter the name of the condition on the “First health

condition” line.

Second Health

Condition

If the respondent mentions two unique health conditions,

such as Diabetes and Parkinson’s Disease, use a separate

line for each health condition. For example, enter

Diabetes on the “First health condition” line and

Parkinson’s Disease on the “Second health condition” line.

Third Health Condition

If the respondent mentions three unique health

conditions, such as Diabetes, Parkinson’s Disease, and

Lupus, use a separate line for each health condition. For

example, enter Diabetes on the “First health condition”

line, Parkinson’s Disease on the “Second health condition”

line, and Lupus on the “Third health condition” line.

If the respondent mentions more than three health

conditions, probe so you can identify the three conditions

which are the MAJOR causes for the respondent's

limitations and then enter those three conditions in

Item 168.

CHECK

ITEM V5

Look at 168. Is only one health

condition, impairment, or disability

reported?

Yes - Ask 169

No -

SKIP

to 172

Check Item V5 (Only One

Health Condition)

Following Check Item V5, there are two sets of disability

questions. One set (Items 169 through 171) is worded

specifically for respondents who report only ONE health

condition in Item 168, and the other set of questions

(Items 172 through 174) is worded specifically for

respondents who report two or three health conditions in

Item 168.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-242

Check Item V5 is designed to help you decide whether to:

! Continue with the set of disability questions starting

with Item 169 for ONE health condition reported in

Item 168.

! Skip to Item 172 to ask the disability questions for

two or three health conditions reported in Item 168.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V5 if you only listed

one health condition in Item 168 and then continue with

Item 169.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item V5 if you listed two or

three health conditions in Item 168 and then skip to

Item 172.

169. You just reported that

(fill with health condition

from 168)

limits your major life activities. Has

this condition lasted longer than six months?

Yes

Item 169 (Condition

Lasted Longer Than

6 Months)

Item 169 is used to determine whether the health condition

reported in Item 168 has lasted longer than 6 months. As

you read the lead-in statement, include the health

condition listed in Item 168. For example, "You just

reported that Arthritis limits your major life activities."

Then ask the question, "Has this condition lasted longer

than six months?"

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No"

answer. Once you have completed Item 169, continue

with Item 170.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-243

170. Do you consider your

(fill with health

condition from 168)

to be mild, moderate, or

severe? ...............................................................

Mild

Moderate

Severe

Don't know

Item 170 (Severity of

Health Condition)

Item 170 is used to find out if the respondent considers

his/her health condition to be mild, moderate, or severe.

As you ask the question, include the health condition listed

in Item 168. For example, "Do you consider your

Arthritis to be mild, moderate, or severe?"

Mark Box 1 for "Mild," Box 2 for "Moderate," and Box 3

for "Severe." Mark Box 4 "Don't know" if the respondent

really is not sure how to answer this question. Only mark

Box 4 as a last resort.

CHECK

ITEM V6

Is respondent's age greater than or

equal to 22? (Look at control card

item 17.)

Yes - Ask 171

No -

SKIP

to 175

Check Item V6

(Respondent Is 22 Years

Old or Older)

Check Item V6 is used to help you decide whether to

continue with Item 171 or skip to Item 175. You will only

ask the question in Item 171 if the respondent is at least

22 years of age. If you are not sure whether the respondent

is 22 years of age or older, you can find the respondent's

current age by referring to either:

! Item 17 on the household's Control Card or

! Item 21 of the respondent's personal characteristics

on the NCVS-1.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V6 if the respondent is

at least 22 years of age and then continue with Item 171.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item V6 if the respondent is

younger than 22 years of age and then skip to Item 175.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-244

171. Did your

(fill with health condition from 168)

begin before age 22?

Yes ...............

No .................

SKIP

to 175

Don't know

Item 171 (Health

Condition Started Before

Age 22)

Item 171 is used to find out if the health condition listed in

Item 168 started before the respondent turned 22 years old.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer,

and Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer. Only mark Box 3

as a last resort. After completing Item 171, skip to

Item 175.

172. You just reported that

(fill with health

conditions from 168)

limit your major life

activities. Which of these conditions lasted

longer than six months?

None

(First health condition)

(Second health condition)

(Third health condition)

Item 172 (Health

Conditions Lasting Longer

Than 6 Months)

Item 172 is similar to Item 169 in that you are trying to

determine which of the two or three conditions listed in

Item 168 lasted longer than 6 months. As you read the

lead-in statement, include the health conditions listed in

Item 168 and read them in the same order as they are listed

in Item 168. For example, "You just reported that

Diabetes and Parkinson’s Disease limit your major life

activities. Then ask the question, "Which of these

conditions lasted longer than six months?

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if NONE of the health conditions listed

in Item 168 have lasted longer than 6 months.

First Health Condition If the first health condition listed in Item 168 has lasted

longer than 6 months, enter that health condition on the

“First health condition” line for Item 172.

Second Health

Condition

If the second health condition listed in Item 168 has lasted

longer than 6 months, enter that health condition on the

“Second health condition” line for Item 172.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-245

Third Health Condition If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and it

has lasted longer than 6 months, enter that health condition

on the “Third health condition” line for Item 172.

After completing Item 172, continue with Item 173.

173. Do you consider your

(fill with FIRST health

condition from 168)

to be mild, moderate,

or severe? ...............................................................

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Read only if a second

health condition is listed in 168.

And what about your

(fill with SECOND

health condition from 168)

Do you consider it

to be mild, moderate, or severe? ..........................

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE - Read only if a third

health condition is listed in 168.

And what about your

(fill with THIRD health

condition from 168)

Do you consider it to be

mild, moderate, or severe? ...................................

Mild

Moderate

Severe

Don't know

Mild

Moderate

Severe

Don't know

Mild

Moderate

Severe

Don't know

Item 173 (Severity of

Health Conditions)

Item 173 is used to find out how severe the respondent

considers each reported health condition to be--mild,

moderate, or severe. As you ask the question for the first

health condition listed in Item 168, include the name of the

condition where indicated. For example, "Do you

consider your Diabetes to be mild, moderate, or severe?"

Always refer to Item 168 for the complete list of health

conditions and the sequence in which to ask about each

health condition. Do NOT refer to Item 172, since

Item 172 only shows the health conditions that have

lasted more than 6 months.

Also, accept the respondent's answer for Item 173 without

probing since we are interested in how the respondent

perceives the severity of each health condition.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-246

Mark Box 1 for "Mild," Box 2 for "Moderate," Box 3 for

"Severe," and Box 4 for "Don't know." Only mark Box 4

as a last resort.

Second Health

Condition

Notice that there is a Field Representative instruction

following the initial question in Item 173. This instruction

tells you to only read the second question if a second

health condition is listed in Item 168. If the respondent

only has one health condition, you need to:

! Line through your entries in Items 172 and 173.

! Correct your entry in Check Item V5 on page 23 by

lining through the "No" box and marking the "Yes"

box.

! Ask the questions in Items 169 and 170.

! Complete Check Item V6 and, if appropriate, ask the

question in Item 171.

When the respondent has a second health condition, ask

the second question in Item 173 including the second

health condition listed in Item 168. For example, "And

what about your Parkinson’s Disease. Do you consider

it to be mild, moderate, or severe?" Mark the appropriate

answer box based on the respondent's answer.

Third Health

Condition

Following the second question, you will see another Field

Representative instruction. This instruction tells you to

only ask the third question if there is a third health

condition listed in Item 168. There may be instances in

which it will not be necessary to ask the third question in

Item 173. However, if you do ask it, include the name of

the third health condition where indicated in the question.

Mark the appropriate answer box based on the

respondent's answer.

After completing Item 173, continue with Check Item V7.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-247

CHECK

ITEM V7

Is respondent's age greater than or

equal to 22? (Look at control card

item 17.)

Yes - Ask 174

No -

SKIP

to 175

Check Item V7

(Respondent 22 Years Old

or Older)

Check Item V7 is very similar to Check Item V6 and is

used to help you decide whether or not to ask the question

in Item 174. If you are not sure if the respondent is at least

22 years of age, you can find the respondent's current age

by referring either to:

! Item 17 on the household's Control Card or

! Item 21 of the respondent's personal characteristics

on the NCVS-1.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V7 if the respondent is

at least 22 years of age and then ask the question in

Item 174 next.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item V7 if the respondent is

less than 22 years of age and then skip to Item 175.

174. Which of your health conditions,

impairments, or disabilities began before

age 22?

None

(First health condition)

(Second health condition)

(Third health condition)

Item 174 (Health

Conditions Which Started

Before Age 22)

Item 174 is very similar to Item 171 and is used to find out

if any of the health conditions reported in Item 168 began

before the respondent turned 22 years old.

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent tells you that none of

the health conditions listed in Item 168 began before the

respondent turned 22 years old.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-248

First Health Condition If the respondent tells you that the first health condition

listed in Item 168 began prior to his/her 22nd birthday,

enter that health condition on the “First health condition”

line for Item 174.

Second Health

Condition

If the respondent tells you that the second health condition

listed in Item 168 began prior to his/her 22nd birthday,

enter that health condition on the “Second health

condition” line for Item 174.

Third Health Condition If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and

the condition began prior to the respondent’s 22nd

birthday, enter that health condition on the “Third health

condition” line for Item 174.

After completing Item 174, continue with Item 175.

175. During the incident you just told me about,

do you have any reason to suspect you

were victimized because of your health

condition(s), impairment(s) or

disability(ies)?

Yes - Fill Check Item V8

No ...................

SKIP

to Check Item W

Don't know

Item 175 (Suspect

Victimization Resulted

From Health Condition)

Item 175 is used to determine whether the respondent has

any reason to suspect that he/she was victimized during

the incident because of his/her health condition(s),

impairment(s), or disability(ies).

If the respondent answers:

"Yes" Mark Box 1 and continue with Check

Item V8.

"No" Mark Box 2 and skip to Check Item W.

"Don't know" Mark Box 3 and skip to Check Item W.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-249

CHECK

ITEM V8

Is more than one health condition,

impairment or disability listed in

item 168?

Yes - Ask 176

No -

SKIP

to Check Item W

Check Item V8 (More

Than One Health

Condition)

Check Item V8 is used to help you decide whether to ask

the question in Item 176 or skip to Check Item W. Mark

the "Yes" box in Check Item V8 if more than one health

condition is listed in Item 168 and then continue with

Item 176. However, if only one health condition is listed

in Item 168, skip to Check Item W and complete the

summary report for the incident.

176. Which of your health conditions,

impairments, or disabilities do you believe

caused you to be targeted for this incident?

None

(First health condition)

(Second health condition)

(Third health condition)

Item 176 (Identifying

Health Conditions)

Item 176 is used to identify which of the health conditions

listed in Item 168 the respondent feels may have caused

the offender to target him/her during the incident.

Marking Box 0 Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent believes that NONE

of the health conditions listed in Item 168 were the cause

for the offender targeting him/her during the incident.

First Health Condition If the respondent believes that the first health condition

listed in Item 168 was the cause for the offender targeting

him/her during the incident, enter that health condition on

the “First health condition” line for Item 176.

Second Health

Condition

If the respondent believes that the second health condition

listed in Item 168 was the cause for the offender targeting

him/her during the incident, enter that health condition on

the “Second health condition” line for Item 176.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-250

Third Health Condition If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and

the respondent believes that this health condition was the

cause for the offender targeting him/her during the

incident, enter that health condition on the “Third health

condition” line for Item 176.

Item 176 is the last of the disability questions. Once you

have completed Item 176, continue with the summary

report in Check Item W.

CHECK

ITEM W

Summarize this incident or series of

incidents. Include what was taken,

how entry was gained, how victim

was threatened/attacked, what

weapons were present and how they

were used, any injuries, what victim

was doing at time of attack/threat,

whether the incident was reported to

the police or whether only nonhouse-

hold property was stolen.

ALSO INCLUDE DETAILS ABOUT THE

INCIDENT THAT ARE NOT PROVIDED

IN THE ANSWER CATEGORIES AND

THAT WILL HELP CLARIFY THE

INCIDENT.

FIELD REPRESENTATIVE -

Check BOUNDING INFORMATION on

the back of the control card.

CHECK BOUNDING INFORMATION

Check Item W (Summary

Report)

Check Item W is designed for you to summarize all of the

pertinent facts surrounding a reported crime incident.

Each summary report should be written so that anyone

reading it can get a clear, well-defined picture of how the

respondent was victimized.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-251

Include in the summary report any details that you feel are

not evident from the answers in the NCVS-2. This is very

important because, before sending a case for processing,

editors often need more specific details than they can get

from other entries on the NCVS-2. When this happens,

they must rely on what is written in your summary report.

As you write your summary report, be careful not to use

misleading words or phrases that may raise more

questions about the incident, instead of clarifying what

really happened.

For example:

When you ask if the offender threatened the respondent

with harm in any way, the respondent answers "No." Also,

the respondent tells you in Item 27 that her husband was

harassing her and using abusive language. However, in

the summary, you use the phrase "verbally threatened her."

Be careful that the words and phrases you use in summary

reports help explain the situation, instead of adding more

confusion to the situation.

Key Points to Cover

Use these key words to jog your memory when writing a

summary report--who, what, where, when, and how.

Who - Using the person's line number (L1, L2, and so

forth) from the household roster, identify all household

members who were involved in the incident, even if the

member was a Type Z noninterview. Also include any

nonhousehold members who were involved in the

incident. In the summary report, identify that they are

nonhousehold members and use specific descriptions, such

as "friend," "neighbor," or "co-worker" to show their

relationship to the respondent. Avoid using pronouns to

describe persons involved in an incident.

Reminder

If other current household members who are at least

12 years old were also victims of a personal crime with

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-252

contact, you need to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each

of these persons who you are able to interview.

What - Explain the type of crime and any pertinent details

related to the crime incident--purse stolen & offender

threatened to stab L1 while she was washing her hands.

Where - Explain where the crime took place--in a

restaurant restroom.

When - Explain when the incident took place–At

8:30 p.m. on December 21.

How - Explain how the crime was executed--offender

yanked purse from L1's shoulder & ran/no injury to

L1/reported to police/property not recovered.

Weapons Used

Item 22 - Did the offender have a weapon such as a gun

or knife, or something to use as a weapon, such as a

bottle or wrench?

Item 23 - What was the weapon? Anything else?

If a respondent tells you in Items 22 and 23 of the NCVS-2

that an offender had a weapon other than any type of gun,

rifle, shotgun, or knife, your summary report needs to

explain if and how this object was used as a weapon.

Since guns, rifles, shotguns, or knives are obviously

weapons, it is not necessary to explain if and how one of

these weapons was used as a weapon in the summary

report.

For example

L1 was arguing with neighbor/neighbor picked up

rock/threw it at L1 & hit L1 in head/L1 treated at hospital

emergency room & got 4 stitches for the cut.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-253

Keep in mind that thrown objects are only considered

weapons if they hit and seriously injure the respondent.

BB guns and tear gas guns are only considered weapons if

they are used as clubs.

The following objects are NEVER considered weapons:

' Animals

' Pellet guns

' Chloroform

' Food

' Mace or pepper spray

' Parts of the body

' Small empty cans

' Tear gas

' Water balloons

Sex-Related Crimes Since sex-related crimes are rare compared to other types

of crimes, include as many details as the respondent is

willing to provide. This is important so

that we can classify any sex-related crimes into the correct

category--rape, attempted rape, sexual assault, or

unwanted sexual contact.

Avoid using phrases like "made sexually explicit

comments," "unwanted sexual contact," or "unwanted

sexual advances." These phrases do not provide us with

enough information to determine what actually happened.

We need to know what was actually said, what parts of the

body were touched, whether or not force was used, and so

forth.

Even though we want all the pertinent facts, do not probe

beyond the structured probes that are provided in Items 27,

28, 29, and 31 of the NCVS-2. For example, here is the

structured probe for Item 27, "Do you mean forced or

coerced sexual intercourse including attempts?".

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-254

Stolen Property

Item 91 - "Did the (property/money) the offender tried to

take belong to you personally, to someone else in the

household, or to both you and other household

members?"

Item 97 - "Did the stolen (property/money) belong to you

personally, to someone else in the household, or to both

you and other household members?"

Items 91 and 97 on the NCVS-2 relate to ownership of

property and/or money that an offender tried to steal or

stole. If property and/or money involved in the incident

belongs to the respondent AND other household members

OR just to other household members, make sure to

specifically identify these persons by their line numbers

(L1, L2, and so forth).

If property and/or money involved in the incident belongs

to nonhousehold members, mention that they are

nonhousehold members, along with a specific description

of their relationship to the respondent such as co-worker,

friend, cousin, and so forth.

Item 104 - "What was the value of the PROPERTY that

was taken? Include recovered property. (Exclude any

stolen cash/checks/credit cards. If jointly owned with a

nonhousehold member(s), include only share owned by

household members.)"

When completing Item 104 on the NCVS-2, please note

If stolen property is jointly owned by one or more

household members together with one or more

nonhousehold members, only include the dollar amount

for the portion that was owned by the household members.

When identifying the value of stolen property that was

owned jointly by a household member and a nonhousehold

member, show a separate dollar amount in your summary

report to differentiate between the share owned by the

household member and the share owned by the

nonhousehold member. Do not use names in your

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-255

summary report; instead, use line numbers for household

members and relationships to the respondent for

nonhousehold members.

Offender is a Police

Officer

Whenever an offender is a police officer, there are specific

facts that we would like to have in your summary report.

Include as many of these facts as you can gather. Be

diplomatic and ask for the following facts in a way that

does not aggravate the respondent:

! Get a complete description of both the officer's and

the victim's actions.

! Find out if the officer used or attempted to use

his/her gun or billy club.

! Determine if the victim signed a complaint and, if so,

include any additional details (for example, victim

was arrested).

! Ascertain whether any property was confiscated by

the police. If so, find out what was done with the

confiscated property--was it returned, kept as

evidence, and so forth.

Commercial

Establishment

If a crime incident occurred at a business or commercial

establishment, include in your summary report as many

facts as possible to provide a complete picture of what

took place. Also, make sure to mention whether the

business is recognizable or unrecognizable.

For example

L2 was shot in arm during clothing store robbery

(recognizable business)/Off. shot L2 with small handgun

as L2 reached under register to set off burglar alarm/L2

treated @ emergency room/Store clothing & displays

damaged/store closed for 2 days/Est. $50k in stolen

money, damages & lost sales to store/Off. arrested.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-256

Although the NCVS is not interested in the theft of

property or cash belonging to a recognizable business, we

do want this information in the summary report when it

helps in describing a situation in which:

! Personal property was also stolen from a household

member.

! A household member received a face-to-face threat

of physical harm, was attacked, or an attempt was

made to attack the household member.

! Someone illegally entered, broke into or attempted to

break into the sample housing unit.

Series Crimes When writing a summary report for series crimes, start by

providing a GENERAL description of the entire series of

incidents. For the last or most recent incident in the

series, provide a DETAILED description of the incident

following the who, what, where, when, and how format.

Verifying Summary

Reports

Once you have completed the summary report, ALWAYS

read it back to the respondent. This gives the respondent a

final opportunity to either change or add any facts that may

provide a clearer picture of the crime incident.

Lengthy Summary

Reports

By the time you get to Check Item W, you should have a

pretty good idea how lengthy your summary report will

need to be to provide all the required facts. If you feel that

it will take too much of the respondent's time to wait while

you write out the summary report, just make sure that you

have all the pertinent facts AND verify these facts with the

respondent. Once you leave the sample household, then

write out your summary report in Check Item W.

If the answer space for Check Item W is not adequate, you

can continue your summary report in the blank space

below the Field Representative instructions for Check

Item W, as well as in the "Notes" space on page 26 of the

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-257

NCVS-2. However, if you continue on page 26, note that

fact in Check Item W.

Saving Time and Space

In an effort to promote uniformity, we are providing a list

of standard abbreviations and symbols that you may use to

help save time and space:

Abbreviations and Symbols

And: &

Apartment: apt.

Approximately: approx.

At: @

Average: avg.

Building: bldg.

Continued: cont.

Department store: dept. store

Forward: fwd.

Government: govt.

Household:

Household respondent: HR

Including/Inclusive:

incl

Line Number: L1, L2, etc.

Manager: mgr.

Merchandise: mdse.

Months of the Year:

Jan. Apr. Jul. Oct.

Feb. May Aug. Nov.

Mar. Jun. Sep. Dec.

Offender: off.

Package(s): pkg.

Received: recd.

Retired: ret.

Revised: rev.

Storage:

stge.

Statement:

stmt.

Television: TV

Wholesale:

whsle.

Yard(s): yd

Separate each main thought or piece of information with a

slash mark "/".

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-258

For example:

L2 was punched in stomach by L3 in movie theater lobby

during argument/usher called police/no weapons & no

arrests/L2 didn't need medical care.

Consistency will help to make your summary report easier

to read and comprehend. When you start using one form

of an abbreviation or a symbol within your summary

report be consistent and continue using the same

abbreviation or symbol throughout the summary report.

Things to Avoid When writing summary reports for crime incidents, avoid

the following bad habits:

' Using very general and vague statements or any

extraneous or unnecessary words or phrases. Write

the facts in short, concise sentences and/or phrases.

' Using the exact wording from the marked answer

category of an NCVS-2 item.

' Using pronouns (she, he, him, her, they, their, and so

forth).

' Using abbreviations that most editors would not

understand.

' Omitting pertinent facts that could help clarify

details of an incident.

' Handwriting that is sloppy and illegible.

Examples of Good

Summary Reports

Here are some examples of good summary reports:

( At 9 p.m. on 10/12, L1's drunken ex-spouse

(nonhousehold member) was arguing & using

abusive language while in L1's home/ex-spouse

refused to leave & threatened to burn down the house

if L1 didn't take him back/police arrested ex-

spouse/no injury to L1/lamp broken valued @ $40.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-259

( In a.m. on 3/24, L1 (school teacher) had $10 stolen

from desk drawer in classroom while eating lunch in

school cafeteria/police not notified/off. never

caught/$10 not returned.

( At 3:30 p.m. on 7/10, L2 (apt. mgr.) was shot in the

arm by angry evicted tenant in L2's office/small hand

gun used/police notified & off. arrested/L2

hospitalized overnight.

( At 2 a.m. on 8/4, off. attempted to break into L1's

home/no one present/security alarm scared off. &

off. ran away/damage to door & lock valued @

$50/police notified/off. not found.

( At 4 p.m. on 2/13, L2's antique shop robbed at

gunpoint by two off./$1,500 taken from shop

taken from customer/no injuries or store

damage/police notified/off. caught & prosecuted.

( At 10:30 p.m. on 5/15, off. threatened to rape L2 at

gunpoint/siren from passing police car scared off./L2

got free & ran to convenience store for help/L2

bruised/police notified/off. never found.

( At 2 p.m. on 12/24, off. forcibly grabbed L2/kissed

L2 against L2's will/ran his hands up & down L2's

buttocks/L2 kneed off. in his groin & got away/no

police report/no injuries to L2.

Examples of Bad

Summary Reports

The following are examples of bad summary reports:

) There was unwanted sexual contact between off. and

L2 with no injuries.

) Sam was threatened by his co-worker in an office

building. There were no injuries.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-260

) Rsp. sd she felt threatened by man who was

following her.

) Jenny was involved in a car jacking/threatened to

shoot/not far from home/police notified.

) Was on way to school/music compact discs

stolen/$75/no police.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 23, Writing Summary

Reports.)

CHECK

ITEM X

Is there an entry for "Number of

persons"? (Refer to 54 on page 7.)

Yes - Be sure you fill or have filled an Incident

Report for each interviewed household

member 12 years of age or over who was

harmed, threatened with harm, or had

something taken from him/her by force or

threat in this incident.

Check Item X (Checking

Entries in Item 54)

Check Item X is used to help ensure that you complete all

required Crime Incident Reports (NVCS-2s) for each

household member at the time of the interview who:

! Is 12 years of age or older

AND

! Was physically harmed, threatened with physical

harm, or robbed by force or threat of harm during the

reported incident.

Before marking Check Item X, refer back to Item 54 on

page 7 to see if you listed any other eligible household

members in this item. Mark the "Yes" box in Check

Item X if you listed a household member in Item 54.

Then, as you conduct that person's NCVS interview,

complete a separate NCVS-2 to report that household

member's victimization.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 3

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-261

If the household member does not mention the incident

during his/her interview, ask probing questions to verify

whether or not the household member was victimized

during the incident reported earlier by another household

member. If you discover that a household member listed

in Item 54 was not actually victimized during the incident,

note this fact in Item 54 and in the summary report (Check

Item W) on the original NCVS-2 completed for the

incident.

If you are unable to conduct an interview for a household

member listed in Item 54, complete an INTER-COMM

(Form 11-36) explaining the situation.

CHECK

ITEM Y

Is this the last Incident Report to be

filled for this screen question?

Yes - Fill Check Item Z

No - Go to next Crime Incident Report

Check Item Y (Last

Incident for Screen

Question)

Check Item Y is used to help you decide whether to:

! Continue with Check Item Z

! Complete the next Crime Incident Report for this

household member.

Before marking Check Item Y, refer back to Check Item G

on the NCVS-1 to see if the household member reported

any other incidents for this screen question. If this

incident qualifies as a series, the number of incidents

should be reduced to "1."

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item Y if only ONE incident

is marked under the "Number of times" in Check Item G

on the NCVS-1 for the household member. After

marking the "Yes" box, continue with Check Item Z.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item Y if you marked TWO

OR MORE incidents under the "Number of times" in

Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for the household member.

Part B, Chapter 3 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

B3-262

After marking the "No" box, complete the next NCVS-2

with the household member. You must complete a

separate NCVS-2 for each time/incident marked for a

screen question in Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for the

household member.

CHECK

ITEM Z

Is this the last Incident Report to be

filled for this respondent?

Yes - FILL NCVS-1, Check Item H

No - Go to next Crime Incident Report

Check Item Z (Last

Incident for Respondent)

Check Item Z is used to help you decide whether to:

! Return to the NCVS-1 and fill Check Item H for the

household member

! Complete another Crime Incident Report for the next

incident marked in Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for

the household member.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item Z if there are no other

incidents marked in Check Item G for the household

member. After marking the "Yes" box, go back to the

NCVS-1 and fill Check Item H for the household member.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item Z if there are more

incidents marked in Check Item G for the household

member. After marking the "No" box, start completing the

next Crime Incident Report for the household member.

Check Item Z is the LAST item on the NCVS-2.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-1

Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

Table of Contents

Topic Page

1 General Instructions 4-2

2 Items 1 Through 10 4-4

Part B, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-2

Topic 1. General Instructions

Noninterview Cases

When you are assigned an NCVS case and cannot get a

completed interview for the household, you will need to

classify the case into one of three noninterview categories.

These categories are identified as Type A, Type B, and

Type C.

A sample address will be classified as a noninterview if:

! The living quarters is occupied but you unable to get

any completed interviews.

! The living quarters is occupied by persons who are

not eligible respondents for the NCVS.

! The living quarters is vacant.

! The living quarters is not eligible for sample because

it is no longer used as a residence, no longer exists, or

does not qualify based on the current listing and

coverage rules.

Each time you classify an assigned NCVS household as a

Type A, B, or C noninterview, you must complete an

NCVS-7, Noninterview Record. The NCVS-7 is designed

to provide details about the case and to explain why it

cannot be interviewed. If you complete an NCVS-7 for a

noninterview household, do NOT complete an NCVS-1,

Basic Screen Questionnaire.

Since the NCVS-7 is a single-page form, make sure to

staple the completed NCVS-7 to the Control Card for the

sample address before mailing the forms back to the

regional office.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, for more information about

noninterviews.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-3

INTER-COMMs

(Form 11-36)

In addition to completing the NCVS-7 for each

noninterview case, you also need to complete an INTER-

COMM (Form 11-36) explaining the situation to your

supervisor. Attach the completed INTER-COMM to the

completed NCVS-7 and return these forms along with the

Control Card for the sample address.

Sample

Control number

No.

PSU Segment CK Serial

Identification Information

Before completing Item 1 on the NCVS-7, transcribe the

case identification information from the household's

Control Card onto the appropriate blocks at the top, left

corner of the Noninterview Record. This information

includes the sample number, control number (PSU,

segment, check digit, and serial number), and household

number.

If the noninterview is for an EXTRA unit discovered during

the current interview period, you need to enter some type of

unit identification in place of the serial number. You could

enter the reference person's name or some type of physical

description of the EXTRA unit.

Part B, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-4

Topic 2. Items 1 Through 10

1. FIELD REPRESENTATIVE IDENTIFICATION

Code Name

Item 1 (Field

Representative

Identification)

Enter your FR code and print your full name in Item 1.

2. LAND USE

(Type A or B only)

Urban 2

Rural

Item 2 (Land Use)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B

noninterview, transcribe the answer from Control Card

Item 9 onto Item 2 on the NCVS-7.

3. FARM SALES

(Type A or B only)

Item blank 1

$1,000 2

Less than

or more $1,000

Item 3 (Farm Sales)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B

noninterview, transcribe the answer from Control Card

Item 10 onto Item 3 on the NCVS-7. Mark Box x "Item

blank" if Control Card Item 10 was left blank.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-5

4. TYPE OF LIVING QUARTERS

(Type A or B only)

Housing Unit

House, apartment, flat

HU in nontransient hotel, motel, etc.

HU permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

HU in rooming house

Mobile home or trailer with no permanent room

added

Mobile home or trailer with one or more

permanent rooms added

HU not specified above - Describe

Other unit

Quarters not HU in rooming or boarding house

Unit not permanent in transient hotel, motel, etc.

Unoccupied site for mobile home, trailer, or tent

Student quarters in college dormitory

OTHER unit not specified above - Describe

Item 4 (Type of Living

Quarters)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B

noninterview, transcribe the information from Control Card

Item 11c or 11d onto Item 4 on the NCVS-7. Make sure to

also transcribe onto Item 4 any descriptions entered on the

Control Card for Box 7 or 12.

5. DATE COMPLETED

!! !! !!!!

Month Day Year

Item 5 (Date Completed)

For each noninterview case (Type A, B, or C), enter in

Item 5 the last date on which you contacted or attempted to

contact someone about the case. Enter the completion date

using 2-digits for the month and day, and 4-digits for the

year (for example, 01/02/2003).

Part B, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-6

6. REASON FOR NONINTERVIEW

TYPE A

No one home - Fill 7

Temporarily absent

Then fill 7

Return date

Refused - Fill 7

Other occupied - Specify

Then fill 7

TYPE B

Vacant - regular

Vacant - storage of HH furniture

Temporarily occupied by persons with

URE

Unfit or to be demolished

Under construction, not ready

Converted to temporary business or

storage

Unoccupied site for mobile home,

trailer, or tent

Permit granted, construction not started

Other - Specify

TYPE C

Unused line of listing sheet

Demolished

House or trailer moved

Outside segment

Converted to permanent business or

storage

Merged

Condemned

Built after April 1, 1980/90

Permit abandoned

Other - Specify

Item 6 (Reason for

Noninterview)

Notice that Item 6 is separated into three sections--Type A

noninterview reasons (Boxes 01-04), Type B noninterview

reasons (Boxes 10-18), and Type C noninterview reasons

(Boxes 20-29). For each NCVS-7 that you complete, you

must mark ONE box under the appropriate noninterview

type in Item 6.

Type A Noninterview

Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type A noninterview,

then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview

from Boxes 01 through 04. Detailed descriptions for each

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-7

of these Type A reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,

Topic 2.

If you mark Box 2 "Temporarily absent," make sure to enter

the date on which the household is expected to return to the

sample address.

If you mark Box 4 "Other occupied," make sure to enter an

accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the sample

address as a Type A noninterview on the "Specify" line

below Box 4. Only mark Box 4 if you are sure that the

reason does not fit into one of the other three Type A

reasons.

Type B Noninterview

Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type B noninterview,

then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview

from Boxes 10 through 18. Detailed descriptions for each

of these Type B reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,

Topic 3.

Only mark Box 18 "Other," when the reason does not fit

any of the other Type B reasons. Also make sure that you

enter an accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the

sample address as a Type B noninterview.

Type C Noninterview

Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type C noninterview,

then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview

from Boxes 20 through 29. Detailed descriptions for each

of these Type C reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,

Topic 4 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 29 "Other," when the reason does not fit

any of the other Type C reasons. Also make sure that you

enter an accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the

sample address as a Type C noninterview.

Part B, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-8

7. RACE

(Type A only) Mark (X) all that apply.

White 2

Black 3

Other

Item 7 (Race) Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 7 for a

Type A noninterview. NEVER mark Item 7 for a

Type B or C noninterview.

When identifying a household's race(s) in Item 7 and the

household was interviewed in a previous enumeration

period, use the household respondent's race(s) marked in

Control Card Item 24. If Control Card Item 24 is blank,

leave Item 7 blank on the NCVS-7.

While you must always try to obtain each household

member’s race(s), you cannot fill race for the NCVS by

observation, probing, or asking a neighbor or any other

nonhousehold members.

Since Control Card Item 24 allows each household member

to report up to four different races for himself/herself, you

are allowed to mark more than one box in Item 7 on the

NCVS-7. Mark Box 3 “Other,” for any races other than

White and Black/African American, such as American

Indian or Alaska Native, Asian, Native Hawaiian or Other

Pacific Islander, and Other (Codes 3 - 6).

8. PUBLIC HOUSING

(Type A only)

Item blank

Yes (public housing)

No (not public housing)

Item 8 (Public Housing) Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 8 for a

Type A noninterview.

When filling Item 8, refer to Control Card Item 8c for the

sample address. Transcribe the answer marked in Item 8c

onto Item 8 on the NCVS-7. If Control Card Item 8c is

blank, mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 4

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-9

9. MANAGER VERIFICATION OF PUBLIC

HOUSING

(Type A only)

Item blank

Able to verify

Public housing

Not public housing

Unable to verify

CATI/telephone

Other - Specify

Item 9 (Manager

Verification of Public

Housing)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 9 for a

Type A noninterview.

When filling Item 9, refer to Control Card Item 8d for the

sample address. Transcribe the answer marked in Control

Card Item 8d onto Item 9 on the NCVS-7. If Control Card

Item 8d is blank, mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

10. AMERICAN INDIAN RESERVATION OR

AMERICAN INDIAN LANDS

(Type A only)

Item blank 1

Yes 2

Item 10 (American Indian

Reservation or American

Indian Lands)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 9 for a

Type A noninterview.

When filling Item 10, refer to Control Card Item 8e for the

sample address. Transcribe the answer marked in Control

Card Item 8e onto Item 10 on the NCVS-7. If Control Card

Item 8e is blank, mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

Part B, Chapter 4 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

B4-10

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-1

Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 General Editing Instructions B5-2

2 Editing the Control Card B5-4

3 Editing the Basic Screen

Questionnaire B5-9

4 Editing the Crime Incident Report B5-12

5 Editing the Noninterview Record B5-13

6 Office Edits and Qualified Edit

Field Representatives B5-15

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-2

Topic 1. General Editing Instructions

What Is Editing?

For the NCVS, editing is the systematic checking of every

item on every form to ensure that all required entries are

made correctly.

Using the Edit Checklist

In addition to the detailed instructions provided in this

chapter, you can refer to the edit checklist on pages 20

through 23 of the Field Representative's Information Card

Booklet (NCVS-554). This checklist provides a quick

reference for editing each NCVS form that you complete

for both interviewed and noninterviewed households.

However, it does not cover instructions for editing listing

sheets. Refer to the Field Representative's Listing and

Coverage Manual (Form 11-8) for instructions on how to

edit listing sheets by segment type (Area, Unit, Permit, and

Group Quarters).

Before Leaving a

Household

Before leaving a household, quickly review all forms

completed for the household to ensure that you did not miss

any questions requiring an answer. This review will allow

you to:

! Ask any questions that may have been overlooked

initially, and

! Get answers for these questions BEFORE ending your

contact with the household.

By reviewing NCVS forms before leaving a household, you

can keep your contacts with a household to a minimum and,

hopefully, avoid any chance of annoying respondents with

callbacks to ask additional questions.

Before Transmitting

Completed Work

Before transmitting completed NCVS work to the office,

edit ALL items carefully and systematically on all listing

sheets, Control Cards, and questionnaires for your

assignment. If you discover any incomplete items during

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-3

this edit, correct these items and, if necessary, contact the

respondent(s) by telephone to obtain the missing

information.

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-4

Topic 2. Editing the Control Card

Overview

The Control Card items that you need to edit will vary

based on whether you:

! Were able to complete an interview for the sample

household or had to classify the household as a

noninterview.

! Were interviewing the household for the first

enumeration period or for subsequent enumeration

periods.

Editing - Interviewed

Households/First

Enumeration Period

As you edit a Control Card for an interviewed household in

the first enumeration period, make sure to check the

following items:

Item 6c For Item 6c, make sure that one of the boxes (Yes or No) is

marked and, if the "No" box is marked, that the household's

mailing address is entered completely and legibly on the

"Specify" lines in Item 6c.

Item 7a When a sample address is in an Area segment and the "Ask

1st mo." box is marked in Item 7a, make sure that one of

the boxes (Before 4-1-90 or After 4-1-90) is marked.

Item 7b When a sample address is in an Area segment and Box 1, 2,

or 3 is marked in Item 7b, make sure that either "Y" or "N"

is circled for the marked box.

Item 8a For Item 8a, make sure that Box 1, 2, or 3 is marked under

the "1st" enumeration period column.

Item 8e For Item 8e, make sure that one of the boxes (Yes or No) is

marked to indicate whether or not the sample address is

located on an American Indian Reservation or on American

Indian Lands.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-5

Items 9 and 10 If Box 2 "Rural" is marked in Item 9, make sure that

Item 10 is answered when the sample address is a housing

unit or a group quarters unit showing a type code of 92-N

or 93-N in Item 6d.

Items 11a Through 11d Make sure that the correct box is marked in Item 11a (Unit

in a GQ or Unit not in a GQ). If you marked Box 1 in

Item 11a, make sure that the correct box is marked in

Item 11d. If you marked Box 2 in Item 11a, make sure that

the correct box is marked in Items 11b and 11c.

Item 12 For Item 12, make sure that the line number is circled to

identify the household respondent for the first enumeration

period.

Item 13c For Item 13c, make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2

"No" is marked to indicate whether or not each person

listed in the household roster (Item 13a) is a household

member at the sample address.

Item 14 For Item 14, make sure that Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is

marked under the "1st" enumeration period column to

indicate whether or not anyone was missed from the

household roster.

Item 18 For Item 18, make sure that the correct 1-digit marital

status code number is entered for each household member

listed in the household roster.

Item 19 For Item 19, make sure that the correct box is marked to

identify each household member's sex (Box 1 "Male" or

Box 2 "Female").

Item 21 For Item 21, make sure that the correct 2-digit educational

attainment code is entered under the "1st" enumeration

period column for each household member who is 12 years

of age or older.

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-6

Item 23 For Item 23, make sure that the correct box (Box 1 "Yes"

or Box 2 "No") is marked to indicate whether or not each

household member is either Spanish, Hispanic or Latino.

Item 24 For Item 24, make sure that the correct 1-digit race codes

are entered to identify each household member's race(s).

Each household member can identify up to four different

races for himself/herself.

Items 26a Through 26f For Item 26a, make sure that the correct box is marked to

indicate whether there is a telephone in the unit. Make sure

that Items 26b through 26f are marked appropriately.

Item 28 For Item 28, make sure that the correct box is marked under

the "1st" enumeration period column to identify the

household's total income for the past 12 months.

Items 30a Through 30e For Items 30a through 30e, make sure that you entered on

the "1st" enumeration period line:

! The month and year of interview (for example,

2/2003),

! The line number for the household respondent, and

! A tally of each visit and/or telephone call to the

household.

Items 32a Through 32e For Items 32a through 32e, make sure that the appropriate

entries are made for each Crime Incident Report completed

for a household member.

Editing - Interviewed

Households/ Second

Through Seventh

Enumeration Periods

Make sure that you have updated the following Control

Card items ONLY during the 3rd, 5th, and 7th

enumeration periods: Items 8a, 21, and 28. Also, make

sure that you have verified Item 8d ONLY during the 5th

enumeration period when Box 3 or 4 is marked in

Item 8d.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-7

Edit the following Control Card items during the 2nd

through 7th enumeration periods:

! Make sure that you verified Item 8b.

! Make sure that the line number for the current

household respondent is circled in Item 12.

! Make sure that you asked Items 14 and 22 and

updated Item 17.

! Make sure that you noted in Item 25a any household

composition changes.

! Make sure that you updated the interview date in

Item 25b.

! Make sure that you updated Item 25c with the "years

lived at address."

! Make sure that you updated the telephone usage

information in Items 26a through 26f.

! Make sure that you filled Items 29a and 29b for any

EXTRA units you may have discovered while

interviewing.

! Make sure that you entered the appropriate

information in Items 30b through 30e and 30g and

30h using the correct enumeration period line.

! Make sure that the appropriate information has been

entered in Items 32a through 32e for each completed

Crime Incident Report.

Editing - Noninterviewed

Households

For each NCVS sample address that you classify as a

noninterview, you must edit the following Control Card

items:

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-8

! Make sure that Items 6a and 6b are filled or a pre-

printed label with this information has been affixed to

the Control Card.

! If required, make sure that you filled Items 7a and

7b(1) - (3).

! For Type A noninterviews - Make sure that you

filled Items 8c, 8d, and 8e.

! Make sure that you filled Item 10, if applicable.

! For Type A and B noninterviews - Make sure that

you filled Item 11 appropriately.

! Make sure that you filled Items 30b, 30d, 30e, 30f,

and 30h, using the correct line for the enumeration

period.

! Make sure that Item 33 is filled, if applicable.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-9

Topic 3. Editing the Basic Screen Questionnaire

Overview

You will complete an NCVS-1, Basic Screen

Questionnaire, for each interviewed household in your

assignment. If a respondent refuses to answer a particular

screen question, enter a note explaining why the question

was refused.

It is your responsibility to edit ALL items on each NCVS-1

and NCVS-1A that you complete for a household. As you

edit an NCVS-1, make sure that all of your entries are

complete, correct, legible, and understandable. Also make

sure that you followed all skip instructions correctly.

Although you must edit all items on the NCVS-1, pay

particular attention to the items covered below.

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control

number (PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number),

and household number accurately and legibly from the

household's Control Card onto the NCVS-1 and any

NCVS-1As that you complete.

Cover Page Items Make sure that you filled Items 1 through 4 and Items 13a

through 16b on the cover page as instructed on the

NCVS-1. Also make sure that you transcribed information

correctly from the household's Control Card onto Items 5

through 12e on the cover page of the NCVS-1.

Item 15c Make sure that the number of crime incidents entered or the

box marked in Item 15c on the NCVS-1 agree with the

number of incident reports completed, excluding any out-

of-scope incidents.

Items 16a and 16b Make sure that any changes in household composition for

the current enumeration period are identified BOTH in

Items 16a and 16b on the NCVS-1 and in Control Card

Item 25a.

Items 17 Through 28 Make sure that Items 17 through 28 are completed for

each household member who is 12 years of age or older.

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-10

These items appear on page 2 for the household respondent

and on pages 12, 18, and 24 for the remaining household

members who are eligible for interview. For larger

households, make sure that you completed these items on

each NCVS-1A that you filled out. As you check Item 19,

make sure that you entered the correct line number for the

household member.

Items 36 Through 46 for

the Household Respondent

Make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is marked

for the household respondent:

! In Part (b) of Items 36 through 43,

! In Check Item B for Item 44 and Check Item C for

Item 45, and

! In Check Item F1 for Item 46.

For each "Yes" answer marked in the screen items

mentioned above, also make sure that the correct number is

entered on the "Number of times" line:

! In Part (c) of Items 36 through 43,

! In Part (b) for Items 44 and 45, and

! In Part (f) for Item 46.

Items 46a Through 46k These items cover the household respondent's vandalism

and hate crime screen questions. As you edit these items,

make sure that the following items are filled correctly when

Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 46a:

! Items 46b through 46e (vandalism screen questions)

and

! Items 46g through 46k (hate crime screen

questions).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-11

Items 36 Through 45 for

Individual Respondents

Make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is marked

for each individual respondent:

! In Part (b) of Items 36 through 43, and

! In Check Item B for Item 44 and Check Item C for

Item 45.

For each "Yes" answer marked in the screen items

mentioned above, also make sure that the correct number is

entered on the "Number of times" line:

! In Part (c) of Items 36 through 43, and

! In Part (b) for Items 44 and 45.

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-12

Topic 4. Editing the Crime Incident Report

Overview

You will complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, for each incident or series of incidents reported by

an eligible household member. It is your responsibility to

edit ALL items on every NCVS-2 that you complete for a

household.

As you edit an NCVS-2, make sure that all of your entries

are complete, correct, legible, and understandable. Also

make sure that you followed all skip instructions correctly.

Although you must edit all items on the NCVS-2, pay

particular attention to the items covered below.

Each Incident Has a

Completed NCVS-2

Make sure that each separate incident or series of incidents

reported by eligible household members has a completed

NCVS-2 documenting the crime incident.

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control

number (PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number),

and household number accurately and legibly from the

household's Control Card onto the top of the cover page for

every completed NCVS-2.

Items 1a Through 1c

Make sure that for each completed NCVS-2 you:

! Entered in Item 1a the correct line number (for

example, 01, 02, and so forth) for the household

member who reported the incident.

! Entered in Item 1b the screen question item number

(for example, 36, 37, and so forth) at which the

household member reported the incident.

! Entered in Item 1c the correct incident number (for

example, 01, 02, and so forth) to uniquely identify the

incident for the screen question entered in Item 1b.

Transcription of Incident

Descriptions

Make sure that you have transcribed a description of each

incident onto Control Card. Items 32a through 32e.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-13

Topic 5. Editing the Noninterview Record

Overview

You will complete a separate NCVS-7, Noninterview

Record, for each case that you classify as a Type A, B, or C

noninterview. It is your responsibility to edit ALL items on

each NCVS-7 that you complete for your assignment.

As you edit an NCVS-7, make sure that all of your entries

are complete, correct, legible, and understandable. Also

make sure that you followed correctly the Field

Representative instructions at the top of the NCVS-7 and

the skip instructions in Item 6. Although you must edit all

items on the NCVS-7, pay particular attention to the items

covered below.

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control

number (PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number),

and household number accurately and legibly from the

household's Control Card onto the top of the NCVS-7.

Items 1, 5, and 6

Items 1, 5, and 6 must be completed every time you

complete an NCVS-7. Make sure that you entered:

! Your Field Representative Code and your full name in

Item 1.

! The date that you completed the NCVS-7 in Item 5

(for example, 03/10/2003).

! An (X) in the correct box in Item 6 to identify the

noninterview reason by noninterview type (Type A, B,

or C). Also, if you marked Box 2, 4, 18, or 29, make

sure that you entered the "Expected return date" for

Box 2, the "Other" Type A reason for Box 4, the

"Other" Type B reason for Box 18, and the "Other"

Type C reason for Box 29.

Items 2, 3, and 4

If you completed an NCVS-7 for a Type A or B

noninterview, make sure that you transcribed the correct

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-14

information from the household's Control Card onto

Items 2, 3, and 4 on the NCVS-7.

Items 7 Through 10

If you completed an NCVS-7 for a Type A noninterview,

make sure that you transcribed the correct information from

the household's Control Card onto Items 7 through 10 on

the NCVS-7. If Control Card Item 24 (Race) is blank, it is

acceptable for Item 7 (Race) to be left blank on the

NCVS-7. Also make sure that you do NOT complete

Items 7 through 10 for a Type B or C noninterview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part B, Chapter 5

Editing Procedures

B5-15

Topic 6. Office Edits and Qualified Edit Field Representatives

Office Edit

After your regional office receives your completed NCVS

work each month, they perform their own edit of all

completed forms. Each month, prior to your next monthly

assignment, you will receive an Edit Evaluation Sheet

providing you with feedback on how well you did and

documenting any errors found during the office edit.

It is your responsibility to review each Edit Evaluation

Sheet so you can learn from your mistakes and try to avoid

making the same mistakes in future assignments.

Qualified Edit Field

Representatives

Field Representatives who regularly send in questionnaires

that can be sent for processing with a minimal office edit

are designated as "Qualified Edit" or "QE Field

Representatives."

In order for you to be a "QE Field Representative," you

must have:

! Satisfactorily completed the initial training program.

! Worked on the NCVS for at least three months.

! Achieved an accuracy rate in any one month that

meets the standard specified by your regional office.

If you are able to achieve and maintain a QE rating, it will

play an important role in your overall performance rating.

Edit for QE Field

Representatives

Once you have attained QE status, your regional office

performs a complete edit of the Control Cards for your

assignment, but only performs an abbreviated edit of your

completed questionnaires before sending them to the

National Processing Center (NPC) in Jeffersonville,

Indiana. Once every six months, the regional office will

select a monthly assignment and perform a complete edit

on all of your completed forms. This procedure is intended

to ensure that you maintain high quality in your work.

Part B, Chapter 5 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Editing Procedures

B5-16

Retaining QE Status For you to maintain your QE status, you must consistently

send in completed work with an accuracy rate above a level

specified by your regional office. You can lose your QE

status if your accuracy rate drops below this predetermined

level. Once you lose your QE status, your work will be

edited completely until you can requalify as a QE Field

Representative.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-1

Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Overview of Chapter 1 C1-2

2 Reference Period C1-3

3 Household Membership C1-8

4 Reference Person C1-15

5 Household and Individual Respondents C1-20

6 Proxy Interview C1-26

7 Bounding Interviews C1-34

8 Out-of-Scope Incident C1-37

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-2

Topic 1. Overview of Chapter 1

The primary purpose of the National Crime Victimization Survey (NCVS) is to

obtain, from respondents who are 12 years of age and older, an accurate and up-

to-date measure of the amount and kinds of crime committed during a specific

6-month reference period. When you are assigned an NCVS case for the first

interview, you are given a sample address to visit and interview, but you are not

provided with any names.

It is your responsibility to identify:

! The household members who usually reside at the sample address

(household membership);

! The relationship of each household member to a reference person;

! A household respondent who will provide specific information about the

household; and

! All household members who are eligible as individual respondents for an

NCVS interview.

Each eligible respondent is expected to respond for himself/herself. However,

under specific circumstances, another household member can respond for an

eligible respondent and give a proxy interview.

To avoid duplicating identical incidents, you go through a process called

bounding interviews to ensure that duplicate incidents are not processed.

When a reported incident falls outside of the NCVS survey limits, you delete the

incident because it is considered an out-of-scope incident.

Chapter 1 defines all of these highlighted concepts in more detail.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-3

Topic 2. Reference Period

Definition

A reference period is a time interval for which we want to

collect information from a respondent. The reference period

for the NCVS covers the 6 months prior to the interview

date. When conducting interviews, we are only interested in

crime incidents that occurred during a household member's

specific 6-month reference period.

The type of reference period that we use for the NCVS is

often referred to as a floating reference period or period-to-

period recounting. By using this type of a reference period,

we can compile a continuous record of a household's

experiences throughout the entire 3 1/2 years that the

household is in the NCVS sample.

Using Your Information

Card Booklet, NCVS-554

Your NCVS Field Representative's Information Card

Booklet, NCVS-554, provides a checklist on page 10 for

determining reference periods for interviewing and examples

of reference periods on page 11. Two-year calendars are

also shown on pages 12 and 13 to:

• Help the respondent remember the reference period for

the current interview

AND

• Enable the respondent to determine the exact month that

an incident occurred.

First Enumeration Period

Interviews

For the first enumeration period, each household member's

reference period starts on the first day of the month

6 months prior to the interview month and ends on the day

prior to the interview date.

Example for a household respondent

If a household respondent's first enumeration period

interview is conducted on May 2, 2003, then the

current reference period for the household respondent

would be November 1, 2002 to May 1, 2003.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-4

Example for an individual respondent:

If the remaining household members were interviewed

for the first enumeration period on May 3, 2003, then

the current reference period for each of these

household members would be November 1, 2002 to

May 2, 2003.

For a first enumeration period household, all household

members have the same start date, but each household

member's end date may vary based on the member's current

interview date.

Second Through Seventh

Enumeration Period

Interviews

After the first enumeration period, reference periods for all

remaining enumeration periods start on the date of the

household member's last interview and end on the day prior

to the household member's current interview date. Unlike

the first enumeration period, each household member could

have a different reference period start date for the second

through seventh enumeration period based on the member's

last interview date.

For the second through seventh enumeration periods, you

would normally use the date entered in Control Card

Item 25b as the household member's start date for the

reference period. However, if the following exceptions exist

for a household member, do NOT use the date in Control

Card Item 25b as the reference period start date:

! When no date is entered in Control Card Item 25b

(person was a noninterview last enumeration period):

The start date for the reference period would be the

first day of the month 6 months prior to the current

interview month.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-5

Example:

John Smith refused to be interviewed during the

previous enumeration period. It is now June 2,

2003, and John agrees to be interviewed this

enumeration period. John's reference period for the

current interview date starts on December 1, 2002,

and ends on June 1, 2003.

! When the date entered in Item 25b is more than

6 months prior to the interview date:

The start date for the reference period would be the

first day of the month 6 months prior to the current

interview month.

Example #1:

John Smith was a Type Z noninterview during the

previous enumeration period and you did not erase

the last interview date entered in Control Card

Item 25b. Whenever an eligible respondent is a

Type Z noninterview, Control Card Item 25b must

be left blank for that enumeration period.

Example #2:

After interviewing Denise Smith for the second

enumeration period, you forget to change the

interview date in Control Card Item 25b. When

you are ready to interview her for the third

enumeration period, the interview date in Control

Card Item 25b is more than 6 months prior to the

current interview date.

! The household respondent is a different person

than the last household respondent:

When the current household respondent was not the

household respondent for the previous enumeration

period, use the date entered in Control Card Item 25b

for the previous household respondent as the reference

period start date for the new household respondent.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-6

Example:

John Smith was the household respondent during

the previous enumeration period and his interview

date was June 2, 2003. For the current interview

date, December 1, 2003, you discover that John has

passed away. His wife, Denise Smith, now becomes

the new household respondent. Her reference period

for the current interview starts on June 2, 2003 and

ends on November 30, 2003.

! You cannot determine which household member

was the last household respondent:

The reference period start date for the current

household respondent would be the first day of the

month 6 months prior to the current interview month.

Example:

You are ready to interview the Hooper household

for the second enumeration period on July 3, 2003.

When you check Control Card Item 30c, you notice

that the previous FR neglected to enter the

household respondent's line number for the first

enumeration period. Once you select a household

respondent for the current interview, that person's

reference date starts on January 1, 2003 and ends on

July 2, 2003.

Incidents Outside of the

Reference Period

While interviewing, it is important to keep reminding the

respondent of the start and end dates for his/her reference

period. If a respondent seems to have difficulty keeping

track of the reference period dates, try adding the actual

dates after reading "in the last 6 months." This will help the

respondent to focus on the correct time frame for his/her

interview.

Remember to only complete an incident report (NCVS-2)

for incidents that happened during the reference period for

the respondent's current interview. If at any point during an

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-7

interview, you discover that the incident is outside of the

respondent's reference period, discontinue taking

information for the incident and follow the proper

procedures for making the incident "out-of-scope." (See

Topic 8 of this chapter for out-of-scope incidents.)

Also, if a respondent reports an incident that took place on

the same day that you are interviewing him/her, do not

complete an NCVS-2 for the incident until the household's

next enumeration period. If this happens, make a note on

the Control Card as a reminder to complete an NCVS-2 for

the incident during the next enumeration period.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-8

Topic 3. Household Membership

Definition

For a person to be considered a sample household member,

he/she must be:

! Using the sample address as his/her usual place of

residence at the time of the current interview, even if

he/she is temporarily absent at the time of interview,

! Staying temporarily at the sample address at the time

of the current interview AND not have a usual place

of residence elsewhere. This category could include

recent immigrants, persons trying to find permanent

living quarters, and persons who have no other home

of their own. This category could also include entire

households with no usual place of residence elsewhere,

because they are renting or lending their usual living

quarters to others and have no other home of their

own.

Non-family persons can also be considered household

members if the sample address is their usual place of

residence. These non-family household members could be

lodgers, servants, farmhands, or other employees, as long as

they:

! Live at the sample address

AND

! Claim the sample address as their usual place of

residence.

Household membership is not limited to sample housing

units and can also include residents of non-institutional

group quarters selected for the NCVS sample, such as

college dormitories, homes for unwed mothers, dormitories

for student nurses and doctors, and so forth.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-9

Summary Table for

Determining Household

Membership

Page 4 of your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554,

provides a summary table for your use in determining

whether or not a person should be considered a household

member at a sample address.

Determining Usual Place of

Residence

A person's usual place of residence is a specific living

quarters, either a housing unit or a non-institutional group

quarters unit, where he/she lives and sleeps the greater part

of the time and is free to return to at any time. Do not

consider a mailing address as a usual place of residence if

the mailing address does not identify a living quarters.

Also, do not consider a person's living quarters as his/her

usual place of residence when the person:

! Is not residing at the living quarters AND is renting or

lending the living quarters to someone else who is

residing there in his/her absence,

! Is not residing at the living quarters AND the vacant

living quarters is offered for sale or rent.

Families With Two or

More Homes

If a household owns more than one housing unit and spends

time in both homes, only ONE of the housing units can be

considered their usual place of residence. Consider the

home where they spend the greater part of the calendar year

as their usual place of residence.

Here are some examples for handling this type of situation:

The Stapleton family owns two housing units--one in the

suburbs of Detroit and the other one is a cabin in a mountain

resort area. They spend about 11 months of the year in their

suburban Detroit home. Also, the Stapletons don't rent out

either home in their absence.

• If the Stapleton's were residing at their suburban

Detroit home when you attempt to interview at that

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-10

residence, you would interview all eligible household

members. Since this is the Stapleton's usual place of

residence, all family member's who are 12 years of age

and older are considered eligible household members

at the suburban Detroit address.

• When you attempt to interview at the cabin address,

you discover that the Stapleton's are residing at the

cabin. In this situation, you would classify the case as

a Type B Noninterview, "Temporarily Occupied by

Persons With a URE" (usual residence elsewhere).

Since the cabin is not their usual place of residence,

you would not interview them as household members

at the cabin address. This fact should become evident

when you ask Control Card Item 13c.

• If the Stapleton's were residing at their suburban

Detroit home when you attempt to interview at

the cabin address, you would classify the case as a

Type B Noninterview, "Vacant-Regular."

• If you attempt to interview at the suburban Detroit

address and find that the Stapleton's will be away from

that address until after the interview period ends, you

would classify the case as a Type A Noninterview,

"Temporarily Absent."

(See Part A, Chapter 6, for more details about NCVS

noninterviews.)

Foster Children Always consider foster children in a sample household at the

time of your interview as household members, regardless of

how long they are expected to stay with the family.

Crew Member on a

Sailing Vessel

Never consider a sailing vessel to be a usual place of

residence for its crew members. This is true even

when a crew member is on the sailing vessel at the time of

your interview AND is on the vessel for long periods of

time.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-11

Household Members Who

Are Temporarily Absent

Listed below are circumstances in which persons claiming

the sample address as their usual place of residence are

considered to be household members, even though they are

temporarily absent from the address at the time of interview:

! Business travelers,

! Crew members on sailing vessels,

! Railroad personnel,

! Long haul truck drivers,

! Bus drivers, and

! Persons who are away visiting relatives or friends, on

vacation, or temporarily in general (noninstitutional)

hospitals.

Foreign Citizens

Temporarily Staying in

the United States

Only consider citizens of foreign countries as household

members at a sample address when:

! They are temporarily living (not visiting or traveling)

in the United States,

! The sample address is not an Embassy, Consulate,

Chancellery, or any other type of office for a foreign

country, AND

! The sample address is their usual place of residence

while residing in the United States.

Members of the Armed

Forces

Men and women who are Armed Forces members can be

considered household members at a sample housing unit if:

! They usually sleep at the sample housing unit and

! They are stationed in the same locality as the sample

housing unit.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-12

Do not consider Armed Forces members as household

members at a sample housing unit if:

" They are stationed in a different locality than the

sample housing unit and

" They are only staying at the sample housing unit while

on leave to visit family or friends.

Students When you interview at a sample housing unit and discover

that a student is residing away from the family residence

while attending school (boarding, college, trade, or

commercial school in the United States or overseas), do not

consider the student as a household member at the family

residence. While attending school, the student is considered

a household member at his/her school residence, and would

be interviewed at that residence if it fell into the NCVS

sample.

However, students are considered household members at

their family residence when they are:

! Living at the family residence while attending school,

! Living at the family residence at the time of interview

because they are on a short holiday or home on

summer vacation, and

! Claiming the family residence as their usual place of

residence.

Student Nurses At the time of interview, consider a student nurse's usual

place of residence to be the hospital, nurse's home, or other

place where he/she is residing while receiving nurse's

training.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-13

Example:

Before entering nursing school, Jim lived with his

parents at 505 Barts Drive, Cleveland, OH. Jim now

lives at 7001 Central Avenue, Columbus, OH, while

attending nursing school.

If you are interviewing at the 505 Barts Drive address

and discover that Jim is currently living at the 7001

Central Avenue address while attending nursing

school, do not consider Jim a household member at

the 505 Barts Drive address for this interview. While

attending nurse's training, Jim's usual place of

residence is the 7001 Central Avenue address.

Persons Working

Overseas

Do not consider as household members persons who are

absent from the sample address at the time of your interview

because they are working and residing overseas for more

than 6 months out of the year.

Persons With Concurrent

Residences

You may find that some persons reside part of the week at

one address and the rest of the week at another address. In

this situation, count the person as a household member at the

address where he/she resides the greater part of the week. If

the person spends an equal amount of the week at each

address, consider the person as a household member at the

address where he/she is residing at the time of the interview.

Persons in Vacation

Homes, Tourist Cabins,

and Trailers

If persons are residing in vacation homes, tourist cabins, and

trailers and do not have any other usual place of residence at

the time of interview, consider these persons as household

members where they are residing at the time of the

interview. However, if these persons do have a usual

residence elsewhere, do not consider them as household

members at a vacation home, tourist cabin, or trailer.

Inmates and Patients in

Institutional Group

Quarters

Inmates and patients in institutional group quarters are not

considered household members at the sample address while

they are residing in the institutional group quarters. These

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-14

inmates and patients could reside in the following types of

institutional group quarters:

! Correctional Institutions

! Nursing, Convalescent, and Rest Homes

! Hospitals

! Institutions for the Disabled

! Institutions for the Mentally Ill/Retarded

! Juvenile Institutions

Remember that persons in institutional group quarters are

not free to come and go without permission. Also, persons

residing in institutional group quarters are not eligible for

NCVS interviewing, even if the group quarters fell into the

NCVS sample.

(See the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field

Representatives, Form 11-8, for more details about group

quarters.)

When You Are Still Unsure

About Household

Membership

If you have read all the household membership procedures

and still are unsure whether or not to include someone as a

household member, it is better to:

! Include the person,

! Explain the situation in the "Notes" space on the

Control Card, and

! Explain the situation in an INTER-COMM.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-15

Topic 4. Reference Person

Definition

For each NCVS sample address assigned to you for

interview, you must identify one household member as the

household's reference person. We want the household's

reference person to be a responsible adult household

member who is not likely to permanently leave the

household.

To meet this goal, the reference person must:

! Qualify as a household member at the sample address,

! Be one of the owners or renters of the sample housing

unit, and

! Be at least 18 years of age (in most cases).

(Also see "When Can a Reference Person Be Under

18 Years of Age?" on page C1-16.)

Since one of the owners or renters of the sample housing

unit is normally the most responsible and knowledgeable

household member, we prefer the reference person to also be

the household respondent. However, a household

respondent does not have to be one of the household

members who owns or rents the sample housing unit.

(See Topic 5 of this chapter for more details about

household respondents.)

Special Situations

When identifying a reference person for a sample household,

you could encounter one of the following situations:

Housing Unit Rented

Without Cash Payment

If a sample housing unit is occupied without payment of

cash rent, then any household member who is at least

18 years of age can qualify as the reference person. (Also

see "When Can a Reference Person Be Under 18 Years of

Age?" on page C1-16.)

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-16

Housing Unit Jointly

Owned or Rented

If a sample housing unit is jointly owned or rented, then

designate the first owner/renter who is a household member

and is at least 18 years of age as the reference person. (Also

see "When Can a Reference Person Be Under 18 Years of

Age?" below.)

When Can a Reference

Person Be Under

18 Years of Age?

There are two situations when a reference person can be a

household member who is under 18 years of age. These

situations include:

# Sample households in which ALL household members

are 17 years of age. The reference person should be

one of the 17-year-old household members who owns

or rents the sample housing unit.

# Sample households in which the owners/renters are

married and one or both of them are 17 years of age.

The reference person can be either person.

NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL

household members are under 17 years of age,

contact your supervisor who will discuss this

situation with Headquarters staff and then let you

know how to handle the case.

Identifying the Reference

Person on the Control Card,

NCVS-500

The following Control Card items will help you confirm that

the reference person meets our requirements:

Item 13a One of the persons who owns or rents the

housing unit should be listed on line number 1.

Item 13b The household member should be identified as

the reference person, along with relationship

code 11.

Item 13c Box (1), Yes, should be marked to indicate that

the person is a usual resident and household

member at the sample unit.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-17

Item 17 The household member should be at least

18 years of age.

Control Card Item 13a

(Household Roster)

Control Card Item 13a is used to compile the household

roster for the sample address. Since you will ask the

respondent to start with the name of the person or one of the

persons who either owns or rents the home, the first person

that you list in Item 13a will normally be the reference

person.

Control Card Item 13b

(Relationship to

Reference Person)

Once you have listed all persons on the household roster

who usually live at the address, including those persons who

are temporarily absent, then you need to identify in Item 13b

which person is the reference person. In most cases, the

reference person will be the name entered on line number (1)

of the household roster. Enter "Ref. person" and code "11"

in Item 13b to identify the household's reference person.

Using the descriptions and 2-digit codes listed in the upper

right corner of the Control Card, identify in Item 13b the

relationship of all remaining persons on the household roster

to the reference person.

Control Card Item 13c

(Household Member)

In Item 13c, you will determine whether or not each person

listed in the household roster, including the reference

person, is a household member. In general terms, if the

person usually lives at the sample address, then he/she is

considered a household member.

Control Card Item 17

(Age Last Birthday)

After verifying the household roster in Item 14 and checking

for EXTRA housing units in Item 15, you will enter each

household member's date of birth in item 16 and the

member's current age in Item 17.

Changing the Reference

Person

You may encounter situations where you will need to

identify from the household roster a different person as the

reference person. This could happen when the reference

person from the previous enumeration period is no longer a

household member because he/she:

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-18

! Has died

! Has moved out of the sample address permanently.

If the reference person (or any other person listed on the

household roster) has died since the last enumeration period,

draw a wavy line through the deceased person's entire line

(Control Card Items 12 through 24).

If the reference person (or any other person listed on the

household roster) has left the household permanently, draw

a diagonal line through the person's line number in Control

Card Item 12. Do not draw a wavy line through Items 12

through 24 in the event that the person should return to the

sample address before it falls out of sample.

Also use Control Card Item 25a to indicate the reason for the

change and the date the change is discovered. Two-digit

codes are assigned to each reason and these codes and

reasons are shown in the upper right corner of the Control

Card.

To determine who the new reference person will be, ask the

respondent to give you the name of the person or one of the

persons who either owns or rents the home. In Item 13b,

line through any inaccurate relationship descriptions and

codes and enter the correct description and code for the new

reference person and for each remaining person to show

his/her relationship to the "new" reference person.

URE Households in High

Mobility Areas

Some areas, such as resort or vacation areas, are usually

occupied by entire households with a usual residence

elsewhere (URE). To save time in these high mobility areas,

do not prepare a new Control Card when one URE

household replaces another URE household. Report the new

occupants on the original Control Card as follows:

! Item 3 - Do not change the household number.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-19

! Item 13 - Line through the entries in Items 13a, 13b,

and 13c for each person listed from the previous URE

household. Using the next available line, enter the

reference person's name in Item 13a for the new URE

household, enter "Ref. person" and code "11" in

Item 13b, and mark "No" in Item 13c.

! Item 25a - For each person deleted from the previous

URE household, enter code "25" and the date that you

discovered this change. On the line where you entered

the reference person's name for the new URE

household, enter code "15," the number of persons in

the new URE household, and the date that you

discovered the new URE household.

Type A Noninterviews

Item 7 on the Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, requires you

to mark the household's race whenever you classify a sample

address as a Type A Noninterview. If the sample household

was interviewed in a previous enumeration period, see what

race(s) were marked for the reference person in Control

Card Item 24. Mark Item 7 on the Noninterview Record

based on the race(s) marked in Control Card Item 24 for the

reference person. If Control Card Item 24 is blank, leave

Item 7 blank on the Noninterview Record.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-20

Topic 5. Household and Individual Respondents

Definition A household respondent is the household member that you

select to be the first household member interviewed. The

household respondent must be able to provide information

for all persons in the sample household, as well as for

herself/himself. For example, the household respondent

must be able to:

! Complete and/or update information on the

household's Control Card, NCVS-500.

! Complete the household respondent's section of the

Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, on pages 2

through 10.

! Complete Crime Incident Reports, NCVS-2s, for all

incidents reported by herself/himself.

An individual respondent is any household member who is

at least 12 years of age and is not selected as the household

respondent. In most cases, you will interview each

individual respondent by self-response. On the NCVS-1,

complete Items 17 through Check Item G for each individual

respondent. If an individual respondent reports a crime

incident, then you will complete an NCVS-2 with the

individual respondent for each crime incident reported.

Who Qualifies To Be a

Household Respondent

In most cases, the household respondent must be:

! A household member,

! At least 18 years of age, and

! Knowledgeable enough about the household to provide

the necessary information for the Control Card

(NCVS-500), the Basic Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1), and, if necessary, Crime Incident Reports

(NCVS-2s) for each incident reported by the household

respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-21

Normally, the best candidate for the household respondent is

the reference person or another household member who

owns or rents the housing unit. However, unlike the

requirements for a reference person, the household

respondent does not have to be one of the owners or renters

of the housing unit.

(See Topic 4 of this chapter for information about

reference persons.)

For a second through seventh enumeration period interview,

try to select as the household respondent the same household

member who was the household respondent for the previous

enumeration period. If this is not possible, then make sure

that the household member you select meets the

requirements for a household respondent.

Exceptions to the Rule

Is it acceptable for a household respondent to be under

18 years of age ?

If the reference person and/or the spouse of the reference

person is 17 years of age, either the reference person or the

spouse of the reference person can be the household

respondent. For example, a sample household is comprised

of a married couple ages 28 and 17. Because they are

married, either person qualifies as a household respondent,

even though one person is 17 years old.

If ALL household members are 17 years of age, select the

household member who appears to know the most about the

sample household. For example, three 17-year-old friends

rent an apartment together while attending college. Try to

select the household member who is most likely to provide

accurate information about household matters.

If you discover a household comprised of at least one

17 year old and the remaining persons are all under 17 years

of age, select the 17-year-old household member as the

household respondent.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-22

NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL

household members are under 17 years of age,

contact your supervisor who will discuss this

situation with Headquarters staff and then let you

know how to handle the case.

However, if the household consists of two or more

unmarried individuals AND at least one of the individuals is

18 years of age or older, then the household respondent must

be one of the members who is at least 18 years of age. For

example, Joe, Terry, and Frank are good friends and rent a

house together. Joe is 17 years old, Terry is 19 years old,

and Frank is 20 years old. In this example, Terry and Frank

are eligible to be the household respondent, but Joe is not

eligible because of his age.

When can a household respondent be a nonhousehold

member?

A nonhousehold member can be a household respondent

only when all of the following conditions exist:

! If all eligible household members are physically and/or

mentally unable to be interviewed,

! All eligible household members have been under the

care of the nonhousehold member for the entire

reference period,

AND

! None of the eligible household members were able to

leave the sample address during the entire reference

period unless they were accompanied by the

nonhousehold member caretaker.

If any of the eligible household members are capable of

being interviewed, select a household member as the

household respondent, NOT the nonhousehold member.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-23

Questions Asked Only of the

Household Respondent

Any information that needs to be added and/or updated on

the Control Card (NCVS-500) is asked ONLY of the

household respondent during each enumeration period.

The following items on the Basic Screen Questionnaire

(NCVS-1) are asked ONLY of the household respondent:

! Items 34 and 35 - Item 34 determines whether any

household member operates a business from the

sample address. If a "Yes" answer is received in

Item 34, then Item 35 indicates whether the business is

"recognizable" or "unrecognizable."

(See Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more

information about recognizable and

unrecognizable businesses operated from the sample

address.)

! Item 37 - This item determines whether the sample

household has experienced any incidents during the

reference period involving break ins or attempted

break ins and illegal entries or attempted illegal

entries. If a "Yes" answer is received, you will ask for

a brief description of the incident and enter the number

of times that the incident occurred.

! Items 38 and 39 - Item 38 determines how many

motor vehicles are owned by current household

members. If at least one vehicle is mentioned or the

respondent refuses to answer the question in Item 38,

then Item 39 is asked to determine whether any

incidents occurred during the reference period that

involved any motor vehicles owned by the household

members. If a "Yes" answer is received, you will ask

for a brief description of the incident and enter the

number of times that the incident occurred.

! Item 46 - This item determines if any acts of

vandalism were committed against the household

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-24

during the reference period. If a "Yes" answer is

given, you will ask about the kind of property

damaged, the kind of damage, and the cost, if any, to

repair the damage. You will also ask if the household

respondent was attacked or threatened or if the

offender(s) stole or attempted to steal something from

any household member during the act(s) of vandalism.

You will also determine whether any acts of vandalism

were motivated by prejudice or bigotry towards

members of specific groups.

Changing Household

Respondents During an

Interview

There may be instances when you need to change household

respondents after starting an interview.

This could happen if:

" You call the household respondent back to complete

an interview and discover that the person you selected

as the household respondent is no longer considered a

household member.

" You discover that the person you selected as the

household respondent is unable to answer many of the

questions about the household.

Under these circumstances, you must stop interviewing the

current household respondent and find a current household

member who is knowledgeable about the household. Once

you have selected a new household respondent, start the

household respondent's interview from the beginning.

Identifying the Household

Respondent on NCVS Forms

As you conduct the NCVS interview, record your selection

for the household respondent on the following NCVS forms:

! Circle the line number of the household respondent in

Control Card Item 12 (NCVS-500). If you need to

change the household respondent after the first

enumeration period, make sure to erase the circle for

the last household respondent when you circle the line

number for the current household respondent.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-25

! Enter the household respondent's line number in--

! Item 30c on the reverse side of the Control

Card.

! Item 4 on the cover page of the Basic Screen

Questionnaire (NCVS-1).

! Item 19 on page 2 of the NCVS-1.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-26

Topic 6. Proxy Interview

Definition A proxy interview is one in which someone other than the

intended household member answers the interview questions

for the eligible household member. The person who is

authorized to answer for the intended household member is

referred to as the proxy respondent. The intended

household member who is unable to answer the interview

for himself/herself is referred to as the proxy household

member.

Since a proxy respondent is more likely to omit an incident

or leave out some of the details about a reported incident, we

discourage proxy interviews except as a last resort.

Acceptable Reasons for a

Proxy Interview

Only THREE conditions allow you to take a proxy interview

for a household member. These conditions are:

! A parent does not allow you to speak to his/her 12- or

13-year-old child to conduct the interview. In this

situation, any household member who is at least

18 years of age can be the proxy respondent for the

child. However, one of the child's parents would be

the best proxy respondent.

! An eligible household member is temporarily absent

during the entire interview period. Before accepting a

proxy interview for this situation, make sure that the

absent person still qualifies as a household member. If

the absent person is still a household member, then you

can accept a proxy interview from an eligible

household member.

(See "Who Qualifies as a Proxy Respondent?" later

in this topic. Also see Topic 3 of this chapter for

more information about household membership.)

! An eligible household member is physically or

mentally incapacitated continuously throughout the

ENTIRE interview period, due to health or mental

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-27

illness problems. For example, a household may have

a family member who is too hard of hearing to

complete a telephone interview for himself/herself or a

household may have a family member with

Alzheimer's disease who cannot respond for

herself/himself.

The following problems do not constitute being

physically or mentally incapacitated and cannot be

accepted as reasons for taking a proxy interview: Old

age (by itself), colds or flu, drunkenness, under the

influence of drugs, or any problems that might be

aggravated because a respondent feels that some

NCVS questions are upsetting (such as the NCVS

questions related to rape and sexual assault).

Proxy Interviews for

Household Respondents

There is only one acceptable reason for taking a proxy

interview for a household respondent. This can happen

when a nonhousehold member is a proxy respondent for an

entire household. This should happen only occasionally,

but, when it does, the nonhousehold member must be the

proxy respondent and caretaker for the household

respondent AND all other household members who are

eligible for the NCVS interview.

If at least one eligible household member is capable of being

interviewed by self-response, then that person must be the

household respondent and the proxy respondent for the

remaining household members who are eligible for

interview. Always complete the household respondent's

interview BEFORE interviewing any other eligible

household members.

(Also see "Accepting a Nonhousehold Member as a Proxy

Respondent" later in this topic.)

Here are some examples:

! Both members of the Bosco household are suffering

from Alzheimer’s disease and a live-in nurse cares for

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-28

them. The nurse is over 18 years of age and has been

caring for John and Mary Bosco for the past 2 years.

In this situation, the nurse qualifies as a proxy

respondent for John and Mary Bosco. The nurse

would be the proxy respondent for the household

respondent and the individual respondent.

! The Jones household includes the reference person,

Gloria Jones, and her 78-year-old mother, Martha

Perkins. When you call the Jones household, only

Martha Perkins is at home. Since both Gloria and

Martha are eligible to be the household respondent,

you should make Martha the household respondent,

take her NCVS interview, and recontact the household

later to interview Gloria as an individual respondent.

! When you contact the Baxter household, the only

household member who meets the requirements for a

household respondent is away on a business trip and

will not return before closeout. However, his 16-year-

old son, Gary, is available when you call the

household. In this situation, you cannot take a proxy

interview for Gary's father and Gary cannot be the

household respondent. Since you must always

interview the household respondent first, you would

need to classify this case as a Type A noninterview.

Unacceptable Reasons for

Proxy Interviews

To reinforce the fact that proxy interviews must only be

taken as a "last resort," four situations are listed below in

which you may be tempted to take a proxy interview for an

individual respondent, but must NOT. If you experience

any of these situations, you must classify the household

member as a Type Z noninterview.

$ You make several attempts to contact a household

member during the interview period, but are never

successful in reaching him/her at home. A good

example of this would be a student who lives at home,

but is engaged in so many activities during the day and

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-29

evening that you are unable to set up an interview

before closeout.

$ A household member refuses to be interviewed even

after you try to persuade him/her to cooperate, but tells

you to get the information from another household

member.

$ You are unable to interview an eligible household

member, because another household member refuses

to let you conduct the interview. A good example of

this would be a parent who refuses to let you interview

his/her 15-year-old teenager.

$ You are unable to interview an eligible household

member, because he/she does not understand English

and an acceptable interpreter is not available.

Who Qualifies as a Proxy

Respondent?

If you must take a proxy interview and the reason is an

acceptable one, your first choice for a proxy respondent

would be:

! A household member who is at least 18 years old,

! Very knowledgeable of the proxy household member,

and

! Has already completed his/her own NCVS interview

by self response.

Two exceptions to the age requirement for a proxy

respondent are when:

! The household's reference person or one of the other

persons who owns or rents the home is under 18 years

of age

! All household members are under 18 years of age.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-30

Accepting a Nonhousehold

Member as a Proxy

Respondent

On rare occasions, a nonhousehold member can be a proxy

respondent. However, several requirements must be met

before you can allow a nonhousehold member to be a proxy

respondent.

ALL of the following conditions must exist before accepting

a nonhousehold proxy respondent:

# Due to physical or mental illness problems, you are

unable to interview ALL eligible household members

by self response.

# During the entire reference period (6 months prior to

the interview date), ALL eligible household members

at the sample address were unable to leave the housing

unit unless they were accompanied by the

nonhousehold person who cares for them.

# The nonhousehold caretaker must be the proxy

respondent for the entire household, including the

household respondent. This is the only situation in

which a household respondent's interview can be a

proxy interview.

# The nonhousehold proxy respondent must be at least

18 years of age.

# The nonhousehold proxy respondent must have cared

for all eligible household members during the entire

reference period. If the nonhousehold person did not

care for some or all of the household members for

more than a few days during the reference period, this

person does not qualify as a proxy respondent.

If you don't feel comfortable or are unsure about a

nonhousehold person as a proxy respondent, check with

your supervisor before conducting the proxy interview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-31

Protecting Confidentiality We have such strict requirements for accepting a

nonhousehold proxy respondent because we want to ensure

each sample household member's confidentiality.

When talking to a proxy respondent who is not a household

member, you need to be especially careful not to mention

any information which a proxy household member or other

household members provided in a previous enumeration

period. This includes the following types of information--

household composition, marital status, education, income,

and so forth.

To ensure confidentiality during a proxy interview with a

nonhousehold proxy respondent, always ask Control Card

Item 13a, regardless of the enumeration period. Then, when

asking Control Card Item 14, "I have listed...", only read

the names provided by the nonhousehold proxy respondent

in Item 13a. Don't mention or ask about other persons that

were listed in the household roster previously, but not

mentioned by the nonhousehold proxy respondent. Also, for

any Control Card items that need to be updated, just ask the

item without mentioning the information recorded from a

previous enumeration period.

Completing an INTER-

COMM for Each Proxy

Interview

Complete an INTER-COMM for each proxy interview that

you take, with the exception of proxy interviews for 12- or

13-year-old household members. Make sure to explain on

the INTER-COMM why it was necessary to take a proxy

interview for a sample household member. It is especially

important to write a detailed explanation when the proxy

interview was taken because the household member is

physically and/or mentally unable to answer the interview

questions.

Whenever you complete an INTER-COMM for a proxy

interview from a nonhousehold proxy respondent, make sure

that your explanation includes:

! Who the nonhousehold member is (a nurse, daughter,

neighbor, and so forth)

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-32

AND

! How much time the nonhousehold member spends

with the household member(s) under his/her care for

example, 8 hours a day or 70 hours a week).

After completing an INTER-COMM, attach it to the sample

household's NCVS-1.

Keeping Proxy Interviews to

a Minimum

Whenever possible, we want eligible respondents

(household members who are at least 12 years of age) to

answer the interview questions for themselves. By allowing

a proxy respondent to answer for a household member, you

run the risk of:

! Missing incidents

AND/OR

! Not getting sufficient details about reported incidents.

(Also see pages A2-12 through A2-18 for proxy respondent

procedures.)

Problems Conducting a

Proxy Interview

You may encounter situations in which a proxy interview is

acceptable, but the interview cannot be done because:

! You are unable to identify an acceptable proxy

respondent

! An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give you an

interview for a household member.

When this happens, you will need to classify the household

member as a Type Z noninterview.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-33

Under the following situation, you must classify the sample

address as a Type A noninterview:

! The entire household is under the care of a

nonhousehold person,

! All household members are unable to be interviewed

by self-response due to health or mental illness

problems,

! The nonhousehold caretaker refuses to give a proxy

interview for at least the household respondent.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-34

Topic 7. Bounding Interviews

Definition

Bounding interviews is an NCVS process to ensure that

previously reported incidents are not reported again. This

process is designed to help you prevent turning in a

completed NCVS-2 for an incident that:

! Was reported in a previous enumeration period and did

not actually occur again during the current

enumeration period.

! Was reported already by another household member

during the current enumeration period, such as a

household break-in and robbery in which no household

members were threatened, attacked, or personally

victimized during the incident. However, if any

household members were personally victimized during

a crime incident, we want you to complete a separate

NCVS-2 for each victimized household member.

(Also see Chapter 3, Topic 16, for more information

about completing NCVS-2s for victimized household

members.)

This process is actually a quality assurance measure

designed so that we provide a more accurate measure of

criminal victimization within NCVS sample households.

Bounding Information

(Item 32 on NCVS-500)

For each enumeration period, you will use Control Card

Items 32a through 32e to record specific facts about each

reported crime incident for a sample household. The facts

that you record in these items are referred to as "bounding

information."

When to Complete

Item 32

Enter the appropriate "bounding information" onto Control

Card Items 32a through 32e AFTER you have either:

! Left the household upon completion of some or all

interviews for the household,

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-35

! Ended a telephone call with the household upon

completion of some or all interviews for the

household.

Do not waste a respondent's time while you enter the

bounding information on the Control Card.

How to Bound NCVS

Interviews (Check Item W

on NCVS-2)

First enumeration period:

The last item you will complete on a Crime Incident Report,

NCVS-2, is Check Item W. Use Check Item W to

summarize all the pertinent facts about the reported incident

(who, what, where, when, and how). After completing your

summary report in Check Item W, you will see a field

representative instruction telling you to check the bounding

information on the back of the Control Card (Item 32).

Unless you make more than one contact with a first

enumeration period household, you will not see bounding

information entered in Control Card Item 32 for the first

enumeration period. If you interview all eligible household

members in one contact, then no bounding information will

be entered in Item 32 and you will not need to refer to

Item 32 after completing Check Item W on each NCVS-2

that you complete. Once you end the first contact with a

household, you will record information in Control Card

Item 32 for any incidents reported during the first contact

with a sample household.

Second through seventh enumeration periods

ALWAYS check the incidents reported for the current

interview against any information recorded in Control Card

Item 32:

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-36

! After completing your summary report in Check

Item W on the NCVS-2

AND

! While you are still with the respondent.

Carefully review all bounding information on the Control

Card to ensure that the NCVS-2 you just completed does not

duplicate one described already in Control Card Item 32. If

you suspect that a duplication has occurred, tactfully ask the

respondent whether the incidents are the same (for example,

same time, place, and circumstances) or separate crime

incidents (for example, same place and circumstances, but

different times).

Deleting Duplicate

Incidents

If you determine that you have completed an NCVS-2 for a

previously reported incident and have verified this fact with

the respondent, then you need to delete or "out-of-scope" the

NCVS-2 that you just completed and record the reason for

out-of-scoping the incident.

(See Topic 8 of this chapter for more details about "out-of-

scope" incidents.)

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-37

Topic 8. Out-of-Scope Incident

Definition

An "out-of-scope" incident is one that falls outside of the

limits defined for this survey. There are specific reasons for

targeting a reported incident as "out of scope," as well as

specific procedures for marking an incident "out of scope."

The information from out-of-scope incidents is not included

in the tabulations used to measure crime in the United

States.

You will mark most incidents out of scope after completing

the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2). However, when a

reported incident happens outside of the reference period,

you will stop and mark the incident out of scope before

completing the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2). This is the

only acceptable reason for not completing a crime incident

report for a reported incident. All other reported incidents,

both in scope and out of scope, require you to complete a

Crime Incident Report before marking the incident out of

scope. This procedure ensures that we do not miss any

crimes.

Understanding In-Scope vs.

Out-of-Scope Incidents for

the NCVS

Listed below are the criteria you need to follow when

deciding whether a reported incident is in scope or out of

scope for the NCVS:

Reference Period

! In scope: The reported incident must have happened

within the starting and ending dates for the household

member's reference period.

% Out of scope

: If a reported incident happened outside

of the starting and ending dates for a household

member's reference period, you must out of scope the

incident. In fact, as soon as you discover that the

incident occurred outside of the reference period, you

can stop completing the NCVS-2 and mark it

appropriately as an out-of- scope incident.

(Also see "How To Mark NCVS Forms for Out- of-Scope

Incidents" later in this topic.)

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-38

Example:

It is August 3, 2003 and you are interviewing

Carl Smith whose current reference period starts on

February 1, 2003 and ends on August 2, 2003. During

the interview, Carl reports a household theft that

happened earlier that day. This would be an out-of-

scope incident because it happened outside of the

respondent's reference period. Each respondent's

reference period always ends on the day prior to the

date of interview.

(Also see Topic 2 of this chapter for more information

about reference periods.)

Duplicate Incident

! In scope: Only one crime incident report is necessary

for each unique household crime incident reported in

which none of the household members were personally

victimized (For example, none of the household

members were assaulted, attacked, or threatened with

physical harm). A separate crime incident report is

required for each reported incident in which a

household member was personally victimized.

% Out of scope: When more than one household

member reports the same household crime, one of the

incidents must be marked out of scope. Always keep

the incident with the most complete Crime Incident

Report (NCVS-2).

A separate Crime Incident Report is required for each

unique incidence of personal victimization taken from

the household member who was victimized. If two

household members report the same incidence of

personal victimization, only keep the NCVS-2

completed with the household member who was

personally victimized during the incident and mark out

of scope the duplicate incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-39

Example 1:

Peggy Polk, the household respondent, reported that

someone attempted to steal their riding lawn mower.

However, Peggy's husband surprised the offender and

he ran away. When you interview Peggy's husband,

Bob, he also reports the same attempted theft of their

lawn mower. Since Peggy's crime incident report is

more complete than Bob's, mark Bob's NCVS-2 out of

scope.

Example 2:

Don Dwyer reported that he was attacked and robbed

while walking to his car after a movie. When you

interview his wife, Barbara, she also reports Don's

attack and robbery that she witnessed from in front of

the movie theater. Barbara was not personally

victimized during this incident. You would mark

Barbara's NCVS-2 out of scope, because she was not

personally victimized and her NCVS-2 is a duplicate

of Don's NCVS-2.

(Also see Topic 7 of this chapter for more information

about bounding information and duplicate incidents.)

Vandalism

! In scope: The vandalism questions only appear in the

household respondent's screen questions. We want to

keep incidents in which the household respondent was

attacked or threatened, any eligible household member

had something stolen, or an attempt was made to steal

something from a household member during the act(s)

of vandalism.

% Out of scope

: However, if a household respondent

reports an act of vandalism in which another eligible

household member was attacked or threatened with

physical harm, you would mark out of scope the

NCVS-2 completed with the household respondent.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-40

Then, you would complete an NCVS-2 with the

victimized household member himself/herself.

Example:

Sidney Soper, who is the household respondent,

reported that someone was spray painting symbols on

his son's car and when his son confronted the

offender, the offender punched him in the head and

kicked him in the stomach. After completing the

NCVS-2 with Sidney Soper, make sure to get a

completed NCVS-2 from his son, Steven, for this

attack. Then mark the NCVS-2 from Sidney out of

scope, since he was not personally victimized, no one

in the household had anything stolen, and no attempt

was made to steal anything.

(Also see Chapter 2, Topic 4, for more information about

vandalism.)

Personal Theft

! In scope: An eligible respondent reports an incident

of theft and the stolen property was owned solely by

eligible household members.

% Out of scope: When an eligible respondent reports an

incident of theft involving property that belongs solely

to nonhousehold members and no other crimes were

reported during the incident, you will mark the

incident out of scope.

Example:

While interviewing Jim Jones, the household

respondent, he reports an incident in which his friend's

golf bag and clubs were stolen from Jim's front yard

while his friend came in the house to get a drink.

Since the stolen property is owned solely by Jim's

friend and no other crime was committed during the

incident, you will mark this incident out of scope after

completing the NCVS-2.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-41

(Also see Chapter 3, Topic 11, for more information about

property ownership.)

Theft From a Household

Member Under 12 Years

of Age

! In scope: If an eligible household member reports the

theft of property belonging to a household member

under 12 years of age, then the stolen property must

have been taken away from one of the following

locations for the incident to stay in scope for the

NCVS and be considered stolen household property

(since the owner is under 12 years of age):

# Property was taken from the sample address.

# Property was taken from a vacation or second

home.

# Property was taken from a hotel or motel where

the sample household was staying temporarily.

% Out of scope: You must mark an incident out of

scope when an eligible household member reports the

theft of property belonging to a household member

under 12 years of age and the property was taken

from a location other than those listed above. In this

case, the stolen property cannot be considered

household property and, if no other crime occurred

during the incident, you must mark the incident out of

scope.

Example 1:

George Gates reported that his 10-year-old daughter's

bike was stolen from the driveway to their home and

no other crime was committed during the incident. In

this case, the incident is IN SCOPE for the NCVS.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-42

Example 2:

Lana Lomis reported that her 9-year-old son's go-cart

was stolen from his school parking lot, while he went

in the school to talk to a teacher. In this case, you

would mark this incident OUT OF SCOPE because

the property was taken from a location other than the

acceptable locations and no other crime occurred

during the incident.

(Also see Chapter 3, Topic 9, for more information about

thefts and attempted thefts.)

Business Theft

! In scope: When a respondent reports an incident

involving a theft of business property, the business

must be:

# Owned by an eligible household member and

# The business must be considered unrecognizable

(no sign or other indication on the property to

indicate the presence of a business to the general

public).

% Out of scope: The following incidents of theft of

business property are out of scope for the NCVS:

# A respondent reports a theft of business property

and the business is not owned by any of the

household members.

# A respondent reports a theft of business property

and the business is recognizable to the general

public by a sign or some other indication on the

property.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-43

Example 1:

Kelly Kallas is the owner of a small business out of

her home doing dressmaking and sewing alterations.

She wants to keep her business small, so she doesn't

advertise and most of her customers are relatives,

friends, and neighbors. She has three different sewing

machines which she considers to be business property.

Kelly reported an incident in which someone illegally

broke into her home and stole household items, along

with all three sewing machines. In this case, the

incident is IN SCOPE because, in addition to the

business being unrecognizable, there was an illegal

entry and some household items were also stolen.

Even if this business was recognizable, this incident

would still be in scope because other crimes happened

during the incident.

Example 2:

Stephanie Slater owns a small dress shop in a local

shopping center. This dress shop has a visible sign at

the entrance and is listed on the shopping center sign,

too. Stephanie reported that an attempt was made to

steal several skirts during normal store hours. In this

case, you would mark the incident OUT OF SCOPE

since the business is recognizable and no other crimes

happened during the incident.

(Also see Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more information about

recognizable and unrecognizable businesses.)

Crimes Not Measured by

the NCVS

! In scope: The following types of crimes are measured

by the NCVS and reported incidents involving these

crimes would be in scope:

# Thefts and attempted thefts

# Break ins and illegal entries and attempted break

ins and illegal entries

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-44

# Attacks and attempted attacks

# Face-to-face threats to physically harm a

household member

# Sexual assault and rape and attempted sexual

assault and rape.

% Out of scope: The following types of crimes are not

measured by the NCVS and reported incidents

involving these crimes would be out of scope:

& Murder

& Kidnapping

& Fraud

& Public drunkenness

& Drug abuse

& Prostitution

& Illegal gambling

& Con games

& Blackmail

Example:

Tommy Tindall reported an incident in which he was

a victim of a con game. He thought that he was

investing money in a legitimate company and, after

losing $7,000, he discovered that it was all a big con

game to steal money from unsuspecting clients. In

this case, you would mark the incident out of scope

because con games are not measured by the NCVS.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-45

(See Chapter 2, Topic 2, for more information about

NCVS crimes.)

Offender Is a Police

Officer

! In scope: If a respondent reports an incident in which

the offender is a police officer and the officer exceeded

his authority as a police officer or used excessive

force, then the incident is in scope for the NCVS.

% Out of scope

: However, if a respondent reports an

incident in which the offender is a police officer and

the officer's actions during the incident were within his

authority as a police officer or he/she was acting in the

line of duty, then you would mark the incident out of

scope.

Example 1:

Monica Matthews reported an incident in which she

was stopped while driving for not wearing her seat

belt. During the traffic stop, the officer handcuffed

her for no apparent reason. If the police officer did

exceed his authority in this situation, then the incident

would be IN SCOPE for the NCVS.

Example 2:

Donald Downs reported an incident in which he was

handcuffed and searched for drugs and weapons,

while he was buying cocaine for a friend in an alley.

In this case, the police officer was acting in the line of

duty and you would mark the incident OUT OF

SCOPE.

(See Chapter 3, Topic 21, for more information about

incidents involving police officers.)

Offender is a Spouse of

the Respondent

! In scope: If a respondent reports an incident in which

his/her ex-spouse stole property owned by the

respondent, then the incident is in scope for the NCVS.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-46

% Out of scope: However, if a respondent reports an

incident in which his/her spouse stole property that is

owned jointly by both spouses who are legally

separated, but not yet divorced, then you would mark

the incident out of scope.

Example:

Edward Easton reported an incident in which his

soon-to-be ex-spouse came in their house while he

was on a business trip and stole all of their computer

equipment. Since their divorce was not final at the

time of the incident and the computer equipment was

jointly owned, you will mark the incident OUT OF

SCOPE if no other crimes occurred during the

incident.

(See Chapter 3, Topic 11, for more information about

property ownership.)

Completing an NCVS-2 for

an Out-of-Scope Incident

Once you start filling out an NCVS-2 for a reported incident,

you must complete the entire Crime Incident Report. There

is only one exception to this rule. As soon as you discover

that an incident occurred either before the starting date for

the reference period or on the day of the interview, you can

stop and mark the incident out of scope without finishing the

NCVS-2.

It is possible that you will be unable to determine that an

incident happened outside of the reference period while

completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire. If this

happens, you will normally discover that the incident is

outside of the reference period when you ask Item 3 on the

NCVS-2. This item determines the exact month and year

that the incident occurred.

How to Mark NCVS Forms

for Out-of-Scope Incidents

If you need to make an incident out of scope, mark the

following forms as instructed below:

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 1

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-47

NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report

For each incident that you must mark out-of-scope, make the

following entries on the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2:

! Using the "Notes" space in the top corner of the

NCVS-2's cover page, print "O/S" and the reason

for making the incident out-of-scope. Make sure

you always enter both "O/S" AND the reason.

! Draw a large "X" from corner to corner on each page

of the NCVS-2.

NCVS-1, Basic Screen

Questionnaire

Do NOT count any out-of-scope incidents in the total

number of completed NCVS-2s that you enter in Item 15c

on the NCVS-1.

Adjust the "Number of times" entry for the screen question

at which the household member reported the out-of-scope

incident. If the out-of-scope incident was the only incident

recorded for the screen question, change the "Yes" answer to

"No" in part (b) to show that no incidents of that type

happened during the reference period.

Adjust the counts in Check Item G to delete the out-of-scope

incident for the household member who reported it. If the

out-of-scope incident was the only entry in Check Item G,

mark the "No entries transcribed below" box after deleting

the "Number of times" entry.

NCVS-500, Control Card Do NOT make any entries in Control Card Item 32

(bounding information) for an out-of-scope incident.

Part C, Chapter 1 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

C1-48

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-1

Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

Table of Topics

Topic Page

1 Overview of Chapter 2 C2-2

2 Crimes Measured by the NCVS C2-3

3 Threats C2-7

4 Vandalism C2-10

5 Recognizable/Unrecognizable

Businesses C2-12

6 Ownership of Motor Vehicles C2-20

7 Months/Years Living at Address C2-23

8 Frequency of Household Moves C2-27

9 Computer-Related Incidents C2-29

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-2

Topic 1. Overview of Chapter 2

The Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) is the instrument that you use to

determine if any eligible household members have been victimized during the

reference period. As you use the NCVS-1 to screen for crimes, you ask a series

of detailed questions about various types of victimizations, including situations in

which crimes could occur. However, not all crimes reported by respondents are

measured by the NCVS. Topic 2 covers crimes measured by the NCVS.

As you screen for crime incidents, you need to understand the concepts that are

associated with NCVS crimes. For example, a respondent may report that he or

she was threatened over the telephone, but the NCVS only includes threats made

directly by the offender in person to the respondent. Topic 3 covers threats.

Although the NCVS does measure some crimes committed during an act of

vandalism, vandalism by itself is not measured by the NCVS. Topic 4 covers

vandalism.

When respondents report thefts from their businesses, it is important to determine

whether these businesses are unrecognizable. Not all thefts from businesses

owned by eligible respondents are measured by the NCVS. Only thefts from

businesses that are NOT advertised with signs or other visible indications of a

business to the general public are included in the NCVS. Topic 5 covers

recognizable/unrecognizable businesses. When respondents report motor

vehicle thefts, the NCVS measures these thefts if the thefts happened during the

reference period and the vehicles were owned by eligible household members at

the time of each incident. If a stolen vehicle is recovered and then sold before the

interview date, the NCVS still includes the theft. Topic 6 covers ownership of

motor vehicles.

Besides screening for crimes, the NCVS-1 also includes questions about the

sample household, such as questions about a household's mobility. Topic 7

covers months/years living at address, and Topic 8 covers frequency of

household moves.

Lastly, Topic 9 covers the personal use of computers, the use of computers to

operate a home business, and computer-related incidents. A computer-related

incident by itself is not measured by the NCVS.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-3

Topic 2. Crime Measured by the NCVS

NCVS Crime Categories and

Types

The NCVS data collected from sample households can be

separated into two main crime categories: personal crimes

and property crimes.

Personal Crimes

Personal crimes include attempted and completed crimes

that involve direct contact between the victim and the

offender(s). Personal crimes can fall under one of the

following subcategories:

! Violent crimes

Listed below are the types of personal crimes that are

considered violent crimes if they are attempted or

completed:

! Rape

! Sexual assault

! Personal robbery

! Assault

! Verbal threats of rape, sexual assault, personal

robbery, and assault

! Personal theft

Listed below are the types of personal crimes that are

considered crimes of theft if they are attempted or

completed:

! Purse snatching

! Pocket picking

A personal theft crime involves an offender taking or

attempting to take property or cash directly from the

victim by stealth, but without force or threat of force.

Property Crimes

Property crimes include attempted and completed crimes

that do not involve any direct contact with a sample

household member. Listed below are the types of crimes

that are considered property crimes:

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-4

! Forcible entry

! Burglary, with forcible entry

! Burglary, with illegal entry and no force

! Motor vehicle theft

! Theft

Personal Crimes vs.

Property Crimes

Personal crimes involve direct contact between offenders

and eligible household members during an incident,

regardless of whether the crimes were attempted or

completed. If more than one eligible household member

was attacked, verbally threatened, or had property or cash

taken directly from them during the same incident, you need

to complete a separate Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for

each eligible household member who was personally

victimized during the incident.

Example:

The Trevor brothers, L1 and L2, are both eligible

household members. While they were waiting together in

line to enter a movie theater, someone threatened to stab

both of them if they did not hand over their wallets. Since

both household members were threatened with physical

harm, you need to complete two separate Crime Incident

Reports, NCVS-2s--one for L1 and another for L2.

Since property crimes do not involve any personal contact

between a household member and an offender, you only

need to complete one Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for

each incident, even though more than one household

member may report the same property crime incident.

Example:

During the reference period, the Burton's house was

illegally entered and burglarized while they were out of

town for a wedding. While conducting the screening

interview, L1and L2 both reported the same incident of

illegal entry and burglary. Only one completed NCVS-2

is required for this property crime incident.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-5

Let's say that you completed two NCVS-2s for the property

crime described above, one for L1 and another for L2, and

then you discover that they cover the same property crime

incident. If this happens:

! Only keep one Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2,

usually the one reported by the household respondent

who is L1 in the example above and mark the other

NCVS-2 out-of-scope.

! Change the screen item answer for L2 from "Yes" to

"No."

! Print "Duplicate of incident reported by L1" in the

incident description space for L2's screen item.

! Delete or correct the "Number of times" entry for L2's

screen item.

Crimes Not Measured by

NCVS

The NCVS does not collect information about the following

types of crimes:

" Murder (because there is no victim to interview)

" Kidnapping

" Any crimes against recognizable businesses, regardless

of whether the business is or is not operated from a

sample address

" Con games and fraud

" Blackmail

The following crimes against society also are excluded from

the NCVS:

" Public drunkenness

" Drug abuse

" Prostitution

" Illegal gambling

If a respondent reports a crime not measured by the NCVS,

complete an NCVS-2 so we do not miss any other crime that

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-6

is measured by the NCVS and could have been committed

during the same incident. If the only crime committed is one

NOT measured by the NCVS, you must out-of-scope the

incident after completing the NCVS-2.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed

instructions on how to out-of-scope an incident.)

Classifying NCVS Crimes

Each incident can be classified as only ONE type of crime. If

an incident could classify as more than one type of crime,

then the incident will be classified as the most serious type

of crime that occurred during the incident. For example, if a

respondent was raped and had her purse stolen during the

same incident, the incident would classify as a completed

rape, rather than a completed purse snatching.

After the following tasks are completed, a computer

program is used to classify each incident into a specific type

of NCVS crime:

! All out-of-scope incidents for the NCVS have been

deleted,

! Any editing discrepancies have been resolved, and

! The appropriate data have been keyed.

Using a computer program designed to classify incidents by

type of crime ensures a consistent and standardized

classification of incidents.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-7

Topic 3. Threats

Definition

A threat must meet the following conditions to be acceptable

as a threat for the NCVS:

! The threat must be delivered verbally and in person

from the offender to the respondent.

AND

! The threat must involve the potential for physical harm

to the respondent.

Examples of Acceptable

Threats

The following examples are acceptable threats for the

NCVS:

Example #1:

Julie was withdrawing money at an ATM when an

offender walked up behind her with a knife in his

hand and told her to hand over the money she just

withdrew or else he would stab her.

Example #2:

An older student and Bobby (who is 16 years old)

were arguing in the school parking lot. During the

argument, the older student threatened to break

Bobby's arm if he did not lend him his car that

afternoon.

Example #3:

Ted heard a noise just outside his front door. He

went to the door and called out, "Who's there?"

The woman outside the front door yelled back,

"Let me in now or I'll come to your shop and kill

you."

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-8

Threats Not Included for the

NCVS

Do NOT accept the following types of threats as threats for

the NCVS:

! Threats to physical harm the respondent delivered over

the telephone or a FAX machine,

! Threats to physically harm the respondent delivered in

a letter or an "email" message,

! Threats to physically harm the respondent delivered by

someone else for an offender,

! Threats to physically harm a household member who is

under 12 years of age,

! Threats to steal something from a household member

or damage something belonging to a household

member, without a threat to physical harm to the

household member,

! Threats to physically harm household pets without a

threat to physical harm a household member (include

thefts of household pets), and

! Incidents in which a household member felt

threatened, but an offender did not verbally threaten to

physically harm the household member.

Examples of Unacceptable

Threats

The following examples are unacceptable threats for the

NCVS:

Example #1:

Frank and Mike are good friends. Mike asked Frank

to deliver a threat to his ex-girlfriend, Diane, for him.

Frank met Diane at her office and passed on Mike's

threat to beat her up if she continued dating Tony.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-9

Example #2:

Barbara was driving at night on a dark country road

when she noticed a big truck close to her back

bumper. The truck driver honked, flashed his

headlights, and then passed her at a high rate of speed.

Barbara claimed that she felt threatened during that

incident, although no words were spoken between her

and the truck driver.

Example #3:

Nick sent an e-mail message to Sam warning him to

stop parking in his company parking space or he

would knock him unconscious.

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-10

Topic 4. Vandalism

Definition

For the NCVS, vandalism is the deliberate and malicious

damage to or destruction of property owned by either the

household respondent or another sample household member.

Purpose of the Vandalism

Questions

The vandalism questions are only included in the NCVS-1,

Basic Screen Questionnaire, and are only asked of the

household respondent. These questions are designed to:

! Measure the kinds and amount of vandalism that may

have occurred during the 6 months prior to the

interview,

AND

! Determine whether the household respondent was

attacked or threatened during the act(s) of vandalism,

! Something was stolen or an attempt was made to steal

something that belonged to the household respondent

or another household member during the act(s) of

vandalism.

You only need to complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident

Report, when the household respondent reports that an

NCVS crime occurred during the act of vandalism. Do NOT

assume that an NCVS crime occurred during an act of

vandalism.

Acts of Vandalism With No

NCVS Crime

The following acts of vandalism by themselves do not

require the completion of an NCVS-2:

! Spray painting the windows at a sample address.

! Smashing the mailbox at a sample address.

! Breaking a bird bath in the sample household's yard.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-11

! Cutting the tires on a household member's car while

parked in the driveway.

Acts of Vandalism With an

NCVS Crime

The following acts of vandalism require the completion of

an NCVS-2 because an NCVS crime was committed during

these acts of vandalism:

! An offender spray painted the household respondent's

garage door, broke the lock, illegally entered the

garage, and stole a tool box full of tools.

! As the household respondent was walking back to his

car in a store parking lot, he saw an offender scratch

his car door. When he confronted the offender, the

offender punched him in the stomach and ran away.

! A household respondent happened to see a teenager hit

her mail box with a baseball bat. She ran out of her

garage and confronted the teenager. The teenager

threatened to beat her up if she told his parents.

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-12

Topic 5. Recognizable and Unrecognizable Businesses

Definitions

When a business is operated from a sample address, we

only collect information about reported incidents

involving the business, such as a theft of business

property, when the business is considered unrecognizable.

For this reason, it is important that you understand the

differences between an unrecognizable and a recognizable

business.

For the NCVS, an unrecognizable business must meet

ALL of the following criteria:

! It must be an establishment selling products or

providing services for a fee that is operated by a

household member from the sample address.

! There must be NO indication or sign announcing

the business to anyone from outside the sample

address, such as on a front door, window, garage

door, mail box, or a free standing sign in the front

yard.

For the NCVS, a recognizable business must meet ALL

of the following criteria:

! It must be a commercial establishment operated by a

household member either at the sample address or

in another structure from which products are sold or

services are provided for a fee.

! The business has a sign announcing its existence

and the sign is clearly visible to the general public

from OUTSIDE the business.

! When the business is operated from the sample

address, the sign announcing the business must be

located on the sample household's property, such as

a sign on a front door, window, garage door, mail

box, or a free standing sign in the front yard.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-13

Any crimes committed against a recognizable business,

such as an attempted or actual illegal entry of a

recognizable business or an attempted or actual theft of

property belonging to a recognizable business, are NOT

included in the NCVS. However, we do include in the

NCVS incidents in which a household member was

verbally threatened or harmed in some way or had

personal property taken while at a recognizable business.

Here are some examples of incidents that require the

completion of an NCVS-2 because a household member

was verbally threatened or harmed in some way or had

personal property taken while at a recognizable business:

Example #1:

A robbery took place while Monica was buying milk

at her local convenience store. During the robbery,

the offender threatened to kill her if she did not hand

over her purse. She handed over her purse without

saying anything.

Example #2:

While Dave was picking up his prescription at his

local pharmacy, someone stole his wallet from his

jacket.

Example #3:

John operates a recognizable insurance agency from

his home. Last week, someone forcibly entered his

home and stole property belonging to both the

business and to John personally.

Identifying Businesses

Operated From the

Sample Address

Page 2 of the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1)

includes two items that are asked only of the household

respondent to determine if:

# Anyone in the household operates a business from

the sample address (Item 34) and, if the answer is

"Yes,"

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-14

# Whether there is a sign on the premises or some

other indication to the general public that a business

is operated from the sample address (Item 35).

A "Yes" answer in Item 35 indicates that a recognizable

business is operated from the sample address. A "No"

answer in Item 35 indicates that an unrecognizable

business is operated from the sample address.

Unacceptable Signs of a

Recognizable Business

Do not consider the following indicators as proof that a

recognizable business is operated from a sample address:

" A business advertisement appearing on the Internet

or in a newspaper or telephone book.

" Any form of motor vehicle that has a business logo

painted on it, such as a car, van, or truck parked

either in the driveway or on the street outside the

sample address.

Special Situations Farms and ranches:

A farm or ranch should be considered a recognizable

business when either of these conditions exist:

! A sample address is on a farm or ranch AND there is

a sign somewhere on the property that identifies the

farm or ranch by a specific name, such as "Desert

Creek Dude Ranch."

! A sample address is on a farm or ranch that has a

produce stand by the roadside of the property.

If the household respondent tells you in Item 34 that

someone in the household operates a business from the

sample address, but the farm or ranch does not have a sign

or roadside produce stand on the property, mark the "No"

answer in Item 35 on the NCVS-1, and consider the

business to be unrecognizable.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-15

Apartments:

When a household member manages an apartment

complex in which he/she resides, consider this as a

business operated from the sample address. If the

following conditions exist, consider the business to be

recognizable:

! A sign is present outside the apartment of a resident

manager, resident owner, or apartment

superintendent stating his/her job

! A sign is visible somewhere in the complex directing

people to this person's specific apartment because of

his/her job.

If either situation exists, exclude any crime incidents

involving thefts of property owned only by the apartment

complex, such as furnishings from a furnished apartment

or any hall decorations. However, you would complete an

NCVS-2 if any personal items belonging to the respondent

or other household members were stolen.

When no visible sign exists in the apartment complex or

outside the resident manager's apartment identifying

his/her position, the "No" answer should be marked in

Item 35, indicating an unrecognizable business. In this

situation, include any reported crime incidents involving

property owned by the apartment complex and reported by

the property's owner, such as furnishings stolen from a

furnished apartment.

Motor Vehicles:

Item 38 on the NCVS-1 is only asked of the household

respondent and asks:

"What was the TOTAL number of cars, vans, trucks,

motorcycles, or other motor vehicles owned by you or

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-16

any other member of this household during the last

6 months? Include those you no longer own."

When a respondent operates a recognizable business from

the sample address and has a business vehicle, only

include the business vehicle in the count for Item 38 if it is

used also for personal use. If the vehicle is used only

for the recognizable business, do NOT include it in the

count for Item 38.

If the respondent operates an unrecognizable business

from the sample address and has a business vehicle, it does

not matter if the vehicle is used only for the business. In

this case, the business vehicle would be included in the

count for Item 38, regardless of the vehicle's usage.

Identifying Ownership of

Stolen Property

It is possible that a respondent could report a crime

incident in which property was stolen that belonged to the

household, a household member, and an unrecognizable

business operated from the sample address. When writing

the Summary Report in Check Item W of the NCVS-2, it

is important to identify separately who owned the stolen

items.

For example, during the same incident:

! A big screen television valued at $1,200 belonging to

the entire household was stolen,

! Three rings valued at $3,500 belonging to the wife of

the reference person were stolen, and

! Five watches were stolen that were valued at $4,000

and belonged to the unrecognizable jewelry repair

business operated from the sample address.

When describing the type and value of stolen property, do

not lump together stolen property that belongs to the

respondent or his/her household with stolen property

belonging to the respondent's business. If the stolen

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-17

property belongs to a respondent's unrecognizable

business, describe the type and value of the business

property separately from the stolen property belonging to

the respondent or his/her household. Make sure to state

clearly that the stolen property belongs to an

unrecognizable business.

Handling Crime Incidents

Involving Businesses

The following examples show when to report incidents

involving businesses, as well as what parts of incidents

should not be reported on the NCVS-2:

# A respondent owns a recognizable candy store that is

not operated from the sample address. A theft

occurred at the candy store in which $100 was taken

from the register and $30 was taken from the

respondent's wallet.

You would--Accept the incident in the screen

question and complete an NCVS-2 for the $30 theft

from the respondent's wallet. Do NOT include

information about the theft from the register when

completing the NCVS-2.

# A respondent works at a recognizable department

store that was robbed. During the course of the

robbery, the respondent was shot in the arm with a

handgun and $500 was stolen from the register at

which she was working.

You would--Accept the incident in the screen

question and complete an NCVS-2 for the personal

injury to the respondent. Do NOT include

information about the theft from the register when

completing the NCVS-2.

# A respondent owns a recognizable hair salon and

also operates part of the business from her home

(which appears to be unrecognizable). Someone

broke into her home at the sample address and stole

merchandise belonging to the business.

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-18

You would--Accept the incident in the screen

question and complete an NCVS-2 for the household

break in. Do NOT include information about the

theft, because the stolen property belongs to a

recognizable business.

# A respondent operates a recognizable lawn mower

repair service from his home. When he and his

family were on vacation, someone broke into their

home and stole some household items, as well as

business tools and a few lawn mowers from his

business.

You would--Accept the incident in the screen

question. When completing the NCVS-2, only

include information about the household break in

and the stolen household items. Do NOT include

information about the stolen business tools and lawn

mowers from the recognizable business.

# Someone broke into the respondent's recognizable

shoe store after it was closed for the day and stole

several shoes, boots, and purses. The respondent did

not discover the incident until the next morning

when she opened the store.

You would--NOT accept the incident and would

NOT complete an NCVS-2, because the stolen

property belongs to a recognizable business and no

sample household members were threatened or

injured during the incident.

# A respondent operates a recognizable apartment

house at a beach resort that contains beach rental

units. The respondent reported that someone broke

into and vandalized two apartments, during the off

season when the apartment house was vacant. The

offender(s) also stole electronic equipment and

appliances.

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-19

You would--NOT accept the incident and would

NOT complete an NCVS-2. Since this is a

recognizable business, do NOT keep the break in

and theft information. Also, since no sample

household members were threatened or injured

during the incident, you do not need to complete an

NCVS-2.

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-20

Topic 6. Ownership of Motor Vehicles

Definition

For the NCVS, motor vehicles owned by household

members are any vehicles that:

# Can be legally tagged, registered, and used as a

means of transportation on most roads and highways

(such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, and recreation

vehicles/motor homes) and

# Were owned by a sample household member during

the 6 months prior to the interview (reference

period), regardless of whether the vehicle was sold,

given away, junked, stolen, or abandoned before the

interview date.

Item 38 on the NCVS-1

Item 38 on the NCVS-1 is asked only of the household

respondent as part of his/her screening interview. The

question for Item 38 reads as follows:

"What was the TOTAL number of cars, vans, trucks,

motorcycles, or other motor vehicles owned by you or

any other member of this household during the last

6 months? Include those you no longer own."

If the household respondent gives you an answer of one or

more vehicles, you will mark the appropriate box in Item

38 and continue with the screen question in Item 39a,

which asks about any incidents involving motor vehicles

owned by the sample household.

If the household respondent says that the household does

not own any motor vehicles and has not owned any

vehicles during the last 6 months, mark Box 0 (zero)

“None” and skip to Item 40a.

Household Respondent

Refuses

If you encounter a household respondent who refuses to

tell you the number of vehicles owned by the household,

tell the respondent that we ask this question so we know

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-21

whether or not to ask about any crime incidents involving

household vehicles.

If the household respondent still refuses to answer your

question, print "REF" in the answer space for Item 38.

Even though a household respondent may refuse to answer

Item 38, you are still required to complete Item 39. You

will need to reword the question in Item 39 as follows:

"During the last 6 months, were any vehicles that you or

your household may have owned..."

Do NOT skip Item 39 when Item 38 is refused.

Which Vehicles Do You

Include?

Under the following circumstances, INCLUDE a motor

vehicle in the count of motor vehicles for Item 38:

! Vehicles used for private and/or business purposes if

the vehicles are owned by a household member who

also operates an unrecognizable business from the

sample address.

! Vehicles used partially for private purposes if the

vehicles are owned by a household member who also

operates a recognizable business. You may need to

ask the household respondent whether or not a

vehicle is used only for business purposes when you

are unsure about its usage.

! Vehicles that are leased by a household member for

more than one month AND for which a household

member is responsible in case of theft.

Which Vehicles Do You

Exclude?

Under the following circumstances, EXCLUDE a motor

vehicle from the count of motor vehicles for Item 38:

" Vehicles that are used SOLELY for a recognizable

business operated by a household member.

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-22

" Vehicles that are loaned to a household member

from someone who is not a household member or

from a business owned by someone who is not a

sample household member.

" Vehicles that are kept at school and used by students

living away from the sample address while attending

school, even if the parents of the students own the

vehicles and live at the sample address.

" Vehicles that are rented or leased by a household

member for a short period of time (less than one

month).

NCVS-550 (2/2003) Part C, Chapter 2

Screening for Crimes

C2-23

Topic 7. Months/Years Living at Address

Definition

For the NCVS, "Months/years living at address" means the

most current continuous length of time the household

member has lived at the sample address.

Example:

John and Beth lived at the sample address for a year

before their trial separation. While they were

separated for 2 months, John left the sample address

and lived with his brother at another address. After

the 2-month separation ended, John moved back

into the sample address and has continued to reside

there continuously for the past 4 years. In this

situation, the length of time John has lived at the

sample address would be 4 years.

Items Using This Concept Control Card Item 25c and Item 33a on the Basic

Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, both ask:

How long have you lived at this address?

For Control Card Item 25c, you will always ask this

question of the household respondent for each eligible

household member during every enumeration period,

regardless of whether the household member was

interviewed.

For Item 33a on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, you

have the option of either verifying the entry in Control

Card Item 25c or asking the question again in Item 33a.

Check Item A on the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2,

asks you to refer to the answer entered in Item 33a on the

NCVS-1 and indicate on the NCVS-2 whether or not the

household member has lived at the sample address:

! More than 6 months (7 months or longer)

Part C, Chapter 2 NCVS-550 (2/2003)

Screening for Crimes

C2-24

! 6 months or less.

When you are not sure how to mark Check Item A on the

NCVS-2, you can ask the following question of the

respondent:

Have you lived at this address for more than 6 months?

When to Probe

For most NCVS interviews, you will just accept the

answer given by the respondent without probing after you

ask, "How long have you lived at this address?".

However, if a respondent does ask you to explain this

question or the answer given seems incorrect, probe by

telling him/her that we want to know how many months or

years he/she has resided continuously as a household

member at the sample address. Probing will help ensure

that you enter an accurate length of time in:

! Item 25c on the Control Card,

! Item 33a on the NCVS-1, and

! Check Item A on the NCVS-2.

If a respondent's answer is either too vague or given to you

in a range of years or months, you will need to probe for a